U! I' 

'j ; 






J, |^ 



,H i ^ 



^' '*- ,> 






LIGHT ARTILLERY 

Hrill Regulations, 



UNITED STATES ARMY. 



Adopted Octob-gr.Si '1891. ^ 



fe. 



WASHINGTON : 

GOVERNMENT PRINTINGS OFFICE. 
1891. 






War Department, 

Washington, October 3, 1891. 

A board of officers consisting of Lieut. Col= John C. Bates, Twen- 
tieth Infantry; Lieut. Col. George B. Sanford, Ninth Cavalry ; Mai. 
Henry. C. Hasbrouck, Fourth Artillery; Maj. John C. Gilmore, 
Assistant Adjutant General; Capt. Joseph T. Haskell, Twenty-third 
Infantry; Capt. Edward S. Godfrey, Seventh Cavalry; and Capt. 
James M. Lancaster, Third Artillery, with First Lieut. George 
Andrews, Tv/enty-fif th Infantry, as recorder at first, and later First 
Lieut. John T. French, jr.. Fourth Artillery, having prepared a 
system of Drill Regulations for Light Artillery, which has been ap- 
proved by the President, it is herewith published for the informa- 
tion and government of the Army, and for the observance of the 
militia of the United States. 

With a view to insure uniformity throughout the Army, all light 
artillery exercises and maneuvers not embraced in this system are 
prohibited, afUd those herein prescribed will be strictly observed. 
\: '-,: : ■ R'e'dfIeLd Proctor, 

, ; Secretary of War. 



D. of 0. 



LIGHT ARTILLERY 
DRILL iiegulatio:n^s. 



ge:n^eeal peinciples. 

1. The commmands of the instructor are given for the 
execution of the movements toward both the right and 
left flanks. The movements are explained toward but 
1 oiu *nk, it being- only necessary to substitute the word 
I '^k ' for "right," or the reverse, to have the explana- 
, tJi'-' f the corresponding movement toward the other 
t fl.-tvik. In exceptions to this rule, the movements are 
' i V ^ u ; ined for both flanks . 

All movements which are not prescribed from a 
. .- >r on the march may be executed either at a halt 
j or r irching. 

I 3. All movements on foot not specially excepted may 
•be ecuted in double time. If the movement be from a 
; hal or when marching in quick time, the command 
' tfdud e time precedes the command march : if niarching in 
' dov le time, the command double time is omitted. 

All mounted movements not specially excepted may 

. iecuted at a trot or gallop. To execute a movement 

j at b trot or gallop, when not marching at these gaits, 

^ the 3ommand trot or ga/iop precedes the command march; 

if i drching at a trot or gallop, to execute a movement at 

^ the same gait, the command trot or ga/lop is omitted. 

• 5. In mounted movements, the gait should be increased 

progressively, the trot being executed from a walk, the 

gallop from a trot. When marching at a gallop, the gait 

will be decreased to a trot, and then to a walk, before 

halting; when marching at a trot, the same rule applies, 

halting from a trot being considered an exceptional 

movement. 

3 



4 GENERAL PRINCIPLES. 

6. In those movements where the guide may be either 
right or left, the words " right or left " in the commands 
are in parentheses, thus: [right ov left). 

•y. When for purposes of instruction any movement is 
divided into motions, or executed in detail, the last sylla- 
ble of the command determines the prompt performance 
of the first motion, and the commands, Two, Three, 
etc., that of the other motions. 

8. To execute the movements in detail, the instructor 
first commands: By the numbers; all movements divided 
into motions are then executed as above explained until 
he commands: Without the numbers. 

Commands. 

9. There are two kinds. 

The preparatory command, such as forward, which indi- 
cates the movement that is to be executed. 

The command of execution, such as March, or Halt, 
or, in the manual of arms, the part of the command that 
causes the execution. 

The preparatory commands are distinguished by italics, 
those of execution by Capitals. 

The tone of command is animated, distinct, and of a 
loudness proportioned to the number of men under in- 
struction. 

Each preparatory command is pronounced in an ascend- 
ing tone of voice, but always in such a manner that the 
command of execution may be more energetic and ele- 
vated. 

On foot, the command of execution is pronounced in a 
tone firm and brief. 

In mounted movements, the preparatory commands 
are more or less prolonged to insure their being heard; 
the command of execution is always prolonged. 

A well-defined pause should separate the preparatory 
command and the command of execution; also the pre- 
paratory commands when there are two or more. 



GENERAU PRINCIPLES. -5 

To secure uniformity, the captain practices the officers 
and non-commissioned officers in giving commands. 

Trumpet calls and saber signals should be frequently 
used in instruction in order that officers and men may 
readily recognize them. 

Elementary Drills. 

10. Thorough training in the School of the Soldier, 
Dismounted and Mounted, of the Cannoneer and the 
Driver, is the basis of efficiency. Instruction will be pro- 
gressive, and will be first given to small squads, which 
are made larger as the instruction advances. 

The officer who superintends the instruction will note 
the intelligence of the recruits, and, as the instruction 
progresses, will group them according to proficiency, in 
order that all may advance as rapidly as their abilities 
will permit. Those who lack aptitude and quickness will 
be separated from the others and placed under experi- 
enced drillmasters, who will be cautioned to be patient 
and diligent in giving instruction, and to avoid i:^sorting 
to ridicule or abuse. 

Generally, sergeants and corporals are the instructors, 
and are supervised by an officer; but the captain should 
occasionally require lieutenants to act as instructors in 
the elementary drills. 

The .instructor will always maintain a military bearing, 
and by a quiet, firm demeanor set a proper example to 
the men. 

As the recruits become somewhat proficient in the 
School of the Soldier. Mounted and Dismounted, and of 
the Cannoneer, the officer superintending the instruction 
may call upon them in turn to drill the squad or detach- 
ment in his presence, and to correct any errors that may 
be observed; this will increase their interest, hasten their 
instruction, and facilitate judgment upon their fitness for 
the duties of non-commissioned officers subsequently. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDTEE DISMOUI^^TED. 

11. This school has for its object the instruction of the 
individual recruit and afterward that of the squad, and 
must be taught with the greatest care. 

Short and frequent drills are preferable to long ones, 
which exhaust the attention of both instructor and re- 
cruit. 

While executing the setting-up exercises, the in- 
structor may require the blouses to be unbuttoned. Prom 
the beginning, the instructor will insist on a smart ap- 
pearance of the recruits, and will exact that their cloth- 
ing be clean and neatly adjusted. 

INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION. 

12. For this instruction, a few recruits, usually not ex- 
ceeding four, are placed in single rank facing to the front, 
two yards apart. 

The instructor explains each movement in as few words 
as possible, at the same time executing it himself. He 
requires the recruits to take by themselves the proper 
positions, and does not touch them for the purpose of cor- 
recting them except when they are unable to correct 
themselves; he holds their attention by an animated tone, 
and does not keep them too long at the same movement, 
though each should be understood before passing to an- 
other, and only exacts by degrees the desired precision 
and uniformity. 

After the movements have been properly executed in 
the order laid down, the instructor no longer confines 
himself to that order, but changes it, in order to develop 
the intelligence of the recruits. 

When the execution of a movement is improperly be- 
g-un, and the instructor wishes to begin it anew for the 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 7 

purpose of correcting it, he commands: As you were, at 
which the movement ceases and the former position is 
resumed. 

Position of the Soldier, or Attention. 

13. Heels on the same line, and as near each other as 
the conformation of the man permits. 

Feet turned out equally, and forming with each other 
an angle of about sixty degrees. 

Knees straight, without stiffness. 

Body erect on the hips, inclining a little forward, 
shoulders square and falling equally. 

Arms and hands hanging naturally, backs of hands 
outward, little fingers opposite the seams of the trousers, 
elbows near the body. 

Head erect and square to the front. 

Chin slightly drawn in, without constraint. 

Eyes straight to the front. 

Men who are knocked-kneed, or who have legs with 
large calves, can not, without constraint, make their heels 
touch while standing. 

Recruits often bend the body back and project the belly, 
in their efforts to stand erect; this tendency, as well as 
the bad habit of dropping a shoulder or advancing a hip, 
must be carefully corrected. 

The Rests. 

14* Being at a halt, to rest the men: Fall out, or 
Rest, or At ease. 

At the command fa// out, the men may leave the rank, 
but will remain in the immediate vicinity. At the com- 
mand fa// in, they resume their former places. 

At the command rest, the men remain in rank, but are 
not required to preserve silence nor immobility. 

At the command at ease, the men keep one heel in 
place and preserve silence, but not immobility. 

To resume the attention: 1. Squad, 2. Attention. 



8 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 

The men take the position of the soldier and fix their 
attention. 

15. 1. Parade, 2. Rest. 

Carry the right foot six inches straight to the rear, left 
knee slightly bent; clasp the hands in front of the center 
of the body, left hand uppermost, left thumb clasped by 
thumb and forefinger of right hand; preserve silence and 
steadiness of position. 

To resume the attention or position of the soldier: 
1. Squad, 2. Attention. 

To Dismiss the Squad. 

16. Being in line at a halt: Dismissed. 

Eyes Right or Left. 

17. The instructor commands: 1. Eyes, 2. Right (or 
Left), 3. Front. 

At the command right, turn the head gently, so as to 
bring the left eye in a line with the center of the body, 
the eyes fixed on the line of the eyes of the men in, or 
supposed to be in, the same rank. 

At the command front, the head resumes the habitual 
position. 

The instructor takes particular care that the movement 
of the head does not derange the squareness of the 
shoulders, which will happen if the movement of the 
former be too sudden. 

Facings. 

18. To the right or left. The instructor commands: 
1. Right (or Left), 2. FACE. 

At the command face, raise slightly the right heel and 
left toe and face to the right, turning on the left heel, 
assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the right foot; 
replace the right foot. 

The facings to the left are also executed upon the left 
heel. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 



9 



19. To the rear. The instructor commands: 1. About, 
2. Face. 

At the command face, raise slightly the left heel and 
right toe, face to the rear, turning to the right on the 
right heel and ball of the left foot; replace the left foot 
beside the right. 

Salute With the Hand. 

20. The instructor commands: 1. Right (ov Left) hand, 
2. Salute. 

Raise the right hand smartly till the fore- 
finger touches the lower part of the head- 
dress above the right eye, thumb and fin- 
gers extended and joined, palm to the left 
and downward, forearm inclined at forty- 
five degrees, hand and wrist straight. 
(Two) Drop the arm quietly to the side. 

If uncovered, the forefinger touches the 
forehead above the eye. 

Men, when saluting, look toward the per- 
son saluted. Enlisted men salute with the 
hand farthest from the officer, giving the 
salute six paces before passing him, holding , 
the hand at the visor until the salute is ac- 
knowledged or the officer passed. pj ^ p^^ 20 

SETTING UP EXERCISES. 

21. In order to maintain a proper set-up and to keep 
the muscles supple, all soldiers in garrison should be fre- 
quently practiced in the following exercises. 

The arm, hand, trunk, leg, and foot exercises should be 
alternated, the drill interrupted by frequent rests and 
varied by instruction in the facings, marchings, etc. 
While exercising one part of the body, care should be 
taken that the other parts remain quiet, as far as the 
conformation of the body will allow. 




10 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 

At the command halt, given at any time, the exercise 
ceases and the position of the soldier is resumed. 

The recruits being in single rank and two yards apart: — 

First Exercise. 

1. Arm, 2. EXERCISE, 3. Head, 4. Up, 5. Down, 6. Raise. 

At the command exercise, raise the arms laterally until 
horizontal, palms upward. Head: Raise the arms in a 
circular direction over the head, tips of fingers touch- 
ing top of cap over the forehead, backs of fingers in con- 
tact their full length, thumbs pointing to the rear, elbows 
pressed back. Up: Extend the arms upward their full 
length, palms touching. Down: Force them obliquely 
back, and gradually let them fall by the sides. Raise: 
Raise the arms laterally as prescribed for the second 
command. Continue by repeating liead, up, down, raise. 

Second Exercise. 

1. Arm, 2. Exercise, 3. Front, 4. Rear. 

At the command exercise, raise the arms laterally, as 
in First Exercise. Front: Swing the arms, extended, 
horizontally to the front, palms touching, heels on the 
ground. Rear: Swing the arms extended well to the 
rear, inclining them slightly downward, raising the body 
upon the toes. Continue by repeating, front, rear, till the 
men, if possible, are able to touch the hands behind the 
back. 

Third Exercise. 

1. Arm, 2. EXERCISE, 3. CIRCLE. 

At the command exercise, raise the arms laterally, as 
in First Exercise. Circle: Slowly describe a small cir- 
cle with each arm, upward and backward, from front to 
rear, the arms not passing in front of the line of the breast. 
Continue by repeating circle. 

Fourth Exercise. 
1. Arm, 2. Exercise, 3. Shoulder, 4. Front, 5. Rear. 
At the command exercise, raise the arms laterally, as 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 11 

in First Exercise. Shoulder: Place the tips of fingers 
lightly on top of the shoulders, keeping upper arms hori- 
zontal. Front: Force the elbows to the front. Rear: 
Force the elbows back as far as possible. Continue by 
repeating front, rear. 

Fifth Exercise. 
1. Hand, 2. Exercise, 3. Close, 4. Open. 
At the command exercise, raise the arms laterally as in 
First Exercise. Close: Close the hands with force. 
Open: Open the hands quickly, spreading the fingers and 
thumbs apart as much as possible. Continue by repeating 
close, open. 

Sixth Exercise. 

1. Forearms vertical, 2. Raise, 3. Up, 4. Down. 

At the command raise, raise the forearms until nearly 
vertical, fingers extended and joined, palms toward each 
other. Up: Thrust upward with force, extending the arms 
to their full length. Down: Force the arms obliquely 
back, and gradually let them fall by the sides. Continue 
by repeating raise, up, down. 

Seventh Exercise. 

1. Forearms horizontal, 2. Raise, 3. Front, 4. Rear. 

At the command raise, raise the forearms to the front 
until horizontal, elbows forced back, hands tightly closed, 
backs down. Front: Thrust the arms forcibly to the 
front, turning the backs of the hands up, arms horizontal. 
Rear: Bring the arms back quickly to the first position, 
forcing elbows and shoulders to the rear. Continue by 
repeating front, rear. 

Eighth Exercise. 

1. Trunk, 2. EXERCISE, 3. DOWN, 4. BACK. 

At the command exercise, raise the hands and place 
them on the hips, fingers to the rear, thumbs to the front, 
elbows pressed back. Down: Bend the trunk forward at 
the hips as far as possible. Back: Raise and bend the 



12 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 

trunk to the rear as far as possible. Execute both mo- 
tions slowly, without bending- the knees. Continue by 
repeating' down^ back. 

Ninth Exercise. 

1. Trunl<, 2. Exercise, 3. Right, 4. Left. 

At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips, 
as in Eig-hth Exercise. Right: Bend the trunk to the 
right, without twisting- it or raising either heel. Left: 
Bend the trunk similarly to the left. Execute both mo- 
tions slowly. Continue by repeating right, left. 

Tenth Exercise. 

1. Trunk, 2. EXERCISE, 3. Circle right (or left). 

At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips, 
as in Eighth Exercise. Circle right: Bend the trunk 
to the right as in Ninth Exercise; turn the trunk to the 
rear and bend to the rear, as in Eighth Exercise; turn 
the trunk to the left and bend to the left, as in Ninth 
Exercise; turn the trunk to the front and bend forward, 
as in Eighth Exercise. Continue by repeating circle 
right. 

Eleventh Exercise. 

1. Arms vertical, palms to the front, 2. RAISE, 3. Down, 
4. Up. 

At the command raise, raise the arms from the sides, 
extended to their full length, till the hands meet above 
the head, palms to the front, fingers pointed upward, 
thumbs locked, right thumb in front, shoulders pressed 
back. Down : Bend over till the hands, if possible, touch 
the ground, keeping arms and knees straight. UP: 
Straighten the body and swing the arms, extended, to 
the vertical position. Continue by repeating down, up. 

Twelfth Exercise. 
1. Arms forward, palms down, 2. Raise, 3. Down, 4. Up. 
At the command raise, raise the arms to the front, ex- 
tended to their full length, till the hands are in front of 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 13 

and at the height of the shoulders, palms down, fingers 
extended and joined, thumbs under forefingers. Down : 
Bend the trunk forward at the hips as far as possible, 
and swing the arms backward, knees and arms straight. 
Up: Straighten the trunk, and swing the arms to the 
forward position. Continue by repeating down, up. 

Thirteenth Exercise. 

1. Leg. 2. EXERCISE, 3. Half-bend, 4. Down, 5. Up. 

At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips, 
as in Eighth Exercise. Down: Lower the body, sep- 
arating the knees and bending them as much as possible, 
heels on the ground, head and trunk erect. Up : Raise 
the body, straightening and closing the knees. Continue 
by repeating down, up. 

Fourteenth Exercise. 

1. Leg, 2. Exercise, 3. Full bend, 4. Down, 5. Up. 

At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips 
as in Eighth Exercise. Down: Lower the body, sep- 
arating the knees and bending them as much as possible, 
head and trunk erect, heels raised, weight of body rest- 
ing on the balls of the feet. Up : Raise the body, 
straightening and closing the knees, and lower the heels 
to the ground. Continue by repeating down, up. 

Fifteenth Exercise. 

1. Leg, 2. Exercise, 3. Left (or Right), 4. Forward, 
5. Rear; or, 5. Ground. 

At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips, 
as in Eighth Exercise. Forward : Move the left leg to 
the front, knee straight, so as to advance the foot about 
fifteen inches, toe turned out, sole nearly horizontal, body 
balanced on right foot. Rear : Move the leg to the rear, 
knee straight, toe on a line with the right heel, sole 
nearly horizontal. Continue by repeating forward, rear, 



14 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 

When the recruit has learned to balance himself, the 
command forward is followed by GROUND. Throw the 
weight of the body forward by rising on the ball of the 
right foot, advance and plant the left, left heel thirty 
inches from the right, and advance the right leg quickly 
to the position of forward. Continue by repeating ^ro///7(/ 
when the right and left legs are alternately in the posi- 
tion of forward. 

Sixteenth Exercise. 

1. Leg, 2. EXERCISE, 3. Up. 

At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips, 
as in Eighth Exercise. Up : Raise the left leg to the 
front, bending and elevating the knee as much as possi- 
ble, leg from knee to instep vertical, toe depressed. Up : 
Replace the left foot and raise the right leg as prescribed 
for the left. 

Execute slowly at first, then gradually increase to the 
cadence of double time. Continue by repeating up when 
the right and left legs are alternately in position. 

Sj8jtmrt€enth Exercise. 

1. Foot, 2. Exercise, 3. Up, 4. Down. 

At the command exercise, place the hands on the hips, 
as in Eighth Exercise. Up: Raise. the body upon the 
toes, knees straight, heels together. Down: Lower the 
heels slowly to the ground. Continue by repeating up, 
down. 

As soon as the exercises are well understood, they may 
be executed without repeating the commands. For this 
purpose the instructor gives the commands as prescribed, 
then adds: Continue the exercise, upon which the motions 
to be repeated are continuously executed until the com- 
mand halt. 

Where there is a regular system of gymnastic instruc- 
tion, it may replace the setting-up exercises for well- 
trained soldiers. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 15 

THE STEPS. 
Quick Time. 

22. The length of the full step in quick time is thirty- 
inches, measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is 
at the rate of one hundred and twenty steps per minute. 

2 3. The recruits being confirmed in the position of the 
soldier, the instructor places himself eight or ten yards 
in front of them, and facing toward them, executes the 
step slowly, at the same time explaining the principles. 
He then commands: 1. Forward, 2. March. 

At the command forward, throw the weight of the body 
upon the right leg without bending the left knee. 

At the command march, move the left leg smartly, but 
without jerk, carry -the foot straight forward thirty 
inches from the right, measuring from heel to heel, sole 
near the ground, knee straight and slightly turned out; 
at the same time throw the weight of the body forward, 
and plant the foot without shock, weight of body resting 
upon it; next, in like manner, advance the right foot and 
plant it as above; continue the mar ch, keeping the face 
to the front. 

The instructor indicates from time to time the cadence 
of the step by calling one, two, three, four ; or, /eft, right, 
the instant the left and right foot, respectively, should 
be planted. 

The cadence is at first given slowly, and gradually in- 
creased to that of quick time. 
• 24. To arrest the march: 1. Squad, 2. Halt. 

At the command halt, given as either foot is brought 
to the ground, the foot in rear is brought up and planted 
without shock by the side of the other. 

To Mark Time. 

25. Being in march: 1. Mark time, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, given as either foot is coming 
to the ground, continue the cadence and make a sem- 



16 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED 

blance of marching, without gaining ground, by alter- 
nately advancing each foot about half its length, and 
bringing it back on line with the other. 
To resume the full step: 1. Forward, 2. March. 

Short Step. 

26. Being in march: 1. Shortstop, 2. March. 

Take steps of fifteen inches. The full step is resumed 
at the commands: 1. Forward, 2. March. 

The length of the short step in double time is eighteen 
inches. , 

The short step may be executed from mark time, and 
conversely. 

Side Step. 

27* Being at a halt: 1. Right (or Left) step, 2. March. 

Carry the right foot twelve inches to the right, keep- 
ing the knees straight and the shoulders square to the 
front; as soon as the right foot is planted, bring the left 
foot to the side of it and continue the movement, ob- 
serving the cadence for each foot, as explained for quick 
time. '--^^ 

The side step is not executed in double time. 

Back Step. 

28. Being at a halt: 1. Backward, 2. MARCH. 

Step back with the left foot fifteen inches straight to 
the rear, measuring from heel to heel, then with the 
right, and so on, the feet alternating. 

At the command hait, bring back the foot in front to 
the one in rear. 

The back step is only used for short distances, and is 
not executed in double time. 

To March to the Rear. 

29. Being in march: 1. To the rear, 2. March. 

At the command march, given as the right foot strikes 
the ground, advance and plant the left foot; then turn 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 17 

on the balls of both feet, face to the right about, and 
immediately step off with the left foot. 

The march to the rear in double time is executed by 
taking four short steps in place, keeping the cadence, at 
the same time turning to the right about; then step off 
with the left foot. 

To Change Step. 

30. Being in march: 1. Change step, 2. March. 

At the command march, given the instant the right foot 
comes to the ground, the left foot is advanced and planted; 
the toe of the right is then advanced near the heel of the 
left, the recruit again stepping off with the left. 

The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the 
command march being given when the left foot strikes 
the ground. 

Double Time. 

31« The length of the full step in double time is thirty- 
six inches; the cadence is at the rate of one hundred and 
eighty steps per minute. At this rate a mile can be 
passed over in about ten minutes. 

32. To march in double time: 1. For ward, 2, Double time^ 
3. March. 

At the command forward, throw the weight of the body 
on the right leg; at the second command, raise the hands 
until the forearms are horizontal, fingers closed, nails 
toward the body, elbows to the rear; at the command 
march, carry forward the left foot, leg slightly bent, knee 
somewhat raised, and plant the foot thirty-six inches 
from the right; then execute the same motion with the 
right foot; continue this alternate movement of the feet, 
throwing the weight Of the body forward and allowing 
a natural swinging motion to the arms. 

The squad is halted by the commands: 1. Squad, 
2. Halt. 

The recruits are also exercised in running, the princi- 
ples being the same as for double time. 
9236 2 



18 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 

When marching in double time and at the run the men 
breathe as much as possible through the nose, keeping 
the mouth closed. 

SQUAD DRILL. 

33* When the recruits are well instructed in the fore- 
going principles, they are formed in squads of about eight 
men, placed in single rank, to teach them the principles 
of alignment, marching with a guide, and the turnings. 
The front occupied by each man is twenty-eight inches,, 
which includes the interval between files. This interval 
will allow a free motion of the arms in marching. 

34. To form the squad: The non-commissioned officer, 
facing the squad and six yards in front of its center, com- 
mands: 1. Pall in, 2. Left, 3. Face. 

At the command fall in, the recruits form in single rank, 
facing to the right, at facing distance (sixteen inches) 
from each other: at the third command, they face to the 
left. 

Alignments. 

35* The instructor first teaches the recruits to align 
themselves man by man upon two files established as a 
base; to this end he advances the two recruits on the 
right (or left) three or more paces, by the commands: 
1. Two files from the right (or /eff), forward, 2. March. 
3. Halt. 

At the command halt, the two recruits designated halt, 
execute eyes right, close the left hand and place the 
knuckles against the waist above the hip, wrist straight, 
back of the hand to the front; the inner man places him- 
self so that his right arm touches lightly the elbow of 
the man on his right. The instructor having verified the 
alignment of these two men, commands: 1. By file, 2. Right 
(or Left), 3. Dress, 4. Next, 5. Front. 

At the command dress, the recruit on the right of the 
rank executes eyes right and marches to the front, short- 
ening the last step so as to find himself about six inches 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 19 

in rear of the new alignment, which must never be passed, 
places the left hand above the hip as just described, and 
taking" steps of two or three inches, moves up on the line, 
places his arm lightly against the elbow of the man on 
his right, so that his eyes and shoulders shall be in line 
with those of the men on his right. When this recruit 
is aligned, the instructor causes the next recruit to dress 
by the command next, and so on. 

The instructor sees that the principles of the alignment 
are properly observed, and when the last recruit has ar- 
rived on the line, verifies the alignment from the right 
flank, and orders up of back such men as may be in rear 
or in advance of the line; only the men designated move. 

At the command front, given when the rank is well 
aligned, the recruits cast their eyes to the front and drop 
the left hand to the side; all movement in the rank must 
then cease. 

In order to habituate the recruit to his interval in line, 
the left hand is placed above the hip in all the alignments 
in the School of the Soldier Dismounted. 

Dressing to the left, each man places himself so that 
his left elbow touches lightly the arm of the man on his 
left. 

36, After every alignment the instructor examines 
the position of each man, and, if necessary, corrects it. 

The recruit should be taught to turn his head no fur- 
ther than is necessary to enable him to look along the 
line of eyes and just see the breast of the second man 
from him, without thrusting his head or body to the 
front or rear. 

In the first drills, the basis of the alignment is estab- 
lished parallel to the front of the squad, and afterward in 
oblique directions. 

37. The recruits having learned to align themselves 
man by man, the instructor establishes the base files, ^nd 
aligns the squad by the commands: 1. Right (or Left), 
2. Dress, 3. Front. 



^O SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 

At the command dress, all the men, except the base 
files, move forward and dress up to the line. The in- 
structor verifies the alignment and commands: Front. 
All the men, including the base files, turn the head and 
eyes to the front and drop the left hand to the side. 

3§« Alignments to the rear are executed on the same 
principles; the commands are: 1. Right [ov Left) backward, 
2. Dress, 3. Front. 

The men step back, halt a little in rear of the line of 
the base files, and immediately dress up by steps of two 
or three inches. 

39. To execute the alignments ftsing the side step, the 
instructor establishes the base files a few paces from the 
rank, in line with it, and commands: 1. Right (or Left) step, 
2. Right (or Left), 3. Dress, 4. Front. 

At the command dress, the men execute the side step, 
close on the base files, and dress as already explained. 

40. When the squad dresses quickly and well, the 
guide alone is first established. 

In dressing, the first two or three men are accurately 
aligned as quickly as possible in order to form a base for 
the rest of the sauad. 

MARCHINGS. 
To March in Line. 

41. The guides of the squad are the men on the right 
and left of the rank; the one designated in the command 
for the march in line is charged with the direction of the 
march and the length and cadence of the step. The 
squad being correctly aligned, the instructor commands: 
1. Forward, 2. March, 3. Guide [right or /eft). 

At the command march, the squad steps off smartly 
with the left foot, the guide marching straight to the 
front. 

The instructor observes that the men preserve the in- 
terval toward the side of the guide; that they yield to 






SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 21 

I pressure from that side, and resist pressure from the op- 
posite direction; that by slightly shortening or lengthen- 
ing the step they gradually recover the alignment, and 
by slightly opening out or closing in they gradually re- 
cover the interval, if lost; that, while habitually keeping 
the head direct to the front, they may occasionally glance 
toward the side of the guide to assure themselves of the 
alignment and interval, but that the head is turned as 
little as possible for this purpose. 

The instructor will impress upon the men that the 
alignment and interval can be preserved only by uniform- 
ity in the length and cadence of the step, and by keeping 
the shoulders square with the line of direction. 

If the men lose the step, the instructor commands: Step. 
The men glance toward the side of the guide, retake the 
step, and then cast their eyes to the front. 

To March Backward. 

42. Being at a halt: 1. Backward, 2. March, 3. Guide 
(right ov left). 

To March to the Rear. 

43. Being in march: 1. To the rear, 2. March, 3. Guide 
(right ov left). 

To March by the Flank. 

44. Being at a halt: 1. Right (or Left)^ 2. Face, 3. For- 
ward, 4. March. 

If in march: 1. By the right [or left) flank, 2. March. 

At the command march, given as the right foot strikes 
the ground, advance and plant the left foot, then face to 
the right in marching, and step off in the new direction 
with the right foot. 

45. In the march by the flank, the recruits cover each 
other and keep closed to facing distance — /. e., to such dis- 
tance that in forming line each man will occupy a front 
of twenty-eight inches. 

The depth of a man is taken as twelve inches; his front 
in ranks as twenty-eight inches, ^which includes his 



22 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. ' 

breadth and the interval between files. Pacing distance 
is sixteen inches — /. e., the difference between the front 
of a man in ranks and his depth. 

46. In the School of the Soldier Dismounted, the 
march by the flank is not executed in double time. 

47. A single rank faced to the right or left is called a 
column of files. 

48. To halt the column of files: 1. Squad, 2. Halt; and 
to face it to the front: 3. Left (or Right), 4. Face. 

Marching in column of files, to march in line: 1. By the 
right (or left) flank, 2. March, 3. Guide {right or left). 

To Change Direction in Column of Files. 

49. Being in march: 1. Column right (or left); or, 1. Col- 
umn half-right (or half-left), 2. MARCH. 

The leading man moves over a quarter or eighth cir- 
cle whose radius is about eighteen inches, and is fol- 
lowed by the other men, who change direction on the 
same ground. 

If at a halt: 1. Forward, 2. Column right (or left); or, 
2. Column half-right (ov half-left), 3. MARCH. 

The Oblique March. 

50. For the instruction of recruits, the squad being 
correctly aligned, the instructor will face the squad half- 
right or half-left, point out to the men their relative po- 
sitions, and explain that these are to be maintained in 
the oblique march. 

Being in line at a halt, or marching: 1. Right (or Left) 
oblique, 2. MARCH. 

Each man half-faces to the right, at the same time 
stepping oft' in the new direction. He preserves his rel- 
ative position, keeping his shoulders parallel to those of 
the man next on his right, and so regulates his step as 
to make the head of this man conceal the heads of the 
other men in the rank; the rank remains parallel to its 
original front. 

At the command'Aa/f, the men halt, faced to the front. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 23 

To resume the original direction: 1. Forward, 2. March. 

The recruits half -face to the left in marching, and then 
move straight to the front. 

If marking time while obliquing, the oblique march is 
resumed by the commands: 1. Oblique, 2. March. 

The short step will not be used in the oblique march. 

51. In the oblique march in line, the guide is always, 
without indication, on the side toward which the oblique 
is made. On resuming the direct march, the guide is, 
without indication, on the side it was previous to the ob- 
lique. If the oblique be executed from a halt, the guide 
is announced on taking the direct march in line. 

These rules are general. ^ 

5 !2. The column of files obliques by the same commands 
and means, the leading file being the guide. 

To March in Double Time. 

53. Being in line at a halt: 1. Forward, 2. Double time, 
3. March, 4. Guide right (or left). 

To Pass from Quick Time to Double Time, and the Reverse. 

54. 1. Double time, 2. March. 

At the command march, given when the left foot strikes 
the ground, advance the right foot in quick time and 
step off with the left foot in double time. 

To resume the quick time: 1. Quick time, 2. March. 

At the command march, given as either foot is coming 
to the ground, the squad resumes quick time. 

TURNINGS. 
To Turn and Halt. 

55. Being at a halt: 1. Squad right [ov left), 2. March, 
3. Front. 

At the command march, the right guide stands fast; the 
pivot man, who is the man next the right guide, faces to 
the right, and then stands fast; the other men and the left 
guide half-face to the right, and, moving by the shortest 



24 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 

lines, place themselves successively upon the line estab- 
lished by the pivot man, and all dress to the right with- 
out command . The left guide having placed himself upon 
the new line, the instructor verifies the alignment from 
the pivot flank and commands : Front ; at this command , 
the right guide places himself on the right of the rank. 

If the squad be marching, the right guide and pivot 
man halt at the command march; the pivot man faces to 
the right and both stand fast; the other men and the left 
guide half -face to the right in marching, and the move- 
ment is executed as before described. 

Squad half-right (ov half-left) is executed in the same man- 
ner, except that the pivot man makes a half -face to the 
right, and the pivot guide faces sufficiently to his left to 
place the line of his shoulders at right angles to that of 
the pivot man. 

The instructor observes that the men do not increase 
the length or cadence of the step; that they do not crowd 
each other; that they arrive on the line in succession; 
and that the man next the pivot is correctly established, 
in order that the basis of the alignment may be in the 
proper direction. 

To Turn and Advance. 

56. Being in march: 1. Right (or Left) turn, 2. March, 
3. Forward, 4. MARCH, 5. Guide right (or left). 

At the second command, the right guide marches by 
the right flank and moves forward in the new direction, 
taking the short step without changing the cadence; the 
other men half-face to the right in marching, and mov- 
ing by the shortest line, successively place themselves on 
the new line, when they take the short step. When the 
left guide has arrived on the new line, the fourth com- 
mand is given, when all resume the full step. 

During the turn, the guide is, without command, on 
the pivot flank. The guide is announced on resuming 
the full step. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 25 

If at a halt, the movement is similarly executed in quick 
time, unless the command double time be given. 

Right (or Left) half-turn is executed in the same manner, 
except that the guide makes a half-face to the right. 

Should the command halt be given during the execution 
of the movement, those men who are on the new line halt; 
the others halt on arriving on the new line; all dress to 
the right without command. The instructor verifies the 
alignment from the pivot flank and commands: Front. 

Covering and Marching on Points. 

57. The recruits will next be taught how to cover two 
points. For this purpose the instructor will select two 
objects and require each recruit in succession to place 
himself so that the prolongation of the straight line 
through these points shall pass between his heels. 

The instructor places himself in rear of each recruit, 
points out the faults of his position, and then causes him 
to cover accurately. 

When the recruits are able to cover the points quickly 
and accurately, they are required, after covering, to 
march upon the points in quick and double time. The 
instructor, remaining in rear of the recruit, observes his 
march, and, when halted, the recruit observes his cov- 
ering, and corrects it if necessary; at the command fall 
out, he steps to one side and stands at ease. The other 
recruits are halted near the same point, and when all 
have arrived, the instructor joins them, and, selecting 
new points, continues the exercise. 

The instruction is extended by requiring the recruit 
to halt at any time, select new points farther in advance, 
and then move forward on these, without varying his 
original direction. Two recruits should also be estab- 
lished by the instructor, one covering the other, and the 
others required to cover them, as in file, at considerable 
distances apart; the recruits should then be faced about, 
and the exercise repeated in the new direction. 



26 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 

It should be demonstrated to the recruit that he can 
not march in a straight line without having two points 
in the desired direction, and keeping them covered while 
advancing. 

A distant and conspicuous landmark will next be se- 
lected as a point of direction. The recruit will be re- 
quired to choose two intermediate points on the ground 
in line with the point of direction and to march upon it 
by covering these points, new points being selected as he 
advances. 

The instruction in covering and marching on points 
may be extended at the discretion of the instructor. 

58. The recruits are now formed in double rank in 
squads not smaller than a gun detachment, nor larger 
than a section. The files on the right and left of the 
squad are always complete; if there be an incomplete file, 
it will be the second file from the left. Two men are 
placed, one on the right and the other on the left of the 
squad, to act as guides; they are not covered in the rear 
rank. 

59. The rear-rank men cover their file leaders accu- 
rately; the distance between ranks, from back to breast, 
is facing distance; the front occupied by each file is 
twenty-eight inches. 

60. To form the squad: At the command fall in, the men 
form in two ranks, facing to the right, at facing distance 
from each other. The non-commissioned officer, having 
faced the squad to the left, selects two men for guides, 
and forms the squad as prescribed (Par. 58). 

The movements heretofore taught in single rank are 
repeated. 

61. In alignments in double rank, the rear-rank men 
place the left hand above the hip and cast the eyes to 
the side of the guide, with the front-rank men; the rear 
rank conforms to the front, each rear-rank man covering 
his file leader at facing distance. 

62. When the squad is faced about or marched to the 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 27 

rear, the guides step into the rear rank, now become the 
front rank; the vacancy in the rank, if there be one, is 
filled by the man opposite it in the former front rank. 

63. When marching" at double time, the distance be- 
tween ranks is increased to thirty-six inches; upon halt- 
ing or resuming quick time, the rear rank closes to facing 
distance. When marching on rough ground at quick 
time, the distance between ranks is also increased to 
thirty-six inches. 

64. The double rank, faced by the flank, is called a 
column of files, the same as in single rank. In column of 
files each rear-rank man dresses on his front-rank man, 
keeping his interval. 

65. In changing direction in column of files, each file 
wheels on a movable pivot, the pivot man, shortening 
two or three steps, moves over a quarter or eighth circle 
whose radius is about eighteen inches. 

66. In obliquing in line in double rank, each rear-rank 
man regulates himself on his file leader, so as to cover 
him upon resuming the original direction. 

67. In obliquing in column of files, the guide of each 
file is the man of the rank toward which the oblique is 
made, the guide of the column being the guide of the 
leading file. 



28 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 



SCHOOL or THE CANNONEER. 

68. The cannoneers are in undress without gloves, and 
are equipped with waist belts. 

69. Cannoneers are men assigned to the service of the 
guns. The cannoneers belonging to a single gun, formed 
in double rank, constitute a gun detachment. 

70. The detachment for the service of a 3.2-inch gun 
is ordinarily composed of two corporals and five privates; 
it is formed in double rank, and told off from the right 
as follows: No. 1 is on the right of the rear rank; No. 2 
in front of No. 1; No. 3 on the left of No. 1; No. 4 on the 
left of No. 2, and so on — the even numbers in the front 
rank, and the odd numbers in the rear rank. 



c.c. 


4 


2 


G. 




c.d 


6 


4 


2 


G. 


5 


3 


1 






5 




3 


1 





PI. 2, Par. 70. PI. 3, Par. 70. 

The senior corporal, who is gunner, is on the right of 
No. 2; the junior corporal, who is the caisson corporal, is 
on the left of the front rank, and is covered by the high- 
est odd-numbered cannoneer. 

•y 1 • For the elementary instruction of recruits, the 
caisson corporal is ordinarily dispensed with. In this 
case, if there is an odd 
number of cannoneers, 
the highest odd num- 
ber is on the left of 
the front rank, and is 
covered by the next 
lower odd -numbered 
cannoneer. 



5 


4 


2 


G. 


3 




1 





PI. 4, Par. 71. 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 29 

72. In actual service, the men are permanently as- 
sig'ned to the duties for which they are best fitted. 

73. To tell off the detachment : Call off. 

Each man belonging- to the detachment, beginning 
with the gunner, calls off: Gunner, one, two, etc., caisson 
corpora/. 

74. The front of a piece limbered, of a limber, or of a 
caisson is the direction in which the pole jDoints; the front 
of a piece unlimbered is the direction in which the muzzle 
points. 

75. The right or leftoi a piece, of a limber, or of a caisson 
is the right or left of its actual front. 

Post of the Gun Detachment at the Piece Limbered. 

76. In front. — The detachment is in line facing to the 
front, its rear and center two yards from the end of the 
pole, or from the heads of the. lead horses. 

In rear. — The detachment is in line facing to the front, 
its front and center two yards from the muzzle. 

77. The detachment being formed for drill, is marched 
to the park in column of files, and enters the park by the 
left, if marching right in front; by the right, if marching 
left in front. The detachment is directed so as to ap- 
proach its piece parallel to its front, and either in front 
or in rear of it, and at such a distance from its pole or muz- 
zle that the detachment, when formed in line near the 
piece, can be readily established in its proper position by 
the gunner. 

To Post the Gun Detachment with its Piece. 

78. The detachment having arrived near its piece, the 
instructor commands: Detachment opposite your piece. As 
the detachment arrives opposite its piece, the gunner 
halts it and commands, according as the right or left is 
in front: 1. Left (or Right), 2. Face, 3. Right, 4. Dress, 
5. Front. In either case, the gunner aligns the detach- 
ment from his post on its right. 



30 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

The detachment being" established in front or in rear of 
its piece, the instructor causes the cannoneers to call off. 

When a gun detachment takes post at the piece lim- 
bered, the g-unner, before commanding right dress, takes 
such a position that the detachment, when aligned on 
him, will be at its post. This rule is general. 

To Change the Post of the Gun Detachment at the Piece Limbered. 

•yo. From front to rear. — The detachment being at its 
post in front of the piece, to post it in rear : 1. Detachment 
rear, 2. March. 

At the first command, the gunner commands: 1. De- 
tachment, 2. About, 3. Face, 4. Forward, and repeats the 
command march ; the gunner and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 ob- 
lique sufficiently to their left, and the other cannoneers, 
if any, and the caisson corporal, sufficiently to their right, 
to move along the sides of the piece; re-unite in a similar 
manner as soon as they have passed the muzzle, are halted, 
faced about, and dressed to the right by the gunner's 
commands: 1. Detachment, 2. Halt, 3. About, 4. Face, 
5. Right, 6. DRESS, 7. Front. 

80. From rear to front. — The instructor commands: 1. De- 
tachment front, 2. March. 

At the first command, the gunner commands: 1. For- 
ward. At the command march, repeated by the gunner, 
the cannoneers oblique, the gunner and Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 
to the right, and the other cannoneers, if any, and the 
caisson corporal, to the left; pass the piece, re-unite in 
front, and are halted and dressed to the right by the 
gunner 

Posts of the Cannoneers, Piece Limbered. 

81. Nos. 1 and 2 opposite the gun axle; the gunner 
and No. 3 opposite the middle of the flask; Nos. 4 and 5 
opposite the limber axle. All face to the front and cover 
each other in lines one yard outside the wheels, the 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 



31 



gunner and even numbers 
on the right, the odd num- 
bers on the left. 

82. The caisson corporal, 
dismounted, is on the left of 
the caisson, inline with the 
limber axle and one yard 
outside of it: he faces in the 
direction the pole of the 
caisson points. 

83. Supernumerary can- 
noneers, Nos. 6,7, and 8, if | 5 | 
present, are at the caisson, 
facing in the same direction 

as the caisson corporal; No. 

a is on the right, his post [ 3 | 
corresponding to that of the 
caisson corporal on the left; 

Nos. 7 and 8 are in line with ■ . 

the axle of the caisson body, LIJ 
covering the caisson corpo- « 
ral and No. 6, respectively. 

84. When the pieces are 
not accompanied by their 
caissons, and also when ., . „ o, 

« PI ^ Par ftl 

there is but one caisson to a 

platoon, the supernumerary cannoneers. Nos. 6 and 7, if 
present, are posted opposite the doubletree of the piece, 
one yard from it, facing to the front, No. 6 on the right and 
No. 7 on the left. In both of the above cases No. 7 is the 
highest numbered cannoneer in the detachment. 

85. When projectiles are fired, one cannoneer is re- 
quired in each platoon to hold the horses o| the chief of 
platoon and the chiefs of sections. No. 6 of one of the 
pieces, ordinarily the left, performs this duty. 



f*-3FTA 




S 



m 



^FT-» 



32 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

To Post the Cannoneers at the Piece Limbered. 

§6. fn front. — The detachment being- at its post in 
front: 1. Cannoneers to your posts, 2. March. 

At the first command, the gunner takes two steps to 
the front and faces to his left; the caisson corporal and 
any odd-numbered men that may be in the front rank 
step back into the rear rank and close in to the right. 

These changes having been made, the gunner com- 
mands: 1. Right, 2. Face, 3. To your posts. At the com- 
mand march, repeated by the gunner, the leading man in 
each rank changes direction to the right; the rear rank 
opens out from the front, each rank directing itself to- 
ward its own side of the piece, and marching along it; 
when each man arrives at his place, he halts and faces 
about. As soon as the cannoneers at the piece have ar- 
rived at their posts, the gunner goes direct to his own. 

If the caisson accompanies the piece, the caisson cor- 
poral and the supernumerary cannoneers pass outside the 
cannoneers with the piece, and go direct to their posts at 
the caisson. 

8 "7. /n rear. — The detachment being at its post in rear, 
the instructor gives the same commands as when it is in 
front. At the first command, the caisson corporal stands 
fast in the front rank: but No. 5, if in the front rank, 
steps back into the rear rank, No. 3 closing to the right. 
These changes having been made, the gunner commands: 
l.Lefl, 2. Face, 3. To your posts. At the command march, 
repeated by the gunner, the caisson corporal and the 
supernumerary cannoneers file to the left and go direct . 
to their posts at the caisson; the front and rear rank of 
the remaining cannoneers, led by Nos. 4 and 5, respect- 
ively, change direction to the right, open out, each rank 
directing itself toward its own side of the piece, each 
man halting when he arrives at his proper place. As 
soon as the cannoneers at the piece have arrived at their 
posts the gunner goes direct to his own. 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 33 

If there be no caisson, and the detachment consists of 
gunner and seven cannoneers, No. 7 steps back in the 
rear rank. No. 5 closing in to the right, and Nos. 6 and 7 
lead the front and rear rank respectively. 

To Re-form the Detachment in Front or Rear, Piece Limbered, 
Cannoneers at Their Posts. 

88. /n front. — The instructor commands: 1. Detachment 
front, 2. March. 

At the first command, the gunner steps to his right and 
commands; 1 . Forward, and repeats the command MARCH. 

The even numbers and gunner move directly to the 
front, the rear men closing up; the odd numbers close on 
the even numbers on passing the pole or lead horses, and 
the gunner posts the detachment in front of the piece by 
the commands: 1. Column left, 2. March, 3. Detachment, 
4. Halt, 5. Right, 6. Face, 7. Right, 8. Dress, 9. Front, 
moving jforward with the cannoneers and placing him- 
self facing to the front where the right of the detachment 
will rest. 

If the caisson accompanies the piece, the caisson cor- 
poral and the supernumerary cannoneers move forward 
at the same time and take their places on the left of the 
detachment, the even numbers passing by the left of the 
piece. 

In rear. — The instructor commands: 1. Detachment rear, 
2. March. 

At the first command, the gunner steps to his right and 
commands: 1. Detachment, 2. About, 3. Face, 4. Forward, 
and repeats the command March. 

The odd numbers and gunner move directly to the rear, 
the rear men closing up; the even numbers close on the 
odd numbers on passing the muzzle, and the gunner posts 
the detachment in rear of the piece by the commands: 
1. Column left, 2. March, 3. Detachment, 4. Halt, 5. Left, 
6. Face, 7. Right, 8. Dress, 9. Front, placing himself 
9236 3 



34 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

faced to the front, where the rig-ht of the detachment 
will rest. 

If the caisson accompanies the piece, the caisson cor- 
poral and the supernumerary cannoneers move forward 
and place themselves on the left of the detachment. 

To Move the Piece by Hand, Piece Limbered. 

89. To the front. — The instructor commands: 1. For- 
ward, 2. March, 3. Halt. 

At the first command, Nos. 4 and 5 hasten to the end 
of the pole and seize it with both hands; the gunner 
and No. 3 take hold of the spokes of the limber wheels 
with both hands, and Nos. 1 and 2 the spokes of the gun 
wheels. 

At the command march, all, acting together, move the 
piece forward. At the command halt, all resume their 
posts. 

The cannoneers who take hold of the spokes of the 
wheels break to their rear with the feet nearest the 
carriage. This rule is general. 

90. To the rear. — The instructor commands: 1. Back- 
ward, 2. March, 3. Halt. 

At the first command, all take the same posts as in 
moving forward, but face to the rear. At the command 
march, all, acting together, move the piece to the rear. At 
the command halt, all resume their posts. 

In the forward and backward march, if Nos. 6 and 7 
are posted with the piece, they go to the end of the pole, 
and Nos. 4 and 5 assist the gunner and No. 3 at the limber 
wheels. 

Posts of the Cannoners, Piece Unlimbered. 

91. Gunner. — On the left and at the end of the trail 
handspike, right leg nearly touching it, and heels on 
line with the end. 

No. 1. — Facing the piece, the right hip on line with the 
rear of the right wheel and two feet outside of it. 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 



35 



No. 2. — At the left wheel, in position corre- 
sponding to that of No. 1 at the right. 

No. 3. — In rear of the post of No. 1, opposite 
the end of the trail handspike and facing to 
the front. 

No. 4. — Five yards in rear of the post of No. 
2, and facing to the front. 

No. 5. — Behind the limber. 

99t If each piece is accompanied by its cais- 
son, the caisson corporal and the supernumer- 

11 ary cannon- 




2t 



A 



m-- 



-HW 



Ike^HORSEHOL DER 



a 



7 IMI 7 

PI. 7, Par. 93. 



eers, Nos. 6, 7, 
■/and 8, take the 
■ posts already 
^ prescribed for 

them at the 

piece limbered. 
The No. 6, 

told off as a 

horse holder, 

holds the 

horses of the 

chief of platoon 

and the chiefs 

of sections, and 

takes post in 

the center of 

the platoon and 

four yards be- p'- «. p^r. 91. 

hind the limber chest, or 

at such other place as the 

chief of platoon may di- 
rect. 
93. If there is but one 

caisson to each platoon, 

the No. 6 told off as horse 

holder takes post as be- 




36 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 




21 



€ 7 



ft 



5., 

7 



^HOftSiNOLDER. 

PI. 8, Par. 94. 



fore; the other No. 6 is 
on the right of the cais- 
""p son, opposite the limber 
axle; the two Nos. 7 are 
^ opposite the axletree of 
the caisson body, each 
on the side nearest his 
own piece. 

94. If there are no 
caissons, the No. 6 told 
off as horse holder takes 
post as before; the other 
No. 6 and the two Nos. 
7 are posted with their 
limbers, No. 6 on the left, 
No. 7 on the right, each 
in rear of the limber 
wheel and two feet be- 
hind it. 



To Unlimber and Prepare for Firing. 

95. To the front — The' instructor commands: 1. Action, 
2. Front. 

At the command front, the gunner takes out the pintle 
key and seizes the trail handle on his side; No. 3 seizes 
the other trail handle; they then raise the trail from the 
pintle hook, when the gunner commands: Drive on; 
Nos. 1 and 2 seize the spokes of the gun wheels with both 
hands. No. 2 first facing about. At the command c/riye on, 
the limber executes a left about, proceeds to the rear and 
executes another left about so as to be directly in rear of 
the piece, with the end of the pole or heads of the lead 
horses ten yards from the end of the trail handspike. As 
soon as the limber moves off, the piece is brought about; 
the gunner and No. 3, without lowering the trail, carry 
it around one hundred and eighty degrees so that the 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 37 

limber passes the muzzle, No. 1 turning- his wheel toward 
the trail and No. 2 turning his toward the muzzle. 

As soon as the piece is brought about, the gunner and 
No. 3 let down the trail; the gunner turns the trail hand- 
spike to the rear and pushes it forward so as to engage 
the blades in the catch. The cannoneers then take their 
posts at the piece unlimbered. 

If the piece be not horsed, the limber, when moved, is 
drawn by Nos. 4 and 5, who take hold with both hands 
near the end of the pole. If Nos. 6 and 7 are posted with 
the piece, the limber will be drawn by them instead of 
Nos. 4 and 5. 

If the piece be heavy or the ground be bad, the in- 
structor may direct Nos. 4 and 5 to assist Nos. 2 and 1, 
respectively, in moving the piece. This rule is general. 

96. To the right. — The instructor commands: 1. Action, 
2. Right. 

Executed like action front, except that No. 1 faces about 
before seizing the spokes instead of No. 2; that No. 1 turns 
his wheel toward the muzzle, and No. 2 his toward the 
trail; that the trail is carried ninety degrees in the op- 
posite direction; and that the limber wheels to the left 
and takes its place in rear by a left about. 

OT. To the left. — The instructor commands: 1. Action, 
2. Left. 

Executed like action front, except that the trail is carried 
around ninety degrees instead of one hundred and eighty, 
and that the limber wheels to the right and takes its 
place in rear by a right about. 

98. To the rear. — The instructor commands: 1. Action, 
2. Rear. 

Executed like action front, except that as soon as the 
limber moves off, the trail is let down and the piece is 
prepared for action; the limber moves directly forward 
at the command drive on, and takes its place by a reverse. 

99. The limber in battery may also be faced to the 
rear, the back of the limber being ten yards from the end 



38 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

of the trail handspike. Whenever the instructor desires 
it to take this position, he will caution limber faced to the 
rear, before giving the command act/ on front, etc. 

To Take and Rep/ace Equipments. 

100. Two cartridge pouches and one gunner's sight- 
pouch are on top of the cartridges in the limber chest; 
one gunner's sight in limber chest in the place prepared 
for it; two primer pouches in the trail box. They are 
distributed or replaced either when the cannoneers are 
at their posts, piece limbered, or when the gun detach- 
ment is at its post in rear. To distribute the equipments, 
the instructor commands: Take equipments. 

At this command, repeated by the gunner, Nos. 1, 2,3, 
and 4 approach the gunner, who hands Nos. 1 and 3 each 
a primer pouch, which they fasten to the waist belt, the 
pouch in front of the right side; and Nos. 2 and 4 each a 
cartridge pouch, which they sling over the left shoulder 
and under the right arm; the gunner then places his 
sight in its pouch, which he slings over his left shoulder 
and under his right arm; Nos. 1,2, 3, and 4, after receiv- 
ing their equipments, resume their posts at the piece or 
in the detachment. The primer pouch contains friction 
primers, priming wire, and lanyard. 

When the gunner commands: Replace equipments, 
the cannoneers take them oif and hand them back to the 
gunner, who makes such disposition of them as may be 
directed. 

To Move the Piece by Hand, Piece Unlimbered. 

101* To the front, — The instructor commands: 1 . By hand 
to the front, 2. March, 3. Halt. 

At the first command, Nos. 1 and 2 seize the spokes of 
the wheels with both hands; the gunner and No. 3 grasp 
the handspike with both hands, the gunner's right hand 
at the end. No. 3's left hand between those of the gunner. 
Nqs, 4 ^nd 5 hasten to the end of the pole. No. 4 on the 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 39 

left, No. 5 on the right. At the command march, the trail 
is raised and all move the piece and limber forward, the 
gunner guiding the trail. At the command halt, all re- 
sume their posts. 

102. To the rear. — The instructor commands: 1. By hand 
to the rear, 2. MARCH, 3. HALT. 

At the first command, Nos. 1 and 2 take their places at 
the wheel as before, but facing to the rear. The gunner 
and No. 3 face about; the gunner siezes the end of the 
trail handspike with his left hand. No. 3 with his right 
hand just in rear of the gunner's; Nos. 4 and 5 go to the 
end of the pole as before. At the command march, the 
trail is raised and all move the piece and limber to the 
rear, the gunner guiding the trail. At the command 
halt, all resume their posts. 

To Load and Fire. 

103. In the instruction of recruits, the cannoneers be- 
ing at their posts, piece unlimbered, the instructor as- 
sembles them about the piece, tells them the meaning of 
the terms cannon and piece, points out and names the 
principal parts of the gun, the breech mechanism, gun- 
carriage, limber and caisson, gives the names and ex- 
plains the use of the various equipments, implements, and 
tools, and shows where they are carried, and explains 
the method of working the breech mechanism. 

In giving these explanations, the instructor should be 
as brief as possible, and should endeavor always to use 
the same words in explaining the same objects. The in- 
structor should question the cannoneers, and whenever 
he observes that he is not understood, he should repeat 
the instruction until it is comprehended. This rule will 
be followed throughout the elementary instruction. 

104. The duties of the different men in loading and 
firing are taught in the following order: — 

First. Those of the gunner: Commanding, opening and 
closing the breech, inserting the charge and pointing. 



40 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

Second. Those of No. 1 : Attending the brake, ramming, 
and firing. 

Third. Those of No. 2: Attending the brake and serv- 
ing ammunition. 

Fourth. Those of No. 4: Serving ammunition. 

Fifth. Those of No. 3: Assisting the gunner. 

Sixth. Those of No. 5: Preparing and serving ammuni- 
tion. 

The cannoneers at first take their posts in succession 
and perform their respective duties in detail, while the 
rest of the detachment observes their motions. 

As the numbers are changed, the instructor repeats the 
nomenclature of the equipments, implements, and partic- 
ular parts of the gan. If it be difficult to make a recruit 
take the correct position, the instructor places himself 
or another man in the desired position. As soon as the 
men get a general idea of their duties, two or more can- 
noneers, and then all the men, are drilled together. 

The breech being open, the instructor explains that, in 
loading, the projectile is first inserted, then the cartridge, 
choke foremost; and that the projectile is pushed by 
hand until its base is beyond the seat of the gas check; 
that the rammer head is then placed against it, and it is 
rammed smartly to drive it home to its seat in the bore 
where it will grip the lands, and its base will be at the 
junction of the bore with the chamber, which is designed 
for the cartridge alone; that the cartridge is pushed into 
the chamber by hand, and is not rammed. 

Manual of the Breech. 

105. To open the breech. — Seize the lever with the left 
hand, thumb down, and raise it as high as possible to re- 
lease it from the safety notch, then turn it to the left 
until the block strikes the stop, at which time the 
threaded sections of the block are opposite the planed 
sections of the seat; the breech-block handle is then 
grasped with the right hand, back down, the block is 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 41 

drawn out and swung to the left to clear the bore. 
[Note. If the block sticks and can not be drawn by the 
right hand, press the lever down with the left, and, as 
the cam is no longer opposite the safety notch, it will 
bear against the face of the carrier ring and start the 
block to the rear.] 

] 06. To close and lock the breech. — Seize the lever with 
the left hand, raising it as high as possible, grasp the 
breech-block handle with the right hand, back down, and 
swing the block gently around, keeping the lever ex- 
tended as in opening, and push the screw into its place; 
then turn the lever to the right until it will fall into its 
place with a very slight pressure; see that the end of the 
lever engages in the slot. Never attempt to force the 
lever down; if it does not move comparatively freely the 
breech screw is not in place and requires to be moved 
still farther to the right. When the guns are new, the 
lever is apt to move a little stiffly and will not fall freely. 
[Note. The latch is an auxiliary, but not an absolutely 
essential part of the breech mechanism, as the gun may 
be fired safely without it. If the latch should fail to 
work it may be removed by taking off the latch cover, a 
screw-driver being provided for this purpose. This 
should never be done except when necessary. In firing 
without the latch, care must be taken not to attempt to 
push the block home until its axis is in line with the axis 
of the gun. In opening the block, the carrier ring must 
be held in place by hand until the block is withdrawn to 
the stop.] 

To Load and Fire by Detail. 

lOV. The instructor commands: 1. By detail, 2. Load, 
3. Ram, 4. Ready, 5. Fire. 

Unless otherwise directed, the command ready is given 
as soon as the piece is pointed. 

To discontinue the firing, the instructor commands: 
Cease firinQt, 



42 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

lOS. when the recruits are sufficiently instriicted to 
go through the manual without detail, the instructor dis- 
penses with that method. To load and fire without de- 
tail, he commands: 1. Load, 2. Fire. 

The gunner repeats the command had, and commands: 
Ready, when the piece is pointed. At the command had, 
the cannoneers execute all that is prescribed at the com- 
mands hadamd ram, in loading by detail. The instructor 
sees that the movements are not slighted, and returns 
to the execution in detail should a want of precision ap- 
pear. 

The instructor may also command: 1. Range (so many) 
yards, by detail, 2. Load, 3. Ram, 4. Ready, 5. Fire ; or, 

1. Range (so many) yards, 2. LOAD, 3. Fire. 
Whenever the range is designated in the command, 

the breech sight will be set for the range given, and the 
gun will be pointed at a designated target. The firing 
is discontinued as heretofore prescribed. 

When the instructor does not wish to fire immediately 
after the piece is loaded, he will caution: Without making 
ready, before giving the command to load; as soon as the 
piece is loaded and pointed, the gunner, after he throws 
up his hands as a signal for No. 3, commands: FosTS, at 
which No. 1 resumes his post outside the wheel. 

109. When the detachment becomes quite proficient 
in the manual of the piece, the instructor may intrust 
the gunner with the loading and firing. For this pur- 
pose the instructor commands: 1. Range {so mainy) yards, 

2. Load, 3. Fire at will, 4. Commence firing. 

At the second command, the gunner commands: 

1. Load, 2. Ready; at the fourth he commands: Fire, 
and continues to load and fire. 

If the piece be loaded when the third and fourth com- 
mands are given, the gunner commands: 1. Ready, 

2. Fire, and then proceeds as before. The firing is kept 
up until the instructor commands: 1. Cease FiRiNa. 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 43 

Duties of the Gunner. 

Commanding, Opening and Closing the Breech, Inserting the 
Charge, and Pointing. 

1 10. The gunner sees that the other cannoneers per- 
form their duties properly ; that the projectiles prescribed 
are used; that the fuses are properly prepared; and that 
the breech sight is set for the range and deflection 
given; he is responsible that the gun, and especially the 
breech mechanism, is in good order before loading, and 
that the breech block is properly locked after loading. 

Load. — The gunner takes hold of the handspike at the 
end with his right hand and at the middle with his left; 
places his left knee against his left hand, bending over 
it, the right knee slightly bent; looks over the top of the 
piece and gives the general direction, and then steps to 
the breech and opens it; inspects the bore, the breech 
mechanism, and gas check, to see that all are in good 
order; examines the face of the carrier ring and its seat, 
and removes with the wiping cloth any deposit observed 
upon them; he then receives the projectile from No. 2 or 
No. 4, inserts it in the bore, point foremost, and pushes 
it by hand until its base is just beyond the seat of the 
gas check, and, as soon as No. 1 has rammed the projec- 
tile and withdrawn his rammer, he inserts the cartridge, 
choke foremost, pushes it home with his hand and closes 
the breech. 

The gunner then takes the breech sight from its pouch 
and places it in its socket, grasps the handle of the ele- 
vating screw with the right hand, draws back his right 
foot, bends over his left knee, and points the piece. The 
gunner may straddle the flask in pointing, if he finds it 
more convenient to do so. 

No. 3 being at the end of the trail handspike, the gun- 
ner gives the exact direction, tapping the right of the 
trail for No. 3 to move it to the left, and the left of the 
trail for him to move it to the right. 



44 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

As soon as the gun is pointed, the gunner raises both 
hands as a signal to that effect, removes the sight, takes 
his post, and replaces the sight in its pouch. 

Ready. — The gunner steps clear of the wheel to the 
side whence he can best observe the effects of the shot. 

Fire. — The gunner, as soon as the piece is fired, com- 
mands: 1. By hand to the fronts. MARCH; the piece is then 
run forward to its former place, and the gunner then opens 
the breech to allow the piece to cool. 

Duties of No. 1. 

Attending the Brake, Ramming, and Firing. 

111. Load. — No. 1 steps off with the left foot and places 
himself between the piece and the wheel, applies the brake 
on his side; then takes the short rammer staff from its 
traveling hooks, steps to the left, places himself midway 
between the piece and the wheel, his right arm nearly on a 
line with the base of the breech, feet turned out equally 
and about twenty inches apart, heels on a line parallel 
to the flask, and holds the staff with both hands, the ram- 
mer head to his right, the right hand, back up, near the 
rammer head, and the left hand, back down, near the 
other end, arms extended naturally, staff horizontal. As 
soon as the projectile is inserted, he casts his eyes on the 
breech, places the rammer head against the base of the 
projectile, slips his right hand to his left, rammer in 
prolongation of the axis of the piece. 

Ram. — No. 1 rams smartly to force the projectile into the 
bore and make it grip the lands; withdraws the rammer 
^nd engages the staff in its firing position on the guard- 
rail standards of the cannoneer's seat, then resumes his 
former position at the breech, except that his left heel is 
by the side of his right; takes the lanyard from the pouch, 
unwinds the cord, engages from below the lanyard hook 
in the ring of a primer, passes his right thumb through 
the leather ring, and takes the primer in his right hand. 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 45 

[Note. — To place the short rammer in its firing position. — 
Engage the hook next the rammer head on the rear rail 
standard, pull on the staff with both hands to compress 
the spring, then turn the staff around the rear hook as a 
pivot to bring the front hook in rear of the front stand- 
ard, staff resting against it; relax the tension on the 
spring; the front hook will then engage and the rammer 
be secured. 

To remote the short rammer from its firing position. — Pull 
on the staff with both hands, back of the right hand up, 
back of the left down, until the spring is compressed, then 
turn the staff around the rear hook as a pivot until the 
front hook is free, before relaxing the tension on the 
spring.] 

Ready. — No. 1 inserts the primer in the vent, steps to 
the rear, first with the left foot, then with the right, so 
as to place himself two feet outside the rear of the wheel, 
facing to the front, heels together, eyes on the primer, 
right thumb on the seam of the trousers, right arm ex- 
tended by the side, left hand grasping the slide, nails up, 
left arm extended, elbow straight, slide not less than six 
inches from the knot. 

Fire. — No. 1 brings down the slide smartly, striking the 
knot a quick, sharp blow, the left arm extended, elbow 
straight, to prevent the primer from pulling out, and then 
resumes his post and hangs the lanyard about his neck. 

Should the primer fail to explode the charge, the gun- 
ner immediately commands stand fast, and waits a suffi- 
cient time to assure himself that the piece does not hang 
fire. He then commands: Reprime, when No. 1 steps 
inside the wheel, close to and in front of the axle, passes 
the priming wire through the vent, inserts another 
primer, and resumes his post. 

Cease firing. — No. 1 winds up the cord and returns 
the lanyard to the pouch, steps inside the wheel, engages 
the rammer in the traveling hooks, and then resumes his 
post. 



46 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

Remark. — When the ground is heavy, the gunner may- 
direct No. 1 to raise the brake on his side to facilitate the 
duties of No. 3 during the pointing. 

Duties of No. 2. 
Attending Brakes and Serving Ammunition. 

112. Load. — No. 2 steps off with the right foot and 
places himself between the piece and the wheel, applies 
the brake on his side, then runs to the limber, or to the 
caisson if it is directed that the ammunition is to be fur- 
nished directly from the latter, receives a round from 
No. 5, or the caisson corporal, then takes the post of No. 
4, retaining it until the next command is given to load. 
While at the post of No. 4 he performs the duties laid 
down for No. 4. The round is ordinarily carried in the 
hands, but as a protection from rain, sparks of fire, etc., 
the cartridge will be put in the cartridge pouch. 

Cease riRiNa. — No. 2, if he has a round, turns it over 
to No. 4 and runs to his permanent post, if not already 
there. 

Duties of No, 4. 

Serving Ammunition. 

113. Load. — No. 4 moves at a run, receives a round 
from No. 5, or the caisson corporal, takes the post of No. 2, 
which he retains until the next command to load, and 
hands the gunner first the projectile, and then, at the 
proper time, the cartridge. 

When No. 3 goes to the end of the trail handspike. No. 
4 raises slightly the brake on his side, in order that the 
gun may be more easily moved in pointing; at the gun- 
ner's signal. No. 4 drops the brake and resumes his post. 

Ready. — No. 4 casts his eyes on the muzzle. 

Fire. — No. 4 casts his eyes to his own front at the flash 
of the gun. 

At the next command to load, No. 4 runs to the limber 
or caisson for a round, and returning, halts at his post 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 47 

five yards in rear and two feet outside the left wheel of 
the piece; No. 2 runs to the piece from his temporary 
post between it and the limber, and stands ready to hand 
his round to the gunner. Nos. 2 and 4 thus alternate, 
each performing the duties of the post where he happens 
to find himself. 

Cease firing-. — No. 4 runs to No. 2, receives from 
him his round, then to No. 5, or the caisson corporal, to 
whom he turns over both his own round and that of No. 
2, and then resumes his permanent post. 

Duties of No. 3. 
Assisting Gunner. 

114. Load. — At this command. No. 3 stands fast. As 
soon as the gunner inserts the breech sight. No. 3 springs 
to the end of the trail handspike and gives the direction 
indicated by the gunner. When the gunner raises both 
hands as a signal. No. 3 resumes his post. 

Duties of No. 5. 
Preparing and Serving Ammunition. 

115. Load. — When ammunition is drawn from the 
piece limber, No. 5 issues it and prepares the fuses, if 
necessary. Should they require adjusting, he gives the 
time or distance to No. 2 or No. 4, with each projectile. 
No. 5 is assisted by Nos. 6 and 7 whenever these numbers 
are posted at the limber; he sees that the lid of the lim- 
ber chest is not open unnecessarily. 

Cease firing-. — No. 5 receives the unexpended am- 
munition from No. 4, carefully replaces it in the chest 
and secures the lid. 

Duties of the Caisson Corpora/. 

116. The caisson corporal, assisted by the supernu- 
merary numbers, issues ammunition to Nos. 2 and 4 



48 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

whenever it is drawn from the caisson. The ammunition 
in the rear and middle chests is first used. 

Whenever the limber, or the caisson from which the 
ammunition is issued directly to the piece, is at a con- 
siderable distance from it. No. 5, or the caisson corporal, 
should direct one of the supernumerary cannoneers to 
meet No. 2 or No. 4 half-way with the round. 

To Put On and Take Off the Brakes for Firing. 

liy. To put on the brakes. — Nos. 1 and 2, each on his 
own side, unkeys and raises the guard rail, so as to release 
the button on the locking lever from the groove on the 
under side of the guard rail, places the shoe over the 
tire, and keys up the guard rail; No. 1 then unkeys the 
rammer staff and takes his post at the breech, and No. 2 
runs to the limber or caisson for a round. 

The brakes are always put on when firing with pro- 
jectiles, and at the discretion of the instructor at drill. 
When the instructor wishes the brakes to be used at drill, 
he will caution: Brakes on, before giving the command 
to load. The brakes are put on at the first command had, 
when projectiles are used; or at the first command load, 
after the caution brakes on has been given at drill; they 
require no further adjustment during the firing, and at 
the subsequent commands to load, Nos. 1 and 2 j)roceed 
at once to their duties next in order as laid down. 

1 1§. To take off the brakes. — The instructor commands: 
Brakes off. The gunner runs the piece slightly for- 
ward, if necessary, to loosen the brakes, and then repeats 
the command brakes off. Nos. 1 and 2 step inside the 
wheels, and each on his own side unkeys the guard rail, 
takes off the shoe, pushes the brake forward to its verti- 
cal traveling position, engaging the button in the groove 
of the guard rail, and keys up the rail; both then resume 
their posts outside the wheel. 

The instructor commands brakes off, after the command 
cease firing, whenever the firing is finished or the guns 
are to be limbered. 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 49 

To Sponge the Piece. 

119. Sponge. 

At this command, repeated by the gunner, No. 2 steps 
between the wheel and the flask, and No. 1 runs to the 
front of the piece; No. 2 unkeys the jointed sponge staff, 
and, assisted by No. 1, opens it; No. 2 then inserts the 
rammer head and passes it through the bore from rear to 
front; as soon as the staff projects beyond the muzzle it 
is seized by No. 1 , who draws the sponge through the 
bore; No. 2, assisted by No. 1, then closes the staff, No. 2 
keys it up, and both numbers resume their posts. 

To Draw the Load. 

1 20. No. 2 unkeys, and, assisted by No. 1, who runs to 
the front of the piece, opens the jointed staff; No. 1 takes 
the staff* and No. 2 resumes his post outside the wheel; 
the gunner steps to the breech, opens it, takes out the 
cartridge and then the projectile, and passes them to 
No. 4, who takes them back to the chest from which they 
were issued. No. 1, as soon as the cartridge has been re- 
moved, inserts the rammer head, gently taps the pro- 
jectile to loosen it, and then pushes it back into the 
chamber. No. 1 should act with great caution to avoid 
accident. If the projectile to be removed have a percus- 
sion fuse, it should not be tapped; if it can not be pushed 
back by a steady pressure, it must be gotten rid of by 
discharging the piece. No. 2, assisted by No. 1, closes 
the staff*. No. 2 keys it up, and both resume their posts. 

Service of the Piece — Summary. 

121. No. 1 rams and fires, mans the right wheel in 
moving to the front, to the rear, and in limbering and 
unlimbering, attends to right brake, and assists in spong- 
ing and unloading. No. 2 hands the projectile and car- 
tridge to the gunner, mans the left wheel in moving to 
the front, to the rear, and in limbering and unlimbering, 

9236 4 



50 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

attends to left brake, and assists in sponging and unload- 
ing. Alternates with No. 4. 

No. 3 assists the gunner at the trail handspike in point- 
ing, limbering, and in moving by hand to the front and 
rear, and at the trail handles in unlimbering. 

No. 4 alternates with No. 2. 

No. 5 serves ammunition at the limber. 

Gunner serves the breech, inserts the projectile and ^ 
cartridge, and points; he inspects the gun and breech ^ 
mechanism after each fire, and the ammunition as it is 
served. 

To Change Posts of Cannoneers, Piece Unlimbered. 

122* Posts are changed so as to instruct each recruit 
in the duties of all the numbers at the piece. 

1. Change posts, 2. March. 

At the first command, all the cannoneers who have 
equipments take them off and lay them down in front of 
them; Nos. 1 and 5 face to the left (No. 5 faces to the 
right if the limber is facing to the rear), No. 3 faces about. 
At the command march — 

No. 1 takes the place of No. 3. 

No. 3 takes the place of No. 5. 

No. 5 takes the place of No. 4. 

No. 4 takes the place of No. 2. 

No. 2 takes the place of No. 1, stepping over the flask. 

As soon as the cannoneers reach their new places, the 
equipments are resumed, and all take their posts. The 
gunner does not change unless specially directed to do 
so; in this case he takes the post of No. 2, and No. 4 takes 
the post of the gunner. 

T& Change Posts of Cannoneers, Piece Limbered. 

123. The instructor commands: 1. Change posts, 
2. March. 

At the first command, the even numbers face about; 



i 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 51 

the numbers who have equipments lay tnem down. At 
command march — 

No. 1 takes the place of No. 3. 

No. 3 takes the place of No. 5. 

No. 5 takes the place of No. 4. 

No. 4 takes the place of No. 2. 

No. 2 takes the place of No. 1. 

No. 4, in changing" with No. 2, passes outside the g'un- 
ner. Equipments are resumed. The gunner changes 
as provided for in changing posts, piece unlimbered. 

Remarks. 

124. A dummy projectile made of wood, and a dummy 
cartridge, filled with tow or other suitable material, and. 
of the same size as the service cartridge, will always be 
used for instruction in the manual of the piece at standing 
gun drill. When No. 1 rams, the dummy projectile will 
be forced through the bore and will drop on the ground 
near the muzzle; when the gunner opens the breech-block 
he will remove the dummy cartridge in the chamber and 
place it on the flask behind him. When, at the command 
load, No. 2 or No. 4 runs to take his post at the left wheel, 
he will first go in front of the muzzle and pick up the 
dummy projectile, returning will pick up the dummy 
cartridge, and then take his post and stand ready to hand 
them at the proper time to the gunner. The gunner 
will carefully remove any dirt or grit on the dummy pro- 
jectile before inserting it. 

12 #5. At the first drills for recruits, the instructor may, 
in his discretion, omit setting the brakes by Nos. 1 and 2; 
he may also have the piece unlimbered and prepared for 
action in the most convenient manner without re gard to 
the drill methods prescribed for the purpose, and proceed 
at once to the instruction of recruits in the loading and 
firing. 

Iti6. After the recruits have become somewhat famil- 
iar with their duties as cannoneers, and at all instruction 



52 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

of the cannoneers at standing gun drill, a target within 
range of the gun will always be designated, and its dis- 
tance given before the command to load. The gunner 
will always be required to set his breech-sight for the 
range and to point the gun properly. The adjustment 
of the breech sight and the direction given by the gunner 
should be frequently verified by the instructor. In order 
to habituate the cannoneers to estimating distances cor- 
rectly, the ranges of all the objects taken as targets 
should be carefully determined by range finders and be 
recorded for use. To make this instruction more prac- 
tical, the position of the gun on the drill ground, and the 
drill ground itself, should occasionally be changed in 
order to secure new targets. 

lay. The dummy cartridge and projectile are not 
used in the formations in battery at mounted drill. 

128. Whenever the text is silent as to the method of 
execution of details at the drill, their performance will 
be left to the men themselves, only exacting that they 
may be executed in a smart and soldierlike manner. 

129. At standing gun drill, the instruction will be 
given upon the preparation of fuses, packing ammuni- 
tion in the chests, care of ammunition in chests, the care 
of the pieces and material, taking off and replacing the 
spare wheel and pole and the tools carried on the caisson, 
and particularly upon the care of the breech mechanism 
and precautions to be observed in firing. 

130. The cannoneers should be cautioned that care 
should be taken not to introduce any dirt into the base 
ring or bore, and that one way to prevent this is to have 
the sponge and rammer staves keyed up when not in use, 
and to keep the sponge and rammer heads free from 
sand and gritty substances. 

131. The importance of inspecting the gun and re- 
moving after each round any deposit that may be ob- 
served on the base ring, on the breech screw, and particu- 
larly on the face of the carrier ring or its seat, and the 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 53 

necessity for a careful and intelligent manipulation of the 
breech mechanism and for properly locking the breech, 
in order to prevent injury to the gun or the men serving 
it, should be strongly impressed upon the gunner. 

132. After the first round, and particularly in cold 
weather, there is sometimes so great a deposit m the bore 
that the projectile is not easily rammed home to its seat, 
but at subsequent rounds this difficulty does not occur. 
Therefore, while it is not necessary, it is advisable, when 
circumstances will permit the interruption of the firing, 
to sponge the bore immediately after the first round. 

To Umber. 

133. To the front. — The instructor commands: 1. Limber^ 
2. Front. 

At the command front, the piece is brought about, and 
the limber, inclining to the right, passes to its place in 
front. 

To bring the piece about, the gunner and No, 3 spring 
to the end of the trail handspike, seize it with both 
hands, the gunner at the end, both facing to the left, then 
raise it and carry it one hundred and eighty degrees to 
the left; No. 1, taking the position for by hand to the rear, 
brings the right wheel around, turning it toward the 
trail; No. 2, taking the position for by hand to the front, 
brings the left wheel around, turning it toward the muz- 
zle. 

The instant the piece is about, the trail is let down; the 
gunner turns the trail handspike over on the flask and 
secures it. To avoid accident, Nos. 1 and 2 step inside 
the wheels and place themselves with their backs against 
the axle seats, and No. 3 and the gunner step directly in 
front of them, respectively. 

As soon as the limber is in front of the piece, the gun- 
ner commands: 1. Limber, 2. Halt, 

At the second command, the limber halts; the gunner 
and No. 3 spring to the trail handles and raise the trail; 



54 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

Nos. 1 and 2 spring outside the wheels and seize the 
spokes with both hands; all run the piece forward; the 
lunette is placed upon the pintle hook and keyed by the 
gunner, and all take their posts at the piece limbered. 

If the limber is facing to the rear, it executes a left 
about and then passes to its place in front. 

If the piece is not horsed, the limber, when moved, is 
drawn by Nos. 4 and 5, who take hold with both hands 
near the end of the pole. If the ground be bad, the in- 
structor may direct Nos. 4 and 5 to assist in moving the 
piece. The limber wheel should pass near but never 
strike the trail. 

134. To the right. — The instructor commands:^ 1. Limber, 
2. Right. 

The trail is carried ninety degrees to the right; the 
limber inclines to the right and takes its place by a right 
wheel. The piece is limbered as before, the gunner and 
No. 3 going to the left of the trail handspike and facing 
to the right; No. 1, taking the position for by hand to the 
front, turns his wheel toward the muzzle; and No. 2, tak- 
ing the position for by hand to the rear^ turns his wheel 
toward the trail. 

If the limber is facing to the rear, it executes a left 
about and then goes to its place. 

13*5. To the left. — The instructor commands: 1. Limber, 
2. Left. 

Executed as limber front, the trail being carried only 
ninety degrees to the left, and the limber inclining to the 
left and taking its place by a left wheel. 

If the limber is facing to the rear, it executes a right 
about and then goes to its place. 

136. To the rear. — The instructor commands: \, Limber, 
2. Rear. 

Executed as limber front, the piece not being brought 
about, and the limber inclining to the right and taking 
its place by two successive wheels to the left. 

If the limber is facing to the rear, the piece is run 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 55 

toward the limber, which is backed toward it at the com- 
mand Limber back, by the gunner; when the limber is 
conveniently placed for limbering, the gunner commands: 

1. Limber, 2. Halt. 

To Fix Pro/onge. 

137. The piece being unlimbered: 1. Fix, 2. Prolonge. 
At the command pro/onge, the limber inclines to the 

right and takes its place as in limbering to the rear, 
halting about four yards from the trail. Nos. 1 and 3 
uncoil the prolonge and pass both ends to the gunner, 
who passes the hook upward through the lunette and 
then engages the hook in the ring about one yard from 
the lunette. No. 5 pulls the double prolonge taut, sees 
that the joined hook and ring are at least one yard from 
the lunette, makes a loop at his end and passes it over 
the pintle-hook, and puts in the key. 

To Coil Prolonge. 

138. To detach the prolonge and coil it up: 1. Coil, 

2. Prolonge. 

At the command prolonge, the gunner disengages the 
hook from the ring. No. 5 takes off the loop, and Nos. 1 
and 3 coil the prolonge. Unless otherwise directed, the 
limber remains facing to the rear. 

To Coil the Prolonge and Limber to the Rear. 

139. 1. Coil, 2. PROLONGE, 3. Limber, 4. Rear. 

The prolonge is detached and coiled as before; the 
piece is run toward the limber, which is backed toward 
it at the command Limber back, of the gunner; when 
the limber is conveniently placed for limbering, the gun- 
ner commands: 1. Limber, 2. Halt. 

To Limber to the Front (Right or Left). 

140. 1. Coif, 2. Prolonge, 3. Limber, 4. Front (Right 
or Left). 



56 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

Executed as already explained; the gunner commands 
Drive on as soon as theprolonge is detached. 

To Mount the Cannoneers. 

141. The piece is limbered and in front of its caisson. 
The instructor explains that the gunner and the even 
numbers mount from the right side, and the odd num- 
bers from the left, and that the cannoneers, when 
mounted, are seated on the chests, facing to the front — 
the gunner, Nos. 3 and 4 on the limber chest of the piece, 
the gunner on the right, No. 3 on the left, and No. 4 in 
the center; Nos. 1 , 2, and 5 on the limber chest of the 
caisson, No. 1 on the left, No. 2 on the right, and No. 5 in 
the center; Nos. 6, 7, and 8 on the middle chest of the 
caisson. No. 6 on the right. No. 7 on the left, and No. 8 in 
the center. 

In the special cases in which the caisson corporal has no 
horse, his place is the center of the middle chest of the 
caisson, and No. 8 mounts with the supernumerary can- 
noneers as prescribed (Par. 143). 

The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, prepare 
TO MOUNT. 2. Mount. 

At the first command the cannoneers run to their re- 
spective places and stand facing the chests which they 
are to mount; the gunner. No. 2, and No. 7, who mount, 
respectively, on the right side of the limber chests of the 
piece and caisson and on the left side of the middle chest 
of the caisson, grasp the chest handles with the right 
hand and place the left foot on the stock; Nos. 3, 1, and 
6, who mount, respectively, on the left side of the limber 
chests of the piece and caisson, and on the right side of 
the middle chest of the caisson, grasp the handles wl':h 
the left hand, and place the right foot on the stock; the 
men who grasp opposite handles of the same chest clasp 
hands to help each other in springing up. 

At the command mount, all spring into their seats, the 
men on the limber chests immediately facing to the front 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 57 

by throwing their legs outward over the wheels; No. 4 
stepping on the flask with his left foot and grasping the 
chest handle with his right hand, and No. 5 stepping on 
the stock with his right foot and grasping the chest 
handle with his left hand, spring up, step over the chest 
and take their seats, placing their hands on the shoulders 
of the men already seated, so as to steady themselves. 
No. 8 takes his seat by stepping on the stock with his 
right foot and grasping with his right hand the left hand 
of No. 7, who helps him up, assisted by No. 6, if necessary. 

When the poles of the piece and caisson face each other 
the numbers who run to the caisson chests cross over be- 
fore taking their places preparatory to mounting. 

142* If the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, 
2. Mount, the men execute at the command mount all 
that has l3een prescribed at the commands prepare to 
mount and mount 

143. Supernumerary cannoneers higher than No. 8 
are mounted on the limber and middle chests of the spare 
caissons, and, if necessary, on the rear chests of caissons 
not carrying a spare wheel. When suc^i supernumerary 
cannoneers are assigned to a caisson, its corporal desig- 
nates where they shall mount. 

144. When the caissons do not accompany their pieces, 
the cannoneers are mounted as follows, viz: the gunner, 
Nos. 3 and 4 on the limber chest of the piece, as before 
prescribed; Nos. 1 and 2 on the axle seats — No. 1 on the 
left, No. 2 on the right; Nos. 6, 7, and 5 on the off wheel, 
off swing, and off lead horses, respectively. At the com- 
mand prepare to mount, Nos. 1 and 2 run to the muzzle and 
take position between the gun and the wheel, each on 
his own side, facing toward the muzzle; No. 1 seizes the 
guard rail with his right hand and places his right foot 
on a spoke of the wheel; No. 2 seizes the guard rail with 
his left hand and places his left foot on a spoke of the 
wheel, and both place their other hands over the trun- 
nions; Nos. 7 and 5 run around the head of the team to 



58 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

the off swing- and off lead horses, respectively. At the 
command mount, all spring into their places — the gunner, 
Nos. 3 and 4 as already prescribed. 

If the detachment consists of the gunner and five men. 
No. 5 will mount on the off swing horse. 

145. When but one caisson accompanies a platoon it 
will be attached to the right piece of the platoon in line 
or the leading piece of the platoon in column. In this 
case the cannoneers may be mounted as follows, viz: Nos. 
1 and 2 on the axle seats; the gunner and Nos. 3 and 4 
on the limber of the piece; Nos. 5, 6, and 7 of the right 
piece of the platoon in line, or the leading piece of the 
platoon in column, on the limber chest, and the same 
numbers of the other piece on the middle chest of the 
caisson — No. 5 on the left. No. 6 on the right, and No. 7 
in the middle. 

In the special cases in which the caisson corporal has no 
horse. No. 7 of the right piece does not accompany it, 
and his place on the caisson is taken by the caisson cor- 
poral. 

To Dismount the Cannoneers. 

146. 1. Cannoneers, prepare to dismount, 2. Dis- 
mount. 

At the first command, the cannoneers on the chests 
stand up in their places, except the gunner and No. 3, 
who face to the rear by throwing their legs outward over 
the wheels; the cannoneers on the off horses prepare to 
dismount. At the command dismount, the cannoneers on 
the axle seats and chests jump off, those on the off horses 
dismount, and all run to their posts. 

147. If the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Dis- 
mount, the men execute at the command dismount all that 
has been prescribed at the commands prepare to dismount 
and dismount. 

14S. If the command action [right, left, or rear) be given 
when the men are mounted on the chests, etc., they im- 
mediately dismount and run to their posts. 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 



59 



Service of the Piece with Diminished Numbers. 

149. The men are drilled in serving the piece with 
diminished numbers, that each may know the duties he 
has to perform in such cases. , 

Disabled men are replaced by the highest numbers, or 
if men be selected to replace them, the highest numbers 
are reduced to fill the vacancies thus created. To drill 
. with reduced numbers, the instructor cautions such num- 
ber fallout; the number designated withdraws four yards 
to the right or left of his post, according as he is an odd 
or even number, and stands at attention facing it. The 
instructor gives special directions as to the re-distribu- 
tion of equipments. 



1 

2 
3 
4 


Numbers re- 
tained. 


Distribution of duties. 


G. 


1. 


2. 3. 


4 


G..l.._. 

G.,1.2 

G., 1,2,3 

G., 1,2, 3, 4 


G. 
G. 
G. 
G. 


1,2,3,4,5. 
1,3. 
1,3. 
1. 


Gunner a 
2, 4, 5. 
2,4. 
2,4. 


ttends lef 


t brake. 


5. 
3. 




5. 



In the first case, gunner and No. 1 have their perma- 
nent posts. 

In the second case, gunner and Nos. 1 and 2 have their 
permanent posts. 

In the third case, gunner and Nos. 1 and 2 have their 
permanent posts, and No. 3 is behind the limber. 

In the fourth case, gunner and Nos. 1,2, and 3 have 
their permanent posts, and No. 4 is behind the limber. 

In the first and second cases, all the cannoneers mount 
on the limber chests. 

In the third and fourth cases, Nos. 1 and 2 mount on the 
axle seats, and the other cannoneers on the limber chest. 

150* The service of the 3.6-inch gun is essentially the 
same as that of the 3.2-inch; but to avoid unnecessary 



60 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

fatigue to the men in limbering and unlimbering the 
heavy field gun, and in running it forward after firing, 
two additional cannoneers, Nos. 6 and 7, should be added 
to the detachment for its service. 

The posts and duties of the cannoneers, according to 
their numbers, are not the same for the service of the 
light and heavy field guns, but the duty of each cannoneer, 
as determined by his post in reference to the gun, its 
limber, or caisson, is the same in both cases. 

Posts of the Cannoneers — 3.6-inch Gun, Limbered. 

151. Nos. 1 and 2 opposite the muzzle; Nos. 3 and 4 
opposite the gun axle; the gunner and No. 5 opposite 
the middle of the flask; Nos. 6 and 7 opposite the lim- 
ber axle. All face to the front and cover each other 
one yard outside the wheels — the gunner and even num- 
bers on the right, and the odd numbers on the left. 

The caisson corporal, dismounted, is on the left of the 
caisson, in line with the limber axle; he faces in the di- 
rection the pole of the caisson points. 

Supernumerary cannoneers Nos. 8, 9, and 10, if present, 
are at the caisson, facing in the same direction as the 
caisson corporal; No. 8 is on the right, his post corre- 
sponding with that of the caisson corporal on the left; 
Nos. 9 and 10 are in line with the axle of the caisson 
body, covering the caisson corporal and No. 8, respec- 
tively. 

1 5I2. When the pieces are not accompanied by their 
caissons, and also when there is but one caisson to a pla- 
toon. No. 8, if present, is posted one yard on the right of 
the doubletree, facing to the front. In both the above 
cases, No. 8 is the highest numbered cannoneer in the de- 
tachment. When projectiles are fired, one cannoneer is 
required in each platoon to hold the horses of the chief 
of platoon and the chiefs of sections. No. 8 of one of the 
pieces, ordinarily the left, performs this duty. 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 61 

Posts of the Cannoneers — 3.6-inch Gun, Unlimbered. 

i53. Gunner. — Same as at the 3.2-ineh gun. 

No. 1. Facing the piece, the right hip on line with the 
front of the right wheel and two feet outside of it. 

No. 2. At the left wheel, in position corresponding to 
that of No. 1 at the right. 

No. 3. Same as No. 1 at the 3.2-inch gun. 

No. 4. Same as No. 2 at the 3.2-inch gun. 

No. 5. Same as No. 3 at the 3.2-inch gun. 

No. 6. Same as No. 4 at the 3.2-inch gun. 

No. 7. Same as No. 5 at the 3.2-inch gun. 

If each piece is accompanied by the caisson, the caisson 
corporal and the supernumerary cannoneers, Nos. 8, 9, 
and 10, take the posts already prescribed for them at the 
piece limbered. The No. 8, told off as horse holder, 
takes the post and performs the duties prescribed for No. 
6 at the 3.2-inch gun. 

1 54. If there is but one caisson to each platoon, or if 
there are no caissons, No. 8 takes the post and performs 
the duties prescribed for No. 6 at the 3.2-inch gun. 

155. Summary of duties of the cannoneers with 3.6-inch 
gun. — No. 1 seizes the spokes of the gun wheel with both 
hands, breaking to the rear with the foot nearest the 
wheel, and assists in limbering, unlimbering, and in mov- 
ing the piece by hand, limbered and unlimbered. At 
the command ready, he breaks well off to the left with 
his left foot, bending his left knee and straightening the 
right leg, heels on a line parallel to the wheel, body 
erect on the hips and eyes on the muzzle. At the flash 
of the gun, after the command fire, he springs back to 
his post. 

No. 2 performs the duties at the wheel next him, as 
prescribed for No. 1 at his wheel. At the command 
ready, No. 2 breaks well off to his right with the right 
foot, bending the right knee and straightening the left 



62 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

leg, heels on a line parallel to the wheel, the body erect 
on the hips and eyes on the muzzle. At the flash of the 
gun, after the command fire, he springs back to his post. 
At standing gun drill, he picks up the dummy projectile 
when it drops from the muzzle and hands it to No. 4. 

No. 3. Same duties as prescribed for No. 1 at the 3.2-gun. 

No. 4. Same duties as prescribed for No. 2 at the 3.2-gun. 

No. 5. Same duties as prescribed for No. 3 at the 3.2-gun. 

No. 6. Same duties as prescribed for No. 4 at the 3.2-gun. 

No. 7. Same duties as prescribed for No. 5 at the 3.2-gun. 

156. In distributing equipments, Nos. 3 and 5 take 
each a primer pouch, and Nos. 4 and 6, each a cartridge 
pouch. 

157. In changing posts, piece limbered or unlim- 
bered — 

No. 1 takes the place of No. 3. 

No. 3 takes the place of No. 5. 

No. 5 takes the place of No. 7. 

No. 7 takes the place of No. G. 

No. 6 takes the place of No. 4. 

No. 4 takes the place of No. 2. 

No. 2 takes the place of No. 1. 

The gunner does not change unless specially directed 
to do so; in this case, he takes the post of No. 4, and No. 6 
takes the post of the gunner. 

To Mount the Cannoneers. 

15 §. When each piece is accompanied by its caisson, 
the gkunner and Nos. 5 and 6 mount on the limber chest of 
the piece, the gunner on the right, No. 5 on the left, and 
No. 6 in the center; Nos. 1, 2, and 7 on the limber chest 
of the caisson, No. 1 on the left. No. 2 on the right, and 
No. 7 in the center; Nos. 3, 4, and 8 on the middle chest 
of the caisson, No. 3 on the left, No. 4 on the right, and 
No. 8 in the center. 

The cannoneers are mounted and dismounted by the 






SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 63 

commands prescribed for the service of the 3. 2- inch gun; 
each cannoneer at the heavy gun conforms to what is 
prescribed for the cannoneer who mounts at the same 
place at the light gun. 

1*5 9. Supernumerary cannoneers are mounted as pre- 
scribed (Par. 143). 

160. When the caissons do not accompany their pieces, 
the cannoneers are mounted as follows, viz: The gunner 
and Nos. 5 and 6 on the limber chest of the piece, as before 
prescribed; Nos. 3 and 4 on the axle seats; Nos. 2, 7, and 1 
on the off wheel, off swing, and off lead horses, respec- 
tively; Nos. 7 and 1 run around the head of the team to 
reach the horses they are to mount. In this case, if the 
pieces are to move a considerable distance at a rapid gait 
before coming into battery, No. 8 should be mounted and 
accompany the chief of platoon, in order to be at hand to 
perform his duties as horse holder. 

161. When but one caisson accompanies each platoon, 
it will be attached to the right piece of the platoon in 
line, or the leading piece of the platoon in column. In 
this case, the cannoneers may be mounted as follows, viz: 
Nos. 3 and 4 on the axle seats; the gunner and Nos. 5 
and 6 on the limber of the piece; Nos. 1, 2, and 7 of the 
right piece of the platoon in line or the leading piece of 
the platoon in column, on the limber chest; and the same 
numbers of the other piece on the middle chest of the 
caisson, No. 1 on the left. No. 2 on the right, and No. 7 
in the center; No. 8 on the off swing horse. 

In all other respects, the service of the 3.6-inch gun is 
the same as prescribed for the 3.2-inch gun. 

Service of the 3.6 -inch Gun with Diminished Numbers. 

162. Disabled men are replaced, first, by Nos. 1 and 2, 
and afterwards by the highest numbers; or if the men 
be selected to replace them, the numbers, in the order 



64 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 



just mentioned, are reduced to fill the vacancies thus 
created. 



2 
3 
4 
5 


Numbers re- 
tained. 


Distribution of duties. 


G. 3. 4. 


5. 


6. 


7. 


G.,3 

G., 3, 4 


G. 
G. 
G. 
G. 
G. 


3. 4, 5, 6. 7. 

3.5. 

3,5. 

3. 

3. 


Gunner 
4, 6, 7. 
4,6. 
4.6. 
4. 


attends to left brake. 

1 1 


G.,3, 4, 5 

G., 3.4,5, 6 

G.,3, 4, 5. 6,7.... 


7. 
5. 
5. 






7. 
6. 




7." 



In the first case, gunner and No. 3 have their perma- 
nent posts. 

In the second case, gunner and Nos. 3 and 4 have their 
permanent posts. 

In the third case, gunner and Nos. 3 and 4 have their 
permanent posts and No. 5 is behind the limber. 

In the fourth case, gunner and Nos. 3, 4, and 5 have 
their permanent posts, and No. 6 is behind the limber. 

In the first and second cases, all the cannoneers mount 
on the limber chests. 

In the third and fourth cases, Nos. 3 and 4 mount on 
the axle seats and the other cannoneers on the limber 
chests. 

In the fifth case, Nos. 3 and 4 mount on the axle seats, 
the gunner and Nos. 5 and 6 on the limber chest, and No. 7 
on the off swing horse. 

Service of Machine Guns. 
163. Only an outline of the service of those machine 
guns that are tired by turning a crank placed at the end 
or side is given in this drill book. The description of the 
gun and its carriage, the nomenclature, the details of its 
equipments, tables of fire, etc., and the special instruc- 
tions for its service, are issued for each kind of machine 
gun that may be supplied to the Army. The gun de- 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 65 

tachment is ordinarily composed of two corporals and 
six cannoneers. 

164. The modifications in the manual of the piece, inci- 
dent to the machine guns mentioned, are alone given; in 
other respects they are handled like an ordinary field 
piece, the composition, formation, and maneuvers of the 
detachment being the same. 

165. The text applies to the Gatling gun; in the service 
of other machine guns fired by a crank, the same princi- 
ples are observed. 

166. There are no equipments to be distributed ex- 
cept the cartridge pouch, with which Nos. 4 and 6 are 
equipped. When the circular feed drum is used, the 
cartridge pouches are not required, and the drums are 
carried, one in each hand. 

To Load and Fire. 

16 T. The piece being unlimbered, the instructor ex- 
plains the mechanism of the gun, points out and names 
its principal parts, and explains the use of the various im- 
plements. He then commands: 1. Load, 2. Ready, 
3. Commence firing. 

The gunner repeats the command load. The command 
ready is given when the piece is pointed. The firing 
begins at the third command, and is kept up without 
intermission until the instructor commands: 1. Cease 

FIRING. 

168. If, instead of load, the instructor commands: 

1. Commence firing, the gunner commands: 1. Load, 

2. Ready, 3. Commence firing. 

The firing begins at the third command of the gunner; 
it ceases at the same command as before. 

Duties of the Gunner. 

169. The gunner sees that the other cannoneers per- 
form their duties properly; he transmits to No. 5 the 

9236 5 



66 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

orders as to the kind of ammunition to be fired, removes 
disabled locks, and attends to the traversing apparatus. 

Load. — The gunner gives the general direction as in 
the manual of the piece; he then steps to the breech, 
adjusts the rear sight at the required elevation, takes 
hold of the handles of the elevating screw, draws back 
his right foot, bends over his left knee, and gives the 
elevation by turning the elevating screw. No. 3, being 
at the end of the trail handspike, the gunner gives the 
exact direction as in the manual of the piece. 

Ready. — The gunner steps clear of the wheel to the 
side where he can best observe the effect of the fire. 

If there be a stock seat, the gunner steps over the trail 
with his right foot and sits down upon the seat in giving 
the elevation and exact direction, rising a little when the 
trail is to be moved. 

Duties of No. 1. 

170. Load. — No. 1 places himself quickly at the 
crank. 

Ready. — No. 1 releases the crank from its stop and 
seizes the handle with the right hand, ready to turn the 
barrels. 

Commence FiRiNa.— No. 1 turns the crank with a 
moderate, uniform motion, allowing ample time for the 
cartridges to drop from the feed case into the carrier 
block, and avoiding all sudden movements or lateral 
wrenching. He keeps his eyes on the hopper to see that 
the cartridges are feeding properly, and may rest his arm 
from time to time by turning the crank with the left 
hand. 

Cease firing. — No. 1 ceases to turn the crank, makes 
it fast by the stop, and returns to his post outside the 
wheel. 

When No. 1 is at the crank, he faces the piece or to the 
front, according as the crank is placed at the end or side 
of the gun. 



:j 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 67 

Duties of No. 2. 

I'yi. Load. — No. 2 places himself quickly near the 
piece, and, facing it, receives a filled feed case from No. 
4 or No. 6, and inserts it in the hopper. 

Commence firing. — No. 2 keeps his eyes on the hop- 
per to see that the cartridges are feeding properly; calls 
case as the feed case in the hopper is nearly empty, when 
No. 4 or 6 hands him another filled feed case; holds this 
case in his right hand, withdrawing the empty feed case 
with his left hand the instant the last cartridge has 
passed, and at once inserting a filled feed case, passes 
the empty feed case over his left shoulder to No. 4 or 6, 
thus keeping up a continuous fire. 

Cease firing-.— No. 2 removes the feed case from the 
hopper and returns to his post outside the wheel. 

If the firing is not to be resumed, No. 2, upon intima- 
tion from the instructor, lifts up the hopper and removes 
the cartridges from the carrier block, No. 1 reversing the 
crank. 

Duties of No. 3. 

17^. Load. — No. 3 goes to the end of the handspike 
and assists the gunner in pointing, as in the Manual of 
the Piece. 

If, during the firing, a cartridge remains in one of the 
barrels, and it is necessary to use the ejecting rod. No. 3 
steps to the front, unkeys it, and, under the direction of 
the gunner, pushes out the metallic case by forcing it 
backward just before an entire revolution of the barrel is 
completed. 

Duties of No. 4. 

173. Load. — No. 4 runs to the limber chest, receives 
four or five filled feed cases from No. 5, hastens to the 
piece, and hands a case to No. 2. 

Commence firing.— No. 4 hands the filled feed case 
to No. 2, as called for, receives back the empty feed case, 



68 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

and, when his cartridge pouch is exhausted, runs to the 
limber, turns in the empty cases, receives a new supply 
of filled ones, and takes his post five yards behind and 
two feet outside the left wheel. 

No. 4 alternates with No. 6 in supplying No. 2 with 
ammunition. 

Cease firing. — No. 4 returns to the limber any cases 
he may have, and resumes his permanent post. 

Duties ofjio. 5. 

174. No. 5 issues the ammunition and returns the 
empty feed cases to the limber chest. 

Duties of No. 6. 

175. Load. — As soon as No. 4 leaves the limber. No. 
6 receives four or five filled feed cases and takes the per- 
manent post of No. 4. When No. 4 runs back to the lim- 
ber, No. 6 takes post near No. 2. No. 6 alternates with 
No. 4 in supplying No. 2 with ammunition. 

To Exercise Several Detachments. 

176. The battery being formed for drill, the first ser- 
geant forms the gun detachments and closes them in 
upon each other, as prescribed in the School of the Bat- 
tery Dismounted. 

177. To march the guri detachments to the park. — The de- 
tachments are marched to the park in column of files or 
in column of detachments. The column enters the park 
by the left, if marching right in front; by the right, if 
marching left in front. 

The instructor directs the column so as to approach the 
park parallel to its front, and either in front or in rear of 
the pieces, the fiank of the column being at such a dis- 
tance from the poles, lead horses, or muzzles that the de- 
tachments, when formed in line near the pieces, can be 
readily established in their proper positions by the gun- 
ners. 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 69 

To Post the Gun Detachments with Their Pieces. 

178. The column having arrived at the park, the in- 
structor commands: Detachments opposite your pieces. 

Column of files. — As each detachment arrives opposite its 
piece, the gunner halts it and commands, according as 
the right or left is in front: 1. Left (ov Right), 2. Face, 
3. Right, 4. Dress, 5. Front. 

Column of detachments. — As each detachment arrives op- 
posite its piece the gunner halts it and commands, ac- 
cording as the right or left is in front: 1. Detachment left 
(or right), 2. MARCH, 3. FRONT. 

In either case the gunner aligns the detachment from 
his post on its right. 

To Serve the Pieces. 

179. The instructor causes the cannoneers to call off, 
and posts them at the pieces, the paulins and gun covers 
being taken off, folded up, and strapped on the lids of 
the chests, the tompion taken off and secured to the lim- 
ber; the instructor then exercises the cannoneers in the 
manual of the piece, detachments being substituted for 
detachment in the commands for forming the gun detach- 
ments and in changing their posts at the piece. 

Firings. 

180. The pieces being in battery, the captain com- 
mands: 1. Range (so many) yards, 2. Load. 

At these commands, repeated by the chief s of platoons, 
the pieces are loaded as before explained. 

181. To fire by piece. — The captain commands: 1. Fire 
by piece, 2. No. one [two or three, etc.), 3. FiRE. 

182. To fire by platoon. — The captain commands: 1. Fire 
by platoon, 2. Right {Left or Center) platoon, 3. Fire. 

183. To fire by battery. — The captain commands: 1. Fire 
by battery, 2. Battery, 3. FiRE. 

In firing by piece, by platoon, and by battery, the 
chiefs of platoons repeat the first command; the second 



70 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

and third are not repeated. In firing- by platoon, as soon 
as the chiefs of platoons have repeated the first com- 
mand, they designate the platoons with which they are 
respectively posted, as right, center, and left platoon; in 
firing" by piece they designate the pieces of their platoons 
as No. one, two, and three, etc. 

1§4, In the fire by platoon and piece, the correction 
for the elevation, deflection, and length of fuse which 
the captain may have occasion to order having been 
effected, he gives the order for the next platoon or piece 
to fire, and so on. When the range is correctly estab- 
lished, the captain commands: Continue the fire; 
the platoons in one case, and the pieces in the other, are 
then fired by the commands of the chiefs of platoons, in 
regular order from right to left, or left to right, accord- 
ing to the progression indicated by the captain's com- 
mands before given. When the last platoon or last piece 
of the battery is fired, the chief of the platoon will call 
out round completed; this will* be repeated by the chief of 
the center platoon, and will be notification to the chief 
of the right (or left) platoon to recommence the fire with 
his platoon or outer piece, as the case may be. The fir- 
ing will be thus continued with the elevation, deflection, 
and length of fuse fixed by the captain until the com- 
mand cease firing, or until the captain again assumes the 
regulation of the fire, by giving the command for each 
platoon or piece, as already prescribed, in order to make 
corrections in the old range or to establish a new one. 

185. If the captain commands: 1. Fire by platoon, 2. Right 
(or Such) platoon; or, 1. Fire by piece, 2. No. one (or s/jr), 
3. Commence firing-, the platoons in one case, and the 
pieces in the other, are fired by the commands of the 
chiefs of platoons as just explained for the captain's com- 
mand continue the fire. This method of beginning the fire 
will be used only when the range of the object fired at 
is already known. 

1 8 6. Ordinary fire by piece will be at the rate of six 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 71 

shots in two minutes for a six-gun battery, or an interval 
of twenty seconds between successive shots. If a slower 
or more rapid rate of fire 'is required, the captain will 
caution slow fire or rapid fire. The rate of the slow and 
rapid fire will be regulated by cautions from the captain. 

The intervals between successive shots in slow fire 
should not be less than thirty seconds, and in rapid fire 
should be sufficient to enable the effect of any one shot 
to be observed before the next is fired. To resume the 
usual rate of fire, the captain will caution: Ordinary fire. 

The fire by platoon is regulated in the same manner; 
in ordinary fire the intervals between two successive 
platoon volleys is forty seconds. 

18T. To fire at will. — The captain commands: 1. Fire at 
will, 2. Commence riRiNa. 

The chiefs of platoons repeat both commands; at the 
second, each piece fires continuously by the commands of 
its gunner without reference to the others. This kind 
of fire is used in action for short ranges only. It will not 
be used in instruction at drill for firing blank cartridges. 

188. In the firing of a single platoon, the instructor 
commands: 1. Fire by piece, 2. No. one (or two)^ 3. Fire, 
and, 1. Fire by platoon, 2. Platoon, 3. Fire; and, 1. Fire at 
will, 2. Commence firing. 

189. In all firings, the pieces are loaded as soon as dis- 
charged, by the commands of the gunner, chief of platoon, 
or captain, according as the fire is by piece, platoon, or bat- 
tery, until the command cease firing is given; but when it 
is necessary to change quickly from one projectile to an- 
other, the captain commands: 1. Loaded guns, 2. RAPID 
FIRE. At this command, the guns already loaded are 
fired rapidly, and none of the guns are loaded again until 
the captain gives the commands. 

190. When ammunition is used, the captain com- 
mands: 1. With cartridges; or, 1. Range, point blank [ov so 
many) yards, with canister; or, 1. Range, (so many) yards ^ 
with shell, (etc.) 2. Load. 



72 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

191. In a machine battery, to fire by piece, by platoon, 
or by battery, the captain commands: 1. Fire by piece, 

2. No. one (or Such piece); or, 1. Fire by platoon, 2. Right 
(Center or Left) platoon; or, 1. Fire by battery, 2. Battery, 

3. Commence firing-. Each piece that commences the 
firing continues it until the command cease firing. 

When ammunition is used, the captain commands: 

1. With blank cartridges; or, 1. Range (so many) yards, with 
ball cartridges, 2. Load, before giving the above com- 
mands for firing by piece, platoon, or battery. 

192. To discontinue firing, the captain commands: 
Cease firing. 

The chiefs of platoons and sections repeat the com- 
mands, which are executed as before explained; the 
loaded pieces are discharged by special direction, or the 
loads withdrawn. 

193. A piece should not be limbered while loaded. 
In exceptional cases, where the projectile can not be 
readily removed, it may be left in the bore, the gunner 
removing the cartridge. The projectile should be re- 
moved or the piece fired at the first convenient oppor- 
tunity. 

To Leave the Park. 

194. The detachments arc mai'ched from the park in 
column of files or in column of detachments. 

195. The detachments being in front or in rear, to 
form column of files, the instructor commands: 1. Right, 

2. Face, 3. Close, 4. March. At the command face, all 
face to the right; at the command march, the right de- 
tachment stands fast, the others close up and are halted 
by their gunners. 

196. The detachments being in front or in rear, to 
form column of detachments, the instructor commands: 
1. Detachments right (or left), 2. March, li, C/ose, 4. March, 
5. Guide right (or left). 

At the second command, each detachment turns to the 






SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 73 

right; at the third command, the gunner of the leading 
detachment cautions it to stand fast; at the fourth com- 
mand, all the detachments in the rear of the first step off, 
and each is halted by its gunner when at detachment dis- 
tance from the preceding detachment. 

MECHANICAL MANEUVERS. 
197. For purposes of instruction the detachment con- 
sists of gunner, caisson corporal, and seven cannoneers. 
Care must be taken that the men do not overstrain them- 
selves, and that the gun is not injured. Celerity in the 
execution of the mechanical maneuvers is always subor- 
dinated to the careful handling of the material, which is 
of the first importance. These maneuvers are not exe- 
cuted at drill when the carriages are horsed. 

To Change Wheels. 

19§. The piece being unlimbered and the limber in 
front of the caisson, the instructor commands: 1. Prepare 
to change right (or left) wheel, 2. Change WHEEL. 

Hight wheel with spare wheel. — At the first command, 
Nos. 1 and 2 remove the linch-pin and washer of the dis- 
abled wheel; the gunner and Nos. 3 and 4 hasten to the 
front of the -piece; Nos. 5, 6, and 7 dismount the spare 
wheel; No. 5 runs it near and parallel to the disabled 
wheel, leaving room for the latter to be taken off; No. 2 
steadies the spare wheel in front; Nos. 5 and 1 then take 
hold of the disabled wheel. No. 5 in front. The caisson 
corporal, assisted by No. 7, takes off the spare pole and 
places it, butt to the front, under the axle, close to the 
shoulder; Nos. 6, 7, and the caisson corporal, in the order 
named, No. 6 next the axle and close to it, man the pole 
in rear; Nos. 3, 4, and the gunner, in the order named, 
No. 3 next the axle, and close to it, man the pole in 
front, and all the cannoneers at the pole stand between 
it and the piece, facing the wheel. Only so much of the 
butt end of the pole is in front of the axle as will give 
room for the three cannoneers who apply themselves to it. 



74 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 



^ At the command change wheel, the side of the carriage 
IS raised; Nos. 1 and 5 take off the disabled wheel- No 5 
runs It to the rear; Nos. 1 and 2 put on the spare wheel, 
No. 1 t^akmg hold m rear; Nos. 1 and 2 replace the linch- 
pm and washer; Nos. 5, 6, and 7 place the disabled wheel 
on the spare-wheel axle, and the caisson corporal, assisted 
by No 7, replaces the spare pole. The cannoneers re- 
sume their posts. 

The men at the pole must raise the end of the axle hiffh 
enough to throw the weight on the other wheel, and those 
taking off the wheel must lift it, and not add to the 
weight of the carriage by letting the wheel slide along- 
the axle arm. ^ 

A trench five or six inches deep for the other wheel 
will make it easier to raise the weight and prevent the 
carriage from slipping. If the ground is hard and 
smooth, and a trench cannot be made, the chief of sec- 
tion, or m his absence, a spare man, should seize the 
other wheel at the top with both hands and apply one 
foot at the bottom, to prevent the wheel from slippfhg- 

Left wheel with spare wheel.-The change is made and 
the numbers perform the same duties as prescribed for 
changing the right wheel . 

199. If there be no spare wheel, the disabled wheel 
may be replaced by one of the limber wheels. In remov- 
ing the hmber wheel for this purpose No. 5 attends to its 
linch-pin and washer; Nos. 1 and 5 take off the limber 
wheel. No. 5 taking hold in rear; No. 5 runs it forward. 
1 he disabled wheel is replaced by the limber wheel as 
already prescribed for the spare wheel. As soon as the 
limber wheel is put on the piece, the piece wheel, if serv- 
iceable enough to be of use there, is put on the limber 
No. 5 running the disabled wheel to the rear; Nos 1 and 
5 put it on the limber. No. 5 taking hold in front; No. 5 
attends to the Imch-pin and washer. The limber is raised 
by means of the spare pole, as before described for rais- 
ing the gun-carriag-e, and as soon as the wheel is removed 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 75 

the axle is lowered gently to the ground. When the 
limber is horsed, the team must first be unhitched. 

When a lifting-jack is available it will be used instead 
of the spare pole for changing wheels. The jack is 
placed, manipulated, and removed under the direction of 
the gunner. 

To Dismount a Piece. 

200. The piece being unlimbered, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. PREPARE TO DISMOUNT PIECE, 2. DISMOUNT 

At the first command, the gunner runs down the ele- 
vating screw; Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4, each on his own side, 
remove the cap-squares and then the implements, plac- 
ing the latter on the ground outside the wheels, on that 
side of the carriage from which they were taken; Nos. 6 
and 4 then take the prolonge, or any other well-stretched 
rope, and pass ii to the gunner, who makes a clove hitch 
in the middle and passes it over the breech. The two 
ends are seized by Nos. 3 and 4, each on his own side, and, 
assisted by Nos. 1 and 2, respectively, draw them taut 
and as nearly horizontal as possible, they then wind the 
ends around the wheels, first over the tire, then around a 
spoke, and again over the tire, and fasten them so that • 
the rope will not slip when the weight of the gun comes 
on it The caisson corporal takes the handspike from 
the caisson and inserts the butt end in the muzzle. At 
the command dismount piece, the caisson corporal, as- 
sisted by Nos. 6 and 7, lifts the muzzle sufficiently high 
to raise the trunnions out of their beds; Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 
4 at the wheels, run the carriage forward; the gun will 
be carried up and forward as the wheels turn; the cais- 
son corporal and Nos. 6 and 7, move forward as the gun 
advances, keeping it nearly horizontal. When the car- 
riage has moved so far forward that the weight of the gun 
is thrown on the forward part of the wheels, Nos. 1, Z, 3, 
and 4 hold back to prevent its g-oing too fast. The gun- 



"^^ SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

ner, assisted by No. 5, is at the end of the trail handsnike 

and gives the direction to the carriage. If it is not ki- 

tended to dismount the carriage, the prolonge and im 

plements are replaced; the cannoneers^take thefr posTs 

about the carnage. The gun may be laid on the e^ound 

°\?X%K1^^y °" ^kids at any desii-ed height. ^ ^' 

A ' f f,"° ^^y ^^^0 ^^ dismounted by the same cotn- 

rout'twnf"°^'i,°^l ^^ ^^^^'^^ hole iV the ground 
about twenty inches deep, to receive the muzzle- nn 

rL'r -riS' hw:;-r^ ^!?^^-P^" screws,take ouuTe car. 
rier ring hinge-pin, and remove the carrier-rina- and 
breech-block. At the firstcommand, Nos. 1, 1, a'a/d 4re 
move the cap-squares and implements; Nos. 3 and 4 chock 
as nlS th«/unnerruns up the elevating screw ^far 

cures if^fT^r'^-*"™" °^^^ *h® *'"^il handspike and se- 
cures it, the caisson corporal and No. 7 go in front to 
bear down on the muzzle; Nos. 1 and 2 go in 4ar Cf the 
under X^w/h T ^^""^ °i^ '^' ^^^^^^ ^°d the othe? 
ffunner and Nnf 'I'^r*^ ^^.^^^ *° ""^''^ *he breech; the 
fr„"f * • . ®- ?' '*' ^'^^ 5 are at the trail and stand 
ready to raise it, the gunner and No. 5 taking hold of the 
trail handles; No. 6 passes the end of the frXnge or 
other rope, through the trail handles. At the commknd 
dismount p,ece. the caisson corporal and No 7 tear down 

tran untirfh'; '^^ ^,""°"'" ^'^'^ ^^^- ^' ^' ^'^"^ ^ raise the 
trail until the muzzle comes against the bottom of the 

hole prepared for it, No. 6 takin|care to prevent ttietraU 

from falling over to the front; Nos. 1 and 2, in rear of the 

axle, push against the breech to raise it,'and when thi 

and No 7ToT^' '"'i ^'""l^^ to assist the caisson corporal 
and No. 7 to keep it in that position. The carriage is 

dnwl^jr®*^ ^ ^''^ ^'^^hes to the'^rear.when the trailfs lei 
down; the carriage is then run back and the piece dropped 

halt, thf r"*^' "^^"^ "P^^''*^' ^« ««o° ^« the carrS 
halts, the gunner runs down the elevating screw. The 
^^^^yf^^'^lg'^^fJP^oml direction as to thi replacement 
or other disposition of the carrier-ring and breech-S 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 77 

On account of the possible defacement and injury due 
to removing" and replacing the carrier-ring and breech- 
block, this method of dismounting will not be resorted to 
except when a well-stretched suitable rope is not available 
for the method described in Par. 200. 

To Mount a Piece. 

20tS« The piece resting on skids, vent upward, the 
instructor commands: PREPARE to mount piece, 
2. Mount piece. 

At the first command, the gunner and No. 5 at the 
trail, assisted by Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 at the wheels, place 
the carriage so that the breech may be opposite the front 
of the wheels and half-way between them. The gunner, 
Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 then adjust the rope as in dismounting 
the piece, and the caisson corporal inserts his handspike 
in the bore. At the command mount piece, Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 
4, at the wheels, run the carriage to the rear; the caisson 
corporal and Nos. 6 and 7 lift the muzzle, keeping the 
piece nearly horizontal, and follow the movement of the 
carriage to the rear. When the trunnions are over the 
beds, the rope is loosened and the trunnions will fall in 
place. If the rope becomes slack, it may be necessary to 
lower the muzzle a little to allow the rope to slip over 
the trunnion bolts. The gunner, assisted by No. 5, is at 
the end of the trail handspike and gives the direction to 
the carriage. 

If the gun does not rest on skids, the caisson corporal, 
assisted by No. 7 at the handspike in the muzzle, raises 
the muzzle high enough to enable the gunner to place a 
block, etc., under the gun in rear of the trunnions; the 
cannoneers at the handspike then bear down on the muz- 
zle so that the gunner may adjust the rope around the 
breech. 

203. The piece may also be mounted by the same com- 
mands, with the aid of an extra handspike, as follows: 
Dig an oblong hole in the ground, about twenty inches 



78 SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 

deep, to receive the muzzle. At the first command, Nos. 
1, 2, 3, and 4 remove the cap-squares and implements; 
the gunner runs down the elevating screw and turns over 
the trail handspike and secures it; No. 6 passes the end 
of the prolonge, or other rope, through the trail handles; 
the gunner and caisson corporal each take a handspike; 
the caisson corporal inserts his in the muzzle, and, as- 
sisted by No. 7, raises the chase so that the gunner may 
put his handspike under the piece a little in rear of the 
trunnions; this done, the caisson corporal withdraws his 
handspike from the muzzle and places it under the breech 
so that the larger ends of the handspikes are on opposite 
sides of the piece; the muzzle is depressed to enable the 
caisson corporal to place his handspike; Nos. 5, 6, and 7 
assist at the handspike of the caisson corporal, and Nos. 

1, 2, and 3 at that of the gunner— the gunner, caisson cor- 
poral, and Nos. 1 and 5 being at the ends. All being 
ready, the gunner commands: Heave, when the men, 
acting together, raise the piece upright on its muzzle in 
the hole prepared for it; the caisson corporal and Nos. 1, 

2, and 7 steady it in that positipn; the gunner and No. 5 
at the trail, assisted by Nos. 3 and 4 at the wheels, run 
the carriage forward to within a foot of the piece; Nos. 
3 and 4 chock the wheels; they then go to the trail to 
assist in raising it. 

At the command mount piece, the trail is raised. No. 6, 
at the rope through the trail handles, taking care to 
prevent the trail from falling over to the front; the cais- 
son corporal pushes gently against the piece so as to bring 
the trunnions into their beds; the trail is then lowered 
carefully to the ground, the wheels are unchocked, the 
implements replaced, and the cap-squares secured. 

The piece may also be raised upon its muzzle by means 
of the prolonge, without the use of handspikes. The gun- 
ner fixes the middle of the prolonge to the breech by two 
half-hitches, and at least six cannoneers man the ends. 
By hauling upon the prolonge at the command heave of 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 79 

the gunner, the piece is raised upon its muzzle; it is then 
mounted as before. 

To Dismount a Gun- Carriage. 

204. The piece being dismounted, the gunner runs the 
elevating screw up or down, according as it is the double 
screw or the lazy-tongs. The sides of the carriage are 
successively raised by means of the spare pole, and the 
wheels removed by Nos. 1 and 5 as before prescribed; 
care is taken to lower the axle gently to the ground. If 
blocks are available, the gunner places them to receive 
the carriage. 

To Dismount a Limber. 

205* The limber is dismounted as prescribed for the 
gun-carriage. 

To Mount Gun-Carriages and Limbers. 

206. The method of mounting gun-carriages and 
limbers corresponds to that of dismounting them. 

207. When a lifting-jack is available, it will be used 
instead of the spare pole for dismounting and mounting 
carriages and limbers. The jack is placed, manipulated, 
and removed under the direction of the gunner. 

To Carry a Piece. 

208. If the gun carriage is damaged to such an extent 
that it can not support the gun, recourse must be had to 
the best makeshifts available to transport the gun to the 
place where it can be refitted. 



80 THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



THE SABEE AND PISTOL. 

MANUAL OF THE SABER. 

209. On foot, the saber is habitually hooked up; if the 
saber be drawn, the scabbard is hooked up. 

210. The instructor points out and names the differ- 
ent parts of the saber and saber-knot: Saber : Hilt [gripe, 
guard); Blade [back, edge, point); Scabbard [bands, rings) 
springs). Saber-knot: Tassel, strap, sliding-loops. 

211. The right and left sides of the gripe are the rigfht 
and left sides in the position of carry. 

212. The hand is in tierce when it holds the gripe, 
back of the hand up; in quarte, when it holds the gripe, 
back of the hand down. 

To Take and Close Intervals. 

213. The instructor specifies the interval in yards, 
and commands: 1. To the right (or left) take intervals, 
2. March, 3. Squad, 4. Halt, 5. Left (or Right), 6. Face. 

At the command march, the leading file steps off, fol- 
lowed in succession by the others at the specified interval; 
the command halt is given when the last file has its in- 
terval. 

214. To close intervals, the instructor commands: 
1. To the right (or left) assemble, 2. March. 

At the command march, the file on the right stands fast, 
the other files face to the right, and at the command march 
step off, successively halting and facing to the front upon 
closing to facing distance. 

215. During the first lessons, the files are opened to an 
interval of one yard. 



I 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



81 



The Manual of the Saber is taught in the following 
order and by the following commands: — 

216. 1. Draw, 2. Saber. 

At the command draw, unhook the saber with the 
thumb and first t^o fingers of the left hand, thumb on 
the end of the hook, fingers lifting the upper ring; pass 
the right hand through the saber-knot and push the slid- 
ing-loop up to the wrist with the left hand; grasp the 
scabbard with the left hand at the upper band, bring the 
hilt a little forward, seize the gripe 
with the right hand, and draw the blade 
six inches out of the scabbard, pressing 
the scabbard against the thigh with 
the left hand. At the command saber, 
draw the saber quickly, 
raising the arm to its full 
extent to the right front at 
an angle of about forty-five 
> degrees, the saber, edge 
\down, in a straight line 
with the arm; make a slight 
pause and bring the back of 
■'the blade against the shoul-/. 
der, edge to the front, arm^'^'^'^z 
nearly extended, hand by 
the side, elbow back, third 
and fourth fingers back of the gripe; at the 
same time hook up the scabbard with the 
thumb and first two fingers of the left hand, 
thumb through the upper ring, fingers sup- 
pi. 10, Par. 216. porting It, and drop the left hand by the side. 
This is the position of carry saber, dismounted. 

217. 1. Present, 2. Saber. 

Carry the saber to the front, base of the hilt as high as 
the chin and six inches in front of the neck, edge to the 
left, point six inches in front of the hilt, thumb extended 
9236 6 





PI. 9, Par. 216. 



82 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



on the back of the gripe, little finger by the side of the 
others. 
1. Carry, 2. Saber. 
Resume the carry. 

218. 1. Inspection, 2. Saber. 
Take the position of present saber. (Two) 

Turn the wrist outward, by a motion to the 
front and right, to show the other side of the 
blade, the edge to the right. (Three) Re- 
sume the carry. 

219. 1. Port, 2. Saber. 
Place the right hand in tierce, in front of the 

1 right hip, at the height of 
J the waist, thumb extended 

on the back of the gripe, 

third and fourth fingers by 

the side of the others, edge 

to the front, blade inclined 

to the left and front, point 

two feet higher than the 

hand. 
1. Carry, 2. Saber. 
Resume the carry. 

Return, 2. Saber. 
At the command return, carry the 
right hand opposite to and six inches 
from the left shoulder, the saber ver- 
tical, edge to the left; at the same time 
unhook and lower the scabbard with 
the left hand, supporting the upper 
ring on the second finger, the thumb and forefinger 
supporting the scabbard above the ring, the arm ex- 
tended, the hand turned outward; turn the head to the 
left, fix the eyes on the mouth of the scabbard, raise the 
right hand vertically and lower the blade, the back pass- 
ing across and along the left arm, point to the rear, and 
insert the blade six inches in the scabbard and turn the 



PI. n, Par. 217. 

220. 1. 




PI. 12, Par. 219. 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 83 

head to the front. At the command saber, send the blade 
home in the scabbard, free the wrist from the saber-knot 
and drop the right hand by the side; hook up the saber, 
turning- it toward the body, guard to the rear, and drop 
the left hand by the side. 

To Rest and Dismiss the Squad. 

221. Sabers being returned, or at a carry, the squad 
is rested, as previously explained. 

Being *at a carry, to rest, imposing steadiness of posi- 
tion and silence, the instructor commands: 1. Parade, 
2. Rest. At the command rest, take the position of 
parade rest, the point of the saber up, edge to the left, 
blade crossing in front of the right shoulder, hands 
crossed in front, the left hand over the right. 

222. To resume the attention: 1. Squad, 2. Atten- 
tion. 

At the command attention, resume the position of the 
soldier and come to the carry. 

223. To dismiss the squad the instructor first causes 
sabers to be returned, and then commands: Dismissed. 

MANUAL OF THE KNIFE. 

224. The knife is drawn, returned, and inspected by 
the commands, and with the obvious modifications, by 
the means prescribed for the saber, substituting knife foi 
saber in the commands. The present and parade rest are 
not executed with the knife. 

SABER EXERCISE. 

225* The men are armed only with the saber and are 
placed in single rank. 

The object of the moulinets is to give suppleness to the 
wrist, -which increases the dexterity and confidence of 
the men. Each lesson is begun and ended with the 
moulinets, executed with a quickness proportioned to the 
progress of the men, remembering that force is5 less nee- 



ft 



84 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



I 



essary than skill. In teaching the saber exercise oi 
foot, special reference must be had to its application 
when mounted. To this end, recruits are not to lean to 
one side, which would derange their seats on horseback, 
nor direct the blade so as to strike the head or haunches 
of the horse or the knee of the rider. 

All cuts, when not executed by the motions, are ter- 
minated by a half moulinet in bringing the saber to the 
position of guard. 

The thrust requires less force, and its result is more 
prompt, sure, and decisive than the cut. 

The saber is held in the full grasp, and in all motions 
in the saber exercise, except right point and rear point, the 
thumb is extended along the back of the gripe and 
pressed against the guard. During the first lessons, the 
instructor takes care to rest the men from time to time, 
and to always give his explanations when the squad is at 
a carry or guard, only keeping the arms extended long 
enough to correct faults. 

Guard. 

226. The men having at least three 
yards interval and the sabers at a 
carry, the instructor commands: 
Guard. Carry the right foot about 
twenty inches to the right, heels on the 
same line; place the left hand, closed, 
six inches from the body and as high 
as the elbow, fingers toward the body, 
little finger nearer than the thumb 
(position of the bridle-hand); at the 
same time place the right hand in 
tierce in front of the hip and at the 
height of the waist, thumb extended 
on the back of the gripe, third and 
fourth fingers by the side of the others, 
the point of the saber to the left and a 
little higher than the hand; the blade, 




PI. 13, Par. 226. 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



85 



edge to the front, resting on the left forearm near the 
wrist. 

227. 1. Carry, 2. Saber. 

Resume the position of the soldier and come to the carry. 

228. The saber exercise is taught by the following 
commands, all the movements being executed from 
guard. 

The Moulinets. 

229. 1. Left, 2. Moulinet. 

Extend the arm obliquely to the left and front to its 




PI. 14, Par. 229. 



full length, the hand in tierce and as high as the eyes, the 
point of the saber in front of the left shoulder and a little 
higher than the hilt. (Two) Lower the blade, edge to 



86 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



the front, and make rapidly a circle around the hand, to 
the left of and near the horse's neck, the blade passing 
close to the left elbow; return to the first position. 
(Three) Resume the guard. 

230. 1. Right, 2. Moulinet. 

Extend the arm to the front to its full length, the 
hand in quarte and as high as the eyes, the point in' 




PI 15, Par. 230. 

front of the right shoulder and a little higher than the 
hilt. (Two) Lower the blade, edge to the front, make 
rapidly a circle around the hand, to the right of and 
near the horse's neck, the blade passing close .to the right 
elbow; return to the first position. (Three) Resume 
the guard. 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



87 



231. To combine the execution of the two preceding 
moulinets: 1. Left and right (or Right and left), 2. MOULI- 
NET. 

Execute the first motion of left moulinet. (Two) Exe- 
cute the second motion of left moulinet, and, without 
pausing, turn the wrist and execute the second motion 
of right moulinet. (Three) Resume the guard. 

S32. 1. Rear, 2. Moulinet. 




Raise the arm to the right and rear to its full extent, 
the point of the saber upward, the edge to the right, 



88 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



the body slightly turned to the right. (Two) Begin by 
moving the point of the saber toward the left, and de- 
scribe a circle in rear. (Three) Resume the guard. 

In executing the moulinets the right arm is kept as 
steady as possible, the saber being controlled by motions 
of the wrist and hand. 

The instructor may repeat the command two, and 
cause the second motion of each of the moulinets to be 
repeated. 

When the men execute the moulinets well, the instruc- 
tor requires them to execute several in succession. For 
this purpose he commands: L Continue the motion, 2. Left 
(or Left and right, etc.), 3. MouLlNET, 4. GUARD. The sec- 
ond motion of the moulinet is then executed until the 
command guard. 

The Points. 
233. 1. Tierce, 2. Point. 

Raise the hand in tierce as high 
^''^'^'^'*^ as the eye; throw back the right 
shoulder, carrying the elbow to 
the rear, the point 
of the saber to the 
front, the edge up- 
ward. (Two) Thrust 
to the front, extend- 
ing the arm to its full 
length, edge to the 
right. (Three) Re- 
sume the guard. 

234. 1. Quarte, 
2. Point. 

Lower the hand in 
quarte near the <;w, 
right hip, the point a li ttle if!,^'^^^ 
higher than the wrist. (Two) 
Thrust to the front, extending the 




PI. 17, Par. 233. 




THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



89 





arm to its full length, edge to the left 
the guard. 

235. 1. Left, 2. Point. 
Turn the head and shoulders to 

the left, draw back the hand in 
tierce toward the right and near 
the right shoulder, hand at the 
height of the neck, edge of the 
blade upward, point to the left and 
as high as the hand. (Two' 
Thrust to the left, extending the 
arm to its full length, edge to the 
front. (Three) Resume the 
guard. 

236. 1. Right, 2. Point. ,^ 
Turn the head "^'ff 

to the right, 

carry the hand 

in quarte near the left breast, edge 

of the blade upward, point to the 

right and as high as 

the hand. (Two) 

Thrust to the right, 

extending the arm 

to its full length, 

edge to the front. 

(THREE)Resume the 

guard. 

237. 1. Rear, 2. 
, Point. 

Turn the head and 

shoulders to the 
right and rear, bring the hand in quarte ^ 
near the left breast, point to rear and as-^ 



PI. 19, Par. 235. 



PI. 20, Par. 236. 



high as the hand, edge upward. (Two) 
Thrust to the rear, extending the arm 




PI. 21, Par. 237. 



90 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



to its full length, edge to the right. (Three) Resume 
the guard. 

2S§. 1. Against infantry, 2. Left, 3. Point. 

Same as left point, except the point 
is downward. (Two) Thrust down in 
tierce. (Three) Resume the guard. 

239. 1. Against infantry, 2. Right, 
3. Point. 

Same as quarte 
point, turning the 
head and shoul- 
ders to the right, 
inclining the 
point downward. 
(T W o) Thrust in 
quarte. (Three) 
Resume the 
guard. 

240. 1. Against 
infantry, 2. Front, 
3. Point. 

Bend well 
down to the pi. 23, Par. 239. 

right, extend the right arm well 
downward, the hand in rear of the 
thigh, back of the saber upward. 
(Two) Thrust forward. (Three) 
Resume the guard. 

The Cuts. 

241. 1. Front 2. Cut. 

Raise the saber, the arm half ex- 
tended, forearm nearly vertical, the 
hand in front of the right shoulder 
and a little higher than the head, 
PI. 24, Par. 240. thc cdgc upward, the point to the 




PI. 22, Par. 238. 





THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



91 



rear and higher than the hand, the blade inclined about 
forty-five degrees. (Two) Cut, extending 
the arm to its full length. (Three) Re- 
sume the guard. 

The first position of front cut is the posi- 
tion of raise saber. 

Being at raise saber, to carry saber, the 
)instructor commands: 1. Carry, 2. Saber. 

242, 1. Left, 2. Cut. 
Turn the 

head to 
the left, 
raise the 
saber, arm 

extended to the right, ^ 
hand in quarte and as 
high as the head, 
point higher than the 
hand. (Two) Cut diago- 
nally to the left. (Three ) 
Resume the guard. 

243. 1. Right, 2. Cut. 
PI. 25, Par. 241. Tum the hcad to the 

right, carry the hand opposite the left 

breast, the point of the saber upward, 

the edge to the left. (Two) Extend the^^ 

arm quickly to its full length, and cut f^. 

horizontally to the right. (THREE) Re- ^% 

sume the guard. ^i- 26, 1'a.. 242. 

244. The left and right cuts against infantry are made 
by inclining the body forward close to the horse's neck, 
the seat close, knees and ankles supple, clinging to the 
horse with the legs and thighs, carrying the bridle hand 
slightly to the side opposite the cut without checking the 
horse, and cutting at the proper angle without swaying 
the body or the horse. 





92 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



245. 1. Rear, 2. Cut. 
Turn the head to the right, throwing 

back the right shoulder; 
carry the hand opposite 
the left breast, blade 
vertical, edge to the left. 
(Two) Extend the arm 
to its full length, and 
cut horizontally to the 
rear in tierce. (Three) 
Resume the guard. 

246. Left in quarte and 
tierce, 2. Cut. 

Execute the first mo- 
tion of left cut. (Two) 
Execute the second mo- 
tion of left cut. (Three) 
Turn the hand in tierce 
and cut horizontally to 
the front till the point ^ 
us in front of the left ^/(( 
shoulder. (Four) Re- \ 
sume the guard. 

24*7. 1. Right in tierce and quarte, 2. Cut. 

Execute the first motion of right cut. (Two) Execute 

the second motion of right cut. (Three) Turn the hand 

in quarte and cut horizontally to the front till the point is 

in front of the right shoulder. (Four) Resume the guard. 

248. 1. Rear in tierce and quarte, 2. Cut. 

Execute the first motion of rear cut. (Two) Execute 
the second motion of rear cut. (Three) Turn the hand 
in quarte and cut horizontally till the point is in front of 
the right shoulder. (Four) Resume the guard. 

The Parries. 

249. 1. Right, 2. Parry. 

Carry the hand quickly a little to the right, point of 




PI. 27, Par. 243. 




PI. 28, Par. 245. 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



93 





the saber as high as the eyes and opposite the right 

shoulder, edge to the right, so as to 

cover the right arm and shoulder. 

(Two) Resume the guard. 
tJ50. 1. Left, 2. Parry. 

Turn the hand in 
quarte and carry it op- 
/posite the left breast, 
edge of the blade to 
the left, point to the 
front, as high as the 
eyes and a little to the 
left of the left shoul- 
der, so as to cover the,^-^ 
left arm and shoulder, m^ 
(Two) Resume the '^ 

guard. PI. 29, Par. 249. 

251* Right low and left low parry are 

executed in the same manner, except 
that the point is lov^^ered so as to cover 
the right and left leg, respectively. 
PI. 30, Par. 250. 252.1. Head, 2. Parry. 

Raise the hand six inches above and in front of the 
head and slightly in front of the right shoulder, edge of 
the blade up, point to the left and slightly higher than 
the hand. (Two) Resume the guard. 

In this parry, the point or hand should be moved to 
parry the cut, according to the direction of the attack. 
253. Against infantry, 2. Left, 3. Parry. 
Turn the head and shoulders to the left, raise the saber, 
arm extended upward to the front and left, hand in 
tierce, back of the blade to the front, point upward. 
(Two) Describe a circle quickly on the left, from front to 
rear, parallel to the horse's neck, the arm extended; 
turn aside the bayonet with the back of the blade, bring- 
ing the hand, still in tierce, above the left shoulder. 
(Three) Resume the guard. 



94 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 




Against infantry, 2. Right 
throwing 



II 



254. 1. 

3. Parry. 

Turn the head to the right, 
back the right shoulder; 
raise the saber, arm ex- 
t ended upward to the 
right and rear, the hand 
in tierce, edge of the 
blade to the left, point 
upward. (Two) De- 
scribe a circle quickly 
on the right by dropping 
the point from rear to 
front, the arm extended; 
turn aside the bayonet 
with the back of the 
blade, bringing the hand 
as high as the head, the 
poin t upward . ( Thre E ) 
Resume the guard. 

255. When the re- 
cruits begin to execute 

^ correctly the above cuts, 

"pi. 31, Par. 253. thrusts, and parries, the 
instructor requires them to make appli- 
cation of them by combining motions, 
such as: 

1. Tierce point and front, 2. Cut. 

1 . Quarte point and front, 2. Cut. 

1. Left point and right (or left)^ 2. CuT. 

1. Right point and left (or right) ^ 2. CuT. 

1. Rear point and rear, 2. Cut. 

1. Against infantry, right point and right, 2. CuT. 

L Against infantry, left point and left, 2. Cut. etc. 

MANUAL OF THE PISTOL. 

256. When a lanyard is used, one end is attached to 
the butt of the pistol; the other end forms a sliding loop, 




PI. 32, Par. 254. 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 95 

which is passed over the head and drawn snug against 
the right urmpit. The lanyard should then be of just 
such length that the arm can be extended without con- 
straint. 

257. The pistol being in the holster, to raise pistol: 
1. Raise, 2.PIST0L. 

At the command raise, unbutton the holster flap with 
the right hand and grasp the stock, back of the hand to 
the body. 

At the command pistol, draw the pistol from the hol- 
ster, reverse it, muzzle up, the hand holding the stock 
with the thumb and last three fingers; the little finger 
may be placed under the butt; back of forefinger pressed 
against the inside of the front of the guard; guard to the 
front; barrel nearly vertical; hand as high as the neck 
and six inches to the right and front of the right shoul- 
der. This is the position of raise pistol. 

When dismounted, carry the right foot about twenty 
inches to the right and place the left hand in the position 
of the bridle hand. 

Being mounted and at the position raise pistol: 

1. Lower, 2. Pistol. 

At the command pistol, lower the pistol without chang- 
ing the grasp, and rest the hand and pistol on the right 
thigh, back of hand up, muzzle in front of right knee. 

When dismounted, lower the pistol without changing 
the grasp of the hand and rest the wrist against the 
right hip, back of the hand to the right; barrel inclined 
to the front and downward at an angle of forty-five de- 
grees. 

25S. Being at raise or lower pistol: 1. Return, 

2. Pistol. 

At the command pistol, insert the pistol in the holster, 
back of hand to the body, button the flap and drop the 
hand by the side. 

If dismounted, bring the right foot by the side of the 
left and drop the left hand by the side. 



96 the saber and pistol. 

259. Load. 

Being at raise or lower pistol, place the pistol at the 
cylinder in the left hand, barrel inclined to the left front 
and downward, at an angle of about forty-five degrees, 
half-cock the pistol and open the gate with the right 
thumb; if necessary, eject the empty shells, working the 
ejecting rod with the forefinger of left hand and turn- 
ing the cylinder with the left thumb, right hand holding 
the stock; take a cartridge from the 1k)x or belt, insert 
it in the chamber, press it home with the right thumb, 
and so on for each chamber to be loaded; close the gate 
with the right forefinger, lower the hammer, and raise 
pistol. 

260. Being at raise or lower pistol: 1. Ready, 2. To 
the front (or Right oblique, etc.); or, 2.^f (such an object). 

At the command ready, place the right thumb on the 
hammer; at the second command, direct the eyes to the 
front, or toward the object indicated. 

261. 3. FIRE. 

Thrust and point the pistol toward the objective, arm 
nearly or quite extended, at the same time cocking the 
pistol, and fire, then resume the raise or lower pistol ac- 
cording to the position before firing. 

An almost imperceptible pause may be allowed be- 
tween the thrusting and firing in which to correctly 
point the pistol. Deliberate aiming, however, should 
not be permitted. 

After firing without cartridges, pause an instant to see if 
the pistol is correctly pointed, to get the personal error. 

When it appears in the practice that a man is not suf- 
ficiently dextrous to cock the pistol while thrusting it 
toward the objective, or that in so doing others near by 
are endangered, the instructor may permit the man to 
cock the pistol at the command ready. 

The instructor must take into account individual pe- 
culiarities in order to secure the best results in firing; in 
such cases, departure from the text is permissible. 



THE SABER AND PISTOL. 97 

When mounted, lean slightly forward, bearing on the 
stirrups; in firing to the front, lean well to the right and 
slightly forward to avoid burning or frightening the 
horse. 

To continue the firing in the same direction or at the 
same objective: 1. Ready, 2. Fire. 

In a similar manner, the men will be instructed to fire 
to the left, right, right oblique, left oblique, right rear, 
left rear, and rear. When firing to the left, the pistol 
hand will be about opposite the left shoulder; when firing 
to the rear or right rear, the shoulders are turned about 
forty-five degrees to right; when firing to the left or left 
rear, the shoulders are turned about forty-five degrees 
to the left. 

Instruction may be given with the pistol in the left 
hand. 

The recruits are first taught to load and fire without 
cartridges. Pointing practice will habitually be given 
mounted. 

No cartridges will be used, except when indicated in 
the first command, thus: 1. With (so many) dummy [blank 
or ball) cartridges, 2. Load. 

To Fire at Will. 

262. 1. To the front, etc.; or, 1. At (such an object), 
2. Fire at will, 3. Ready, A. Commence firing, 5. Cease 

FIRINa. 

The recruit fires as rapidly as is consistent with care- 
ful pointing at each shot. The raise or lower pistol is 
resumed after each shot. 

Habitually the pistol will be loaded with only five ball 
cartridges and the hammer lowered on the empty cham- 
ber. 

The practice firing will be conducted on the principles 
explained in the Firing Regulations for Small Arms. 

263. 1. Inspection, 2. Pistol. 
9236 7 



98 THE SABER AND PISTOL. 



I 



At the command pisiol, execute raise pistol, except that 
the pistol is held about six inches in front of the center 
of the body, barrel up, pointing to the left front and 
upward at an angle of about forty-five degrees, wrist _ 
straight and as high as the breast. # 

The instructor passes along the ranks and examines * 
the pistols. To inspect the pistol minutely, he takes it 
in his hands and then returns it to the recruit, who grasps 
it at the stock and resumes inspection pistol; each recruit^ 
returns pistol as the inspector passes to the next. If the 
pistols are not inspected, they are returned by the com-, 
mands: 1. Return, 2. Pistol. 



INSPECTION OF ARMS, DISMOUNTED. 

264* The m3n being armed with sabers, sabers at a 
carry, the instructor commands: 1. Inspection, 2. ARMS. 

Beginning on the right, the instructor inspects the sa- 
bers in succession. As he approaches the right, the first 
two men execute the first motion of inspection saber; the 
first man, as the instructor comes in front of him, exe- 
cutes the second motion of inspection saber; the second 
man, as the inspector comes in front of him, executes the 
second motion of inspection saber, the first man at this in- 
stant executing the third motion, and the third man the 
first motion, and so on throughout. 

If the men be also armed with pistols they return saber 
as soon as inspected, and execute inspection pistol upon the 
approach of the instructor, who returns by the rear to 
the right; as soon as he has passed they return pistol and 
draw saber. 

If the men be armed with the knife see Par. 224. 



i 

I. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 99 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTEEY DISMOUl^TED. 

265. The School of the Battery Dismounted includes 
that of the Platoon Dismounted, Section Dismounted, and Gun 
Detachment Dismounted; it also comprises the Maneuvers of 
two or more Gun Detachments Dismounted. 

260* A section £//s/woi//7fefl^comprises all the men belong- 
ing to a single piece and its caisson; it consists of one 
sergeant, who is chief of section, two corporals, the can- 
noneers of the- piece, and the drivers of the piece and 
caisson, together with such artificers, wagoners, spare 
caisson drivers, and privates as may be assigned to it for 
convenience of administration. 

The men are permanently attached to sections, and are 
only transferred by order of the captain; they may be 
temporarily attached to sections not their own, to equal- 
ize subdivisions at drill or other duty. 

267. A p/atoon dismounted consists ot two sections dis- 
mounted. 

26S. A battery dismounted consists of two or three pla- 
toons dismounted. 

269. The guides of a platoon or section are the non- 
commissioned officers posted on its right and left. 

2*70. The guides of a battery are the chief of section 
and caisson corporal, posted on its right and left. The 
guides of a gun detachment are the gunner and the front- 
rank man on the opposite flank. 

A caisson corporal, guide of a battery, platoon, or sec- 
tion, is uncovered in the rear rank. 

271. Chiefs of platoons and of sections repeat or give 
commands only when prescribed; in movements by sec- 
tion, the chiefs of platoons do not repeat or give com- 
mands. 

272. The exercises of a platoon dismounted are the 



100 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

same as those of a battery dismounted, the command 
platoon being substituted for battery. 

273. The exercises of a section and of a gun detach- 
ment dismounted are analogous to those of a battery dis- 
mounted, the command section or detachment replacing 
that of battery. 

Formation of a Battery Dismounted. 

2*74. The battery is formed in double rank, the sec- 
tions arranged from right to left in the order of their 
permanent numbers, the first section on the right. 

275* Sections have permanent numerical designations 
for purposes of administration; platoons are also per- 
manently designated as right (first and second sections), 
center (third and fourth sections), and left (fifth and sixth 
sections). If there be but two platoons, they are desig- 
nated as right and left, the left platoon consisting of the 
third and fourth sections. 

During the exercises, sections are temporarily num- 
bered first, second, third, etc., from the right when in line 
and from the head when in column; and the sections of 
a platoon in line are designated right and left, according 
to their relative positions in the platoon. 

With reference to their actual positions, platoons are 
temporarily designated in line as right, center, and left, and " 
in column as leading, center, and rear. 

As the relative positions of platoons and sections 
change, the provisional designations of these subdivisions 
change. 

Posts of Officers, Non-commissioned Officers, etc. 

tJ76# The captain, in line, is four yards in front of the 
center of the battery; in column, on the side of the guide, 
or on the side opposite to which the subdivisions are 
dressed, four yards from the flank of the column, and 
opposite its center. As instructor, he goes wherever his 
presence is necessary. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 



101 



.1 



, Zd: 



Q 



The senior lieutenant takes post with 
the right platoon, the next in rank with 
the left platoon, and the fourth in rank 
with the j^^p 

center pla- 
toon. Each □ 
lieutenant is 
the chief of 
the platoon 
with which 
he is posted, 
and in line 
and in col- 
umn of pla- 
toons, is two 
yards in 
front of the 
center of his 



/*'tei 



LT. 



platoon; in 
^8 c o 1 u m n of 
sec tions , 
each is on 
the side of 
the guide, 
or on the 
side oppo- 
site to which 
the s u b d i- 
visions are 
dressed, two 
yards from 
the flank of 
the column, 
and opposite 



CAPT, LT. 



LT, 



^ 



■5.5.0 znQ.M.s. 
PI. 34. Par. 276. 



PI. 33, Par. 276. 



the center of his platoon; in column of 
files, each is as if he had faced with 
the battery from line, except the chief 



CX3 

cm 



102 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

^«^ of the leading platoon, who takes post 

at the side of the leading guide. 
tsrsTs. rpj^^ lieutenant, third in rank, is 

'•^'^ a chief of caissons. In line, he is four 

S yards in rear of the center of the bat- 

tery; in column of platoons and of sec- 
tions, on the side opposite the guide, ' 
or on the side toward which the sub- 
divisions are dressed, four yards from 
the flank of the column, and opposite 
its center; in column of files, he is as 
if he had faced with the battery from 
line. 

The first sergeant, in line, is on the 

right of the battery, aligned on the 

front rank, and one yard from it; in 

column of platoons, on the side of the 

guide, or on the side of the marching 

^r flanks of the subdivisions as they 

move from line into column, and in 

column of sections, on the same side. 

^^ as the chiefs of platoons , aligned on the 

S 'front rank of the nearest subdivision, 

S and one yard from it; in column of files 

S he is as if he had faced with the battery 

^ from line. 

The quartermaster and stable ser- 
geants, in line, are in one rank, on 
S the left of the battery, aligned on the 

^ g^ front rank, and one yard from it, the 

g a quartermaster sergeant on the right; 

S in column of platoons and sections, 

^ they wheel to the side indicated, and 

S are either four yards in front of the 

§=" center of the leading subdivision or 

Q,M.s^iS.s. four yards in rear of the center of the 

PL 35, Par. 276. last subdivlslon, according as the col- 



.r^^S 



CX3 






SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 103 

umn has been formed toward their flank of the battery, 
or the flank opposite; in column of files, they are as if 
they had faced with the battery from line, and the one 
in rear stepped to the right or left of the other, accord- 
ing as the right or left is in front. 

Each chief of section, in line, and in column of platoons, 
is on the right of the front rank of his section; in column 
of sections, one yard in front of the center of his section; 
in column of files, each is as if he had faced with the bat- 
tery from line. 

Each gunner, in line, and in column of platoons, is one 
yard in rear of the right file of his section; in column of 
sections, on the right of the front rank of his section; in 
column of files, each is as if he had faced with the bat- 
tery from line. 

Each caisson corporal, in line, and in column of platoons 
and of sections, is on the left of the front rank of his sec- 
tion; in column of files, each is as if he had faced with 
the battery from line. 

The guidon, in line, and in column of platoons and of 
sections, is the left file of the front rank of the third sec- 
tion; if there be but two platoons, he is the left file of the 
front rank of the second section. 

The trumpeters, in line, are in one rank on the right 
of the first sergeant and two yards from him; in column 
of platoons and of sections, they wheel to the side indi- 
cated, and are either four yards in front of the center of 
the leading subdivision or four yards in rear of the last 
subdivision, according as the column has been formed 
toward their fiank of the battery, or the flank opposite; 
in column of files, they areas if they had faced with the 
battery from line, and the one in rear stepped to the right 
or left of the other, according as the right or left is in 
front. 

2*77. The terms right said left, in the preceding para- 
graph, refer to the right and left in the original forma- 
tion. When the battery faces to the rear in line, the 



104 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

first sergeant, quartermaster sergeant, and trumpeters 
face about and place themselves on line with the new 
front rank, but do not change to the other flank. 

278. In column of platoons and of sections, the chief 
of caissons, first sergeant, and, in column of sections, the 
chiefs of platoons, change to the opposite flank of the 
column, unless otherwise directed, whenever the guide 
is changed. 

2*79* In all changes of formation, as soon as the move- 
ment permits, the officers and non-commissioned officers 
whose posts are changed go by the shortest route to their 
posts in the new formation. 

2 SO* The officer, non-commissioned officers, and pri- 
vates acting as such, posted in rear of the line, are the 
file-closers; it is their duty to rectify mistakes and insure 
steadiness and promptness in the ranks. 

2§ 1. Chiefs of platoons and the chief of caissons, when 
absent, are replaced by the first sergeant, quartermaster 
sergeant, and other sergeants in the order of rank. The 
first sergeant, if performing the duties of an officer, the 
quartermaster sergeant, and stable sergeant are not re- 
placed. Gunners replace absent chiefs of sections, cais 
son corporals absent gunners, and privates selected for 
efficiency, absent caisson corporals. If it be not intended 
to exercise by platoon, chiefs of platoons, when absent, 
are not replaced. 

To Form the Battery Dismounted, 

282. At the sounding of the assembly, the first ser- 
geant, facing the battery and six yards in front of the 
center, commands: 1. Fall in, 2. Left 3. Pace, 4. Call 
ROLLS, 5. Report. 

At the command fall in, the chiefs of sections place them- 
selves on the line facing to the right, at sufficient distance 
apart for the formation of their sections; the men of each 
section fall in, facing to the right, the front-rank men 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 105 

covering their chief; the signal having ceased, the first 
sergeant causes the sections to close up, if necessary. 

At the command face, the men face to the left. 

At the command call rolls, the chiefs of sections step 
out two yards in front of the centers of their sections, 
face toward them, call the rolls, and resume their places 
in ranks. 

At the command report, the chiefs of sections stand fast, 
salute, and report in succession, from right to left, the 
results of their roll-calls; the first sergeant then faces 
about, salutes the captain or battery officer of the day, 
reports the result of the roll-call, and takes his post in 
line. 

The chiefs of platoons and the chief of caissons take 
their places immediately after the first sergeant has 
taken his place in line. During instruction, the officers 
have the saber drawn, or in the scabbard, at the discre- 
tion of the captain. When the captain draws saber, the 
chiefs of platoons and chief of caissons will also draw 
theirs. The captain will himself draw saber before he 
orders the battery to draw saber. 

2 §3. In formations under arms, the men fall in with 
sabers in the scabbard. In drawing or returning saber 
at close order, the rear rank marches backward two 
yards at the command draw or return^ closing to its proper 
distance on the completion of the movement. The sabers 
are not drawn until the ranks are opened whenever that 
movement is to be executed before moving off. 

To Open Ranks, 

284. Being in line, at a halt, the captain commands: 
1. Open ranks, 2. March, 3. Front. 

At the first command, the chiefs of sections and the 
caisson corporal of the section on the left step briskly 
three yards to the rear to mark the new alignment of the 
rear rank; the first sergeant steps three yards to the rear; 
the captain goes to the right flank and sees that these 



106 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

non-commissioned officers are on a line parallel to the 
front rank. 

At the command march, the chiefs of platoons step for- 
ward one yard, so as to be three yards in front of the bat- 
tery; the front-rank men dress to the right; the rear-rank 
men cast their eyes to the right, step backward, halt a 
little behind the alignment, and then dress to the right 
on the line established by the non-commissioned officers 
who have stepped back; the gunners step to the rear and 
place themselves three yards from the rear rank; the chief 
of caissons steps to the rear and places himself six yards 
from the rear rank. 

The captain superintends the alignment of the chiefs of 
platoons and of the front rank, and the first sergeant, or, 
in his absence, the chief of the section on the right, that 
of the rear rank; the captain verifies the alignment of the 
rear rank and of the file-closers; the chiefs of platoons 
and the file-closers cast their eyes to the front as soon as 
their alignment is ver.ified. 

At the command front, the non-commissioned officers 
who have stepped back resume their places in the front 
rank, and the men cast their eyes to the front; the first 
sergeant returns to his post, and the captain places him- 
self six yards in front of the center of the battery. 

To Close Ranks. 

285. Being at a halt, the captain commands: 1. Close 
ranks, 2. March. 

At the command march, the captain and chiefs of pla- 
toons face about and resume their posts in line; the rear 
rank closes to facing distance, each man covering his 
front-rauk man, the file-closers move forward with the 
rear rank and take their posts in line. 

Alignments, 

286. Being in line at a halt, with the ranks open, the 
captain establishes two or four men as a basis for each 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 107 

rank, at first in parallel, and afterward in oblique direc- 
tions to the front of the battery. He then commands: 
1. By file, 2. Right (or Left), 3. Dress, 4. Next, 5. Front; 
or, 1. Right [ov Left), 2. Dress, 3. Front; or,l. Right [or 
Left) backward, 2. DRESS, 3. Front. 

Each rank is aligned as explained in the School of the 
Soldier Dismounted, except that the left hand is not 
placed against the waist. The rear rank remains par- 
allel to the front rank. 

The ranks being closed, the alignments are repeated in 
the same manner. 

In all the alignments, the file-closers preserve their dis- 
tances from the rear rank. 

If the proper interval is not promptly and correctly 
taken in the alignments, the captain may cause the left 
hand to be placed above the hip during their execution 
until this fault is corrected. 

Manual of the Saber, and Saber Exercise, 

287. The ranks are opened for instruction in the Man- 
ual of the Saber; for instruction in the saber exercise 
ranks are opened and intervals taken. 

During the instruction, the captain may direct the chiefs 
of platoons to face about and assist in correcting faults. 

In taking intervals, the chiefs of platoons, first sergeant, 
quartermaster sergeant, and file-closers face to the side 
indicated at the first command, step ofT at the proper 
time after the second, and, when opposite their places, 
halt and face to the front. 

Present and carry saber, and parade rest with the saber 
drawn, are executed with the ranks opened of closed. 
inspection saber is only executed when the ranks are 
opened. 

Non-commissioned officers and enlisted men in the line 
of file-closers execute the Manual of the Saber and the 
saber exercise during drill, unless specially excused; 
they execute all the manual during ceremonies. 



108 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

The Rests. 

2§8. Executed as prescribed in the School of the 
Soldier Dismounted. 

To resume the attention, the captain commands: 
1. Battery, 2. Attention. 

To Dismiss the Battery. 
2S9. Being in line, at a halt, if sabers be drawn, the 
captain commands: 1. Return, 2. SABER. 

He then directs the first sergeant: Dismiss the battery. 
The officers fall out and the first sergeant commands: 
Dismissed. 

To March in Line. 

290* Being at a halt, the captain indicates to the guide 
a fixed point on a line perpendicular to the front of the 
battery, and commands: 1. Forward, 2. March, 3. Guide 
[right ov left). 

At the command march, the men step off with life; the i 
guide observes with the greatest care the length and ca- 
dence of the step; he marches straight to the front upon » 
points he has chosen on the line of direction given him, # 
and selects others in advance on the same line before * 
reaching the first; the file-closers keep at their proper 
distance from the rear rank. The arms swing naturally 
while marching, the hands moving about three inches in 
front and rear of the seam of the trousers. 

To Halt the Battery and to Align it. 

291* The captain commands: 1. Battery, 2. HALT, 
3. Right (or Left)^ 4. Dress, 5. Front. 

292* To march in the short step; to mark time; to change 
step; to side step; to march back ward; to oblique in line; to 
pass from quick lime to double time, and the reverse. 

Executed as explained in the School of the Soldier 
Dismounted, substituting in the commands battery for 
S9(/a(/ wherever the latter occurs. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 109 

293. In the oblique march, the ranks remain parallel 
to their former position. 

294. In marching in double time, the left hand, in- 
stead of being raised, steadies the scabbard; the saber, if 
drawn, is held in a vertical position in the right hand, 
forearm horizontal and swinging naturally. 

To Face and March the Line to the Rear. 

295. Being at a halt, the captain commands: 1. About, 
2. Face. 

As soon as the battery has faced about, the guides step 
into the rear rank, now become the front rank; vacancies 
in this rank are filled by the men Opposite them in the 
former front rank; the chiefs of subdivisions and file- 
closers, upon facing about, maintain their relative 
positions. 

If marching, the captain commands: 1. To the rear, 
2. March, 3. Guide (right or left). 

If the captain intends to exercise, or to march a con- 
siderable distance, with the old rear rank in front, he 
commands: 1. File-closers in rear, 2. March, after the bat- 
tery is faced or marched to the rear. 

At the command march, the chiefs of platoons hasten 
to the front and the file-closers to the rear of their sub- 
divisions. The chiefs of the right and left platoons pass 
around the outer flank of their platoons; the chief of the 
center platoon through the interval between the two sec- 
tions of his platoon, and after the file-closers, who make 
use of this same interval. The file-closers pass by the 
nearest flank of their sections. Each chief of section, ex- 
cept that one on the flank of the battery, falls back into 
the line of file-closers and resumes his place in line when 
the change is effected. 

To Turn and Halt. 

296. The battery being in line, at a halt, or marching, 
the captain commands: I. Battery right (or left), or 1. Bat- 
tery half-right (or half-left), 2. MARCH, 3. Front. 



110 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

The movement is executed as prescribed in the School 
of the Soldier Dismounted. The first sergeant and the 
quartermaster and stable sergeants move by the shortest 
lines to their places in the new alignment, those next the 
pivot stepping backward. The chiefs of platoons face 
about at the first command, step backward at the second, 
superintend the movement of their platoons, and face 
about at the command front; the captain places himself 
outside of the pivot flank and commands front, when the 
battery is accurately aligned. 

To Turn and Advance. 

291'. Being in line at a halt or marching, the cap- 
tain commands: 1. Battery right (or left) turn; or, 1. Bat- 
tery right (or /eft) half-turn, 2. March, 3. Forward, 
4. March, 5. Guide right (or left). 

At the command march, the battery executes the turn 
and advance, as prescribed in the School of the Soldier 
Dismoimted. The first sergeant and quartermaster and 
stable sergeants conform to the movement of the battery. 
The chiefs of platoons face about at the first command, 
step backward at the second, superintend the movement 
of their platoons, and face about at the command for- 
ward. 

298. Marching in line, to effect a slight change of 
direction, the captain cautions: Incline to the right (or left). 

The guide advances gradually the left shoulder and 
marches in the new direction; all the files advance the 
left shoulder and conform to the movements of the guide, 
lengtheniug or shortening the step according as the 
change is toward the side of the guide or the side oppo- 
site. 

To March by the Flank. 

299. Being in line, at a halt, the captain commands: 

1. Right (ov Left), 2. Face, 3. Forward, 4. March. If march- 
ing, the captain commands: 1. By the right (or left) flank, 

2. March. 



II 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. Ill 

The march in column of files is usually in quick time; 
if necessary to march by the flank in double time, the 
distance is increased to thirty-six inches. If necessary, 
for any reason, the distance while marching- at attention 
in quick time may also be increased to thirty-six inches, 
at the captain's caution fall back. To increase the dis- 
tance, all the files except the first shorten the step, and 
successively resume the full step when each has thirty- 
six inches distance from the file in front. If the column 
be halted, the rear files halt upon closing- to facing dis- 
tance. While marching- at quick time, facing- distance 
is recovered at the caution close up ; the leading guide and 
file take the short step, and the other files successively as 
they close to facing distance; the rear file and guide 
having closed up, the captain commands: 1. Forward, 
2. March. 

300. To halt the battery and form it in line, the cap- 
tain commands: 1. Battery, 2. HALT, 3. Left (or Right), 
4. Face ; or, to form line and continue the march: 1. By 
the left (or right) flank, 2. MARCH, 3. Guide (right or left). 

In either case, if line be formed toward the file-closers, 
the guides step into the rear rank, now become front 
rank; vacancies in this rank, if there be any, are filled 
by the men opposite them in the former front rank; 
the chiefs of subdivisions and file-closers, upon facing 
or marching by the flank, maintain their relative posi- 
tions. 

If the captain intends to exercise, or to march a con- 
siderable distance, with the old rear rank in front, he 
commands: 1. File-closers in rear, 2. March, after the bat- 
tery has faced or marched by the flank. At the com- 
mand march, the chiefs of subdivisions and file-closers 
conform to what is prescribed (Par. 295). 

If the column be marched by the flank when there is 
thirty-six inches distance between the files, the men close 
in gradually at the command for the guide, and take the 
proper interval from his side. 



112 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

To Oblique, and to Change Direction in Column of Files. 

301. Executed by the commands and means prescribed 
in the School of the Soldier Dismounted. 

To Form Column of Subdivisions to the Right or Left. 

302. Being" in line at a halt, the captain commands: 
1. Platoons (or sections) right (or left)^ 2. MARCH. 

At the first command, each chief of subdivision, if not 
already there, steps briskly in front of the center of his 
subdivision, faces it, and cautions: Platoon (or Section) 
right. 

At the command march, each subdivision executes the 
turn and halt, as prescribed in the School of the Soldier 
Dismounted; each chief superintends the movement of 
his subdivision, and upon its completion places himself 
outside the pivot flank, verifies the alignment, commands 
front, and then takes his post in column. 

The chief of section, when he leaves his post on the 
flank of the section, is replaced by the gunner. 

If marching, the movement is executed as just ex- 
plained, the pivot guides and files halting at the command 
march. 

If the subdivisions are large enough to leave sufficient 
distance between the rear rank of one subdivision and 
the front rank of the following, both the ranks and files 
may be opened, when the battery is in column, for the 
purpose of instruction in the setting-up and saber exer- 
cises. After the files are opened the captain directs the 
file-closers to place themselves on the flanks of their sub- 
divisions. 

To Form Column of Subdivisions and Move Forward without 
Halting. 

The captain commands: 1. Platoons (or Sections) right {or 
left) turn, 2. March, 3. Forward, 4. March, 5. Guide {right 
or left). 

Executed by each platoon as prescribed in the School 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 113 

of the Soldier Dismounted; the fourth command is given 
when the subdivisions have completed the turn. 

To Put the Column of Subdivisions in March, and to Ha it the 
Co/umn. 

303. The captain commands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH, 
3. Guide right [ov left); and, 1. Battery, 2. Halt. 

To Oblique in Column of Subdivisions. 

304. The captain commands: 1. Right [or Left) oblique, 
2. March. 

During the oblique, the subdivisions preserve their par- 
allelism; the guide of each subdivision on the side toward 
which the oblique is made is the guide of the subdivision; 
the guide of the leading subdivision is the guide of the 
column. If the subdivisions are equal, the guides keep 
on a line parallel to the original direction. If the sub- 
divisions are unequal, the guides daring the oblique are 
not on a line parallel to the original direction, unless they 
previously covered in column. 

305. To resume the direct march, the captain com- 
mands: 1. Forward, 2. March. 

The guide is, without indication, on the side it was pre- 
vious to the oblique. 

If the oblique be executed from a halt, the guide is an- 
nounced upon taking the direct march. 

To Change Direction in Column of Subdivisions. 

306. Being in march, the captain commands: 1 . Column 
right [or left), 2. MARCH. 

At the first command, the chief of the leading subdi- 
vision commands: Right turn. 

At the command march, which he repeats, his subdi- 
vision turns to the right, the chief adding: 1. Forward. 
2. March, upon the completion of the turn; the other 
subdivisions march squarely up to the turning point, and 
change direction at the commands of their chiefs, as ex- 
9236 8 



114 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

plained for the first. In changing direction, each chief of 
subdivision faces liis subdivision, while turning, to super- 
intend it and see that the pivot guide takes the short step. 

Column ha/f-r/ght (or half-left) is similarly executed, each 
chief giving the preparatory commands right (ov left) half- 
turn. 

In changing direction in column of subdivisions, each ^ 
chief, on the completion of the movement, announces the 
guide on the side it was previous to the turn. This rule 
is general 

307. To make a slight change of direction the captain 
cautions: Incline to the right (or left). 

The leading guide advances his left shoulder and takes 
two points a little to the right of those upon which he was 
marching, the men conforming to the new direction of the 
guide. 

308. To put the column of subdivisions in march and 
change direction at the same time, the captain com- 
mands: 1. Forward, 2. Column right (or left), 3. March, 
4. Guide right (or left). 

The leading subdivision executes the turn and advance; . 
the other subdivisions move forward and turn on the same 
ground. The guide is announced when the leading sub- 
division has changed direction. 

To Face the Column of Subdivisions to the Rear, and to March it 
to the Rear. 

309. Being at a halt, the captain commands: 1. About, 
2. Face; if marching he commands: 1. To the rear, 
2. March, 3. Guide right (or left). These commands are 
executed as prescribed (Par. 295). 

If the captain commands: 1. File-closers in rear, 
2. March, after the battery has been faced or marched ' 
to the rear, the chiefs of subdivisions pass by either 
flank, and the file-closers by the nearest flank of their 
subdivisions. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 115 

To March the Column of Subdivisions by the F/ank. 

310. If at a halt, the captain commands: 1. Right [or 
/eft), 2. Face, 3. Forward, 4. March, 5. Guide right (or 
/eft). 

If marching-; 1. By the right (or /eft) flan/c, 2. MARCH, 

3. Guide right [or /eft). 

Each chief of subdivision places himself by the side of 
the non-commissioned officer at the head of his subdi- 
vision, dresses on the chief who conducts the subdivision 
on the side of the guide, and preserves the proper inter- 
val. 

311. To resume the original direction, the captain 
commands: 1. By the /eft (or right) f/an/c, 2. March, 3. Guide 
right (or /eft). 

To halt and face in the original direction, the captain 
commands: 1. Battery, 2. Halt, 3. Left (or Right), 4. Face. 

To Form Co/umn of Fi/es from Column of Subdivisions. 

312. Being at a halt, the captain commands: 1. Right 
(or Left), 2. Face, 3. P/atoons (or Sections), 4. Co/umn /eft [or 
right), 5. MARCH. 

At the command face, all face to the right; at the com- 
mand march, each subdivision column changes direction 
and closes upon the one that precedes it. 

If marching, the captain commands: 1. By the right (or 
/eft) f/an/c, 2. P/atoons (or Sections) ^ 3. Co/umn /eft (or right), 

4. March. 

At the command march, each subdivision column faces 
to the right in marching, changes direction, and closes 
upon the one which precedes it. 

To Form Co/umn of Subdivisions from Co/umn of Fi/es. 

313. The captain commands: 1. P/atoons (or Sections), 
2. Right (or Left) front into /ine, 3. March, 4. Battery, 
6. Halt. 

At the command march, the leading guide of each sub- 



116 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

division moves straight to the front; all the files oblique 
to the right until opposite their places in line, when each 
marches to the front. 

The leading guide of each subdivision moves forward 
until the command halt, which is given when he has ad- 
vanced five yards; the other men halt when arriving in 
line; each guide in rear places himself on the right of 
the front rank upon the arrival of the last file; the lead- 
ing guide having halted, each chief dresses his subdi- 
vision to the left, and commands: Front, when the last 
file is aligned. 

314. If the command be double time, the captain com- 
mands guide left (or right), immediately after the command 
march ; the leading guide of each subdivision moves for- 
ward in quick time; the other men oblique in double 
time, each taking quick time and dressing to the left 
upon arriving in line; the rear-rank men then close to 
facing distance. 

This movement is not executed when marching in 
double time. 

The captain's command is right (or left) front into line, 
according as the column of files is left or right, in front. 

The column of files is right in front when the front-rank 
men are on the left of their rear-rank men; it is left in 
front when the front-rank men are on the right of the 
rear-rank men. 

Route Step and At Ease. 

315. Marching in quick time: 1 . Route step, 2. March. 
If at a halt: 1. Forward, 2. Route step, 3. March. 

The men are not required to preserve silence, nor to 
keep the step. 

If in line or column of subdivisions, the rear rank falls 
back to thirty-six inches. 

If halted, while marching at route step, the men re- 
main at rest in ranks. 

The route step is not used while marching in double 
time. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 117 

To resume thecadenced step: 1. Battery, 2. Attention. 

The chiefs of platoons repeat the commands, substitut- 
ing platoon for battery. 

On the exceptional occasions that the battery is 
marched at the route step in column of files, the distance 
between files is increased to thirty-six inches; the short 
step is ordered immediately after the battery is brought 
to attention, and the full step, when the rear files have 
closed; if the column is halted, the rear files close up. 

The battery marching at route step changes direction 
by the same commands as when in cade need step. 

316. To march at ease: 1. At ease, 2. March. 

The battery marches as in the route step, except that 
silence is preserved. 

If halted while marching at ease, the men remain at 
ease in ranks. 

To resume the cadenced step: 1. Battery, 2. Attention. 

The chiefs of platoon repeat the commands, substitut- 
ing platoon for battery. 

To Form Line to the Right or Left from Column of Subdivisions. 

317. Being at a halt, and the guides on the flank to- 
ward which the movement is to be executed covering at 
proper distances, the captain commands: 1. Platoons (or 
Sections) right (ov left), 2. March, 3. Front. 

At the command march, each subdivision executes the 
turn and halt, as proscribed in the School of the Soldier 
Dismounted; each chief steps backward and superintends 
the movement of his subdivision; the captain places him- 
self outside the pivot flank of the rear subdivision, veri- 
fies the alignment, and commands: Front. 

If marching, the movement is executed as just ex- 
plained, the pivot guides and files halting at the com- 
mand march. 

When the line is formed from column of pla oons, each 
chief of platoon faces about at the command front of the 
captain. 



118 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

When the line is formed from column of sections, each 
chief of platoon takes his post in line, each chief of sec- 
tion and gunner takes his post on the flank of his section 
and in the line of file-closers, at the command front of the 
captain. 

To the Right or Left and Continue the March. 

318. Being at a halt or marching, the captain com- 
mands: 1. Platoons (or Sections) right [or left) turn, 2. March, 
3. Forward, 4. March, 5. Guide right (ov left). 

At the second command, the subdivisions execute the 
turn and advance^ the pivot guides regulating upon the 
guide of the leading subdivision at the beginning of the 
movement; each chief steps backward and superintends 
his subdivision. The chiefs of platoons and sections, i.nd 
the gunner, take their posts in line at the fourth com- 
mand. 

The column of subdivisions may also be formed into 
line to the right or left by forming column of files (Par. 
312), and then facing the battery or marching it by the 
flank. 

To Form Line to the Front from Column of Subdivisions. 

319. Being at a halt, the captain commands: 1. Right 
(or Left) front into line, 2. MARCH, 3. Front. 

At the first command, the chief of the leading subdi- 
vision commands: 1. Forward, 2. Guide left; the other 
chiefs command: Right oblique. At the command march, 
repeated by all the chiefs, the leading subdivision ad- 
vances nineteen yards, when its chief commands: 1. Platoon 
(or Section), 2. Halt, 3. Left, 4. Dress ; the other subdi- 
visions oblique to the right until opposite their places in 
line, when their chiefs command: 1. Forward, 2. March, 
3. Guide left, adding as they arrive near the line: 4. Platoon 
(or Section), 5. Halt, 6. Left, 7. Dress. The- captain 
superintends the alignment from the left flank and gives 
the command front upon its completion. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 



119 



If marching in quick time, the movement is executed as 
just explained, the chief of the leading subdivision com- 
manding guide left, if the guide be not already there. 




/'^«%l§§§|^* 




PI. 36, Par. 319. 



If marching in quick time and the command be double 
time, the captain commands: Guide left immediately after 
the command march ; the chief of the leading subdivisioii 



120 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

cautions it to advance in quick time, and repeats the com- 
mand for the guide; each of the other chiefs repeats the 
command double time, and, when liis subdivision is about 
to arrive in line, commands: 1. Quick time, in time to add, 
2. March, the instant it arrives abreast of the leading 
subdivision. 

If marching in double time, the chief of the leading 
subdivision commands quick time, at the first command, 
and repeats the other commands; the other subdivisions 
complete the movement as before. 

EXERCISES OF TWO OR MORE GUN DETACHMENTS DIS- 
MOUNTED. 

320. The exercises or drills of two or more gun detach- 
ments dismounted are similar to those of a battery or 
platoon dismounted, the words detachment and detachments 
being substituted in the commands for the designation 
of one or more subdivisions. 

3t2 1 • If , on special occasions, the chiefs of platoons and 
chief of caissons be present, they occupy the same rela- 
tive positions with respect to gun detachments as to sec- 
tions in the exercises of the battery dismounted. 

322* The chiefs of sections, when present, take post, 
in line, on the right of the front rank, the gunners step- 
ping back one yard in rear of the right file of their de- 
tachments; in column of detachments, the chiefs of sec- 
tions are on the side of the guide, one yard from the front 
rank; in column of files, they are as if they had faced with 
the detachment from line. The chiefs of sections, when 
present, do not repeat nor give commands. 

323. Each gunner, in line and in column of detach- 
ments, is on the right of the front rank of his detach- 
ment, except when displaced by the chief of section, as 
just prescribed; in column of files, each gunner is as if he 
had faced with the detachment from line. 

324. Gunners command their detachments without 
leaving their places on the right; when a detachment is 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 121 

aligned to the left at the command of its gunner, the men 
dress on the left file of the front rank. 

325. Th^ guides of a detachment are the gunner and 
the front-rank man of the file on the opposite flank. 
When a detachment executes the turn on a fixed pivot 
to the side opposite the gunner, the pivot guide con- 
forms to what is prescribed for the pivot file in the School 
of the Soldier Dismounted. 



122 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIEE MOUNTED. 

326* The object of this school being the instruction 
of the recruits in horsemanship, the instructor's first 
efforts are directed to giving the recruits confidence, a 
correct carriage, and a firm, well-balanced seat, and 
finally to teach them to control the movements and paces 
of the horse. 

All the cannoneers of field batteries, as well as of horse 
artillery, should be thoroughly instructed in this school, 
as it is an indispensable preparation ^ or the duties of a 
non commissioned officer as well as for those of a driver. 

The progression indicated in this school may b) modi- 
fied at the discretion of the officer superintending the in- 
struction, care being taken to develop the confidence of 
the recrviit by a progress suited to his capacity, and which 
will exempt him, as far as possible, from falls or olher 
accidents. 

The instructor will quietly and patiently correct the 
faults of each individual, frequently passing from one to 
another, and will exact by degrees the correct execution 
of his teachings. He may dismount whenever neces- 
sary to better explain a movement. 

Elementary instruction should be carefully imparted to 
recruits individually, or at most to four at a time. Quiet 
and well- trained horses are chosen, each recruit being re- 
quired to change his horse from day to day. The recruits 
are in fatigue dress without gloves, sabers, belts, or spurs. 

327. All mounted instruction begins and ends at a 
walk. This rule is general. 

328. During the drills in this school, the instructor 
gives the following short rules for the care of horses un- 
til he is satisfied, by means of questions, that they are 
thoroughly comprehended by the recruits: — 

Never threaten, strike, or otherwise abuse a horse. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 123 

Before entering a stall, speak to the horse gently and 
then go in quietly. 

Never take a rapid gait until the horse has been warmed 
up by gentle exercise. 

Never put up a horse brought to the stable or line 
heated, but throw a blanket over him and rub his legs, 
or walk him until cool. If he is wet, put him under shel- 
ter and wisp him against the hair until dry. 

Never feed grain to a horse or allow him to stand un- 
co ver^jd when heated. Hay will not hurt a horse, no 
matter how warm he may be. 

Never water a horse when heated unless the exercise 
or march is to be immediately resumed. 

Never throw water over a horse coming in hot, not even 
over his legs or feet. 

Never allow a horse's back to be cooled suddenly, by 
washing or even removing the blanket unnecessarily. 

To cool the back gradually, the blanket may be re- 
moved and replaced with the dry side next the horse. 

THE EQUIPMENT OF THE HORSE. 

329. To fold the saddle blanket. — The blanket, after being 
well shaken, will b 3 folded into six thicknesses, as follows: 
Hold it well up by the two corners, the long way up and 
down, double it lengthwise (so that the fold will come be- 
tween the " U " and " S "), the folded corner (middle of 
the blanket) in the left ha ad; take the folded corner be- 
tween the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, thumb 
pointing to the left; slip the left hand down the folded 
edge two-thirds its length and seize it with the thumb 
and second fing.r, raise the hands to the height of the 
shoulders, the blanket between them extended; bring the 
hands together, the double fold falling outward; pass the 
folded corner from the right hand into the left hand be- 
tween the thumb and forefinger, slip the second finger 
of the right hand between the folds, and seize the double 
folded corner; turn the left (disengaged) corner in and 



124 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

seize it with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, 
the second finger of the right hand stretching and even- 
ing the folds; after evening the folds, grasp the corners in 
the hands and shake the blanket well in order to smooth 
the folds; raise the blanket and place it between the chin 
and the breast; slip the hands down half-way, the first 
two fingers outside, the other fingers and thumb of each 
hand inside; seize the blanket with the thumbs and first 
two fingers, let the part under the chin fall forward; hold 
the blanket up, arms extended, even the lower edges, 
seize the middle points between the thumbs and forefin- 
gers, and flirt the outside part over the right arm; the 
blanket is thus held before placing it on the horse. 

To Put on the Blanket and Surcingle. 

330 The instructor commands: BLANKET. 

Approach the horse on the near (left) side, with the 
blanket folded and held as just prescribed; place it well 
forward on his back, tossing the part of the blanket over 
the right arm to the right side of the horse, still keeping 
hold of the middle points; slide the blanket once or twice 
from front to rear to smooth the hair, being careful to 
raise the blanket in bringing it forward; place the fore- 
finger of the left hand on the withers, and forefinger 
of the right hand on the backbone, the blanket smooth; 
it will then be well forward, with the edges on the left 
side; remove the locks of the mane that may be under it; 
pass the buckle end of the surcingle over the middle of 
the blanket and buckle it on the near side, a little below 
the edge of the blanket. 

To Put on the Saddle-Pad and Surcingle. 

33 !• The instructor commands: PAD. 

The pad is over the right forearm, which is horizontal 
and between the folds; the surcingle doubled and laid 
over the pad, the folded edge to the right, buckle end on 
top. Approach the horse on the near side, and, when 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 125 

close to him, seize the middle of the front end of the pad 
with the thumb and forefinger of the left hand; withdraw 
the right arm and seize the middle of the rear end with 
the thumb and forefinger of the right hand. The hair is 
then' smoothed, the pad placed and secured as explained 
for the blanket. 

To Put on the Waiering-Bridle. 

3 3 2. The instructor indicates the parts of the halter 
and watering-bridle, and commands: Bridle. 

Take the reins in the right hand, the bit in the left; 
approach the horse on the near side, slip the reins over 
the horse's head and let them rest on his neck; reach un- 
der and put the toggle of the bridle through the right 
halter-ring; insert the left thumb into the side of the 
horse's mouth, above the tushes, and press open the lower 
jaw, insert the bit and pass the toggle through the left 
halter-ring. The bit should hang so as to touch, but not 
draw up, the corners of the mouth. 

The hitching-strap is passed around the horse's neck 
and tied securely, or is unbuckled and left at the manger 
or picket line. 

To Unbridle. 

333. At the command unbridle, pass the reins over the 
horse's head and take the toggles out of the halter-rings. 

To Saddle. 

334* The saddle being at hand, stirrups, cincha, and 
surcingle crossed over the seat, the hair pad or blanket 
folded and laid upon them, the instructor indicates the 
different parts of the saddle, and commands: Saddle. 

Place the pad or blanket on the horse as previously 
explained; seize the pommel of the saddle with the left 
hand and the cantle with the right, approach the horse 
on the near side from the direction of the croup and /?/ace 
the center of the saddle on the middle of the horse's back so it 
will fit close to it; let down the cincha strap and cincha; 



126 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

pass by the horse's head to the off side, adjust the cincha 
and straps and see that the pad or blanket is smooth; re- 
turn to the near side by the head, raise the pad or blanket 
slightly under the pommel arch so that the withers may 
not be compressed; take the cincha strap in the right 
hand, reach under the horse and seize the cincha ring 
with the left hand, pass the end of the strap through the 
ring from underneath (from inside to outside), then up 
and through the upper ring from the outside; if neces- 
sary, make another fold in the same manner. 

The strap is fastened as follows: Pass the end through 
the upper ring to the front; seize it with the left hand, 
place the fingers of the right between the outside folds 
of the strap; pull from the horse with the right hand and 
take up the slack with the left; cross the strap over the 
folds, pass the end of it, with the right hand, underneath 
and through the upper ring back of the folds, then 
down and under the loop that crosses the folds and draw 
it tightly; weave the end into the strands of the cincha 
strap, between the rings. 

Another method of fastening the cincha strap is as fol- 
lows: Pass the end through the upi^er ring to the rear; 
seize it with the right hand, place the fingers of the left 
between the outer folds of the strap; pull from the horse 
with the left hand and take up the slack with the right; 
pass the end of the strap underneath and draw it through 
the upper ring until a loop is formed; double the loose 
end of the strap and push it through the loop and draw 
the loop taut. The free end should then be long enough 
to conveniently seize with the hand. 

Having fastened the cincha strap, let down the right 
stirrup, then the left. 

The surcingle is then buckled over the saddle and 
should be a little looser than the cincha. 

The cincha when first tied should admit a finger be- 
tween it and the belly. After exercising for awhile the 
cincha will be found too loose and should be tightened. 

\ 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 127 

To Unsaddle. 

335. The instructor commands: Unsaddle. 

Stand on the near side of the horse; unbuckle and re- 
move the surcing-le; cross the left stirrup over the sad- 
dle; loosen the cincha strap and let down the cincha; pass 
to the off side by the head, cross the right stirrup, then 
the cincha; pass to the near side by the head, cross the 
cincha strap over the saddle; grasp the pommel vt^ith the 
left hand, the cantle with the right, and remove the sad- 
dle over the croup and place it in front or rear of the 
horse as may be directed, pommel to the front; grasp the 
pad or blanket at the withers with the left hand and at 
the loin with the right, remove it in the direction of the 
croup, the edges falling together, wet side in, and place 
it across the saddle, folded edge on the pommel. 

If in the stable, place the saddle on its peg when taken 
off' the horse. 

To Put on the Curb-Bridle. 

330. The instructor indicates the parts of the bridle 
and explains their uses; he then commands: Bridle. 

Take the reins in the right, the crown-piece in the left 
hand, approach the horse on the near side, passing the 
right hand along the neck; slip the reins over his head 
and let them rest on his neck; take the crown-piece in the 
right hand and the lower left branch of the bit in the 
left hand, the forefinger against the mouth-piece; bring 
the crown-piece in front of and slightly below its proper 
position, insert the thumb of the left hand into the side 
of the mouth above the tush; press open the lower jaw; 
insert the bit by raising the crown-piece; with the left 
hand draw the ears gently under the crown-piece, begin- 
ning with the left ear; arrange the forelock, secure the 
throat-latch and then the curb-strap, taking care not to 
set them too closely. 

The mouth-piece, which should fit the width of the 
horse's mouth, rests on that part of the bars directly op- 



128 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

posite the chin-groove; the curb-strap will then lie in the 
chin-groove, without any tendency to mount up out of it 
on the sharp bones of the lower jaw. This position of the 
mouth-piece will be attained for the majority of horses by 
adjusting" the cheek-straps so that the mouth piece will be 
one inch above the tushes of geldings and two inches 
above the corner teeth of mares. 

The throat-latch should admit four fingers between it 
and the throat; this prevents any constriction of the wind- 
pipe or pressure on the large blood-vessels. 

The curb strap or chain, which should be of width to 
fit the chin-groove, not over three fourths of an inch, 
should fit smoothly the chin-groove, and be loose enough 
to admit one or two fingers when the branches of the bit 
are in line with the cheek-strap. 

At the discretion of the instructor the halter may be 
taken oif before bridling, the reins being first passed 
over the neck; if the bridle be put on over the headstall, 
the hitching-strap, if not left at the manger or picket- 
line, will be tied around the neck as before explained. 
The hitching-strap may also be arranged as follows: 
Loop it two or three times through the ring so that the 
loop may be about eight inches long; wind the strap sev- 
eral times around the loops and draw the end tightly 
through them. 

To Unbridle. 

337. The instructor commands: UNBRIDLE. 

Stand on the near side of the horse; pass the reins over 
the horse's head, placing them on the bend of the left 
arm; unbuckle the throat latch, grasp the crown piece 
with the right, and assisting with the left hand gently 
disengage the ears; grasp the bit with the left hand, and 
gently disengage it from the horse's mouth by lowering 
the crown piece; place the crown piece in the palm of the 
left hand, take the reins in the right hand, pass them 
together over the crown piece, make two or three turns 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 129 

around the bridle, then pass the bight between the brow 
band and crown piece and draw it snug. 

The bridle is hung up by the ' reins, or placed across 
the saddle on the blanket. 

If the horse has no halter on, unbridle and push the 
bridle back so that the crown piece will rest on the neck 
behind the poll until the halter is replaced. 

Position of Stand to Horse. 

338. The instructor commands: Stand to horse. 
At this command, each recruit places himself, facing to 

the front, on the near side of the horse, his eyes on a 
line with the front of the horse's head, so that he can see 
along the front, and takes the position of the soldier dis- 
mounted, except that his right hand, nails down, is well 
up and grasps both reins, the forefinger separating them, 
six inches from the bit. 

To Lead Out. 

339. The recruits standing to horse, to leave the sta- 
ble or picket line, the instructor commands: Lead out. 

At this command, each man holding his right hand 
well up and firm, conducts his horse, without looking at 
him, to the place designated by the instructor. 

The horses are formed in line from right to left, and 
each man stands to horse. 

340. Until further directions, intervals of three yards 
are taken between the horses. 

341. When necessary to align the horses, the instruc- 
tor commands: 1. Right (or Left), 2. DRESS, 3. Front. 

At the command dress, the men look along the line, 
and move their horses forward or back as required; at 
the command front, they resume the position of stand to 
horse. 

To Mount in Line with Intervals [Horse Unsaddled). 

342. The recruits standing to horse, the instructor 
commands: 1. Prepare to mount. 

9236 9 



130 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

At this command, drop the right rein, take two back 
steps, stepping- off with the left foot, at the same time 
sliding the right hand' along the left rein; face to the 
right as the right foot is planted, and bring the left foot 
by the side of the right. This should place the recruit 
just behind the near shoulder of the horse. Take both 
reins with the right hand, aided by the left, place the 
right hand on the withers, thumb to the left, fingers to 
the right, holding the reins short enough to feel lightly 
the horse's mouth; the reins come into the hand between 
the thumb and forefinger, the bight (end) falling on the 
off side; place the left hand on the neck near the withers 
and grasp a lock of the mane, the lock coming out be- 
tween the thumb and forefinger. 

The instructor then commands: 2. Mount. 

At this command, spring lightly from the ground and 
raise the body on the wrists, keeping it erect and sup- 
porting the weight by the arms; carry the right leg, 
knee bent, over the horse's back without touching it, the 
weight still borne by the arms, and sit down gently on 
the horse; take one rein in each hand. j 

In the earlier lessons, the recruit may rest the righwf 
forearm on the horse's back to enable him to raise the'^ 
body. 

Position of the Soldier Mounted [Horse Unsaddled). 

343. The body balanced on the middle of the horse's 
back, the buttocks bearing equally, and the seat as fiat 
as possible. 

The legs stretched by their own weight, the knees and 
the fiat of the thighs clasping the horse equally; the 
knees bent without stiffness, and the legs, from the knees 
down, vertical and free, the feet parallel to the horse. 

The body erect and unconstrained. 

The shoulders square and equally thrown back. 

The arms free, the elbows falling naturally. 

Forearms horizontal and close to the sides without 
m'essure. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 131 

The head erect, square to the front, and without con- 
straint. 

One rein in each hand, the rein coming" into the closed 
"hand on the side of the little finger and passing out over 
the first finger, on which the thumb is pressed, the bight 
(end) of the rein falling on the off side; the hands about 
six inches apart, on a level with the elbows, the backs 
straight up and down, the fingers turned toward each 
other. 

Remarks on the Position of the Soldier Mounted. 

Body balanced on the middle of the horse's back. That is the 
point where the motion of the horse is least communicated 
to the rider. 

The buttocks bearing equally, and the seat as flat as possible, 
so that the body will preserve its steadiness. 

The knees and flat of the thighs clasping the horse equally, to 
give a firm, steady seat. 

77^6 knees bent without stiffness, and the legs from the knees 
down vertical and free, that the legs may be carried to the 
rear to aid in directing the horse without deranging the 
seat. 

The feet parallel to the horse, to assist in holding the thighs 
in position. 

The body erect and unconstrained; this gives ease, and en- 
ables it to conform with suppleness to the motions of the 
horse. 

Arms free, elbows falling naturally, that they may con- 
tribute to the steadiness of the seat and not stiffen the 
shoulders or forearms. 

Forearms horizontal and close to the sides without pressure, 
to prevent their being thrown out when the horse trots. 
If with pressure, the motions of the body will be commu- 
nicated to the hands and reins. 

The body from the hips up should be movable, and 
should, in a measure, yield to the motions of the horse; 
from the hips to the knees, immovable and close to the 
horse; from the knees down, movable. The arms move 



132 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

freely at the shoulders to avoid communicating the mo 
tion of the body to the reins; the hands oscillate slightlyl 
with the motion of the horse, but otherwise they are 
stationary, except to direct the horse. 

To Lengthen the Rein, 

344. The instructor commands: 1. Lengthen, 2. Left 

(or RiaHT) REIN. 

At the second command, bring the hands toward each 
other without turning them in; grasp the left rein with 
the thumb and forefinger of the right hand one inch from 
the left thumb. (Two) Half open the left hand and allow 
the left rein to slip until the thumbs touch; close the left 
hand and replace the hands. 

To Shorten the Rein. 

345. The instructor commands: 1. Shorten, 2. Left (or 
Right) rein. 

At the second command, bring the hands toward each 
other without turning them in; grasp the left rein with 
the thumb and first finger of the right hand so that the 
thumbs touch. (Two) Half open the left hand, raise the 
right, slipping the left hand along until the thumbs are 
one inch apart; close the left hand and replace the hands. 

To Take the Reins in One Hand. 

346. To relieve the constraint of the arms by chang- 
ing their position, as well as to prepare the recruits for 
the use of the curbbridlle, the instructor commands: 1. In 
left [or right) hand, 2. Take reins. 

At the second command, bring the left hand opposite 
the middle of the body; half open the left hand and place 
in it the right rein, holding both reins as explained for ^ 
the left rein, except that the little finger separates the 
reins, the right rein coming in above the little finger; 
close the left hand and drop the right hand behind the 
thigh. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 133 

To Adjust the Reins. 

34 7 • Seize the bight with the thumb and forefinger 
of the right (or left) hand; partly open the left (or right) 
hand to let the reins slip through it; raise the right (or 
left) hand until they bear equally; close the left (or right) 
hand upon them, letting the bight fall over the right 
rein; drop the right (or left) hand. 

To Drop and Retake the Reins. 

348. At the command drop reins, the recruit drops the 
reins on the horse's neck near the withers, and lets his 
hands hang naturally behind the thighs. 

To retake the reins, the instructor commands: Take 
REINS. Upon retaking the reins they are held as they 
were when dropped. 

To Dismount in Line with Intervals {Horse Unsaddlea). 

349. The instructor commands: 1. Prepare to dis- 
mount. 

At this command, pass the right rein into the left hand; 
then seize both reins with the right hand in front of the 
left, and place the right hand on the withers, thumb to 
the left, fingers to the right, the reins coming into the 
hand between the thumb and forefinger; let go with the 
left hand, place it on top of the neck, and grasp a lock of 
the mane, the lock coming out between the thumb and 
forefinger. 

The instructor then commands: 2. Dismount. 

At this command, raise the body on both wrists, carry 
the right leg, knee bent, over the horse's back without 
touching it; bring the right leg near the left and come 
lightly to the ground, bending the knees a little; face to 
the left; drop the right rein, step to the front, sliding the 
right hand along the left rein, and take the position of 
stand to horse. 

350. The recruit being mounted, to dismount on the 



134 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

off side, the instructor commands: 1. To the right, 2, Pre- 
pare TO DISMOUNT, 3. DISMOUNT. 

The second and third commands are executed as just 
explained, except that the position of the hands is re- 
versed, that the left leg passes over the horse's back, 
that the body descends on the off side, and that the re- 
cruit stands to horse on that side, holding the reins in 
the left hand. 

The recruit being dismounted, and on the right of his 
horse, to mount from the off side, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Prepare to mount, 2. Mount. 

These commands are executed as previously explained, 
the left hand being on the withers and the right grasp- 
ing a lock of the mane. 

If the command be, 1. Squad, 2. MOUNT, the men exe- 
cute, at the command mount, all that has just been de- 
scribed at commands prepare to mount and mount. 

If the command be, 1. Squad, 2. Dismount; or, 1. To the 
right, 2. Squad, 3. DISMOUNT, the men execute, at the 
command dismount, all that has just been described at the 
commands prepare to dismount and dismount. 

The Rests. 

351. Being at stand to horse: Rest, or. At ease. 
Each man adjusts his horse equipments, if displaced; he 
then executes the command as prescribed in the School 
of the Soldier Dismounted, except that he holds the reins, 
and keeps his horse in place. 

Being mounted, at a halt, or marching: Rest. The 
men are permitted to turn their heads, to talk, and to 
make slight changes of position, but they will not lounge 
on their horses. 

Being mounted at a halt. At ease, or being in march, 
1 . At ease, 2. March. Executed as prescribed for the rests, 
except that silence is preserved. 

352. To resume the attention, 1 . Squad, 2. Attention. 
Each man, if dismounted, takes the position of stand to 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 135 

horse; if mounted, he takes the position of the soldier 
mounted. 

These rules are general. 

To File Off. 

353. To return the horses to the stable or picket 
line, the instructor commands: 1. By the right (or left) file 
off, 2. March. 

At the command march, the recruit on the right leads 
his horse four yards to the front, the hand high and firm, 
turns to the right, and then marches to the stable or 
picket line. Each man executes successively the same 
movement when the one who precedes him has moved 
four yards to the front. 

To Dismiss the Squad. 

354. The men remove, clean, and put the equipments 
in place, care for and secure their horses, under the 
direction of the instructor or senior non-commissioned 
officer. Each man, as soon as he has finished, stands to 
heel. The instructor or senior non-commissioned officer 
having satisfied himself by inspection that the horses and 
equipments are properly cared for, and that the precau- 
tions required on their return from exercise have been 
observed, orders the men to fall in, marches them to the 
battery parade ground, and dismisses them. 

To stand to heel. — Each man stands at attention, one 
yard from and facing his heel-post. At the picket line 
he is one yard from and facing his horse. 

MOUNTED EXERCISES. 

355. The mounted exercises make the recruit agile 
and supple, give him confidence, and enable him to main- 
tain a balanced seat on his horse in every variety of move- 
ment. All soldiers will be frequently practiced in them 
in order that the agility and suppleness they have ac- 
quired may be maintained, 



136 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

Whenever practicable, the recruits will be prepared 
for instruction in the School of the Soldier Mounted by 
the execution of the mounting and dismounting, and 
other mounted exercises, with a wooden vaulting-horse 
about fifteen hands high; or with a horizontal vaulting- 
bar, which is gradually raised to the height of a horse. 

To give confidence to the recruits, the horses, which 
are apt to become uneasy, will, during the first few les- 
sons, be tied in roomy stalls, to a fence, or to the walls of 
the riding-hall; or the horse may be put on the longe, 
the recruit dropping the reins. 

The horses have the watering-bridle, and at the dis- 
cretion of the instructor may have the saddle-pad or 
blanket, and surcingle. If the horse be tied, it is recom- 
mended that the pad or blanket be dispensed with. ' 
^ As soon as the recruits have been taught with the horses 
tied, or on the longe, to mount and dismount, and to hold 
the reins, and when they have some confidence on horse- 
back, which should be acquired after they have succeeded 
in executing with some facility the mounted exercises as 
far as to include the eighth, the exercises are continued 
with the horses in line with intervals, or in coluron of i 
files; the instruction in marching and the use of the aids 
will then begin, and thereafter form a part of each 
lesson. 

When the mounted exercises are correctly executed 
at a halt, they are repeated at a walk, then a trot, and 
finally at a canter. 

The recruits will not be required to go through all the 
mounted exercises in the order in which they are de- 
scribed, the more difficult ones not being attempted, and 
the^ gaits for the easier ones being restricted to a walk 
until the recruits have acquired a fairly secure, well- 
balanced seat at a trot and a gallop. 

In order not to strain or unduly fatigue men who are 
not accustomed to the exercises, the drill should be inter- 
rupted by frequent rests. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 137 

During the exercises, the recruit drops and retakes 
the reins without command, whenever necessary to exe- 
cute the motions commanded or to control the horse; 
and when he dismounts he remains near the shoulder of 
his horse, and has one hand on the withers (or pommel). 
When the horse is not led, the hand on the withers 
(pommel) holds the reins with a bearing- just sufficient to 
let the horse know he is under control. 

To resume the position of stand to horse, the instructor 
commands: Stand to horse. 

The Galloping Step. 

356. In the exercises at a trot and a canter, the recruit, 
when dismounted, keeps pace with his horse and main- 
taifis his place at the shoulder by means of the galloping 
step, which he executes by a succession of leaps, rising 
and alighting with the rise and fall of the forehand of 
the horse, keeping the left or right foot in advance, ac- 
cording as he is on the left or right of the horse, and 
supporting his weight on the balls of his feet. 
First Mounted Exercise. 

1. Lean back, 2. Up. 

At the first command, lean back until the head rests 
on the horse's croup, the hands on the thighs. Up: Re- 
sume gradually the position of the- soldier mounted, 
without deranging the position of the feet and legs. 
Second Mounted Exercise. 

1. Raise knees, 2. Down. 

At the first command, raise the knees until the thighs 
are horizontal, lower legs vertical, toes level with the 
heels, body erect, shoulders square. Down: Resume the 
position of the soldier mounted. 

Third Mounted Exercise. 

1. Raise feet, 2. Down. 

At the first command, raise the feet to the rear as high 
as possible on the sides of the horse; then raise the knees, 



138 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

keeping the feet in place, until on a level with the ankle. 
Down: Resume the position of the soldier mounted. 

Fourth Mounted Exercise. 

1. Right (or Left)^ 2. FACE, 3. Front. 

At the second command, turn the body to the right, 
carrying the right knee toward the rear, the legs astride 
the horse, the feet pointing to the right, body erect, the 
hands resting on the right thigh. Front: resume the 
position of the soldier mounted. 

Fifth Mounted Exercise. 

Turn to the right (or left). 

Pass the left leg, knee bent, over the horse's neck, 
turning on the seat, and sit faced to the horse's right, the 
body erect and hands resting on the thighs. The turns 
may be continued, the recruit passing the right or left 
leg over the croup or neck of the horse. 
The Reaches. 

The reaches teach the recruit to regain his balance, im- 
press him with the importance and confirm him in the 
use of the clasp of the legs. 

Sixth Mounted Exercise. 

1. Right (or Left), 2. Reach. 

As the second command, carry the right hand, back up, 
straight to the front, fingers and arm extended and hori- 
zontal. (Two) Close the legs firmly, sweep the hand 
quickly to the right, keeping the arm horizontal and 
leaning the body to the right. (Three) Resume the po- 
sition of the soldier mounted. 

Seventh Mounted Exercise. 

1. Right (or Left) rear, 2. REACH. 

At the second command, extend the right arm as in the 
first motion of right reach. (Two) Sweep the hand 
quickly to the right and rear, keeping the arm horizon- 
tal, at the same time making a right face and leaning 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 139 

the body to the rear. (Three) Resume the position of 
the soldier mounted. 

Eighth Mounted Exercise. 

1. Right (or Left) low, 2. REACH. 

At the second command, hold the reins with the thumb 
and forefinger and grasp a lock of the mane with the 
other fingers of the left hand. (Two) Bend the body to 
the front and downward, on the right of and near the 
horse, the right arm extended and the fingers as near 
the ground as possible. (Three) Resume the position 
of the soldier mounted. 

The Reaches [Horse Saddled), 

Right (or Left) low, 2. REACH. 

At the second command, hold the reins with the thumb 
and forefinger and grasp a lock of the mane with the 
other fingers of the left hand; free the left foot from the 
stirrup, and carry the leg, knee bent, to the rear, sup- 
porting it just above the ankle against the can tie of the 
saddle. (Two) Bend the body to the front and down- 
ward on the right of and near the horse; carry the right 
foot in the stirrup slightly to the rear, supporting it 
against the side of the horse; extend the right arm and 
touch the ground with the fingers. (Three) Resume 
the position of the soldier mounted. 

After some practice with the reaches, horses saddled, 
the instructor directs the recruits to drop their caps or 
other article, either to the right or left of the horse, and 
then commands: 1. Right (or left) low, 2. Reach. Each re- 
cruit then executes the low reach and picks up the arti- 
cle. The instructor observes that the recruits are not im- 
patient with their horses, and that each one persists until 
he has accomplished the feat, or demonstrated his inabil- 
ity to do so. 

Ninth Mounted Exercise. 

The recruit mounted, and at turn to the left (or right) ^ to 
mount: 1. Prepare to mount, 2. Mount, 



140 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

At the first command, place the right hand on the 
withers and seize a lock of the mane with the left hand. 
At the command mount, support the weight on the hands, 
turning the body to the right about, legs extended and 
joined; then pass the right leg, knee bent, over the 
horse's back and take the position of the soldier mounted. 

Tenth Mounted Exercise. 

The recruit mounted, and at iurn to the left, to dis- 
mount: 1. Prepare to dismount, 2. Dismount. 

At the first command, place the right hand on the with- 
ers and seize a lock of the mane with the left hand. At 
the command dismount^ support the weight on the hands, 
turning the body to the right about, descend lightly to the 
ground on the balls of the feet, bending the knees a little. 

If the recruit be at turn to the right to dismount on 
the off side: 1. To the right, prepare to dismount, 
2. Dismount. 

Executed as just described, except that the position of 
the hands is reversed, that the body is turned to the left 
about and descends on the off side. 

Eleventh Mounted Exercise. 

The recruit being at turn to the left, to dismount on the 
off side: 1. To the right, 2. PREPARE TO DISMOUNT, 3. DIS- 
MOUNT. 

At the first command, place the right hand on the 
withers and seize a lock of the mane with the left hand. 
At the command dismount, support the weight on the 
hands, turning the body to the right about; then pass 
both legs, joined, over the horse's back and descend lightly 
to the ground on the off side, alighting on the balls of the 
feet, bending the knees a little. 

If the recruit be at turn to the right, to dismount on the 
near side: 1. Prepare to dismount, 2. Dismount. 

Executed as just described, except that the position of 
the hands is reversed, that the body is turned to the left 
about and descends on the near side. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 141 

Twelfth Mounted Exercise. 

The recruit mounted, to face to the croup: Face to 
RIGHT (or left) about. 

Without saddle. — Place both hands on the withers; 
raise the body upward and forward on the hands; at the 
same time quickly extend the legs to the rear and cross 
them, left leg" in front, above the horse's back; lower the 
body, catching the horse on the left side with the right 
leg and the right side with the left leg; at the same time 
give an impulse to the right with the hands; sit down 
facing the croup. 

With saddle. — Place the right hand on the can tie, left 
hand on pommel; raise the body on the hands, tilt the 
body to the right, elevating the buttocks, change the 
right leg to the near, left to the off side, and sit astride, 
facing the croup. 

The recruit facing the croup, to face to the proper front, 
the instructor gives the same commands, which are ex- 
ecuted as just explained. 

It is preferable for the recruits to go through this ex- 
ercise by individual trial, until they have gained the con- 
fidence necessary to facility, before requiring them to ex- 
ecute it by command. 

Thirteenth amounted Exercise. 
To mount, marching: 1. Prepare to mount, 
2. Mount. Executed as prescribed from a halt, except 
that the recruit is at the galloping step, that he springs 
forward as he rises, and that, as he drops into his seat, 
he catches against the flank with his leg to avoid passing 
over the horse. 

Fourteenth IVIounted Exercise. 
To dismount, marching: 1. Prepare to dismount; 

or, 1. To the right, 2. PREPARE TO DISMOUNT, 3. DIS- 
MOUNT. Executed as prescribed from a halt, except that 
when the legs are joined, the recruit presses against the 
side of the horse with the leg next the shoulder to push 



142 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

his body clear, and alights on the ground faced to the 
front, and takes the galloping step if the horse be at a 
trot or gallop. 

Fifteenth Mounted Exercise. 

To vault, at a halt: 1. Prepare to vault, 2. Vault. 
Executed from either side of the horse as prescribed for 
the mount from a halt, except that the recruit leans the 
body forward and carries both legs joined over the horse's 
back without touching it. As soon as the body clears 
the horse he eases the right (or left) hand gradually, 
and takes it off the withers (pommel) just before coming 
to the ground, alights on both feet, and drops the left 
(or right) hand. 

To vault, marching. — Executed by the commands and 
means just prescribed, except that the recruit alights 
facing to the front, and takes the galloping step if the 
horse be at a trot or gallop. 

When the recruits are sufficiently well instructed, the 
instructor may combine the mounting, dismounting, and 
vaulting. For example: Mounted, turned to the left, the 
instructor commands: Dismount and mount, or. Dis- 
mount, VAULT, AND MOUNT, etc. 

Sixteenth Mounted Exercise. 

To jump on and over the horse. — The squad being in 
line at stand to horse, without arms or spurs, a quiet horse 
is held with his side toward and fifteen or twenty yards 
in front of the line. The i-ecruits are instructed as to the 
kind of jump they are to make. 

At the commands: 1. First recruit from the right (or ieft)^ 
2. March, the recruit designated turns over his horse to 
the recruit next on his left, walks along the front of the 
squad, and when opposite the horse to be jumped, faces 
him and takes a fast run; upon reaching him, he places 
his hands on the horse's back, jumps astride him or over 
him as directed, returns to his place in ranks, and re- 
sumes his horse. The other recruits move out in succes- 
sion at the command next. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 143 

Seventeenth Mounted Exercise, 

To mount double and dismount. — The squad is divided 
into two equal parts, one part, designated the first sec- 
tion, being" mounted, and its men called individually Nos. 
1; the other, designated as the second section, being dis- 
mounted, and its men called individually Nos. 2. 

Nos. 1 remain with their horses, and Nos. 2 are ordered 
to join Nos. 1; if in the riding hall, the first section is put 
on the track in column of files marching to the left hand 
and the second ordered to join it. Nos. 2 place themselves 
on the near side and near Nos. 1. 

1. Prepare to mount, 2. Mount. 

At the first command. No. 1 takes the reins in the right 
hand, lowers his left shoulder, bends the left elbow and 
carries it to the rear, supports himself by clasping the 
horse with his legs, and, if necessary, places his right 
hand on the horse's neck or withers; No. 2 clasps the 
forearm of No. 1 with the left hand, back up, places his • 
right hand on the horse's back directly in rear of No. 1, 
and if marching takes the galloping step. Mount : No. 
2 springs up and seats himself behind No. 1, astride the 
horse and facing to the front. No. 1 at the same time 
raising his left shoulder and leaning his body to the right 
to assist and support him; No. 1 resumes the erect posi- 
tion and No. 2 steadies his seat by placing his hands 
under the armpits of No. 1, thumbs behind the shoulders. 

Being Mounted Double, to Dismount. 

1. Prepare to dismount, 2. Dismount. 

At the first command. No. 1 takes the reins in the right 
hand, carries his left elbow to the rear, and steadies him- 
self as at the command prepare to mount tor mounting 
double; No. 2 presses his hands against No. 1 and pushes 
himself slightly to the rear, then places his right hand on 
the horse's back between himself and No. 1, and his left 
on the left forearm of No. 1, outside of the elbow, back of 
the hand up. Dismount : No. 2 carries the right leg over 



144 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

the croup and comes to the ground, supporting himself 
by his hands without hanging on No. 1. 

If the command be: No. 1, Prepare to dismount, 
No. 1 drops the reins, supporting himself with his left 
hand on the left thigh of No. 2, and grasps a lock of the 
mane with the right hand. At the command dismount, 
he passes the right leg over the horse's neck, raising the 
right hand and re-seizing the mane as the leg passes, 
springs from the horse, pushes himself forward with the 
left hand, and supporting himself with the right hand, 
comes to the ground. No. 2 takes the reins and seats 
himself forward. No. 1 retains hold of the mane until 
he can safely do without it, and then takes position as 
No. 2 alongside the mounted recruit now become No. 1. 

Use of the Reins and Legs, 

35'7, Preparatory to the movements, the instructor 
mounts the squad and explains the use of the reins and 
legs. 

The applications of the reins and legs, by which the 
movements and gaits of the horse are determined, are 
called the aids. The recruit is taught not only when to 
apply a given aid, but also why he should do so. 

The reins serve to prepare the horse for the movements, 
to guide, support, and halt him; their action should be 
gradual and in harmony with that of the legs. In using 
them the arms should be moved with freedom, and from 
the wrist to the shoulder. In riding, the hand should be 
kept steady, and ought not to be moved with the body; 
at the same time it must be kept light, for the bit causes 
pain if pressed constantly on the. mouth, destroys its 
sensibility, and makes the horse hard-mouthed. The 
hand is light when its pressure is not greater than nec- 
essary, and when there is an almost imperceptible alter- 
nate feeling and easing of the reins in harmony with the 
motion of the horse, by which the delicacy of the horse's 
mouth is preserved and he is made to carry himself light. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 145 

The legs serve to urg-e the horse forward, to support 
him, and to guide him in executing changes of direction 
and of gait; when closed without pressure, they tend to 
steady the horse in his position; when hoth legs are closed 
equally, pressing the horse, they tend to move him for- 
ward; when closed, the right more to the rear than the 
left, they tend to turn him to the right; when closed, the 
left more to the rear than the right, they tend to turn 
him to the left. 

The pressure of the legs must be an elastic, muscular 
action; a heavy clinging pressure or thumping with the 
heels must not be permitted. 

To gather the horse. — Close both legs lightly and raise 
the hands gently until the horse feels the bit. 

This serves to attract the attention of the horse, pre- 
pares him for the movement, and prevents its execution 
being too abrupt or too slow. 

To open the right rein. — Carry the right hand to the right. 

To open the left rein. — Carry the left hand to the left. 

To wheel the horse to the right (or left). — Open the right 
(or left) rein and close the right (or left) leg, pressing 
slightly with the left (or right) knee, the right (or left) 
leg more to the rear than the other. 

To March. 

35 §. The squad is drilled at a walk until taken to the 
riding-school; it will be halted upon the completion of 
each movement after marching a few yards. 

Being in line, at a halt, the instructor commands: 
1. Forward, 2. March. 

At the command forward, gather the horse; at the com- 
mand march, lower the hands slightly and close the legs 
equally, increasing their pressure by degrees until the 
horse steps out, when the hands are gradually replaced 
and the legs relaxed. 

At the command march, the hands are lowered first to 
let the horse move forward with freedom, and the legs 
9236 10 



146 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

closed equally to make the horse move straight to the 
front, and by degrees to cause him to obey without irreg- 
ularity. 

To Halt 

359. Marching in line, the instructor commands: 
1. Squad, 2. Halt. 

At the command squad, gather the horse without slack- 
ening the gait. At the command halt, raise the hands by 
degrees, move them toward the body until the horse 
obeys, holding the legs near to keep him straight and 
prevent him from backing; then replace the hands grad- 
ually and relax the legs. 

To March by the Flank from Line with Intervals. 

860. The instructor commands: By the right (or left) 
flank, 2. March. 

,.•^^,--^..-^^-1^^ At the first command, gather 
A jC a j\2y} the horse; at the command /warc^, 
W w H H*~"* open the right rein and close both 
U vJ U U legs, the right leg a little more 

PI. 37, Par. 360. to the rcar than the other; wheel 

to the right by moving the horse over a quarter-circle 
whose radius is two yards; when the wheel is nearly 
ended, diminish the effect of the right rein and leg, using 
the left rein and leg to straighten the horse; when the 
wheel is completed, close both legs and move off at right 
angles to the original direction. 

When executed at a trot or gallop, the effect of the 
outer (in this case, the left) leg is increased to sustain the 
horse. 

361* The squad having been marched by the flank, is 
now in column of files, with the distance of one yard from 
the head of each horse to the croup of the one before him. 
Each recruit should so conduct his horse that the man 
who immediately precedes him may hide all the other 
men in his front. 

362. To halt the column of files, and to resume the march, 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 147 

the instructor commands: 1. Squad, 2. Halt, and 1. For- 
ward, 2. March. 

Since each horse with his rider occupies a space of 
three yards in length by one in breadth, the squad, if 
again marched by the flank, is brought back to its orig- 
inal position in line with intervals of three yards between 
the files. 

To March to the Rear. 

363. Being •in line with inter- /''-\ /'"'n '''"''"y''""\ 
vals, or in column of files, the in- A 6 j^ (V'*^^ 
structor commands: 1. Right (or Q Q I 
Left) about, 2. March. 

Each recruit describes a half-cir- 
cle whose radius is two yards, and 
then moves off in the new direc- 
tion. Mill 

To halt upon the completion of ^ ^ 

the about, the in- pi. 38, Par. 363. 

^structor commands: 1. Squad, 2. Halt. 

/^ To Oblique. 

/ P 364. Being in line with intervals, or 
y^ /^ in column of files, the instructor com- 
y / M mands: 1. Right [ov Left) oblique, 2. March. 
y y y Each recruit makes a half -wheel to the 
Cy ,'''^i*ig"ht, describing the eighth of a circle 
/ ^ whose radius is two yards, and then 
moves off in the new direction. 
y / To resume or to take the direct march, 

/ r-^^ the instructor commands: 1. Forward, 

2. March. At the command march, the 

recruits half-wheel to the left, and then 
move forward. 

365. In obliquing, the movement may 

be arrested for the purpose of correcting 

PI. 39, Par. 364. faults by thc commands: 1 . Squad, 2. Halt; 



1 
i 
a. 
a 



rY 



148 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

and the oblique ma^ch resumed by the commands: 
1. Oblique, 2. MARCH. 
This rule is general. 

To Change Direction Marching in Column of Files. 

366, 1. Column right {or left)', or, 1. Column half- right (or 
half-left), 2. March. 

At the first command, the leading* recruit gathers his 
horse; at the command march, he executes the wheel, or 
half -wheel' to the right, as just explained, and moves off 
in the new direction; the others execute in succession the 
same movement upon arriving on the same ground. 

To Rein Back. 

SS7. Being in line at a halt: 1. Backward, 2. March, 
3. Squad, 4. Halt. 

At the command backward, gather the horse. 

At the command march, keep a firm seat, hold both legs 
close; rein in gradually until the horse yields to the pres- 
sure of the bit and steps to the rear; then immediately 
yield the hand slightly to allow the horse to regain his 
balance, and relax the legs; continue in the same manner 
to yield the hand and relax the legs, and rein in and close 
the legs, so as to keep the horse in continuous motion. 

This movement should be frequently practiced to keep 
the horse light and collected. 

If the horse raises his nose and throws his weight on 
his haunches without stepping back, hold the hands low 
and play the reins with light rapid motions of the hands 
until he yields. 

If the horse throws his haunches to the right, ease the 
left leg and close well the right. If to the left, ease the 
right leg and close well the left. If this be not sufficient 
to put the horse in proper position, open the rein on the \ 
side toward which he throws his haunches, supporting j 
him at the same time with the other rein. I 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 149 

Alignment. 

368. To give a general alignment to the squad, the 
instructor orders any recruit to move forward or rein 
back, so as to be in line with the other men. 

Remark. 

369. For the. sake of convenience, the instructor may- 
cause the recruits, upon leading out, to form line with 
horses one foot apart, and teach them to mount and to dis- 
mount in fine, to march by the flank from line, and to form line 
from column of files, only employing these movements to 
begin and end the drill, the interval of three yards being 
maintained as before during the instruction. 

To Mount in Line [Horse Unsaddled). 

370. The instructor causes the men to call off from 
right to left, and commands: 1. Prepare to mount, 
2. Mount, 3. Form, 4. Rank. 

At the first command, the odd numbers, stepping off 
with the left foot, lead their horses four yards to the 
front, keeping opposite their intervals and regulating 
by the right; all then prepare to mount; at the second 
command they mount; at the fourth, the even numbers 
move up in the intervals without jostling or precipita- 
tion. 

To March by the Flank from Line. 

3*71. Being at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. By 
file, 2. By the right (or left) flank, 3. March. 

At the second command, the man on the right gathers 
his horse; at the command march, he wheels to the right 
and moves forward in the new direction. The second 
man from the right gathers his horse as soon as the first 
begins to move, wheels to the right, and follows him at 
the distance of one yard from head to croup. The move- 
ment is executed in succession by the other files as ex- 
plained for the second. 

If marching, all halt at the commarid march, except the 



150 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

man on the right. The movement is then executed as 
before. 

To Form Line to the Right or Left, from Column of Files. 

372« The instructor commands: 1. Left [ov Right) into 
line, 2. March, 3. Squad, 4. Halt. 

At the first command, the leading recruit gathers his 
horse, and, at the command march, wheels to the left and 
moves forward, halting at the fourth command, given at 
any time after his horse is in the new direction. The 
others move forward until nearly opposite their places in 
line, when each wheels to the left, closes in to the man 
who preceded him, and halts on the line. 

To Dismount in Line [Horse Unsaddled). 

373. The instructor commands: 1. Prepare to dis- 
mount, 2. Dismount, 3. Form, 4. Rank. 

At the first command, the odd numbers gather their 
horses and move forward four yards, and all prepare to 
dismount; at the second command, they dismount; at 
the fourth, the even numbers move up in the intervals. 

The Riding-School. 

374. If there be no riding-hall, a rectangular track is 
laid out one hundred yards long and thirty-three yards 
wide. The entrance is at the middle of one of the sides. 

The corners are marked by stakes or stones, and the 
recruits are required to keep within the limits defined. 
For the execution of the mounted exercises, it is advan- 
tageous to have the track inclosed by a close board fence, 
sloped outward to give protection to the riders' knees. 

The instructor may unite from eight to twelve recruits. 
Two corporals or instructed men, designated conductors, 
are placed one on the right, the other on the left; the con- 
ductors may use saddles and stirrups. 

The instructor explains that all changes of direction are 
made toward the interior of the riding-school, and that 
the recruits, when on the track, march to the right hand, or 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 151 

to the left hand, according as their right or left sides are 
toward the interior. 

To Enter the Riding-School. 

3y5. The squad being mounted, is marched into the 
riding-school in column of files; when the leading con- 
ductor is within two yards of the opposite side, the in- 
structor commands: 1. Column right (or /e/f), 2. March. 

The conductor takes a free and even gait and keeps the 
track, changing direction exactly at the corners without 
command. The recruits follow, preserving their distances 
and recovering them by degrees when lost; just before ar- 
riving at a corner, each gathers his horse and executes 
the wheel correctly. The instructor, placing himself 
inside the track, superintends the movements of the men 
and corrects their positions. 

If, in marching to the right hand, the horse bear his 
shoulders to the right, open the left rein a little and bring 
the right leg near; if he throw his haunches to the right, 
close the right leg in rear of the girth, and feel lightly 
the right rein. 

To Change Hands. 

3'76, The instructor commands: 1. Column right {or left), 

2. March, when the leading conductor is marching on 
one of the sides; and, 3. Column left (or right), 4. March, 
when he arrives within two yards of the opposite side. 

Or, 1. Column half-right (or half-left), 2. MARCH, when 
the leading conductor enters one of the long sides; and, 

3. Column half-left (or half-right), 4. MARCH, when he nearly 
reaches the opposite side. 

Or, as soon as the last man is upon one of the long sides, 
1. Right (or Left) oblique, 2. MARCH, adding, 3. Forward, 

4. March, when the recruits arrive near the opposite 
side. 

Or, 1. By the right (or left) flank, 2. MARCH, when the 
column is marching on one of the long sides; and, 3. By 



152 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

the left (or right) flank, 4. March, when the line arrives 
within two yards of the opposite side. 



In marching- in line, each recruit regulates his horse 
by that of the conductor who last led in column of files. 

To Trot. 

STY. Being at a walk upon one of the long sides, the 
instructor commands: 1. Trot, 2. March. 

At the command trot, gather the horse; at the command 
march, lower the hands a little and close the legs by de- 
grees until the horse obeys, when the hands are gradu- 
ally replaced and the legs relaxed. 

The gait is slow at first, and the instructor sees that 
the recruits feel lightly their horses' mouths without 
bearing upon the reins, and explains that the necessary 
ease and stability are acquired by sitting well down on 
the horse (or saddle) and partially relaxing the body, 
thighs, and legs. 

3 78. The movements already taught at open inter- 
vals at a walk are repeated at a trot, care being taken to 
give the commands when the squad is marching on one 
of the long sides of the track, or when two yards from 
it. In wheeling by recruit, tc the right or left, the in- 
structor sees that the trot is neither slackened nor in- 
creased, 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 153 

To Pass from the Trot to the Walk. 

379, The instructor commands: 1. Walk, 2. March. 

At the command walk, gather the horse; at the com- 
mand march, raise the hands by degrees and hold the legs 
close to prevent the horse from coming to a halt; as soon 
as he walks, replace the hands gradually and relax the 
legs. 

To Increase and Diminish the Rapidity of the Trot. 

3S0. Being at a slow trot on one of the long sides, the 
instructor commands: Trot out. 

At this command, lower the hands and close the legs 
by degrees until the horse increases the gait to a fast trot. 
As soon as the proper gait is attained, the instructor sees 
that the horses are kept up to it, and pays particular at- 
tention to the positions of the recruits; if their seats be- 
come too much deranged, he brings the squad to a slow 
trot or to a walk. 

3§1. To resume a moderate trot, the instructor com- 
mands: Slow trot. 

At this command, raise the hands by degrees until the 
horse moderates the gait, closing the legs to prevent his 
taking the walk. 

To Pass from a Halt to the Trot. 
3 §2, The instructor commands: 1. Forward, 2. Trot, 
3. March. 

At the command forward, gather the horse; at the com- 
mand march, pass at once to the trot as explained from a 
walk. 

" To Halt from a Trot. 

383, The instructor commands: 1. Squad, 2. HALT. 

Executed as explained from a walk; the recruits stop 
their horses together, but not abruptly. 

Recruits at first often support themselves with the 
reins and cling with the legs; to remedy this fault they 
are made to ride at a trot without holding the reins, the 



154 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

arms folded. To accomplish this, the column is halted, 
the rear half is placed abreast the first half, thus forming 
two parallel columns, and each recruit in one column is 
instructed to pass the reins over his horse's head to the 
recruit next him in the other column, and the ride is 
then conducted at a trot. 

To Pass from the Head to the Rear of the Column. 

384, Being at a walk, to teach the recruits to control 
their horses and to use the reins and legs, the instructor 
commands: First fife from front to rear. 2. March. 

At the first command, the leading man gathers his 
horse; at the command march, he leaves the column by a 
right or left about, according as he is marching to the 
right or left hand, moves parallel to the column, and en- 
ters it again at the rear by another about. 

To Pass from the Rear to the Head of the Column. 

3§f5« Being at a walk, the instructor commands: 1. Last 
file from rear to front, 2. Trot, 3. March. At the command 
trot, the recruit in rear gathers his horse; at the com- 
mand march, he leaves the column by an oblique, takes 
the trot, moves parallel to the column, enters it again at 
the head by another oblique, and resumes the walk. 

Each of the other recruits executes the same movement 
at the command next, which is repeated by the instructor 
until all the files have passed in succession front to rear, 
or from rear to front. 

To March in Circle. 

386, The leading conductor being on one of the long 
sides and seventeen or more yards from a corner, the in- 
structor commands: 1. Circle to the right (ov left), 2. March. 

At the first command, the conductor gathers his horse; 
at the command march, he describes a circle between the 
two tracks; the other men follow, each gathering his 
horse before entering upon the circle, keeping him on it 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 155 

by the inner rein, and supporting- him by the leg on that 
side. 

SSy* While circling, the recruits may pass from a walk 
to a trot, and the reverse, may be halted in column, smdput 
in march, as when marching on the track. To change 
hands, the instructor commands: 1. Column right {or left), 
2. March ; the command march being given when the 



PI. 41, Par. 387. 

leading conductor is on the track. The squad passes 
over the diameter of the circle and circles in the oppo- 
site direction by the commands: 1. Column left (or right), 
2. March, the command march being given when the con- 
ductor is two yards from the circumference. 

3 §8. To march again on a straight line, the instructor 
commands, as soon as the leading conductor arrives on 
the track on the long side: 1. Forward, 2. March; the 
conductor, followed by the recruits, then takes the track 
and moves forward. 

Individual Circling. 
^ 3 §9. Marching to the right (or left) hand on the long 
side of the hall, the instructor commands: 1. Files, circle 
to the right (or left), 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, each file marches on a circle 
four yards in diameter, tangent to the track, regulating 
on the conductor, all completing the circle at the same 
time. The files continue to march on the circle until 



156 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

the commands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH, given as the files 
take the track, when they march on the track to the same 
hand as when the movement began. 

While marching on the circle to the right, open the 
right rein and close both legs; if marching at a trot or a 
canter, the left more than the right, to sustain the horse. 
If the commands: 1. Squad, 2. Halt, be given, the files 
halt, their horses facing in the same direction as the 
conductor's. 

Instruction of Large Squads, 

390. From sixteen to twenty recruits may now be 
united in the squad. The instructor repeats the exer- 
cises already prescribed, still paying more attention to 
the horsemanship of the men than to the accuracy of the 
drill. Four conductors are needed, one being placed on 
each flank and two in the middle. The instructor halts 
the rear half of the column, headed by a conductor, di- 
recting him to move off again as soon as the conductor of 
the front half of the column arrives at the corresponding 
point of the opposite side of the riding school. The con- 
ductors are to arrive at the same time at the diagonal 
angles, the rear column regulating by the other. In 
changing hands in column, the columns pass each other 
to the right; in changing hands in line, the recruits pass 
each other by the right, and keep their legs close in pass- 
ing through the intervals of the opposite division, to pre- 
vent the horses from slacking the gait. 

To Mount (Horse Saddled). 

391, The horses, being equipped with saddles and curb 
bridles, are habitually formed in line. The recruits 
standing to horse, the instructor causes them to call off, 
and commands: 1. Prepare to mount. 

At this command, the odd numbers lead out as pre- 
viously explained. All the recruits drop the right rein, 
take two back steps, stepping off with the left foot, at 
the same time sliding the right hand along the left rein; 



I 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 157 

half -face to the right as the right foot is planted, and 
bring- the left foot near the right. This should place the 
recruit about opposite the girth. Take both reins in the 
right hand, aided by the left, place the right hand on the 
pommel, thumb to the left, fingers to the right, holding 
the reins short enough to feel lightly the horse's mouth; 
the reins come into the hand between the thumb and 
forefinger, the bight (end) falling on the off side. (Two) 
Each recruit passes a third of the left foot in the stirrup, 
with the assistance of the left hand, if necessary, and 
supports it against the forearm of the horse, rests upon 
the ball of the right foot; places the left hand on the top 
of the neck, well forward, and grasps a lock of the mane, 
the lock coming out between the thumb and forefinger. 

The instructor then commands: 2. Mount. 

At this command, spring from the right foot, holding 
firmly to the mane and keeping the right hand on the 
pommel; bring the heels together, the knees straightened 
and resting against the saddle, the body erect. (Two) 
Pass the right leg, knee bent, over the croup of the horse 
without touching him; let the body come gently down 
into the saddle; let go the mane, insert the right foot in 
the stirrup, pass the reins into the left hand, and adjust 
them. 

At the commands, 3. Form A. Rank, the even numbers 
move up, as before explained. 

392. If the instructor command: 1. Squad, 2. Mount, 
the men execute at the command mount all that has just 
been described at the commands prepare to mount and 
mount. 

Position of the Soldier Mounted [Horse Saddled). 

393. Same as previously explained, with the follow- 
ing exceptions: Buttocks bearing equally upon the mid- 
dle of the saddle, and as flat as possible; reins coming into 
left hand on the side of little finger, and leaving it be- 
tween thumb and forefinger; little finger between the 



158 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

reins, right rein above it, the other fingers closed, thumb 
pressing the reins firmly on second joint of forefinger, 
the end of the reins falling to the front and outside the 
right rein; left forearm horizontal and close to the body 



PI. 42, Par. 393. 

without pressure; wrist turned inward so that the back 
of the hand is almost perpendicular to the front and 
vertical; right hand behind the thigh, arm hanging 
naturally, feet inserted in the stirrups, so that the ball of 
the foot rests on the tread of the stirrup, heels slightly 
lower than the tread. 

Stirrups. 
394. The stirrups should support the weight of the 
legs only, and be of such length that when the legs are 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 159 

in proper position and the feet out of the stirrups the 
tread will be on a level with the lower part of the ankle 
bone. The length depends somewhat on the formation 
of the man: a man with a thick, heavy thigh requires a 
shorter stirrup than a man with a thin, flat one. 

To approximate the length of the stirrup before mount- 
ing, they are adjusted so that the length of the stirrup- 
strap, including the stirrup, is about one inch less than 
the arm, fingers extended. 

When riding with the stirrups, the balls of the feet are 
kept on the tread by the play of the ankles; the stirrups 
support the weight of the body, in a measure, in its descent 
to the saddle , the ankles yielding to prevent shock . This 
action is an easy, quick stiffening of the muscles that 
distribute the downward motion between the feet, thighs, 
and seat. 

To Cross the Stirrups, 

395, Cross stirrups. 

Throw the right stirrup over to the near side, then the 
left to the off side, the stirrup-straps resting on the with- 
ers in front of the pommel. 

To Dismount [Horse Saddled) . 

396, The instructor commands: L PREPARE TO DIS- 
MOUNT. 

At this command, the odd numbers move forward four 
yards, regulating by the right. All the recruits then 
seize the reins with the right hand, so that they come in 
on the side of the thiimb and forefinger, in front of and 
near the left; place the right hand on the pommel; let 
go with the left hand; place it on top of the neck; grasp 
a lock of the mane, the lock coming out between the 
thumb and forefinger, and take the right foot out of the 
stirrup, keeping the body erect. 

The instructor then commands: 2. Dismount. 

At this command, rise upon the left stirrup; pass the 
right leg, knee bent, over the croup of the horse without 



160 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

touching him; bring the right heel to the side of the 
left; descend lightly to the ground; remove the left foot 
from the stirrup and place it by the side of the right, 
keeping the body erect; let go the mane; pass the end of 
the reins over the pommel of the saddle with the right 
hand, which then seizes the left rein. (Two) Face to 
the left, take two short steps, left foot first; slip the right 
hand along the left rein, and take the position of stand to 
horse. 

At the commands, 3. Form, 4. Rank, the even numbers 
lead up as before explained. 

SOT, If the instructor command: 1. Squad, 2. Dis- 
mount, the men execute, at the command dismount, all 
that has just been prescribed at the commands prepare to 
dismount and dismount. 

Use of the Curb-Bridle, 

398. The general principles of the use of the reins and 
^egs, already explained for the watering-bridle, apply to 
the management of the horse with the curb-bridle, ex- 
cept that the bridle hand is moved instead of both hands. 
In all movements of the hand, the arm should act freely 
and without constraint to the body; and, as the bit of the 
curb-bridle is much more severe than that of the water- 
ing bridle, it must be applied gradually and more gently, 
particularly in halting and in reining back. 

To wlieel the horse to the right (or left), — Carry the hand 
a little forward and to the right (or left), so that the left 
(or right) rein bears on his neck. 

Spurs. 

399, The spur is an aid, and also a means of punish- 
ment. It is an aid when it is used to augment the effect 
produced by one or both legs; it is a means of punish- 
ment when the horse refuses to obey the action of the 
legs. 

To use the spur as an aid, the recruit continues the 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 161 

pressure of the leg" until the spur touches the skin and 
adds its effect to that of the leg; to use it as a means of 
punishment, hold firmly to the horse with the legs, turn 
the toes out a little, give the reins slightly, and press 
firmly with the spur behind the cincha, without moving 
the body, until the horse obeys. 

The spur must never be used unless absolutely neces- 
sary, and when it is, the horse should feel it. A thump- 
ing or continuous light touch with the spur will either 
make the horse insensible to it, or cause him to kick. 

Instruction with Saddle, Curb-Bridle, and Spurs. 

400. The movements already prescribed are repeated. 
The instructor at first causes the recruits to use the sad- 
dle and watering-bridle, and does not give them the curb- 
bridle and spur until they have confidence in their seats 
and are able to ride fairly w^ell. 

The instructor frequently directs that the stirrups be 
crossed over the horses' necks, the left stirrup above the 
right. The men mount and dismount with stirrups 
crossed, as if the horses were unsaddled, placing the right 
hand on the pommel instead of on the withers. Stirrups 
must be taken again during the first lessons at the gallop. 

Principles of the Gallop. 
401* The gallop is a succession of leaps during which 
there is a small interval of time that all the feet are in 
the air. In galloping on a straight line, it is immaterial 
with which foot a horse leads, but horses in the same 
team will gallop with greater ease if all lead with the 
same foot. A horse gallops on the right foot when the 
right fore and hind legs move in advance of the left fore 
and hind legs; he gallops on the left foot when the left 
fore and hind legs are in advance. He gallops true when 
he gallops on the right foot in marching to the right 
hand, or on the left foot in marching to the left hand, 
9236 11 



162 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

and gallops false if, in marching to the right hand, he 
gallops on the left foot, or conversely. A horse is t//s- 
united when he gallops with the near fore leg, followed hy 
the off hind leg, or the off fore leg followed by the near 
hind leg; in either case his center of gravity is deranged 
and his strength impaired'. When the horse gallops on 
the left foot the rider feels a sensible movement in his 
position from left to right; when he gallops on the right 
foot the movement of the rider is from right to left; 
when the horse is disunited, the rider experiences irregu- 
lar movements. 

When the horse gallops true he preserves his balance, 
and in case of a mistake he has his legs under him and 
can more easily recover himself; when he gallops false or 
disunited he is apt to fall whenever he makes a blunder. 

402. The canter is a short, collected gallop; the horse's 
forehand is raised, his whole figure is collected and 
shortened, his neck bowed and his head drawn in, and 
he moves by the spring of the haunches. The canter is 
the fastest gait that is employed during the execution of 
the mounted exercises, and ordinarily in the riding-hall. 
The gallop can not be safely used in the riding-hall unless 
the horse gallops true and the track is in good condition. 

To Gallop. 

403. The instructor will not at first dwell upon the 
mechanism of the gait, but lets each man accommodate 
himself to the motion of the horse without losing his 
seat. 

The recruits marching at a trot to the right hand, on 
one of the long sides, the instructor causes them to in- 
crease to three yards the distances from head to croup, 
and commands: 1. Canter, 2. March. 

At the command canter, gather the horse; at the com- 
mand march, close both legs and rein in with alight, firm 
hand to bring his haunches under him; then carry the 
bridle hand to the left and increase the pressure of the 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 163 

left leg-, in order to throw the weight on the near hind 
leg, and allow the off fore and hind legs to lead; as soon 
as the horse rises, give the hand and relax the left leg; 
rein in slightly and close the legs with a light, even pres- 
sure to keep the horse at the gait and up to the hand. 
A dead pull should be avoided; if the horse leans on the 
hand, yield it and play the reins slightly, then close the 
legs and rein in a little abruptly; as soon as the horse 
obeys, yield the hand. The gait at first is restricted to 
the canter. 

To keep a horse true, the rider must accommodate him- 
self to all the horse's motions, particularly in changing 
direction at the corners . When a horse canters false , or is 
disunited, his rider is ordered to leave the column, come 
to the trot, and pass to the rear of the column, taking care 
not to interfere with the other men; arrived at the rear, 
he resumes the canter, the instructor explaining how to 
keep the horse true. The canter to each hand will be 
kept up only once or twice around the riding-school, the 
recruits being brought to the trot in order to change 
hands. 

The men must keep their horses steady; when able to 
manage them properly at a canter, the distance of one 
yard from head to croup is gradually resumed. 

In order to make it easier for the recruit to start his 
horse true, the instructor may find it advantageous to 
give the command to canter either just before marching 
by the flank upon approaching the track, after marching 
the squad in line across the hall at a trot, or when the 
squad is circling at a trot. 

When the squad has been sufficiently exercised at a 
canter on straight lines and in circle, it is marched by 
the flank and circled by files, at a canter, the instructor 
taking care that the wheels are not made too short, and 
that the recruits keep their horses true and do not de- 
range their positions. During these exercises the stir- 
rups will sometimes be crossed. 



164 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

To Pass from the Canter to the Gallop, and the Reverse. 

404. Being at a canter, on one of the long sides, the 
instructor commands: 1. Gallop, 2. March. 

At this command, give the hands and close the legs 
by degrees until the horse increases his gait to a gallop. 
As soon as the proper gait is obtained, the instructor sees 
that the horses are kept up to it, and pays particular 
attention to the position of the recruits; if their seat be- 
comes too much deranged, he brings the squad to a canter 
or a trot. 

405. To resume the canter, instructor commands: 
1. Canter, 2. MARCH. 

At this command, rein in by degrees until the horse 
moderates the gait, closing the legs to prevent his tak- 
ing the trot. 

To Pass from the Gallop to the Trot. 

406. The instructor commands: 1. Trot, 2. March. 

At the command trot, gather the horse; at the com- 
mand march, rein in by degrees and hold the legs close; 
as soon as the horse trots, replace the hand gradually and 
relax the legs. 

The maneuvering gallop is at the rate of twelve miles 
an hour. 

The maneuvering trot or trot-out is at the rate of eight 
miles an hour. 

The maneuvering walk is at the rate of four miles an 
hour. 

The canter is at the rate of eight miles an hour, the 
same as the trot-out. 

The slow trot is at the rate of from six to six and one- 
half miles per hour. 

When the recruits ride well they will be instructed in 
the rate of the maneuvering gaits. For this purpose four 
stakes are placed in a straight line and 1171 yards apart. 
The recruits are required to march over the spaces at 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 165 

the rate of one, two, or three per minute, according as 
the gait is the walk, trot, or gallop. 

Non-commissioned officers, drivers, and cannoneers 
should also occasionally receive the ahove instruction 
in order that the maneuvering gaits may always be exe- 
cuted at the regulation rate. 

The Turn on the Forehand and Haunches, and the Passage. 

407* The object of the turns on the forehand and 
haunches and the passage is to teach the horse to be 
obedient to the pressure of the legs and reins, and to in- 
struct the recruits in the application of the aids. Each 
of these movements will first be taught to the recruits 
separately. If the movement be new to the horses, the 
recruit should have a light switch, which should be ap- 
plied gently at the time of the pressure of the leg; when 
the horse yields, much should be made of him. Care is 
taken that the horses are not required to do too much 
during the first trials. 

To Turn the Horse on his Forehand. 

408* 1. On the forehand, 2. To the right (or /eft); or, 2. To 
the right (or /eft) about, 3. MARCH. 

At the first command, gather tha horse; at the com- 
mand march, close the right leg behind the girth until the 
horse steps to the left with his hind feet, keeping him 
straight and preventing him from stepping off with his 
fore feet by supporting him with the left leg and reins; 
relieve the pressure of the right leg as soon as the horse 
obeys. Continue the application of these means until the 
horse has turned to the required degree; the fore legs 
should remain in place. If the horse does not obey the 
pressure of the leg at first, open slightly the right rein. 
The movement should not be hurried; if the horse steps 
with his fore feet to the right, increase the effect of the 
left rein to keep them in place. 



166 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

To Turn the Horse on his Haunches. 

409. 1. On the haunches, 2. To the right (ov left):, or, 2. To 
the right (or left) about, 3. March. 

At the first command, gather the horse; at the com- 
mand march ^ rein in, to throw the weight on the haunches , 
and close the legs to prevent him from backing; then 
carry the bridle hand to the right, pressing the left rein 
on the horse's neck, to make him step with his fore feet 
to the right, at the same time supporting him with both 
legs, th^ left leg well behind the girth to keep the 
haunches in place. 

The Passage. 

410. Being on a long side, the recruits are marched 
by the flank and halted, head to the wall or track, when 
they arrive near the opposite side. The instructor 
then commands: 1 . Right (or Left) pass, 2. March, 3. Squad, 
4. Halt. 

At the first command, gather the horse and incline him 
to the right, by carrying the bridle hand slightly to the 
right; at the command march, rein in, close the legs to 
force the horse to the bit; bear the hand well to the right, 
the left rein pressing the horse's neck, and close the lieft 
leg behind the cincha, keeping the body erect; keep up the 
passage by a gentle application of the same means. The 
horse's shoulders should precede his haunches, that is, 
he is held inclined to the right. Only a few steps should 
be taken at first. At the command halt, replace the bridle 
hand, relax the pressure of the left leg as soon as the 
horse moves his haunches and is straight in the line. 

The application of the reins and legs should be in har- 
mony with the sensibility of the horse; if the horse 
obliques too much, diminish the bearing of the reins; if 
he steps too quickly, moderate the effect of the reins 
and legs; if he backs, force him up to the bit by the 
pressure of the legs. 

The movemenl will first be taught to the recruits sepa- 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 167 

rately. If it be new to the horse, the recruit will be 
required to encourag-e him by petting him after each 
effort, care being taken that the horse be not required to 
do too much during the first trials. 

The passage in column is executed by the application 
of the same principles. 

Jumping. 

411. For this exercise, the height of the bar should 
be, at first, one foot, and the width of the ditch two feet. 
As the men and horses become used to jumping, the 
height of the bar and the width of the ditch are gradu- 
ally increased. 

Horses are first taught to jump the ditch and then the 
bar. They are equipped with the watering-bridle, and 
follow a steady horse that is accustomed to jumping. 

It is preferable to take the horses in the open field and 
practice jumping shallow ditches, fallen logs, very low 
fences, etc. Great discretion must be used in applying 
the whip, and, whenever practicable, the horses will not 
be required to jump repeatedly over the same thing or at 
the same place. 

If the horse refuses to take the jump, the instructor 
may give aid with the whip, but in such a way as not to 
terrify him. If the horse be timid, it is sometimes advis- 
able to place the bar on the ground. 

The instructor forms the squad in line, thirty yards 
from the obstacle, and commands: 1. First file from the 
right (or left), 2. MARCH, 3. Next. 

At the command march, the recruit on the right moves 
off at a walk; he takes the trot when he has passed over 
one-third of the distance, and then the gallop. After 
making the jump, he takes the trot, then the walk, and 
takes his place in the rank, which is re-formed about 
thirty yards beyond and on the right or left of the obsta- 
cle, and facing it. The other recruits move out succes- 
sively from the right at the command next. 



168 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

In the riding-hall, the recruits are formed in two squads 
in line, facing each other, at opposite ends of the hall; 
the bars are placed about midway on the long sides. The 
instructor gives the commands just prescribed. 

At the command march, the recruit on the right of each 
squad moves out at a walk, marching diagonally across 
the hall; on passing each other, both take the trot; when 
abreast the flank of the opposite squad they take the 
track at the canter, the horse leading with the right foot; 
after jumping both bars, each recruit takes the trot, then 
the walk, passing around the left flank of the opposite 
squad, marches at a walk diagonally across the hall, and 
forms on the left of his squad. 

The Standing Jump. 

412. Ride the horse up to the bar or other obstacle 
at an animated walk; rein with a light hand to place 
him on his haunches; then give the hand and close the 
legs with energy; as the horse rises, feel the reins only 
enough to prevent them from becoming slack; grasp the 
horse firmly with the knees and legs, keeping the seat 
close; hold the body erect by inclining forward; as the 
horse is grounding, keep the body erect by leaning back- 
ward, and gather the horse to support him; continue the 
march at a walk. 

The Flying Jump. 

413. The same principles are observed as when mak- 
ing the standing jump. The horse must not be hurried 
nor allowed to rush, but held steady and straight for the 
bar or other obstacle. If the obstacle be high, bring 
the horse up at a collected canter, rein in near the obsta- 
cle with a light hand, close the legs with vigorous press- 
ure to make him spring high enough to clear the ob- 
stacle. 

To Jump the Ditch, 

414. Ride straight for the ditch at a steady, animated 
gallop, closing the legs firmly and keeping a firm hand; 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 169 

the instant the horse springs, give the hand, and as he 
grounds sustain him with a light, steady pressure. 

The instructor observes that the recruit does not throw 
out his elbows, thrust his weight into the stirrups, nor 
check his horse too abruptly. If the horse is checked 
suddenly and with too ihuch force after making the jump, 
he takes it as a punishment, and may thereafter try to 
avoid the obstacle. Recruits are apt to try to sustain 
themselves instead of their horses; to prevent this the 
instructor may require them to place the bridle-hand or 
the horse's neck until they have gained confidence. 

To Leap the Bar Dismounted with the Horse. 

415. The recruit dismounts four or five yards in front 
of the bar, takes the galloping step and the position of 
prepare to mount, jumps with the horse, comes to the 
ground at the same time as the fore-feet, takes the gallop- 
ing step, and mounts. In leaping ^ the recruit should be 
careful to spring and not drag on the horse, as it might 
turn him and make him fall. This exercise is executed 
from both sides of the horse, and with or without saddles. 

The Wrestle, 

416. The recruits are formed in two squads in line, 
facing each other, at opposite ends of the hall. The men 
are instructed as to the nature of the exercises. At the 
commands, 1. First file from the right, 2. March, the file 
on the right of each squad moves out at a walk; they 
approach each other on the side indicated by the in- 
structor; on coming together, each, retaining his seat on 
his own horse, endeavors to dismount the other. Each 
is permitted to put his arm around any part of his oppo- 
nent's person, to seize him by the hand, arm, leg, or foot, 
but is prohibited from grasping the clothing of his oppo- 
nent, the bridle or halter of his opponent's horse, or the 
mane of either horse. 



170 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

He may support himself by the hand and arm against 
the right or left side of his horse's neck, but is prohibited 
from clasping around the horse's neck. 

These rules may be modified or others added by the 
instructor, in order to develop skill in wrestling and 
horsemanship. 

The squads being in line with intervals, at opposite 
sides of the hall, facing each other, and the men in one 
rank being opposite those in the other, the instructor 
commands: Wrestle. 

The squads approach at a walk and each man wrestles 
with the one opposed to him. 

At the command aitention, they cease wrestling and re- 
sume the former formation. 

The squad being in any formation. 

At the command: 1. At will, 2. Wrestle, the men 
wrestle with adversaries of their own selection. 

At the command attention^ they form as they were pre- 
vious to the command wrestle. 

The Pursuit. 

417. The object of the pursuit is to test the soldier's 
skill in horsemanship and to confirm his confidence. 

The instructor prescribes the limits within which the 
pursued may ride; if he leave these limits to avoid his 
pursuer, the pursuit ceases in favor of the pursuer and 
both men return to the squad. 

The instructor designates the men — one as the pursued, 
or No. 1, and the other as the pursuer, or No. 2; he indi- 
cates a point toward which No. 1 will march until the 
pursuit is ordered. At the instructor's command move out, 
No. 1 leaves the rank and marches at a walk in the direc- 
tion indicated, followed by No. 2 at a distance of about 
fifteen yards. At any time after they have this distance, 
and before reaching the designated point, the instructor 
commands; 1. The pursuit 2. March. No. 2 endeavors to 
touch No, 1 on the body (excepting the arms, hands, legs, 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 171 

or feet) with the right hand; No. 1 endeavors to prevent 
this by turning, circling, reaching, dismounting, etc. 

At the signal or the command halt, the pursuit ceases 
and the contestants return to the ranks. 

The instructor sees that the conditions laid down for 
. the exercise are observed and that the horses are not 
overworked. 

418. At will. — At this command, given when the re- 
cruits are in the riding-hall, they will be permitted to do 
any of the exercises prescribed, and any others their in- 
genuity or fancy may suggest. The instructor must be 
on the alert to prevent disorders or improprieties. At 
the command attention, the recruits resume their places 
in the formation they had at the command at will. 

MANUAL OF THE SABER, MOUNTED. 

419« The instructor causes the recruits to take the 
saber when they can ride well and execute the move- 
ments with precision. 

The saber is unhooked after the command prepare to 
mount, and when the recruit has placed himself opposite 
the horse's shoulder. As soon as the recruits dismount, 
they hook up the saber and assume the position of stand 
to horse. This rule is general, 

420. Before^ beginning the manual, a few movements 
should always be executed to quiet the horses. 

Being in line, at a halt, the manual of the saber is 
taught in the following order, and by the following com- 
mands: 1. Draw, 2. Saber. 

421. At the command draw, reach with the right hand 
over the bridle hand and pass it through the saber-knot; 
seize the gripe and draw the blade six inches out of the 
scabbard . At the command saber, draw the saber quickly, 
raising the arm to its full extent at an angle of about 
forty-five degrees, the saber edge down, in a straight line 
with the arm; make a slight pause, bring the back of the 



172 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

blade against the hollow of the shoulder, the wrist rest- 
ing on top of the thigh, forearm against the body, the 
little finger on the outside of the gripe. This is the posi- 
tion of carry saber, mounted, 

4 2 2. 1. Present, 2. Saber, and, 1. Inspection, 2. Saber. 
Same as when dismounted. 

423. 1. Return, 2. Saber. Same as when dis- 
mounted, without using the left hand. 

424. As soon as the recruits execute the manual prop- 
erly at a halt, they are required to draw and return saber 
while marching at a walk, the horses being kept at a 
steady gait. When the saber is drawn, the instructor 
sees that the position of the bridle hand is not deranged, 
and that the right shoulder is not thrown back. In re- 
turning saber while marching, the back of the blade rests 
against the left arm until its point enters the scabbard. 

The recruits are also exercised in drawing saber at a 
trot and at a gallop. 

425. Sabers are always returned before dismounting. 
This rule is general, 

SABER EXERCISE, MOUNTED. 

426. The files are always opened for instruction in the 
saber exercise. 

To Take and Close Intervals. 

427. Being in line at a halt, the instructor commands: 
1. To the right (or left) take intervals, 2. MARCH, 3. By the 
left [or right) flank, 4. MARCH, 5. Squad, 6. HALT, 7. Right 
(or Left)^ 8. Dress, 9. Front. 

At the second command, the recruits execute the nnarch 
by the flank from line to the right; the fourth command is 
given when the man on the left has wheeled, and the 
command halt when the horse of the man on the right is 
in the new direction; at the command dress, each man 
casts his eyes to the right and moves forward or reins 
back so as to place himself on a line with the men on his 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 173 

right; at the command front, all cast their eyes to the 
front. The instructor superintends the alignment. 

To increase the interval to more than three yards the 
instructor specifies the distance the recruits will preserve 
in column of files, and each man wheels to the right in 
time to follow the preceding file at this distance. 

42§, To close files the instructor commands: 1. To 
the right (or left) assemble, 2. MARCH, 3. Right (or Left), 
4. Dress, 5. Front. 

At the command march, the man on the right moves six 
yards to the front and halts; the others wheel to the 
right and form line to the left; the squad is aligned as just 
explained. 

4!29« The files being open, the saber exercise is exe- 
cuted as on foot, except that, at the command guard, the 
men move the right hand and saber only. 

430. As the recruits become more skillful in the use 
of sabers, they are practiced in the saber exercise while 
marching in column of files at all gaits, care being taken 
to increase the distance to two yards. They will also be 
exercised in jumping the ditch and the bar, at first with 
the sabef in the scabbard, afterward with the saber 
drawn. 

Manual of the Pistol, Mounted. 

431. Same as when dismounted. 

Inspection of Arms, Mounted. 
432« Same as when dismounted. 
Running at Heads. 

433. After the men have been well instructed in the 
Saber Exercise, the Manual of the Pistol, and the School of 
the Soldier Mounted, they are exercised in running at the 
heads and rings. This is done in the riding-hall. 

434, If the horses are unaccustomed to these exercises, 
they should be ridden quietly, one at a time, around the 
posts at a Walk. 



174 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 

+. J^l^'"^^*'*'®!® ^''®* ^^^ ^t * ^alk and then at a can- 

feSrT4teed''^^* ^^^^ *'^* *^^ ^°^-« -^ -* 

fwn^^.\^°''r^°-^~:*'^*^'.^^*'^^*^* ^ix inches high, and 
two two feet six inches high-called head-posts, aroused; 
also two posts called rmg-posts. The ring-posts are made 
with a horizontal arm, and from the arnT, which extends 
over the center of the track, is suspended an iron ring 
about four inches m diameter, so arranged that it can 
easily be carried away by the saber. 
436. The posts are placed one yard inside the track 

virdf fr^oli?/^'''^"' °' *^\^^".' '^ h«^'i-P««t about twe^fy 
yards from each corner; the ring-post and a head on the 









PI. 43, Par. 436. 



fotu On I I "^ ^"i^^ ,^'^^f "^ ,*^« ^P^«« between the 
S^fi '^ -^^^ t''^ P"®.* '^ "P^"^"^ ^ leather or canvas head 
r^^w Tt'^V'^y- ^ '^^^ i^ ported i^ear each head to 
replace it whenever necessary during the exercise. 
4rf7. i he squad having been divided into two parts 

^L^h'Tr,"^"^. ?. ^^'■- ^^^' i^ ^°™<^<i ill t^o ranks, facing 
each other, at the opposite ends of the riding-hall, by thi 
commands: 1. Left {or Right) into line, 2. MaIch, 3 Iqlad. 
4. HALT, 5. Right (or Left), 6. Dress, 7. Front. 

e Jh LTf"^f fif "^ '""'■^^^^ ^^^^'^"^ ^ii<^° the leading file of 
each half of the squad has marched about three-quarters 
of the distance across the short side of the tr£ck, and 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER MOUNTED. 175 

the command halt, when he arrives opposite the first head- 
post. 

438. At the command of the instructor: 1. First file 
from the right, 2. March, the file on the right of each rank 
moves to the front and left at a walk, and raises pistol; the 
files pass each other midway between the ranks, take the 
trot, and, crossing the hall diagonally, take the canter 
as they turn the corner; each file on turning the second 
corner fires his pistol, loaded with blank cartridges, at 
the first head-post, and, continuing on the track, returns 
pistol, draws saber, takes the position of guard, and, when 
on the opposite side of the hall, takes the heads, by the 
cuts and thrusts directed by the instructor, and the ring, 
at tierce point; having turned the corner, after taking the 
last head on that side, he leaves the track, carries saber, 
and takes the trot; passing by the left of the rank oppo- 
site his own, he takes the walk, and crossing diagonally, 
passes to the rear of his own rank, wheels to the left 
about, takes his place on the left, and returns saber. The 
instructor then commands: Next, and the exercise is con- 
tinued. 

439. After the men have become skillful in the use of 
their sabers to the right, the instructor causes the exer- 
cise to be repeated to the left, then with stirrups crossed, 
and finally with the horses bareback. He may also cause 
hurdles to be placed on the track, on each side, in place 
of one of the heads; and when the men are well instructed, 
causes them in jumping to take a head on a tall post placed 
by the hurdle. 

The instructor will particularly notice that the horse 
gallops true; that in cutting at the heads the seat is close 
to the saddle, that in thrusting and cutting against in- 
fantry the body is kept close to the horse, and that the 
leg on the opposite side is well closed. If the horse is 
swayed off the track, he is not properly ridden, and the 
faults must be pointed out and corrected. 



176 HORSE ARTILLERY. 



HOESE AETILLEEY. 

440. The special instruction required for the cannon- 
eers of a battery of horse artillery embraces that of a 
gun detachment mounted, and that of two or more gun 
2etachments mounted. 

441. The men have spurs and belts, and, in garrison, 
may be armed with the saber, at the discretion of the in- 
structor. 

The Manual of the Saber is executed with the ranks 
either opened or closed. The saber exercise is executed 
with the ranks and files both opened. 

The Gun Detachment, Mounted. 

442. The detachment is formed in two ranks, boot to 
boot, with the distance of one yard from the croups of the 
front-rank horses to the heads of the rear-rank horses. 
It includes, besides the cannoneers for the service of the 

gun, two additional men, Nos. 6 and 7, who 
are required as horse-holders for the cannon- 
eers' horses. When projectiles are fired, an 
additional man. No. 8, is required in each pla- 
toon to hold the horses of the chief of platoon 
PL 44, Par. 442. ^j^^ the chlcfs of scctlous; he is assigned to 

one of the gun detachments of the platoon, originally 

the right. 
The gunner and the even numbers are in the front 

rank, and* the odd numbers in the rear rank; the gunner 

is on the right and is covered by No. 1; No. 2 is on the 

left of the gunner and is covered by No. 3. 

443. The guides of a detachment are the gunner and 
the front-rank man of the file on the opposite flank. 

To Lead Out. 

444. Executed as explained in the School of the Soldier 
Mounted, except that each front-rank man is followed by 



HORSE ARTILLERY. 177 

his rear-rank man, who places the head of his horse at 
the distance of one yard from the croup of the horse of 
his front-rank man, the horses covering each other. 

To Mount. 

445. The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Pre- 
pare TO MOUNT, 3. Mount. 

The second and third commands are executed as already- 
explained, the cannoneers mounting without moving 
their horses out of ranks; they make them give way very 
slightly to the right or left if necessary. 

446. If the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, 

2. Mount, the men execute at the command mount all 
that has been prescribed at the commands prepare to mount 
and mount. 

To Dismount. 

44y, The instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Pre- 
pare TO DISMOUNT, 3. DISMOUNT. 

The second and third commands are executed as already 
explained, the cannoneers dismounting without moving 
their horses out of ranks;, they make them give way 
slightly to the right or left if necessary. 

44§. If the instructor commands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Dis- 
mount, the men execute at the command dismount all that 
has been prescribed at the commands prepare to dismount 
and dismount. 

Alignments. 

449. The instructor first teaches the men to align 
themselves man by man upon two files established as a 
basis of alignment; to this end he advances the two files 
on the right (or left) three or more yards by the com- 
mands: 1. Two fifes from tfie rigftt {or feft), forward, 2. March, 

3. HALT. 

At the command fiaft, the men designated halt; and the 
instructor, having verified their alignment, commands: 
1, By fife, 2. Rig fit (or Left), 3. Dress, 4. Next, 5. Front. 
9236 12 



178 HORSE ARTILLERY. 

At the command right, the men of the next file gather 
their horses; at the command dress, they move forward; 
when near the line, the front-rank man slackens the gait, 
moves up slowly, casts his eyes to' the right so as to see 
the buttons on the breast of the second cannoneer from 
him, sits squarely on his horse, keeps him straight in 
ranks, and touches lightly with his boot the boot of the 
man on his right; the rear-rank man executes the move- 
ment as explained for the front-rank man, and preserves 
the proper distance between the ranks. The other files 
dress in the same manner, each moving off at the com- 
mand next, given when the preceding file is aligned. 

The instructor is in front of the detachment to see that 
the men move steadily and keep the shoulders square; 
that they do not turn the head too much, or open the 
knee to feel the boot; that they prevent their horses from 
crowding those already placed, and that they take the 
last step slowly and dress promptly. When the last file 
has arrived, the instructor verifies the alignment, by 
placing himself outside the right flank, ordering for- 
ward or back such files as may be in rear or in advance 
of the line. At the command front, given when the de- 
tachment is well aligned, all cast their eyes to the front. 

450. In successive movements, the men who are to 
move at the command of execution gather their horses 
at the preparatory command; the others gather their 
horses just before they begin the movement; in simul- 
taneous movements, all gather their horses at the pre- 
paratory command. This rule is general. 

451. By detachment. — Being in line, the instructor sees 
that the file on the flank toward which he wishes to 
dress is in such a position that no cannoneer will have to 
rein back, and then commands: 1. Right (or Left)^ 2. Dress, 
3. Front. 

At the command dress, the front-rank men align them- 
selves promptly and steadily; the rear-rank men move 
forward with the front-rank men, cast their eyes toward 



HORSE ARTILLERY. 179 

the basis of alignment, dress, and preserve the proper 
distance between the ranks. 

452. To align the detachment to the rear, the instruc- 
tor causes two files from either flank to rein back a few 
yards, aligns them parallel to the line and opposite their 
places, and commands: 1. Right[ov Left) backward,^. Dress, 
3. Front. 

At the command dress, the cannoneers rein back, keep- 
ing their horses straight, pass a little to the rear of the 
line, and dress up to the men who have been established. 

The alignment to the rear is not habitually used. 

To Open Ranks. 

453. The instructor commands: 1. Open ranks, 2. March, 
3. Front. 

At the command march, the front-rank men cast their 
eyes to the right; the rear-rank men rein back six yards, 
each man preserving the direction of his front-rank man 
and dressing to the right. At the command front, the 
men cast their eyes to the front. 

454. The ranks being open, the alignments may be 
executed as in closed ranks; for this purpose, two men 
from the right (or left) of each rank are moved forward 
three or four yards. 

To Close Ranks. 

455. The instructor commands: 1, Close ranks, 
2. March. 

The rear rank closes up, each man covering his proper 
front-rank man. 

The Rests. 

456. Executed as prescribed in the School of the Sol- 
dier Mounted. 

To resume the attention, the instructor commands: 
1. Detachment, 2. Attention. 



180 HORSE ARTILLERY. 

To File Off. 
457. Each front-rank man executes the movement as 
already explained; each rear-rank man moves forward 
with his front-rank man, changes direction to the right 
(or left) at the same time with him, and then marches 
abreast of him. 

To Dismiss the Detachment 

45S. Executed as prescribed for dismissing the squad, 
School of the Soldier Mounted. 

To March in Line. 

459. The detachment being at a halt and properly- 
aligned, the instructor commands: 1. Forward, 2. March, 
3. Guide right (or /eft). 

At the command march, the guide moves straight to the 
front, selecting points on which to direct himself, as ex- 
plained in the School of the Battery Dismounted, and 
maintaining an even gait to avoid irregularity in the 
ranks; the cannoneers move forward at the same gait as 
the guide, keep their horses straight in ranks, feel lightly 
the boot of the man on the side of the guide so as to pre- 
serve the alignment, keep their heads to the front, yield 
to pressure coming from the side of the guide, and resist 
pressure coming from the opposide side. If in advance 
of the line, they check their horses gradually; if in rear, 
they move up, increasing the gait a little; if too near, or 
too far, from the man on the side of the guide, they move 
from or toward him by degrees, gaining more ground 
to the front than to the side. 

To Haft the Detachment and to Align it. 

460. The instructor commands: 1. Detachment, 2. HaIjT, 
3. Right (or Left), 4. Dress, 5. Front. 

Instead of giving the commands for dressing, the in- 
structor may rectify the alignment by directing such files 
as are out of place to move up or back. 




HORSE ARTILLERY. 181 

To Oblique in Line. 

461. Being in march, the instructor commands: 
1, Right (ov Left) oblique, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, the can- 
noneers open out slightly, and 
each man makes a half-wheel to 
the right, so that the head of his 
horse may be opposite the shoul- 
ders of the horse on his right; 
each rear-rank man follows the 
second man on the right of his 
front-rank man, the two cannon- 
eers nearest the flank toward | 
which the oblique is made main- 
taining the same degree of ob- | 
liquity as the front rank; all the pi. 45, par. 46i. 

cannoneers then move off in the 

new direction, regulating themselves upon the guide, 
which is, without indication, on the side toward which 
the oblique is made. The front of the detachment re- 
mains parallel to its original position. 

To resume the direct march, the instructor commands: 
1. Forward, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, each cannoneer half -wheels to 
the left and moves forward, closing and dressing toward 
the guide, which is, without indication, on the side it 
was previous to the oblique. 

If the oblique be executed from a halt, the guide is an- 
nounced on taking the direct march. 

To Rein Back the Detachment. 

463. Being in line, at a halt,the instructor commands: 
1. Backward, 2. March, 3. Guide right (or left). 

At the command march, all rein back, dressing on the 
guide. After a few steps, the instructor commands: 
1. Detachment, 2. Halt, 3. Right (or Left)^ 4. DRESS, 
5. Front. 



182 HORSE ARTILLERY. 

To Wheel the Detachment. 

463. Being in line, at a halt, the instructor commands: 
1. Right (or Left) wheel, 2. March, 3. Guide right (or left); 
or, 3. Detadhment, 4. Halt, 5. Right (or Left)^ 6. Dress, 
7. Front. 

At the command march, the detachment wheels to the 
right on a movable pivot; the front-rank pivot man moves 
over a quarter-circle whose radius is two yards; upon 
completing the wheel, he moves off at right angles to the 
original direction; the other front-rank men cast their 
eyes toward the pivot, describe arcs of circles, without 
crowding or opening out, and increase the gait in pro- 
portion to their distance from the pivot, so as to remain 
as short a time as possible in rear of the line; on arriving 
in line, they take the gait of the front-rank pivot man and 
dress toward him. The rear-rank cannoneers cover their 
front-rank men and keep closed to the proper distance. 
The guide is announced, or the detachment halted, as 
soon as the front-rank man on the marching flank arrives 
in line. 

If marching, the wheel is executed on the same prin- 
ciples, the front-rank pivot man preserving the gait. 

464. To make a half- wheel, the instructor commands: 
1. Right (or Left) half- wheel, 2. MARCH, 3. Guide right (or 
left); or, 3. Detachment, 4. Halt, 5. Right [or Left), 6. DRESS, 
7. Front. 

465. As horses can not be stopped instantly, the com- 
mand halt is so given that they may be halted at the time 
or place prescribed. The same principle applies to the 
command march. 

These rules are general. 

To Execute the About by Detachment, 

466. Being in line, the instructor commands: 1. De- 
tachment right (or left) about, 2. MARCH. 3. Guide right (or 
left); or, 3. Detachment, 4. Halt, 5. Right [or Left), 6. DRESS, 
7. FRONT. 



HORSE ARTILLERY. 183 

» 
Executed as the wheel by detachment, except that the 
leading- pivot-man describes a half-circle whose radius is 
two yards, and then moves off in the new direction. The 
guide is announced, or the detachment halted, as soon as 
the front-rank man on the marching flank has completed 
the about. 

To March by the Flank from Line. 

467. Being at a halt, the instructor commands: 1. By 
file, by the right (or left) flank, 2. MARCH. 

Executed by each rank as in the School of the Soldier 
Mounted; the rear-rank cannoneers, after completing 
the wheel, approach to within one foot of their front- 
rank men. 

If marching, the men on the flank toward which the 
movement is to be made execute the wheel at the com- 
mand march ; the others halt and then wheel in succes- 
sion. 

46S. The detachment having been marched by the 
flank is now in column of files, with the distance of one 
yard from the head of each horse to the croup of the one 
before him. Each cannoneer should so conduct his horse 
that the man of his rank who immediately precedes him 
may hide all the other men in his front. 

To Form Line to the Right or Left from Column of Files. 

469. The instructor commands: 1. Left [or Right) into 
line, 2. March, 3. Detachment, 4. Halt, 5. Right (or Left), 
6. Dress, 1. Front. 

Executed as in the School of the Soldier Mounted, the 
rear-rank men wheeling with their front-rank men and 
following them; the command halt is given at any time 
after the leading file has advanced its own length in the 
new direction, and the command right dress immediately 
after. The other files dress as they arrive on the line; 
the instructor places himself near the right to superin- 
tend, and gives the last command when all are aligned. 



184 



HORSE ARTILLERY. 



The insti^uctor commands feft [or right) into fine, accord- 
ing as the column of files is right or left in front. 

470. The column of files is right in front when the front- 
rank men are on the left of the rear-rank men; the col- 
umn is /eft in front when the front-rank men are on the 
right of the rear-rank men. 

To Form Line to the Front from Column of Files. 

▲^▲A 4'yi. Being at a halt, or marching at a 
9BSS walk, the instructor commands: 1. Right (or 
AA A^'Z.e^O fr'ont into line, 2. March, 3. Detachment, 
00ffl 4. Halt, 5. Left (or Right), 6. Dress, 7. Front. 

• ^ ' ■ At the first command, the rear-rank men 
slacken their gait until each is abreast the file 
in rear of his proper front-rank file; at the 
command march, the front rank executes right 
front into line, the rear-rank men oblique to the 
right, each man moving forward so as to come 
up behind his file leader. The leading file 
halts at the fourth command, given at any time 
after the front-rank man of this file is properly- 
covered by his rear-rank man; the other files 

H j°?j 11 ^^^^ ^^^ dress to the left upon arriving in line. 

• i 1 '^^^ instructor superintends the alignment, and 
A A -'' M g'iv^s the command front upon its completion. 
ly.ifK ^ If marching at a trot, or at a walk and the 
A 1^ ,/ command be trot, the instructor commands guide 
S.%';' left, immediately after the command march; the 
A A~| leading man moves at a walk; the others -oblique 
(iJLiS..^. at a trot, each taking the walk and dressing to 

^ the left upon arriving in line. 

PI. 46, Par. 471. If marchlug at a gallop, or at a trot and the 
command be gallop, the same principles apply, the lead- 
ing man moving at a trot. 

The instructor commands right (or left) front into line, 
according as the column of files is left, or right, in front. 



HORSE ARTILLERY. 185 

To Oblique in Column of Files. 

472, The instructor commands: 1. Right [or Left) oblique, 
2. March. 

To resume, or to take, the direct march, the instructor 
commands: 1. Forward, 2. March. 

To Change Direction in Column of Files. 

473« The instructor commands: 1. Column right (or left); 
or, 1. Column half-right (or half-left), 2. March. 

Executed as in the School of the Soldier Mounted; the 
pivot man of each file preserves the gait; each man on 
the marching flank increases the gait to conform to that 
of the pivot. 

Posts of the Mounted Gun Detachment at the Piece Limbered. 

474« /n rear. — The detachment is in line facing to the 
front, its center opposite the muzzle, and the head of the 
front-rank center horse two yards from it. This is the 
habitual position of the detachment at the piece limbered. 

In front. — The detachment is in line facing to the front, 
the center opposite the pole, and the croups of the center 
horses in the rear rank two yards from the heads of the 
lead horses. 

To Change the Post of the Mounted Detachment at the Piece 
Limbered. 

475. From rear to front, — Being at a halt, the instructor 
commands: 1. Detachment front, 2. March. 

The gunner commands right oblique, at the first com- 
mand, and repeats the command march; as soon as the 
piece is unmasked, he commands: 1. Forward, 2. March; 
when the detachment has advanced far enough, he adds: 
1. Left oblique, 2. March, 3. Forward, 4. March, 5. De- 
tachment, 6. Halt, 7. Left, 8. Dress, 9. Front. 

476, From front to rear. — Being at a halt, the instructor 
commands: 1. Detachment rear, 2. MARCH. 



186 HORSE ARTILLERY. 

At the first command, the gunner, from his place in 
ranks, commands detachment left about, and repeats the 
command, AfarcA; when the detachment has passed the 
muzzle, he commands: 1. Detachment left about, 2. March, 
^.Detachment, 4. Halt, 5. Left, 6. Dress, 7. Front. 

477. Gunners command their detachments without 
leaving" their places on the right; when a detachment is 
aligned to the left at the command of its gunner, the men 
dress on the left man of the front rank. 

MANEUVERS OF TWO OR MORE GUN DETACHMENTS 
MOUNTED. 

478. The detachments, which are equalized and prop- 
erly told off, are formed in line from right to left, in the 
order of their pieces in park. If there are four files in 
each detachment, the interval between detachments is 
twelve yards; if there are five files, the interval is in- 
creased to fifteen yards. 

479. If , on special occasions, the chiefs of platoons and 
chief of caissons be present, they occupy the same rela- 
tive positions with respect to gun detachments as to sec- 
tions in the maneuvers of the battery dismounted. 

480. The chiefs of sections, when present, take post in 
line on the right of the gunner, and the interval between 
detachments is increased three yards; in column of de- 
tachments, the chiefs of sections are on the side of the 
guide, one yard from the front rank; in column of files 
they are as if they had marched by the flank from line. 

481. The instructor moves wherever his presence is 
required; if there is an assistant instructor, he takes the 
post of the chief of caissons and acts as file-closer. 

To Lead Out. 

482. The cannoneers lead out by detachment in the 
order of the numbers of their sections. At the command 
lead out, by the instructor or senior non-commissioned 
officer present, the cannoneers of the first section detach- 



HORSE ARTILLERY. 187 

merit lead out as already explained; the leading can- 
noneer of each of the other detachments moves off in 
time to follow the last cannoneer of the preceding- de- 
tachment, and places his horse twelve or fifteen yards to 
the left of the front-rank horses of this detachment, ac- 
cording as the detachments have four or five files. If 
more convenient, this interval may be diminished; in this 
case, upon moving off, the detachments are formed suc- 
cessively in column of files, or take the proper distance 
if in column of detachments. 

483. To mount; to dismount; the alignments; to open and 
close ranks; to rest; to file off; to dismiss the detachments; 
to march in line; to oblique in line, and to rein back. — Executed 
in each detachment by the same commands and means as 
for a single detachment, observing that in simultaneous 
alignments the guides on the side toward which the dress 
is ordered preserve the interval. 

To Face the Line to the Rear, and to March it to the Rear. 

484. The detachments being in line, the instructor 
commands: 1. Detachments right (or left) about, 2. March, 
3. Guide right (or left); or, 3. Detachments, 4. Halt, 5. Right 
(or left)^ 6. Dress, 7. Front. Executed by each detach- 
ment as already explained. ' 

To March by the Flank from Line. 

485. Executed simultaneously by all the detachments 
by the same commands and means as for a single detach- 
ment, the leading file of each detachment following the 
rear file of the one preceding at the distance of one yard. 

To Form Line to the Right or Left from Column of Files. 

486. Executed simultaneously by all the detachments 
by the same commands and means as for a single detach- 
ment, the guides preserving the intervals upon coming 
into line, and the command detachments being substituted 
for detachment 



188 HORSE ARTILLERY. 

To Oblique and to Change Direction in Column of Files. 

487. Executed by the same commands and means as 
for a single detachment. 

To Form Column of Detachments to the Right or Left. 

488. The detachments being" in line, the instructor 
commands: 1. Detachments right (or left) wheel, 2. March, 
3. Guide right (or left), or, 3. Detachments, 4. Halt, 5. Right 
(or Left), 6. Dress, 7. Front. 

At the command march, each detachment wheels to the 
right and moves forward, the guides covering each other 
and preserving their distance. The guide is announced 
or the detachments halted as soon as the front-rank men 
on the marching flanks arrive in line. 

To Oblique in Column of Detachments. 

489, Executed by the same commands and means as 
on foot, each detachment obliquing as explained for a 
single detachment mounted. 

To Change Direction in Column of Detachments. 

490. Executed by the same commands and means as 
on foot, each detachment wheeling as explained for a 
single detachment mounted. 

49 1 , Being in march, to make a slight change of direc- 
tion, the leading guide carries his bridle hand slightly to 
the right at the caution: Incline to the right (or left), and 
then takes two points a little to the right of those upon 
which he wa3 marching. 

To Halt the Column" of Detachments, and to Put it in March. 

492, The instructor commands: 1. Detachments, 
2. Halt ; and, 1. Forward, 2. March, 3. Guide (right or 
/eft). 

To March the Column of Detachments to the Rear. 
493« The instructor commands: 1. Detachments right 
(or left) about, 2. March, 3. Guide (right or left). 



I 



HORSE ARTILLERY. 189 

To halt the column on the completion of the about, the 
instructor commands: 1. Detachments^ 2. Halt, 3. Right 
(or Left), 4. Dress, 5. Front. 

To Form Column of Detachments from Column of Files. 

494. The instructor commands: 1. Detachments, 2, Right 
(or Left) front into line, 3. March, 4. Detachments, 5. Halt, 
6. Left (or Right), 7. DRESS, 8. Front; or, 4. Guide (left or 
right). Executed by each detachment as already ex- 
plained for a single detachment, the instructor command- 
ing right (or left) front into line, according as the column 
of files is left or right in front. 

To Form Column of Files from Column of Detachments, 

495. The instructor commands: 1. Detachments, 2, Right 
(or Left) by files, 3. March. 

If at a halt, at the command march, the right guide of 
each detachment moves to the front; the right rear-rank 
cannoneer places himself at once on the right of this 
guide with an interval of one foot; the second man from 
the right in the front rank, as soon as he has room, 
obliques in rear of the right guide; his rear-rank man 
places himself at once by his side and follows the right 
rear-rank cannoneer; the men of the other files wheel 
individually to the right and change direction to the left, 
so that the front-rank men may follow the guide and have 
their rear-rank men on their right. 

If marching, all the cannoneers except the right guide 
and his rear-rank man diminish the gait and the move- 
ment is executed as just explained. 

To Form Line to the Right or Left from Column of Detachments, 

496. The instructor commands: 1. Right (or Left) into 
line, wheel, 2. March, 3. Guide (right or left); or, 3. De- 
tachments, 4. Halt, 5. Right (or Left), 6. Dress, 7. Front. 
Executed as on foot, except that each detachment wheels 
as explained for a single detachment mounted; the de- 



190 HORSE ARTILLERY. 

tachments should be at their proper intervals on coming 
into line. 

To Form Line to the Front from Column of Detachments. 

dOY. The instructor commands: 1. Right [or Left) front 
into fine, 2. March, 3. Front. 

Executed from a halt as on foot, each detachment 
obliquing as explained for a single detachment mounted, 
and the guides observing their proper intervals on com- 
ing into line; the leading detachment advances twenty- 
three yards before being halted. 

If marching at a walk, the movement is executed as 
when marching in quick time on foot. 

If marching at a trot, or at a walk and the command be 
trot, the movement is executed as on foot when marching 
in double time, or in quick time and the command is double 
time; the gunners command trot and walk, instead of double 
time and quick time. 

If marching at a gallop or at a trot and the command be 
gallop, the same principles apply. 

To March the Mounted Gun Detachments to the Park. 
49 §• The detachments are marched to the park in 
column of files. or in column of detachments, by commands 
and means similar to those prescribed for dismounted 
detachments. 

To Post the Mounted Gun Detachments with their Pieces. 

499. The column having arrived at the park to post 
the detachments in rear, the instructor commands: De- 
tachments opposite your pieces. 

Column of files. — As each detachment arrives opposite 
its piece, the gunner commands, according as the right 
or left is in front: 1. Left (or Right) into line, 2. March, 
3. Detachment, 4. HALT, 5. Right (or Left)^ 6. Dress, 
7. Front. 

Column of detachments. — As each detachment arrives 



HORSE ARTILLERY. 191 

opposite its piece, the gunner commands, according as 
the right or left is in front: 1. Left (or Right) wheel, 
2. March, 3. Detachment, 4. Halt, 5. Left (or Right)^ 
6. Dress, 7. Front. 

To Leave the Park. 

500« If the detachments are in rear, they are marched 
from the park in column of files; or their posts may be 
changed so as to bring them in front, when they are 
marched from the park in column of files or in column of 
detachments; if necessary, the rear detachments take the 
trot, at the command of the gunners, in order to close to 
the proper distance. If the pieces be parked at dimin- 
ished intervals, the detachments are formed successively 
in columns of files, or take the proper distance in column 
of detachments upon moving off. 

501* The change of posts of detachments at the piece 
limbered is executed by each detachment as explained 
for a single detachment, the word detachments being sub- 
stituted for the word detachment in the commands. 



192 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 



SCHOOL OF THE DEIVEE. 

502. Any number of recruits, not exceeding' six, who 
have been well instructed in the School of the Soldier 
Mounted, are united for the first lessons; they are in un- 
dress, without gloves, and equipped with belts and spurs. 
If instruction is to be in harnessing only, spurs will not 
be worn. A pair of horses, taken in a double stall, is as- 
signed to each recruit, who is, if possible, at first super- 
intended by a thoroughly instructed man. 

A pair of horses being properly harnessed, the in- 
structor points out and names the different parts of the 
harness and explains their uses. 

Each driver has charge of two horses; they are called 
a pair; the one which he mounts is called the near horse, 
the other the off horse. 

No special place is assigned for the instructor in the 
several drills in this School, and he goes wherever his 
presence is necessary. 

Harness-Pegs. 

503. Harness-pegs for each pair are arranged in the 
walls of the harness-room or in the heel-posts of the 
stalls. There should be three pegs for each double set 
of harness, the upper one for the pole-yoke, with the 
martingales attached, the bridles, and collars; the next 
for the off harness, and the lower one for the near har- 
ness. 

Arrangement of Harness on Pegs. 

50 J. On the upper peg. — First, the pole-yoke, with the 
martingales attached, next to the post or wall; then the 
bridle and collar of the near horse; then the bridle and 
collar of the off horse, in the order named. 

On the middle peg.— The off harness; the traces, which 
are detached, are hung over the peg close to the heel- 



II 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 193 

post; the saddle, with its attachments over the seat, is 
placed on the peg. 

On the lower peg. — The leg-guard is slipped over this 
peg, and the near harness is placed on it, as described 
above for the off harness. 

Each hair-pad is placed on top of its saddle. 

505. The saddle cloths, being designed only for occa- 
sions of ceremony, ara kept wherever directed by the 
battery commander, and issued when it is intended to 
use them. 

To Harness in Garrison, Wheel. 

506. The sacks are taken off and the harness brought 
from the harness-room and hung on the pegs in the heel- 
posts, in the manner already described. When the har- 
ness is on the heel-posts the instructor commands: Stand 
TO HEEL, which is executed as prescribed in the School 
of the Soldier Mounted. 

507. To harness by detail : 

Collar. — Each wheel driver puts on and locks the 
collar of his off horse. 

Pad. — He pats on the hair-pad, and also the saddle- 
cloth if it is to be used. If the saddle-blanket is used in- 
stead of the hair-pad, it will be folded and put on as 
described. 

Saddle. — He puts on the saddle, with its attachments, 
taking care not to displace the pad or blanket, adjusts 
and secures the girth, buckles the collar-strap to the 
saddle, and then adjusts the breeching and buckles the 
crupper. 

Traces. — He takes the traces from the peg, passes 
them through the loin-loops, attaches the rear ends to 
the single tree, which is hanging on the cantle hook, and 
then the front ends to the collar, beginning with the off 
trace; the near trace will be laid on the saddle while at- 
taching the other. 

Note. — The traces are not attached, but are left on the 
9236 13 



194 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

harness-peg's, when the horses are harnessed only for 
drill by team unhitched, or by pair. 

Bridle. — He puts on the bridle and secures the coup- 
ling-rein to the manger. He then passes the reins 
through the roller. 

Collar. — Each wheel driver begins to harness his 
near horse, as prescribed for harnessing the off horse at 
the command collar. 

Pad, etc. — Same for the near horse as for the off 
horse, omitting the directions for the coupling-rein and 
roller. 

Yoke. — The wheel driver puts on his leg-guard and 
then going to the front of his horses backs them out of 
the stall, places them side by side, facing the exit, and 
beginning with the off horse attaches the neck-yoke by 
means of the breast-straps, then passes the martingales 
between the fore legs and through the standing loop on 
the cincha, and attaches the hooks at the end of the side 
straps to the martingale D-ring, and then stands to horse. 

To back out his pair, the wheel driver unfastens the 
coupling rein, then stands with his back to the manger, 
takes the reins of the near horse in his right hand and 
those of the off horse in his left hand near the bit, and 
backs the pair into the gangway. 

In single stalls, separated by partitions, each horse 
must be backed out by himself. 

To harness without detail: Harness. 
Position of Stand to Horse. 

508* Same as in the School of the Soldier Mounted, 
except that the driver stands on the lef b of his near horse 
and holds in his right hand the reins of the near horse, 
and the coupling-rein. If the horse be not coupled, the 
coupling-rein is passed under the neck of the near horse. 
Harness, Lead and Swing. 

509, The lead and swing drivers harness in the same 
manner as wheel drivers j with such omissions as are re- 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. * 195 

quired by the difference in the harness. The traces are 
passed through the loin-strap loops, the front ends at- 
tached to the collars, and they are then trussed by bring"- 
ing the rear ends forward and passing the toggle through 
the ring. The lead and swing pair are not turned around 
nor backed into the gangway after harnessing, unless it 
is intended to lead out. 

To Unharness. 

510, To unharness by detail: Unharness. 

Unyoke. — Beginning with his near horse, each wheel 
driver detaches the hooks at the end of the side-straps 
from the martingale-ring and draws the martingale from 
the standing loop on the cincha; he then unhooks the in- 
side end of each breast-strap, detaches the neck-yoke, 
and hangs it up on its peg. 

Unbridle. — He uncouples his horses, leads them into 
the stall, secures the coupling-rein of the off horse to the 
manger, unbridles his near horse, puts on the halter and 
ties the halter-strap to the manger, hangs up the bridle, 
and takes off his leg-guard and places it on the peg. 

Collar off. — He unbuckles the collar-strap, detaches 
the front ends of traces from the collar, removes the 
collar and hangs it on its peg. 

Traces off. — He unhooks the traces from the single- 
tree, takes them off and hangs them on their peg. 

Unsaddle. — He unbuckles and frees the crupper, dis- 
engages the girth, places the breeching and then the 
girth on the saddle, takes off the saddle and places it on 
its peg with the saddle-pad on top. 

Unbridle. — Each wheel driver unfastens the coupling- 
rein, unbridles his off horse, puts on the halter, ties its 
strap to the manger, and hangs up the bridle. 

Collar off, etc. — The off harness is taken off in the 
same order as the near harness. 



196 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

Unharness, Lead, and Swing. 

To unharness without detail: Unharness. 
Unyoke. Lead and swing drivers stand fast. 
Unbridle, etc. Same as for wheel drivers, with such 
omissions as are required by the difference in the harness. I 

To Unharness in the Field, | 

511. Without harness-racks. — The pole -prop is placed 
under the end of the pole; the singletrees are left at- 
tached to the doubletrees; the wheel-traces are unhitched , 
from the collars only, and laid over the chest from front I 
to rear, or on the footboard; the collars of the wheel 
team on top of the limber-chest (paulins having been 
removed) next to the rail on the near side, the swing ji 
collars in the middle, and the lead collars next to the other* | 
rail; the collar of the off horse is placed on top of that of" 
the near horse of the same team; the remainder of the 
harness is placed on the pole, that of the near wheel-horse 
next to the doubletree and as close to it as possible, next 
that of the off wheel-horse, and then the swing, and 
after that the lead harness, both in the order laid down 
for the wheel harness; the traces of the lead and swing 
harness (folded once) are laid over the pole; then on top 
of them the saddles (with the attachments over them), so 
as not to rest on the ground. The neck-yoke is placed 
on the footboard. 

To Hook the Singletree. 

512, Hold the singletree with the eye down and against 
the side of the cantle-hook; then push it side wise far 
enough so that the eye will pass over the cantle-hook; 
then let the singletree fall to the rear. This can be 
done from either side. 

The men having become somewhat familiar with the 
method of harnessing and unharnessing, will now be in- 
structed in fitting harness. 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 197 

Fitting Harness. 

513. The brid/e and sadd/e are fitted as prescribed in 
the School of the Soldier Mounted. 

The collar, when adjusted, should admit the flat of the 
hand between the lower part and the throat, and the 
fingers between the sides and the neck. A short collar 
chokes a horse by pressing on the windpipe; a narrow 
one pinches and rubs the neck. A broad collar works 
about and galls the shoulders. 

The back-sfrap,when adjusted, should admit the breadth 
of the hand between it and the horse's back. 

The collar-strap should not be tight; otherwise it would 
pull the saddle forward on the withers. The surcingle, 
when used, should be buckled on the near side of the near 
horse and on the off side of the off horse, less tight than, 
and over, the girth. 

The breech-strap should be adjusted so that when the 
horse is pulling there will be a space of about four inches 
between the breech-strap and the horse's quarters. 

The hip-strap should be of such length that the breech- 
strap will be a little below the point of the buttocks, or 
about twelve or fifteen inches below the top of the dock. 

The loin-straps should be adjusted so that the wheel- 
traces, when in draft, will be straight and without down- 
ward pull on the loops that support them. 

The loin-straps of swing and lead horses should raise 
the traces about six inches above the stifle-joint when in 
draft. In this position the line of the traces from front 
to rear will be straight, and the loops of the loin-straps 
will support the traces without drawing them up. 

The traces, — The length of the traces must depend in a 
great measure on the size of the horse and his stride. 
For the wheel team, the rule is to allow about fourteen 
inches from singletree to hind quarters, and for swing 
and lead teams, one yard from nose to croup, when in 
draft. The traces should be adjusted so that the line of 
traction will be unbroken from the singletree of the col- 



198 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

lars of the leaders, and this rule will regulate, in some 
measure, the length of the loin-straps, the matching of 
the horses, and arrangement of the pairs as wheel, swing, 
and lead pair; this should be such as to make the waste 
of force as small as possible. 

All front trace-chains are permanently fastened to the 
traces, and have a toggle at the end. 

All rear trace -chains have a ring at one end and a 
double hook at the other; the double hook is passed 
through the D-ring at the end of the trace, and hooked 
back into any desired link. By this means the length of 
the trace is adjusted, and the rear trace-chain need not 
be removed except for cleaning. 

INSTRUCTION OF TWO OR MORE PAIRS. 

To Lead Out. 

514. To leave the stable or picket-line, the instructor 
commands: Lead out. Executed as in the School of the 
Soldier Mounted. 

When it is intended to lead out, as soon as each swing 
and lead driver has harnessed, he turns his pair about, 
at the line or in a double stall, so that they can move off 
promptly, and then stands to horse. 

515. If the stalls are double, with swing-planks be- 
tween them, the horses of each pair are backed into the 
gangway together, and turned toward the exit; in single 
stalls, separated by partitions, each horse must be backed 
out by himself. 

During the instruction by pairs, the pairs upon leading 
out are formed in line with two yards interval between 
them. 

To Couple. 

516. Being in line, at a halt, the instructor com- 
mands: Couple. 

Each driver goes in front of his horses, faces toward 
them, attaches the hook at the end of the coupling-rein 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 



199 



to tho ring- on the right side of the pommel of the driver's 
saddle, and resumes the position of stand to horse. 

The pairs may be coupled before leading out, at the dis- 
cretion of the instructor. 

Siy, The coupling-rein is attached to the off ring of 
the off horse's bit, and passes through the near ring. 

To Mount. 

518. The pairs being coupled and in line, at a halt, 
the instructor commands: 1. Drivers, 2. PREPARE TO 
MOUNT, 3. Mount. Executed as prescribed in the School 
of the Soldier Mounted, except that none of the horses 
are moved out of ranks. As soon as seated, the driver 
seizes and adjusts the bridle-reins of his near horse, and 
then the coupling-rein, in the left hand; the couplmg- 
rein comes into the hand between the thumb and fore- 
finger, and is adjusted so as to hang loosely without any 
bearing on the bit. He then passes his right hand 
through the loop of the whip, removes it from its hook, 
rests his right hand on the right thigh, back up, the 
whip leaving the hand between the thumb and fore- 
finger, pointing to the left and resting on the left fore- 

519. If the instructor commands: 1 . Drivers, 2. MOUNT, 
the men execute at the command n)ount all that has been 
prescribed at the commands prepare to mount and nnount. 

To Dismount. 

520. Being in line, at a halt, the instructor commands: 

1. Drivers, 2. PREPARE TO DISMOUNT, 3. DISMOUNT. 

At the second command, each driver hangs his whip 
on its hook on the near saddle and drops the coupling- 
rein. The rest of the movement is executed as prescribed 
in the School of the Soldier Mounted, except that none 
of the horses are moved out of ranks. 

521. If the instructor commands: 1. Drivers, 2. DIS- 
MOUNT, the men execute at the command dismount all 



200 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 



that has been prescribed at the commands prepare to dis- 
mount and dismount. 

The Rests. 

522. Executed as prescribed in the School of the Sol- 
dier Mounted, except that the drivers, when dismounted 
raise the collars from the shoulders, beginning with the 
near horses, and adjust the pads and harness, if displaced; 

^?^^ ^^ ^^"^ ^^® ^^^^^ ^^ ^^® ^^^^ ^^^se. they remain on 
the left of their pairs and keep their horses in place 
To resume the attention: 1. Drivers, 2. Attention. 
To File Off. 

523. To return the horses to the stable, or picket- 
line, the instructor commands: Uncouple. 

At this command,each driver steps in front of his horses, 
uncouples, and then stands to horse. The instructor then 
commands: By the right (or left) file off, 2. March. 

xT-?® J?^?^^?"^^^^ ^^ executed as prescribed in the School 
of the Soldier Mounted. 

To Dismiss the Drivers. 

524. The drivers clean, remove, and put the hari ess 
m place, care for and secure their horses, under the di- 
rection of the instructor or senior non-commissioned 
oflicer Each driver, as soon as he has finished, stands to 
heel. The instructor or non-commissioned officer having 
satisfied himself by inspection that the horses are se- 
cured, that the horses and harnesses are properly cared 
for, and that the precautions required on their return from 
exercise have been observed, directs the harness to be 
covered with its sacks, orders the men to fall in, marches 
tnem to the battery parade ground, and dismisses them. 

The Use of the Coupling-rein, Whip, and Bridle-reins of the Off 
Horse. 

o ?^^' J^® ^®^^ \^ov^Q is managed as prescribed in the 
bchool of the Soldier Mounted; the off horse is managed 
by the couplmg-rein, the whip, and his bridle-reins. 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 201 

Whenever the driver has occasion to use the coupling- 
rein, he takes hold of it, in front of the left hand, in the 
manner prescribed for the right rein of the watering- 
bridle; to use the bridle reins of the off horse, he takes 
hold of the lash, or that part of the reins in rear of the 
roller, in the same manner. 

The whip will not be used unnecessarily, and must 
never be applied about the horse's head or neck. 

If the off horse keeps in advance of the near horse, ap- 
ply the bridle-reins of the off horse gradually, and rein 
him back in place. If the off horse lags behind, make 
him feel the whip on his off haunch. If he throws his 
shoulders in or his haunches out, touch him lightly with 
the whip on his off haunch. If he throws his shoulders 
out and pulls away from the near horse, adjust the coup- 
ling-rein in the left hand so that it bears on the bit, and 
touch him lightly with the whip on his off shoulder until 
he closes in again. 

To gather the off horse. — Seize the coupling-rein, elevate 
the right hand a little and carry it gently toward his 
neck. 

To move forward the off horse. — Gather the horse; lower 
the right hand by degrees and carry it forward without 
jerk; as soon as he takes the gait, drop the rein and re- 
place the right hand on the thigh. Should the horse 
fail to obey, threaten with the whip, or touch him lightly 
on the haunch, as may be required. 

To halt the off horse. — Gather the horse; elevate the 
right hand by degrees and carry it gradually back in the 
direction of the croup; when the horse obeys, replace 
the hand gradually. 

To rein back the off horse. — Gather the horse; elevate the 
right hand by degrees and carry it gradually back in the 
direction of the croup until the horse steps backward; as 
soon as he obeys, replace the hand gradually; when he 
stops backing, carry the hand back as before. 

To wheel the off horse to the right. — Gather the horse and 



202 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

carry the right hand, without jerk, toward his right, 
shoulder. 

To wheel the off horse to the left. — Gather the horse and 
carry the right hand, without Jerk, to the left, and in the 
direction of the left ear of the near horse. 

The bridle-reins of the off horse are auxiliary to the 
coupling-rein, and the driver will use them for halting 
the off horse and moderating his gait whenever he does 
not need the coupling-rein to control the movements of 
his pair; they are preferably used for backing the off 
horse. In applying them, the right hand is drawn to- 
ward the thigh, ashy means of the roller an equal tension 
is transmitted to each rein. 

To March. 

5 2 In Being in line, the instructor commands: 1. For- 
ward, 2. March, 3. Guide right (or left). 

At the command forward, each driver gathers his 
horses; at the command march, he moves them off to- 
gether; the driver on the side toward which the guide is 
announced maintains an even gait and moves straight to 
the front; the other drivers dress toward the side of the 
guide and preserve their intervals. 

527. In simultaneous movements, all gather their 
horses at the preparatory command; in successive move- 
ments the men who are to move at the command of exe- 
cution gather their horses at the preparatory command, 
the others just before they begin the movement. This 
rule is general. 

To Halt 

52§. Marching in line, the instructor commands: 
1. Drivers, 2. Halt. 

At the command halt, each driver stops both horses 
together, but not suddenly, and keeps his pair straight. 

To March by the Flank, from Line with Intervals. 
529. The instructor commands: 1. Drivers, 2. By the 
right (or left) flank, 3. MARCH. 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 



203 



its to /'' / /^ /' ; 



PI. 47, Par. I 



At the command march, each driver wheels his pair to 
the right by moving- the pivot horse over a quarter-circle 
whose radius is three and one- 
quarter yards; the other horse 
quickens his movements to 
keep in line with the 
horse. 

On the completion of the 
wheel, each driver moves oft' 
his pair at right angles to the original direction. 

The pairs, having been marched by the flank, are now 
in column of pairs, with a distance of one yard from head to 
croup. Each driver conducts his horse so that the man 
who immediately precedes him will hide all the other 
men in front. 

To Halt the Column of Pairs and to Resume the March. 

530. 1. Drivers, 2. Halt ; and 1. Forward, 2. March. 

As each pair occupies a space of three yards in length 
by two yards in breadth, to form again in line with inter- 
vals, the instructor commands: 1. Drivers, 2. By the right 
(or left) flank, 3. March, 4. Guide right (or left). 



To March to the Rear. 



531. 



'iS Wf 



Being in line with intervals, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Drivers right (or left) 
about, 2. March, 3. Guide 
right (or left). 

Executed as the march by 
the flank, except that each 
driver, instead of wheeling, 
makes his pivot horse de- 
scribe a half-circle whose 
radius is three and one-quar- 
ter yards, and then moves 
off his pair in the new direc- 

PI. 48, Par. 531. tlOH. 



^^"^ SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

2 Halt ^ ^^^"^ ^^^ completion of the about: 1. Dn'yers, 

^^^* I^}^ column of pairs, the movement is similarly 
executed, the command for the guide being omitted. 

To Oblique. 

^^^' .^^n""-^ ^^ ^^.^^ ^^^^ intervals, the instructor com- 
mands; 1. Drivers right (or left) oblique, 2. March. 

H Executed like the march by the flank 

§^ except that each driver causes his pair 

^ to half-wheel to the right, his pivot 

.''H horse describing the eighth of a circle 

-C/ n ^ .^ radius is three and one-quarter 

•^^"^ ''ii J^i^^^^' ^^ ^^^^ ^^^cs off his pair in 

/ r. / ^ ^^^ new direction. The guide is al- 

'-'' <^^ A fays, without indication, on the side 

M y /m ^"""^^^^ ^hich the oblique is made; on 

00,^' .y-r'' /' resuming the direct march the guide 

/ v^^r .-' IS, without indication, on the side it 

m / r. / ^as previous to the oblique. 

^/ Qt/ To resume the direct march: 1 For- 

/vS ,.^ ward, 2. March. 

00 / , ^t the command march, the drivers 

aX' SwS^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^' ^"^^ ^^^"^ "^^^^ 

PI. 49, Par. 534. y^}!.^}^ oblique bc cxccutcd from a 

the direct march ' '^^ ^^'^^ '' announced on taking 

^^^•i^!" column of pairs, the oblique is similaHv 
executed, the leading driver being the guide '™'^^^^^ 

com'^rrf^^nH^^V %^'' take the direct march, the instructor 
commands: 1. Forward, 2. March. 

To Change Direction in Column of Pairs. 
535. Being in march: 1. Column right (or leftV or 
1' Column half-right {or half-left), 2. March. '^^^^' ^^» 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 205 

At the command march, the leading driver wheels or 
half -wheels to the right, and then moves off in the new 
direction; the other drivers execute in succession the 
same movement upon arriving on the same ground. 

To Rein Back. 

536. Being in line, at a halt: 1. Backward, 2. March, 
3. Guide right (or left)^ 4. Drivers, 5. HALT. 

The movement is executed as already explained for 
each horse, care being taken to move both horses equally 
and to keep them straight. 

The command halt should be given when a few steps 
backward have been taken. 

The instructor may place himself on either flank and 
give a general alignment by ordering any driver to move 
one or both of his horses forward or back. 

Changes of Gait. 

537. To trot. — Being at a walk, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Trot, 2. March. 

At the command march, each driver moves oif both 
horses together at a trot. 

Should the off horse lag, the driver* threatens him or 
touches him lightly with the whip. 

538. To pass from a trot to a walk. — The instructor com- 
mands: 1. Walk, 2. March. 

At the command march, each driver makes both horses 
resume the walk together, applying the reins gradually, 
but not so much as to bring his horses to a halt. 

539. To gallop. — Being at a trot, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Gallop, 2. March. 

At the command march, each driver makes both horses 
take the gallop, using the whip on the off horse if neces- 
sary. 

540. To pass from the gallop to the trot. — The instructor 
commands: 1. Trot, 2. March. 

At the command march, each driver makes both horses 



206 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

resume the trot together, taking care not to check them 
too suddenly. 

541. To pass from the trot to the slow trot, and from the 
gallop to the canter, and the reverse. — Executed by the com- 
mands prescribed in the School of the Soldier Mounted. 

The Riding-School. 

542. A riding-school, of the form and dimensions 
already prescribed, maybe used to advantage in perfect- 
ing recruits in the previous movements. They enter it 
and execute the changes of hand by the same commands 
and similar means as in the School of the Soldier 
Mounted . 

INSTRUCTION OF A SINGLE TEAM UNHITCHED. 

543. A team includes all the pairs belonging to a single 
carriage, and consists of two or more pairs; the pair in 
front is called the lead pair, the one attached to the car- 
riage is called the wheel pair; when there is one between 
these two, it is called the swing pair; when there are two 
pairs between, they are called the lead-swing and wheel- 
swing pair. 

To Lead Out. 

544. To leave the stable or picket-line and form the 
team in line of pairs, the instructor commands: Lead 

OUT BY PAIRS. 

The lead driver begins the movement, and is followed 
by the swing and wheel drivers. 

The team is formed in line, with intervals of two feet 
between the pairs, the lead horses on the right, the wheel 
horses on the left. 

A non-commissioned officer or well-instructed private 
may be mounted and detailed as guide; in line of pairs, he 
is two feet from the right; in column, he is boot to boot 
with the lead driver and on his left. He mounts and 
dismounts at the commands for the drivers. 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 207 

To Align the Drivers. 

545. Being" in line, at a halt, the instructor sees that 
the man on the flank toward which he wishes to dress is 
in such position that no driver will have to rein back, 
and commands: 1. Right (or Left), 2. Dress, 3. Front. 

At the command dress, the men align themselves 
promptly and steadily, moving their horses so as to place 
themselves accurately on the line of the men on their 
right, keeping their pairs straight and preserving their 
intervals. 

To Form the Team in Column of Pairs from Line. 

546. To the right. — Being at a halt, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. By driver, 2. By the right flank, 3. MARCH. 

At the command march, the lead driver wheels his pair 
to the right and moves forward in the new direction. 
The swing driver wheels his horses to the right in time 
to follow the lead horses at the distance of one yard from 
head to croup: the wheel driver executes this movement 
in time to follow the swing horses at the same distance. 

547. To the front. — Being at a halt, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Right by driver, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, the lead driver moves his pair 
forward: the swing driver obliques his horses to the right 
as soon as their heads are in line with the croups of the 
lead horses, and moves forward in time to enter the col- 
umn and keep at the distance of one yard from head to 
croup. The wheel driver executes the movement as pre- 
scribed for the swing driver. 

To Wheel by Team. 

54§. Being in column of pairs, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Right (or Left) wheel, 2. March. 

At the command march, the lead driver wheels to the 
right, then moves off in the new direction: the other 
drivers move forward, wheel successively on the same 
ground as the lead driver, and follow him. 



208 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

To halt the team upon the completion of the wheel, the 
instructor commands: 1. Team, 2. Halt, the command 
halt being given when the wheel driver is in the new 
direction. 

About by Team. 

549, The instructor commands: 1. Right [ov Left) about, 
2. March. Executed like the wheel by team, except that 
the drivers execute the right about in succession. 

To halt the team upon the completion of the about, the 
instructor commands: 1. Team, 2. Halt, the command 
halt being given when the wheel driver is in the new di- 
rection. 

To Oblique the Team, 

550, The instructor commands: 1. Right [ov Left) oblique, 
2. March. Executed as the wheel by team, except that 
the drivers half-wheel to the right in succession. 

To resume, or to take, the direct march, the instructor 
commands: 1. Forward, 2. March. 

The drivers half-wheel to the left in succession, and 
then move forward. 

To Form the Team in Line from Column of Pairs. 

551, To the left. — The instructor commands: 1. Left 
into line of pairs, 2. MARCH, 3. Team, 4. HALT, 5. Right, 
6. Dress, 7. Front. 

At the command march, the lead driver wheels his pair 
to the left; each of the other drivers moves his pair for- 
ward, and wheels to the left as he approaches the wheel- 
ing point of the preceding pair, so as to preserve his in- 
terval of two feet. The lead driver halts at the fourth 
command, given at any time after his horses are in the 
new direction; the other drivers halt and dress as they 
arrive in line, the instructor giving the command dress 
in time for the swing driver to align himself as soon as 
he halts. The command front is given as soon as all the 
drivers have dressed. 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 209 

55 2 » On the right. — Being in march, the instructor 
commands: 1. On right into line of pairs, 2. March, 3. Team, 
4. Halt, 5. Right, 6. Dress, 7. Front. 

At the command march, the lead driver wheels his pair 
to the right; each of the other drivers marches his pair 
beyond the wheeling point of the preceding pair, and 
then wheels to the right, so as to preserve his interval 
of two feet. The lead driver halts at the fourth com- 
mand, given at any time after his horses are in the new 
direction; the other drivers halt and dress as they ar- 
rive in line, the instructor giving the command dress in 
time for the swing driver to align himself as soon as he 
halts. The command front is given as soon as all the 
drivers have dressed. 

55 3 » To the front. — The instructor commands: 1. Left 
front into line of pairs, 2. MARCH, 3. Team, 4. Halt, 5. Right, 
6. Dress, 7. Front. 

At the command march, the lead driver moves his pair 
straight to the front; the other drivers oblique their pairs 
to the left until opposite their places in line, when each 
marches straight to the front. The lead driver halts at 
the fourth command, given at any time after he has ad- 
vanced at least six yards; the other drivers halt and dress 
as they arrive in line, the instructor giving the command 
dress in time for the swing driver to align himself as soon 
as he halts. The command front is given as soon as all 
the drivers have dressed. 

INSTRUCTION OF TWO OR MORE TEAMS UNHITCHED. 

554. Upon leading out, the teams are formed either 
in line of pairs or teams in the order of their sections in 
park, those of the .y. . aj^a aaa^<5v^a.^a 

riages, in each sec- C^v C.^^ I^€ Cs^ 

tion, on the right pi. so, Par. 554. 

of those of the rear rank. 
9236 14 



210 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

In line of pairs, the chiefs of sections are on the rig-ht 
of their piece teams, and the caisson corporals on the right 
of their caisson teams; the interval between teams of the 
same section and between non-commissioned officers and 
teams is two feet. 

In line of team.s, each team is in column of pairs, the 
chiefs of sections and caisson corporals are boot to boot 
with the lead drivers of their teams and on their left; the 
interval between teams is nine yards. 

Should the nature of the ground require it, the teams 
of each rank of carriages may be formed in separate lines 

AA^ of pairs, in the order 



of their carriages in 

[park, with four 

' yards distance from 

[ the croups of the 

' line in front to the 

^^- '^' ^^••- •^'^- heads of the horses 

of the line in rear; or the interval between teams in 

line of teams may be reduced to less than nine yards. 

555. When not otherwise prescribed, chiefs of sec- 
tions and caisson corporals mount, dismount, and dress at 
the commands for the drivers. This rule is general. 

The chiefs of sections and caisson corporals are desig- 
nated chiefs of teams; they are the guides of the teams 
with which they are posted; they do not repeat the in- 
structor's commands, nor do they give any commands for 
their teams except when specially prescribed. 

To Lead Out. 

556. To form line of pairs. — The instructor commands: 
Lead out by pair. Executed as already prescribed. 

To form line of teams. — The instructor commands: LEAD 
OUT BY TEAM. 

55 y. The lead pair of the piece team goes first,followed 
by the swing and then the wheel pair, and form in column 
in the order in which they were led out. The caisson 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 211 

team is led out after the piece team and formed in the 
same manner, and with an interval of nine yards between 
it and the piece team. The others form in the same way 
and with the same interval. 

558. If there be teams of more than one section, the 
drivers lead out by section, in the order of the numbers 
of their sections. At the command, /ea(/ out by pair [ov 
team), of the instructor, or senior non-commissioned offi- 
cer present, the chief of the first section commands: 

1. First sect/on drivers, 2. Lead OUT BY PAIR (or team). 
The chiefs of the other sections command: 1. Second 
(Third, etc.) section drivers, 2. Lead out by pair (or 
team), in time for their teams to follow those of the 
preceding" section. 

The line being formed and the pairs coupled, the in- 
structor mounts the drivers. 

To Form Column of Teams. 

559* To the right, from line of pairs. — Being" in line of 
pairs, the instructor commands: 1. By driver, 2. By the 
right flank, 3. MARCH. Executed in succession by each 
team as already explained for a sing-le team, each lead 
driver following the wheel driver of the team preceding 
him, at the distance of tivo yards from head to croup, the 
distance between pairs of the same team being one yard. 
Non-commissioned officers on the right of teams place 
themselves boot to boot with the lead drivers, and on 
their left, moving forward out of the line in time not to 
interfere with the movements of the lead horses. 

560* To the right or left, from line of teams. — Being in 
line of teams, to form column of teams to the right or left, 
the instructor commands: 1. By the right (or left) flank, 

2. March. 

Each team wheels to the right. The distance from the 
wheel pair of one team to the lead pair of the team that 
follows is two yards. 



212 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

561. To the front, from line of pairs. — Being- in line- 
pairs, the instructor commands: 1. Right by team, 
2. March. 

At the first command, the chief of the right 
team commands: Right by driver. At the com- 
mand march, which he repeats, his team forms 
column of pairs to the front, as already ex- 
plained. Each of the other chiefs of teams 
gives the commands right by driver in time to 
command march, so that his lead 
pair may follow at two yards dis- 
tance the wheel pair of the team 
that precedes him, all his drivers 
obliquing in succession in the 
same manner as the swing and 
wheel drivers of the team on the o^ 
right. The chiefs 
of teams take their 
places as explained 
(Par. 559). 

562. If the com- 
mands be: 1. Left by 
team, 2. March, 
the chief of the left | 
team commands: ^"^' ^ - w w w^^^ . >^>'^^^- -^^ 

Right by driver. At ' ' p, 5^, Par. 56i. 

the command 

march, which he repeats, his team forms column of pairs 
to the front. The chief of the second team from the left 
commands: Right by driver in time to command march, so 
that his lead pair may enter the column at the proper 
distance; his lead driver obliques to the left, and is fol- 
lowed in succession by the swing and wheel drivers, who 
conform to what has just been prescribed for the lead 
driver. The other teams move off in succession in like 
manner at the commands of their chiefs. The chiefs of 
teams take their places in column as before. 




SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 213 

563. To the front, from line of teams. — The in- 

AA^ structor commands: 1. Right (or feft) by team, 
^•<^m§ 2. March. 

A| At the first command, the chief of the right 

^ team commands: For n^ar^/, and the chiefs of the 

H other teams command: Right oblique. At the 

command march, repeated by all the chiefs, the 

C^Mi ^'ig"^^ team moves straight to its front; the 

• -iii other teams oblique to the right, enter the col- 

M umnin succession at the commands: 1. Forward, 

^ 2. March, of their chiefs, and follow the team 

f§ preceding at two yards distance. 

564. When there are two or 

CcJH more lines of pairs, each team of 

the line in rear moves off in time 

i§v^ to follow, at the proper distance, 

^^'\ the corresponding team of the 

front line. 

565. When the 

interval between 

teams in line of 

teams is less than 

v/\ nine yards, each 

.^^ .41 \ \ X \\\ \\\ team moves off in 

6ll6dS3^^a03a)Mto8^i!iOii)S \^^ ^ foiiow, at 

C,C, C.S. C.C. C5> the proper d i s - 

PI. 53, Par. 562. UnGe, the team 

that precedes it 
in the movement. 

The non-commissioned officer with the leading team is 
the guide of the column. 

566. The column of teams is right in front when the 
team of the right section in park leads; the column is 
left in front when the team of the left section in park 
leads. 

To Change Direction in Column of Teams. 

567. Executed as prescribed for the column of pairs. 



H.\^C- 



M 




214 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

To Oblique in Column of Teams. 

568« The instructor commands: 1. Right [ov Left) oblique, 
2. March. 

To resume, or to take, the direct march, the instructor 
commands: 1. Forward, 2. March. 

Each team obliques as already prescribed. The teams 
march on parallel lines, and regulate themselves so that 
the lead drivers remain on a line parallel to the original 
direction. 

To Halt the Column of Teams, and to Put it in March. 

569, The instructor commands: 1. Teams, 2. Halt; 
and, 1. Forward, 2. March. 

To March the Column of Teams to the Rear. 

570, The instructor commands: 1. Right {or Left) about, 
2. March. 

At the command march, each team executes the about 
as already explained. 

To halt the column on the completion of the about, the 
instructor commands: 1. Teams, 2. Halt, the command 
halt being given when the wheel drivers are in the new 
direction. 

To Form Line from Column of Teams. 

571. To the left, on the right, and left front into line of 
pairs. — Executed as prescribed for a single team in col- 
umn of pairs, substituting the command teams for team; 
the guide of the column passes in front of the leading 
pair as soon as it halts, and takes his place in line by a 
right about; each of the other non-commissioned officers 
leaves the column in time to take his place inline before 
the lead driver, abreast of whom he was marching, ar- 
rives in line. 

572. To the right or left into line of teams. — The instructor 
commands: 1. By the right [or left) flank, 2. MARCH, 3. Teams, 
4. Halt, 5. Right, 6. Dress, 7. Front. 

At the command march, each team wheels to the right, 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 215 

as prescribed for a single team. The teams halt at the 
fourth command, given at any time after the wheel pairs 
have advanced their own length in the new direction. 

573, On right or left into line of teams. — The instructor 
commands: 1. On right (or left) into line of teams, 2. MARCH, 
3. Teams, 4. Halt, 5. Front. 

The chief of the leading team commands right wheel at 
the first command, and repeats the command march; his 
team then wheels to the right, moves forward, and is 
halted at the fourth command, given at any time after its 
wheel pair has completed the wheel and advanced its own 
length in the new direction. Each of the other teams 
marches beyond the wheeling-point of the preceding 
team, then wheels to the right at the command of its 
chief, so as to preserve its interval of nine yards, and 
moves forward; on arriving at three yards from the line, 
its chief commands: l.Team, 2. Hai^t. 3. Right, 4. DRESS. 

5*74. To the front into line of teams. — The instructor com- 
mands: 1. Right (or Left) front into line of teams, 2. MARCH, 
3. Teams, 4. Halt, 5. Front. 

At the first command the chief of the leading team 
commands: Forward; the other chiefs of teams command: 
Right oblique. At the command march, repeated by all the 
chiefs, the leading team advances straight to its front, 
and is halted at the fourth command, given at any time 
after it has advanced its own length plus three yards; 
the other teams oblique to the right, each chief com- 
manding: 1. For lyarf/, 2. March, 3. Guide left, when his team, 
by half- wheeling to the left, will be in rear of its place in 
line; each team on arriving at three yards from the line 
is halted by its chief and dressed up to the team that 
preceded it. 

To Dismiss the Teams. 

575. The column of teams is marched to the vicinity 
of the stable or picket-line, where line of teams or pairs 
is formed facing to or from the stable or picket-line, as 



216 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 



may be most convenient. The instructor dismounts the 
drivers and causes them to file off. If in line of teams 
the chiefs of teams precede their teams; if in line of pairs' 
they precede or follow the team on the right of which 
they are posted, according to the flank from which the 
movement is made. The drivers are then dismissed as 
already explained. 

General Remark. 

576. To give the horses regular exercise when the 
ground is soft or otherwise unsuitable for drill with the 
carriages, the teams are exercised in the movements of 
the battery, or platoon, without being hitched, the same 
commands being given and the same movements executed 
as far as practicable. The interval is the same as in the 
battery, but the distance is increased to eight yards. 

To Post Teams with their Carriages. 

577. When the horses have been led out by teams, the 
pairs of a team, after they are coupled, may be connected 
by the traces. For this purpose the instructor com- 
mands: Hook traces. 

The swing driver goes behind his off horse, passing by 
his off side, untrusses and hooks the rear ends of the 
swing-traces to the front ends of the corresponding wheel- 
traces, beginning with the outer trace of the off horse 
and ending with the outer trace of the near horse. 

Each lead driver conforms to what has just been pre- 
scribed for the swing driver, beginning with the outer 
trace of his off horse, as soon as the swing driver has 
hooked the corresponding trace of his pair. 

Each driver stands to horse as soon as he has hooked 
the outer trace of his near horse. 

If any of the horses of a team are untrained, the pairs 
should not be hooked together until they arrive at the 
paric. 

Whenever a driver hooks a trace he sees that it is not 
twisted and that it lies flat against the horse. 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 



217 



578. To disconnect the pairs of a team, the instructor 
commands: Unhook traces. 

The swing" driver backs his team, if necessary, in order 
to unhook easily. He then goes in rear of his horses, 
passing by the near side of his near horse, unfastens and 
trusses the traces, beginning with the outer trace of the 
near horse and ending with the outer trace of the off 
horse. He then goes to the heads of his horses, passing 
by the off side of his off horse. 

Each lead driver conforms to what has just been pre- 
scribed for the swing driver. 

Each driver stands to horse as soon as he has unhooked. 

5*79* If the column of teams be right in front, it enters 
the park at its left; if left in front, it enters at its right. 




PI. 54, Par. 579. 



As the head of the column approaches the flank of the 
park the instructor commands: 1. Teams to your posts, 
2. March. 



^^® SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

^ At the command march, the teams of the rear-rank car- 
nages leave the column by an oblique, then move forward 
and form another column, those in rear following" the 
leading- team that has obliqued; each column then directs 
Itself upon a line parallel to the line of its carriages and 
m front of and near the poles. Each team of thS front- 
rank carriages wheels to the left (or right) when at three 
and one-quarter yards from its position in front of its 

?^f 'T^iV''' ^?i^ '''''^^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^ear tiie pole, and 
then halts without command. Each team of the rear 
rank conforms, as nearly as possible, to what has been 
prescribed for the teams of the front rank, the lead and 
swing drivers inclining to one side to avoid the front 
carriage of their file. Each non-commissioned officer 
moves with the lead driver by the side of whom he is 
posted, and conducts the team. 

580. A single team is similarly posted with its carriag-e 
oy the commands: 1. Team to your post, 2. March. 

To Hitch. 

581. If the pairs of the teams are connected, the in- 
structor commands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Hitch 

At this command, the highest odd-numbered cannoneer 
seizes the end of the pole; all the drivers of a team, act- 
ing together, back the team to its place at the carriag-e 
at the caution; Back, of the chief of team; the cannoneer 
at the pole guides the end into the pole-yoke ring, and, as 
soon as It is engaged, goes quickly to the left of the near 
wheel horse, passing by his rear. When the wheel horses 
are in such a position that they can be easily hitched, the 
highest numbered cannoneers, each on his own side de- 
tach the singletrees from the can tie hooks, engage them 
m the hooks at the end of the doubletree, and then re- 
sume their posts. 

58p. If the pairs of the teams are disconnected, the in- 
structor dismounts the drivers and commands: 1. Drivers, 
^' xilTCH, 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 219 

At the command hitch, each driver goes in front of his 
horses, faces toward them, grasps with his right hand 
the reins of the near horse, and with his left hand the 
reins of the off horse, and then backs his horses into 
such a position that they can be easily hitched. 

Each wheel driver engages the end of the pole in the 
pole-yoke ring, and backs his pair slightly. He then 
passes by the off side of his off horse, detaches the single- 
tree from the cantle hook of the off saddle, and engages 
it in the hook at the end of the doubletree; he then passes 
around the rear of the carriage at double time, detaches 
the singletree from the cantle hook of the near saddle, 
and hooks it to the end of the doubletree. 

Each swing driver, as soon as the off-wheel horse is 
hitched, goes behind his off horse, passing by his off side, 
untrusses and hooks the rear ends of the swing-traces to 
the front ends of the corresponding wheel-traces, begin- 
ning with the outer trace of the off horse, and ending 
with the outer trace of the near horse. 

Each lead driver hitches as prescribed for the swing 
driver. 

After hitching, each driver stands to horse. 

To Unhitch. 

583. The drivers being mounted, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Cannoneers^ 2. Unhitch. 

At the command unhitch, uhe two highest numbered can- 
noneers, each on his own side, detach the singletrees 
from the doubletrees, engage them in the cantle-hooks, 
and resume their posts. The team, the pairs connected, 
can be marched from the carriage, the pole dropping to 
the ground as the team moves out. 

584. To disconnect the pairs at the same time the 
team is unhitched, the instructor dismounts the drivers 
and commands: 1. Drivers, 2. Unhitch. 

Each wheel driver detaches the singletree of his near 
horse from the doubletree, and engages it in the cantle 



220 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

hook of the near saddle, passes at double time around the 
carriage, detaches the singletree of his off horse and en- 
gages it in the cantle-hook of the off saddle. He then 
goes to the heads of his horses, passing by the off side of 
his off horse. 

Each swing driver goes in front of his horses, faces to- 
ward them, and backs them so as to unhitch more easily. 
He then goes to the left and rear of his horses, passing 
by the near side of his near horse, unfastens and trusses 
the traces, beginning with the outer trace of the near 
horse and ending with the outer trace of the off horse. 
He then goes to the heads of his horses, passing by the 
off side of his off horse. 

Each lead driver unhitches as prescribed for the swing 
driver. 

After unhitching, each driver stands to horse. 

To Leave the Park. \ 

585. If they are not already mounted, the instructor 
mounts the drivers, and then commands: 1. By team, 2. By 
the right (or left) flank, 3. March. 

At the command march, the team of the right carriage 
in the front rank wheels to the right and moves off in the 
new direction; the team of the right carriage in the rear 
rank moves forward, passing by the right of its front- 
rank carriage, and wheels to the right so as to enter the 
column and follow the first team at the proper distance. 

The teams of the other files of carriages move in suc- 
cession, as just prescribed, at the command of their 
chiefs, beginning the movement in time to enter the col- 
umn and preserve their distances. Each non-commis- 
sioned officer moves with the lead driver by the side of 
whom he is posted and conducts the team. 

If the intervals between the carriages be not sufficient 
for the teams to pass, the teams of the rear-rank car- 
riages wheel as explained for the teams of the front rank. 
As the heads of the columns pass out of the park, the 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 221 

i teams of the rear-rank carriages oblique, at the command 
of their chiefs, so as to take their places in column in rear 
of the teams of the front carriages of their files. 

THE TEAM HITCHED. 
To March. 

586. The team being at a halt, properly hitched, and 
the drivers mounted, the instructor commands: \. For- 
ward, 2. March. 

At the command forward, the drivers see that their 
traces are stretched; at the command march, they move 
off the team. 

5 §7. Before a team hitched moves, the traces must al- 
ways be stretched. This rule is general. 

58§. By observing this rule a team is enabled to pull 
steadily and together, and the horses are not fatigued by 
jerks, which make them balky, gall their shoulders, and 
break the harness. 

To Halt 

5 §9. The carriage moving at a walk, the instructor 
commands: 1. Piece (or Caisson)^ 2. Halt. 

Each driver halts his pair as already explained, the 
wheel driver exerting more strength in halting than the 
other drivers, as his horses have to stop the carriage. 

590. The traces are stretched as soon as the carriage 
halts, by moving the horses a step or two forward. This 
rule is general. 

The Rests. 

591. Executed as prescribed in the School of the 
Driver (Par. 522), except that the drivers when dis- 
mounted need not hold the reins, but must remain on 
the left of their horses and close to them. When in 
march, rest is executed only at the walk; at ease may be 
executed at any gait. 

592. To resume the attention, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Drivers, 2. Attention. 



222 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

Changes of Gait. 

593. Executed as already explained, all the drivers 
acting together. 

594* To pass from a halt to the trot, the instructor 
commands: 1. Forward, 2. Trot, 3. March. 

At the command march, the drivers start the team off 
together at a trot. 

1^95, When necessary to halt from a trot, the instruc- 
tor commands: 1. Piece (or Caisson), 2. Halt. 

At the command ha/t, each driver stops his pair gradu- 
ally, the lead and swing drivers taking care that their 
horses are not injured hy the pole or by the horses in 
their rear. 

596. A carriage moving at a rapid rate can not be 
stopped at once, but must move on five or six yards after 
the command ha/t is given. This rule is general. 

To Wheel. 

59'y, The instructor commands: \. Right [ov Left) wheel, 
2. March. 

^gp^ At the command march, the lead 

«^o'^l-i-j ^^£^g^ 5 driver, followed by the swing, exe- 
/ /'l^J cutes the wheel as explained for a 

'^'^°'" "" team unhitched. 

In all changes of direction, the carriage is under 
the control of the wheel driver, who is responsi- 
ble for the correct execution of the movement. 
^^ The lead and swing drivers keep their traces 
A\ stretched and aid in the draft as much as possi- 
• ^ ble, but are careful to avoid the tension that 
PI. 55, would pull the wheel pair out of its proper direc- 

Par. 597. tiou. 

To halt the carriage upon the completion of the wheel, 
the instructor commands: 1. Piece (or Caisson), 2. Halt. 

The command halt is given when the carriage is in the 
new direction. 



I 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 223 

The About. 

598. The instructor commands: 1. Right (or Left) about, 
2. March. 

The drivers execute the about as explained for a team 
unhitched; this turns the carriage in nearly the shortest 
curve its construction will permit. 

To halt the carriage upon the completion of the about/ 
the instructor commands: 1. Piece (or Caisson), 2. Halt. 

The command halt is given when the carriage is in the 
new direction. 

599. In executing the about at a trot or gallop the 
radius is somewhat increased and the gait moderated to 
avoid upsetting the carriage. This rule is genera/. 

To Oblique. 

600. The instructor commands: 1. Right [or Left) oblique, 
2. March. 

The drivers oblique to the right as explained for a team 
unhitched. 

To resume or to take the direct march, the instructor 
commands: 1. Forward, 2. March. 

To Reverse. 

601. To place the carriage on the same ground, but 
facing in the opposite direction, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Reverse, 2. March. 

At the command march, the drivers oblique to the 
right; the lead driver, after gaining seven and one-half 
yards in that direction, moves his horses toward the left, 
so that the extreme part of the curve described by the off 
horse w^ill be fifteen yards from the line of departure (or 
line occupied by the heads of the leaders at the beginning 
of the movement), and that, after passing three j^ards to 
the left of the original left flank of the team and car- 
riage, they will return to the ground occupied by the 
carriage at the beginning of the movement. The swing 
driver follows the lead driver. The wheel driver directs 




224 " SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

his horses so that the ri^ht limber wheel describes a loop, 
which, extending seven and one- 
"'"\ half yards to the right and 
\ twelve to the front of the line of 
) departure, passes a little to the 
/ left of the original left flank 
.y and then returns, bringing the 
hind wheels in such a position 
that the rear of the carriage oc- 
cupies the line of departure. 
The pairs in front move accord- 
ing to their distances from the 
pole, and must keep out of the 
way of the wheelers, who con- 
trol the carriage. On the com- 
::::i-;;fcrc;r;i':v5'r»j;m. Pletlon of the.reverse, the driv- 
pi. 56 Par 601. ^^^ movc thclr horses in the 

new direction. 
The instructor dismounts during the first execution of 
the movement, and precedes the leaders on foot over the 
curve which they are to describe. 

To halt the carriage on the completion of the reverse, 
the instructor commands: 1. /'/ecefor Caisson), 2. Halt. 

The command haft is given as soon as the leaders reach 
the ground on which the hind wheels stood at the be- 
ginning of the movement. 

60lti. As horses can not be stopped suddenly, the com- 
mand ha/t is so given that they may be halted at the time 
or place prescribed. The same principle applies to the 
command march. These rules are general. 

003. In reversing at a irotov gallop, the loop is opened 
a little, and the gait moderated to avoid upsetting the 
carriage. This rule is general. 

604. If the carriage have but two pairs of horses, the 
lead driver moves as above prescribed for the swing 
driver; if but a single pair, the driver moves as pre- 
scribed for the wheel driver. 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 225 

To Back the Carriage. 

605* To the rear. — Being- at a halt, to move a short dis- 
tance to the rear, the instructor commands: 1. Backward, 
2. March. 3. Piece (or Caisson), 4. Halt. 

At the command march, the drivers rein back their 
horses, taking care to keep the pole straight; at the 
fourth command, they stretch the traces and halt. 

606. To the right or left. — Being at a halt, the instructor 
commands: 1. Right [ov Left) backward, 2. March, 3. Piece 
(or Caisson), 4. Halt. 

At the first command the drivers swing the team to the 
right, without advancing or backing the carriage, until 
the limber wheel comes against the wheel guard-plate; 
at the command march, they rein the horses back, taking 
care to keep them to the right; at the command ha/t, 
they straighten the team and carriage, stretch the traces, 
and halt. 

Whenever a carriage has to turn in a narrow space, as 
a street or lane, this method of backing is necessary, the 
carriage being halted when its rear part touches the 
wall, fence, etc. 

EXERCISE OF A SECTION. 

607. Asa preparation for the Schools of the Battery 
and Platoon, a section (piece and its caisson), with the 
teams hitched, is placed in column with two yards dis- 
tance between the rear part of the leading carriage and 
the heads of the lead horses of the carriage which fol- 
lows. The chief of section takes post boot to boot with 
the lead driver of the leading carriage and on his left; 
the caisson corporal, if horsed, is with the caisson and 
boot to boot with its lead or swing driver, according as 
the piece or caisson is in front. The chief of sectioh is 
the guide of the section; the guide of a carriage is the 
non-commissioned officer boot to boot with its lead driver; 
the lead driver is the guide of a carriage temporarily 
without a non-commissioned officer. 

9236 15 



226 SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 

To March, to Haft, and the Changes of Gait. 

608* Executed by the commands and means explained 
for a single carriage, observing that in the commands, 
the word section replaces the word piece or caisson. 

To Change Direction in Co/umn. 

609« Being in march, the instructor commands: 1. Co/- 
umn right (or feft); or, 1. Co/umn half-right (or half-left)^ 
2. March. 

At the command march, the leading carriage wheels or 
half-wheels to the right, as already explained. The rear 
carriage follows in the track, and wheels or half -wheels 
upon the same ground as the leading carriage. 

To Oblique. 

^gj^ 610. The instructor commands : 1 . Right 

Ji? (or Left) oblique, 2. MARCH. 

j^W^ I At the command march, each carriage 

.^&^ I obliques to the right and moves off in the 

,^^\ « new direction, the carriage in rear regu- 

/'^'a \«. P lating itself on the other. The carriages 

//'V\ % \ • niarch on parallel lines, the space be- 

ji jis*r— ^ Jj^ tween the carriages, measured perpen- 

jl I ^^ dicularly to the oblique direction, being 

il i j^^ eleven yards. 

11 i /ff' To resume, or to take, the direct 

il i .m^ march, the instructor commands: 1. For- 

''\\>'/ ward, 2. March. 

!jf % Passage of Carriages. 

i' i 

•j j 611. Being at a halt, the piece in 

ji ! front, to change the relative positions of 

j! i the piece and caisson, the instructor 

PI 57 Par 610 commauds: 1. Caisson pass piece, 2. March. 

At the command march, the piece 

stands fast; the caisson inclines to the right, passes the 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 227 

piece, takes its place in front by inclining to tlie left, and 
moves forward; the piece then follows in the track of 
the caisson at the distance of two yards. 

The chief of the section moves forward and c.^:! 
joins the lead driver of the caisson as he 
passes; the caisson corporal during the pas- 
sage is boot to boot with his lead driver; 
upon passing the lead horses of the piece, he 
falls back and marches boot to boot with his 
swing driver. 

If marching at a walk, the movement is ^e^i^^ \ 
executed as just explained, the piece halting * '^ •'; ; 
at the command march. m\\ \ 

If marching at a trot, or at a walk and the S| i;| j 
command be trot, the piece, at the command S 'i i 
march, moves at a walk; the caisson passes it iT! 'i I 
at a trot; the piece then takes the trot and fol- ^''i ; 
lows the caisson. ^ <^ / • 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot, and the 
command he gallop, the same principle applies, 
the piece moving at a trot. 

Being at a halt, if the caisson be passed at 
a trot, the piece takes the trot upon the com- 
pletion of the passage. 

The piece is placed in front of its caisson in ^^' ^®' ^*''' ^^^' 
a similar manner, at the commands: 1. Piece pass cais- 
son, 2. March. 

The chief of section moves forward and joins the lead 
driver of the piece as he passes; the caisson corporal 
moves up abreast the lead driver of his caisson. 

The carriage which passes must take care to move far 
enough to the front, before inclining to the left, to avoid 
collision with the lead horses of the carriage passed. 

The About. 
6 1 2. The instructor commands: 1. Right (ov Left) about 
2. March. Executed by each carriage as explained for 
a single carriage. 



228 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 



To halt the section upon the completion of the about, 
the instructor commands: 1. Section, 2. Halt. 

The command halt is given when the carriages are in 
the new direction. 

To Reverse. 
613, The instructor commands: 1. Reverse, 2. March. 
Executed by each carriage as explained for a single car- 
riage. 

To halt the section upon the completion of the reverse, 
the instructor commands: 1. Section, 2. HALT. 

The command halt is given as explained for a single 
carriage. 

Upon the completion of the about and the reverse, the 
chief of section moves forward and places himself boot to 
^-..--,.^^.-...— ^.-.,p-^-...^ boot with the lead driver of the 
' /'I Ni y\ \: leading carriage; the caisson cor- 
— -v"'j poral falls back and places him- 
^-^^ self boot to boot with the swing 
N /: driver, or moves forward and 
'/ /: places himself boot to boot with 
/ / j the lead driver of the caisson, 
according as the piece or caisson 
was in front at the beginning of 
the movement. 

To Countermarch. 

614. To place a piece and its 
caisson in the same relative posi- 
tions on the ground they occu- 
pied before, but facing in the op- 
posite direction, the instructor 
commands: 1. Countermarch, 
2. March. 

At the command march, the 

leading carriage reverses and 

moves at once to the position oc- 

carriage at the beginning of the 




PI. 59, Par. 614. 



cupied by the rear 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 229 

movement; the rear carriage follows the track of the 
leading one, reverses on the same ground, and preserves 
its distance. On the completion of the countermarch, 
the section moves forward in the new direction. 

To halt the section upon the completion of the counter- 
march, the instructor commands: 1. Section, 2. Halt. 

The command halt is given when the heads of the lead 
horses of the leading carriage reach the position occupied 
by the hind part of the rear carriage at the beginning of 
the movement. 

615. In countermarching at a trot or gallop, the same 
precautions must be taken as in reversing at these gaits. 
This rule is general. 

To Dismount while Marching. 

616. The section being at walk, the instructor com- 
mands: 1. Drivers, 2. Dismount. 

At the command dismount, each driver dismounts, with- 
out checking the gait, places the bridle reins of his near 
horse over the pommel, and walks beside him without 
touching the reins, unless it is necessary to check his 
pair; if either one of his pair lag, he threatens or touches 
him with his whip. 

If the instructor command: 1. Lead and swing drivers, 
2. Dismount, the drivers named alone dismount. 

To Mount the Drivers while Marching. 

61'7, Being at a walk, the instructor commands: 
1. Drivers, 2. MOUNT. 

At the command mount, all the drivers who are dis- 
mounted mount without checking the gait. 

If the instructor command: 1. Wheel drivers, 2. Mount, 
the drivers named alone mount. 

618, The section will be practiced in marching over 
smooth, level ground, until the teams are taught to pull 
together and to walk with an even, regular gait with the 
drivers dismounted , 



230 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTEEY. 

619« The School of the Battery includes that of the 
Platoon. 

620. A section consists of a piece of light artillery and 
its caisson, manned, horsed, and equipped. 

621, A platoon consists of two sections. 

622« In the commands for the exercises without cais- 
sons, a single piece horsed is designated as a section, and 
two pieces as a platoon. 

623« The hattery of maneuver consists of two or 
three platoons, either with or without caissons; in a hat- 
tery of machine guns the number of platoons may be in- 
creased to four or five. 

624. Platoons and sections are designated as explained 
in the School of the Battery Dismounted. 

625. The front of a battery, in the order in battery, is 
the line occupied by its pieces; in the other formations, it 
is the line occupied by the lead drivers of the front-rank 
carriages. 

The right or left of a battery is the right or left of the 
actual front. 

Interval is vacant space measured parallel to the front, 
and distance vacant space measured in depth, or perpen- 
dicular to the front. 

626. The chiefs of sections are the guides of the sec- 
tions; the guides of the carriages are the non-commis- 
sioned officers boot to boot with the lead drivers; the lead 
drivers are the guides of the carriages temporarily with- 
out non-commissioned officers. 

The guides of a battery, or of a platoon, in line, are the 
guides of the front-rank carriages on its right and left. 

627. Unless otherwise stated, the text refers to field 
batteries; it becomes equally applicable to horse batter- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 231 

ies by substituting the proper interval and distance, and 
by omitting" such remarks as apply to the cannoneers of 
field batteries. 

Special directions are given when the detachments, or 
cannoneers, of horse batteries have to make any particu- 
lar movement; when the detachments are not mentioned, 
they have only to maintain their posts in rear of their 
pieces, dressing toward the guide of the line or column; 
in column of sections, the guide of each detachment is, 
without indication, to the right. 

62§. On account of the noise of the carriages and the 
space occupied by a battery, the captain should, if nec- 
essary, use saber signals in conjunction with his com- 
mands. If a chief of a platoon does not hear a command, 
he governs himself by what he sees executed by an ad- 
joining platoon. The trumpet calls may be advanta- 
geously used when the battery is exercising by itself, 
but not always when acting with other troops except for 
attention, and in special cases, such as marches, for forward, 
halt, and the changes of gait. 

COMPOSITION OF THE BATTERY OF MANEUVER. 

629. In this school, the battery of maneuver is sup- 
posed to consist of three platoons, with or without their 
caissons, though the instruction is applicable to a greater 
or less number of platoons. 

Each carriage is drawn by six horses; in a machine-gun 
battery the carriages have six, four, or two horses. 

The personnel of a battery of maneuver comprises: — 

One captain, who commands the battery. 

Four lieutenants — three who are chiefs of platoons, and 
one who is chief of caissons. As the battery is formed in 
park, the senior lieutenant is posted with the right pla- 
toon; the next in rank with the left platoon; the fourth 
in rank with the center platoon; and the third in rank 
with the caissons, 



232 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

One first sergeant, who reports all emergencies to the 
captain and acts as his assistant. 

One quartermaster sergeant, whose duties are con- 
nected with the procurement of supplies and the care of 
the materiel of the battery; and one stable and veterinary 
sergeant, whose duties in camp and garrison are con- 
nected with the picket line and stables and the care of the 
sick horses, and, on the march and in action, with the 
reserve of the battery. These non-commissioned officers 
are not a component part of the battery of maneuver; 
they have, however, positions assigned them for inspec- 
tions and reviews. 

Six sergeants, who are chiefs of sections. 

Six gun detachments, each composed of seven men (two 
corporals and five privates); in horse batteries and heavy 
field batteries, each detachment is composed of two cor- 
porals and seven privates. Six of the corporals are gun- 
ners of the pieces and six in charge of the caissons. 

One driver to each pair of horses. 

Two trumpeters. 

One guidon, who ordinarily indicates the position of 
the guide. 

630» The captain, lieutenants, sergeants, caisson corpo- 
rals, drivers, trumpeters, and guidon are mounted; the 
cannoneers, as a rule, are on foot. In special cases, when 
the caisson corporals of field batteries are not mounted, 
they will take the place assigned them in the School of 
Cannoneer. 

63 1 • Cannoneers are usually mounted on the chests, 
axle-seats, and off horses only for rapid movements; they 
are not ordered to mount or dismount when the battery 
is marching at a trot or gallop. 

63S« All mounted men have the trousers inside the 
boots, wear gauntlets and spurs; the cannoneers are 
equipped with waist-belts, and, unless so ordered, do not 
wear gauntlets, except at inspections, reviews, and other 
occasions of ceremony. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 233 

633. In garrison, the first sergeant, quartermaster 
sergeant, stable and veterinary sergeant, and chiefs of 
sections are armed with the saber, and the caisson cor- 
porals, trumpeters, guidon, and drivers also, when spe- 
cially directed. When the captain desires the first ser- 
geant, quartermaster sergeant, stable sergeant, and chiefs 
of sections to draw saber, he commands: 1. Draw, 2. Saber. 

634. In the field, the first sergeant, quartermaster ser- 
geant, stable sergeant, and chiefs of sections are armed 
with the saber and revolver; all other men are armed 
with the revolver and knife. 

635. In horse batteries every one is mounted, the can- 
noneers, except the horse-holders, dismounting to serve 
the guns; in garrison, the cannoneers are armed with the 
saber when specially directed; the sabers are tempora- 
rily attached to the saddles and left with them when the 
men dismount to serve the guns. 

636. Chiefs of platoons and the chief of caissons, when 
absent, are replaced by the first sergeant and senior chiefs 
of sections; the captain may also require the quarter- 
master sergeant and stable sergeant to perform these du- 
ties. The first sergeant, if performing the duties of an 
officer, is not usually replaced. Gunners replace absent 
chiefs of sections; caisson corporals, absent gunners; and 
privates, selected for efficiency, absent caisson corporals. 

FORMATIONS OF THE BATTERY. 

63 T. The habitual formations are the order in line, order 
in column, and the order in battery. The formations are 
arranged so as to take up the least possible space, and to 
require the least ground practicable for passing from one 
to the other. 

The order in line is that in which the carriages are formed 
in one or two ranks, the horses all facing in the same di- 
rection; the pieces limbered and in one rank, and each 
preceded or followed by its caisson when the caissons are 
present. 



234 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

The order in column is that in which the battery is formed 
in column of platoons or in column of sections, the pieces 
being limbered, and each followed or preceded by its 
caisson when the caissons are present. 

The order in battery is that in which the pieces are pre- 
pared for firing, the pieces and limbers being formed in 
two parallel lines; if the caissons are present they form a 
third line in rear of and parallel to the limbers. The 
pieces are turned toward the enemy; the limbers and 
caissons, unless otherwise directed, face to the front. 

In column of platoons, in line, and in battery, the in- 
terval between carriages is fifteen yards; in horse bat- 
teries, nineteen yards. 

In column or in line, the distance between two carriages, 
or between a carriage and mounted detachment, is two 
yards. In battery , the distance between the lines of limbers 
and pieces is ten yards, measured from the end of the 
handspike to the heads of the lead horses, or to the back 
of the limbers, according as the limbers are faced to the 
front or rear; between the lines of the limbers and cais- 
sons the distance is eleven yards, measured from the rear 
part of the limbers to the heads of the lead horses of the 
caissons, or from the heads of the lead horses of the lim- 
bers to the rear part of the caissons, according as the 
limbers and caissons face to the front or rear. 

63 S« When the carriages have but two pairs of horses, 
the intervals are diminished three yards; when but one 
pair, the intervals are diminished six yards; should the 
carriages have four pairs, the intervals are increased 
three yards. 

If any carriage has lost one pair of horses or more, it 
has the same position as if the teams were complete, the 
distance being increased at the rate of three yards for 
each missing pair. In changes of formation, a carriage 
short of horses, in order to preserve its proper place, 
executes the movement as if the team was complete,. 

639* If the caissons are detached, the interval in col- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY 



235 



umn is unchanged, and 
the distance between the 
pieces, or between the 
pieces and mounted de- 
tachments, is habitually 
two yards. 

Posts of Officers and Non- 
commissioned Officers, 
etc., in the Order in Line. 

640. The captain is in 
front of the center of the 
battery; the distance 
from the croup of his 
horse to the line passing- 
through the heads of the 
lead horses of the front- ..«. 
rank carriages is four ^ 
yards; during the ma- ^ 
neuvers he goes wher- 
ever necessary and 
whence his commands 
may be best heard. 

Each chief of platoon is 
half-way between the 
leading carriages of his 
platoon and in line with 
the lead drivers. 

The chief of caissons is 
in rear of the center of 
the battery; the distance 
from the line passing 
through the rear of the 
rear-rank carriages to 
the head of his horse is 
four yards 






iH^^S^i^S^^ 



||-$^e^-H^^ 



i ' i 

Jj IS i^ 15'^ . hT 

I II r 



• t • • • ^ 

PI. 60, Par. 640. 



236 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



The first sergeant is half-way between the central sec- 
tions, in line with the limber-wheels of the pieces. 

The quartermaster sergeantfheioYG leaving the park, and 
at inspections and reviews, is four yards from the left 
• I* flank of the battery, aligned on the lead drivers 
g of the front-rank carriages. 

^ The stable sergeant is on the left of the quarter- 
^jrr* master sergeant and boot to boot with him. 



r 

T* i i ! 

1? I i I 



ff/-— -5 



When the bat- 
tery faces to the 
rear in line, the 
quartermaster 
and stable ser- 
geants place 
themselve s 
abreast the lead 
drivers of the 
front-rank car- 
riages, but they 
do not change to 
the other flank. 

Each chief of 
section is boot to 
boot with the lead 
driver of his sec- 
tion and on his 
left. 

Each caisson 
corporal is on the 
left and boot to 
boot with the lead 
or swing driver of 
the caisson, ac- 
cording as the 
pieces or caissons 
are in front. 
The guidon, before leaving the park, and at inspections 






PI. 61, Par. 640. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



237 



and reviews, is four yards from 
the right flank of the battery, 
aligned on the lead drivers of 
the front-rank carriages; on 
other occasions he is boot to 
boot with the right or left guide 
of the battery and on his left. 

The trumpeters, at inspections 
and reviews, are in line on the 
right of the guidon, each feeling 
the boot of the man on his left; 
on other occasions they have the 
same positions as in column. 

The cannoneers are at their 
posts, or mounted on the chests, 
etc., as already ex- 
plained. In horse bat' t^ w- 

ter/es the cannoneers CAPri 

are in the ranks of 

the mounted detach- 7*^^^4 1 

ments, two yards in 

rear of their pieces, whether the 

pieces or caissons lead. 

Posts of Officers, Non-commissioned 
Officers, etc., in the Order in Col- 
umn. 

641. The captain is usually fif- 
teen yards from the flank of the 
column and opposite its center; 
during the exercises he goes 
wherever his presence is most 
required and whence his com- 
mands can best be heard. 

Each chief of platoon, in column 
of platoons, is half-way between 
his leading carriages, in line 




CP.C. 



PI. 62, Par. 641. 



238 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



with the lead drivers; in column of sections, opposite the 

center of his platoon and four yards from the left flank, 

except the chief of the leading ^Aif^^z 

platoon, who is on the left and 

near the guide of the leading 

carriage. 

The chief of caissons, in all 
formations of column of pla- 
toons, by breaking to the front 
from line, is opposite the cen- 
ter of the column and four 
yards from the right flank; in 
other formations from line 
into column of platoons, he is 
on the flank nearest his for- 
mer position; if ^ /^— - 

the column of capt.\ /'^^I*-* 
platoons be faced ^ 

to the rear, he ^'•^-*'^I| 
does not pass to 
the other flank. In column of 
sections he is abreast of the 
center of the column and four 
yards from the flank, on the 
side opposite the chiefs of pla- 
toon. 

The first sergeant, in column 
of platoons, is abreast of the 
center of the column and four 
yards from the flank, on the 
side opposite the chief of cais- 
sons; in column of sections, 
four yards in rear of the chief 
of the center platoon; in col- 
umn of sections, when the battery has but two platoons, 
his position is the same as in column of platoons. 

The quartermaster sergeant and the stabfe sergeant in col- 




PI. 63. Par. 641. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



239 



umn of platoons and in column of sections, wheel to the 
side indicated, and are either four yards in front or four 
yards in rear of the center of the column, according" as 
the column has been formed toward their flank of the 
battery or the flank opposite. 

The guidon, in column of platoons, is boot to boot with 
the right, or left, guide of the leading platoon and on his 
left; in column of sections, in a similar position with re- 
spect to the guide of the second carriage. 

The trumpeters, except when marching in review, ar^ 
near the captain and in his rear. 

The chiefs of sections, caisson corporals, and cannoneers 
have the same positions as in line. 

Posts of Officers and Non-commissioned Officers in the Order in 
Battery. 

642. The captain is on the left of the chief of the 

.f.""*T*:*::. 




I 



•■'"H. 



|c« 



\cAPr • 

\fsrs ^ 



»o 



r 



*• . f 



ft..* 



f fS ^ 



PI. 64, Par. 642. 



240 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

center platoon, but goes wherever his presence is re- 
f-st-y-w-r"""'' '- — ii—-» y/--.—- ? quired. 

'^ ^^ ^^ H ,^^^^ .'^(^^..^^ 

r ■ T ^ • platoon is habit- 

ually in the cen- 
ter of his pla- 
toon, half-way 
between the 
lines of *pieces 
and limbers. 

The chief of 
caissons is oppo- 
site the center, 

■ ■ • • four yards in 

^r-^ ga^g Sggl ^ rear of the line 



-$- ^ 



• ■ I ■ ■ 



<»: ^ ^ ■; 6 ^^ caissons. 

I sL : Ji The first ser- 

^ "^ ^'r ^"^geant is half-way 

' between the cen- 
tral sections, in 
line with the 
limber wheels of 
the pieces. 

The quarter- 
master sergeant is 
j£ * ^^^^Si *P»*«**^i $ (5' four yards from 

-:5r-. ^ -a^^gi^ y**^ ^ the left flank of 

*^^ ^ thebattery, 

>JI». aligned on the 

lead drivers of 
, , . . the limbers; if 

-$-. ar^SSa ^ «S:3 $^ the guidon is on 



*^^L^ ^ - the same flank, 

"^ ^Vi^ ^ the quarter mas- 

pi. 65, Par. 642. tcr scrgcant is 
boot to boot with him and on his left. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 241 

The stable sergeant is on the left of the quartermaster 
sergeant and boot to boot with him. 

Each chief of section is on the left of his piece, outside 
but near the cannoneers, and opposite the middle of the 
trail handspike. 

Each caisson corpora/ is boot to boot with the lead 
driver of his caisson and on his left. 

The guidon is four yards from the flank of the line of 
limbers nearest his position on coming- into battery, and 
abreast the lead drivers. 

The trumpeters have the same positions as in column. 

The cannoneers are at their posts at the piece unlimbered. 

In horse batteries, the cannoneers araat their posts at the 
piece unlimbered, with the exception of the horse holders. 
The horse holders, with the horses of the detachment, are 
either two yards in rear of the limbers or two yards in 
front of the lead horses of the limbers, according as the 
limbers face to the front or rear; in either case the horse 
holders face to the front. 

643. When projectiles are fired, the chiefs of platoons 
and of sections habitually dismount and give the reins of 
their horses to a supernumerary cannoneer of the platoon. 
If there is no spare cannoneer for the purpose, the chief 
of platoon gives the reins of his horse to the swing driver 
of his right limber, if the limbers are facing to the front, 
or to the swing driver of his left limber, if the limbers 
are facing to the rear; the chiefs of sections give the reins 
of their horses to the wheel drivers of their limbers. 
They take the places that will best enable them to super- 
intend the service of the pieces and observe the effects of 
the fire. When ammunition is served from a caisson, its 
corporal also dismounts and gives the reins of his horse 
to the wheel driver. 

Measurements of the Elements Composing a Battery of Maneu- 
ver and of its Formations. 
644* The numbers given in the tables, having been 
chosen to avoid fractions, differ slightly from the exact 
9237 16 



242 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



measurements; the differences, however, are of but little 
importance. 

Elements, 





Depth. 


Front. 


Piece drawn by six horses 


Yards. 
15 
15 
12 

5 

7 


Yards. 
2 
2 
2 
2 
4 


Caisson drawn by six horses 


Limber drawn by six horses 


Piece in battery, with handspike 


Mounted detachment (horse battery) 





Field Battery of Three Platoons with Caissons. 



Depth. 



Front. 



Column of sections. 
Column of platoons 

Order in line. 

Order in battery 



Yards. 


Yards 


202 


2 


100 


19 


32 


87 


53 


87 



Horse Battery of Three Platoons with Caissons. 



Depth. Front. 



Column of sections. 
Column of platoons 

Order inline 

Order in battery 



Yards. 
256 
127 

41 

53 



Yards. 
2 

23 
107 
107 



Instruction. 
645. The captain is held responsible for the instruc- 
tion of his battery, and is charged with the theoretical 
and practical instruction of its officers and non-commis- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 243 

sioned officers; in the School of the Battery, and the 
School of the Battery Dismounted, he will require the 
lieutenants to act as instructors sufficiently often to famil- 
iarize them with the duties. 

The platoons are instructed separately in the move- 
ments applicable to them acting singly, the precise limits 
of the instruction being determined by the captain. The 
chief of the platoon is ordinarily the instructor, but when 
the captain or a senior lieutenant replaces him, the chief 
acts as assistant and repeats the commands, which, with 
obvious additions and modifications, are the same as those 
of a chief of platoon in the battery. 

Inexperienced officers are required to act as assistant 
instructors until sufficiently proficient to be intrusted 
with the instruction of a platoon. 

The exercises of a platoon acting singly, being elemen- 
tary in their nature, and intended as a preparatory ex- 
ercise to the battery drill, will be executed with as much 
precision as possible, and the gaits, unless otherwise di- 
rected by the captain, will be limited to the walk and 
the trot. 

In mounted instruction, all movements are first taught 
at a walk; as the instruction progresses, the gait is grad- 
ually increased. 

The alignments, intervals, distances, and the pre- 
scribed details of the movements are rigorously observed 
on the level drill ground; they are subordinate to the 
ground and exigencies in field practice and actual serv- 
ice. 

While it is recognized that a battery will be habitually 
maneuvered in the presence of the enemy with but one 
caisson to a platoon, and occasionally without any, yet 
drill movements are prescribed for the battery with a 
caisson attached to each gun. It is considered that the 
exercises of the drill ground are the best means for in- 
structing the drivers of the caissons in the proper man- 
agement of their teams under all circumstances. When 



244 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

the drivers are well instructed in the duties with their 
permanent carriages, the teams of the pieces and caissons 
should be occasionally interchanged, so that all the driv- 
ers may be familiar with the duties at both carriages. 

All men of the battery should be instructed in the du- 
ties of both the cannoneer and the driver. 

In order that all the horses may be available in an j 
emergency for any place in the battery, the team horses 
should be taught to work in the lead, swing, and wheel 
pair, and on both the off and near side; saddle horses 
should occasionally be worked in harness, and team 
horses under the saddle. 

During the drill, the instructor explains the meaning 
of the terms used in the course of instruction, such as in- 
terval, distance, etc., and asks questions to see whether 
every one understands the movements and the principles 
upon which they depend. 

During instruction, the saber is in the scabbard or 
drawn, at the discretion of the captain. When the cap- 
tain draws saber, the chiefs of platoons and chief of cais- 
sons will also draw theirs. In the execution of the firings 
with projectiles, the saber is habitually in the scabbard. 
All the non-commissioned officers and some of the most 
intelligent men of each section should be practiced in the 
use of the authorized range-finder; those that show the 
most aptitude should continue the practice until they be- 
come expert; from these last, a range-finding party can 
be permanently detailed when the battery takes the field. 
Instruction should also be given in judging distances by 
sight. 

Practical instruction in field duties should be carried 
out, as far as practicable, on the exercise grounds availa- 
ble, and should include the subdivision of the battery for 
action, choice of position, advancing to and occupation 
of a position, changes of position, pointing at natural and 
moving objects, observation and regulation of fire, indi- 
rect pointing by means of auxiliary targets, construction 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 245 

of artificial cover, and target practice in accordance with 
the Light Artillery Firing Regulations. 

Preparation for active service should include trotting 
in line and section-column for three or four miles with- 
out breaking the gait, in order to train the battery for 
long, rapid marches. 

A battery maintained on the footing for instruction 
consists of six guns and four caissons. At drills without 
caissons, the battery of maneuver consists of six pieces 
with six horses each; at drills with caissons, the battery 
of maneuver consists of four pieces and four caissons, 
with six horses to each carriage. 

When a. battery is on a war footing, the battery of 
maneuver with the caissons consists of six guns and six 
caissons, with six horses to each carriage. 

Responsibility. 

646. The chiefs of platoons are responsible to the 
captain for the good appearance and serviceable condi- 
tion of everything belonging to or attached to their 
platoons. The limits of this responsibility are deter- 
mined according to circumstances by the captain. 

The chiefs of sections are in like manner responsible 
to the chief of platoon for their sections and everything 
pertaining to them. 

The gunner is responsible to the chief of section for the 
good order of the gun, its carriage, limber, and equip- 
ments; he will hold each one of the cannoneers respon- 
sible for the condition of the equipments belonging to 
his number. 

The caisson corporal is responsible to his chief of sec- 
tion for the caisson, its horses, harness, equipments, and 
the condition of the ammunition, tools, and other sup- 
plies belonging to it. 

The drivers are directly responsible, each for his 
horses, harness, and equipments, to his chief of carriage. 
It is the duty of both drivers and cannoneers to report at 



246 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

once to their chief of carriage any injury to their horses 
or material, or any deficiency in their equipments. All 
such reports made to the caisson corporal will be trans- 
mitted by him to the chief of section. The chief of sec- 
tion will at once take the necessary steps to remedy the 
injury or deficiency, reporting the facts to the chief of 
platoon. 

The chief of caissons is responsible to the captain for 
the spare caissons and everything pertaining to them; 
each corporal of the spare caissons is responsible to the 
chief of caissons. 

SABER SIGNALS. 

647. The saber signals are supplemental to the voice 
and trumpet calls, and are chiefly for the guidance of the 
chiefs of platoons and sections. 

The chiefs of platoons and sections give verbally the 
commands prescribed for them in the movements indi- 
cated by the captain's signals, giving the command of 
execution simultaneously with the captain's signal of ex- 
ecution. A long enough pause should be made by the 
captain, after completion of a preparatory signal, to per- 
mit the chiefs of platoons and sections to give the pre- 
paratory command before the signal of execution is made. 

Before making a saber signal the captain places him- 
self where he can be seen by the whole battery, and gives 
the command attention, or causes it to be sounded by the 
trumpeters; eyes are then fixed on him to observe the 
signal that is to follow. The captain may also use a 
whistle to call attention to his signals. 

The signals are of two kinds: The preparatory signal and 
the signal of execution. 

All preparatory signals are made from guard; the return 
to guard from the preparatory signal is the signal of exe- 
cution. 

As long as the captain has his saber at ^rwar^/after affe/7- 
tion has been sounded or commanded, the chiefs of pla- 
toons and sections keep their eyes fixed on him; when he 



I 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 247 

comes to a carry, it is an. indication that no more signals 
are to be made until the attention is again sounded or 
commanded. 

The Preparatory Signals. 

648. Forward. — The first and second motions of front 
cut; the captain moves his horse forward. 

Right oblique. — Extend the arm and saber obliquely to 
the right until both are horizontal. 

Left oblique. — Same to the left. 

By the right flank. — Extend the arm and saber to the 
right until both are horizontal. 

By the left flank. — Same to the left. 

In the oblique and flank marches, the captain, as soon 
as he has made the preparatory signal, moves his horse in 
the direction the battery is to take. 

To increase the gait one degree. — Carry the hand to the 
right shoulder, blade vertical; raise and lower the hand, 
keeping the blade vertical; to be several times repeated. 

To decrease the gait one degree. — The first motion of the 
head parry. 

By the increase and decrease of the gait one degree, is 
understood the passing from a walk to a trot, or from a 
trot to a gallop, and the reverse. In changes of gait, the 
captain, upon making the preparatory signal, causes his 
horse to take the gait ordered. 

Halt. — Raise the arm vertically to its full extent, the 
blade in prolongation of the arm. 

Platoons right wheel. — The first and section motions of 
right cut. 

Platoons left wheel. — The first and second motions of 
left cut. 

Reverse. — Raise the arm vertically to its full extent, the 
blade in prolongation of the arm, and describe several 
horizontal circles with the point of the saber. 

Right front into line. — The first and second motions of 
right moulinet. 



248 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

Left front into line, — The first and second motions of left 
moulinet. 

In battery. — The first and second motions of tierce point, 
followed by the signal for reverse when the guns have 
advanced twenty-one yards. 

Action rear. — The first and section motions of rear 
point. 

Right front into battery. — The first and second motions of 
right moulinet, followed by the first and second motions 
of tierce point. 

Right front into battery, faced to the rear. — The Lrst and 
second motions of right moulinet, followed by the first 
and second motions of rear point. i 

Left front into battery. — The first and second motions of I 
left moulinet, followed by the first and second motions of 
tierce point. 

Left front into battery, faced to the rear. — The first and » 
second motions of left moulinet, followed by the first and | 
second motions of rear point. • 

The moulinets, cuts, and thrusts are made as prescribed 
in the saber exercise. 



THE PARK. 

649* The carriages are parked in two or three ranks 
OF lines, the pieces limbered and in the front rank, the 
caissons covering their pieces; the interval is such as is 
most convenient; the distance from the end of the poles 
to the rear part of the carriages in front is eight yards. 
The carriages of each section are arranged from right to 
left in the order of their permanent numbers, the first sec- 
tion on the right. Extra caissons, the battery wagon and 
forge, and other wagons are parked in a third line be- 
hind the second. 

In horse batteries the distance between the first and 
second lines is seventeen yards, but may be decreased to 
eight yards if the nature of the ground requires it. 



II 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 249 

To Form the Battery, 

650* The battery dismounted having been formed and 
reported to the battery officer of the day, the first ser- 
geant commands: Drivers fall out. 

At this command, the chiefs of sections, caisson corpo- 
rals, guidon, trumpeters, drivers, and cannoneers having 
riding horses to saddle, step six yards to the front and 
form, facing to the front, in double rank, opposite the 
centers of their respective sections; the chiefs of sections 
place themselves on the right, and the caisson corporals 
in the line of file-closers, of the detachments thus formed. 
The first sergeant sees that suitable cannoneers are de- 
tailed to replace absent drivers (not counting the men on 
guard, etc., who join their teams at the stable or picket 
line), closes the drivers toward either flank, and directs 
the senior chief of section to march them to the horses. 

The drivers having marched off in column of files, the 
first sergeant forms the gun detachments and marches 
them to the park, or puts them in charge of the senior 
gunner for this purpose, as explained in the School of the 
Cannoneer. 

The drivers having arrived at the horses, the chief of 
section in charge halts them and commands: Harness, 
when the drivers of each section harness under the super- 
vision of their chiefs. The riding horses are saddled 
while the drivers harness. 

As soon as the gun detachments are posted at the pieces, 
the gunners, upon an intimation from the first sergeant or 
senior gunner, have their carriages uncovered and the 
paulins folded up and strapped on the lids of the limber 
chests; in a machine battery, the gun covers, unless oth- 
erwise directed, are also taken ofif and strapped on the 
chest lids. 

If there be a gun-shed, the non-commissioned officer in 
charge halts the column in front of the building, desig- 
nates the position for the carriages of the first section, and 
commands: 1. Form park, 2. At (so many) yards interval, 



250 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



>jp 



3. March. At the command march, each, gunner has hii 
carriages run out by hand and formed in park on those oi 
the first section, the non-commissioned officer in charge 
seeing that they are in line. 

The park being in order, each gunner forms his detach- 
ment in rear, causes it to call off, posts the cannoneers at 
the piece, and distributes the equipments. 

In horse batteries, the duties of each gunner are as just 
prescribed, except that he distributes the equipments 
without posting the cannoneers, marches his detachment 
to the horses, and causes the men to saddle, bridle, and 
prepare to lead out. 

The first sergeant sees that the cannoneers perform their 
duties in the park, and that the drivers harness with the 
least possible delay and without noise or confusion; if the 
park be too far from the horses to enable the first ser- 
geant to superintend both drivers and cannoneers, the* 
captain gives such instructions as he thinks proper. a 

The first sergeant commands: Lead out by pair (or* 
team), as soon as the teams are harnessed, and Couple, 
when the line is formed; when specially directed to do 
so, he commands: Ho OK traces, after leading out by 
teams. The first sergeant then mounts the drivers and 
posts the teams with their carriages. 

In horse batteries, the cannoneers lead out and mount 
while the drivers are hitching, and are usually posted at 
the pieces by the first sergeant, who returns for this 
purpose; if ready, they may be directed to lead out at the 
commands for the drivers, each detachment moving out 
after the team of its piece and forming in line on its left; 
as soon as the drivers are coupled, the first sergeant com- 
mands: 1. Drivers and cannoneers, 2. Trbtarb TO MOUNT, 
3. Mount. The teams are then posted with their car- 
riages as before, each detachment following the team of 
its piece; at the commands teams to your posts, march, each 
detachment breaks from the column and takes post //; rear. 

If the park be in the immediate vicinity of the horses, 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 251 

the first sergeant may command: Couple, when the 
drivers have harnessed, and direct that at the command 
lead out, the teams, and in horse batteries, the detachment 
horses also, be led directly to their posts at the car- 
riages; the teams move in succession by section. 

In horse batteries, when the carriages are parked, with 
but eight yards distance, the detachments are formed 
outside of the park, usually on the flank, and take post 
in rear as their pieces move out. 

The teams being at their posts, the first sergeant com- 
mands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Hitch, or he dismounts the 
drivers and commands: 1. Drivers, 2. Hitch, according 
as the traces are hooked or unhooked. 

The quartermaster sergeant, stable sergeant, and 
guidon, mounted, take their posts during the hitching. 
The trumpeters, mounted, report to the captain at such 
time and place as he may direct. The chiefs of platoons, 
mounted, join their platoons as soon as the teams are 
posted with the carriages, and superintend the hitching. 

Each chief of section, as soon as his teams are hitched, 
makes a minute inspection of his section and reports the 
result to the chief of platoon. 

Each chief of platoon, having received the reports of 
the chiefs of sections and made a general inspection of 
the platoon, commands: 1. Platoon, 2. Rest. 

Upon the approach of the captain, the chiefs of platoons 
bring their platoons to attention, and, as soon as the cap- 
tain takes his place in front, they report in succession 
from right to left: [^xxch) platoon in order, sir; but if any- 
thing be missing or out of order they state it, instead of 
reporting as just prescribed. 

The chiefs of platoons having reported, and the bat- 
tery being ready to move, the captain mounts the drivers, 
and in horse batteries the cannoneers also. 

To Align the Battery. 

651. The captain causes one of the flank sections to 
move forward three or more yards. 



252 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Right (or 
Left), 3. Dress 

Captain — 3. Front. 

At the command dress, the other sections move for- 
ward, preserving their intervals, the carriages approach- 
ing the line as squarely as possible and halting a little 
in rear of it; the drivers cast their eyes to the right and 
dress up to the drivers of the carriages established as a 
basis; the captain places himself on the right flank in 
line with the wheel driver of the leading carriage, facing 
to the left, and superintends the alignment of the wheel 
drivers of the front-rank carriages; the chief of caissons 
places himself on the right flank, in line with the wheel 
driver of the rear carriage, facing to the left, and super- 
intends the alignment of the wheel drivers of the rear- 
rank carriages. At the command front, the captain and 
the chief of caissons resume their posts. 

Instead of establishing a section as a basis, the cap- 
tain, having seen that the carriages on the side toward 
which he wishes to dress are in proper position, may 
give the same commands as before. The drivers dress 
as just explained, moving their horses forward or back 
so as to put themselves on the line. 

652, In horse batteries, at the command dress, each de- 
tachment aligns itself to the side ordered, under the 
supervision of its gunner. 

To Unpark. 

653. Captain — 1. Right (or Left) by sections. 
Chief of right section — 1. Forward. 

Captain (repeated by chief of right section) — 2. March. 

At the command march, the right section marches 
straight to the front, the guide of its leading carriage 
selecting points on which to direct himself, as explained 
in the School of the Soldier Dismounted. The chiefs of 
the other sections command, in succession: 1. Forward, 
2. March; each section, after advancing a few yards, in- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 253 

clines to the right at the command of its chief and enters 
the column so as to follow the preceding- section at two 
yards distance. The guide of the leading carriage is the 
guide of the column. The chiefs of platoons superintend 
the march of their sections, but do not repeat the com- 
mands. 

As the battery unparks, the officers, first sergeant, 
quartermaster sergeant, stable sergeant, and guidon take 
their posts in column of sections. 

654. Upon passing from any formation to one of the 
habitual formations of the battery, as soon as the move- 
ment permits, the officers and non-commissioned officers 
whose posts are changed go by the shortest route to their 
posts in the new formation. This rule is general. 

655« The column of sections is right in front when the 
section leads whose permanent numerical designation is 
the lowest; the column of sections is left in front when the 
section leads whose permanent numerical designation is 
the highest. 

ROUTE MARCHES. 

656. The column of sections is the habitual column of 
route; but the column of platoons is preferable when that 
formation can be maintained for a considerable distance. 
The distance between carriages is two yards, but may be 
increased to four yards when the ground is difficult. 

Marching at a walk, the captain (repeated by chiefs of 
platoons) commands: 1. Route order, 2. March. 

At the command march, sabers are returned, if drawn, 
and the men are free to turn their heads, to make slight 
changes of position, and to talk; but no one is permitted 
to lounge in his saddle. . 

To resume the attention, the captain commands: 1. Bat- 
tery, 2. Attention. The chiefs of platoons command: 
Platoon, at the first command, and repeat the second. If 
the distances have been increased, all but the leading 
carriage quicken the pace and close to two yards. 

The captain usually marches at the head of the column, 



254 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

with fifteen yards distance from the croup of his horse 
to the heads of the lead horses of the leading carriage; 
he is followed by the trumpeters, who march side by side, 
with one yard distance from the croup of the captain's 
horse to the heads of their horses. 

The chiefs of platoons will habitually march opposite 
the rear carriage of their platoons and superintend their 
march, going anywhere that their presence may be re- 
quired. 

The chief of caissons habitually marches at the rear of 
the column, and follows the last caisson at four yards 
distance. If the road be narrow, the chiefs of the rear 
platoons and first sergeant close in to the column. 

65 "y. In horse batteries, the gunners, whenever neces- 
sary, form their detachments in column of files, re-form- 
ing line as soon as the ground permits. 

65 §• To avoid dust, the captain may direct the officers 
and non-commissioned officers to keep on the windward 
side of the column. The cannoneers may be permitted 
to march on the right or left for similar reasons, or to 
take advantage of a foot-path, etc. 

If the road is level and smooth for a considerable dis- i 
tance, the horses and drivers may be rested by dismount- 
ing the drivers as prescribed in the School of the Driver 
(Par. 616). The wheel driver should remain mounted go- 
ing down gentle descents and when the road is a little 
rough. 

The cannoneers of horse batteries may also be dis- 
mounted, each cannoneer retaining hold of the reins and 
walking by the side of his horse. 

To Park. 

659. The captain directs the column of sections toward 
either flank, or in rear of the position to be occupied by 
the park, and establishes the guidon near the point where 
the lead driver of the leading carriage is to halt. 

660. To the right or left — The captain directs the col- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 255 

umn fifty yards in rear of, and parallel to, the line to be 
occupied by the lead drivers of the front-rank carriages. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Right (or 
Left) into park, 2. At (so many) yards interval. 

Chief of leading section — Section, right wheel. 

Captain (repeated by chief of leading section) — 
3. March. 

At the command march, given when the leading section 
is three and one-quarter yards from the point opposite 
the position which it is to occupy, the leading section 
wheels to the right, moves forward, and is halted by its 
chief when the leading driver arrives in line with the 
guidon. Each of the other sections continues the march 
until three and one-quarter yards from the point oppo 
site its place in park, then wheels to the right at the 
command of its chief, and moves forward; on arriving at 
three yards from the line, the chief commands: 1. Section, 
2. Halt, 3. Left, 4. Dress. 

The chiefs of platoons superintend the movements of 
their sections, but do not give the command of execution. 
The captain and chief of caissons go to the left and su- 
perintend the alignment as previously explained. 

The captain commands right into park or left into park, 
according as the column is left or right in front. 

66 !• When sections or platoons dress in succession 
at the commands of their chiefs, the captain and chief of 
caissons superintend the alignment from the flank toward 
which the dress is ordered, as in simultaneous alignments; 
the command front is given by the captain on the com- 
pletion of the alignment and is not repeated by the chiefs 
of platoons. 

662, On right or left. — The captain directs the column 
fifty yards in rear of and parallel to the line to be oc- 
cupied by the lead drivers of the front-rank carriages, 
and commands: 1. On right [or left) into park, 2. At (so many) 
yards interval, 3. March, 4. Front. Executed as ex- 
plained for to the right into park, except that each sec- 



256 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

tioii passes beyond the one preceding before wheeling* 
to the right, and that upon halting, all the chiefs of sec- 
tions, except the leading one, command: 1. Right, 2. Dress. 
The captain commands on right into park, or, on left into 
park, according as the column is right or left in front. 

663. To the front. — The captain directs the column so 
as to bring the leading section in rear of the position it 
is to occupy; when this section is at least six yards from 
the point at which it is to halt: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Right (or 
Left) front into park, 2. At (so many) yards interval. 

Chiefs of sections (except leading one) — Right oblique. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of sections, except leading 
one)— 3. March. 

At the command march, the leading section moves for- 
ward and halts at the command of its chief, on arriving 
at the point established by the guidon; all the other sec- 
tions oblique to the right until nearly opposite their 
places in park, when their chiefs command: 1. Forward, 
2. March ; on arriving at three yards from the line, each 
chief halts his section and commands: 1. Left, 2. Dress. 

The chiefs of platoons superintend the march of their 
sections, but do not repeat the command of execution. 

The captain commands right front into park, or, left front 
into park, according as the column is left or right in 
front. 

664. In horse batteries, if necessary to park with but 
eight yards distance, the captain directs the detach- 
ments to leave the column by an oblique as the battery 
approaches the park. 

The Rests. 

665. Being in any formation at a halt or marching; 
Captain — Rest, or, At ease; or, 1. At ease, 2. March. 
Executed by the drivers as prescribed in Par. 591: by 
the cannoneers of horse batteries as prescribed in Par. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 257 

351; by the cannoneers of the field batteries according to 
Par. 14. 

To resume the attention: 

Captain — 1. Battery. 

Chiefs of platoons— 1. Platoon. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. Atten- 
tion. 

To Dismiss the Battery. 

666. As soon as the battery is parked, each chief of 
section makes a minute inspection of his section, and re- 
ports all losses or injuries to the chief of platoon; the 
chiefs of platoons then report in succession from right to 
left: (Such) platoon in order, sir; but if anything be miss- 
ing or out of order they state it, instead of reporting as 
just prescribed. 

All the reports having been made, the captain gives 
such instructions as may be necessary, and then dis- 
mounts the drivers, or leaves them mounted, according 
as he desires the drivers or cannoneers to unhitch, and 
directs the first sergeant, dismiss the battery, at which the 
officers return saber, if drawn, and leave the battery. 

If the drivers are dismounted, the first sergeant 
commands: 1. Drivers, 2. Unhitch; if the drivers are 
mounted, he commands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Unhitch. At 
the first sergeant's commands to unhitch, the quarter- 
master sergeant, stable sergeant, and guidon leave the 
park and return their horses to the stable or picket-line, 
and the gunners cause their cannoneers to replace equip- 
ments, clean, cover, or put away their carriages, as di- 
rected by the first sergeant. 

In horse batteries, while the drivers unhitch, the senior 
gunner marches the detachments from the park, forms 
them in line, and gives the commands for filing off, as 
explained in Horse Artillery. Each gunner causes the 
men of his detachment to unsaddle, unbridle, and care 
9236 17 



258 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

for their horses; he then marches the detachment back 
to the park, replaces equipments, and causes the men to 
attend to their carriages. 

The teams being unhitched, the iirst sergeant marches 
them from the park and files them off, as explained in 
the School of the Driver. 

If the park be in the immediate vicinity of the stables 
or picket-line, the first sergeant may, after unhitching 
by drivers, direct the teams, and in horse batteries the 
detachment horses also, to be led directly to the stables or 
picket-line; the teams and detachment horses move in 
the order of the numbers of their sections. ' 

The horses being at the stable or picket-line, the first 
sergeant commands: Unharness, when the drivers of 
each section unharness under the supervision of their 
chiefs. The horses of the chiefs of sections and caisson 
corporals are unsaddled while the drivers unharness. 

As soon as the drivers have attended to their horses 
and harness, the first sergeant directs the senior chief of 
section to march them in column of files to the battery 
parade ground and dismiss them. 

As soon as the cannoneers have attended to the car- 
riages, the gunners form the detachments in front or in 
rear; the first sergeant, or senior gunner, then marches 
them to the battery parade ground and dismisses them. 

To Change Direct/on in Column of Sections. 

GOy* Being in march: 

Captain (repeated by chief of leading platoon) — 1. Col- 
umn right (or /eft). 

Chief of leading section — 1. Section, right wheel. 

Captain (repeated by chief of leading platoon and sec- 
tion) — 2. March. 

At the command march, the leading section changes di- 
rection as already explained; the other sections move 
forward until each arrives on the ground where the lead- 






SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 259 

ing" section began to wheel, when it executes the same 
movement at the command of its chief. 

The chief of the leading platoon sees that the guide of 
the leading carriage directs himself on the proper points 
in the new direction. 

66N . Column half-right (or half-left) is similarly executed. 

069. To make a slight change of direction, the captain 
cautions: Incline to the right [or left). The guide of the 
column carries his bridle hand slightly to the right and 
takes two points a little to the right of those upon which 
he was marching. 

6 TO. To put the column of sections in march, and to 
change direction at the same time: 

Captain (repeated by chief of leading platoon) — 1. For- 
ward^ 2. Column right (or left). 

Chiefs of other platoons — 1. Forward, 

Chief of leading section — 1. Section, right wheel. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons and chief of 
leading section) — 3. March. 

To Form Column of Platoons from Column of Sections. 

071. Being at a halt: 

Captain — 1. Form platoons, 2. Left (or Right) oblique. 

Chief of leading platoon — 1. Form platoon, 2. Left (or 
Right) oblique. 

Chiefs of other platoons — 1. Forward, 

Chief of leading section — 1. Forward, 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons and chief of 
leading section) — 3. March. 

At the command march, the leading section of the leading 
platoon moves forward six yards and halts, the guidon 
taking post on the left of the guide of the leading car- 
riage and boot to boot with him ; the rear section obliques 
to the left, gains its interval of fifteen yards, moves for- 
ward and halts when on line with the leading section. 
The other platoons move forward, each chief command- 
ing: 1. Form platoon, 2. Left oblique, in time to add: 



260 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

3. March, when his leading section is eight yards from j 
the rear carriage of the preceding section; the platoons] 
form as explained for the first. 

If marching at a walk, the leading platoon executes the "^ 
movement as explained from a halt; the other platoons 
continue the march without command until formed suc- 
cessively by their chiefs. 

If marching at a walk and the command be trot the 
captain commands: Guide right (or left)^ after the command 
march. The chief of the leading platoon commands: Form 
platoon, at the first command, and repeats the other com- 
mands; his leading section moves forward at a walk, his 
rear section obliques at a trot, gains its interval, and, on 
arriving abreast of the leading section, takes the walk. 
Each of the other chiefs of platoons repeats the com- 
mands, trot, march, and, when his leading section has 
nearly closed to its distance, forms his platoon by the 
same commands as prescribed for the first. Each chief 
of platoon repeats the command for the guide as soon as 
his platoon is formed. The guidon takes his post in 
column of platoons as soon as the guide is announced. 

If marching at a trot, the movement is executed as just 
explained; the rear platoons continue to march at a trot 
without command until formed successively by their 
chiefs. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command 
be gallop, the same principles apply, the leading section 
moving at a trot. 

672. The guidon is always boot to boot with the guide 
with whom he is posted, and on his left. Whenever the 
guide is announced, the guidon, if not already there, goes 
at once by the shortest route to the position of the guide. 
These rules are general. 

673* The column of platoons is habitually employed 
for maneuvering, as the column of sections requires too 
great an extension of the battery and too much time for 
the movements. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 261 

To Form Column of Sections from Column of Platoons. 

674. From a halt: 
i Captain (repeated by chief of leading platoon) — 1. Right 
(or Left) by sections. 

Chief of right section of leading platoon — 1. Forward. 

Captain (repeated by chief of leading platoon and chief 
of right section of leading platoon) — 2. March. 

At the command march, the right section of the leading 
platoon moves forward, the guidon taking his post in 
column of sections; the left section remains halted until 
the leaders of its leading carriage are abreast the wheel 
horses of the rear carriage of the right section, when it 
obliques to the right, enters the column, and follows the 
right section by command of its chief. The chiefs of the 
other platoons form them successively into column of 
sections by the same commands, each commanding march 
when the wheel horses of the left section of the preced- 
ing platoon begin to oblique, and the movement is exe- 
cuted in each platoon as prescribed for the leading pla- 
toon. 

If marching at a walk, at the command march, the right 
section of the leading platoon maintains the gait, its 
chief omitting the command forward, and the left section 
halts at the command of its chief; the chiefs of the center 
and rear platoons command: 1. Platoon, at the first com- 
mand, and add, 2. Halt, at the command march; the 
movement is then executed as before. 

If marching at a walk and the command be trot, the 
right section of the leading platoon takes the trot at the 
command march, the left section on beginning to oblique. 
The other platoons are formed successively into column 
of sections at a trot, each chief of platoon regulating the 
movement of his sections as before, and each chief of 
section giving the commands for the change of gait of 
his section. 
* If marching at a trot, the right section of the leading 
platoon maintains the gait and the left section takes the 



262 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

walk; the chiefs of the other platoons command: walk, at 
first command, and repeat the command march; the move- 
ment is then executed as just explained. 

If marching- at a gallop, or at a trot and the command 
be gallop, the same principles apply. 

In horse artillery, with the caissons leading, the left 
section begins the oblique when the leaders of its leading 
carriage are in line with the rear wheels of the piece of 
the section on its right. 

To Halt the Column and to Put it in March. 

6*75. Being in column of platoons: 

Captain — 1. Battery. 

Chiefs of platoons — 1 . Platoon. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. Halt. 

To resume the march: 

Captain (repeated by chief s of platoons) — 1. Forward, 
2. March, 3. Guide (right or left). 

The guide maintains the direction, the carriages pre- 
serving the interval and distance. Every driver should 
start his tearm at the command of execution; he should 
not wait till the carriage in front moves off. 

676. Being in column of sections, the battery is halted 
by the same commands and means. 

677. To resume the march, the commands are the 
same as for column of platoons, omitting the commands 
for the guide. 

678. On the drill ground, the captain occasionally 
causes the gait at the head of the column to be slightly 
increased or diminished without command, in order to 
habituate the officers, non-commissioned officers, and 
drivers to conform to the changes of gait of the carriages 
in front of them, and to preserve distances without any 
abrupt start or pulling up of the team. 

679. To insure the execution of the halt by all the car- 
riages at the same time, whenever the captain gives the^ 
command halt he raises his arm and saber to their full 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 263 

extent; the chiefs of platoons, chiefs of sections, and cais- 
son corporals make the same motion; when the saber is 
not drawn, the right arm is raised to its full extent. 
Whenever the captain commands battery, the chiefs of 
platoons command platoon. These rules are general, except 
for the captain's command battery right (or left) wheel, and 
the command halt after the wheel by battery (Pars. 740 
to 742). 

Passage of Carriages in Column. 

6§0* Being in column of platoons, at a halt (according 
as the pieces or caissons are in front): 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Caissons 
pass pieces (or Pieces pass caissons)^ 2. March, 3. Guide 
right (or left). Executed in each section as already pre- 
scribed for a single section in the School of the Driver; 
the guide of each carriage that passes in the right sec- 
tions dresses on the guide of the corresponding carriage 
in the left sections; the guidon moves forward and takes 
post with the carriage that passes; the command for the 
guide is given as soon as the passage is completed. 

Being in march, the movement is executed as before, 
the command for the guide being omitted; on the com- 
pletion of the passage, the carriages that have passed 
dress toward the side of the guide. 

681. When the passage is executed by two or more 
carriages in line with each other, the guide of the left 
carriage is the guide of the line of carriages during the 
passage. This rule is general. 

6 §2. In horse batteries the movement is similarly exe- 
cuted; the caissons pass the pieces and detachments, or 
the pieces and detachments pass the caissons, according 
as the pieces or caissons are in front. 

6§3. In column of sections, the commands are the 
same, omitting the commands for the guide. 

The guidon moves forward and takes post with the 
guide of the carriage that is passed. 



264 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

About, in Column. 

6S4« Being in column of platoons: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Right [ov 
Left) about, 2. March, 3. Guide (right or /eft); or, 3. Battery, 
4. Halt. 

At the command march, each carriage executes an about 
In the right about, the guide of each left-section carriage 
dresses on the guide of the carriage on his right; in the 
left about, the guide of each right-section carriage dresses 
on the guide of the carriage on his left; upon the com- 
pletion of the about, the guide is announced or the bat- 
tery halted. 

685. In column of sections, the movement is executed 
by each carriage as before, the command for the guide 
being omitted. 

686. Whenever the column of platoons is faced to the 
rear, the guidon hastens to place himself at the rear, now 
become the head of the column; if the battery be halted 
on the completion of the movement, the guidon takes 
post with the right guide of the leading platoon. In col- 
umn of sections, the guidon hastens to take post with the 
guide of the second carriage from the rear, now become 
the guide of the second carriage from the head of the 
column. 

These rules are general. 

Reverse, in Column. 

68 T. Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Re- 
verse, 2. March, 3. Guide [right or left)\ or, 3. Battery, 
4. Halt. Each carriage executes a reverse. 

If executed from a halt, the guide of each right-section 
carriage, throughout the movement, dresses on the guide 
of the carriage on his left at the beginning of the move- 
ment; if , executed while marching, the guide of each 
rank of carriages at the beginning of the movement is 
the guide throughout the movement. 

688. In column of sections, the command for the guide 
is omitted. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 265 

689. In horse batteries, the pieces advance nine yards 
after completing the about, or reverse, so that the heads 
of the lead horses are on the ground before occupied by 
the rear of the detachments, and increase the gait so as 
to reach this position when the caissons complete the 
movement. 

Countermarch, in Column. 

690. Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Coun- 
termarch, 2. March. Executed as just explained, except 
that each section executes the countermarch, and that, 
if executed from a halt, the guide of each leading car- 
riage in the right sections throughout the movement 
dresses on the guide of the carriage on his left at the be- 
ginning of the movement; if executed while marching, 
the guide of the platoon at the beginning of the move- 
ment is the guide of the platoon throughout the move- 
ment. On completion of the movement, the battery may 
be halted or the command for the guide will be given. 

In column of sections, the command for the guide is 
omitted. 

691. When two or more carriages in the same line 
execute a right about, the guide of the right carriage at 
the beginning of the movement is the guide of the rank 
of carriages throughout the movement; when two or 
more carriages in the same line execute a left about, the 
guide of the left carriage at the beginning of the move- 
ment is the guide of the rank throughout the movement. 
These rules are general, except for the caissons in action, 
front, right, and left. 

69 ti* When two or moi'e carriages in the same line 
execute a reverse from a halt, the guide of the left car- 
riage at the beginning of the movement is the guide of 
the rank of carriages throughout the movement; if exe- 
cuted while marching, the guide of the rank of carriages 
at the beginning of the movement is the guide of the 
rank throughout the movement. 

These rules are general. 



266 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

693. When two or more sections in the same line 
countermarch from a halt, the guide of the leading car- 
riage of the left section at the beginning of the move- 
ment is the guide throughout the movement; if executed 
while marching, the guide of the line at the beginning 
of the movement is the guide throughovit the movement. 
These rules are general. 

694* In executing an about, or in reversing, the guide 
of each rank of carriages regulates himself on the guide 
of the rank in front of him. This rule is general. 

695. In countermarching in column of platoons, the 
guide of the countermarch in each platoon regulates him- 
self on the guide of the countermarch in front of him. 

696* In executing an abovit, in reversing, and in coun- 
termarching, in column of sections, the carriages or 
sections regulate themselves on the carriages or sec- 
tions in front of them. 

To Change Direction in Column of Platoons. 

69 7 • Marching at a walk: 

Captain — 1. Column right {or left). 

Chief of leading platoon — 1. Platoon right (or left) wheel. 

Captain (repeated by chief of leading platoon) — 
2. March. 

At the command march, the pivot section of the leading 
platoon changes direction to the right as explained for a 
single section, the other section takes the trot, and moves 
over a quarter circle so as to preserve its interval and con- 
form to the movement of the pivot section; on the com- 
pletion of the wheel it takes the gait of this section. The 
other platoons move forward until each arrives on the 
ground where the leading platoon began to wheel, when 
it executes the same movement at the same commands 
from its chief. The guidon retains the post he had at the 
beginning of the movement. 

If marching at a trot, the Y^ivoi section moves at a trot; 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



267 



-§^^^ -H^^ 



I 



PI. 66, Par. 697. 



manding- right (or left) half- wheel. 



\^~ the other section 
Ijl moves at a gallop; the 

J J movement is then exe- 

iil cuted as before. 

■fM*" If marching at a gal- 

'l~rl' w lop, the same princi- 
vitf f pies apply; the pivot 
section moves at a gal- 
lop, the other section 
increases the gait 
without urging the 
horses too much. 

69 §• In wheeling, 
the guide is always, 
without indication, on 
the pivot flank. On 
re uming the direct 
march, at the comple- 
tion of the wheel, the 
guide is, without in- 
dication, on the side it 
was previous to the 
wheel. 

699. Column half- 
right[ov half- 1 eft) is sim- 
ilarly executed, each 
chief of platoon com- 



268 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



■700. To make a slight change of direction, the captain 
cautions: Incline to the right (or left). 

TOi. To put the column of platoons in march, and to 
change direction at the same time: 

Captain— 1. Forward, 2. Column right (or left): or, 2 Col- 
umn half-right (or half- left). 

Chief of leading platoon— 1. Platoon, right (or left) wheel- 
or, 1. Platoon, right (or left) half- wheel. 

Chiefs of other platoons— 1. Forward. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons)— 3. March. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of center and rear pla- 
toons — 4. Guide [right or left). 

At the command march, the pivot section of the lead- 
ing pl-atoon moves at a walk, the other section at a trot; 
the movement is executed as before. The chief of the 
leading platoon announces the guide on the completion 
of the wheel of his platoon. 

To Oblique in Column. 

702. Being in column of platoons: 
Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons)—!. Right (or 
Left) oblique, 2. March. 

^ At the command march, each section obliques to the 
right as explained for a single section, all the carriages 
marching on parallel lines; the guide of the leading 
right-section carriage is the guide of the column; the 
guides of the other carriages of the right sections con- 
duct them so that the lead drivers keep on a line paral- 
lel to the original direction; the space between the right- 
section carriages, measured perpendicularly to the ob- 
lique direction, is eleven yards. Each carriage of the 
left section marches in the trace of, and nine yards 
behind, the carriage which preceded the carriage on its 
right before the oblique; the guide of each left-section 
carriage regulates himself on the guide of the carriao-e 
on the right, so that both remain on a line parallel lo 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 269 

their former position, and preserves his interval of fif- 
teen yards; the space between the left-section carriages 
and between carriages of the same rank, measured per- 
pendicularly to the oblique direction, is eleven yards. 

The captain, chiefs of platoons, chief of caissons, and 
first sergeant oblique to the right and maintain their rel- 
ative positions, the chiefs of platoons superintending the 
march of their carriages. The guidon retains the post 
he had when the movement began. 

To resume the direct march: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Forward, 
2. March. 

At the command march, each carriage half-wheels to 
the left and moves in the original direction. 

In obliquing, the guide is always, without indication, 
on the side toward which the oblique is made. On re- 
suming the direct march, the guide is, without indica- 
tion, on the side it was previous to the oblique. 

These rules are general. 

703. If the oblique be executed from a halt, the cap- 
tain announces the guide on taking the direct march. 

Being in column of sections, the commands are the 
same as before, and the oblique is executed as explained 
for the right sections in the column of platoons. The 
chiefs of platoons superintend the march of their car- 
riages and maintain their relative positions. 

To resume, or to take, the direct march: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Forward, 
2. March. 

704* In horse batteries, the movement is executed by 
each carriage as explained for a single carriage; the car- 
riages of the left sections do not march in the trace of 
the carriages which preceded the carriages on their 
right before the oblique, and the spaces between the 
carriages, measured perpendicularly to the oblique di- 
rection, are different from those in field batteries. 



270 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 




Z€ /''^•V/ 



PI. 67, Par. 704. 

To Close and Extend Intervals in Column of Platoons, 

705. Marching- at a walk: 

Captain — 1. On right (or left) sections. 

Chiefs of platoons — 1. On right (or left) section. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 271 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. To (so many) 
yards close (or extend) intervals, 3. Trot. 

Chiefs of left sections— 2. Right oblique, 3. Trot. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons and chiefs of 
left sections)— 4. March. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 5. Guide [right 
or left). 

At the command march, the right sections move straight 
to the front at a walk; the left sections oblique toward 
(or from) the right sections at a trot; upon gaining the 
prescribed interval, they move forward and take the walk 
on arriving abreast of the right sections. The officers 
and non-commissioned officers conform to the movement, 
and the chiefs of sections give the commands for their 
sections. 

If marching at a trot, the command trot is omitted, and 
the movement is executed as before; at the command 
march, the right sections take the walk at the command 
of their chiefs. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command 
be gallop, the same principles apply, the right sections 
moving at a trot. 

The command for the guide is given as soon as the in- 
terval is closed or extended. 

To March by the Flank. 

706. Being in column of platoons: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. By the right 
(or left) flank, 2. March, 3. Guide (right or left). 

At the command march, each carriage wheels to the 
right, moves forward, and dresses toward the guide. 

The battery having been marched by the flank from 
column of platoons is now in line with the carriages of 
the right sections in the front rank, and those of the left 
sections in the rear rank. The interval is fifteen yards 
and the distance two yards. The captain, chiefs of pla- 
toons, chief of caissons, and first sergeant wheel to the 



272 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

right and take post as in the regular order in line, the 
chiefs of sections and caisson corporals keep boot to boot 
with the drivers with whom they were posted at the be- 
ginning of the movement. This formation is called a 
flank line. 

To march again in column of platoons, the captain 
and chiefs of platoons give the same commands as above, 
and each chief of section, if not already there, places 
himself abreast the lead driver of his section. 

•707. In horse batteries, the march by the flank is exe- 
cuted on the same principles. The distance is six yards; 
when the pieces lead, the interval between carriages of 
the same section is twenty-four yards, and that between 
carriages of different sections fifteen yards; when the 
caissons lead, the interval between carriages of the same 
section is fifteen yards, and that between carriages of 
different sections twenty-four yards. 

Each detachment wheels at the same time as its piece, 
so as to take post on its right flank, two yards from the 
wheels, the heads of the front-rank horses being in line 
with the axle of the limber. 

In marching again in column of platoons, if the origi- 
nal direction be resumed, each detachment wheels in the 
same direction as its piece and takes its post in rear; but 
if the column be faced in the opposite direction, each 
detachment halts until its piece has passed and then 
takes its post in rear. 

T0§. Being in column of sections, to march by the 
flank, the commands are the same as from column of pla- 
toons. 

The captain, chiefs of platoons, and chief of caissons 
wheel to the right and take positions corresponding to 
their posts in the regular order inline; the chiefs of sec- 
tions and caisson corporals keep boot to boot with the 
drivers with whom they were posted at the beginning of 
the movement. The first sergeant wheels to the right 
and remains at four yards from the flank of the carriage 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 273' 






i 



•r:"™rH^^-»*"i5S^^ 



35 



.>---4^^ ae 



-§^^m — $ ^ |gga 



PI. 68, Par. 707. 



near which he was posted when the movement began; if 
the battery have but two platoons, the first sergeant is 
half-way between the central carriages. 
9236 18 



274 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



To march again in column of sections, the commands 
are the same, omitting that for the guide, and each chief 
of section, if not already there, places himself abreast 
the lead driver of his section. 

Being in Co/umn of Sections, to Form the Caissons on the Flank. 

■709. Being at a halt, or marching at a walk, with 
pieces in front: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons)—!. Caissons 
right (or /eft), 2. March. 

At the command march, the pieces move forward and 
the caissons oblique to the right; the leading piece halts 
after it has advanced eighteen yards, the guidon taking 
post with its guide; the other pieces halt when each has 
closed to two yards from the piece preceding; each cais- 
son moves forward as soon as it has gained the interval 
of fifteen yards, and halts when in line with its piece. 

This formation, in which all the pieces are in one file 
and the caissons in the other, is designated a flank co/umn. 

The captain, chiefs of platoons, chief of caissons, and 
first sergeant take post as in column of platoons; the 
chiefs of sections are abreast the lead drivers of their 
pieces; the caisson corporals are abreast the lead drivers 
of their caissons. 

If marching at a trot, or at a walk and the command be 
trot, the captain commands ^rw/V/e right (or /eft), after the 
command march. The leading piece moves at a walk; 
the other pieces move at a trot, and take the walk upon 
closing to their proper distance; the caissons move at a 
trot, and take the walk when in line with their pieces: 
each chief of platoon repeats the command for the guide 
as soon as his leading caisson is abreast of its piece. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command 
be ga//op, the same principles apply. 

The captain announces the guide when the leading 
caisson has reached its place in the new formation. 

710. If the caissons lead, the pieces may be formed on 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 275 

the flank according to the same principles, the word 
pieces being substituted for the word caissons in the com- 
mands. Each chief of section passes in front of his cais- 
son and joins the lead driver of his piece; each caisson 
corporal places himself abreast his lead driver. 
. 7 1 1 . In horse batteries, when the flank column is formed 
from column of sections at a halt, or marching at a walk, 
with pieces in front, the leading piece halts after it has 
advanced thirteen yards; with caissons in front, the lead- 
ing caisson halts after it has advanced thirty-one yards; 
the interval is nineteen yards, and the distance between 
caissons is eleven yards. 

The flank column executes changes of direction, the 
reverse, abouts, oblique marches, and marches by the 
flank by the same commands and means as in column of 
platoons. Intervals are extended and closed in the flank 
column by the same commands and means as in column 
of platoons, substituting pieces (or caissons) for [right or 
/eft) sections in the command. 

The Caissons being on the F/ank, to Form Column of Sections. 

712. Being at a halt: 

Captain (repeated by chief of leading platoon) — 1. Cais- 
sons rear, 2. March. 

At the command march, the leading piece moves for- 
ward and is followed by its caisson, which takes its place 
in rear by an oblique, beginning the movement when its 
leaders are abreast the wheel horses of the piece; the rear 
piece of the leading platoon moves forward when the 
wheel horses of the leading caisson begin to oblique, and 
is followed by its caisson; the guidon takes his post. The 
other platoons execute the movement in the same man- 
ner, their chiefs commanding: 1. Caissons rear, in time to 
add, 2. March, when the wheel horses of the rear caisson 
of the preceding platoon begin to oblique. 

If marching, the movement is executed at the same or 
an increased gait, on the same principles as in forming 
column of sections from column of platoons. 



276 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

•y 13, To form column of sections by placing the pieces 
in rear of their caissons, pieces is substituted for caissons 
in the above commands. Each chief of section, as his 
piece enters the column, places himself abreast the lead 
driver of his section. 

To Form Line to the Rigfit or Left from Column of Platoons. 

7 14. Captain — Right (or Left) into line, wheel. 

Chiefs of platoons — 1. Platoon, right [or left) wheel. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. March, 
3. Guide right (or left): or, 3. Battery, 4. Halt, 5. Right dress, 
6. Front. 

At the command march, each platoon wheels to the 
right, as explained in changing direction in column of 
platoons; the sections on the marching flank of the two 
rear platoons moderate the gait at the beginning of the 
movement in order that the pivot sections of the platoons 
in front of them may unmask the ground; the guide is an- 
nounced or the battery halted as soon as the rear pivot 
carriages, after completing the wheel, have advanced 
their own length in the new direction. 

To Form Line on Right or Left from Column of Platoons. 

"715. Being at a halt: 

Captain — 1. On right (or left) into line. 

Chief of leading platoon — 1. Platoon, right (or left) wheel. 

Chiefs of other platoons — 1. Forward, guide right. 

The guidon takes post with the right section of leading 
platoon. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. March. 

At the command march, the leading platoon wheels to 
the right; as soon as its rear pivot carriage, after com- 
pleting the wheel, has advanced its own length in the 
new direction, the chief commands: 1. Platoon, 2. Halt, 
3. Right, 4. Dress; each of the other platoons marches 
beyond the one which preceded it, and, at the commands 
of its chief, wheels to the right so as to have its proper 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



277 



— ^j^^M-^ii^^ 







- ^ tess -^ EsS 






PL 69, Par. 714. 



interval; on arriving- at three yards from the line, the 
platoon is halted by its chief and dressed up to the pla- 



^*^^ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

toon which preceded it, by the commands prescribed fori 
the first. ¥ I 

If marching, before giving" the commands, the captain 
orders the guide, if not already there, to the flank toward 
which the movement is to be executed, and the chiefs of 
the center and rear platoons omit the commands for put- 
ting them in march; the movement is then executed as 
before. 

The captain commands front when the movement is 
complete. 

When executed at a trot or gallop, the leading platoon 
is halted as soon as its rear pivot carriage, after com- 
pleting the wheel, has advanced its own length in the 
new direction. 

To Form Front into Line from Column of Platoons. 

716. Being at a halt: 

Captain— 1. Right (or Left) front into line. 

Chief of leading platoon— 1. Forward, guide left (or right). 

Chiefs of other platoons— 1. Right (or Left) oblique. 

The guidon takes post with the left section of leading 
platoon. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons)— 2. March. 

At the command march, the leading platoon advances 
nineteen yards, when its chief commands: 1. Platoon, 

2. Halt, 3. Left, 4. Dress; the other platoons oblique to 
the right, each chief commanding: 1. Forward, 2. March, 

3. Guide left, when his carriages, by half-wheeling to the 
left, will be in rear of their places in line; each platoon, 
on arriving at three yards from the line, is halted by its 
chief and dressed up to the platoon which preceded it, by 
the commands prescribed for the first. 

When marching, if the guide is not already there, the 
captam will announce it on that flank of the column 
which will become the point of rest, before giving the 
above commands; the position of the guidon will then 
indicate to the chiefs of platoons the direction of the for- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 279 

mation. This rule is genera/ fov all formations from column 
of platoons front into line or into battery. 

If marching- at a walk, the chief of the leading platoon 
omits the command forward, march; the movement is then 
executed as before. , 

If marching at a walk and the command be trot, the 
leading- platoon continues to march at a walk; the chiefs 
of the other platoons repeat the command trot; each com- 
mands: 1. Walk, in time to add, 2. March, on arriving 
in line with the leading platoon, and then repeats the 
command for the guide. -, . . 

If marching at a trot, the movement is executed m the 
same manner: the chief of the leading platoon commands: 
Walk at the first command of the captain, and repeats the 
command march. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command 
be gallop, the same principles apply, the leading platoon 
moving at a trot. 

In horse batteries, the leading platoon advances twenty- 
three yards. 

717. When the teams of the carriages have but two 
pairs each, the distance over which the leading platoon 
advances is diminished three yards ; when each team 
consists of a single pair, this distance is diminished six 
yards; should the teams have four pairs each, this dis- 
tance is increased three yards. 

To Form Front into Line, Faced to the Rear, from Column of 
Platoons. 

718. Being at a halt: 

Captain— 1. Right (or Left) front into line, faced to the rear. 

Chief of leading platoon— 1. Forward, guide left (or 
right). 

Chiefs of other platoons— 1. Right (or Left) oblique. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons)— 2. March. 

Captain— 3. Front. 

The movement is executed as in forming front into line, 
with the following modification^: 



280 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



The chief of the leading platoon commands: 1. Counter- 
march, 2. March, as soon as his platoon has advanced 
nineteen yards, the guidon halting at the command 
march; on the completion of the countermarch, the chief 
adds, 3. Platoon, 4. Halt, 5. Right, 6. Dress. 

The chief of the center platoon commands, 1. Counter- 
march, as soon as his lead drivers are in line with the 
guidon, and adds, 2. March, when they have advanced 
three yards beyond him; on the completion of the coun- 
termai^ch, he commands: 3. Platoon, 4. Halt, 5. Right, 
6. Dress; at the command ogress, his platoon aligns itself 
on the platoon which preceded it. 

The movement is executed in the same manner by the 
rear platoon; as soon as it begins to countermarch, the 
guidon takes post with the right guide of the battery. 

If the battery is marching at a walk, and the command 
trot he added, the leading platoon continues to march at 
a walk; after advancing nineteen yards, this platoon 
countermarches at a trot. If marching at a trot, the lead- 
ing platoon advances and countermarches at a trot. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command 
be gallop, the same principles apply, the leading platoon 
advances and countermarches at a gallop, and halts at 
the completion of the countermarch. 

719. In horse batteries, the leading platoon advances 
twenty-three yards. 

720. If the number of pairs be less or greater than 
three, the distances to be advanced are diminished or 
increased as prescribed for front into line. 

To Form Line to the Right or Left from Column of Sections. 

721. Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons)—!. Right 
(or Left) into line. 

Chief of leading section— 1. Section, right wheel. 

Captain (repeated by chief of leading section)— ^ 
2. March. 

Captain — 3. Front 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 281 

Executed as explained for forming" to the right into park, 
the interval being fifteen yards; the chief of the leading- 
section halts his section when the rear carriage has ad- 
vanced its own length in the ttew direction after com- 
pleting the wheel, the guit on ticking post with the guide 
of its leading carriage. If executed from a halt, the chiefs 
of sections in rear of the first command forward at the 
first command, and repeat the command march. 

When executed at a trot or gallop, the leading section 
is halted after advancing its own length in the new di- 
rection. 

To Form Line on Right or Left from Column of Sections. 

722. Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. On 
right (or left) into line. 

Chief of leading section — 1. Section, right wheel. 

Captain (repeated by chief of leading section) — 
2. March. 

Captain— 3. Front. 

Executed as explained for forming on right into park, the 
interval being fifteen yards; the chief of the leading sec- 
tion halts his section, and the guidon takes his post, as 
explained in the preceding case. If executed from a 
halt, the chiefs of sections in rear of the first command 
forward at the first command, and repeat the command 
march. 

When executed at a trot or gallop, the leading section 
is halted after advancing its own length in the new di- 
rection. 

To Form Front into Line from Column of Sections. 

723. Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Right 
(or Left) front into line. 

Chiefs of sections (except leading one) — 1. Right oblique. 
Captain (repeated by chiefs of sections, except leading 
one)— 2. March. 
Executed at a walk, as explained for right front into 



282 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

park, the interval being fifteen yards; the chief of the 
leading section halts his section when it has advanced 
six yards, the guidon taking post with the guide of its 
leading carriage. If executed from a halt, the chief of 
the leading section commandi forward at the first com- 
mand, and repeats the command march. 

If marching at a trot or gallop, or if the command be 
trot, or gallop, the captain commands guide left (or right) 
after the command march, and the same principles apply 
as in forming front into line from column of platoons. 

To Form Front into Line, Faced to the Rear, from Column of 
Sections. 

■724. Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons)—!. Right 
(or Left) front into line, faced to the rear. 

Chiefs of sections (except leading one)— 1. Right (or 
Left) oblique. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of sections, except leading 
one)— 2, March. 

The movement is executed as in forming front into 
line with the following modifications: 

The chief of the leading section commands: 1. Counter- 
march, 2. March, as soon as his section has advanced six 
yards; the guidon, who has placed himself abreast the 
guide of the section, halts at the command march; at the 
completion of the countermarch, the chief adds: '3. Sec- 
tion, 4. Halt. 

The chief of the second section commands: 1. Counter- 
march, as soon as his lead horses are in line with the 
guidon, and adds, 2. March, when they have advanced 
three yards beyond him; on the completion of the coun- 
termarch, he commands: 3. Section, 4. Halt, 5. Right 
6. DRESS, ' ^ 

The movement is executed in the same manner by the 
other sections; as soon as the rear section begins to 
countermarch, the guidon takes post with the right g-uide 
of the battery. ^ 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 283 

If the battery is marching" at a walk, and the command 
trot he added, the leading* section continues to march at 
a walk; after advancing six yards, this section counter- 
marches at a trot, and halts on the completion of the 
countermarch. If marching at a gallop, or a trot and the 
command be gallop, the same principles apply, the lead- • 
ing section advances at its previous gait, countermarches 
at a gallop and halts. 

To Form Column of Platoons to the Right or Left. 

725. Being in line: 

Captain— 1. Platoons, right {or left) wheel. 

Chiefs of platoons — 1. Platoon, right wheel. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. March, 
3. Guide right (or left): or, 3. Battery, 4. Halt. 

At the command march, each platoon wheels to the 
right, the sections on the marching flank taking a free 
trot in order to unmask the ground for pivot sections 
behind them; all the rear sections regulate on the sec- 
tions which are to be immediately in front of them in 
the column; the guide is announced, or the battery halted, 
when the rear pivot carriages, after completing the 
wheel, have advanced their own length in the new di- 
rection. If the battery be halted, the guidon takes post 
with the right guide of the leading platoon. 

To Form Column of Platoons to the Front. 

726. Being in line, at a halt: 
Captain— 1. Right by platoons. 
Chief of right platoon — 1. Forward. 

Captain repeated by chief of right platoon) — 2. March, 
3. Guide right [or left). 

The right platoon moves forward at the command 
march. Each of the other chiefs of platoons commands: 
1. Right oblique, in time to add, 2. MARCH, when the lead 
drivers of the rear carriages of the platoon on his right are 



284 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

in line with him; his platoon obliques to the right until 
he commands: 1. Forward, in time to add: 2. March, 
when his carriages, by half-wheeling to the left, will fol- 
low in the track of the carriages of the preceding platoon; 
he then repeats the command for the. guide. 

If marching at a walk, the chief of the right platoon 
repeats the command for the guide, and his platoon con- 
tinues the march; at the first command, the chiefs of the 
other platoons command platoon ; at the command march, 
they command: Halt; the movement is then executed 
as before. 

If marching at a walk and the command be irot, the 
chief of the right platoon repeats the commands trot, 
march, and the command for the guide; the other platoons 
move at a walk, each chief, at the proper time, com- 
manding: 1. Right oblique, 2. Trot, 3. MARCH. 

If marching at a trot, the chief of the right platoon re- 
peats the command for the guide; the chiefs of the center 
and left platoons command walk at the first command, re- 
peat the command march, and add, 1. Right oblique, 2. Trot, 
3. March. 

If marching at a gallop or at a trot and the command be 
gallop, the same principles apply; the right platoon moves 
at a gallop; the other platoons move at a trot and take 
the gallop when they begin to oblique. 

The right section of each of the last two platoons 
should at first increase the obliquity of its march, in 
order to clear the left section of the platoon on its right; 
it should afterward slightly increase the gait to take its 
place. 

727. To form column of sections to the front, — Executed 
by the commands and means prescribed for unparking, 
except that each chief of section commands: 1. Right 
oblique, in time to add: 2. March, when the leaders of his 
leading carriage are in line with the wheelers of the rear 
carriage of the section on his right. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 285 

To Break into Column of Platoons from One Flank to March 
toward the Other. 

'72§. Bein^ in line at a halt: 

Captain— 1. Platoons from right to left (or left to right). 

Chief of right platoon— 1. Forward. 

Guidon takes post with left guide of right platoon. 

Captain (repeated by chief of right platoon)— 
2. March, 3. Guide left (or right). 

At the command march, the right platoon moves for- 
ward; its chief commands: 1. Platoon, left w^Aee/, in time to 
add: 2. March, as soon as the rear part of the limbers of 
his leading carriages are in line with the heads of the 
lead horses of the platoon on his left; the leading platoon 
having wheeled to the left, the chief repeats the com- 
mand for the guide. 

Each of the other chiefs of platoons commands: 1. For- 
ward, in time to add: 2. March, when the limber wheel 
axles of the rear carriages of the platoon preceding his 
own are in front of him: the movement is then executed 
as prescribed for the first platoon, each chief repeating 
the command for the guide as soon as his platoon has en- 
tered the column. 

■yaO, In horse batteries, if the pieces be in front, the 
chiefs of the center and left platoons command: March 
when the center of the rear carriages of the preceding 
platoon are in front of them; if the caissons be in front, 
they give this command when the rear-rank cannoneers 
are in front of them. 

To Form Double Column. 

730. Being in line, at a halt: 
Captain — 1. Center forward. 
Chief of center platoon— 1. Forward. 
Captain (repeated by chief of center platoon)— 
2. MARCH, 3. Guide right (or left). 
The center platoon moves forward at the command 



^®^ SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

march, the guidon taking post when the guide is an- 
nounced. ^ 

The chief of the right platoon commands: 1. Left oblique 
and the chief of the left platoon: 1. Right oblique, in time 
to add: 2. March, when the leaders of their leading- car- 
riages are m line with the wheel horses of the rea? car- 
riages of the center platoon and their platoons begin to 
oblique. When the section nearest the column in each 
platoon IS about to enter it, the chief of the right platoon 
commands: 3. Left by section, 4.. March, and the chief of 
the left platoon: 3. Right by section, 4. March The 
right platoon then forms in column of sections in rear of 
the right section of the center platoon, and the left pla- 
toon m column of sections in rear of the left section of 
the center platoon. The chiefs of the flank platoons see 
that their sections enter the column at the proper time 
As soon as the column is formed, they repeat the com- 
mand for the guide, and place themselves four yards out- 
side of the column, the senior chief abreast of the leadino- 
driver of his leading section, the junior abreast the lead""- 
mg driver of his rear section; each commands the two 
sections in line with him, which constitute temporarv 
platoons. ^ *^ 

The captain takes post as in column of platoons; the 
first sergeant retains his post as in line; the chief of cais- 
sons follows the movement and places himself four yards 
m rear of the column and opposite its center. 

If marching at a walk, the chief of the center platoon 
repeats the command for the guide, and his platoon con- 
tinues the march; at the first command, the chiefs of the 
other platoons command: ]. Platoon; at the command 
march, they command: 2. Halt; the movement is then 
executed as before. 

If marching at a walk, and the command be fro f, the 
chief of the center platoon repeats the commands, trot, 
march, and the command for the guide; the other platoons 
move at a walk, their chiefs commanding, at the proper 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 287 

time: 1. Left oblique, 2. Trot, 3. March ; and, 1. Right 
oblique, 2. Trot, 3. March. 

In marching" at a trot, the chief of the center platoon 
repeats the command for the ^uide; the chiefs of the flank 
platoons command: Walk at the first command, repeat the 
command /77arcA, andadd: 1. Left oblique, 2. Trot, 3. March; 
and: 1. Right oblique, 2. Trot, 3. March. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command be 
gallop, the same principles apply; the center platoon 
moves at a gallop; the other platoons move at a trot, and 
take the gallop when they begin to oblique. 

731. If the battery have but two platoons: 
Captain — 1. Center forward. 

Chief of right platoon — 1. Left by section. 

Chief of left platoon — 1. Right by section. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. March, 
3. Guide right (or left). 

At the command march, repeated by chiefs of platoon, 
the battery is formed in parallel columns of sections, the 
movement being executed at a halt, and at the different 
gaits, as prescribed for forming column of sections from col- 
umn of platoons. The chiefs of platoons command the tem- 
porary platoons as before; the senior chief repeats the 
command for the guide immediately; the junior, as soon 
as his sections enter the column. 

The abouts, reverse, and countermarch may be executed 
in double column, but line can be formed only when the 
original center of the battery is at the head of the col- 
umn. 

To Form Front into Line from Double Column. 

732. Being at a halt: 

Captain — 1. Right and left front into line. 
Chief of leading platoon — 1. Forward. 
Chief of right platoon — 1. Right front into line. 
Chief of left platoon — 1. Left front into line. 



288 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 






Chiefs of sections in rear of leading platoon— 1. Riqh 
(or Left) oblique. ^ 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons and sections)— 
2. March. ' 

^ At the command march, the leading- platoon advances 
SIX yards and its chief commands: 1. Platoon, 2. Halt and 
dresses it on the left section. ' 

The flank platoons oblique to the right and left, and as 
their sections arrive in rear of their proper places on the 
line they move forward, halt, and dress toward the center 
at the command of the chiefs of sections. 

At the command front, of the captain, given as soon as 
the flank sections have dressed, the guidon takes post 
with the left guide of the battery. 

The captain and chief of caissons superintend the 
alignment from the left flank. 

If marching at a walk, the chief of the leading platoon 
omits the command forward, and dresses his platoon on 
that section with which the guide was posted. 

If marching at a trot, or gallop, or if the command be 
trotoY gallop, the movement is similarly executed; the 
section of the leading platoon with which the guide is 
posted IS the directing section of the battery until all the 
sections arrive in line, when the captain commands: Guide 
right (or left). 

When the battery consists of but two platoons, the 
temporary chief of the leading platoon will give the same 
commands for the leading platoon as before given, as 
well as the commands for his own platoon. 

To and on Right or Left into Line from Double Column. 
"733. Being at a halt: 

Captain— 1. To and on right (or left) into line. 
Chief of leading pla coon— P/af 00/7 right (or left) wheel. 
Chiefs of other platoons — 1. Forward. 
Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons)— 2. March. 
At the command march, the leading platoon wheels to 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 289 

the rig-ht, is halted and dressed toward the pivot when 
its rear pivot carriag'e has advanced its own leng-th in 
the new direction. The other platoons advance, that'on 
the rig-ht executes to the right, and that on the left on 
right into line, when the leading section of each arrives 
opposite its place in line, the chiefs of sections giving 
the commands for their sections to wheel, halt, and dress. 
When the alignment is completed, the captain commands 
Front; at this command, the guidon takes post with the 
right guide of the battery. 

If the column is marching, the chiefs of the rear pla- 
toons omit the commands forward and march ; the line is 
formed as before described. When executed at a trot or 
gallop, the leading platoon is halted as soon as its rear 
pivot carriage, after completing the wheel, has advanced 
its own length in the new direction. 

73 J. When the battery consists of but two platoons, 
the double column is deployed by the same commands. In 
this case, the leading sections are wheeled to the right 
or left as a platoon, by the temporary chief of the leading 
platoon, and established on the line as described above 
for the center platoon; the rear sections form to the right 
and on right into line, as above described. 

To March in Line. 

735. Being at a halt, the captain indicates to the guide 
a fixed point on a line perpendicular to the front of the 
battery: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Forward, 
2. March, 3. Guide [right or left). 

At the command march, the battery moves forward, the 
sections taking the alignment and preserving their inter- 
vals from the side of the guide; the guide of the battery 
marches straight to the front at an even gait, and selects 
points on the ground upon which to direct himself; the 
chiefs of platoons superintend the march of their front- 
9236 19 



290 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

rank carriages; the chief of caissons superintends the 
march of the rear-rank carriages, and moves wherever 
necessary. 

To Halt the Battery and to Align it 

*736. Captain (repeated hy chiefs of platoons) — 1. Bat- 
tery, 2. Halt, 3. Right (or Left), 4. Dress. 

Captain — 5. Front. 

The captain may rectify the alignment, without giving 
the commands for dressing, hy directing such carriages 
as are out of the line to move up or hack. 

Changes of Gait in Line; Passage of Carriages in Line; About, Re- 
verse, and Countermarch in Line ; and to March by the Flank 
from Line. 

7 37. Executed by the same commands and means as 
when in column of platoons. 

To Oblique in Line. 

738. Captain (repeated hy chiefs of platoons) — 1. Right 
(or Left) oblique, 2. MARCH. 

At the command march, each section obliques to the 
right, all the carriages moving on parallel lines; each 
rear-rank carriage marches in the trace of, and nine 
yards behind, the carriage on the right of its front-rank 
carriage; the guides in each rank regulate themselves on 
the guides of the section toward which the oblique is 
made, so as to remain on a line parallel to their former 
front, and preserve their intervals of fifteen yards; the 
guide of the leading carriage of the right section is the 
guide of the battery; the space between the carriages, 
measured perpendicularly to the oblique direction, is 
eleven yards. The chiefs of platoons superintend the 
march of their carriages and maintain their relative po- 
sitions. The guidon retains the post he had when the 
movement began . 

To resume the direct march, the captain (repeated by 
chiefs of platoons) commands: 1. Forward, 2. March. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 291 

If the oblique be executed from a halt, the guide is an- 
nounced on taking- the direct march. 

739. In horse batteries the movement is executed by- 
each carriage as explained for a single carriage; each 
rear-rank carriage does not march in the trace of the 
carriage on the right of its front-rank carriage, and the 
spaces measured perpendicularly to the oblique direction 
are different from those in field batteries. 

To Wheel the Battery. 

740. Being in line: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Battery, right 
(or left) wheel, 2. March, 3. Guide right (or /eft). 

At the command march, the pivot section describes a 
quarter-circle whose radius is fifteen yards, and then 
moves off in the new direction; the other sections move 
at an increased gait, proportioning their swiftness to 
their distances from the pivot and preserving their in- 
tervals from it; they arrive on the line in succession, re- 
maining as short a time as possible in rear' of it without 
urging their horses too much. The guide is announced 
when the left section arrives on the line. 

If marching at a trot, the pivot section moves at a trot 
and the other sections at an increased gait; the move- 
ment is then executed as before. 

If marching at a gallop, the same principles apply, the 
pivot section moving at a gallop. 

741. Upon the completion of the wheel, the battery 
may be halted by the captain's command: 1. Battery, 
2. Halt, 3. Right, 4. Dress, 5. Front. 

At the command ha/t, given when the rear pivot car- 
riage, after completing the wheel, has advanced its own 
length in the new direction, the guidon takes post with 
the right guide of the battery. 

At the command battery, the chief of the right platoon 
commands platoon, and repeats the commands halt, right 
dress; the other chiefs of platoons give the same com- 
mands as the chief of the right platoon in time to be 
applicable to their platoons. 



292 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

When the ground in front of the battery is contracted, 
and also at reviews and inspections, in order to preserve 
the trace wh.en forming" column from line with troops of 
other arms, the battery may be wheeled on a fixed pivot 
by the following- commands and means: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Battery, right 
(or teft), 2. March. 

Executed as described for the wheel, except that the 
radius is three and one-fourth yards, and the chief of the 
right (left) platoon halts his platoon as soon as the pivot 
section is straightened out in the new direction. The 
chiefs of the other platoons halt their platoons three 
yards from the new line and dress them to the right. 

This movement is always executed from a halt, the 
pivot section moving at a walk and the other sections at 
a trot. 

74L3. To make a half- wheel to the right or left, the captain 
commands: 1. Battery right (or left) half- wheel, 2. March, 
3. Guide right (or left); or, 3. Battery, 4. Halt, 5. Right (or 
Left), 6. Dress, 7. Front. 

Executed on the same principles as the wheel. 

To Close and to Extend Intervals in Line. 

743. Marching at a walk: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. On first (or 
such) section, 2. To (so many) yards close (or extend) intervals, 
3. Trot 

Chiefs of sections (except designated one) — 2. Right 
oblique, 3. Trot. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons and chiefs of 
sections, except designated one) — 4. March. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 5. Guide right 
(or left). 

At the command march, the designated section moves 
straight to the front at a walk; each of the other sections 
obliques toward (or from) it at a trot, regulating its march 
by the nearest section on the side of the directing sec- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 293 

« 
tion; upon gaining the prescribed interval, each section, 
at the command of its chief, moves forward and takes the 
walk when on a line with the directing section. The 
officers and non-commissioned officers conform to the 
movement. 

The command for the guide is given as soon as all the 
intervals are closed or extended. 

If marching at a trot, the command trot is omitted and 
the movement is executed as before; the chief of the des- 
ignated section giving the command wa/k, and repeating 
the command march of the captain. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot, and the command 
be gallop, the same principles apply, the designated sec- 
tion moving at a trot. 

To Countermarch with Diminished Intervals. 

'744« Being in line, at a halt: 

Captain — 1. Right sections forward. 

Chiefs of platoons — 1 . Right section forward. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. MARCH, 
3. Countermarch, 4. March, 5. Guide right (or left). 

At the second command, the right section of each pla- 
toon moves forward; at the fourth command, given when 
they are disengaged, all the sections countermarch; at 
the command for the guide, given on the completion of 
the countermarch, the sections in rear take the trot; on 
arriving in line with the other sections, they resume the 
walk. 

If the command halt be given on the completion of the 
countermarch, the leading sections halt; the other sec- 
tions move forward at a walk, and halt on arriving in 
line. 

If marching at a walk, the left section of each platoon 
halts at the second command; the movement is then exe- 
cuted as before. 

If marching at a trot, or at a walk and the commands 
be right sections forward, trot, at the command march, the 



294 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

right section of each platoon moves *at a trot and the 
other sections at a walk; at the commands counter- 
march, march, given us before, all the sections counter- 
march at a trot, the leading sections take the walk upon 
the completion of the countermarch, and the other sec- 
tions on arriving in line. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the commands 
be right sections forward, gallop, the same principles apply; 
the left section of each platoon moves at a trot, counter- 
marches at a gallop, and then resumes the trot; the right 
section of each platoon moves forward and counter- 
marches at a gallop, and resumes the trot on arriving in 
line. 

The reverse with diminished intervals is executed by 
the same commands and means as the countermarch, the 
word reverse replacing the word countermarch in the com- 
mands. 

Passage of Obstacles, 

•745. If, during the march, any obstacle presents itself 
in front of a platoon, its chief, without waiting for orders, 
gives, according to the nature of the obstacle, the neces- 
sary commands, either to break the platoon into column 
of sections, to close the interval, or to halt it and form it 
in column behind the adjoining platoon. 

As soon as the obstacle is passed the platoon resumes 
its place in line by increasing the gait, its chief habitu- 
ally causing it to execute the movement the reverse of 
that by which it left its place in line. 

FORMATIONS IN BATTERY. 

T^G. Previous to all formations in battery, either from 
line or column, if the pieces are not already there, the 
captain, by passage of carriages, places them in front or 
rear, according as he designs forming in battery to the 
front or rear. 

747* In formations in battery from a halt or marching, 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 295 

the limbers and caissons take their places in battery 
habitually at a trot. 

In limbering up, the limbers and caissons move at a 
walk unless otherwise specified in the commands. 

7'4§. Whenever he desires them to be so placed, the 
captain will caution limbers and caissons faced to the rear 
before giving the commands to form in battery. 

To Form in Battery to the Front from Line, by Moving the Pieces 
Forward, 

749. This method of coming into action is to be pre- 
ferred when the pieces are moving toward the line upon 
which they are to go into position, and particularly when 
it is difficult to bring them about by hand. In horse bat- 
teries, it has the advantage that the detachments halt on 
the ground their horses are to occupy, and the cannoneers 
can dismount while the pieces are moving forward and 
reversing. 

750. Being at a halt: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. /n battery. 

The caissons stand fast and are dressed to the left by 
their chief; the chiefs of platoons and sections and the 
pieces march to the front in line at a walk, dressing to 
the left. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. March. 

At this command, given when the pieces have advanced 
twenty-one yards, they reverse; the chiefs of platoons 
and sections halt, and the latter align themselves to the 
left. 

Each chief of section commands: 1. Action, in time to 
add, 2. Rear, when the muzzle of his piece is in line with 
his horse's head ; the piece halts at the command rear, 
and is prepared for firing, as explained in the School of 
the Cannoneer; as soon as it is unlimbered, the chief sees 
that it is in line with the pieces on its left; the limber 
moves to its place at a trot. 

If the cannoneers be dismounted, those with the piece, 



296 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

at the command march, face to the rear while marching; 
as soon as the muzzle passes them, No. 2, followed by the 
gunner and the even numbers, changes direction to the 
right, and No. 1, followed by the odd numbers, changes 
direction to the left: the columns pass each other to the 
right; after marching four yards, the column led by No. 
2 again changes direction to the right, and that led by 
No. 1 again changes direction to the left; both columns 
then advance until Nos. 1 and 2 are opposite the chief of 
section, when all the cannoneers halt and face inward. 

If the cannoneers be mounted, those with each caisson 
dismount as soon as it halts, run forward to the chief of 
section, crossing over in front of the caisson so as to 
change sides, and form in two ranks facing each other, 
the numbers being in the same order as before; the can- 
neneers with each piece and its off horses dismount the 
instant it halts. 

If marching, the dress during the movement and the 
alignment in battery are toward that section with which 
the guide was posted at the beginning of the movement. 

If marching at a walk, the movement is executed as 
from a halt, the caissons halting at the command in bat- 
tery. 

In marching at a trot, or at a walk and the commands 
be in battery, trot, the pieces move forward and reverse at 
a trot; the limbers take their places at a trot; the caissons 
halt as before. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the commands 
be in battery, gallop, the same principles apply; the pieces 
move at a gallop; the command nf)arch is given when the 
pieces have advanced some five or six yards farther than 
usual, so as to give the caissons space in which to halt; 
the limbers take their places in battery at a trot. 

751. Upon the completion of all formations in battery, 
the captain, if necessary, rectifies the alignment of the 
pieces and limbers from the flank of the directing sec- 
tipn. This rule is general. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 297 

752. Pieces in battery are aligned on their wheels. 
This rule is general. 

753. In horse batteries, the movement is similarly exe- 
cuted; the command march is given when the pieces have 
advanced twelve yards; at the command in battery, each 
gunner cautions his detachment to stand fast, or orders it 
to halt, and then commands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Dismount; 
as soon as the men dismount they run to their posts. 

754. In horse batteries, when the gunner, in the forma- 
tions in battery, commands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Dismount, 
all the detachment except the horse-holders dismount, 
link their horses to their left, and run to their posts. 

755. In horse batteries, if the bridles are not provided 
with link-straps, the cannoneers, after dismounting, pass 
the reins over the horses' heads and pass them to Nos. 6 
and 7. If projectiles are to be fired, No. 8 rides out of 
ranks to the chief of platoon, receives his horse, and after- 
ward the horses of the chiefs of sections; he holds these 
horses by the reins passed over their heads, and conducts 
them to the place prescribed for them in the order in 
battery. These rules are general. 

756. In forming in battery to the front by moving the 
pieces forward, if the teams of the carriages have but two 
pairs each, the distance over which the pieces advance 
is diminished three yards; if each team consists of a sin- 
gle pair, this distance is diminished six yards; should the 
teams have four pairs each, this distance is increased 
three yards. This rule is general. 

To Form in Battery to the Front from Line by Moving the Caissons 
to the Rear. 

757. If the pieces be easily handled, this method of 
coming into action is usually employed when the guns 
are already on the line of battle. 

Being at a halt, pieces in front: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Action^ 
2, FROJiT. 



298 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY, 

At the command front, each piece is prepared for firing, 
as explained in the School of the Cannoneer; each caisson 
moves at a trot, executes a left about, and takes its place 
in battery by another left about at a signal from the chief 
of caissons, who also halts the caissons by signal and 
aligns them to the left. 

The guide of the caisson on the left, when the move- 
ment begins, is the guide of the caissons throughout the 
movement. 

Each chief of section, as soon as his piece is unlim- 
bered, sees that it is in line with the pieces on its left. 

The chief of caissons precedes the caissons and halts 
on the center of the line to be occupied by the lead driv- 
ers when they begin the second about; after making 
the signal halt, he goes to the left to rectify the align- 
ment. 

If marching, the movement is executed as from a halt, 
the pieces halting at the command front; but the dress 
during the movement, and the alignment in battery, are 
toward that section with which the guide was posted at 
the beginning of the movement. 

If the cannoneers be mounted and the movement is exe- 
cuted from a halt, or while marching at a walk they dis- 
mount at the command front : if executed at a trot, or a 
gallop, the cannoneers with the pieces dismount the instant 
the pieces halt; those with the caisson dismount and run 
to their posts the instant the caissons halt; each caisson 
halts for this purpose at the command front, and then com- 
pletes the movement at a trot. 

758, In horse batteries, at the command front, the de- 
tachments move to the posts of their horses in battery at 
the commands of their gunners, who halts them as soon 
as they reach these positions, and command: 1. Cannon- 
eers, 2. Dismount; if the horse-holders can readily lead 
the detachment horses, the captain may command: 1 . Can- 
noneers, 2. Dismount, immediately before commanding 
agt/on front; in this case the horse-holders conduct the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 299 

led horses to their posts in battery as soon as the can- 
noneers dismount. 

759. In horse batteries, unless otherwise directed, 
whenever the detachments leave their posts at the pieces 
to take any special position, the gunners give the neces- 
sary commands for the movement. Th/s rule is general. 

To Form in Battery to the Rear from Line. 

TOO Being at a halt: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Action^ 
2. Rear. 

At the command rear, the caissons advance at a trot 
twenty-one yards, and take their place in battery by are- 
verse; the guide of the caisson on the left, when the 
movement begins, is the guide of the caissons throughout 
the movement; the chief of caissons makes signal for the 
reverse and halt of the caissons; each chief of section, as 
soon as his piece is unlimbered, sees that it is in line with 
the pieces on its right. 

The chief of caissons precedes the caissons and halts 
on the center of the line to be occupied by the lead 
drivers when they begin the reverse; after making the 
signal halt, he goes to the right to rectify the alignment. 

If marching, the movement is executed as from a halt, 
the pieces halting at the command rear, but the dress 
during the movement, and the alignment in battery, are 
toward that section with which the guide was posted at 
the beginning of the movement. 

If the cannoneers be mounted and the movement is 
executed from a halt or while marching at a walk, they 
dismount at the command rear. If executed at a trot, or 
gallop, the cannoneers with the pieces dismount the in- 
stant the pieces halt; those with the caissons dismount 
and run to their posts the instant the caissons halt; each 
caisson halts for this purpose at the command rear, and 
then completes the movement at a trot. 

7^1* In horse batterieSf at the command rear, the d^- 



300 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

tachments move off, take the gait of the caissons, incline 
to the right, pass their pieces, and take the posts of 
their horses in battery; the gunners then dismount the 
cannoneers, who run to their posts. 

762. In forming in battery to the rear from line, if 
the teams of the carriages have but two pairs each, the 
distance over which the caissons advance is diminished 
three yards; if each team consists of a single pair, this 
distance is diminished six yards; should the teams have 
four pairs each, this distance is increased three yards. 
This rule is general. 

To Form Line to the Front from Battery. 

VOd* Pieces in front: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Limber, 
2. Front. 

At the command front^ the pieces are limbered as ex- 
plained in the School of the Cannoneer, and the caissons 
close to their proper distance. 

If the pieces can not be brought about by hand: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Limber, 
2. Rear, 3. Pieces reverse, caissons forward, 4. March, 
5. Guide [right ov left); or, 5. Battery, 6. Halt. 

At the command rear, the pieces are limbered as ex- 
plained in the School of the Cannoneer; at the fourth 
command, the pieces reverse and the caissons move for- 
ward in time to close to their proper distance. 

764. In limbering, the limber passes near, but not 
striking the trail, and is halted when the limber axle- 
tree is opposite the end of the trail; the pole is then 
straightened by swinging the team to the right (or left), 
without advancing or backing, so that the pintle-hook 
may be opposite and near the lunette. As the limber 
approaches the trail the drivers glance over their shoul- 
ders to see if the limber is properly placed, and the lead 
and swing drivers slacken the traces without letting them 
hang, in order to leave control of the limber to the wheel 
driver. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 301 

765. In horse batteries, upon limbering to the front, 
the horse-holders lead the horses to their posts in rear 
of the pieces, and the cannoneers mount without com- 
mand as soon as they have limbered. Upon limbering 
to the rear, the horse-holders, unless directed by the 
captain to stand fast, lead the horses at a trot to their 
posts in rear of the pieces, and the cannoneers mount as 
before. 

•766. Caissons in front: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Limber, 
2. Front 3. Caissons pass pieces, 4. March, 5. Guide (right 
or /e^f); or, 5. Battery, 6. Halt. Executed as in forming 
lin to the front with pieces in front, the caissons pass- 
ing while the pieces are being limbered. 

If the caissons pass at a trot, the captain may also com- 
mand (repeated by chiefs of platoons): 5. Walk, 6. March, 
7. Guide (right or /eft), the sixth command being given as 
soon as the passage is completed. 

767. If the pieces can not be brought about by hand: 
Captain (repeatei by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Limber, 

2. Rear, 3. Caissons forward, pieces reverse, 4. March, 
5. Guide (right or left)\ or, 5. Battery, 6. Halt. 

The caissons move straight forward and pass while the 
pieces are reversing. 

To Form Line to the Rear from Battery. 

768. Pieces in front: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Limber, 
2. Rear, 3. Pieces forward, caissons reverse, 4. March, 
5. Guide [right or /eft); or, 5. Battery, 6. Halt. 

The pieces move straight forward and pass while the 
caissons are reversing. 

The captain may also command (repeated by chiefs of 
platoons) — 1. Limber, 2. Rear, 3. Caissons rear, 4. March. 

At the command march, given while the pieces are lim- 
bering, each caisson inclines to the right, moves beyond 
its piece, and takes its place in rear by a left about. "^The 



302 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

guide of the caisson on the left, when the movement be- 
gins, is the guide of the caisson throughout the move- 
ment. 

T69. Caissons in front: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Limber 
2. Rear. 3. Caissons reverse, pieces forward, 4. March, 
5. Guide [right or left); or 5. Battery, 6. Halt. 

The caissons reverse and the pieces move forward in 
time to close to their proper distance. 

To Form in Battery to the Right or Left from Column of Pla- 
toons, Gaining Ground to the Right or Left. 

•yyo. Pieces in front: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Fire to the 
right (or left). 

Captain — 2. Right (or Left) into line, wheel. 

Chiefs of platoons — 2. Platoon, right (or left) wheel. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 3. March, 
4. In Battery, 5. March. 

The second and third commands are executed as pre- 
viously explained; the fourth and fifth commands are 
executed as explained from line, the command in battery 
being given as soon as the pivot caissons, after complet- 
ing the wheel, have moved forward their own length in 
the new direction. 

yyi. Caissons in front. — To form in battery to the right 
or left from column of platoons, gaining ground to the 
left or right: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Fire to the 
right (or left). 

Captain — 2. Left (or Right) into line, wheel. 

Chiefs of platoons — 2. Platoon left (or right) wheel. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 3. March, 
4. Action, 5. REAR. 

The second and third commands are executed as pre- 
viously explained; the fourth and fifth as explained from 
line; the command rear is given as soon as the pivot 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 303 

pieces, after completing the wheel, have moved forward 
their own length in the new direction. 

To Form in Battery on Right or Left from Column of Platoons, 

772. In successive formations in battery, no piece will 
be fired while the limber of the piece that immediately 
succeeds it in the formation is in front of the line of muz- 
zles. 

773. The captain commands: 1. On right [ov left) into 
battery, 2. MARCH. Executed as prescribed for forming 
on right into line, with the following modifications: — 

The leading platoon having wheeled to the right, its 
chief commands: 1. In battery, 2. March, the first com- 
mand being given when his pivot caisson, after complet- 
ing the wheel, has advanced its own length in the new 
direction. The othei platoons having wheeled to the 
right, the chiefs give their commands so as to form them 
in battery on a line with the leading platoon. Each chief 
of section, as soon as his piece is unlimbered, sees that it 
is in line with the pieces on its right. 

To Form in Battery to the Front from Column of Platoons. 

774. The captain commands: 1. Right [ov Left) front into 
battery, 2. March. Executed as prescribed for forming 
right front into ///7e, with the following modifications: — 

As soon as the leading platoon has advanced nineteen 
yards, its chief commands: 1. In battery, adding, 
2. March, when his pieces have advanced twenty-one 
yards; the other chiefs of platoons command: 1. In bat- 
tery, when their caissons are in line with those of the 
platoon on their left, and add: 2. March, when the lead 
drivers of the pieces are in line with the chiefs of sections 
of this platoon, or with the muzzles of its pieces if they 
be unlimbered. Each chief of section, as soon as his 
piece is unlimbered, sees that it is in line with the pieces 
on its left. The chief of caissons goes to the left and 
rectifies the alignment of the caissons. 



304 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

If marching at a walk and the command be trot, or at a 
trot and the command be gallop, the leading platoon ad- 
vances and reverses at a trot or gallop; the movement is 
then executed as before. 

If marching at a trot or gallop, and the movement is 
executed at the same gait, the leading platoon advances 
and reverses at a trot or gallop. 

7*75. In horse batteries, in forming battery to the front 
from column of platoons, the same principles apply, the 
commands being given so as to halt the caissons after 
they have advanced twenty-three yards. 

776. In forming in battery to the front from column 
of platoons, if the number of pairs be less or greater than 
three, the distances to be advanced are diminished o\ in-, 
creased as prescribed for front into line. 

To Form in Battery to the Rear from Column of Platoons. 

777. The captain commands: 1. Right {or Left) front into 
battery, faced to the rear, 2. March. Executed as pre- 
scribed for forming right front into battery, with the follow- 
ing modifications: — 

Each chief of platoon commands: 1. Action, 2. REAR. 
The chief of the leading platoon gives the command rear 
as soon as his platoon has advanced nineteen yards; the 
chiefs of the other platoons give their commands so as to 
form their platoons in battery on a line with the leading 
platoon. Each chief of section, as soon as his piece is 
unlimbered, sees that it is in line with the pieces on its 
right. The chief of caissons goes to the right and recti- 
fies the alignment of the caissons. 

778. In horse batteries, the same principles apply, the 
commands being given so as to halt the pieces after they 
have advanced twenty-three yards. ^ 

779. In forming in battery to the rear from column of 
platoons, if the number of pairs be less or greater than 
three, the distances to be advanced are diminished or in- 
creased as prescribed for front into line. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 305 

To Form in Battery from Double Column. 

'y§0. To the front — The captain commands: 1. Right and 
left front into battery, 2. March. Executed as prescribed 
for forming line to the front from double column, with the 
following" modifications: — 

The chief of the leading platoon commands: 1. In bat- 
tery, 2. March, the command in battery heing given when 
the platoon has advanced six yards. 

As each of the other sections arrives in line, its chief 
of section forms it in battery by the same commands, 
given so as to place his piece on a line with the pieces of 
the leading platoon. 

781. To the rear. — ^^The captain commands: 1. Right and 
left front into battery, faced to the rear, 2. March. Exe- 
cuted as prescribed for forming in line to the front from 
double column. 

The chief of the leading platoon commands: 1. Action, 
2. Rear, the command rear being given when the platoon 
has advanced six yards. 

As each of the other sections arrives in line, its chief 
forms it in battery by the same commands, given so as to 
place his piece on a line with the pieces of the leading 
platoon. 

782. To the right or left. — The captain commands: 1. To 
and on right (or left) into battery, 2. March. Executed as 
prescribed for forming to and on the right into line from 
double column, with the following modifications: — 

The chief of the leading platoon forms it in battery as 
prescribed for formation of column of platoons on the 
right into battery. 

As each of the other sections arrives in line, its chief 
forms it in battery by the same commands, given so as to 
place his piece on a line with the pieces of the leading 
I platoon. 

9236 20 



306 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

To Form in Battery from Column of Sections. 
"783. The column of sections is formed front or faced to 
the rear, to the right or left, and on the right or left, into 
battery by the commands: 1. Right [ov Left) front into bat- 
tery; or \ . Riglit (or Left) front into battery, faced to the rear, 
2. March; and, 1. Right (or Left) into battery^ 2. March; 
or, 1. On right [ov left) into battery, 2. MARCH. These com- 
mands are executed on the same principles as the forma- 
tion of line from column of sections. 

To March by the Flank from Battery and to Form again in 
Battery, 

■yS^. The pieces are limbered to the rear: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Pieces left 
(or right) ^ caissons right (or left) wheel, 2. March, 3. Guide 
left (or right). 

At the command march, the pieces wheel to the left; 
the caissons wheel to the right; the interval is twelve 
yards and the distance two yards. 

The battery having arrived at the desired position, it j 
is established in battery by the following commands: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. By the right 
(or left) flank, 2. March, 3. Action, 4. Rear. 

The command rear is given as soon as the pieces com- 
plete the wheel and are in the new direction. 

'5'§5. In horse batteries, before limbering to the rear, the 
captain cautions the horse-holders to stand fast; as each 
piece wheels to the left, its detachment wheels to the 
right and places itself two yards from the right of the 
piece, the heads of the horses of the front rank being in 
line with the limber axle; the interval is twelve yards 
and the distance five yards. On forming again in battery 
the detachments wheel immediately, follow the move- 
ments of their caissons, and move to the posts of their 
horses in battery. 

•786. Instead of limbering to the rear, the captain may 
limber to the right (or left); while the pieces are lim- 



di 



?' 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 307 

bering, the caissons, without command, advance, inclin- 
ing slightly to the left (or right), and wheel to the right 
(or left), so as to have an interval of fifteen yards, and 
halt. 

The pieces being limbered, the captain (repeated by 
chiefs of platoons), commands: 1. Forward, 2. March, 
3. Guide left (or right), and when the battery arrives at the 
desired position he forms in battery as before. 

7 §7. In horse batteries, the horse holders wheel the 
lead horses to the right (or left) at the same time as the 
caissons wheel, and take their place on the right of the 
piece. 

To Form in Battery to the Right or Left from Flank Column. 

I '}'8§. At a halt: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Action, 
2. Right (or Left). 

At the command right, each piece is prepared for firing, 

as explained in the School of the Cannoneer; each caisson, 

! if on the left of its piece, wheels to the left, gains the 

necessary distance to the rear, and takes its place by a 

left about on signal from the chief of caissons; if on the 

right, it wheels to the left, passes between its piece and 

the one which was next in front, and then takes its place 

as before; the caisson which was in front when the move- 

, ment began is the guide throughout the movement. 

I In both cases each chief of section, as soon as his piece 

i is unlimbered, sees that it is in line with the pieces which 

j were in its front when the movement began; the chief of 

I caissons rectifies the alignment of the caissons from the 

flank of the directing caisson. 

If marching, the movement is executed as before, the 
pieces halting at the command right 

If the cannoneers be mounted and the movement is 
executed from a halt or while marching at a walk, y|py 
dismount at the command right; if executed at a troFor 
gallop, the cannoneers with the pieces dismount the in- 



308 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

stant the pieces halt; those with the caissons dismount 
and run to their posts the instant the caissons halt; each 
caisson halts for this purpose at the command right and 
then completes the movement at a trot. 

The movement is not executed from a trot or gallop 
when the caissons are on that flank of the battery toward 
which the guns come into action. 

7 §9. In horse batteries, if the detachments be on the 
flank toward which the action is ordered, the captain 
commands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Dismount, immediately 
after action right (or /eft); the horse holders follow the 
limbers and take their places in battery. If the detach- 
ments be on the other flank, or in rear, they wheel to the 
left (or right), and then take their places in battery, 
according as the command is action right (or /eft). 

To Form in Battery to the Rear from Battery. 

•yOO. Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Fire 
to the rear, 2. Limbers and caissons pass pieces, 3. MARCH. 

At the command march, the pieces are brought about 
as in limbering to the front, the limbers and caissons 
oblique to the right, and then move forward parallel to 
their pieces until they have gained enough distance to 
take their places in battery by a left about. During the 
movement, the dress is on the limber and caissons which 
were on the left at the beginning of the movement. The 
officers, non-commissioned officers, and guidon conform , 
to the movement; the chief of caissons superintends the 
march of the caissons to the rear, and brings them about 
and halts them by signal when they have gained their 
distance. 

If the command be trot, or ga//op, the movement is ex- 1 
ecuted as before. 

79 !• In horse batteries, the horse holders follow their 
limj^ers, and move far enough beyond them to take their 
posts by a left about. 

79!2« If the pieces can not be brought about by hand: 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 309 

Captain (repeated by the chiefs of platoons) — 1. Fire to 
the rear, 2. Limber, 3. REAR, 4. Caissons pass pieces, 
5. March, 6. Pieces reverse, 7. March, 8. Action, 9. Rear. 

993* In horse batteries, the captain cautions the horse- 
holders to stand fast before giving his first command; 
the horse-holders follow their caissons and take their 
places by a left about. 

To Form in Battery from Line with Diminished Intervals. 

794. At a halt: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. In battery. 

The caissons halt, the pieces move forward at a walk. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. Right pieces 
forward, given when the pieces have advanced twenty- 
three yards beyond the caissons; the left pieces halt. 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 3. March, 
given when the right pieces have cleared the left. 

All the pieces execute the reverse. The rear pieces 
are unlimbered immediately after completing the reverse, 
as already explained; the leading pieces continue to 
march after reversing until they are on line with those 
in rear, when they are unlimbered. 

When marching, the movement is executed according 
to the principles prescribed for countermarching with 
closed intervals. 

This movement can not be executed with intervals less 
than seven yards. 

When in battery with diminished intervals, the pieces 
are limbered to the front only. 

Movements for Firing in Echelon. 

795. The battery being in line, at a halt, with pieces 
in front, to advance in echelon of sections: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Sections 
from the right (or ieft), 2. Front into echelon. 
Chief of right section — 2. Forward. 
Captain (repeated by chief of right section) — 3. March. 



310 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

At the command march, the right section moves for- 
ward, followed by its caisson. The next section moves 
forward by command of its chief as soon as its leaders are 
abreast the leaders of the rear carriage on the right; the 
other sections commence the movement in succession ac- 
cording to the same rule. 

The officers preserve the same relative positions as in 
line. 

When the battery is marching in line, the echelon is 
formed according to the same principles and by the same 
commands, the gaits being regulated as in forming col- 
umn of sections to the front. 

When the caissons are in front, the battery advances 
in echelon of sections from the right or left according to 
the same principles and by the same commands. 

When the battery is in echelon, marching, or at a halt, 
it may be formed into battery to the front and rear by 
the commands and means prescribed for forming in bat- 
tery from line; it may also be formed in battery to the 
right (or left); at the commands, 1. Action, 2. Right [ov Left); 
the trails are turned to the left, the limbers and caissons 
wheel to the left and take their places in battery by an 
about. 

When firing in echelon, the direction of the fire may 
be changed to the right or left. For this purpose the 
captain orders the firing to cease, and commands: 1. Action, 
2. Right (or Left), At this command, the trails of the 
pieces are turned to the left and the limbers and caissons 
take their places in rear of pieces by a wheel and an about. 
The direction of the fire may also be .hanged to the rear 
by the commands and means prescribed (Par. 790). 

Being in Echelon, to Form Line, 

796* The battery being in echelon, at a halt, to form 
it into line: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Form line 
on right (or left) section. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 311 

Chiefs of sections (except right one) — 1. Forward. 

Captain (repeated by all the above chiefs, except of the 
right section)— 2. March. 

Each section moves forward and establishes itself on 
the line, dressing on the piece indicated. 

If marching at a walk, the right section is halted by its 
chief at the command march of the captain, and the move- 
ment is executed as before. 

If marching at a walk and the command be trot, the 
right section, cautioned by its chief, continues to march 
at a walk; the chiefs of platoons and of the rear sections 
repeat the commands: 1. Trot, 2. March, of the captain, 
and the latter bring their sections to a walk on arriving 
in line on the right section. 

If marching at a trot, the movement is executed in the 
same manner, the chief of the right section commands: 
Walk in time to repeat the command march oi the captain. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command 
be gallop, the same principles apply, the right section 
moving at a trot. 

During the execution of the movement, the dress will 
be to the right; when the battery is in line, the captain 
will announce the guide. 

797. If the battery is in echelon and firing, to form it 
in the order in battery, continuing the fire, the captain 
causes the pieces behind the line on which the formation 
is to be made to cease their fire: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Form battery 
on right (or leh) piece. 

Chiefs of sections (except first) — 1. Limber, 2. Front, 
3. Forward. 

Captain (repeated by the above chiefs) — 4. March. 

At the first command, the chief of the right platoon 
will move his left piece on line with the right, by hand if 
possible, the right continuing its fire. 

The chiefs of the other sections cause them to be lim- 
bered to the front, and at the command march, move them 



312 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

forward and establish tliem in battery on a line with the 
right platoon. 

FIRINGS. 

798. Executed as prescribed in the School of the Can- 
noneer. During the firings, the captain of a battery act- 
inersingly goes, within the limits in which he can retain 
coM^^ol of his battery, wherever he can best observe the 
effects of his fire and watch the progress of the action. 

799. Whenever the command is given to load with 
projectiles, the chiefs of platoons and sections dismount 
and turn their horses over to the horse-holders of their 
platoon. At the command cease firing, the chiefs of pla- 
toons and sections, if dismounted, mount. 

To Fire Retiring with Prolonge Fixed. 

§00. Being in battery, the captain causes the firing to 
cease and commands (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 
1. Fix, 2. Prolonge, 3. Retire, 4. March, 5. Guide right (or 
left). 

At the second command, prolonges are fixed as pre- 
scribed in the School of the Cannoneer, and the caissons 
reverse so that their horses may face in the same direc- 
tion as those of the limbers. 

At the command retire, the cannoneers at each piece 
face about. 

At the command march, the limber moves off, dragging 
the piece; the cannoneers, except Nos. 1 and 3, march on 
the left of the piece; the gunner attends to the hand- 
spike, folding it over the flask, in passing ditches, etc., 
and moves the trail to the right or left, whenever the 
direction is changed, so that the wheels will not cut the 
prolonge; No. 5 keeps it clear of the limber-wheels. 

In executing an about, the limber first backs a little 
and then takes a smaller radius than usual. 

To resume the firing, the battery is halted, and the 
commands for the firings are then given. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 313 

§01. The prolonge is detached and coiled, and the 
pieces limbered by the following commands (repeated by 
the chiefs of platoons): 1. Coil, 2. Prolonge. 3. Limber, 
4. Front (or Rear, Right, or Left), which are exe- 
cuted as prescribed in the School of the Cannoneer. If 
the pieces be limbered, the caissons take or hold their 
proper places. 

§02. In horse batteries, the horse-holders lead the 
horses to their posts in front of the limber team; the 
cannoneers keep their posts at the guns unless the cap- 
tain commands: 1. Cannoneers, 2. Mount. 

Changes of Front. 

§03. Perpendicular or nearly perpendicular changes 
of front to fire to the right or left are made either to the 
front or rear, and on either the right or left piece of the 
battery. The change of front forward is preferable to 
the change of front to the rear, which is made only when 
the nature of the ground exacts it. 

Battery Without Caissons, 

804* To change front to fire to the right (or left), 
throwing forward the left (or right) wing, the captain's 
commands are: 1. Fire to the right [or left)^ 2. Change front 
forward on right (or left) piece, 3. March. 

§05. To change front to fire to the left (or right), 
throwing forward the left (or right) wing, the captain's 
commands are: 1. Fire to the left {or right), 2. Change front 
forward on right [or left) piece, 3. March. 

$06* To change front to fire to the left (or right), 
throwing the left (or right) wing to the rear, the cap- 
tain's commands are: 1. Fire to the left (or right), 2. Change 
front to rear on right (or left) piece, 3. March. 

807. To change front to fire to the right (or left), 
throwing the left (or right) wing to the rear, the cap- 
tain's commands are: 1. Fire to the right [or left), 2, Change 
front to rear on right (or left) piece, 3. March. 



314 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

In all these cases, at the second command, the outer 
piece of the platoon on which the change is made is 
pointed in the new direction by throwing* the trail around, 
and the other piece, if the ground permits, is moved by 
hand to its place in the new line, or, if necessary, is 
limbered and established on the new line by the aid of 
the horses — the limbers of these two pieces taking their 
new places in battery by the shortest line immediately, 
or as soon as the ground is uncovered. The chiefs of 
the other platoons limber to the front if the change of 
front is to be in advance of the old line, and they limber 
to the rear if the change of front is to be in rear of the 
old line. 

At the third command, the chiefs of the two march- 
ing platoons advance their platoons, if necessary, wheel 
them to the right or left when opposite their places in 
the new line, halt them, and form them in battery by the 
commands: 1. Action, 2. Front; or, 1. Action, 2. Rear, 
according as the change of front is made in advance or 
in rear of the old line. 

§08. If the ground is too heavy to bring the pieces 
about by hand, the chiefs of the marching platoons may 
establish them by the commands: 1. In battery, 2. March. 

If necessary, the captain indicates the direction of the 
new line to the chief of the platoon on which the change 
is made. 

§09* Slight changes of front may be executed on any 
interior piece. The captain indicates the direction of 
the new line and then commands: 1. Change front on sec- 
ond (or such) piece, 2. March. 

At the second command, the pieces are moved by hand 
to the front or rear, and the limbers take their new 
places by the simplest movements and shortest route. 

810* If the battery is firing, the captain discontinues 
the firing before giving the command for changing 
front; in this case, the firing is recommenced when the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 315 

pieces are established on the new line and the new ob- 
jective is indicated. 

Battery with a Caisson for Each Piece. 

§11. The commands are the same, and the pieces and 
limbers are established as prescribed for battery without 
caissons. 

812. To change front to fire to the right (or /eft), throwing 
forward the ie ft (or right) wing. — At the second command of 
the captain, the caissons are marched by the left (right) 
flank, and, as soon as the flank march by caisson is com- 
pleted, the column of caissons changes direction to the 
right (left), and moves parallel to the new line of pieces, 
by the commands of the chief of caissons; each caisson 
corporal then wheels his caisson to the right (left) when 
it is opposite its new place, and halts it in battery at the 
proper distance behind its limber, the caissons executing 
to the right (left) into line in order to be in rear of their 
proper pieces. 

§13. To change front to fire to the /eft (or right), throwing 
forward the /eft (or right) wing. — At the second command of 
the captain, the caissons are marched by the right (left) 
flank, and when the leading caisson has advanced about 
forty yards, the column of caissons changes direction to 
the left (right) and marches parallel to the new line of 
pieces, by the commands of the chief of caissons; each 
caisson corporal then wheels his caisson to the left (right) 
when it is opposite its new place, and halts it in battery 
at the proper distance behind its limber, the caissons ex- 
ecuting on the left (right) into line in order to be in rear 
of their proper pieces. 

814. To change front to fire to the /eft (or right), throwing 
the /eft (or right) wing to the rear. — At the second command 
of the captain, the caissons execute a right (/eft) about, ad- 
vance about forty yards in line, are marched by the left 
(right) flank, and when the leading caisson has advanced 
about forty yards, the column of caissons changes direc- 



316 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

tion to the left (right) and marches parallel to the new 
line of pieces, all by the commands of the chief of cais- 
sons; each caisson corporal then wheels his caisson to the 
left (right) when it is opposite its new place, and halts it 
in battery at the proper distance behind its limber, the 
caissons executing to the left (right) into line in order to 
be in rear of their proper pieces. 

§15. To change front to fire to the right (or /eft), throwing 
the left (or right) wing to the rear. — At the second com- 
mand of the captain, the caissons execute a left [right) 
about, advance about forty yards in line, are marched by 
the right (left) flank, and, as soon as the flank march is 
completed, the column of caissons changes direction to 
the right (left) and marches parallel to the new line of 
pieces, all by the commands of the chief of caissons; each 
caisson corporal then wheels his caisson to the right (left) 
when it is opposite its new place, and halts it in battery 
at the proper distance behind its limber, the caissons ex- 
ecuting on the right (left) into line, in order to be in rear 
of their proper pieces. 

Slight Changes of Front on any Interior Piece, 
816. Each caisson corporal conducts his caisson to its 
new place in battery by the simplest movements and 
shortest route. 

Battery with One Caisson for Each Platoon. 

§1*7. The caissons are established in their new places 
as above described for changes of front of a battery with 
a caisson attached to each piece. In the absence of the 
chief of caissons, the first sergeant takes temporary com- 
mand of the caissons and gives the necessary orders for 
their movements. 

818. For purposes of instruction, changes of front are 
at first made at a walk; after they are understood they 
are habitually executed at a trot, and, at the discretion 
of the captain, the commands of the chief of caissons or 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 317 

first sergeant for the caissons may be dispensed with, 
and the caisson corporals may be intrusted with conduct- 
ing the caissons to their new places in battery. 

Il9« In horse batteries, the detachment horses are con- 
ducted by the horse-holders to their new places in bat- 
tery. The horse-holders of the pieces that are moved 
into place by hand follow their limbers; the horse hold- 
ers of the other detachments follow their pieces. 

Dri// without Caissons. 
S20. If the caissons are detached, the intervals and 
distances, except in column of sections, are the same as 
when the caissons are present. In column of sections the 
distance is two yards. 

821. In the formations, the captain, chiefs of pla- 
toons, and first sergeant take the positions heretofore 
prescribed for them, with the following exceptions, viz: 
The chiefs of platoons, in the march by the flank from 
column of platoons, are on line with and near the leaders 
of their leading sections; they are on the left of their 
platoons when the column is marched by the right flank, 
and on the right when it is marched by the left flank. 
The first sergeant of a four-gun battery, in the march by 
the flank from column of platoons, is in line with the 
limber wTieels, and half-way between the pieces nearest 
him when the movement began; in a six-gun battery he 
wheels with the piece nearest him and places himself in 
line with its limber wheels, and half-way between this 
piece and the one next it when the movement is com- 
pleted. 

822. The battery in column of platoons executes all 
the exercises prescribed for the column of platoons as laid 
down in the School of the Battery, except that in the 
formations in battery to the front by moving the pieces 
forward, the command march is given immediately after 
in battery ; and in forming column of sections, the move- 
ment is simultaneous, all the right (or left) pieces desig- 



318 SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 

nated in the command to lead off in the movement ad- 
vance, and the other pieces stand fast, halt, or diminish 
the gait one degree, and begin the oblique when their 
leaders are abreast the wheelers of the piece of their pla- 
toon that precedes them. 

In forming front into line from column of sections, 
the leading section advances eighteen yards before halt- 
ing; in a horse battery, twenty-two yards. 

In forming echelon, each piece preserves the interval 
of fifteen yards, and its leaders are on line with a point 
two yards in rear of the muzzle of the piece in front of it, 
and next on its right or left. 

§23. When the battery is to be marched a consider- 
able distance in column of platoons, the distance between 
the platoons may be reduced to two yards; wheeling dis- 
tance is resumed when necessary for the execution of 
any movement. 

To close the column of platoons, the captain com- 
mands: 1. Close in mass, 2. Gu/de right {or /eft), 3. March. 
If marching, the command for the guide is omitted. If 
at a halt, the leading platOon stands fast; the rear pla- 
toons close up at a walk. If marching at a walk, the 
leading platoon halts, the rear platoons halt upon clos- 
ing. If marching at a trot, or at a walk, and the com- 
mand be trot, the leading platoon moves at a walk, the 
rear platoons close at a trot. If marching at a gallop, or 
at a trot and the command be gallop, the same principle 
applies, the leading platoon moving at a trot. In all 
cases the chiefs of platoons give the necessary commands 
to their platoons. 

To take wheeling distance, the captain commands: 
1. Take wheeling distance, 2. Guide right (or left), 3. MARCH. 
If marching, the command for the guide is omitted. If 
at a halt the leading platoon moves forward at a walk, 
the rear platoons move forward at a walk in time to fol- 
low the preceding platoon at wheeling distance or nine- 
teen yards. If marching, the rear platoons halt or 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 319 

diminish the gait one degree, and resume the gait of the 
preceding platoon in time to follow it at wheeling dis- 
tance. The chiefs of platoons give the necessary com- 
mands to their platoons. 

Drills with One Caisson to Each Platoon. 

824. The battery should also be drilled with one caisson 
to each platoon. In this case a caisson is attached to the 
right piece of each platoon as it stands in park ; in col- 
umn of sections the distance between a carriage and the 
one that immediately precedes or follows it is two yards ; 
in column of platoons, the distances, and intervals are 
kept as if a caisson was attached to each piece. 

825. All of the movements in the School of the Battery 
may be executed by the commands, and in accordance 
with the principles therein prescribed, with the follow- 
ing exception, viz: In forming column of platoons from col- 
umn of sections, if the leading piece has no caisson, it ad- 
vances eighteen yards before halting: in a horse battery, 
twenty-two yards. 



320 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

§36. In this school a field officer is the instructor; in 
the text he is designated as major. The instructor is 
accompanied by a trumpeter, and goes wherever his pres- 
ence is required. 

827. If necessary, the instructor may preface the com- 
mands laid down in the text by the command attention. 

§28. During" the exercises, captains repeat such of 
the instructor's commands as are to be immediately exe- 
cuted by their batteries, such as forward, platoons right 
wheel, march, halt, etc. 

Captains do not repeat commands of the major that 
are not essential to the execution of a movement by their 
batteries, such as on first battery deploy column, etc. 

In successive movements, each captain gives the com- 
mands necessary to insure the execution of the movement 
by his own battery at the proper time. 

829. When field and horse batteries exercise together, 
all will take and keep the interval and distances of the 
horse batteries, the distances being kept in each platoon 
between the two ranks of carriages ; and then to pass 
from the order in line to the order in battery, the pieces in 
all the batteries will only have to advance, as prescribed 
for the horse batteries, twelve yards from their caissons. 

830. In field practice and actual service, the extent 
of ground occupied by a battalion will frequently present 
obstacles which will prevent exact conformity to the 
means prescribed for the execution of the various move- 
ments. In such cases, the methods prescribed in the 
Drill Regulations should be regarded as types to be fol- 
lowed as closely as possible, each captain conducting his 
battery by the simplest means and the shortest practica- 
ble route to the nearest available place for it in the new 
formation. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 321 

Formation of the Battalion. 

§31. A battalion of light artillery consists of two, 
three, or four batteries. ' 

In this school, the battalion is supposed to consist of 
four batteries. 

^ 832* When the battalion is formed for ceremonies or 
instruction, batteries take their places in an order de- 
pending on the rank of their captains ; the first battery 
on the right, the second on the left, the third at the rig-ht 
center (or center, if there be an odd number of batteries ) 
^ Batteries whose captains are absent take their places 
in line according to the relative rank of the officers pres- 
ent m command of them. A battery whose captain is 
absent for a few days only, retains its place, according- 
to the rank of the captain, unless otherwise ordered bv 
the commanding officer. ^ 

After the line is formed, no cognizance is taken of the 
relative order of the batteries. On marches, and in the 
tield, batteries take any place assigned them by the com- 
manding officer. '^ 

833. The normal interval between batteries in line is 
thirty yards ; in horse batteries it is thirty-eight yards 

834. In whatever direction the battalion faces, the 
batteries are designated numerically from the rig-ht to 
the left in line, and from the head to the rear when in 
column— /7rsf battery, second battery, and so on. 

Posts of Major, Adjutant, Sergeant Major, and Trumpeter. 
+v.^?^:.T^® major, or senior officer present, commands 
center ^^^' ^"^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^^ in front of the 

The adjutant is in line with the chiefs of platoons, and 
wT^'^.f^l"'.'!^'.'^^^^ ^^^ right flank of the battalion. 
When the battalion faces to the rear, the adjutant exe- 
cutes an about, and takes his place in line with the chiefs 
of platoons, but does not change to the other flank 
9236 21 



322 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

The sergeant major is in line with the chiefs of pla- 
toons, seven yards from the left flank. When the bat- 
talion faces to the rear, the sergeant major executes an 
about and takes his place in line with the chiefs of pla- 
toons, but does not change to the other flank. 

In line, at ceremonies, other staff officers are on the 
right of the adjutant, in order of rank from right to left ; 
in column, they are in rear of the major. On all other 
occasions they accompany the major. 

S36. If there be no adjutant and sergeant major with 
the battalion, the commanding officer details an officer 
and non-commissioned officer to act as such. 

To Form the Battalion. 

837'. The batteries being formed at their own parks, 
adjutant's call is sounded, at which the adjutant and ser- 
geant major, the latter on the left, proceed to the bat- 
talion parade ground and post themselves facing each 
other, a few yards outside the points where the right 
and left of the right-center battery are to rest in line. 
The batteries approach the line so as to arrive from the 
rear, and parallel to the line established by the adjutant 
and sergeant major ; the right-center battery (or center 
battery, if the number of batteries be uneven) is first es- 
tablished on the line. 

The captain of the right-center battery halts it at three 
yards from the line, places himself on the left and dresses 
it to the left, as prescribed in the School of the Battery, 
so that the heads of the lead horses of the leading car- 
riages shall be on the line established by the adjutant 
and sergeant major. 

The other batteries successively approach the line on 
the right and left of the right-center battery, and are 
halted three yards behind the line, and dressed on the 
right-center battery. The carriages are aligned by align- 
ing the wheel drivers. The captains of these batteries su- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 323 

: perintend the alig-nment of the front-rank, and the chiefs 
Of caissons that of the rear-rank carriages, from the flanks 
of their batteries farthest from the point of rest Each 
captain commands front, as soon as his battery is aligned 
and he and his chief of caissons then take their places in 
line. ^ 

When the battery that arrives first on the line has 
been established, the adjutant and sergeant major exe- 
cute a right and left about, respectively, and move toward 
the flanks, and take their posts in line as soon as all the 
batteries are established. 

The line being formed, the major takes post facing- it 
at a convenient distance in front of the center of the 
battalion, generally equal to about half its front; the 
adjutant then moves at a trot or gallop by the shortest 
i^fi^^^x.^ P^^.?^ midway between the major and the center 
of the battalion, half- wheels to the right, halts, faces the 
major, salutes him with the right hand, and reports: 
Sir, the battalion is formed. 

The major returns the salute with the right hand, and 
directs the adjutant: Take your post, sir. 

The adjutant executes a left about, and moves at a trot 
or gallop by the shortest line to his post on the right of 
the battalion. ^ 

The battalion may be formed in line on the right or 
lelt battery on the same principles. The battalion mav 
also be assembled in column of batteries, platoons or 
sections. In both cases, the batteries are arrano-ed in 
the same relative order as when the formation is on the 
right center battery. When assembled in column, the 
adjutant reports to the major as soon as the last battery 
has taken its place. ^ 

,,^^^'^^^^^^o^'^^^^ons preparatory for ceremonies, 
the battery officers have the saber drawn; the adjutant 
and sergeant major draw saber before executing the righ t 
and left about to leave the posts where they had marked 



324 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

the position for the right-center battery; and the adju- 
tant, when he halts half-way between the line and the . 
major, executesa/effa6oi/^ commands: 1, Present, 2. Saber, j 
executes a left about, and salutes the major. 

839, At instruction, the officers' sabers may be either 
drawn or in the scabbard, at the discretion of the major. 
When the major desires the officers to draw saber, he 
notifies the captains, and himself draws saber. 
To Rest the Battalion. 

§40. Executed as prescribed in Par. 665. 

To resume the attention: 1. Batteries, 2. Attention. 

8J1. Whenever the command batteries is given, the 
captains command battery. This rule is general. 
To Dismiss the Battalion. 

842. The major commands: Dismiss your batteries. 
Each captain marches his battery to its own park and 

dismisses it. 

To Align the Battalion. 

843. The alignments are made according to the prin- 
ciples prescribed in the School of the Battery. Succes- 
sive or simultaneous alignments are made on a battery 
moved forward, and marking the new line. The other 
batteries, halted three yards behind it, are moved up 
and established on the new line. The captain, when his 
battery is aligned, commands front; he and the chief of 
caissons then resume their places in line. 

For a successive alignment, the major causes one of the 
flank batteries to be advanced, and when it has been cor- 
rectly aligned by its captain, he commands: 1. By battery, 
2. Right (or Left), 3. Dress. At the third command the 
captain of the second battery commands: 1. Forward, 
2. March, 3. Guide right; and when his battery is three 
yards from the new line, he commands: 1. Battery, 
2. Halt. The battery halts, the captain places himself on 
the left, commands: 1. Right, 2. Dress, and when it is 
aligned, Front. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 325 

Each of the other captains executes the same move- 
ment in succession, but does not command march until 
the captain who has preceded him has commanded halt. 

For a simultaneous alignment, the major causes one of 
the flank batteries to be advanced, and when correctly 
aligned by its captain, he commands: 1. Right (or Left)^ 
2. Dress. The captains of the other batteries march 
their batteries simultaneously to the new line, halt and 
dress them as prescribed for a successive alignment. 

The alignments on the center are executed simulta- 
neously, according to the same principles; the major, 
having caused one of the center batteries to be advanced, 
commands: 1. On the center, 2. Dress. 

§44. Whenever the batteries of a battalion in line are 
dressed, the carriages are aligned by aligning the wheel 
drivers. The captain and chief of caissons of the battery 
first established, or nearest the point of rest, superintend 
the alignment from the flank of their battery next the 
point of rest. The captains and chief of caissons of the 
other batteries superintend the alignment from the flank 
of their battery farthest from the point of rest. Each cap- 
tain commands front 2^^ soon as his battery is aligned; he 
and his chief of caissons then resume their places in line. 
These rules are general. 

If any battery is not correctly aligned, the major will 
caution its captain to rectify the alignment or to dress up or 
back. The captain and his chief of caissons will resume 
their places on the flank of their battery and correct the 
alignment. When the battery is correctly aligned, the 
major will caution steady; the captain and chief of cais- 
sons will then resume, their places in line. 

To March in Line. 

845. The major commands: 1. The second (or Such) 
the battery of direction, 2. Forward, 3. March. 

At the first command, the points of direction are, if 
necessary, indicated to the captain of the battery of di- 



326 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. I 

rection. All the captains repeat the second and third | 
commands. At the command march, the batteries move 
forward, regulating* their alignment and intervals on the 
battery of direction. If the battery of direction be the 
right-center or center battery, its captain commands 
guide left; if any other interior battery, its captain an- 
nounces the guide on the flank nearest the center of the 
battalion; if a flank battery, its captain announces the 
guide on the outer flank. The captains of the other bat- 
teries announce the guide on that flank nearest the bat- 
tery of direction. 

To Close and Extend Intervals between Batteries in Line. 

S46. Marching at a walk, the major commands: 1. On 
(such) battery, 2. To (so many) yards close (or extend) intervals. 
3. Trot, 4. March, 5. The second [or Such) the battery of di- 
rection. The designated battery moves straight to the 
front at a walk; the others oblique at a trot toward or 
from the designated battery, move forward when they 
have attained the prescribed interval, and resume the 
walk when they are abreast of the designated battery. 

If marching at a trot, the movement is executed as be- i 
fore. The designated battery moves at a walk. If | 
marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command be 
gallop, the same principles apply, the designated battery 
moving at a trot. The battery of direction is announced 
after all the intervals are closed or extended. 

To Close and Extend Intervals Between the Sections of a Battal- 
ion in Line, 
847. The major commands: 1, On first (or ?iuch) section, 
first (or such) battery, 2. To {so msbny) yards close (or extend) 
intervals, 3. Trot, 4. March, 5. The second [ov Such) the bat- 
tery of direction. At the second command, the captains of 
the batteries on the right of the designated battery 
command left oblique, and those of the batteries on the 
left command right oblique; at the command march, the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 327 

movement is executed in the designated battery as pre- 
scribed in the School of the Battery; each of the other 
captains commands: 1. On first (or sixth) section, 2. To (so 
many) yards close (or extend) intervals, in time to command 
march when his battery has its interval from the one 
next it on the flank toward the designated battery. 

Habitually the interval between batteries is double 
the interval between the sections of a battery. 

848. Or the major may command: 1. In each battery 
on (such) section 2. To (so many) yards close (or extend) in- 
tervals, 3. Trot, 4. March, 5. The second (or Such) the bat- 
tery of direction. 

Intervals are closed or extended simultaneously in 
each battery, as prescribed in the School of the Battery. 

Before extending intervals simultaneously in each bat- 
tery, the major will first extend intervals between bat- 
teries, so that, the movement of the extension of the sec- 
tions completed, the interval between batteries will be 
at least double the interval between the sections of a 
battery. 

To Halt the Line and to Align it. 

849. The major commands: 1. Batteries, 2. HALT. 
To give a general alignment, the major establishes 

the battery of direction, or aiy other battery, in the de- 
sired direction, and aligns the battalion as prescribed. 

Changes of Gait. 

850. Executed in all formations by the same com- 
mands and means as in the School of the Battery. 

Passage of Carriages. 

851. The passage of carriages in line, and in column, 
is executed by the same commands and means as in the 
School of the Battery. 

852. In the passage in line from a halt, the battery of 
direction is announced. 



328 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

Reverse, Countermarch, and About in Una, 
§53« The major commands: 1. Reverse (Countermarch, 
or Right (or Left) about), 2. March, 3. (Such) the battery of 
direction; or, 3. Batteries, 4. Halt. 

If the march be continued on the completion of the 
movement, the captains announce the guide as when 
marching in line. 

To Oblique. 

854. Executed in line, in column, in line of platoon 
columns, and inline of double columns, by the same com- 
mands and means as in the School of the Battery. 

In the oblique in line, the battalion preserves its in- 
tervals and continues parallel to its original front. *If 
the oblique be executed from a halt, on taking the direct 
march the major commands: The second (or Such) the bat- 
tery of direction, and the captains announce the guide as 
when marching in line. 

To March by the F/anlc. 

§55. Being in line, the major commands: 1. By the 
right (or left) flank, 2. March, 3. Guide (right or left). 

To march again in line, the major commands: 1. By the j 
right (or left) flank, 2. March, 3. The second (or Such) the 
battery of direction. 

At the third command, the captains announce the 
guide as when marching in line. 

To Form Column of Platoons to the Right or Left. 

S56« Being in line, the major commands: 1. Platoons, 
2. Right (or Left) wheel, 3. March, 4. Guide (right or left); 
or, 3. Batteries, 4. Halt. 

In column of platoons, the major is on the side of the 
guide, thirty yards from the column and abreast of the 
center; the adjutant and sergeant major, each in his own 
wing, are abreast of the leaders of the leading and rear 
carriages of the column, on the side of the guide, seven 
yards from the column; each captain is on the side of the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 329 

guide, fifteen yards from the flank of his battery, abreast 
of the chief of the leading- platoon. 

§57. The distance between batteries in column of pla- 
toons is seventeen yards. In horse batteries the distance 
is twenty yards. 

To March in Column of Platoons. 

§58. The major commands: 1. Forwhrd, 2. March, 
3. Guide [right or left). 

The guide of the leading battery is the guide of the 
column, and moves accurately to the front, under the su- 
pervision of the adjutant or sergeant major, whichever is 
at the head of the column ; the guides of the other bat- 
teries preserve with exactness the trace and distance. 

To Halt the Column of Platoons. 

859. The major commands : 1. Batteries, 2. Halt. 
To Close and Extend Intervals in Column of Platoons. 

860. Executed by the same commands and means as in 
the School of the Battery. 

Reverse, Countermarch, and About in Column of Platoons. 

861. The major commands: 1. Reverse (Countermarch, 
or Right (or Left) about), 2. March, 3. Guide (right or left); 
or, 3. Batteries, 4. Halt. 

To Change Direction in Column of Platoons. 

862* Being in march, the major commands : 1. Column 
right (or left), 2. March. 

At the first command, the guidon of the first battery 
places himself on the left and abreast of the lead horses 
of the left section of the leading platoon, and two yards 
from them. At the command march, the leadlhg battery 
changes direction; the guidon halts, faces to the right, 
and remains in this position until his battery has passed, 
when he is relieved by the guidon of the battery next in 
rear and returns to his post. The other batteries march 



330 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

f 

squarely up to the guidon, when each battery changes I 
direction by the same commands and means as the first, i 
§63. To make a slight change of direction, the major f 
cautions : Incline to ihe right (or left). Executed in each 
battery as prescrib d in the School of the Battery, the 
batteries in rear executing the movement on the same 
ground as the first. 

864. To put the column in march, and to change direc- 
tion at the same time, the major commands : 1. Forward, 
2. Column right {ov left), 3. March, 4. Guide (right or left). 

To March by the Flank from Column of Platoons. 

865. The major commands : 1. By the right {ov left) flank, 
2. March, 3. The second (or Such) the battery of direction. 

The captains announce the guide as when marching in 
line. 

To march again in column of platoons, the major com- 
mands : 1. By the right (or left) flank, 2. MARCH, 3. Guide 
(right ov left). 

Route Marches. 

866. The major commands : 1. Route order, 2. March. 

The major marches at the head of the column, the ad- 
jutant is one yard on his left ; the trumpeter is in rear of 
the commanding officer ; the sergeant major in rear of 
the adjutant. 

If there be other staff officers, they ride in rear of the 
major and adjutant ; the trumpeter and sergeant major 
in their rear. 

To resume the attention, the major commands : 1. Bat- 
teries, 2. Attention. 

To Form the Column of Platoons to the Right or Left into Line. 

86*7. 'Phe major commands: 1. Right (ov Left) into line, 
wheel, 2. March, 3. The second (ov Such) the battery of direc- 
tion; or, 3. Batteries, 4. Halt. 

At the command march, each battery wheels into line 
to the right. At the third command, the captains an- 
nounce the guide as when marching in line. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 331 

86§, If the battalion be halted, the command ha/ f is 
given when the rear pivot carriages, after completing 
the wheel, have advanced their own length in the new 
direction ; each captain dresses his battery to the right. 

Genera/ Ru/es for Successive Formations. 

869. By successive formations are m^ant all of the for- 
mations in which the several subdivisions arrive succes- 
sively on the line, such as, on right br /eft into /ine, front into 
/ine, the dep/oyment of co/umns, formations into /ine by two 
movements, etc. * 

In successive formations, alignments are made on a 
battery, or a portion of a battery, moved forward and 
marking the new line. The other batteries, or their 
platoons or sections, if in column, are halted three yards 
behind the line, and are then moved up and established 
on it. The batteries are dressed toward the point of 
rest. 

In all successive formations, except formations into 
line by two movements, the adjutant or sergeant major, 
whichever is at the head of the column, or nearest the 
point of rest, marks the point of rest and indicates the 
direction the line will extend for the battery which is 
first to arrive, and retires to the place assigned him in 
line as soon as this battery is established. 

In forming on right (or left) into line from column of 
platoons, the point of rest is marked fifty yards to the 
right (or left) of the head of the column. 

In forming on right (or left) into line from column of 
batteries, the point of rest is marked sixty- two yards to 
the right (or left) of the head of the column. 

In forming front into line from column of platoons, the 
point of rest is marked nineteen yards in front of the 
head of the column. 

In forming front into line from column of batteries, it 
is marked battery distance in front of the head of the 
column. 



332 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

In deploying, the point of rest is marked three yards 
in front of the head of the column when the deployment 
is on the first battery, and thirty yards in front of the 
column when the deployment is on a rear battery. 

To Form the Column of Platoons on the Right or Left into Line, 

870, Being at a halt, the major commands \ 1, On right 
(or left) into line; 2, March. 

At the first command, the captains of batteries in rear 
of the first command: 1. Forward, and repeat the com- 
mand maf'ch of the major, and then command guide right 

At the command march, the first battery executes on 
right into line. The other batteries march beyond the 
first, each captain commanding: 1. On right into line, 
2. March, when the head of his battery has to move 
three and a quarter yards to be opposite the right of its 
place into line. 

If marching, the major orders the guide, if not already 
there, to the flank toward which the movement is to be 
executed, and gives the commands as before. The move- 
ment is executed as previously explained, except that 
the captains of batteries in rear of the first omit the 
commands for putting their batteries in march. 

To Form Column of Platoons Front into Line. 

§71. Being at a halt, the major commands: 1. Right 
(or Left) front into line, 2. March. 

At the first command, the captain of the second battery 
commands: 1. Forward, 2. Column right; the other cap- 
tains command: 1. Forward, 2. Column half-right; all re- 
peat the command march of the major, and when their 
leading platoons have changed direction, announce guide 
left. 

At the command march, the leading battery executes 
right front into line; the chief of its leading platoon halts 
it three yards from and dresses it up to the point of rest. 
The captain of the second battery conducts it opposite the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 333 

left of its place in the line, changes direction to the left, 
and when 'at nineteen yards from the line commands : 

1. Right front into line, 2. March. Each of the other cap- 
tains conducts his battery to a point battery distajice and 
nineteen yards in rear of the left of its place in line, 
changes direction half-left, and, when at nineteen yards 
from the line, conforms to what is explained for the cap- 
tain of the second battery. 

If marching at a walk, the captains of batteries in rear 
of the first omit the command forward, adding: Guide left, 
if the guide be not already there. 

If marching at a trot, or gallop, or if the command of 
the major be trot, or gallop, each battery moves toward its 
position and executes front into line at a trot or gallop. 

At whatever gait this movement is executed, the leading 
battery is halted at the point of rest. 

872. The major may execute front into line, on a direc- 
tion oblique to that of the column, by first causing the 
leading battery to execute column !,alf-right (or half- left). 
The line is established at right angles to the new direc- 
tion of the leading battery ; the other batteries are so 
directed, if possible, that the head of each may arrive 
opposite its position at a point battery distance and nine- 
teen yards in rear of the line. 

873. To form front into line, faced to the rear, the major 
commands : 1. Right (or Left) front into line, faced to the rear, 

2. March. Executed as explained for r/^/7f/A'o/7f//7fo///?e, 
except that each battery, on approaching its point of rest, 
executes right front into line, faced to the rear. 

To Form Front into Line on the Head of an Interior Battery. 

874. Being at a halt, the major commands : 1 . On third 
(or such) battery, 2. Right [or Left) front into line, 3. March. 

At the second command, the captain of the fourth bat- 
tery commands : 1. Forward, 2. Column right; the captains 
of the first and second batteries. Left into line, wheel; and 
all repeat the command march of the major, and the cap- 



334 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

tain of the fourth battery commands guide left when his 
leading" platoon has changed direction. 

At the command march, the third and fourth batteries 
execute right front into line, as previously explained ; the 
captain of the second battery marches it in line, with the 
guide to the left, and when the front of his battery has to 
move three and one-quarter yards to be opposite its place 
in line, he commands: 1. Platoons left wheel, 2. March; 
the movement being completed, he immediately gives the 
commands for forming right front into line, faced to the rear, 
the first battery marches in line with the guide to the left, 
and when the front of the battery has to move three and 
one-quarter yards to be opposite its place in line, it wheels 
by platoons to the left, advances in column with the guide 
left, and when nineteen yards from the line executes right 
front into line, faced to the rear. 

875. Front into line, faced to the rear, on the head of an 
interior battery, is executed on the same principles; the 
battery designated, and those in rear, execute front into 
line, faced to the rear; the batteries in front, at the proper 
time, execute front into line. 

Formation of Column of Platoons into Line by Two Movements. 

§"76. A part of the column having changed direction to 
the right, to form line to the left, the major commands: 
1. Left into line, wheel, 2. Rear batteries left front into line, 
3. March. 

The batteries which have changed direction wheel into 
line to the left ; the captains halt their batteries when 
the rear pivot carriages, after completing the wheel, have 
advanced their own length in the new direction, and dress 
them to the left. The rear batteries execute left front into 
line, the leading platoons advancing to the line of the bat- 
teries that wheeled by platoon into line. 

877. To form line to the right, the major commands: 
1. Right into line, wheel, 2. Rear batteries left front into line, 
faced to the rear, 3. March. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 335 

The batteries that have changed direction wheel into 
line to the right ; the captains halt their batteries when 
the rear pivot carriages, after completing the wheel, have 
advanced their own length in the new direction, and then 
dress them to the right. The rear batteries execute left 
front into line, faced to the rear. 

878. If the column has changed direction to the left, 
to form line to the right, the major commands: 1. Right 
into line, wheel, 2. Rear batteries right front into line, 3. March. 

879. To form line to the left he commands: Left into 
line, wheel, 2. Rear batteries right front into line, faced to the 
rear, 3. March. 

880. In forming line by two movements, the command 
march is given when the rear platoon of a battery is about 
to complete the wheel in order to enter the new direc- 
tion. 

To Form Column of Batteries to the Right or Left. 

881. Being in line, the major commands: 1. Batteries 
right (or left) wheel, 2. March, 3. Guide (right or left); or, 
3. Batteries, 4. Halt. 

At the command march, each battery wheels to the 
right; the leading guide marches directly to his front, 
under the direction of the adjutant or sergeant major; 
the succeeding guides gradually gain, and carefully pre- 
serve, the trace and distance. 

The distance between batteries in column at full dis- 
tance is equal to the battery front. 

If the battalion be halted, the command halt is given 
when the rear carriages of the pivot sections, after com- 
pleting the wheel, have advanced their own length in 
the new direction; each captain then dresses his battery 
to the right. 

882. Whenever a battery is dressed in column, the 
captain, after commanding front, places himself in front of 
the center. This rule is general. 

883. The major is abreast of and thirty yards from 
the center of the column, on the side of the guide, or on 



336 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

the side opposite to which the batteries are dressed ; the 
adjutant and sergeant major, each in his own wing, are 
abreast of the lead horses of the leading and rear bat- 
teries, on the same side as the major, seven yards from 
the flank. 

884. In column, when the guide is changed, the ad- 
jutant and sergeant major, unless otherwise directed, 
pass by the most convenient line to the other flank. This 
rule is general. 

885. In forming from line into column, the batteries 
preserve their line designations until the movement is 
completed, when they take their designations in column; 
in like manner, on forming line from column, the bat- 
teries preserve their column designations until the move- 
ment is completed, when they take their designations in 
line. These rules are general. 

To Change Direction in Column of Batteries at Full Distance. 

886. Executed on the same principles as in column of 
platoons, each captain at the proper tim,e commanding: 
1. Battery right (or left) wheel, 2. MARCH. 

To March in Column; to Halt the Column; to Execute the About, 
Reverse, and Countermarch; to March by the Flank, and to 
March again in Column. 

887. Executed in column at full distance, as explained 
in column of platoons. 

Column of Batteries at Full Distance, to the Right or Left into 

Line. 

888. Being at a halt, the guides covering each other 
at the proper distances, the major commands: 1 Right (or 
Left) into line, wheel, 2. March. 3. The second (or Such) the 
battery of direction; 3. or, Batteries, 4. Halt. 

At the command march, the adjutant and sergeant ma- 
jor take their places in line; the batteries wheel to the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 337 

right; at the third command, the captains announce the 
guide as when marching in line. 

If the battalion be halted, the command ha/f is given 
when the rear pivot carriages, after completing the 
wheel, have advanced their own length in the new direc- 
tion ; each captain dresses his battery to the right. 

If marching, the guide, if not already there, is first 
ordered to the flank toward which the movement is to be 
executed; the movement is then executed as before. 

To Form Column of Batteries at Full Distance on Right or Left 
into Line. 

889- Being at a halt, the major commands : 1. On right 
(or left) into line, 2. March. 

At the first command, the captain of the first battery 
commands Battery, right wheel; the other captains command 
Forward. All the captains repeat the command march 
of the major; the captains of the batteries in rear of the 
first announce: Guide right. At the command march, the 
first battery wheels to the right, and, when the rear car- 
riage of the pivot section, after completing the wheel, 
has moved forward its own length in the new direction, 
the captain halts the battery and dresses it to the right; 
the other batteries move forward, each captain giving the 
command : 1. Battery, right wheel, in time to add, 2. March, 
when the heads of his horses have passed fifteen yards 
beyond the left flank of the battery which preceded it in 
the movement; each battery is halted at three yards 
from the line and dressed to the right. 

If marching, the major orders the guide, if not already 
there, to the flank toward which the movement is to be 
executed; the movement is then executed as before, ex- 
cept that the captains of batteries following the first 
omit the commands for putting their batteries in march 
and the commands for the guide. 

At whatever gait this movement is executed, the lead- 
ing battery is halted at the point of rest. 
9236 22 



338 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

Column of Batteries at Full Distance Front into Line, 

§90. Being at a halt, the major commands : 1. Right (or 
Left) front into line, 2. March. 

At the first command, the captain of the first battery 
commands Forward. The other captains command: Bat- 
tery, right half- wheel. All repeat the command march of 
the major; the captain of the first battery announces 
guide left. At the command march, th3 first battery ad- 
vances, and, when three yards from the line, is halted 
a id dressed to the left. The other batteries half- wheel 
to the right, each captain commanding ^rw/o^e left when the 
battery has completed its half- wheel ; when the left guide 
of each battery, marching in the new direction, arrives 
nearly opposite its place in line, the captain commands : 

1. Battery left half- wheel, 2. March; the battery half- 
wheels to the left, and, when at three yards from the 
line, is halted and dressed to the left. 

If marching, the leading battery continues the march, 
its captain announcing the guide toward the point of rest, 
if not already there ; the mov ement is then completed as 
before. 

At whatever gait this movement is executed, the lead- 
ing battery is halted at the point of rest. 

891. To form front into line, faced to the rear, the major 
commands : 1. Right (or Left) front into line, faced to the rear. 
2. March. 

Executed like right front into line, except that the bat- 
teries are marched with the guide left, three yards be- 
yond the line, when they are countermarched, halted, 
and dressed to the right. 

To Advance in Line of Platoon Columns. 

S9!2« A platoon column is a battery in column of platoons. 

Being in line, the major commands : 1 . Batteries, 2. Right 
(or Left) by platoons, 3. March, 4. The second (or Such) the 
battery of direction. 

At the command march, each battery executes the move- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 339 

merit; the captains repeat the commands for the guide, 
as when marching in line, and place themselves on the 
side of the guide, abreast of their leading platoons, and 
fifteen yards from them; the guides carefully preserve 
the interval toward the guide of the column. The major 
marches thirty yards in front of the center. The adju- 
tant and sergeant major march seven yards outside of 
the column, abreast of the leading platoons. 

893* To retire in line of platoon columns, the major 
first causes the batteries to reverse or countermarch, and 
then gives the commands for advancing. 

894. Marching in line of platoon columns, to gain 
ground to the front and to the right (or left), the major 
commands: 1. Batteries, 2. Column half-right (or half-left)^ 

3. March, 4. The first (or fourth) the battery of direction. 
To resume the original direction, the major commands : 
1. Batteries, 2. Column half-left (or half-right), 3. March, 

4. The second (or Such) the battery of direction. 

895. The line of platoon columns executes the about, 
countermarch, and reverse as explained for a column of 
platoons. If the batteries are not halted, the major an- 
nounces the battery of direction. 

To Form the Column of Platoons Front into Line of Platoon 
Columns. 

S96. Being at a halt, the major commands : 1. Right 
(or Left) front into line of platoon columns, 2. March. 

At the first command, the captain of the first battery 
commands: 1. Forward; the captain of the second bat- 
tery, 1. Forward, 2. Column right; the other captains, 1. For- 
ward, 2. Column half- right, and all repeat the command 
march of the major, and announce: Guide left 

At the command march, the leading battery advances 
platoon distance and halts. The captain of the second 
battery conducts it opposite the left of its place in line, 
changes direction to the left, halts it three yards behind 
the line, gives the command left dress, and dresses the 



340 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

leading" platoon of his battery upon the leading platoon 
of the first, superintending- the alignment from the right 
flank of his battery, and then takes his place in line of 
platoon columns ; chiefs of the center and rear platoons 
see that they are aligned and at the proper distance from 
the platoon in front. Each of the other captains con- 
ducts his battery to a point battery plus platoon distance 
in rear of the left of its place in line, changes direction 
half-left, and halts three yards behind the line, conform- 
ing to what is explained for the captain of the second 
battery. 

If marching at a walk, the captains of batteries in rear 
of the first omit the command forward, and announce: 
Guide left, if the guide be not already there. 

If marching at a trot, or gallop, or if the command of 
the major be trot, or gallop, each battery moves to its po- 
sition at a trot or gallop. 

§97, At whatever gait this movement is executed, the 
leading battery is halted after advancing platoon dis- 
tance. 

§98. Unless otherwise directed, the interval between 
the batteries is deploying interval, or ninety-eight yards. 
The line of platoon columns, with an interval greater or 
less than deploying interval, may be formed from column 
of platoons by adding, at (so many) yards inierval, to the 
first command. 

To Close and Extend Internals in Line of Platoon Columns 
899. Marching at a walk, the major commands: 1. On 
such battery, 2. To (so many) yards close (or extend) inter- 
nals, 3. Trot, 4. March, 5. The second (or Such) the battery 
of direction. 

The movement is executed according to the principles 
prescribed in the School of the Battalion for closing or 
extending intervals between batteries in line, the cap- 
tains obliquing their batteries toward or from the desig- 
nated battery. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 341 

Ij The battery of direction is announced when all the 
" intervals are closed or extended. 

, When the interval between the batteries is less than 
thirty yards, each captain will be one-half the interval 
I from the flank of his battery. 

Being in Line of Platoon Columns at Deploying or Greater than 
Deploying Intervals, to Form Line. 

OOO* The major commands: 1. Batteries, 2. Right (or 
Left) front into line, 3. March, 4. Batteries, 5. Halt. 

At the command march, each battery executes right 
front into line. 

If executed at a trot, or gallop, the major commands : 
The second (or Such) the battery of direction, when the rear 
platoons arrive in line. 

Being in Line of Platoon Columns, to Form Column of Batteries. 

901. The major commands: 1. Right {or Left) into line, 
wheel, 2. March, 3. Guide [right or left) ; or, 3. Batteries, 
4. Halt. 

If the battalion be halted, each captain dresses his 
battery to the right. 

Being in Column of Batteries, to Form Line of Platoon Columns, 

902. The major commands : 1. Platoons right (or left) 
wheel, 2. March, 3. The second (or Such) the battery of di- 
rect/on. 

Marching in Line of .Platoon Columns with Deploying Intervals' 
to March in Column of Platoons. 

903. The major commands : 1. Batteries, 2. Column right 
' (or left), 3. March. 4. Guide (right or left). 

To march again in line of platoon columns, the major 
commands: 1. Batteries, 2. Column left (or right) ^ 3. MARCH, 
4. The seco/7(/ (or Such) the battery of direction, ' 



342 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. « 

To Form Column of Platoons from Column of Batteries at Full 
Distance. 

904. The major commands: 1. Batteries, 2. Right (or 
Left) by platoons, 3. March, 4. Guide {right or left). 

905. To form again in column of batteries, the major 
commands: 1. Batteries, 2. Right (or Left) front into line, 
3. March, 4. Batteries, 5. Halt; or, 4. Guide (left or right). 

To Advance in Line of Double Columns. 

906. The battalion being in line, the major commands : 
1. Batteries, 2. Center forward, 3. March, 4. The second [or 
Such) the battery of direction. 

At the command march, each battery executes the 
movement. The positions of the major, captains, adju- 
tant, and sergeant major are the same as when advanc- 
ing in line of platoon columns. 

Intervals are extended and closed in line of double 
columns by the same commands and means as prescribed 
for line of platoon columns. 

907. Being in line of double columns, at deploying or 
greater than deploying intervals, to form line, the major 
commands: 1. Batteries, 2. Right and left front into line, 
3. March, 4. Batteries, 5. Halt. 

At the command march, each battery executes the 
movement. 

If executed at a trot, or gallop, the major commands: 
The second (or Such) the battery of direction, when the rear 
sections arrive in line. 

To Change Direction in Line of Platoon Columns or Double Col- 
umns. 

90S. The battalion being at a halt, the major com- 
mands: 1. Change direction to the right {left, half-right, or 
half-left), 2. March. 

At the first command, the captain of the first battery 
commands : 1. Forward, 2. Column right (or half-right) ; the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 343 

other captains command: 1. Forward, and all repeat the 
command march of the major, and announce: Guide right 

The captain of the first battery halts it when his rear 
pivot carriag-e has advanced its own length in the new- 
direction. Each of the other captains moves his batt^ery 
forward, changes direction half-right (or inclines to the 
right) so as to conduct it to a point battery distance and 
nineteen yards behind its place in the new line, when he 
again changes direction half-right (or inclines to the 
right), halts his battery on the line, and dresses the 
leading platoon to the right. 

If marching, the captain omits the command forward. 

909. At whatever gait this movement is executed, 
the pivot battery is halted when its rear pivot-carriage 
has advanced its own length in the new direction. 

Close Column, or in Mass. 

910. Close column from line is formed with the des- 
ignated battery in front; from column, with the leading 
battery in front. In close column, the distance between 
batteries is fifteen yards. 

To Close the Column in Mass. 

911. Being in column of batteries at full distance, 
and at a halt, the major commands: 1. Close in mass, 
2. March, 3. Guide (right or left). 

The first battery stands fast. Each of the other bat- 
teries moves forward, and halts when it arrives at fifteen 
yards from the one preceding. 

If marching at a walk, the first battery is halted at the 
command march; the other batteries continue the march, 
and are halted at the proper distance. 

If marching at a trot, or at a walk and the command 
be trot, the first battery moves at a walk: the others close 
at a trot, each taking the walk at fifteen yards from the 
preceding battery. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command 



^^^ SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

be gallop, the same principles applies, the first battery 
moving at a trot. ^ 

To arrest the march during the execution of the move- 
ment, the major commands : 1. Batteries, 2. Halt Only 
those batteries halt that have arrived at closed distance : 
the other batteries are successively halted by their cap- 
tains upon closing to the proper distance. ' 

To Form Close Column from Line, 

X ^\?\ '^^^ iiiajor commands : 1. Close column on first for 
fourth) battery, 2. March. ^ 

The first battery moves to the front seventy-four yards 
with the guide left, is halted and dressed to the left' 
ine other batteries move by the right flank, with the 
guide left. The second battery marches in rear of and 
parallel to the line of the first battery: its captain halts " 
m rear of the left section of the preceding battery; whea 
the lead horses of the rear carriages of his rear platoon 
arrive at three and one-quarter yards from him he 
marches his bat^ry by the left flank, halts it, and dresses 
It to the left. The third and fourth batteries incline to 
the right, and at fifteen yards from the flaik of the col- 
umn incline to the left, so as to enter the column in rear 
Of and on a line parallel to the preceding battery ; the 
captaips conform to what is prescribed for the captain 
Of the second battery. ^ 

^ If the fourth battery be designated, the third forms 
m rear of the fourth, the second in rear of the third, etc • 
the batteries are dressed to the right. *' 

To form Close Column from Column of Platoons or sections. 

^*?' I^ ^^^. ^''o^^-— The major commands: 1. Close col- 
umn 2 Batteries, 3. Right (ov Left) front into line, 4. March. 

inehrst battery executes /'/^/>f/ro/7f//7fo///;e. Theother 
batteries move forward and execute right front into line at 
the proper distances. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 345 

If, before the completion of the movement, the major 
commands: 1. Batteries, 2. HALT batteries that have 
completed the movement halt at the command, the oth- 
ers complete the movement and then halt. 

914. To the right or left. — The major commands: 
1. Close column, 2. First battery, column right (or left) 
3. March. 

The first battery changes direction to the right, and 
after moving fifteen yards in. the new direction, forms 
line to the left. The other batteries are formed in rear 
of the first, at the proper distances. 

To March in Column; to Change Direction and to Halt; to March 
in Line of Platoon Columns; to March by the Flank, and to 
Resume the March in Column; to Face to the Rear; to March 
to the Rear. 

915. Executed in close column by the same commands 
and means as in column at full distance. 

To Change Direction by the Flank in Close Column. 

916. Being at a halt, the major commands : 1. Change 
direction by the right (or left) flank. 2. March. 

The adjutant or sergeant major, whichever is at the 
head of the column, marks the point of rest for the first 
battery, placing himself in prolo.igation of the first sec- 
tion and about thirty yards in front of it. 

At the command march, the first battery executes by the 
right flank, on the completion of which the captain com- 
mands: 1. Column left, 2. March, .*•. Guide left, and places 
himself at the head of his battery to direct it; the captain 
halts opposite the point of rest, and as the leai horses 
of the rear carriages of his rear platoon approach, com- 
mands: 1. By the left flank, 2. March, 3. Battery, 4. Halt, 
and dresses his battery to the left. The other battaries 
move by the right fiank, make two changes of direction 
half-left and enter the new column in rear of and parallel 
to the first; each captain halts when near the point 
.where the left of the battery is to rest in column, allows 



346 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALlbN. 

his battery to march past him, and when its rear ap- 
proaches, conforms to what is already prescribed for the 
captain of the first battery. The adjutant and sergeant 
major, if not already there, place themselves on the flank 
toward which the batteries are dressed; the one at the 
point of rest retires at the command halt of the captain 
of the first battery. 

Being in Close Column, to take Full Distance. 

OIV* Being at a halt, the major commands: 1. Take 
wheeling distance, 2. March, 3. Gu/de {right, or left). 

At the command /ware/?, the first battery moves forward. 
Each of the batteries in rear, when at wheeling distance 
from the one preceding, moves forward and the guide is 
announced. 

If marching, the major omits the command for the 
guide. The leading battery continues the march ; if at 
a walk, the batteries in rear halt at the command march, 
and as they gain wheelin g distance move forward and 
the guide is announced. 

If marching at a trot, or at a walk and the command be 
trot, the leading battery moves at a trot : the other bat- 
teries move at a walk, and successively take the trot 
when at wheeling distance. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command 
be gallop, the same principle applies, the leading battery 
moving at a gallop. 

To Form Column of Platoons from Close Column. 

9 1 §• The major commands: 1 . Column of Platoons, 2. First 
battery, 3. Right (or Left) by platoons, 4. MARCH, 5. Guide 
right (or left). 

At the command march, the first battery executes right 
by platoons. The captains of the other batteries succes- 
sively command: 1. Right by platoons, 2. March, in time 
for each to follow, in column of platoons, the battery pre- 
ceding. 



SCHOOL OF BATTALION. 347 

919. The major may likewise command: 1. Column of 
platoons, 2. First battery, 3. Platoons right (or left) wheel, 
4. March, 5. Guide right (or left). 

At the command march, the bs^ttery designated exe- 
cutes the movement; the other batteries successively 
execute right by platoons in time to follow, by changing 
direction to the right (or left), the battery next preced- 
ing. 

If marching, the batteries in rear halt, walk, or trot, 
according as the movement is executed at a walk, trot, 
or gallop. 

To Form Line to the Right or Left from Close Column. 

920. The major first causes distances to be taken 
(Par. 917), and then gives the commands for wheeling to 
the right or left into line; or, he braaks into column of 
platoons from the head of the column, aid then wheels 
by platoons to the right or left into line. 

To Deploy the Close Column. 

921. Being at a halt, to deploy on the first battery, 
the major commands: 1. On first battery^ deploy column, 
2. By the right (or left) flank, 3. MARCH. 

The first battery stands fast; the other batteries move 
by the right flank, with the guide left, until opposite 
their places in line, then by the left flank, with the 
guide left, to their places in line, where they are halted 
and dressed to the left. The captain of each battery in 
rear of the first halts opposite the left of his position in 
line, and marches his battery by the left flank when the 
leaders of the rear carriages of his rear platoon are three 
and one-quarter yards from him. 

If marching, the first battery is halted at the com- 
mand march, and the movement is completed as from a 
halt. 

922. Being at a halt, to deploy on the fourth battery. 



348 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

the major commands: 1. On fourth battery, deploy column. 
2. By the right [ov left) flank, 3. March.. 

The fourth battery stands fast until unmasked, then 
moves forward to the line with the guide left, and is 
halted and dressed to the left ; the other batteries move 
by the right flank with the guide left, until opposite 
their places in line, then by the left flank, with the guide 
left, to their places in line, where they are halted and 
dressed to the left. The captain of each battery in front 
of the fourth halts opposite the left of his position in 
line and marches his battery by the left flank when the 
leaders of the rear carriages of his rear platoon are three 
and one-quarter yards from him. The third and second 
batteries are halted immediately after the march by the 
left flank and move up to the line as soon as unmasked. 

If marching, the fourth battery is halted at the com- 
mand march, and the movement is completed as before. 

923. To deploy the column on the first, or fourth bat- 
tery, faced to the rear, the major commands : 1, On first 
(or fourth) battery, deploy column, faced to the rear. 

The movement is executed as already explained, ex- 
cept that each battery is marched across the line, and is 
then countermarched, halted, and dressed toward the 
point of rest. 

924. The major may direct the deployment of the 
battalion on any battery, giving each battery special in- 
structions as to its place in the line; the movement is 
executed in accordance with the preceding principles 
(Pars. 921, 922, and 923). 

To Change Front 

925. Being in line, the major forms column of pla- 
toons to the right or left, and then executes front into line, 
or front into line, faced to the rear. 

926. If the obliquity of the new line b j less than forty- 
five degrees, the major, either personally or through the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 349 

adjutant or sergeant major, indicates to the captain of 
the pivot battery the direction of the new line, and com- 
mands: 1. Oblique change of front on first (or fourth) battery, 
2. March. 
1 At the first command, the captain of the right battery 
•commands right half-wheel; the other captains command: 
Forward, and all repeat the command march. At the com- 
mand march, the right battery wheels to the right until 
parallel to the new line, when it is moved forward, halted 
at three yards from the line, and dressed to the right; 
the other batteries move forward with the guide to the 
right, and each is successively wheeled to the right so 
as to maintain its interval, moved forward when parallel 
to the new line, halted, and dressed to the right. 

Order in Echelon. 

927. Being in line, at a halt, to advance by echelon, 
the major commands: 1. Batteries from the right [or left) ^ 
2. At (so many) yards distance, 3. Front into echelon, 
4. March. 

At the third command, the captain of the right bat- 
tery commands forward, and repeats the command march 
of the major. 

At the command march, the right battery moves for- 
ward with the guide to the right; when it has advanced 
the specified distance, the captain of the second battery 
from the right puts his battery in march with the guide 
to the right, and so on to the left of the line. A guidon 
of each rear battery marches on a line with the lead 
drivers, and directly in rear of the left section of the 
battery preceding. 

If marching at a walk, the right battery continues the 
"march ; the other batteries are halted by their captains 
and resume the march when at tha specified distance. 

If marching at a trot, or at a walk and the command be 
trot, the right battery moves at a trot ; the other batter- 



350 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

ies, by command of their captains, move at a walk, and 
successively take the trot when at the specified distance. 

If marching at a gallop, or at a trot and the command 
be gallop, the same principle applies, the right battery 
moving at a gallop. 

92§. To retire by echelon, the major causes the bat- 
teries to execute the reverse, or countermarch, and then 
gives the same commands as for the advance by echelon. 

9tJ9. To halt the echelon, and to resume the march, 
the major commands: 1. Batteries, 2. Halt, and, 1. For- 
ward, 2. March, 3. The first (or Such) the battery of direction, 

Marching in echelon, the leading battery is always an- 
nounced as the battery of direction. 

930. To march the echelon by the flank, the major 
commands: 1. By the right (or /eft) flank. 2. MARCH, and 
announces the leading battery as the battery of direction. 

931. To march the echelon to the rear, the major 
causes the battalion to reverse, or countermarch, and an- 
nounces the leading battery as the battery of direction. 

To Execute an Oblique Change of Front in Echelon, 

932. Being in echelon, the major commands: 1. Bat- 
teries left (or right) half- wheel, 2. MARCH, 3. The fourth (or 
first) the battery of direction; or, 3. Batteries, 4. HALT. 

If the battalion be halted, each captain dresses his bat- 
tery to the left. The half-wheel is executed to the left 
or right, according as the right or left battery is in front. 

To Form Line from Echelon. 

933. Being at a halt, the major commands: 1. Form 
line on (such) battery, 2. March, 3. Front. 

At the first command, the captains in front of the des- 
ignated battery command: Reverse; those in rear com-" 
mand: Forward, and all repeat the command march, and 
announce the guide right (or left) according as they are 
on the left or right of the designated battery. At the 



I 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 351 

command march, the captain of the designated battery 
dresses it toward the flank of the battalion if it be a flank 
battery, toward the center if it be an interior battery. 
Each captain in front of the designated battery marches 
his battery three yards to the rear of the line, reverses 
it, and dresses it toward the designated battery; each 
captain in rear halts his battery three yards in rear of 
the line and dresses it toward the designated battery. 

If marching, the designated battery is halted by its 
captain at the command march, of the major. 

934. In echelon, batteries are designated numerically 
from right to left as in line. 

FORMATIONS IN BATTERY. 

935. Previous to all formations in battery, either 
from line or column, if the pieces are not already there, 
the major, by a passage of carriages, places them in 
front or rear, according as he designs forming in battery 
to the front or rear. 

In all formations in battery, the movement is executed 
in each battery as prescribed in the School of the Bat- 
tery. The adjutant and sergeant major accompany the 
major. 

To Form in Battery to the Front from Line. 

936. The major commands : 1. In Battery, 2. March. 

At the command march ^ given when the pieces have 
advanced twenty-one yards, each battery executes the 
movement. 

To Form in Battery to the Front by Moving the Caissons to the 

Rear. 

937. The major commands: 1. Act/on, 2. Front. 

At the command front, each battery executes the move- 
ment. 

Being in battery, to give a general alignment, the 
major commands: 1. Bight (or Left), 2. Dress. 



352 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

At the command dress, the pieces, limbers, and cais- 
sons dress to the right; when necessary, the major veri- 
fies the alignment of the pieces and limbers, and the ad- 
jutant, the caissons, both on the right. The captains 
and chiefs of caissons superintend the alignment of the 
pieces and carriages of their batteries as prescribed in 
the School of the Battery, except that the captains and 
chiefs of caissons of the batteries on the left of the first 
superintend the alignment from the left of their batter- 
ies. 

To Form in Battery to the Rear from Line. 

93S« The major commands: 1. Action^ 2. Rear. 
At the command rear^ each battery executes the move- 
ment. 

To Form Line from Battery. 

939. The batteries are formed in line facing to the 
front or rear, with pieces or caissons in front, by the 
commands and means prescribed in the School of the 
Battery, the major substituting, in the commands, batter- 
ies for battery^ and the second (or such) the battery of direc- 
tion for guide right (or /eft). 

To Form in Battery to the Right or Left from Column of Platoons, 
Gaining Ground to the Right or Left. 

940. The pieces being in front, the major commands: 
1. Fire to the right (or left\ 2. Right (or Left) into line, wheel, 
3. March, 4. In battery, 5. March. 

To Form in Battery to the Right or Left from Column of Platoons, 
Gaining Ground to the Left cr Right. 

941. The caissons being in front, the major com- 
mands : 1. Fire to the right (or left), 2. Left (or Right) into line, 
wheel, 3. March, 4. Action, 5. Rear. 

The above movements are executed in each battery as 
prescribed in the School of the Battery. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 353 

To Form the Column of Platoons on Right or Left into Battery. 

942. The major commands : On right (or left) into bat- 
tery^ 2. March. Executed on the same principle as oh 
right into line, each captain substituting in the commands, 
on right into battery for on right into line. 

943* In successive formations in battery, the adjutant 
or serg-eant major, whichever is at the head of the col- 
umn, or nearest the point of rest, marks the point of rest 
and indicates the position of the guns for the battery 
which is to arrive first in battery, and joins the major 
as soon as the guns of this battery are established. 

To Form the Column of Platoons Front into Battery, 

944. The major commands : 1. Right (or Left) front into 
battery, 2. March. Executed on the same principles as 
right front into line, each captain substituting, in the com- 
mands, right front into battery for right front into line. 
i 945* Right (or Left) front into battery, faced to the rear, is 
executed on the same principles as right (ov left) front into 
battery, except that each battery, at the proper time, ex- 
ecutes right {or left) front into battery, faced to the rear, 

ITo Form Front, or Faced to the Rear, into Battery^ on the 
I Head of an Interior Battery. 

I \ 946. The major first forms line on the interior battery, 
j: and then gives the command for forming in battery. 

To Form in Battery from Column of Batteries at Full Distance. 

! 947. To the right or left — The major first forms line to 

! the right or left, and then gives the command for form- 

' ing in battery. 

I 948. On the right or left. — The major commands: 1. Qn 

I right (or left) into battery, 2. March. Executed as ex- 

1 plained for on right into line, except that as soon as each 

9236 23 



354 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

batter}' has completed the wheel the captain gives the 
commands for forming in battery. 

949, To the front, — The major commands: 1. Right [ov 
Left) front into battery, 2. March. Executed on the same 
principles as right front into line, the captains forming in 
battery to the front on arriving in line. 

950. Right or left front into battery, faced to the rear, is 
executed on the same principles, the captains forming in 
battery to the rear on arriving in line. 

To Form in Battery front) Line of Platoon Columns, with Deploy- 
ing or Greater than Deploying Intervals. 

951* /"o Me /ro/yf.-^The major commands: 1. Batteries, 
2. Right (or Left) front into battery, 3. March. 

At the command march, each battery executes right front 
into battery. 

952. To the rear. — The major commands: 1. Batteries, 

2. Right (or Left) front into battery, faced to the rear, 

3. March. 

At the command march, each battery executes right 
front into battery, faced to the rear. 

To Form in Battery from Line of Double Columns, with Deploy- 
ing or Greater than Deploying Intervals. 

953. The major commands: 1. Batteries, 2. Right and 
left front into battery; or, 2. Right and left front into battery, 
faced to the rear, 3. March. 

At the command march, each battery executes the 
movement. 

To Form in Battery from Close Column. 

954. To deploy on the first battery, the major com- 
mands: 1. Front into battery, 2. On first battery, deploy col- 
umn. 3. By the right (or left) flank, 4. March. 

At the command march, the captain of the first battery 
forms it in battery ; the other batteries deploy as pre- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 355 

viously explained, except that, upon arriving- in line, the 
captains, without halting and dressing their batteries, 
form in battery. 

955. Front into battery, faced to the rear, on first battery, is 
executed on the same principles ; each battery at the 
proper time forms in battery to the rear. 

956. To deploy front into battery on the fourth bat- 
tery, the major commands: 1, Front into battery, 2. On fourth 
battery, deploy column, 3. By the right(ov left) flank, 4. MARCH. 

The deployment is executed as previously explained, 
except that the batteries form in battery successively as 
they arrive in line. 

957. Front into battery, faced to the rear, on fourth battery, 
is similarly executed. 

To Form in Battery from Echelon. 

95 §• Executed to the front and to the rear by the same 
commands and means as from line. 

FIRINGS. 

959. The major designates the target and prescribes 
the projectile and rate of firing: he controls the rate of 
firing by the commands and means prescribed for the 
captain in the School of the Battery Dismounted. The 
orders of fire are by piece, by platoon, by battery, at will, and 
by piece (platoon or battery) from one flank of the battalion to 
the other. 

To Fire by Piece, 

960. The major commands: 1. Fire by piece, 2. Com- 
mence FIRING-. Executed as prescribed in the School 
of the Battery Dismounted, the flank from which the fire 
begins being determined for each battery by its captain. 

This order of fire will almost always give the best re- 
sults, as the errors in the service of any particular gun 
can be observed and corrected, and it will generally be 
employed in preference to the other orders. 



356 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

To Fire by Platoon. 

961. The major commands: 1, Fire by platoon, 2. Com- 
mence FIRING. Executed as prescribed in the School of 
the Battery Dismounted; theftank from which the firing* 
begins being determined for each battery by its captain. 

To Fire by Battery. 

962. The major commands: 1. Fire by battery, 2. Com- 
mence FIRING. Executed as prescribed in the School of 
the Battery Dismounted. In ordinary fire, each battery 
will fire a salvo once every two minutes; in slow fire, not 
oftener than once every three minutes; in rapid fire^ the 
salvos must not succeed each other so quickly as to inter- 
fere with the most correct service of the guns. The rate 
of the slow and rapid fire is controlled by cautions from 
the major. 

To Fire at Will. 

963. The major commands: 1. Fire at will, 2. Com- 
mence FIRING. Executed in each battery as prescribed 
in the School of the Battery Dismounted. 

To Fire by Piece from One Flank of the Battalion to the Other. 

964. The major commands: 1. Battalion fire by piece, 
2. No. one, first (or six, fourth] battery, 3. Fire. 

All the captains repeat the first command; at the sec- 
ond command, the captain of the designated battery com- 
mands: 1. Fire by piece, 2. No. one (ov six), and repeats the 
command Fire. The corrections for the elevation, de- 
flection, and length of fuse which the major may have 
occasion to order for the next shot having been effected, 
he directs the next piece to be fired, and so on. The « 
major will send a memoraidum of the corrections in ele- 
vation, etc. , to the batteries beyond the reach of his voice. 
When the corrections so sent have been made in a battery, 
its captain will make a prearranged signal to that effect; 
the major will signal the piece to b3 fired. When the 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 357 

range is correctly established, the major commands : Con- 
tinue the fire; the pieces are then fired as prescribed for 
the fire by piece in the School of the Battery Dismounted, 
except that all the pieces are fired in regular order from 
the right to the left flank, or from the left to the right 
flank, throughout the battalion, according to the pro- 
gression indicated by the major's commands before given. 
When the last piece has fired, the captain of its battery 
raises his hand as a signal or calls out: Round completed; 
this signal or verbal notice is repeated by the other 
captains in succession, and will be notification to the 
captain of the first(orfourth)battery to recommence the 
fire with his outer piece; the fire will be thus continued 
until the command cease firing^ or until the major again 
assumes the regulation of the fire by giving the com- 
mand for each piece as just prescribed. 

If the major commands: 1. Battalion fire by piece, 2. No. 
one, first[ov six, fourth) battery, 3. Commence firing, the 
pieces are fired under direction of the captains, as just 
explained, at the major's command continue the fire. In 
this case, each captain finds the range and regulates the 
fire of his battery. 

To Fire by Platoon from One Flank of the Battalion to the Other. 

905. The major commands: 1. Battalion fire by platoon^ 
2. Right platoon, first(or Left platoon, fourth) battery, 3. FiRE. 
All the captains repeat the first command; at the second 
command, the captain of the designated battery com- 
mands: 1. Fire by platoon^ 2. Right (or Left) platoon, and re- 
peats the command Fire. The major having established 
the range, as explained in the fire by piece throughout 
the battalion, he commands: Continue the fire; the platoons 
are then fired under the direction of the captains as pre- 
scribed in the School of the Battery Dismounted, except 
that all the platoons are fired in regular order, from the 
right to the left or from the left to the right flank, 



358 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

throughout the battalion, according to the progression 
indicated by the major's commands before given. When 
the round is completed, the signal or verbal notice to 
that effect is given. 

If the major commands: 1. Battalion fire by platoon, 
2. Right platoon, first [or Left platoon, fourth) battery, 3. Com- 
mence FIRING-, the platoons are fired under the direc- 
tion of the captains as just explained for the major's com- 
mand continue the fire. In this case each captain finds 
the range and regulates the fire of his battery. 

To Fire by Battery from One Flank of the Battalion to the Other. 

966. The major commands: 1. Battalion fire by battery, 
2. First (or Fourth) battery, 3. Fire. 

The first command is repeated by all the captains, the 
second and third by the captain of the battery designated. 
The major having established the range, as explained in 
the fire by piece, throughout the battalion, he commands: 
Continue the fire; the batteries are then fired by the cap- 
tains in regular order from the right to the left, or from 
the left to the right flank, throughout the battalion ac- 
cording to the progression indicated by the major's com- 
mands before given. When the battalions consist of 
four batteries, there will ordinarily bo an interval of 
thirty seconds between successive salvos after the major 
has commanded continue the fire. If a slower or more rapid 
rate of fire is required, the major will command, slotv fire, 
or rapid fire. The rate of slow and rapid fire will be con- 
trolled by cautions from the major. The interval between 
successive salvos in slow fire should not be less than one 
minute, and in rapid fire should be sufficient to enable 
the effect of one salvo to be observed before the next is 
fired. 

If the major commands: 1. Battalion, fire by battery, 
2. First[ov Fourth) battery,'^. COMMENCE FIRING, the bat- 
teries are fired by command of the captains as just ex- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 359 

plained for the major's command continue to fire. In this 
case each captain finds the range and regulates the fire 
of his battery. 

During the firings, the major goes where he may best 
observe the efl'ects of the fire and watch the progress of 
the action. The establishment of the range and the reg- 
ulation of the fire of his battery are generally intrusted 
to each captain ; it is very exceptional for the major him- 
self to take personal command of the battalion in order 
to find the range or to regulate the fire. 

To Fire Advancing. 
967. The major designates the battery or batteries to 
move forward, and the advanced position to be occupied. 
The battery or batteries designated cease firing, move 
forward to the new position, and resume the fire. After 
they have opened fire, instructions are sent to the re- 
maining batteries to advance to the same line or to a 
designated position in front of it. The major precedes the 
advancing batteries and establishes them in their new 
position, and habitually remains with th3 batteries near- 
est the enemy. 

To Fire Retiring. 

968* Executed on the same principles as firing ad- 
vancing, except that the major only designates the posi- 
tion in rear to be occupied, and the batteries retiring are 
established upon it by their captains. 

To March by the Flank from Battery, and to Form Again in 

Battery. 

969. Executed by the same commands and means as 
in the School of the Battery. 

To Form in Battery to the Right or Left from Column, with the 
Caissons on the Flank. 

970. The major commands: 1, Action, 2. Right (or 
Left). 



360 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 

To Form in Battery to the Rear from Battery. 

Oyi. Executed by the same commands and means as 
in the School of the Battery. 

To Change Front in Battery. 

OTiSJ. The major designates the new line to the cap- 
tains, who immediately cease firing, conduct their bat- 
teries by the simplest means to their new positions, and 
open lire. 

The Battalion in Column of Sections. 

9*73, The distance between batteries in column of sec- 
tions is seventeen yards. 

The battalion in column of sections is formed, front or 
faced to the rear, into line or into battery, on the first 
battery, by the commands and according to the princi- 
ples prescribed for the battalion in column of platoons. 
The movements are executed in each battery as pre- 
scribed in the School of the Battery. 

The column of sections is formed to or on right (or 
left) into line or battery by the commands and means 
prescribed in the School of the Battery. The batteries 
execute the movement in succession, beginning with the 
first, and in time to take the proper intervals. 

The battalion in column of sections is formed in col- 
umn of platoons, and being in column of platoons is 
formed in column of sections' by the commands and 
means prescribed in the School of the Battery. The 
movement is executed successively by each battery and 
at such a gait that the distances between batteries may 
be preserved. 

Column and close column of batteries are formed from 
column of sections by the commands prescribed for the 
battalion in column of platoons. Each battery executes 
front into line as prescribed in the SchoDl of the Bat- 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 361 

tery, and in succession, beg-inning- with the first, so as to 
have the proper distances in the new column. 

Close column of batteries to the right or left is formed 
from column of sections by the commands prescribed in 
the School of the Battalion. In this case, the leading 
battery, after changing direction to the right, advances 
in the new direction a distance equal to battery front 
and fifteen yards, when its captain forms it to the left into 
line and dresses it to the right. 

The column of ssctions is formed front or faced to the 
rear, into line, on the head of an interior battery, by the 
commands already prescribed for the battalion in column 
of platoons; and by the same means, except that the bat- 
teries in front of the designated battery march by the 
flank instead of wheeling by platoons, and that each sec- 
tion reverses, instead of countermarching, in forming 
line faced to the rear. 

Drill without Caissons. 

974. The interval bet^ween batteries is thirty yards. 
All movements are executed as prescribed in the School 
of the Battery for the drill without caissons. 

975. The battalion should also be drilled with one 
caisson to each platoon. A caisson is attached to the 
right piece of each platoon as it stands in park; the dis- 
tances and intervals are kept as if all the caissons were 
present. All the movements in the School of the Bat- 
tery may be executed as there laid down, observing the 
modifications provided for in the School of the Battery 
for the movements with one caisson to each platoon. 



362 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR OFFICERS, ETC. 



SPECIAL IIS^STEUCTIOXS FOR OFFICERS 
AKD NOK-COMMISSIOJS^ED STAFF OF- 
FICERS. 

Oye, In rendering honors, officers execute present 
saber and carry saber. 

At the command present, officers execute the motion of 
present saber as prescribed for enlisted men; at the com- 
mand saber, they drop the point of the saber by extend- 
ing the arm so that the right hand is brought to the side 
of the right thigh, back of the hand down, blade of the 
saber inclining downward and to the front. At the com- 
mands carry, saber, they resume the carry. 

In presenting saber with troops armed with the rifle 
or carbine, officers execute the first motion of the salute 
at the command present, and the second motion at the 
command arms. At the commands carry, arms, they re- 
sume the carry. 

977. In rendering honors , non-commissioned s taJBf offi- 
cers execute present and carry saber as prescribed in the 
School of the Soldier Dismounted. 

In presenting saber with troops armed with the rifle 
or carbine, they execute the present and carry at the 
command arms. 

978. At the commands parade rest, officers and non- 
commissioned staff officers take the position of parade 
rest, dropping the point of the saber in front of the cen- 
ter of the body; at the command attention, they resume 
the carry. 

979. At the parade rest in funeral ceremonies, officers 
and non-commissioned staff officers, dismounted, incline 
the head to the front. 

9§0. With the above exceptions, officers and non-com- 
missioned staff officers do not execute the manual of the 



I 



I 



SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR OFFICERS, ETC. 363 

saber nor the saber exercise with the men, unless spe- 
cially directed. 

98 1 • Officers and non-commissioned staff officers draw 
and return saber as prescribed in the School of the Sol- 
dier Dismounted. 

9 §2. When marching- in double time, officers and 
non-commissioned staff' officers carry the saber diagonally 
across the breast, edge to the front, the point inclined 
to the left, two feet higher than the hand; the left hand 
steadies the scabbard. 

983, Officers and non-commissioned staff officers are 
not required to mount and dismount at the commands 
given for mounting and dismounting the men, except 
when specially dii-ected. 

984, At all established roll calls of a battery, the offi- 
cer superintending the roll call reports the result to the 
battery commander. 

Salute with the Hand for Officers. 

985, The salute for officers is the same as in Par. 20 ; 
the left hand is used only when the right is engaged. 

Salute of the Guidon. 

986, Mounted, the heel of the lance rests in the socket 
attached to the right stirrup ; the right hand grasps the 
lance at the height of the elbow. The guidon salutes as 
follows : 

(First motion.) — Lower the lance by straightening the 
arm to its full extent. [Second motion.) — Bring back the 
lance to the habitual position. 

98'y. Dismounted, the lance is in the right hand, is 
nearly vertical, and rests in the hollow of the shoulder, 
the butt about six inches from the ground, the arm nearly 
extended, the thumb in front of the lance, the forefinger 
extended on the side, the other fingers in rear ; this is 
the position of carry guidon. 



364 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR OFFICERS, ETC. 

The guidon salutes as follows : 

{F/rsf motion, at the command present)— Seize the lance 
at the height of the right shoulder with the left hand, 
back to the front. [Second mot/on, at the command saber.)— 
Lower the lance about forty-five degrees to the front 
(Th/rd motwn.)— Bring back the lance to its vertical posi-i 
tion and drop the left hand. M 

At the commands, 1. Parade, 2. Rest, grasp the lance * 
with the left hand, forearm horizontal, let go with the 
right hand, lower the lance with the left until the butt , 
rests on the ground, one inch to the right of the right I 
toe ; execute the parade rest (Par. 15), the right arm ! 
over the lance, which rests against the right shoulder. 
At the command attention, bring the right heel by the 
side of the left and resume the carry guidon. I 

About Face for Officers Dismounted. 

988. At the command about, carry the toe of the right 
foot about eight inches to the rear and three inches to 
the left of the left heel, without changing the direction ^ 
of the foot. At the command face, turn upon the left heel 
and right toe, face to the rear, and replace the rig-ht heel 
by the side of the left. 

989. The non-commissioned staff face about as pre- 
scribed for officers. 



CEREMONIES. 365 



CEEEMOKIES. 

GENERAL RULES. 

990. On occasions of ceremony, except funeral escort, 
troops are arranged from right to left in line, and from 
head to rear in column, in the following order: First, 
infantry; second, light artillery; third, cavalry. Ar- 
tillery serving as infantry is posted as infantry; dis- 
mounted cavalry and marines are on the left of the in- 
fantry; engineer troops are on the right of the command 
to which they are attached. When cavalry and light 
artillery are posted together, the artillery is posted on 
the left. In the same arm, regulars, volunteers, and 
militia are posted in line from right to left, or in column 
from head to rear, in the order named. In reviews of 
large bodies of troops the dilTerent arms and classes are 
posted, at the discretion of the commanding general, due 
regard being paid to their position in camp. On all 
other occasions, troops of all classes are posted at the 
discretion of the general or senior commander. 

99 1 • When two or more battalions are formed for cere- 
monies, they are posted as may be directed by the officer 
in command ; generally, horse artillery is on the right 
of the line or at the head of the column ; the batteries 
of a battalion are posted according to the rank of the 
battery commanders present, as prescribed in the School 
of the Battalion (Par. 832). A battery whose captain 
commands the battalion retains its place according to his 
rank, unless otherwise directed ; the same rule applies 
to the higher units. 

993* At all formations for ceremony, officers have the 
saber drawn. At ceremonies mounted, the pieces are in 
front : chiefs of platoon repeat only those commands 
which they repeat in the School of the Battery. Mounted 



366 GENERAL RULES FOR REVIEWS. 

officers in facing toward the line, and in resuming their 
front, always execute a left about. 

995. When a column at full distance, composed of 
light artillery and either or both the other arms, forms 
line- to the right or left, the artillery is wheeled into line 
to the rear, and when it has gained sufficient distance, 
is countermarched and halted on the line. 

GENERAL RULES FOR REVIEWS. 

994 • When the light artillery belonging to a corps is 
reviewed by itself, it is arranged in on 3 or more lines, in 
such order as may be directed by th3 commanding gen- 
eral, due regard being paid to position in the camp or 
line. 

When a division is reviewed, its artillery is placed on 
its left; when a corps is re vie wed , the divisional and corps 
artillery are placed between the divisions or all the ar- 
tillery of the corps may be massed and placed on the left 
of the infantry or at the discretion of the commanding 
general. 

When a small mixed command of infantry, artillery 
and cavalry is reviewed in line, it is arranged from right 
to left in the following order: First, infantry; second, 
artillery; third, cavalry; if the command includes only 
artillery and infantry, or only artillery and cavalry, the 
artillery is placed on the left. 

The officer in command gives the appropriate com- 
mands for the artillery and other arms to form column 
to the right. 

995. The adjutant or adjutant general posts men or 
otherwise marks the points where the column changes 
direction, in such manner that the right flank in passing 
shall be about ten yards from the reviewing officer. 

996. The post of the reviewing officer, usually oppo- 
site the center of the line, is marked by a flag. 

The reviewing officer should be at the flag before the 
head of the column reaches that point; before that time, 






GENERAL RULES FOR REVIEWS. 367 

he may take any position to observe the movements of 
the troops. 

The reviewing officer, his staff, and others at the re- 
viewing- point, salute national and regimental colors or 
standards, by uncovering, whether the latter salute or 
not; the reviewing officer alone returns the salutes of 
commanders of squadrons, batteries, and battalions, and 
all higher units. 

997. The staff of the reviewing officer is in single 
rank, six yards in rear of him, in the following order 
from right to left: Chief of staff", adjutant-general, aids, 
then the other members of the staff in the order of rank, 
the senior on the right; his flag and orderlies place them- 
selves three yards in rear of the staff, the flag on the 
right. 

998. Officers of the same or higher grade, and distin- 
guished personages invited to accompany the reviewing 
officer place themselves on his left; their staff and order- 
lies place themselves on the left of the staff and orderlies 
of the reviewing officer; all others who accompany the 
reviewing officer place themselves on the left of his staff, 
their orderlies in rear. 

999. When artillery is reviewed with large bodies of 
infantry or cavalry, should the reviewing officer not ap- 
proach the front of the artillery, he receives its salute 
whenhe arrives at its right. 

1 000. While riding around th3 batteries, the review- 
ing officer may direct his staff", flag, and orderlies to re- 
main at the post of the reviewing officer, or that only his 
personal staff and flag shall accompany him. 

lOO 1 . The staff officers in passing around the batteries 
ride in one or more ranks, according to the number. 

1002. The battalion commander, while the reviewing 
officer is not in front or in rear of his battalion, may 
cause it to stand at ease, rest or to dismount and rest, and 
resume attention and mount so as not to interfere with the 
ceremony. 



368 GENERAL RULES FOR REVIEWS. 

1003* When a commander turns out of the column to 
place himself near the reviewing- officer, his place is on 
the right of the commanders already there; when it is 
prescribed that his staff will also turn out, they arrange 
themselves in single rank on the right of the staff already 
there; his orderlies, etc., in rear of his staff. Each com- 
mander, when his rear battery has passed, salutes the 
reviewing officer, and with his staff and orderlies rejoins 
his command. 

1004. Battalion and battery commanders repeat the 
commands. 

The commands are executed when they have been re- 
peated by the captains. When the command repeated 
is present saber, staff' officers accompanying the command- 
ing officer salute at his command; the majors and cap- 
tains salute after resuming their front. 

1005. Whenever the battalion commander faces to- 
ward the line to give commands, the captains face toward 
it at the same time; they resume their front after seeing 
the movement executed. In the same manner, captains 
and battalion commanders face toward the line with the 
commanding officer when the review is by two or more 
battalions. 

1006. The staff and orderlies accompanying the com- 
manding officer do not change position when he faces the 
line to give commands. 

lOO'y. Each guidon salutes at the command present 
saber (or arms), given or repeated by the captain of the 
battery to which it belongs, and again in passing in re- 
view, when six yards from the reviewing officer; the 
guidon is raised when it has passed six yards beyond the 
reviewing officer. 

1008. The trumpeters of each battalion are consoli- 
dated and posted in single or double rank, to the right of 
the front rank, fifteen yards to the right of the guidon 
of the right battery. 

In each battalion, the trumpaters sound while the re- 



GENERAL RULES FOR REVIEWS. 369 

viewing" officer is passing in front and in rear of the bat- 
talion; they beg-in to sound when at sixty yards from the 
reviewing officer; after passing the reviewing officer, 
they turn out of the column and take post in front of him, 
continue to sound until their battalion has passed, then 
cease sounding and follow in rear of their battalion; the 
trumpeters of the next following battalion then com- 
mence. 

While passing in review, the trumpeters of but one 
battalion sound at a time. 

When the rank of the reviewing officer entitles him to 
the honor, the march or flourishes are sounded by all the 
trumpeters when sabers or arms are presented; and 
sounded again in passing in review immediately after the 
trumpeters have halted in front of the reviewing of- 
ficer. 

1009. Light artillery passes in review at a walk, 
trot, or gallop. When passing at the trot or gallop no 
salutes are made, and the trumpeters at the head of the 
column do not sound. 

1010. The formation for review may be modified to 
suit the ground and circumstances, and the present in 
line and the ride around the line by the reviewing of- 
ficer may be dispensed with, the troops simply marching 
in review with the guide either right or left, according 
as the post of the reviewing officer is on ths right or 
left of the column; the officers and non-commissioned 
officers who have designated places on the flank of the 
column when the guide is right are on the opposite flank 
when the guide is left: in the latter case, commanders 
and their staffs turning out of the column take post 
as prescribed, but to the left of the reviewing officer. 

1011. When two or more battalions are reviewed, 
each battery, after its rear has passed the reviewing 
officer thirty yards, takes the trot for one hundred yards 
in order not to interfere with the march of the column 
in rear, and each battalion, unless otherwise directed, 

923(3 24 



370 REVIEW OF A BATTERY. 

returns to its camp by the most practicable route, being 
careful not to delay the march of the battalions in rear. 
1012. When it is necessary that an org-anization 
should be reviewed before an inspector junior in rank to 
the commanding* officer, the commanding- officer will 
receive the review and will be accompanied by the in- 
spector. 

REVIEW OP A BATTERS . 

lot 3. If the battery is to be inspected and reviewed, 
the inspection may either precede or follow the review. 

The battery being- in line, the captain, in front of and 
facing- the center, commands: 1. Prepare for review, 2. Ac- 
tion, 3. Front, 4. Right, 5. Dress, 6. Front. 

The commands action, front, are executed as previously 
explained, except that the chiefs of platoons move for- 
ward and place themselves in front of the center of their 
platoons, the croups of their horses four yards in front of 
the line of muzzles, and that the trumpeters, g-uidon, the 
quartermaster and stable serg-eants execute a left about 
at the same time as the limlDers, and place themselves 
four yards from the lead horses of the nearest limber. 

At the command dress, the chiefs of platoons dress to 
the rig-ht, and cast their eyes to the front as soon as their 
alig-nment is verified ; the captain superintends the alig-n- 
ment of the chiefs of platoons, the pieces, and limbers: 
the chief of caissons superintends the alig-nment of the 
caissons. 

At the command front, the chief of caissons takes his 
post in battery; the captain passes by the shortest line 
in front of the chiefs of platoons to the center, places 
himself with the croup of his horse four yards in front 
of the heads of the horses of the chiefs of platoons, exe- 
cutes a left about, and commands: 1. Draw, 2. Saber. 

At the second command, the first serg-eant, quarter- 
master sergeant, stable serg-eant, chiefs of sections, and 
caisson corporals, if mounted, draw saber; the captain 
then executes a left abor.t and resumes his post. 



REVIEW OF A BATTERY. 371 

The reviewing officer now advances a few yards toward 
the captain and halts, when the captain executes a left 
about and commands : 1. Present, 5. Saber. 

At the second command, the officers and non-commis- 
sioned officers whose sabers are drawn present saber ; the 
guidon also salutes; sabers being presented, the captain 
executes a left about and salutes. 

The reviewing officer acknowledges the salute, after 
which the captain executes a left about, and commands : 

1. Carry, 2. Saber, resumes his front and returns saber. 
The reviewing officer now proceeds to the right of the 

battery and is joined by the captain , who salutes and places 
himself on his right and accompanies him around the bat- 
tery. The reviewing officer passes in front of the chiefs of 
platoons to the left of the line and returns to the right, 
passing in rear of the chief of caissons, or between the 
lines of carriages. The trumpets are sounded while the 
reviewing officer is passing around the battery, until he 
leaves the right of the battery to return to his post. On 
reaching the right of the line, the captain passes to the 
rear of and takes his place on the left of the reviewing 
officer. After accompanying him a few yards, he salutes, 
and moves direct to his post in front of the center of the 
battery, faces it, draws saber and commands: 1. Limber, 

2. Front. 

These commands are executed as previously explained, 
the chiefs of platoons returning to their posts in line. 

The captain then commands: 1. Platoons right wheel, 
2. March, 3. Battery, 4. Halt. 

At the command halt, given when the pivot-sections 
have completed the wheel, the guidon takes his post in 
column of platoons, the trumpeters place themselves with 
the croups of their horses fifteen yards in front of the chief 
of the first platoon; the chief of caissons and first ser- 
geant place themselves four yards from the left flank of 
the column, the chief of caissons abreast of the center, 
the first sergeant abreast of the chief of the first platoon, 



372 REVIEW OF A BATTERY. 

and the quartermaster and stable sergeants four yards 
in rear of the center of the rear platoon. 

The captain causes the cannoneers to mount, and com- 
mands: 1. Pass in review, 2. Forward, 3. March, 4. Guide 
right. 

At the command march, the column moves forward, the 
cannoneers folding their arms; the column changes direc- 
tion, without command from the captain, at the points 
indicated, the captain taking his place four yards in front 
of the chief of the first platoon immediately after the 
second change; when the trumpeters arrive at sixty 
yards from the reviewing officer they begin to sound a 
march, and, as soon as they have passed him, they wheel 
to the left out of the column and take post in front of 
and facing the reviewing officer, where they remain until 
the rear of the column has passed, when they cease 
sounding and return to their place at the head of the 
column. 

The captain salutes when at six yards from the review- 
ing officer, and returns to the carry when at six yards 
beyond him; the other officers, the first sergeant, the 
quartermaster and stable sergeants salute and return 
to the carry at the points prescribed for the captain. 
Non-commissioned officers in command of platoons sa- 
lute as prescribed for a sergeant. 

In saluting, all turn the head and look toward the re- 
viewing officer. 

The reviewing officer returns the salute of the captain 
only. 

The captain, having saluted, places himself on the 
right of the reviewing officer, and remains there until 
the rear of the battery has passed , when he salutes with 
his saber and rejoins the battery. 

When the battery arrives near its original position 
in column, the captain commands : 1. Trot (or gallop)^ 
2. March, and, at the second change of direction, places 
himself at the head of the column as before. 



REVIEW OF A BATTERY. 373 

1014* In passing in review at a trot or gallop, the 
cannoneers do not fold their arms; the captain, having 
passed the reviewing officer, places himself on his right, 
and the review terminates when the rear of the battery 
has passed the reviewing officer; the captain then salutes, 
rejoins his battery, and executes such movements as the 
reviewing officer may have directed, or marches his bat- 
tery to its park and dismisses it. 

1015. When a battery is reviewed in line with cav- 
alry or infantry, it will be formed in line with the lead 
drivers of the pieces dressed on the front rank of the in- 
fantry, or on the rank of cavalry, the captain superin- 
tending- the alignment of the front rank, and the chief 
of caissons that of the rear rank of carriages, from the 
flank of the battery opposite that on which it is dressed. 
The captain at the command prepare for re j^/eiv commands 
forward, and repeats the command march, and commands 
action in time to command front when the pieces are in 
line with the troops on his right ; the axles of the pieces 
are dressed on the front rank of the infantry, or on the 
rank of cavalry ; the chiefs of platoons place themselves 
on the line of company officers, the captain on the line 
of field officers. 

The sabers are presented and carried at the commands 
present arms and carry arms ; the captain repeats the com- 
mands presentsbiid carry, and at the command arms he com- 
mands saber. 

At the commands c/ose ranks, march, with infantry, or 
attention, posts, with cavalry, the captain commands: 
1. Limber, 2. REAR, 3. Pieces reverse, 4. Caissons forward, 
5. March, 6. Battery, 7. Halt. The command ha/t is given 
when the lead drivers of the pieces arrive on the line of 
the other troops. 

1016. The forge and battery wagon does not accom- 
pany the battery at the review. If there be no inspec- 
tion, the artificers may be assigned for duty as can- 
noneers. 



374 REVIEW OF A BATTALION. 

REVIEW OF A BATTALION. 

101 7« The battalion being in line, the major exe- 
cutes a left about and commands: 1. Prepare for review. 
Each captain commands: 1. Prepare for review, 2. Action, 
3. Front, which is executed as prescribed for the re- 
view of a battery, aligns his battery to the right and 
commands: 1. Draw, 2. Saber. 

The adjutant and sergeant major take post seven yards 
outside the flanks of the battalion, the adjutant in line 
with the chiefs of platoons, the sergeant major inline 
with the lead drivers of the pieces. 

The captains having taken their posts, the major faces 
to the front. 

The chief trumpeter joins the trumpeters of the battal- 
ion. 

The reviewing officer now approaches the major, and 
halts at thirty yards from him to receive the salute. 

The major then faces toward tha line and commands : 
1. Present, 2. Saber. 

Sabers having been presented, the major executes a 
left about and salutes. The reviewing officer having 
acknowledged the salute, the major faces toward the line 
and commands: 1. Carry, 2. Saber, resumes his front and 
returns saber. 

The reviewing officer now proceeds to the right of the 
trumpeters and is joined by the major, who salutes, places 
himself on his right and accompanies him around the bat- 
talion. The reviewing officer passes in front of the cap- 
tains to the left of the line and returns to the right, pass- 
ing in rear of the chiefs of caissons or between the lines 
of carriages. 

Or reaching the right of the line, the major passes to 
the rear of and takes his place on the left of the reviewing 
officer. After accompanying him a few yards, he salutes 
and moves direct to his post in front of the center of the 
battalion, faces it, draws saber, and commands: 1. Limber, 



i 



REVIEW OF A BATTALION. 375 

2. FRONT, 3. Platoons, 4. Right wheel, 5. March, 6. Bat- 
talion, 7. Halt. 

Executed in each battery as prescribed in the review 
of a battery; each captain, at the command halt, causes 
his cannoneers to mount, and places himself with the 
croup of his. horse four yards in front of the head of the 
horse of the chief of his leading* platoon; the adjutant 
and sergeant major place themselves seven yards from 
the right flank of the column, the former abreast of the 
leaders of the leading carriage of the column, the latter 
abreast of the leaders of the rear carriage of the column; 
the trumpeters take post with the croups of the rear-rank 
horses fifteen yards in front of the head of the horse of 
the captain of the leading battery. 

The major then commands: 1. Pass in Review, 2. Fi>f^ 
ward, 3. MARCH, 4. Guide right 

At the command march, the column passes in review 
according to the principles prescribed for the review of a 
battery, except that each captain remains at the head of 
his battery after saluting the reviewing officer; the 
major, immediately after the second change of direc- 
tion, places himself with the croup of his horse four 
yards in front of the head of the horse of the captain of 
the leading battery, and having saluted, takes post on the 
right of the reviewing officar. His rear battery having 
passed, the major salutes with his saber, rejoins his bat- 
tery and concludes the review as prescribed for the bat- 
tery, after which the batteries, unless otherwise directed, 
are marched to their parks and dismissed. 

1019. The battalion may be marched in review in 
column of batteries at full distance or in close column, 
as explained for column of platoons. The close column 
is formed on the leading battery immediately after the 
batteries have wheeled to the right. 

Review of a Battalion with Diminished Intervals. 
1020. The battalion is formed in line, each battery 
being closed to any convenient interval; the interval 



£J70 REVIEW OF TWO OR MORE BATTALIONS. 

l3etween batteries is double the interval between the 
sections of a battery . The guns are not unlimbered when 
line for review is formed with diminished intervals. 

The review is conducted on the principles previously 
explained, except that the captains omit the commands 
action, front, right, dress, front; the battalion passes in re- 
view in column of batteries with diminished intervals. 

REVIEW OP TWO OR MORE BATTALIONS. 

103 !• The commanding officer of two or more bat- 
talions is designated as colonel. The battalions are 
formed in line with an interval of sixty yards between 
battalions, the colonel takes post facing to the front, op- 
posite the center, and thirty yards in advance of the line 
of majors; his staff takes post in single rank, six yards 
in his rear, the non-commissioned staff and chief trum- 
peter, the latter on the right, three yards in rear of the 
staff. 

On the arrival of the reviewing officer, the colonel 
causes the trumpeter to sound attention, which being re- 
peated in each battalion, each major prepares his battal- 
ion for review. 

The reviewing officer having halted at thirty yards 
from the colonel, the colonel faces the line, commands: 
1. Present,2. Saber, resumes his post, and salutes the re- 
viewing officer. The salute being acknowledged , he faces 
about and commands: 1. Carry, 2. Saber. The colonel 
and his staff then return saber and join the reviewing 
officer, the colonel placing himself on his right and salut- 
ing, the staff placing themelves on the right of the staff 
of the reviewing officer, unless the reviewing officer ad- 
vances alone, in which case the colonel alone joins and 
accompanies him, the staff remaining at its post with 
sabers drawn. 

The reviewing officer then goes to the right of the 
line, passes in rear of the line of battalion commanders 
to the left, and returns in rear of the line to the right. 



REVIEW OF TWO OR MORE BATTALIONS. 377 

When the reviewing oflRcer, having passed around the 
line, returns to its right, the colonel salutes, resumes his 
post draws saber and causes the attention and platoons or 
battery right wheel to be sounded. Each major limbers his 
battalion to the front, forms column of platoons or bat- 
teries to the right, commands: J. Pass in review, 2. For- 
ward, di,n^ then places himself at the head of his battalion. 

The colonel then causes forward, march and guide right 
to be sounded; and the column marches in review, con- 
forming to the principles prescribed for the review of a 
battalion. 

The distance between the rear of the rear rank car- 
riages of a battalion andthe^ead horses of the following 
battalion is the interval between battalions in line, plus 
the front of the subdivision in column (platoon or oat- 
te ry) , less thirty- two yards (depth of a section). 

When the column has made its second change of direc- 
tion, the colonel, followed by his staff and non-commis- 
sioned staff, places himself thirty yards in front of the 
trumpeters of the leading battalion; the colonel, having 
saluted, places himself on the right of the reviewing of- 
ficer; the staff and non-commissioned staff salute and 
return to the carry at the same time as the colonel; the 
trumpeters of each battalion wheel out of the column 
and sound the march until the rear of their battalion 
has passed, when they follow in rear of their battalion. 
The majors remain at the head of their battalions, and 
after passing in review, unless otherwise directed, con- 
duct their battalions to camp. 

The rear of the colunm having passed, the colonel sa- 
lutes the reviewing officer. The acknowledgment of the 
salute terminates the review. 

The battalions may be formed in line with closed in- 
tervals, or they maybe formed in two or more lines with 
full or closed intervals. 

The interval between battalions in line with closed 



378 REVIEW OF A BRIGADE. 

intervals is double the interval between the batteries of 
a battalion. 

If formed in two or more lines, the distance between 
battalions is sixty yards; in two or more lines or in sin- 
gle line with closed intervals, the guns are not unlim- 
bered. The reviewing officer having passed around the 
batteries, all the battalions are formed in column; the 
battalions in the second and following lines are put in 
march in time for each to follow the battalion preced- 
ing at the proper distance. 

REVIEW OF A BRIGADE. 

1022« The review of tBe brigade of light artillery is 
conducted as prescribed for the review of two or more 
battalions; the battalions are posted as directed by the 
corps commander. 

The brigade commander is in front of the center of the 
brigade, sixty yards in advance of the line of majors; his 
staff, flag, and orderlies are in the order prescribed for 
the staff, flag, and orderlies of the reviewing officer (Par. 
997), The colonel commanding the corps artillery, his 
staff, and non-commissioned staff take the positions pre- 
scribed for the colonel, staff, and non-commissioned staff 
in the review of two or more battalions, both in line and 
column. 

The brigade commander and his staff draw saber when 
the reviewing officer halts to receive the salute of the 
brigade. 

The brigade commander, with his staff, flag, and order- 
lies, takes post in the column for review when at one hun- 
dred yards from the reviewing officer; if the corps artil- 
lery leads, he is thirty yards in front of the colonel com- 
manding it; if the divisional artillery leads, he is thirty 
yards in front of the trumpeters of the leading battalion. 
If necessary, distance is gained when the column is put 
in march to enable the colonel commanding the corps 
artillery to take his position. 



GUARD MOUNTING OF A BATTERY. 379 

The brigade commander, accompanied by his staff, flag, 
and orderlies, and the colonel commanding the corps ar- 
tillery, turn out of the column and take post with there- 
viewing officer. The brigade commander and his staff 
draw saber when they take their places in column before 
passing in review; they return saber after placing them- 
selves on the right of the reviewing officer. 

GUARD MOUNTING OF A BATTERY. 

1023. At the assembly, the men warned for stable and 
park guard duty fall in on the battery parade ground in 
two ranks facing to the right; the non-commissioned offi- 
cers and supernumerary fall in as file-closers; the first 
sergeant then faces the detail to the left, verifies it, opens 
ranks, causes sabers to be drawn, inspects the dress and 
general appearance of the men, replaces by the super- 
numerary any man whose condition makes Ifiim unfit to 
march on guard, and then closes the ranks. If the super- 
numerary be no longer required, he is dismissed. 

The trumpeters take post on the battery or garrison 
parade ground. 

At adjutant's call, the new battery officer of the day, 
who mounts the guard, takes post so as to be six yards 
in front of and facing the center of the guard when 
formed. 

The first sergeant marches his detail to the parade 
ground, the trumpeters sounding a march in quick time, 
and halts the detail in line so that the front-rank man of 
the right file shall be two yards to the left of the left 
trumpeter; he then places himself two yards in front of 
the center of the detail, salutes and reports to the officer; 
Sir, the detail is correct; or, Sir, (so many) non-commissioned 
officers or privates are absent; he then faces to the left and 
takes post two yards to the left of the front rank. 

The officer then draws saber, and. commands: 1. Open 
ranks, 2. March. 

At the command marcfi, the ranks are opened; the front 



380 GUARD MOUNTING OF A BATTERY. 

rank dresses to the right, the rear rank steps back three 
yards, halts, and dresses to the right; the senior non- 
commissioned officer plac3S himself on the right of the 
front rank; the other non-commissioned officers three 
yards in rear of the rear rank. The officer verities the 
alignment of both ranks and commands: Front, and 
1. Inspection, 2. ARMS, returns his saber, and inspects the 
guard. 

If any man does not present a creditable appearance, 
the officer directs the first sergeant to replace him after 
the guard is mounted. 

The inspection being finished , the officer places himself 
six yards in front of and facing the center of the guard, 
draws his sabsr. and commands: 1. Parade, 2. Rest, 
3. Sound off, and comes to a parade rest. 

The trumpeters sound off, remaining on the right of 
the guard. 

The officer then comes to a carry and commands: 

1. Guard, 2. Attention, 3. Close ranks, 4. March, 5. Guard 
to its post 6. Right, 7. Face. 8. Forward, 9. March. 

At the ninth command, the guard moves to its post, 
preceded by the trumpeters, who sound a march in quick 
time; the senior non-commissioned officer marches near 
its left and rear, so as to obsarve its movements; if there 
be a file-closer, he takes his place as guide; the officer 
and first sergeant return saber and retire. 

As the new guard approaches the guard-house the old 
guard is formed in line, its commander on the right of 
the front rank; when the trumpaters of the new guard ar- 
rive nearly opposite its left, the commander of the old 
guard commands: 1. Present, 2. SABER. 

The new guard having passed, he commands: 1. Carry, 

2. Saber. 

The new guard marches in quick time past the old 
guard, the commander saluting. 

The trumpeters having marched three yards beyond the 
right of the old guard, change direction to the right, 



GUARD MOUNTING OF A BATTERY. 381 

and, followed by the guard, change direction to the left 
when on a line with the file-closers of tha old guard; the 
changes of direction are without command. The com- 
mander of the new guard halts on the line of the front 
rank of the old guard and allows his guard to march past 
him; when its rear, after having changed direction to the 
left, approaches, he halts the guard, faces it to the left, 
places himself three yards to the right of the old guard 
and in line with its front rank, and then dresses the 
guard to the left; the trumpeters are two yards to the 
right of its front rank. 

The new guard being dressed, the commander of each 
guard commands: 1. Present, 2. Saber, salutes, and then 
commands: 1. Carry, 2. SABER. 

The commander of the new guard now divides the 
guard into three reliefs, numbers them first, second, and 
tt)ird, from right to left, and directs a list of the guard to 
be made ; he then takes possession of the guard-house or 

I guard-tent, and the articles and prisoners under charge 
of the guard. 
While the sentinels are being relieved, the two guards 
stand at ease and the commander of the old guard gives 
to the commander of the new guard all the information 
and the instructions relating to his post. 

The first relief having been designated, its corporal 
commands: Call off. Beginning on the right, the men 
call off, alternately in the rear and front rank : one, two, 
three, four, and so on; the corporal then commands: 
1. Right. 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH. 

The corporal marches on the left and near the rear 
file, in order to observe the march. The corporal of the 
old guard marches on the right of the leading rank and 
takes command when the last one of the old sentinels is 
relieved, changing places with the corporal of the new 
guard. 

When the relief arrives at fifteen yards from a sen- 
tinel, he halts and faces toward it, saber at a carry ; at 



382 GUARD MOUNTING OF A BATTERY. 

six yards from him, the corporal commands: 1, Relief, 
2. Halt. The corporal then adds, according to the num- 
ber of the post: 1. Number ( ), 2. Post 

The new sentinel approaches the old, halts at about 
one pace from him, and both execute port saber. The 
old sentinel, under supervision of both corporals, gives 
in a low tone his instructions to the new sentinel ; both 
then come to attention. 

The corporal then commands : 1. Forward, 2. March. 

As the relief passes, the old sentinel takes his place in 
rear ; the other sentinels are relieved in a similar man- 
ner. 

The sentinel at the guard-house is the first relieved, 
and is left behind. 

The sentinels of the old guard having come in, form 
on its left, and both guards are brought to a carry; the 
trumpeters place themselves two yards to the right of 
the old guard on line with the front rank; the com- 
mander of the old guard places himself two yar^s in 
front of its center; the commander of the new guard 
places himself on the right of its front rank; the com- 
mander of the old guard then marches it with the guide 
right, six yards to the front, when he commands: 1. By 
the right f/anic, 2. March. At the command march, the 
guard faces to the right, the trumpeters begin to sound , 
and the guard marches in quick time past the new guard, 
which stands at present saber, the commanders of both 
guards saluting; the old guard is then marched to the 
battery parade ground and dismissed. 

The new guard is brought to a carry as soon as the 
old guard has passed. 

The commander of the guard then makes himself ac- 
quainted with all the instructions for his post, visits the 
sentinels and questions them relative to the instructions 
they have received from the old guard. 

The battery officers of the day visit and inspect the 
guard-house or tents while the old guard is being re- 



BATTALION PARADE. 383 

lieved, verify the number of prisoners, and then proceed 
to the office or presence of the battery commander, who 
receives the report of the old officer of the day, relieves 
him, and gives his instructions to the new officer of the 
day. 

In visiting" the guard-house, each officer of the day is 
saluted by his own guard, its commander commanding: 
1. Present, 2. Saber. 

When other officers entitled to a salute approach, the 
senior commander of the two guards commands: 1. Old 
and new guards, 2. Present, 3. Saber. 

In rendering honors, the commander of the guard pre- 
sents saber and carries saber with it, standing on the 
right of the front rank. If the commander of the guard 
only is armed with a saber, the guard is brought to atten- 
tion^ and he alone salutes, and without command. 

1 0tB4* In bad weather, at night, or after long marches, 
the music may be dispensed with, at the discretion of 
the commanding officer. 

BATTALION PARADE. 

1025* At the assembly (the batteries, ordinarily with- 
out caissons, being already formed at their respective 
parks), each captain causes sabers to be drawn and in- 
spects the general appearance of his battery. On the 
completion of the inspection, the trumpeters of the bat- 
talion, formed in single or double rank, at a position pre- 
viously selected by the adjutant, sound adjutant's call. 

The battalion line is then formed as prescribed in Pars. 
837 and 838, the guidons being on the right of their re- 
spective batteries. 

When all the captains have taken their prop^ posi- 
tions, after having dressed their batteries, the adjutant 
faces to his left, has attention sounded, and commands : 
1. Action, 2. Front. 

The captains command: 1, Action, 2. Front, 3. Right, 



384 BATTALION PARADE. 

4. Dress, 5. Front, which are executed as prescribed 
in Par. 1013, except that the chiefs of caissons take their 
places on the line of lieutenants, opposite the canter of 
the battery; the adjutant and sergeant major take post 
as prescribed for review (Par. 1017). 

Non-commissioned officers commanding* platoons take 
post half-way between their sections and on the line of 
the muzzles of the pieces. 

The commanding officer takes post in front of and fac- 
ing the center of the battalion, and at a convenient dis- 
tance, generally equal to half its front. 

The adjutant commands: Sound off; at which the 
trumpeters, beginning on the right, sound a march in 
quick time, passing in front of the captains to the left of 
the line and back to their posts on the right, when they 
cease. 

The adjutant then passes at a trot by the shortest line 
to a point half-way between the commanding officer and 
the center of the line, faces the line, halts, and com- 
mands: 1. Present 2. Saber. 

At the command sabei\ the officers and non-commis 
sioned officers whose sabers are drawn present saber. 
The adjutant then executes a left about, salutes the com- 
manding officer, and reports: Sir, the parade is formed. 

The commanding officer directs the adjutant: Receive 
the reports, sir. 

The adjutant executes a left about and commands : 
1. Carry, 2. Saber, and then adds: 

1. First sergeants, 2. Front and center, 3. Trot, 4. MARCH. 

At the second command, the first sergeants and the 
chief trumpeter place themselves two yards in front of 
the line of muzzles, and face toward the center. 

At tBe command march, they move in rear of the line 
of officers to the center, and successively face to the 
front; the adjutant then commands: Report. 

At this command, beginning on the right, they suc- 
cessively salute and report; the chief trumpeter, Trum- 



BATTALION PARADE. 385 

peters present or accounted for; or, (So many) trumpeters 
absent; thesergeants, Battery ('^ A, ^^ etc.,) present or accounted 
for; or, (So many) sergeants, corporals, or privates absent. 
The reports having baen made, the adjutant commands: 
1. First sergeants, 2. Posts, 3. Trot, 4. March. 

At the command march, they successively wheel out- 
ward, and resume their posts. 

The adjutant then turns left about, salutes the com- 
manding officer and reports: Sir, all are present or accounted 
for; or, Sir, (so many) officers (or enlisted men) are absent 
The commanding officer returns his salute and directs: 
Publish the orders, sir; at which the adjutant turns left about 
and commands: Attention to orders; he reads the orders 
and then commands: 1. Officers, 2. Center, 3. March. 

At the command officers, all the officers return saber. 

At the command march, the officers turn and close to- 
ward the center and successively turn to the front and 
halt eleven yards from the line; the two officers nearest 
the center preserve an interval for the adjutant, who 
passes through, four yards to the rear, turns about and 
halts; all the officers having formed, the adjutant rides 
up to his place. The senior battery officer commands: 
1. Forward, 2. Guide center, 3. March. 

Officers advance, the trumpeters sounding; the adju- 
tantis the guide and marches on the major; at six yards 
from the major, the senior battery officer commands: 
1. Officers, 2. Halt. 

The music ceases; the officers halt and salute, keep 
the hand at the visor till the salute is returned, and drop 
it at the same time with the major's. The major then 
gives such instructions as he may deem necessary, and 
this concludes the ceremony. 

The officers then return to their batteries, which are 
conducted by them to their respective parks and dis- 
missed. 

9236 25 



386 INSPECTION OF A BATTERY. 

INSPECTION OP A BATTERY. 

1026. If there be both inspection and review, the in- 
spection may either precede or follow the review. The 
battery being in line, the captain commands: 1. Draw, 
2. Saber, salutes the inspector, who directs him to pre- 
pare his battery for inspection. The captain then com- 
mands: 1. Prepare for inspection, 2. Action, 3. Front, 4. Right, 
5. Dress, 6. Front. 

These commands are executed as prescribed for review. 

If the battery wagon and forge is present, it is fifteen 
yards from the left of the battery, in line with the pieces; 
the quartermaster sergeant is four yards to the left of, 
and the stable sergeant is boot to boot with, its lead 
driver; the artificers have the same posts in reference 
to the battery wagon and forge that the cannoneers have 
at a piece limbered, the senior artificer taking the post 
and performing the duties corresponding to the gunner 
of a detachment; if there are only four or less artificers, 
and they have horses, they are formed in single rank. 

At the command, action, front, the battery wagon and 
forge executes two left abouts as prescribed for the lim- 
bers, and takes its place in line with them. 

The inspecting officer inspects the captain, and then 
the chiefs of platoons, beginning on the right; passing 
around the left of the battery, he inspects the chief of 
caissons, then goes to the right and inspects the trum- 
peters and guidon; the inspector next goes to the right 
section of the right platoon and inspects the section; 
beginning with the chief, who executes inspection saber, 
he passes in front of the piece, along the right of the sec- 
tion, and in rear of the caisson, returning by the left of 
the section to the front; he then goes to the left section 
of the right platoon and inspects it, as prescribed for the 
right section ; he then inspects the other sections in like 
manner. 

As the inspector approaches each limber, No. 5 opens 



INSPECTION OF A BATTERY. 387 

the lid of the chest so as to show its contents ; he closes 
the lid as soon as the inspector passes the limber on its 
left. No. 6 opens and closes the lid of the caisson lim- 
ber-chest, as explained for No. 5; he also, when so di- 
rected, opens and closes the lids of the other chests. 

The chiefs of sections, first sergeant, and quartermas- 
ter sergeant, execute inspection saber as the inspector ap- 
proaches them. 

The captain, as soon as inspected, returns saber and 
accompanies the inspector. Each chief of platoon ac- 
companies the inspector during the inspection of his 
platoon ; he then returns to his post, faces to the rear, 
and remains at ease. 

As soon as the battery wagon and forge, after the com- 
mands action, front, has taken its place in line with the 
limbers, the senior artificer opens the lids of the chests 
and resumes his post. If mounted, he dismounts and 
gives the reins of his horse to the artificer next him. 
He closes the chests when the battery wagon and forge 
has been inspected, and mounts. 

The inspection being completed, the captain, upon an 
intimation from the inspector, forms line, marches the 
battery to its park, and dismisses it. 

The inspector prescribes the dress of the battery for 
inspection. 

The battery carries for inspection every article that is 
furnished as part of its regular equipment and for which 
there is a specially designated place assigned on the gun 
carriage, limber, or caisson. The knapsacks and sad- 
dle-bags may be inspected in quarters at the discretion 
of the inspector. 

When an inspection follows a review with the other 
arms, the light artillery proceeds, at the proper time, to 
the place designated by the inspector and is inspected 
separately. 

. 102 T* The battery will be frequently inspected in full 
marching order — the men in blouses, and equipped with 



388 INSPECTION OF A BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

haversacks and canteens; knapsacks and saddle-bags 
packed; overcoats, when not worn, rolled and strapped 
to the knapsacks or saddles; blankets for mounted men 
strapped to the saddles; horses equipped with nosebags 
and halters; caissons loaded with one day's forage. 

INSPECTION OF A BATTERY DISMOUNTED. 

102§. The battery being in line, sabers drawn, the , 
captain presents sabers and himself salutes the inspector, 
who directs him to prepare his battery for inspection. 

The captain causes the ranks to be opened, and then 
commands: 1. Inspection, 2. Arms; or if the battery is 
armed with revolvers and knives he commands: 1, Draw, 
2. Knives, 3. Inspection, 4. Arms. 

The captain, as soon as inspected, returns saber and 
accompanies the inspector, who, having inspected the 
chiefs of platoons, passes around the left of the battery 
and inspects the chief of caissons; the inspector next 
inspects the front rank, the rear rank, and the line of 
non-commissioned file-closers, beginning on the right of 
each, and returning by its left and rear; the inspection 
is conducted as explained in the School of the Soldier Dis- 
mounted. During the inspection of the ranks, the lieu- 
tenants stand at ease, the chiefs of platoons facing about. 

On the completion of the iaspection, the captain closes 
the ranks and dismisses the battery. 

At inspection of quarters, the inspector is accompanied 
by all the officers, or by such of them as he may desig- 
nate; the men, without accouterments, stand uncovered 
in front of their respective bunks; in camp, they stand, 
covered, without accouterments, in front of their tents; 
the senior non-commissioned officer, upon the approach 
of the inspector, commands: 1. Battery [Platoon ov Section), 
2. Attention. At the second command, the men stand 
at attention but do not salute; in camp, the non-commis- 
sioned officer salutes. 



MUSTER OF A BATTERY. 389 

INSPECTION OF A BATTALION. 

1029. The battalion is inspected in line accordinof to 
the principles prescribed for a single battery. The major, 
as soon as inspected, returns saber and accompanies the 
inspector. The inspector, passing in front of the cap- 
tains, beginning on the right, inspects the captains and 
chiefs of platoons; passing around the left flank of the 
battalion, he inspects the chiefs of caissons; he then goes 
to the right, and beginning with the trumpeters and 
guidon, makes a minute inspection of the first battery. 
The captain of the first battery joins the inspector and 
accompanies him during the inspection of his battery; 
the chiefs of platoons accompany the inspector during 
the inspection of their platoons. 

Drivers are dismounted and the men brought to rest 
in the batteries not undergoing inspection. Each cap- 
tain, at the approach of the inspector, brings his battery 
to attention and mounts the drivers. 

At the discretion of the inspector, each battery may 
be dismissed as soon as inspected. 

MUSTER OF A BATTERY. 

1030* Muster, when practicable, is preceded by an in- 
spection and review. 

The review completed, the captain causes sabers to 
be returned and commands: Attention to muster. 

The mustering officer, or captain, then calls the names 
on the roll; each man as his name is called answers: 
'^Here," Each cannoneer, as he answers to his name, 
steps a yard to his right or left, according as he is on the 
right or left of the piece; the roll having been called, each 
cannoneer resumes his post; each mounted man, as he 
answers to his name, dismounts and stands to horse, the 
mounted men remount at the commands for the drivers. 

The captain provides himself with the roll of his bat- 
tery, and with a list of absentees alphabetically arranged. 



390 FUNERAL ESCORT. 

After muster, the presence of men reported in hospital, 
and on guard, is verified by the mustering officer, who is 
accompanied by the captain. 

If the battery be mustered dismounted, the ranks are 
opened and the sabers drawn; each man after answering 
to his name returns his saber. 

FUNERAL ESCORT. 

1031* The funeral honors of general officers and offi- 
cers of foot artillery are the same as prescribed for offi- 
cers in Infantry Drill Regulations. 

1032. The escorts of officers of light artillery are as 
follows: colonel, twelve pieces; lieutenant colonel and 
major, eight pieces; captain, four pieces; lieutenant, two 
pieces; enlisted men, one piece. If more convenient, the 
caissons need not accompany their pieces. 

1033. An officer's escort, wlien practicable, is com- 
manded by an officer of the same grade; that of an en- 
listed man is commanded by a sergeant. 

1034. The escort is formed with the center opposite 
the tent or quarters of the deceased, the detachments in 
front, the trumpeters on that flank of the escort toward 
which it is to march. 

Upon the appeai'ance of the remains, the commander 
commands: 1. Present, 2. Saber. 

At the second command , the officers and non-commis- 
sioned officers whose sabers are drawn present saber, 
and the trumpeters sound an appropriate air; sabers are 
then carried, after which the coffin is taken to the flank 
of the escort opposite the trumpeters; the cannoneers are 
then posted at their pieces, and tlie escort is formed in 
column of platoons or sections. 

The procession is formed in the following order: 
1. Trumpeters, 2, Escort, 3. Clergy, 4. Remainsand pall-bearers. 
5. Mourners, 6. Members of the former command of the deceased, 
7. Other officers and enlisted men, 8. Distinguished persons, 
9, Delegations, 10, Societies,!!, Civilians. Officers or enlisted 



FUNERAL ESCORT. 391 

men joining the procession are in side-arms and in order 
of rank, seniors in front. 

The procession being formed, the commander of the 
escort puts it in march. 

The escort marches at a walk to solemn music, and, on 
arriving at the grave, is formed in line with the center 
opposite the grave; the detachments are next brought to 
the front; the remains are then carried along the front 
of the escort to the grave, sabers are presented, and the 
trumpets sound an appropriate air; the coffin having 
been placed over the grave, the music ceases, and sabers 
are carried. 

The commander next commands: 1. Parade, 2. Rest. 

At the second command, the detachments execute 
parade rest and incline the head. 

After the coffin is lowered into the grave and the 
funeral services are completed, the commander com- 
mands: 1. Batter/ (or -), 2. Attention, orders the 

cannoneers to their posts, and then fires three salvos 
with blank cartridges. After the last salvo, taps are 
sounded by the trumpeters. 

The escort is then formed into column, marched to the 
point where it was assembled, and dismissed. 

The funeral ceremony for an enlisted man is the same 
as for an officer, except that the commands present and 
carry saber are omitted; the sergeant in command of the 
escort presents saber on the appearance of the remains 
at the quarters of the deceased, and also when the re- 
mains are carried along the front of the escort to the 
grave. 

When it is impracticable for the pieces to approach the 
grave, they are left outside the inclosure. The officers, 
non-commissioned staff officers, first sergeants, quarter- 
master sergeants, stable sergeants, and trumpeters dis- 
mount, turn over their horses to the drivers, and all 
except the trumpeters draw saber; the detachments are 
S^xt formed in column of detachments; the remains are 



392 FUNERAL ESCORT. 

then escorted to the grave, where line is formed and the 
same ceremonies are performed as before prescribed. 

The ceremony at the grave having been completed, 
the detachments are marched to the guns and three 
salvos are fired. 

In all funeral ceremonies, six pall- bearers may be se- 
lected from the grade of the deceased, or the grades next 
above or below it. If a commissioned officer, the coffin 
is borne by six non-commissioned officers; if a non-com- 
missioned officer or private, by six privates. 

At the funeral of a mounted officer or enlisted man, 
his horse, in mourning caparison, follows the hearse. 

When necessary to escort the remains from the quar- 
ters of the deceased to the church, before the funeral 
services, sabers are presented upon receiving the re- 
mains at the quarters, and also as they are borne into the 
chapel. 

The commander of the escort, previous to the funeral, 
gives the clergyman and pall-bearers all the needful di- 
rections. 



ORGANIZATION. 393 



oega:^ization of aetilleey. 

1035. Artillery troops are divided into light artillery 
and heavy artillery. To the lig-ht artillery belongs the 
service of the batteries that maneuver with troops in 
the field. 

1036. The lig-ht artillery batteries include horse bat- 
teries, in which the cannoneers are mounted on horseback; 
field batteries, in which the cannoneers march by the side 
of their pieces, or are mounted on the ammunition chests, 
axle-seats, and off horses; and mountain batteries, in which 
the pieces may be transported on pack animals. 

1037* Machine batteries are designated, according to 
their equipment and model of gun, as horse, field, or moun- 
tain^ Gatling, Gardner, etc., batteries. 

The 3.2 gun is used in both field and horse batteries; 
the 3.6 gun is used in field batteries only. 

103 S. A field battery equipped with the 3.2 gun is 
called a light field battery; one equipped with the 3.6 gun 
is called a heavy field battery. 

1039* The heavy artillery of an army in the field con- 
sists of those batteries which serve the siege and posi- 
tion guns and the artillery ammunition and supply 
trains. 

1040. The light artillery of an army corps consists of 
divisional artillery and corps artillery. 

t041. The divisional artillery consists of a battalion 
of from two to four batteries, is an integral part of the 
division, and is commanded by a field officer, who has a 
staff consisting of an adjutant (lieutenant), sergeant ma- 
jor, quartermaster sergeant, and chief trumpeter. 

i042* The corps artillery consists of two or more 
battalions; it is composed of field and horse batteries in 
suitable proportions, and is commanded by a colonel, who 



394 ORGANIZATION. 

has a staff consisting of an adjutant (lieutenant), a quar- 
termaster and commissary (lieutenant), sergeant major, 
quartermaster sergeant, and chief trumpeter. 

1043. All the artillery attached to an army corps 
constitutes an artillery brigade. 

J044L* A battalion of horse artillery is attached to 
and is a part of each division of cavalry. 

In smaller commands, a battery may be attached to an 
infantry or cavalry brigade. 

1045. The proportion of light artillery is from three 
to four guns to one thousand men. 

1046. The chief of artillery of any army or corps is 
a brigadier general, and is on the staff of the commander 
of the corps. The corps artillery is under the orders of 
the brigadier general, chief of artillery, and he also as- 
sumes control of the divisional artillery in action when 
ordered to do so by the corps commander. 

1047. The field officer commanding the divisional 
artillery is the chief of artillery of the division, and is 
on the staff of the division commander, but he will en- 
camp with the divisional artillery. 

Composition of Light Batteries. 

i04§« A battery consists of a fixed number of pieces 
and caissons, a battery- wagon and forge, and a store- 
wagon, together with a sufficient number of officers, men. 
and horses for the efficient service of the battery. 

Organization of Light Batteries. 

1049. A battery is maintained on one of the following 
footings: 1. For instruction; 2. For war. 



ORGANIZATION. 



395 





Instruc- 
tion. 


War. 




Field battery. 


6 guns. 
4 caissons. 


6 guns. 
9 caissons. 






u 

B 
o 


g 
^ 


o 


o 
O 


1 


02 
O 




Captain 


1 

3 


■«2 

6 

c9 

e4 

2 

1 


"2 
6 
3 


1 
4 






i Commanding the p 1 a - 
> toons and caissons. 


liieutenants 






Staff -sergeants . 
Sergeants 


63 

6 

^15 

/5 

2 
1 

1 
48 
84 

8 


3 
6 
9 
5 
2 
1 
4 
96 

'16 

2 


a First sergeant, stable 
and veterinary ser- 
geant. 


Corporals 




Artificers 




b First sergeant, quarter- 
master-sergeant, and 
stable and veterinary 
sergeant. 


Trumpeters 

Guidon 


.... 


2 
1 




Wagoner 




Drivers 




24 

36 


48 


.... 


cSix gunners and three 


Cannoneers 




caisson corporals. 
c^Six gunners and nine 

caisson corporals. 
6 Two blacksmiths, one 


Supernumerary 
drivers 








Spare horses . . . 






4 




Range finders 








2 


saddler, one machinist 












/Three blacksmiths, one 
saddler, one machinist. 


Total 


4 


84 


66 


5 


175 


144 



The machinist should be conversant with the construc- 
tion and mechanism of the gun, and competent to make 
the ordinary repairs it may require. 

The men should be intelligent, active, and muscular, 
and not less than five feet five inches nor more than six 
feet in height ; very large men are specially undesirable; 
the great majority should be men accustomed to horses; 
a suitable proportion must be mechanics. 

If a public horse be allowed to each subaltern, the num- 
ber of horses in the above table will be proportionately 
increased. 

The battery- wagon and forge, and the store- wagon. 



396 ORGANIZATION. 

when not horsed, must be kept with the battery and 
equipped with the proper tools and stores. 

When a battery on the instruction footing is ordered 
to march, it must be supplied with additional horses nec- 
essary to horse all the carriages. 

In horse batteries, in addition to the number of horses 
above named, ten saddle horses (including one spare 
horse) are required for each gun detachment. 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 397 



AETILLEEY 11^ THE FIELD. 

1050. General remarks. — Artillery has no independent 
role on the battle-field ; it acts in conjunction with the 
other arms ; its duty is to prepare and support. 

1051. As a tactical principle, artillery is employed 
in battalions of three or four batteries, or in groups of 
two or three battalions; ordinarily it marches and fights 
by battalion, and it rarely happens that a single battery 
is isolated except as part of an advance or rear guard or 
of a detachment for some special service. A single bat- 
tery should never be broken up except for fighting in 
streets and other contracted places in which it would be 
impossible to find room in a single position for all its 
guns. 

1052. The chief of artillery accompanies the officer 
commanding the troops during his reconnaissance of the 
ground and enemy, in order to understand the situation, 
the nature of the operations contemplated, and to receive 
hi« orders. He takes personal command of the artillery 
when it is ordered into action, remains with it, and is 
kept informed by the commanding officer of the troops 
as to his plans. 

1053. When it is decided to deliver battle, the great- 
est possible artillery force should be brought into action 
by the assailant as soon as the direction to be given the 
attack can be determined, the divisional artillery being 
detached from its divisions and brought to the front to 
strengthen the artillery line; any guns in excess of the 
enemy's strength should be employed to outflank his 
position with the object of enfilading it. The defense 
should bring all its guns into action as soon as the attack 
is developed. While endeavoring to bring the artillery 
early into action, care must be taken not to expose it to 
the danger of being attacked on the march by parties of 
the enemy unexpectedly unmasked; nor to deploy it be- 



398 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

fore the extent and front of the enemy's position is known, 
in order to avoid changes of front and flank marches 
after the artillery has come into action; nor to mass a 
greater force in isolated positions than the object to be 
attained requires. 

10eS4. The service which artillery can render in ac- 
tion depends upon its skill in shooting at movable as well 
as fixed targets. 

1055. A battery that has expended all its ammuni- 
tion does not retire ; a fresh supply should be delivered 
to it on the firing line. 

1056. A disabled gun is not sent to the rear during 
the action ; if it can not be repaired on the firing line it 
is left there. 

105*7. As a rule, batteries are not relieved, but are 
supported by fresh batteries. 

105§. Batteries will not retire, even in the face of 
imminent danger, without orders. The loss of well- 
served guns in the defense of a position, or in close sup- 
port of the other arms, is honorable. 

1059. A battery occupies a front that varies from 
sixty-two to one hundred and twenty-five yards; a bat- 
talion of four batteries, one that varies from three hun- 
dred to six hundred yards. The intervals reserved for 
infantry between consecutive groups of batteries should 
not exceed twelve hundred or fifteen hundred yards. 

1060. If the ground is open, artillery can defend its 
own front, and the longer the line of guns the greater 
their security; advantage can be taken of this defensive 
power of artillery to employ it to close open ground in a 
line of battle. 

1061. When it is intended to bring on an engage- 
ment, the advance-guard artillery acts with energy and 
boldness; otherwise, with caution, in order to avoid in- 
volving the advance guard in an action from which it 
can not be disengaged without the intervention of the 
main body. 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 399 

1062. The principal duty of artillery in the offensive 
is to prepare for the infantry attack. To fulfill this duty, 
the entire artillery comes into action at the earliest mo- 
ment to eng-ag-e in the artillery duel, and endeavors to 
subdue the hostile artillery fire. When a superiority of 
fire is quickly attained, the success of the offensive move- 
ment may be regarded as assured. After preparing* the 
attack, the artillery energ-etically supports the action of 
the other arms. In the preparation of the attack, artil- 
lery may succeed in so completely breaking- down resist- 
ance at a particular point that it can be occupied with- 
out further fig-hting. 

1063. In the defense, artillery acts first to prevent 
the assault and afterward to defeat it; in this case its 
action may also be decisive. 

If the artillery of the defense can gain and keep the 
superiority, the possibilities are against the success of 
an infantry attack; and therefore the artillery duel 
should not be declined unless the artillery of the defense 
is relatively very weak, or the ground is such as to com- 
pel the enemy to deploy at a great distance. If the duel 
is declined, the batteries should be kept concealed until 
the beginning of the infantry attack. If the defense is 
overpowered in the artillery duel, it withdraws the bat- 
teries that suffer most, but all the batteries occupy the 
emplacement designated for close defense when the in- 
fantry attack takes place. 

1064. The authority of the artillery commander. — The full 
effect of artillery can be produced only when its action is 
guided by a single chief who receives his orders direct 
from the general commanding. 

The divisional artillery is detached from its division 
and placed under the command of the chief of artillery 
of the corps only by the order of the corps commander, 
and once detached it does not again come under the con- 
trol of the division commander except by the same au- 
thority. 



400 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

The divisional artillery should be returned to the con- 
trol of the division commander whenever the division is 
to be closely engaged. 

When the chief of artillery assumes personal command 
of the artillery line, he takes post with that part of the 
command where he can best supervise the action of the 
whole, and keep himself in communication vith the corps 
commander in order to receive his instructions. The 
corps commander should keep the chief of artillery fully 
informed as to his plans, and transmit all information 
necessary to the artillery. The same principles apply to 
the chief of artillery of a division when its artillery acts 
under the orders of the division commander. 

The advance guard ai'tillery remains under the orders 
of the commander of the advance guard until the general 
commanding directs it to report to the artillery officer 
commanding its battalion. 

The orders for the movement of artillery from one part 
of the line to another, and also for the commencement 
of any special stage of an offensive battle, should emanate 
from the general commanding. In a defensive action, 
the orders detailing the batteries that are to be employed 
against the advance guard and when they are to come 
into action, when to begin the artillery duel, when to 
cease firing and to withdraw all or part of the batteries 
during the artillery duel, and, in the case of a small force 
like a division, when to turn the fire of all the available 
guns in the direction of the attack should also emanate 
from the general commanding. In case of a large force, 
as an army corps, no special orders are waited for to 
meet the infantry attack; when it is impending, the chief 
of artillery hastens to the threatened point and gives the 
necessary orders for the concentration of fire. The chief 
of artillery sees to the execution of the general's orders 
as far as the artillery is concerned. In the absence of 
special instructions upon the above points, and in all un- 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 401 

forseen emergencies, he must assume the responsibility 
and give the orders demanded by the situation. 

1065. Position of artillery in order io march. — As far as 
safety will admit, troops are arranged for marches in the 
vicinity of the enemy as nearly as possible in the order 
in which their services will be required in battle. 

The artillery of the advance guard of a division or corps 
is behind the leading battalion or regiment of the main 
body of the advance guard . Th e batteries of the advance 
guard are generally subdivided in readiness for action; 
the battery reserve marches in rear of the main body of 
the advance guard; the battery train marches with the 
other battery trains of the battalion. 

When the divisions advance by separate roads, the di- 
visional artillery has at least one battalion, but not more 
than the leading brigade of the division in front of it. 
When a corps advances by a single road, the artillery of 
the rear divisions may march at or near the heads of their 
divisions, and when there are more than two divisions, 
all the artillery of the rear divisions may be concentrated 
and march at or near the head of the second division; 
the corps artillery marches behind the artillery of the 
leading division, and, at the farthest, behind the leading 
division. If the corps advances by more than one road, 
the corps artillery is generally on the road taken by the 
corps headquarters. 

In a retreat, the position of the artillery is reversed and 
it is placed in corresponding positions at the rear of the 
columns. 

1066. Subdivision of a battery for action. — A field battery 
on a war footing marches in the following order from front 
to rear, viz: the six guns, each followed by its caisson; 
the three spare caissons; one pair harnessed wheel horses; 
the unharnessed spare horses; the battery-wagon and 
forge; the store- wagon; the spare men for whom no place 
can be provided on the caissons and spare horses, if a 
rapid gait is ordered; the supply wagons. The chief of 

9236 26 



402 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

caissons habitually marches near the rear caisson; the 
stable sergeant marches with and has immediate super- 
vision of the spare horses and the men assigned to them; 
the quartermaster sergeant marches with and has imme- 
diate supervision of the spare men not told off to the 
caissons or spare horses, the battery-wagon and forge, the 
store- wagon, and the supply- wagons, if any are author- 
ized to accompany the battery. Ordinarily the supply- 
wagons will march with the train in rear of the combat- 
ant troops, and will be under the charge of a non-com- 
missioned ofiRcer and a small detail, not exceeding one 
man in addition to the driver for each wagon. 

When it is known that the battery is to be engaged, 
and it has arrived near the position its guns are to 
occupy in action, and while still beyond the range of 
the enemy's fire, it is divided into three echelons or lines: 
the first, called the first fine (the fighting battery), com- 
prises all the guns and the three caissons belonging to 
the right piece of each platoon in line, or the leading 
piece of each platoon in column; the second echelon, 
called the reserve, comprises the remaining caissons, one 
pair harnessed wheel horses, the unharnessed spare 
horses, and all the spare men for whom places can not be 
provided on the caissons and spare horses for rapid move- 
ments; the third echelon, called the train, comprises the 
remaining spare men, the battery-wagon and forge, the 
store-wagon, and the authorized supply- wagons. The 
artificers are mounted and are assigned by the captain 
to the reserve and the train; on the march, they act as 
assistants to the stable sergeant and quartermaster ser- 
geant, respectively. 

The reserve is commanded by the chief of caissons; the 
train by the quartermaster sergeant. 

The subdivision of the battery into echelons is gener- 
ally made after it has arrived on the ground indicated to 
it as a rendezvous before the action; if necessary, the sub- 
division may be made while the battery is in column of 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 403 

route, but the battery must not be subdivided too early 
or too far from its first fighting position, in order that 
communication between it and its reserve may not be in- 
terrupted by other troops. The formation of the battery 
at the rendezvous is in line whenever the ground will per- 
mit it; the spare caissons, spare horses, battery-wagon 
and forge, store, and supply wagons being a third line be- 
hind the caissons. 

If the orders for the subdivision of the battery and for 
the captain to ride forward to examine the position to be 
occupied are received together, which would generally 
be the case, the subdivision is made by the senior subal- 
tern to whom the command of the battery is turned over 
by the captain. 

To Subdivide the Battery for Action. 

lOOT. The battery being at a halt, and the cannoneers 
dismounted: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 1. Prepare for 
action. 

At this command, the guidon joins the reserve and the 
cannoneers take post as prescribed. Par. 84, School of the 
Cannoneer, the supernumerary cannoneers Nos. 8, 9, and 
10 taking post with that caisson of their platoon which is 
assigned to the reserve; the tompions and breech-covers 
are removed, and inspection is made to see that every- 
thing is in order. 

When the battery is in line: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. Form lines, 
3. First line forward, 4. March. 

At the fourth command, the pieces and the three cais- 
sons belonging to the first line move to the front, the car- 
riages belonging to the reserve standing fast. 

When the battery is in column of platoons: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons)— 2. Form lines, 

3. Reserve^ left oblique; or, 3. First line, right oblique, 

4. March. The carriages designated in the command 



404 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

oblique out of the column, the other carriages stand 
last. 

When the battery is in column of sections: 

Captain (repeated by chiefs of platoons) — 2. Form lines, 
3. Reserve, right (ov /eft) oblique; or, 3. First line, right (or 
left) oblique, 4. March. The carriages designated in the 
command oblique out of the column, the other carriages 
stand fast. 

1068. The reserve. — As the fighting battery moves for- 
ward to the position to be occupied by its guns, it is fol- 
lowed by the reserve so as to open the distance more or 
less, according to the cover afforded by the ground, the 
reserve is established in the least exposed place not more 
than a thousand yards from the guns. The chief of cais- 
sons then examines the ground in the vicinity, and par- 
ticularly between the reserve and the guns, and makes 
in person a report to the captain in regard to the position 
of the reserve and the communications with it. The re- 
serve makes good the losses of the battery in men and 
horses, and keeps it supplied with ammunition. The 
chief of caissons should be informed of any change of po- 
sition to be made; the reserve will follow the battery if it 
moves forward or by the flank, and precedes it if it 
moves to the rear, and at the same gait. 

The formation of the caissons in line and in column, 
and the commands tor their movements are, with the 
obvious modifications, the same as prescribed for the 
battery without caissons. 

When the cannoneers with the reserve are mounted on 
the caissons, Nos. 8, 9, and 10 of the right piece of each 
platoon in line, or of the leading piece of each platoon in 
column, mount on the limber chests, and the correspond- 
ing numbers of the other piece on the middle chest of the 
caisson of their platoon. No. 8 on the right. No. 9 on the 
left, and No. 10 in the center. The higher supernumerary 
numbers mount on the spare caissons; their places on 
the chests are designated by the caisson corporals. 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 405 

1069, The train. — The general direction to be taken 
by the battery is communicated to the quartermastei^ 
sergeant. He keeps up communication with the bat- 
tery by means of mounted men, follows it as closely as 
possible without unnecessary exposure to the enemy's 
fire, and without interference with the movement of the 
troops, and rejoins the battery with his train at the end 
of the day's operations. 

A horse battery acting with infantry marches in the 
same order, and is subdivided for action as prescribed 
for a field battery; when acting with cavalry it ordinarily 
marches with all its pieces in front, and, in the subdivi- 
sion for action, the first line is generally composed of the 
guns only. 

1070. Subdivision of a battalion for action. — Each battery 
commander subdivides his battery as already explained; 
the reserves of all the batteries are concentrated and 
commanded by one of the chiefs of caissons detailed for 
that purpose by the major; the other chiefs of caissons 
accompany the first line of their batteries; all the trains 
of the battalion are concentrated and commanded by the 
quartermaster sergeant of the battalion. If the orders 
for the subdivision of the battalion and for the major to 
ride forward to examine the position to be occupied are 
received together, which would generally be the case, the 
subdivision is made under the supervision of the senior 
captain, to whom the command of the battalion is turned 
over by the major. The duties of the officer command- 
ing the battalion reserve are the same as those already 
prescribed for the officer commanding a battery reserve, 
except that the report required of him is made to the 
major. The place where the battalion reserve is estab- 
lished is communicated to the captains by the major. 

When the supply-wagons of the batteries march with 
the trains in the rear of the combatant troops, they are 
kept together and are commanded by the quartermaster 
sergeant of the battalion. 



406 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

10*7 1« The rendezvous position. — Whenever practica- 
ble, the place selected is directly in rear of the position 
where the guns are to come into action, is beyond the 
range and view of the enemy, and is on the flank of the 
line of advance of the other troops, so as not to interfere 
with their movements. 

t072. Zones of fire action. — The battle-field is divided 
into three zones in reference to the effects of the fire of 
the defense. 

The first zone extends from 3,000 to 2,000 yards from 
the artillery line of defense. Its outer limit is within 
the range of effective artillery fire; its inner limit is 
within the range of very effective artillery fire and also 
the range of unaimed infantry fire, as detachments of 
the enemy's infantry will be at least from 300 to 500 yards 
in advance of his artillery. 

The second zone extends from 2,000 yards from the 
artillery line to 800 yards from the infantry line of de- 
fense. Within this zone, artillery fire is deadly; the in- 
fantry fire increases in effect up to the inner border, 
which is within the limits of aimed infantry fire. 

The third zone extends from 800 yards to the position. 
Within this zone the fire of the infantry is deadly. 

1073* Phases of a fight. — An engagement presents, in 
so far as relates to the employment of the artillery, sev- 
eral distinct phases corresponding to: 1st, the commence- 
ment of the action; 2d, the artillery duel; 3d, the prepa- 
ration for the attack; 4th, the execution of the attack; 
5th, the pursuit or the retreat. 

10*74. Choice of position. — The main points to be sought 
for in choosing a position are: 

A clear open range to the front and flanks, and espe- 
cially the absence of cover for hostile skirmishers within 
effective rifle-range of the guns. If there is any cover, 
defile, bridge, etc., within range of the position. Its ap- 
proaches, especially the farther one, should be com- 
manded. 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 407 

Good cover for cannoneers, horses, and material, which 
must, however, be subordinated to efficiency of fire. If 
the position does not afford good natural cover, artificial 
cover should be constructed if time permits. 

A general front perpendicular to the line of fire, and 
an extent of position not only sufficient for the guns first 
established, but also for those that are to follow. 

Facility of movement in every direction; whenever 
fences or ditches interfere, openings or crossings should 
be made. 

The avoidance of any conspicuous object in the imme- 
diate vicinity of the guns, as the range to it would prob- 
ably be known, and it would aid the enemy in aiming 
and observing the effect of his fire; and also close back- 
ground, such as buildings, edges of woods, etc., or a sky 
line against which the gun would stand owt clearly, 
affording a good target and facilitating the observation 
of fire. 

The avoidance of stony ground in front of the guns 
that would increase the effect of the enemy's fire by its 
fragments. A stone wall might afford good protection 
. against infantry fire, but when opposed to artillery fire, 
the guns should be posted one or two hundred yards in 
rear of it. 

An abrupt slope, a marsh, soft meadow, newly-plowed 
ground, a railroad cutting, sunken road, canal, etc., in 
front of the guns will render harmless many projectiles 
that fall short. 

Cover, such as a hedge, line of trees, standing grain, 
the brow of a ridge, etc., some hundred yards or more 
in front of the guns, and over which they can be aimed, 
is an advantage, as it conceals them from the enemy and 
makes the correct observation of the effect of his fire 
difficult. 

A good command of view toward the front and flanks 
in order to observe the progress of the action, and to de- 



408 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 



1 

Ltion 1 1 



tect flank attacks in time to make the proper disposition 
to meet them, or to call on neighboring troops for aid. 

A gradual slope to the front of about one on one hun- 
dred feet affords a good view and is suitable to good fire 
effect. A high command gives a plunging fire, but is 
favorable for firing over friendly troops. A high com- 
mand with a steep slope in front is suitable only for a 
passive defense. 

The best positions will generally be found in rear of 
the crests of ridges and low hills, the pieces being with- 
drawn as far as possible without losing the command. 

1075. Positions in offensive operations, — The general 
conimanding indicates to the chief of artillery the general 
position for the artillery, and the latter selects the place 
for the divisional and corps artillery in accordance with 
the instrui^tion he has received. Upon the receipt of 
orders to that effect from the chief of artillery, each ar- 
tillery officer in command of a battalion, or group of bat- 
teries, and each captain of a battery acting independently, 
turns over his command to the next senior officer, rides 
forvvard and examines the position to be occupied by 
his command, looks to the security of its flanks, causes 
the ground in front of it to be reconnoitered, selects the 
emplacements for the guns, and at the proper time sends 
orders for the guns to advance. As the artillery is the 
principal arm throughout the first zone, the choice of 
position in that zone is yielded to it, care being taken not 
to post it so as to bring the other arms under fire of the 
enemy's guns, nor in such a way as to compel unnecessary 
movements on the part of the infantry. The infantry 
is the principal arm in the second and third zones, and 
within those zones the artillery conforms to its move- 
ments. 

^ As soon as the advance guard meets with serious oppo- 
sition, its guns come into action in front of, or on one side 
and not far from, the line of advance of its infantry. 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 409 

While giving the advance guard active support, they 
should not advance to a i)osition much beyond the outer 
limits of the first zone before being reinforced by the bat- 
teries of the main body, in order to avoid coming within 
decisive range of the artillery line of defense and being 
crushed by superior fire. When the other batteries of its 
battalion are brought up from the main body to reinforce 
the advance guard artillery, they take position along- 
side it; but if the direction of the deployment requires 
these batteries to be placed on the opposite flank of the 
advance guard infantry, advantage should be taken of a 
subsequent forward movement to reunite all the batteries 
of the battalion in one position. 

The divisional artillery should be placed so as to be in 
the center of the probable line of advance of its division; 
the corps artillery is generally placed in a body between 
the battalions of divisional artillery. 

For the general reconnaissance of the enemy's position 
and the commencement of the artillery duel, the guns are 
posted near the outer edge of the first zone, or about 3,000 
or 2,500 yards from the artillery line of defense. For the 
decisive artillery duel, the guns are advanced to the inner 
edge of the first zone, or about 2,000 yards from the 
enemy's artillery; this position is not taken until protec- 
tion can be provided for the guns by the infantry detach- 
ments which are pushed to the front for this purpose. 

During the preparation for the attack, the batteries, as 
a rule, preserve the positions they held at the end of the 
artillery duel. 

Batteries are placed on either flank or in the center of 
the infantry which they accompany to the attack. In 
the case of a flank attack, the divisional artillery is gener- 
ally on the inner flank of the attacking infantry; horse 
batteries with an escort of cavalry can often act advanta- 
geously on the other flank. The group of the corps artil- 
lery batteries nearest the attacking infantry may also be 
advanced to close range for support. 



410 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

10*76. Positions in defensive operations. — The chief of ar- 
tillery accompanies the general commanding in his recon- 
naissance of the line to be defended, in order to receive 
the general's orders in regard to the positions to be occu- 
pied by the artillery. The chief of artillery then exam- 
ines these positions with the officers commanding under 
him, selects the emplacement for the batteries in case of 
a small force and for the battalions in case of a large one, 
and the places in rear and near the emplacements when 
they are to be kept under cover until ordered into action. 
The number of these emplacements is generally greater 
than the number of batteries or battalions at the disposal 
of the defense, so as to prepare a front in every direction 
from which an attack is possible. The chief of artillery 
designates the emplacements that are to be first occupied, 
and imparts the necessary information as to the position 
of our own troops and those of the enemy. Conspicuous 
objects in front of the position that could be referred to 
in orders for concentration of fire upon different points of 
the enemy's line are noted, and, if necessary, named. The 
battery commanders, under direction of the battalion 
commanders, reconnoiter the ground in front and rear, 
ascertain the distances to the prominent points on all 
approaches in front and flank, and, if time permits » con- 
struct artificial cover. 

The artillery is placed on the important points so as to 
sweep the front of the position by its fire and to enfilade 
all the approaches. Artillery is seldom detached to the 
advanced posts unless they are so important and so near 
that they may be regarded as salients of the main line. 
The main body of the artillery does not occupy its em- 
placements until the enemy has reinforced his advance 
guard artillery. All the emplacements for close defense 
are occupied as soon as the attacking infantry shows it- 
self in force. Good cover for the detachments, horses, 
and guns is especially important. The infantry conforms 
to the positions taken by the artillery. 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 411 

The principle of the distribution of the artillery is to 
have a group of batteries on each flank and one or more 
groups in the center. If a flank is liable to be turned, 
the guns posted there should command the approaches 
to the flank as well as those to the front; if a flank rests 
on unapproachable ground, only the guns necessary to 
command the front approaches are required there. 

In the case of an army corps, the divisional artillery 
is on the flanks and the corps artillery near the center; 
if there are three divisions, the third with its artillery 
brigade is placed near the weaker flank. When two or 
more army corps act together, the corps artillery may 
be placed on the inner flank of its corps. 

In the case of a small force, like a division, acting in- 
dependently, all the artillery may be placed in the cen- 
ter, but the artillery battalion must generally be broken 
up, one battery being placed on each flank, and the re- 
maining battery or batteries, if any, in the center. 

1077, Advancing to the first position and coming into ac- 
tion. — Whenever practicable, the batteries are formed in 
line, under cover, directly in rear of the position to be 
occupied, and are then advanced straight to the front and 
come into action simultaneously. If possible, the guns 
are kept concealed until ready to open fire. 

As artillery fire is less effective against lines than deep 
columns, line formation should b3 employed whenever 
possible. On account of the losses they entail, oblique 
and flank marches under fire are to be avoided. 

If the roads are not under fire, the fighting batteries 
advance by them, if practicable, to the place where they 
are to be deployed in rear of the position — in column of 
sections if necessary, but preferably in column of pla- 
toons if the width of the road will permit. When the 
batteries have to leave the roads, they take the formation 
best suited to the ground and direction of the march. 
If they are to march straight to the front, line with full 
intervals should be employed; in difficult ground, line of 



412 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

platoon or section columns with deploying intervals will 
generally be practicable. If the position to be occupied 
is to a flank of the line of advance, the batteries are in 
column of sections or platoons until the direction of the 
march is changed to the front. 

The officer or orderly who brings the orders for artillery 
to advance returns with the officer in command of it in 
order to show the way and give information about the 
ground. 

The captain of the leading battery of a column, and the 
captains of all the batteries in line or line of columns, 
ride in front of their batteries, and have mounted non- 
commissioned officers about one hundred yards in front of 
the flanks of their batteries, in order to discover obstacles 
and to point out the best way to avoid them. 

When drill movements of the battalion are impossible 
on account of the obstacles which may separate the bat- 
teries and the difficulty of making the voice or trumpet 
heard, the captains should be furnished with the in- 
structions necessary to enable them to lead their bat- 
teries properly in all movements to be executed. 

It is important that all the batteries of a battalion 
should come into action simultaneously; this will be 
practicable when line can be formed in rear of the posi- 
tion to be occupied. If, however, the necessity to rein- 
force guns already in action is so urgent that time can 
not be spared to form line, or the ground will not per- 
mit the formation of line behind the position and ad- 
vance straight forward to it, or if it is necessary to come 
into battery immediately after leaving a defile, the head 
of the column should be directed on the point where it 
is to come into action. The batteries then arrive on 
the line in succession, each opening fire as soon as it is 
established. 

If the approach to the position presents any difficul- 
ties, the battalion commander should ride back and take 
command of the batteries, otherwise he may receive them 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 413 

at the position. When the battalion commander can not 
direct the battalion by voice or trumpet, he should him- 
self lead the battery of direction into position and send 
orders to the other captains to conform to its movements 
and unlimber on its right and left. 

Whenever practicable, the captains should report to 
the commander of their battalion immediately after line 
has been formed in rear of the position, in order to re- 
ceive his orders as to the line to be occupied by the guns, 
the object to be fired at, the range etc. 

It depends on the nature of the ground whether the 
guns execute in battery or action front. If the position is 
on the crest of a hill, it will generally be preferable to 
execute action front under cover, and move the guns into 
position by hand ; if there is good cover, it may be advis- 
able to march the guns by the flank parallel to the ridge 
and to execute action right or left. 

If the guns are under fire they should come into posi- 
tion as rapidly as possible, but the gait should not be 
faster than a trot when unlimbering. 

When batteries have to come into action under effec- 
tive infantry or superior artillery fire, the guns should 
be loaded, and, when possible, the target indicated and 
the breech-sights set for the estimated range, before the 
guns are advanced. 

A battery acting singly advances and comes into action 
on the same principles as a battalion of batteries, the 
captain riding back to take command of it or receiving 
it at the position. 

In the defense, batteries do not come into action si- 
multaneously ; usually each battery is conducted by its 
captain and unlimbered under cover in rear of its em- 
placement, and its guns are then run into position by 
hand. Similarly in changing position, the guns are run 
by hand to the rear and limbered up under cover. 



414 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

10*78. The guns, limbers, and caissons in action. — The 

guns should be not less than ten nor more than forty yards 
apart. An interval less than ten yards would too much 
increase the effect of the enemy's fire; an interval greater 
than forty yards would render the efficient superinten- 
dence of the battery by the captain impossible. The align- 
ment is subordinate to cover and view, but no gun should 
be so far to the front as to interfere with the field of fire 
of the others. 

When there is room, the limbers may be placed on one 
or both flanks of the guns, or they may be placed under 
any good cover in the vicinity ; each caisson should be 
in rear of its platoon, sheltered as much as practicable, 
but always conveniently placed for the supply of ammu- 
nition. As injury to the carriages is slight compared 
with the loss in horses, it will be best in most cases to 
leave the limbers and caissons behind the guns, and to 
unhitch the teams (not unhooking the traces) and to send 
them under the best cover close at hand. Owing to the 
facility with which the team can be hitched, this will 
occasion but little loss of time, and will probably facili- 
tate the movement of the battery, as all the teams can 
be kept complete. In cavalry action, in retreats and pur- 
suits, and in all cases where frequent and rapid changes 
are required, the teams should, as a rule, be kept hitched. 

1 079. Changes of position. — Changes forward are made 
to render the fire more efficient, for the moral support it 
gives, and to occupy positions abandoned by the enemy; 
lateral changes are made in order to give better support 
where needed, to unmask a fire in rear, and to execute 
turning movements with other troops; changes to the 
rear are made when the artillery are too much exposed 
and also to protect troops falling back. 

Groups change position under fire by echelons, in such 
a way as not to interrupt the fire, one-half the batteries 
moving forward covered by the fire of the other half. 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 415 

Wheii the movement is direct to the front, the echelon 
next to the infantry advancing to the attack should move 
first Batteries separated by wide intervals, but having 
a common objective, change position in the same man- 
ner. A single battery is not echeloned for changes of 
position. Line with full intervals is the best formation, 
and that or line of platoon or section columns with de- 
ploying intervals, can generally be taken when the new 
position is direct to the froTit. If the new position is ob- 
lique to the front, a flank march should be made, under 
cover if practicable, and line formed when the batteries 
have arrived in rear of the position. As a general rule, 
the formation should conform to the ground in a manner 
to obtain the best cover and to make the change as 
quickly as possible. Frequent changes interrupt the 
fire and are unfavorable to accuracy, as they necessitate 
the establishment of new ranges; when acting on the of- 
fensive, changes less than five hundred yards should be 
avoided. Sometimes a change of one or two hundred 
yards to the front or rear may be advantageous when the 
enemy has the exact range, in order to mislead him as 
to the effects of his fire or to force him to find the new 
range. 

When a change of position is to be made to the front, 
the artillery commander ascertains if the ground in front 
is practicable for his batteries, then, after giving the 
necessary orders to the officers commanding under him, 
he rides rapidly forward- in front of the first echelon to 
select the new position and to have the ground on its 
front and flanks reconnoitered; as a rule, he meets and 
conducts the batteries to it. In changes of position to 
the rear, the artillery commander remains with the bat- 
teries that are engaged, and subsequently retires with 
them. 

All movements to the front are made at as rapid a gait 
as possible. As a principle, all movements to the rear 
are made at a walk; in the exceptional cases that bat- 



416 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

teries have to retire rapidly in order to escape imminent 
danger or to unmask fire from a position in rear, they 
begin the movement at a walk, but horse artillery acting 
with cavalry conforms at once to its rapid movements in 
retreat as well as in advance. 

Batteries can not be safely withdrawn while under ef- 
fective infantry fire, as the loss in horses would be so 
great that many or all the gujis would fall into the hands 
of the enemy . To accomplish a withdrawal under such cir- 
cumstances, the guns should remain in action even after 
the order to withdraw is received, in order to take ad- 
vantage of the first check given to the hostile infantry 
to limber up and retire. 

10§0« Artillery under infantry fire. — Artillery can not 
safely advance within one thousand yards of firm infantry, 
unless the latter is itself under infantry fire at a shorter 
range, or under a very effective artillery fire. Ordina- 
rily, artillery will hold itself beyond the zone of effective 
infantry fire; but for the close support of its own infantry 
at decisive moments, or before an enemy that is disor- 
ganized, it should not hesitate to enter this zone and 
meet the fire of the enemy's infantry at short ranges 
(eight hundred yards). 

Artillery may be under infantry fire to protect itself 
or the ground it closes in a line of battle, or in order to 
give close support to its own infantry in attack or de- 
fense. 

When the ground is open, artillery, and particularly a 
long line of artillery, will be able to protect its own front 
without assistance from infantry; and even when the 
ground is unfavorable, and support is wanting, it should 
not retire without orders, but should maintain its posi- 
tion, the guns being served to the last; when the enemy 
has penetrated a battery its cannoneers should place 
themselves between the gun wheels and protect them- 
selves with their revolvers. 

The close support of the attacking infantry generally 






ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 417 

devolves upon the divisional artillery, which is often as- 
sisted in this duty by the nearest batteries of the corps 
artillery. In order to better fulfill this duty, to secure 
the positions won, as well as for the moral effect, the bat- 
teries designated for it accompany the infantry to the 
assault, unless the nature of the ground makes the ad- 
vance impossible, or the circumstances are such that the 
batteries can safely and effectively fire over the advanc- 
ing infantry to the last. 

The commanders of the artillery selected for the close 
support of the attacking infantry should be notified 
when the attack will take place, but no special orders 
are given them when to advance, the batteries accom- 
panying the infantry at the proper time without further 
instructions. 

The battalions, which would be at the outer limit of Mie 
second zone and in the positions in reference to the at- 
tacking infantry already prescribed for them under the 
head of positions in offensive operations, should limber up and 
advance when the second line of attacking infantry comes 
abreast of them, and should unlimber about half-way be- 
tween the supports and firing line; when the second line 
again comes abreast of them, they should limber up and 
come into action about 1 ,000 or 800 yards from the enemy's 
infantry. Each of these changes should carry the guns 
about 500 yards to the front, and should generally be made 
by all the batteries of a battalion simultaneously and 
not in echelon . Prom its last position the artillery should 
give all possible aid to the assault, and when it can 
no longer distinguish friends from foes it should cease 
firing. 

If the advance of the firing line masks the batteries, 
they should, if practicable, limber up and come into action 
on that line. 

If the attack succeeds, the nearest batteries should 
move rapidly to the captured position and come into 
action on the flank of the infantry, and, if practicable, 

9236 27 



418 ARTILLERY IN THE Fl'ELD. 

abreast its firing line, to aid in driving back tlie enemy 
and repelling his counter attack; they should be joined 
a little later by the batteries that did not accompany the 
infantry; the attack is then begun against the new posi- 
tions taken up by the enemy, or fire is directed upon the 
retiring troops to change their retreat into a rout, and 
upon any troops that remain, to break down their resist- 
ance. 

If the attack fails, all the batteries within range should 
concentrate their fire on the enemy's troops so as to cover 
the infantry and permit it to re-form. The batteries that 
accompanied the attack, if not already engaged, should 
immediately come into action; they will not retire with- 
out the express orders of the general commanding, and 
will then fall back with the infantry at a walk, keeping 
in line, and halting to endeavor to drive back the enemy 
if he presses too closely. 

In the defense of a position, all the batteries occupy 
the emplacements designated for close defense as soon 
as the attacking infantry begins to show itself in force. 
Even if the assailants succeed in reaching the position, 
the batteries maintain their places, and, at the proper 
moment, support the counter attack with all their 
vigor; if necessary, they sacrifice themselves in support 
of the infantry; they will not retire without the express 
orders of the general commanding, and will then fall 
back with the infantry at a walk, keeping in line, and 
halting to endeavor to drive back the enemy if he presses 
too closely. 

10§1. The rear guard. — Artillery with a rear guard 
avoids action at close ranges; it retires on successive de- 
fensive positions and delays the enemy by forcing his 
columns to deploy. When it is detached to oppose at- 
tempts made to outflank the rear guard, it should be ac- 
companied by a strong escort of cavalry. As the com- 
mander of the artillery may have to act on his own 
responsibility in the unforeseen contingencies that may 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 419 

arise in a rear guard action, the commander of the rear 
guard should keep him fully informed as to his plans. 

10§2« the retreat. — If the forces are not seriously en- 
gaged, the artillery is sent to a supporting position in 
rear, from which it will support the movement. 

If the forces are seriously engaged, a retreat is more 
difficult; the second and third lines of infantry and a 
portion of the batteries are sent to a rallying position in 
rear; the batteries are established at the points where 
their fire will be the soonest unmasked. In order to 
secure an orderly retreat, these dispositions should be 
completed before the advance of the hostile infantry 
begins . The other batteries cover the movement and are 
withdrawn in turn, beginning with those that can best 
be si)ared; finally the remaining batteries retire with the 
last of the troops, giving them close support. 

If the hostile infantry have advanced to the attack, it 
will be too late to retreat; in such a case, the defenders 
should remain in position and take advantage of the 
time during which the enemy is preparing a second at- 
tack after being repulsed in the first, to carry out the 
dispositions for retiring. 

1083. Escorts. — The duty of escorts and supports is to 
guard the guns against surprise and to defend them when 
attacked. 

Artillery is placed in line of battle so as to support the 
other arms and to receive from them the support it re- 
quires; when judiciously posted, the artillery acting by 
battery or battalion with the infantry, and especially a 
long line of artillery, will be sufficiently protected by its 
own fire and the other troops in its vicinity. 

Artillery can defend its own front when the ground is 
open, but the fire of hostile infantry from cover within 
effective range of the front or flanks of the guns has to 
be specially guarded against. 

Every line of artillery should be protected on its flanks 
by infantry or cavalry, who also watch the ground in 



420 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

front; in a long- line of battle, detachments of infantry 
should be in front of the intervals between the artillery 
battalions, they, together with the troops on the flanks, 
should occupy all cover within effective infantry fire of 
the guns, keep hostile skirmishers at a distance, and be 
able to see everything* that approaches within 2,000 yards 
of the guns. 

As a rule, infantry supports are placed in front and 
cavalry supports in rear of the flanks of the artillery. 
It will often be advantageous to dismount some of the 
troopers of a cavalry support and post them in front of 
the flanks. 

Horse artillery in a cavalry action should, as a rule, 
have a special escort, but none are required for other 
batteries; the troops that are in the vicinity should 
furnish support without waiting for orders . The bat- 
teries which, on account of their situation, can not be 
covered by other troops, are the only ones to receive 
special escorts. These escorts may be furnished by either 
the cavalry or infantry, according to circumstances; they 
reconnoiter the position to be occupied, search cover in 
the vicinity, send out scouts to the front and flanks, and, 
if necessary, go to the defense of the guns. When ar- 
tillery finds itself without support, a few mounted artil- 
lerymen should be sent out to watch the front and flanks, 
in order to give notice of the approach of any hostile 
parties. 

The officer commanding the artillery controls its move- 
ments and action, and will give to the officer commanding 
the escort all the information that will facilitate the ac- 
complishment of the latter's duty; the officer command- 
ing the escort is responsible for tjie measures takei^ for 
the security of the guns. 

When special protection is necessary, the commander 
of the artillery should apply to the commander of the 
nearest troops for a'd, and it should be his duty to fur- 
nish it. The presence of a special escort with artillery 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 421 

does not relieve other troops from the responsibility of 
protecting it when necessary. 

10§4. Finding the range. — The range is found either by 
trial shots or by means of the range finder. The latter 
should be used whenever time and circumstances permit. 

The artillery commander, when he examines the 
ground indicated to him as a position for his guns, should 
be accompanied by a range finding party, who should 
take the range not only to the target to be fired at, but 
to other points within the field of fire which might be- 
come targets subsequently. It wall nearly always be 
practicable to use the range finder at the first position 
occupied, and sometimes at the subsequent positions. 

The artillery that first finds the range will have a great 
advantage in the artillery duel, and in all cases its correct 
establishment is the first condition of accurate shooting. 

In finding the range by trial shots, it is of great im- 
portance that the object and the particular part of it to be 
fired at should be clearly understood. In order to avoid 
mistakes, the captain may direct one of the officers or 
non-commissioned officers to rectify the aim of all the 
guns after they have been pointed. 

The range can be more accurately and quickly found 
when each battery has a different target and one directly 
in front of it to fire at. If the target is a long line, it 
should be divided into as many sections as there are bat- 
teries to fire at it, and each captain should select a gun 
or object in the part assigned him. In such case, the 
battalion commander can compare the elevations ob- 
tained by the several batteries, and if they agree and the 
observation of the fire indicates good results, it is fair to 
assume that the range is correct. When several bat- 
teries are to open a long-range fire on a small target, 
the battalion commander generally designates the bat- 
tery, and preferably that on the leeward flank, to find the 
range . Batteries that come into action at short distances 



422 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

from the enemy's line generally find the range by firing 
salvos at a prominent point of the target. 

As a rule, percussion shell are used to find the range, 
and all the guns of a battery are aimed at one point of the 
target; if shrapnel with percussion fuse is used, the same 
principles apply. In firing at intrenchments, however, 
the fire may be distributed from the first, even for ob- 
taining the range, as the hits, as a rule, can be easily ob- 
served. 

The enemy's flanks are designated, and the guns in his 
batteries are numbered, as he himself would designate or 
number them. 

The firing to obtain the range should be slow and de- 
liberate, and ample time aft'orded to observe <^ach shot 
and make the necessary corrections. 

When a battery unlimbers near another battery already 
in action and opens fire upon the same target, it should 
obtain the range from the latter. 

The duty of finding the range generally devolves upon 
the captain of each battery, even when several batteries 
open fire upon the same target. It is only in very ex- 
ceptional circumstances that the battalion commander 
would take personal charge of the firing of his battalion 
in order to establish the range himself. 

lOS'^l* Observation of fire. — Correct observation of the 
effects of fire is necessary in order to make the required 
corrections, and is indispensable to good shooting. It can 
only be acquired by much practice under the varying 
conditions of the wind, light, state of the atmosphere, 
background, foreground, and nature of the target, and is 
rendered more difficult in action by smoke and the lia- 
bility of mistakes when more than one battery is firing 
at the same target. For medium as well as long ranges, 
a good field glass is required. 

As a rule, the observation is limited to ascertaining 
whether the shots are short or over. The observation 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 423 

of direct hits is unreliable except at very short ranges, 
or when palpable effects are produced in the enemy's 
ranks, limbers are blown up, or there are other manifest 
indications of the effect produced. When a target is on 
a height or behind a parapet, it is possible to distinguish 
hits on the slope of the hill or on the parapet, and to esti- 
mate correctly the error in range of the projectiles that 
fall short. There are no means of estimating the error 
in range of the projectiles that fall beyond the target, 
except when a battery is on an elevation and firing at a 
target on a plain below it; here shots striking beyond the 
target may be observed and the error estimated. 

When several batteries are firing at the same target 
and it is difficult to distinguish the individual rounds, a 
fire by battery will give a group of shots that may be 
recognized. 

The observation of the fire will be facilitated by the 
reports of an officer or non-commissioned officer stationed 
some distance in advance and outside one of the flanks 
of the guns. 

10§6. Smoke. — When the wind is across the range and 
blows the smoke in front of the guns, it will be difficult 
to correctly aim and properly observe the effects of the 
lire. In the case of a single battalion, this inconvenience 
may be diminished by increasing the interval between 
the batteries, or may be avoided by advancing the bat- 
teries in echelon from the leeward flank so that the smoke 
of each windward battery will drift behind those to the 
leeward of it. This last measure has the disadvantage 
of making the leeward batteries conspicuous against the 
white background of smoke, and besides is not always 
practicable, especially when the position is on the brow 
of a hill. If neither of the above expedients can be 
adopted, and it is not possible to sufficiently increase the 
interval of time between the guns in each battery to 
permit the smoke to blow away, the fire by battery or 
platoon may be used, or the battalion Qommander may 



424 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

order the battalion to fire by piece, commencing at the 
leeward flank. When several battalions are together, 
as large intervals as possible should be left between them, 
or, if the ground permits, the battalions should be ad- 
vanced in echelon from the leeward flank, in order to 
diminish oi' avoid the inconvenience of smoke drifting 
across the range. 

When the target can not be seen on account of smoke 
which hangs in front of the guns, or on account of fog, 
rain, or darkness, the pieces may be aimed by means of 
auxiliary targets. 

10§7« Projectiles to be used. — Percussion shell can gen- 
erally be used against all troops or material which may 
be the target of light artillery fire. Direct hits are 
necessary when it is used against guns, limbers, earth- 
works, obstacles, etc., and its etfects are then due to per- 
cussion, penetration, and the explosive force of the burst- 
ing charge. When used against men or horses it is burst 
on first graze close in front of the target, and its effects 
are then produced by its splinters. The smoke made by 
the large bursting charge of the percussion shell aids 
the observation of fire. 

The effect of projectiles with percussion fuses is de- 
pendent on the nature of the ground in front of the tar- 
get; soft, marshy ground, hollows, and cuts diminish its 
elTect, while hard, smooth ground increases it. 

The elTect of shrapnel is due to the penetration of its 
bullets and splinters; this penetration is small, and it is 
therefore employed against men and horses only. It has 
a combination fuse and can be made to burst either in 
the air or on the first graze, and can, therefore, be made 
independent of the nature of the ground in front of the 
target. Made to burst high by means of its time-fuse, 
it can be used against living targets behind cover, against 
which percussion shell could have but little elTect. With 
its fuse cut short, it can be used instead of canister at 
short ranges. 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 425 

Canister is used for defense at close ranges. Its effect 
is largely diminished when the ground in front of the 
guns is rough or soft, and particularly when covered with 
brushes or standing crops. 

1088, Order of fire. — The order of fire is habitually by 
piece in each battery. It is the most effective, as the 
errors in the service of any one gun can generally be ob- 
served, and therefore corrected. 

Salvos, or the fire by battery, may be used to find the 
range under circumstances that render it difficult to ob- 
serve a single shot, to avoid the inconvenience of smoke, 
and, occasionally, instead of rapid fire by piece, to take 
advantage of quickly passing opportunities. 

The fire at will is only used in the defense of the guns 
at very short ranges. 

The fire by piece from one flank of a battalion to the 
other may be used to avoid smoke, or to enable the field 
officer commanding the battalion to take personal charge 
of the firing in order to find the range under difficult cir- 
cumstances, or to regulate the fire in exceptional cases. 

The fire by platoon is only used to facilitate the obser- 
vation of fire under exceptional circumstances that per- 
mit two shots to be observed more easily than one, and 
also to increase the interval of time between successive 
discharges to allow the smoke to drift away, without 
diminishing the amount of fire. In most cases, the fire 
by piece or by battery is preferable to it. 

10§9, Rapidity of fire, — The rapidity of fire is depend- 
ent on the range, the circumstances of the action, the 
facilities for the observation of the fire, and the amount 
of unexpended ammunition. 

Slow fire is used at long ranges and for obtaining the 
range, and generally in the commencement of the action 
and during the artillery duel; it is also used in prolonged 
actions, and when the ammunition is running short. 

Rapid fire is used at short ranges and at the decisive 
moments of an action, and also to take advantage of 



426 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

quickly passing opportunities, as masses of troops within 
effective range, artillery in movement, limbering or un- 
limbering. 

Ordinary fire is used when the fire is effective, but when 
the circumstances of the action do not demand a rapid 
fire. 

1090, Regulation of fire. — This includes control over 
all the details of the service of the guns, the corrections 
in observation, deflection, and length of fuse, and the 
concentration and distribution of fire within the limits of 
a designated target that are necessary in order to obtain 
the most effective fire upon it. 

1091. Fire control. — This includes the method to be 
adopted for finding the range, the target, and the partic- 
ular part of it to be fired at, the projectile used, the order 
and rapidity of fire, and the concentration or distribu- 
tion of fire upon the different targets within range. 

The captain i*egulates the fire of his battery, and, if 
acting independently, he also controls it. He generally 
remains mounted, and places himself, as a rule, near one 
of the flanks and sufficiently close to the battery that his 
orders may be readily understood. The corrections for 
lateral deviations are generally intrusted to the chiefs of 
platoons. 

Percussion shell gives the best results when the fire is 
concentrated. If firing at artillery and all the guns are 
equally conspicuous, the fire should bo directed upon one 
of the central guns, otherwise at the most conspicuous 
gun; if the wind is blowing across the range, the fire 
should be directed upon the most conspicuous gun on the 
windward flank. If firing upon masses of troops, the fire 
should be directed upon the center of the first line; if 
firing upon skirmishers, it should be directed first upon 
one point, then another, close in front of the line. 

Shrapnel gives the best results when the fire is distrib- 
uted, a part of the target being apportioned to each gun. 
When the time-fuse is used, it will often be advisable to 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 427 

vary the elevation and length of fuse in each battery so 
as to cover about two hundred yards in depth, and thus 
bring the enemy's supports and reserves, as well as his 
front line, under fire. 

Fire with percussion shell can sometimes be advanta- 
geously distributed, provided that several guns keep a 
part of the target under superior fire. Percussion shell 
and shrapnel with percussion fuse are generally used 
against moving targets, for rapid firing, and for firing 
over friendly troops. 

The commander of an artillery battalion prescribes 
the method to be used for finding the range, designates 
the target for each battery, and prescribes the projectile 
to be used, the rate and order of fire. His orders and 
directions that can not be given by voice or trumpet 
are conveyed by his staff or non-commissioned staff. 

Finding the range by the method designated, and the 
regulation of the fire according to the target, range, 
projectile, and observed effect are intrusted to the cap- 
tains of batteries, and it is only in exceptional cases that 
the battalion commander takes personal command in 
order to find the range or to regulate the fire. 

The officer commanding the corps artillery designates 
the target for each of its battalions, and controls the fire 
of the corps artillery in accordance with the instructions 
he receives from the chief of artillery of the corps. 

The chief of artillery of the general commanding issues 
the orders for the distribution and concentration of fire, 
according to the phases of the battle and the plans of the 
general. As a rule, the method of carrying out these 
orders, the projectile used, the rapidity and order of fire, 
will be left to the commanders of groups of batteries. 

Artillery fire is effective in proportion to its concen- 
tration. The long range of the guns permits a concen- 
tration of their fire on many different points without 
change of position. When practicable, the groups that 
are intended to fire on the same target should be placed 



428 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

under the control of one officer. In the advance guard 
action, the artillery of the assailant covers, and the artil- 
lery of the defense opposes, the deployment and advance 
of the advance guard infantry . In the preliminary stages 
of a battle and the commencement of the artillery duel, 
the fire is generally directed on the targets immediately 
opposite the batteries engaged ; as soon as portions of 
the enemy's artillery line are subdued, the fire is con- 
centrated on the different targets in succession, taking 
them in the order of their relative importance ; during 
the preparation and delivery of the assault, the fire of 
the assailants is concentrated against the point of attack ; 
the tire of the defense is concentrated against the attack- 
ing infantry as soon as it shows itself. 

Fire should be directed against batteries that are chang- 
ing positions, and in order that this brief opportunity of 
infiicting serious damage may not be lost, a part of the 
batteries of the defense should be especially instructed 
to open fire on hostile batteries while limbering or in 
movement, without waiting for orders. 

The defense generally offers more favorable opportu- 
nities for long-range fire than the offense, but whether ad- 
vantage is to be taken of these opportunities must be deter- 
mined by the general commanding, who will have to de- 
cide whether the effect of the fire will compensate for 
the partial or complete disclosure of the position that it 
involves. Ordinarily artillery should avoid opening fire 
at a greater range than 3,000 yards. Beyond this dis- 
tance, it is difficult to observe the effect of fire even with 
good glasses. Longer range fire is used in exceptional 
cases against objects that are clearly seen and are of con- 
siderable extent, such as villages, camps, or large bodies 
of troops. Ineffective cannonades at long distances, and 
shelling woods or other localities not positively known 
to be occupied by the enemy, should not be permitted. 
The position from which fire is first opened may neces- 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 429 

sarily be much less than 8,000 yards in order to obtain 

view of the enemy. 

Firing over friendly troops should be avoided as much 

i as possible. Batteries that support an assault from a 

1 distance continue their fire upon the point of attack un- 

* til it becomes dangerous to the assailants; they then 

either increase the range considerably in order to cover 

the ground beyond, or they direct their fire on other 

points of the enemy's line. Artillery does not fire at long 

ranges from positions in rear during a pursuit, on account 

of the danger to the pursuing troops; in such cases, it 

should advance rapidly and endeavor to establish itself 

on the flanks of the enemy's line of retreat, where it will 

find the most advantageous positions. 

As a general rule, the fire of artillery is directed against 
that arm of the enemy which at the time is predominant, 
\ or which is capable of inflicting the greatest loss on the 
: infantry or cavalry that the artillery is supporting. Dur- 
ing the artillery duel, the artillery generally avoids fir- 
ing at the other arms; but if large bodies of infantry or 
cavalry appear in open ground within effective range, a 
portion of the guns should be directed upon them. 

1092. The ammunition column. — The heavy expenditure 
of ammunition in modern battles, and the great impor- 
tance of keeping the guns always supplied necessitates 
arrangements for the timely renewal of the expended 
ammunition. This can be best secured by attaching to 
each corps an ammunition column and placing it under 
the orders of the chief of artillery of the corps. The 
column should consist of caissons carrying the first re- 
serve of ammunition and wagons carrying the stores and 
material for refitting the guns and carriages. 

It should be subdivided into sections, so as to have a 
section for the artillery of each division and one for the 
corps artillery. The column should be commanded by an 
officer, and an officer should also be in command of each 
section. 



430 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

The ammunition column should march in rear of the 
combatant troops and immediately behind the ambu- 
lance corps. 

When an army on the march becomes engaged, the 
corps commander should give to the chief of artillery of 
the corps orders to halt the ammunition column at a 
designated place, not less than three miles in rear of the 
front of the line. As soon as the column has reached this 
point, which should not be passed without orders, its 
commander reports its arrival to the chief of artillery of 
the corps, and keeps in communication with him in order 
to receive promptly his orders. The position selected for 
the column should be near but not on the roads leading 
to the front, and should have good communication in all 
directions. 

In the absence of orders, when the firing indicates a 
serious engagement, the ammunition column should be 
advanced and halted about four or five miles in rear of the 
front line of battle, and its position reported to the chief 
of artillery of the corps. 

The column may be kept consolidated or it may be sub- 
divided, one section being placed conveniently for the 
supply of the corps artillery and each battalion of divi- 
sional artillery. When the column is kept consolidated, 
the chief of artillery should notify the officers command- 
ing the divisional and corps artillery as to its position. 
When it is subdivided, the officer in command of the 
ammunition cokimn remains with the chief of artillery 
of the corps vmtil further orders; and as they arrive at 
the places designated for them, the divisional sections 
are reported to the officers commanding the divisional 
artillery, and the corps section to the officer command- 
ing the corps artillery. 

The commander of the column when it is consolidated, 
and the commander of each section when the column is 
subdivided, should keep informed of the movements of the 
artillery, and should have the communications to its po- 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 431 

sitions examined, and, if necessary, should post mounted 
men along them to act as guides. 

When the fight takes a favorable turn, the column or 
its sections are brought up closer to the line of battle; 
but if the fight is indecisive or unfavorable, they are held 
at a distance, and only those caissons are brougifit up that 
are absolutely necessary to supply the guns; if a retreat 
is inevitable, the column is sent to a point sufficiently far 
in rear not to interfere with the movements of the troops. 
When the column is consolidated, orders for its change of 
position emanate from the corps commander; when the 
column is subdivided, the orders for the divisional sec- 
tions emanate from the generals commanding the divi- 
sions, and for corps sections, from the corps commander. 

Upon the order of the commanders of the divisional 
and corps artillery, the divisional and corps sections give 
up to the batteries the horses and men necessary to refit 
them. 

The ammunition column is replenish-ed from the ord- 
nance train of the army. The duties of the commander 
of the column are especially important after a battle, and 
particularly when he has a long distance to march to ob- 
tain a new supply of ammunition and stores. 

If the divisional sections of the train also carry the 
infantry reserve ammunition, their position behind the 
line of battle should be reported by the chief of artillery 
of the division to the generals commanding the infantry 
brigades. 

1093. Supply of ammunition in action. — The limber ammu- 
nition should be regarded as a last reserve, to be used in 
emergencies only; whenever any of it is expended, it is 
replaced as soon as practicable. Ordinarily the ammu- 
nition is drawn from one of the caissons conveniently 
placed for the service of both the guns. As soon as a 
caisson is emptied, it is replaced by one from the battery 
reserve; the empty caisson joins the battery reserve, 
whence it is sent to the ammunition column to be refilled. 



432 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

If necessary to keep the guns supplied, caissons of the 
ammunition column should be sent direct to the batteries. 
When the first line of a battery is composed ot pieces 
only as would be the case with horse batteries m a cav- 
alry action, the ammunition is drawn directly from the 
limbers; as soon as the limber of a piece is empty, it is 
replaced by the limber of its caisson: the empty limber 
is refilled from the rear chest of the caisson, and equipped 
with everything required for the service of the piece. 

I094. Horse artillery with a cavalry division.— A battal- 
ion of horse artillery is an inteo-ral part of each cavalry 
division and should include not less than three battei'ies. 
If the division is concentrated, the Ixitteries are massed; 
but if its brij^ades act separately, a battery should be 
attached to each. i ^ • ^ 

When the division is advancing on one road and is not 
in proximity to the main force of the enemy, one battery 
is ordinarily in the center or bahind the main body ot 
the advance guard, the remaining batteries are massed 
and march in rear of the leading regiment or squadron 
of the main body; but if a serious action with the enemy s 
cavalry is probable, all the batteries should be concen- 
trated and marched near the head of the main body. It 
the division is advancing by several roads, a battery may 
bo attached to the columns, not less than a brigade on 
each road, but preferably they would be massed and march 
with the main body on a central road. 

The battery with a detached brigade is never broken 
U13- it marches either in rear of the main body of the 
advanced guard, or in rear of the leading squadron or 
regiment of the main body. 

The fio-hting battery generally consists ot the pieces 
only, alUhe caissons marching with the battery reserve; 
the battery reserves are consolidated and march m rear 
of the main body. .^ . , ,.^ , ^ 

Artillery aids cavalry in its reconnoitering duticb by 
driving hostile parties from defensive positions; and it 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 433 

prepares the cavalry attack by a rapid fire upon the 
enemy's cavalry or artillery, according as one or the 
other is the principal arm for the moment. 
A cavalry division in order of battle is arranged in 

^ threci^ lines; the artillery is massed and placed either on 

I or behind a flank of the first line. 

I The general commanding communicates his plans to 
' the chief of artillery and also indicates the place where 

. ' the encounter will probably take place, and the general 

I position for the artillery. The flank selected for the po- 
sition should be that on which the guns can serve as a 

. movable pivot for the cavalry, will the least interfere 

I with its movements, and can longest remain in action. 
The position is either directly or obliquely in front of the 
flank, depending upon the directions which the general 

, commanding intends to give to his cavalry in its advance 
[, to the attack. - 

i When the chief of artillery receives his orders to bring 
il the guns into action, he sends orders for the batteries to 

II advance, and rides rapidly forward himself to select their 
1 position in the general locality indicated. This position 
I should not be beyond a third of the distance separating 

the cavalry and the object of its attack, and about three 
hundred yards to one side of the point of first contact with 
the hostile forces. 
The batteries, accompanied by their escorts, should ad- 

* vance to the position as rapidly as possible, and usually 
should be formed in echelon, the outer battery in advance. 
The chief of artillery conforms to the orders of the gen- 
eral commanding' about opening fire. Fire should always 
be opened as soon as either cavalry begins to move to the 
attack. It is first directed on the enemy's cavalry; if his 
cavalry is not in sight, on his artillery. During the 

J charge, it is directed on the enemy's cavalry; or, if that 
be not possible, on his artillery. If the enemy's fire is 

: very effective against our own cavalry, one battery, gen- 

, erally the outer one, should engage his artillery; the 

' 9236 28 



434 ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 

Others should continue to fire on his cavalry. If there is 
nothing to fire at, the batteries remain in position, with 
guns loaded, and sometimes limbered, and await the re- 
sult of the charge. If the charge is successful, the bat- 
teries gallop forward and come into action to prevent 
the enemy from rallying, to break up his reserves, and 
to assist in the pursuit. If the charge fails, one battery, 
ordinarily the outer one of the brigade, takes a position 
in rear to protect the retreat and support the division 
in rallying; the other batteries continue their fire as 
long as they can and then join the other in its new po- 
sition. 

The rapidity with which the phases of a cavalry action 
succeed each other leaves little time for finding the range, 
and therefore changes of position are avoided; when nec- 
essary, they are made as rapidly as possible. Frequently 
there will be no time to send orders to the chief of artil- 
lery after he has assumed command of his batteries; 
in the absence of special instructions he should use His 
own discretion as to the best manner of conforming to 
the cavalry movements and supporting them. 

The batteries should have an escort of one or two troops 
of cavalry; the duties of the escort are principally to 
scout and reconnoiter in front and on the exposed flank 
of the guns. 

If the cannoneers are deployed in single rank between 
the guns, the batteries will have the appearance of cavalry 
at a distance, and may thus be enabled to occupy their 
first position unmolested by the enemy's fire. 

If the cavalry fights dismounted, the principles of the 
employment of artillery are those prescribed for it when 
acting with infantry. 

When a cavalry division takes part in a general engage- 
ment, the division commander preserves the command 
of the artillery; but if the cavalry is held in reserve, its 
batteries should be used to reinforce the artillery line. 



ARTILLERY IN THE FIELD. 435 

1095. Machine guns. — The role of the machine gun on 
the battle-field is not yet determined. The machine guns 
using infantry ammunition are better adapted for defen- 
sive than offensive purposes. They will undoubtedly be 
of the greatest assistance in the defense of localities 
when they can be kept under cover and concealed until 
brought into action. Their fire at long ranges will be 
particularly useful under circumstances that render in- 
fantry volleys effective. In the changing phases of an of- 
fensive fight, there would seldom be an opportunity of 
providing cover for them, and they would be exposed to 
very heavy losses in men and horses at the short ranges 
at which they must be employed; and unless they can ap- 
proach their first position under cover, it is probable 
they would be seriously crippled before they could open 
fire. If, however, they could, unseen, take up a good 
and well protected position, they would be a valuable aid 
during the decisive artillery duel and the preparation 
and delivery of the attack. Mounted on light carriages 
or carts, and organized as horse artillery, it is probable 
that they could be most usefully employed with the cav- 
alry, both offensively and defensively, in all cavalry oper- 
ations. In a general engagement, they could be detached 
from the cavalry and used under the circumstances that 
favored their employment. 

The machine guns of larger caliber that have a range 
approximating that of the 3.2-inch gun could be used 
both offensively and defensively on the same principles 
as that gun, but the observation and regulation of their 
fire would be more difficult on account of the smaller pro- 
jectile and bursting charge. 

As each machine gun can deliver a continuous fire, it is 
not necessary to keep all the guns of a machine battery 
together, but they may be employed by platoon, and in 
special cases even by piece. 

As the principles of their employment are so different, 
machine guns using infantry ammunition should not be 



436 COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 

placed in the same battalion with the 3.2-inch or 3.6- 
inch guns, or even with machine guns of larger caliber. 
The fire of machine guns must be carefully controlled in 
order to avoid too great an expenditure of ammunition. 

COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 

1096. Cover is either natural or artificial. 

Natural cover is that which the ground affords, and in- 
cludes soft meadows, marches, heights, slight uneven- 
ness and ruts, low dikes, ledges of earth, hollow ways, 
etc., which will catch or turn aside the projectiles; and 
hedges, fences, thickets, woods, fields of grain, and the 
reverse side of hills, ridges, etc., which hide the pieces 
and prevent an accurate estimate of the distance. 

Artificial cover includes pits or intrenchments. 

As we have not yet adopted any system of our own, the 
following systems, taken from the principal foreign coun- 
tries, are given.* 

THE FRENCH GUN PIT. 

Description. 

109'7. The French gun pit consists of an epaulement, 
whose general direction is perpendicular to the line of 
fire, with wings or returns at the sides, along which 
trenches are dug on the inside for the protection of the 
cannoneers. The earth for the epaulement is taken from 
a rectangular pit one and a half feet deep, and from the 
ramps and trenches leading to it. If there is not sufficient 
earth, more is obtained by digging a ditch in front. The 
lateral trenches may be prolonged and deepened to any 
extent. 

*From "Hasty Cover for Field Artillery," by Capt. J. P. Sanger, 
First Artillery (now Major, I. G. D.) 



I 



COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 

Frervchy Ctcw Pit. 



437 




PI, 70, Par. 1097. 



Construction. 

To trace the pit: — 

1. Lay off a line, about ten feet in length, perpendicular 
to the line of fire, to mark the foot of the interior slope 
of the epaulement. 



438 COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 

This line should be long enough to give the piece a field 
of fire of ninety degrees; mark the extremities and center 
of the line with stakes or otherwise. 

2. In the wings, lay oft" two lines five to seven feet in 
length, making with the first line angles such that the 
trenches shall not restrict the field of fire or interfere 
with the recoil of the piece. 

3. Complete the rectangle of the pit, and mark the 
points of intersection of the trenches and the ramps lead- 
ing to it. 

4. In soft ground, it will be found to be more expeditious 
to use shovels; if the ground is hard, three picks and five 
shovels will be necessary for each detachment of eight 
men. The men should commence by breaking ground 
along the interior slope; having picked a breadth of about 
two feet, they face about and advance toward the rear of 
the pit. 

As soon as there is room, the shovels follow the picks. 

In picking, the men should be instructed to strike to- 
gether to avoid accident. 

Under pressure this pit can be constructed in one and a 
half hours. 

THE GERMAN GUN PIT. 

109§. The German gun pit consists of a rectangular 
excavation one and a half feet deep, with a ramp leading 
to it from the rear. The epaulement is formed like an 
ordinary glacis, and surrounds all but the entrance. 

This pit is easily and rapidl^^ constructed, and, as seen 
from a distance, presents a very small target. 

The parapet being the same height all round, the gun 
can fire in any direction by widening the pit, which would 
then take the form of a semicircle. 

Construction. 
1. Lay off a line four yards in length perpendicular to 
the direction of the line of fire. At each extremity erect 
a perpendicular of four yards. 



COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLEI^Y. 



4yy 



2 From the vertices of the right angles thus formed, 
lay oft' one yard on both the front and side lines, and mark 
the four points so determined, together with the rear ex- 
tremities of the sides, with sabers or stakes. 

Gerrrvcuv Gvirvl^tt. 




FtCLTty 



Secttoriy orvCerttre^Zftn^ 



O 6 to 

L U-, ^-1 >-l H t-< J 



^ 



w 



n. 71, Par. 1098. 

3. Commence and continue the digging as prescribed 
in the construction of the French gun pit. 
The pockets aa are for the reception of ammunition. 



440 



COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 



4. The ramp is laid out and completed after the pit is 
finished, or simultaneously with it, as may be most de- 
sirable. 

An ordinary gun detachment can construct this pit in 
one hour. 

THE AUSTRIAN GUN PIT. 

1099. A simple rectangular pit one and a half feet 
deep, with front epaulement and ramp. 

Ait^trtart Otui^Ptt. 




ri<u^ 






LJLj^ U .-. . I ' I I I ij 

PI, 72, Par. 1099. 



COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 441 

Construction. 

Constructed similarly to the German, the earth from 
the pit being- thrown to the front. 

It can be made in less than half an hour, and while af- 
fording no special cover to the cannoneers, as do the Ger- 
man and English, it can be made in half that time, and 
does not present a conspicuous target. 

It has the further advantage of very rapid cover and 
of being capable of transformation into any desirable pit 
if there be time. 

THE ENGLISH GUN PIT. 

1 too. This type is a true " gun pit," the bottom being 
below the natural surface of the ground, sloping up at 
back of pit toward the rear. It affords excellent cover 
for the piece and its detachment, can be readily marked 
out and constructed in a comparatively short time. 

The lateral trenches, if extended, would afford a cov- 
ered way along the front of the battery. 

The defects in this pit are a contracted field of fire, the 
conspicuous mark which the embrasure gives the enemy, 
the lack of ammunition-pockets, and want of drainage. 

Construction. 

1 . Lay off 8 feet 6 inches on a line perpendicular to the 
probable direction of fire for the interior crest, and at the 
middle point of this line determine a perpendicular to it; 
on this perpendicular lay oft' from the interior crest dis- 
tances of 6 feet, 10 feet, and 18 feet, and through their 
extremities determine lines parallel to the interior crest; 
on these lines find points that are 6 feet from the perpen- 
dicular on both sides of it, putting in a stake or saber at 
each point so determined. Extend the parallels at 6 feet 
and 10 feet, 4 feet on each side, and mark the points thus 
established for the lateral trenches. 

2. Commence excavating at the interior crest, throwing 



442 



COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 



the earth to the front and sides (being careful to allow a 
berme of about one foot), thus forming an epaulement 1 
foot 6 inches high and 10 feet 5 inches thick at bottom, 



v\\\\\i\iiii//////v\\^^^^%%\#\lll//te 




Tlctru 




Secttorv otv Cent^^Lirve^ 



zoft 



PI. 73, Par nOO. 



extending round to the front corner of the lateral 
trenches. Then throw the earth out to the side front to 
form mounds about 4 feet high in front of the lateral 
trenches to still better protect the detachment, sufficient 



COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 443 

space being' left in front for an embrasure. Dig down 2 
feet throug-hout the pit back to the line 10 feet from the 
interior crest anc* level off the bottom. Slope up from 
the bottom of the pit at ten-foot line back to the eighteen- 
foot line. If desirable to connect adjoining pits of this 
class, extend the lateral trenches until they meet. 

Time of construction of pit complete in all its details, 
with detachment of eight cannoneers, gunner, and chief 
of section, in stiff clay, without previous practice, one 
hour and twenty minutes. 

ORDINARY RUSSIAN GUN PIT. 

IIOI* This type differs from the gun pit proper, in 
that the wheels rest on the natural surface of the ground, 
the side pits being for the cannoneers. The only appar- 
ent advantages are good cover for the detachment under 
heavy fire, drainage as far as the piece is concerned, and 
facility for ingress and egress. The obvious disadvan- 
^ tages are contracted space for working party in digging, 
t contracted field of fire, and the mark presented by the em- 
brasure to hostile fire. 

Construction. 

Lay off on a line perpendicular to the probable direc- 
tion of fire 10 feet, prolong the line 5 feet 3 inches in both 
directions, and mark the four points thus determined 
with stakes or sabers. At the middle point of the ten- 
foot line erect a perpendicular to it and lay off on this 
perpendicular to the rear 9 feet 2 inches; through this 
point determine a parallel to the ten-foot line and lay off 
on it, on both sides of the perpendicular, 9 feet and 14 
feet 3 inches, marking the four points so determined with 
stakes or sabers. 

The parallelograms whose vertices are thus established 
fix the surface-lines of the lateral trenches. Dig down 
to 4 feet 6 inches for the bottom of the trenches and 
throw the dirt to the front and side, giving the epaule- 



444 



COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 



ment a height of 3 feet, and leaving- space for the 
brasure in front. When time permits, cut outside 



em- 
and- 




jScctiorv 07V tlfpe- "€^0/', 



n. 74, Par. 1101. 

rear steps for the trenches, as indicated, to admit of quick 
egress for the gun detachment. 

Time of construction complete, soil and detachment 
same as English pit, two hours. 



COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 446 

GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 

1 102. 1. The main objections to gun pits are the con- 
spicuous targets they present; the restrictions they place 
on the free movement and full employment of the guns; 
their limited application to the offensive, and, finally, 
the difficulty of draining them. 

These objections are answered by the necessity of fur- 
nishing shelter to men and horses, which, in many situ- 
ations, would be destroyed if not protected or taken from 
under fire. They are partially removed by constructing 
pits of simple trace. 

2. Require the non-commissioned officers of the piece 
to lay out their respective pits. Commence with the 
Austrian or German trace, which, as the simplest, are 
most speedily constructed, and which, if time afford, may 
be elaborated to any extent suggested by other systems, 
or by the necessities of the position. 

3. In forming the epaulement, leave a berme of at least 
a foot; and, when there is time, level and ram the earth, 

: which, in front of the muzzle, should not be more than 
three and one-half feet above the bottom of the pit. If 
there are side trenches, the earth in front of them should 
be high enough to atford complete protection to the men 
occupying them. 

4. Pockets for the reception of the ammunition, simi- 
lar to those shown in Plate 71, are very important in sav- 
ing the ammunition from water which may accumulate, 
and from the fire of the enemy. 

5. The field of fire should not be less than 90 degrees. 

6. Avoid narrow embrasures as presenting an easy mark 
and as likely to draw the fire of the enemy. 

7. Cover should first be provided for the men and 
horses; then for the material. 

8. If the position is occupied for some time, strengthen 
the parapet by earth from a ditch in front. Prolong the 
lateral trenches of the adjacent pits until they meet, 
forming a continuous parapet; if possible, plank or mac- 



44e COVER FOR FIELD ARTILLERY. 

adamize the bottom of the pit. Traverses between the 
guns will be found eft'ective. 

9. In order to conceal the parapets, cover the fresh 
earth with boughs, sod, or top soil of the prevailing or 
surrounding color. If in winter, use snow for this pur- 
pose. A very effective plan is to dig a small trench or 
parapet from fifty to seventy-five yards in front of the 
real pits, thus deceiving an enemy as to where the real 
fire comes from. 

10. If the ground does not afford natural cover for the 
limbers, limber-pits, similar to the Austrian gun pits, 
can be easily constructed. They should be one foot 
deeper. 



MARCHES. 447 



MAECHES. 

1103. The average march for artillery on good roads 
is from fifteen to twenty miles per day. With rare ex- 
ceptions the walk is the invariable gait. In rapid 
marches, the slow trot alternates with the walk. When 
the services of the artillery are urgently needed, it may 
be required to trot four or five miles without breaking 
the gait. 

Long marches or expeditions should be begun moder- 
ately, particularly with horses new to the service. Ten 
or twelve miles a day is enough for the first marches, 
which, over good roads, may be increased to twenty or 
twenty-five miles when necessary, after the horses are 
inured to their work. 

The care of the horses on the march is one of the most 
I important duties of an artillery officer ; by constant at- 
tention on the part of the captain, chiefs of platoons, and 
chiefs of sections, many horses that would otherwise be 
disabled for months, may be kept in serviceable condi- 
tion. 

Reveille, ordinarily, should not be sounded on the 
march before daylight, as horses rest better from mid- 
night until dawn than at other times. 

A halt of from five to ten minutes is made at the end of 
every hour for the purpose of adjusting harness, tight- 
ening girths, etc. When troops march for the greater 
part of the* day, a halt of about an hour is usually made 
about noon. 

The march is usually in column of sections ; when prac- 
ticable, it will be in column of platoons at close intervals ; 
but the front of the column must not be frequently di- 
minished or increased, as this unavoidably adds to the 
fatigue of the horses, particularly of those in rear. The 
column of platoons should not be used when it fills the 



448 MARCHES. 

road from side to side so as to prevent the passage of 
carriages, staff, orderlies, etc. * 

A non-commissioned officer may be sent forward to re- 
connoiter the road or ground that the battery is to pass 
over. 

The distance of two yards between carriages is main- 
tained, except in bad or difficult ground, when it may be 
increased to four or more yards. The strictest attention 
should be paid by the chiefs of platoons and of sections 
to the preservation of distances, which should not be 
increased more than is absolutely necessary. The lead- 
ing guide shovild maintain a slow and steady walk, and 
under no circumstances is a carriage to move at a trot 
without the orders of the battery commander; when 
necessary to close up, it should be done at a quick walk; 
no practice is more fatiguing to horses and injurious to 
their shoulders than the alternate trotting and walking 
so often seen at the rear of a column. 

If the leading carriage is temporarily stopped for any 
cause, the rear carriages should, if practicable, draw up 
alongside each other in order to avoid or diminish as 
much as possible any check to the column. 

Chiefs of platoons must never be permitted to leave 
their platoons to march at the head of the column ; when 
not marching at the rear of their platoons, they will halt 
frequently to see that their carriages are well up and 
marching properly. 

Chiefs of platoons and of sections, without waiting for 
express instructions, give such orders as may be neces- 
sary for helping horses out of difficulty, for the passage 
of obstacles, etc.; the cannoneers assist at the piece or 
caisson as may be required. 

A small bunch of bale-wire, in lengths of from one to 
two feet, if carried by each chief of section in his saddle- 
pouch, is very useful for temporary repairs of harness. 

If the ruts be very deep, the carriages quarter the road, 
unless it be very narrow and sunken ; in this case, the 



MARCHES. 449 

horses will be left to themselves and not hurried; a skill- 
ful driver can help his horses greatly, particularly if 
they be the wheelers. 

When water-call is sounded, the chiefs of sections, un- 
der the supervision of the chiefs of platoons or of the first 
sergeant, have the watering-buckets taken off the car- 
riages and their horses watered without confusion. 
When water is very scarce, the nostrils may be sponged, 
which gives great relief, particularly in hot weather, 
when it is not possible to let the horses drink. 

Toward the close of the march, an officer or non-com- 
missioned officer may be sent forward to select a camp- 
ground. 

Upon the arrival of the battery in camp, damages must 
be repaired without delay, horses shod, wheels and pintles 
greased, etc. On the march, artificers must always ride, 
or be mounted on the chests ; if fatigued when marching, 

i they can not be expected to work efficiently after getting 

I into camp. 

I The march of larger bodies of artillery is conducted on 
the same principles. A long column can not move as rap- 
idly as a small one and at the same time preserve equal 
order; an allowance for an elongation proportionate to 
its length is, therefore, made for every column. 

When the roads are good, or even tolerable, the artil- 
lery is always obliged to wait for infantry, which is at- 

i tended with much additional fatigue to the horses, from 
having the harness so much longer on them. Likewise, 
when the roads are at all bad, artillery can only keep up 
with cavalry, when the latter are marching at the ordi- 
nary rate, by forcing their horses too much and wearing 
them out very rapidly. When, therefore, there is no 
danger, the artillery should be allowed to march by itself 
so as to regulate its own rate of march. 

Chiefs of sections should carry nippers in their saddle- 

1 pouches to cut wire fences, if necessary. 

9236 29 



450 MARCHES. 

Accidents to Carriages. 

1104. When an accident happens to a carriage, it is 
pulled out of the column, if possible, so as not to inter- 
rupt the march; otherwise, the carriages in rear pass it 
by the most convenient flank and close to proper distance. 
The disabled carriage resumes its place as soon as the 
damage is repaired; if the road be narrow, it must fall 
into the first interval it finds, and regain its proper place 
as soon as the ground permits . If a field-piece is disabled , 
the cannoneers left to repair it, who can not be carried on 
the limber-chest, mount on the axle-seats and off horses 
whenever the piece takes the trot to regain its place; if 
a caisson is disabled, the caisson corporal and the men 
necessary to repair it are left with it. 

1105. When a piece and its carriage are overturned, 
it is better to disengage the piece by letting the breech 
rest on the ground, or on a block of wood, and then raise 
the muzzle with a handspike, while the cap-squares are 
taken off; the carriage is then righted and the piece 
mounted. 

To right the carriage without disengaging the piece, 
detach the limber, secure the cap-squares, and lash the 
breech to the stock; place the middle of a rope over the 
nave of one wheel, pass the ends of it downward between 
the lower spokes of that wheel, then under the carriage, 
through the corresponding spokes of the other wheel, 
and then upward over the wheel and across the top of 
the carriage to the side where it was first attached; the 
ends of the rope and the wheel to be raised are then 
manned and the carriage pulled over, two men being re- 
quired to steady the trail. If necessary, the ends of the 
rope may be fastened to the limber, and horses used to 
assist in righting the carriage. 

Light carriages may be righted by hand without using 
a rope. 



MARCHES. 451 

Ascents. 

1106. After pulling up a short, steep hill the horses 
should be halted to recover their wind; when this can not 
be done, they will move very slowly. 

In going- up a difficult hill the carriages may be halted 
to rest the horses by bringing them across the declivity 
and locking the limbers or chocking the wheels; for this 
purpose it may be expedient to start the sections, or pla- 
toons, from the bottom in succession, leaving a distance 
of twenty or thirty yards between the different portions 
of the column. 

If the draught be so difficult that the teams are liable 
to stall, the carriages in rear are halted and the lead and 
swing horses of the rear half of the carriages can be taken 
out and hitched to the leading half; when these have been 
taken through, all the horses, except the wheel, will be 
taken back and the rear carriages brought up. As it is 
very hard to make the horses pull together, not more 
than five pairs can be hitched with effect to a single car- 
riage. 

Descents. 

110*7. The drivers never dismount going down hill; 
the wheel driver holds his near horse well in hand and 
his off horse very short. Two cannoneers may be mounted 
on each gun-carriage and caisson to apply the brakes. 
In the absence of instructions from higher authority, the 
chief of carriage directs whether the brakes are applied 
to a particular wheel or to both. The brakes are easily 
applied and removed, and a judicious use of them will 
save the horses much fatigue and prevent sore necks and 
shoulders. If the descent be very steep, the sectional 
picket-line may be used by the cannoneers to hold -back ; 
in this case, the wheel horses only remain hitched to the 
carriage, the others being led in rear. 



452 MARCHES. 

Moving along Declivities. 

t lOS. If a carriage have to move along a declivity so 
steep that a slight jolt may overturn it, the wheels are 
locked, the sectional picket-line fastened to the top of 
the upper wheel and held by two or three cannoneers, 
who march on the upper side of the slope. 

Ditches. 

1 109. If the ditch be wide and deep, the prolonge is 
fixed and the handspike turned over on the flask and 
secured, the team is halted on the edge, and the piece 
run by hand close to the limber, which then moves slowly 
until the piece reaches the bottom of the ditch, when it 
moves quickly until the piece is out. If the ditch be deep 
and narrow, it may be necessary to cut down the edges 
and hold back with the sectional picket-line ; should the 
trail sinl^into the ground in passing over, it is disengaged 
with a handspike or by fastening a prolonge to it. 

In passing shallow ditches, drains, or deep furrows, the 
carriages must cross them obliquely. 

Moving over Marshy Ground. 

1 1 iO« Each carriage moves at a distance of ten or 
twelve yards from the one preceding it to avoid having 
to halt ; officers or non-commissioned officers are posted 
at the worst places to instruct the drivers how to conduct 
their teams. The horses must pull freely and quicken 
the gait ; if the ground be very miry, it may be necessary 
to assist with sectional picket-lines, or even to use them 
alone, the teams crossing separately. 

Crossing Fords and Streams. 

1111. If the ford be not well known it must be exam- 
ined, and the dangerous places marked, before the car- 
riages attempt to cross. 



MARCHES. 453 

If the water be deep and the current strong, great care 
is necessary. The men are instructed to keep their eyes 
fixed on some object on the opposite bank which marks 
the place of exit ; they must not look at the stream, and 
they move rather against the current, so as to better re- 
sist its power. 

If the ford have a bad bottom and the banks be diffi- 
cult, the teams are strengthened by adding pairs ; an offi- 
cer, or non-commissioned officer, is posted at the entrance 
to regulate the distance between carriages and to instruct 
the drivers how to proceed; a second officer or non-com- 
missioned officer is posted at the exit to direct the drivers 
how to leave the ford. 

The management of the team is the same as in crossing 
marshy ground ; the horses must not be allowed to halt 
or trot, either in passing the ford or leaving it, unless 
the stream be neither deep nor very rapid ; in this case 
the carriages may be halted to let the horses drink, or at 
least to give them a mouthful of water. 

Upon reaching the opposite bank, the leading carriages 
are halted after they have moved far enough forward to 
to leave room for the carriages in rear. 

If the chests be not water-tight, and are at the usual 
height of two feet and ten inches above the ground, a 
ford deeper than two feet four inches can not be crossed 
without danger of wetting the ammunition. 

If the chests be water-tight, or means have been taken 
to raise them high enough, a depth of three and one-third 
feet may be safely attempted. 

When the ford is deeper than this, the cannoneers must 
carry over the cartridges, fuses, and primers in the 
pouches, which they hold above the water. The chests 
are sometimes removed and taken over in boats. In 
crossing streams that can not be forded, when there are 
no bridges, the horses are swum, and the carriages and 
harness crossed on rafts, etc, 



454 MARCHES. 

Passage of Military Bridges. 

1112. At the entrance of the bridge, the lead and 
swing- drivers dismount and lead their pairs. A distance 
of twelve yards is taken between the carriages, and the 
gait is free and decided; the drivers keep the carriages 
as near the middle of the floor as possible. If the floor- 
ing be wet, battens should be nailed across it to keep the 
horses from falling. If the bridge begins to rock, the 
passage of the column is suspended. 

In passing over a flying bridge, all the drivers dismount 
and hold their horses; the lead and swing horses should 
be taken out and led on to the bridge or boat; the brakes 
should be applied to the rear so that the carriage can not 
be run back. 

Passage on Ice. 

1118. Ice three or four inches thick will bear in- 
fantry. 

Ice four and a half inches thick will bear light guns or 
cavalry. 

Ice six inches thick will bear heavy field guns. 

Facing a Battery to the Rear on a Narrow Road. 

1 1 14, All the carriages are moved close to one side of 
the road, and the pieces and caissons unlimbered and 
brought about; the limbers then take their places in 
front of their carriages by an about, and the carriages 
are limbered up; if there be not room for the limbers to 
execute an about, the horses are taken out. 

If the road be so narrow that the limbers can not pass 
the carriages, the trails of the pieces and the stocks of 
the caissons are carried around until perpendicular to the 
road, and are then placed against the bank, the wheels 
being run close to it; on an embankment, or a road with 
ditches on each side, the carriages are run as close to the 
edge as possible, the wheels chocked or locked, and the 
trails and stocks held up while the limbers pass. 



CAMPING. 455 



CAMPING. 

1115. Plates 75 and 76 represent the ordinary meth- 
ods of encampment. These methods are modified to suit 
the circumstances and the nature of the ground. 

1 1 16, First method. — The battery is parked with fifteen 
yards interval between carriages. The extra caissons, 
the battery wagon and forge, and the store wagon are in 
a third line behind the caissons. 

The harness of each team is arranged on the carriage, 
as prescribed in the School of the Driver. 

The picket-line is fifteen yards in rear of the caissons; 
it is either stretched between posts about six feet high or 
laid on the ground and secured by pins. When the ground 
picket-line is used, the end pins should be at least one inch 
in diameter and three feet long, and to lessen the danger 
of their being pulled up, no horse should be tied nearer 
than twelve feet from them; a sufficient number of smaller 
pins, about three-quarters of an inch diameter and two 
feet long, are used between the end pins to keep the line 
straight and prevent it from swaying. The pins should 
be of iron with steel heads and points. The horses are 
secured to the ground-line by hobbles, or by hitching- 
straps if long enough to prevent constraint to the horses. 
The ground picket-line should not be used unless the earth 
is sufficiently firm to hold the pins securely. 

The men's tents are pitched in line, about thirty yards 
in rear of the picket-line; the first sergeant's tent covers 
the carriages of the right section ; the left guard tent 
covers the carriages of the left section ; the tents of each 
section are in the order of their pieces in park, and are 
closed to the center, or to the right, so as to have a vacant 
space between the guard-tents and the tents of the left 
section. The men's kitchens are in line, ten yards in rear 



456 



CAMPING. 



of the guard tents, 
which may be faced to 
the right, so that No. 1 
can ovei'look the 
kitchen. 

The officers' tents are 
in line thirty yards in 
real* of the battery 
tents ; the captain's 
tents on the right, cov- 
ering that of the first 
sergeant. The officers' 
kitchens are ten yards 
in rear of their tents. 
The baggage wagons 
are in line thirty yards 
in rear of the officers' 
tents. The sinks are 
fifty yards in rear of 
the wagons ; the offi- 
cers' sink on the right, 
the men's sink on the 
left. 

The location of a 
camp should be sus- 
ceptible of good drain- 
age, and be near fuel, 
water, and the road. 

When time permits, 
the rows of tents are 
ditched and a shallow 
d itch made around 
each tent. 

In good weather, the 
sides of the tents should 
be rolled up in order 
that the ground inside 









it 






PICKET Ult£. 






IE ID ID Bill] 



UTS. 



LTS. CAPTI 






^ lii li; ii i n 



omceRssnnu 



PI. 75, Pai 



CAMPING. 457 

the tents may be well dried by the sun; when straw and 
dry leaves or brush are at hand, the men are required to 
raise their beds above the ground; blankets and bedding 
should be frequently aired and exposed to the sun ; at- 
tention to these rules, to cleanliness, and to the proper 
cooking of food, will greatly lessen the number and fre- 
quency of camp diseases. 

On arriving in camp, sinks should be dug at once, un- 
less the march is to be resumed on the following morn- 
ing; the sinks are concealed by tents or brush, when prac- 
ticable, and must be covered daily with fresh earth. A 
small sink should be dug near the kitchens as a recep- 
tacle for all cooking refuse ; the old kitchen sink should 
be filled up and the earth well rammed down over it, 
and a new sink opened every two or three days. 

Paulins are used to protect the guns, carriages, and 
harness, and also to serve as cover for the men when nec- 
essary. The paulin is eleven feet square, is provided 
with double cords at each corner and at the middle of each 
side. Each carriage has two paulins, which are carried 
on the limber chests. For protection of material, the pau- 
lins are placed over the carriage, as follows : Tie a corner 
of one of the paulins over the muzzle, pull the canvas 
over the gun- wheels and tie diagonal corner to the flask, 
tie a corner of the second paulin to the flask, pull the can- 
vas over the wheels of the limber and tie the diagonal 
corner to the pole in front of the harness. The caisson 
is covered in a similar manner by its two paulins. 

1117. Second method. — The baggage wagons may be in 
line with the pieces, the interval between the left baggage 
wagon and nearest piece being about fifty yards; the 
guard tents half-way between the pieces and the baggage 
wagons, facing to the rear ; the forage pile between the 
guard tents and baggage wagons ; the men's kitchens in 
line with the third line of caissons, and covering the 
left baggage wagon ; the officers' tents on a line perpen- 
Clicular to the men's tents, facing them, and on the pro- 



458 



CAMPING. 



--oi ai — 



4 



©I 

SB 



i i 
■«• -H •-«« 

-«- -H ^ 

-e -» -» 
-» -» HI 

-» -» 



•sufo/jjo 

i 

J 



L 

B 

B 
B 
B 
B 

B 

a 
B 

B 



1 



I 



CAMPING. 459 

longation of one of the baggage wagons ; the officers' 
kitchen in rear of the officers' tents, and on the prolon- 
gation of the right baggage wagon. 

If the forge fire is to be lighted, a special place is as- 
signed the battery wagon and forge sufficiently removed 
from the ammunition chests for safety. 

1 1 1 8* In a horse battery, two picket-lines may be used 
instead of one, the second line being fifteen yards in rear 
of the first. 

Encampment of a Battalion of Light Artillery, 

1119. On approaching the site previously selected for 
the encampment of the battalion, the adjutant assembles 
the guidons and conducts them to the camping ground, 
and establishes each one at the point where the lead 
team on the interior flank of his battery is to rest. After 
all are established, he returns to the column and indi- 
cates to each battery commander how and where his 
battery shall be parked. 

The guidons are established with a distance between 
them of ninety-four yards (when there are two lines of 
carriages with six horses each, and the picket-line is in 
rear of the park), the guidon of the second battery in 
the column of march that day being placed at the head 
of the line, and so on, the guidon of the leading battery 
being last. The tent of the battalion commander is at a 
point sixty yards from the line of guidons, and on a per- 
pendicular line passing seventeen yards in rear of the 
second guidon, for an encampment of two or three bat- 
teries ; and in a corresponding position in rear of the 
third guidon for an encampment of four batteries. 

When the captain commands front after parking his 
battery, the guidon moves seventy-five yards to the rear 
and thirty yards to the flank, and plants his flag. This 
point establishes the position of the captain's tent. 

The battery officers' tents are on a line, at intervals of 



460 CAMPING. 

five yards, facing- the interior flank, the captain's tent 
being nearest the guidon. 

The officers' mess-tent, of the batteries to the right of 
the battalion commander, is ten yards in rear of the tent 
of the lieutenant on the flank. For batteries to the left 
of the battalion commander, it is ten yards in rear of the 
tent of the captain. 

Officers' kitchens are five yards in rear of mess- tents. 

In each battery : 

The picket-line is fifteen yards in rear of the line of 
carriages. 

The tents for the enlisted men are thirty yards in rear 
of the picket-line, that of the first sergeant being on the 
interior and the guard tent on the exterior flank. 

The cook tent is next to the guard tent, the other 
tents being equally distributed along the line. 

The forage is fifteen yards from the exterior flank, on , 
the prolongation of the picket line. I 

The sinks are ninety yards from the forage, on the 
prolongation of the picket line. 

The kitchens are on the line of the tents and thirty 
yards from the guard tent. 

The tents of the battalion commander and staff are 
arranged, at intervals of ^ve yards, on a line facing the 
interior flank. 

The mess tent is on the flank nearest the front of the 
park, and the tents of the adjutant, quartermaster, and 
surgeon are on the other flank of the tent of the battal- 
ion commander. 

Non-commissioned staff officers' and orderlies' tents are 
on a line fifteen yards in rear of the staff tents. 

The cook tent is five yards to the rear of the outer flank 
of the mess tent. 

The staff wagons are on a line fifteen yards in rear of 
the non-commissioned staff tents, the forage and guard 
tent being near either flank, 



CAMPING. 461 

Officers' sinks are on a line sixty yards in rear of the 
staff tents. 

The jDOsition of the cook tents may be varied, depend- 
ing- on the direction of the wind and lay of the ground. 

If the camp be established for more than a few days, 
the batteries will be parked in positions corresponding 
to the ones they occupy at battalion formation. 

B/youacs. 

1120. The men bivouac at a convenient distance in 
rear of the park, each detachment opposite its section; 
the guard is on one flank and to the leeward; the cook- 
fires are near the guard. If necessary, the picket-line 
may be stretched through the hind wheels of the carriages 
of the third line, but Avhenever practicable, the picket-line 
should be stretched along the ground or between trees or 
posts. 



462 TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 



TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 

TO EMBARK AND DISEMBARK ARTILLERY AND ARTILLERY 
STORES. 

General Rules. 

1121. When artillery and its stores are to be shipped 
for an expedition, prepare first a list of all the articles, 
stating their number, weight of each, and the total 
weight of each kind. 

In estimating the weights, allow double for that of 
bulky articles which occupy much space without weigh- 
ing much. 

Divide the total quantity to be transported among the 
vessels, and make statements in duplicate of the articles 
on board each vessel, one of which lists should go with 
the vessel and the other with the officer shipping the 
stores. 

The articles must be divided among the vessels accord- 
ing to the circumstances of the case ; but as a general rule 
everything necessary for the service required at the mo- 
ment of disembarkation should be placed in each vessel, 
so that there will be no inconvenience should other vessels 
be delayed. 

If a particular kind of a gun is necessary for any opera- 
tion, do not place all of one kind in one vessel, to avoid 
being deprived of them by any accident to it. 

The pieces and caissons are brought to the wharf or 
shore and unlimbered, and the chests and wheels taken 
off; each set of implements is strapped together, the 
washers and linch-pins being put in a box; the harness is 
tied and labeled in sets; if the voyage is to be short, the 
harness for each horse may be tied up in its blanket. The 
battery-wagon and forge is unlimbered, and the limber- 
chest taken off, as well as the spare parts outside of the 



TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 463 

wagon. All the chests are distinctly marked, so that it 
can immediately be seen where they belong-. 

The pieces are first lowered to their places between 
decks, the place for dismounting- them depending- upon 
the manner of embarking; then the carriages, limbers, 
implements, and wheels; the harness is placed (regard 
being had to its preservation) where it may be of easy 
access. The box of washers and linch-pins is under the 
special charge of a non-commissioned officer* 

The battery-wagon and forge, with its limber and lim- 
ber chest, is stowed away from the battery, but where it 
will be accessible. 

Sponges, rammers, and intrenching tools should be 
united in bundles or boxes. 

The contents of each box, barrel, or bundle should be 
distinctly marked upon it. The boxes should be made 
small so that they can be easily handled. 

The position of the different articles in each vessel is 
noted in a column in the list on board. 

Place the heaviest articles below, beginning with the 
guns, then the carriages, limbers, ammunition boxes, etc. 
Boxes of ammunition should be in the driest and least ex- 
posed part of the vessel. 

Articles required to be disembarked first should be put 
in last, or so placed that they can be easily got at. 

If the disembarkation is to be performed in front of the 
enemy, some of the pieces should be so placed that they 
can be disembarked immediately with their carriages, 
implements, and ammunition ; also the tools and materials 
for throwing up temporary intrenchments on landing. 

When there are several vessels laden with artillery 
and stores for the expedition, each vessel should have on 
each quarter and on a single mast-head a number that 
can be easily distinguished at a distance. The same 
number should be entered on a list of supplies shipped in 
each vessel. The commander can then know exactly 
what resources he has with him. Some vessels, distin- 



464 TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 

guished by particular signal, should be ladened solely 
with such powder and ammunition as may not be required 
for immediate service of the pieces. 

If it is necessary to re-ship or leave any articles on board 
the vessels, care should be taken to note them on the list. 

Boats of proper capacity must be provided for the dis- 
embarkation, according- to the circumstances in each case/ 

It may be necessary to establish temporary wharves on 
trestles, or to erect shears, cranes, or derricks. 

1122. Railroad transportation. — The most suitable car 
for carrying horses, especially in warm weather, is the 
*' slat stock-car," built of slats and open all around, but 
tight in roof. Another kind, known as the ' ' combination 
car," is made with five doors on each side and one at each 
end, which may be closed tight for stores, or with iron 
grates when carrying horses. These are suitable for 
either warm or cold weather. 

Both kinds are usually from 28 to 30 feet long, 7 feet 9 
inches wide, and 6 feet 8 inches high, inside measure- 
ment. Each car will carry fifteen artillery or eighteen 
common horses or mules. 

Loading cars with horses at night should be avoided. 

The horses should be driven or led in, but should not 
be tied. If the journey is to be continued beyond eighteen 
or twenty hours, the horses will require to be watered 
and fed. Nose-bags are generally used for the grain. If 
the drivers are attentive, they, by taking advantage of 
the short halts made by the train, can feed grain and hay 
quite easily by hand . Half-rations wil 1 be sufficient under 
any circumstances. Before placing the horses on the cars 
they should be thoroughly groomed and cooled ; they 
should have nothing more on them than their halter 
head-stalls. 

If the journey is to continue for more than thirty-six 
hours, the horses should be unloaded every twenty-four 
hours and should be watered, fed, groomed, and exercised 
before being loaded on the cars again. If there are stock- 



TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 465 

yards near by, the horses should be turned loose in them 
for exercise. 

Horses are best loaded and unloaded from a stock-chute, 
but where this convenience is not available and there is 
no platform, a ramp or shute may be improvised, using- 
for it planks about 12 feet long and from two to three 
inches thick, depending on the strength of the wood. 

A ramp should be about four feet wide, with the planks 
firmly fastened together with transverse battens. These 
'battens furthermore prevent the horsey from slipping. 
A strong trestle or crib of logs supports the end of the 
ramp next the car, while the other rests on the ground 
and is secured from slipping by strong stakes. An inter- 
mediate trestle or a support of logs should be placed to 
prevent the planks from springing with the weight of the 
horses. Three or four posts of suitable height are set in 
the ground on each side, to which side rails are lashed or 
> spiked for the purpose of keeping the horses from step- 
tping off. A board should be placed on each side to pre- 
Went the horses' feet from slipping over the edges of the 
plank . When planks are not procurable , a ramp of earth , 
supported by means of logs or stones on the end next the 
track, may be constructed. The cars are brought up in 
succession to the ramp to be loaded or unloaded. 

In the field, where no shute or ramp is to be found at 
the place of unloading, material ready prepared for con- 
I structing one should be carried with the, train. 

Artillery carriages are carried on platform or flat cars. 
These cars are generally from 28 to 32 feet long by 8 feet 
wide. When properly loaded, cars of 30 feet will carry 
two field guns and two caissons complete. To load them, 
the carriages are unlimbered and the spare wheels re- 
moved from the caisson: the body of a caisson, its stock 
to the rear, is run to the front end of the car and its stock 
rested on the floor ; another rear train is run forward in 
like .manner until its wheels strike or overlap those of 
the first, when its stock is rested on the floor. A limber 
9236 30 



466 TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 

is then placed on the car with its pole to the front, rest- 
ing on the rear train ; the second limber is backed on 
and its pole held up until a gun, trail foremost, is run 
under it ; the trail of the gun is rested on the floor and 
the pole of the limber on the gun-carriage. The other 
gun is run on in the same manner, and its trail rested on 
the floor under the first gun ; a limber is next run on and 
its pole rested on the last gun ; the remaining limber is 
run on with its pole under the preceding limber. All of 
the carriages are pushed together as closely as possible 
and firmly lashed to each other and to the sides of the 
car ; the wheels are chocked by pieces of wood nailed to 
the floor. When the carriages are liable to chafe each 
other, they are bound with gunny sacking or other stuff. 

A side platform, such as found in depots, is the best 
for loading. The carriages are first run on to a spare 
car ; from this they are crossed over on planks to the one 
upon which they are to be carried, and arranged on it as 
already described. When there is no side platform the 
carriages are run up at the end of the car by means of 
way -planks . Twenty -four thousand pounds is considered 
a safe load for one car on a good track. Baggage, har- 
ness, forage, etc., are usually carried in box-cars. These 
cars have the same dimensions as heretofore given for 
those carrying horses. 

The passenger-car of average size will seat sixty men, 
but a small car will seat only fifty. The men must be 
provided with cooked rations for the whole trip. Each 
car must be liberally supplied with drinking-water, lights 
at night, and all other conveniences, to make it unneces- 
sary for the men to leave them during stoppages of the 
train. 

Transportation of Artillery Horses by Sea. 

1123. Transports for horses should be especially pre^ 
pared for the purpose ; as a rule, the larger the vessel 
the better is she adapted for the conveyance of horses. 
Ventilation is of primary importance, the safety and 



TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 467 

condition of the horses mainly depending upon their 
having plenty of fresh air ; large air-ports or scuttles are 
indispensable, and wind-sails down every hatch to each 
deck should be insisted upon. If time permits, fixed air- 
shafts should be provided for each deck ; the ventilation 
of steamers may be assisted by using the donkey-engines 
for this purpose. 

» The stalls are preferably between decks — never, if it 
can be avoided, in the hold ; should horses be put on the 
spar-deck, nothing will be stowed on the stall-sheds. 
Stalls should be about six and a half feet long, twenty- 
eight inches wide ; tail-boards fastened to the rear posts, 
and padded as low as the hock ; breast-boards and side- 
boards fitted in grooves about four feet from the floor, 
the first padded on the inner side and upper edge, the 
latter on both sides ; the floors of the stalls set on blocks 
that the water may pass under them ; four slats across 
each floor to give the horses foothold. Troughs should 
be made to hang with hooks, so as to be easily removed. 

Before the embarkation, the side-boards are removed, 
and replaced as each horse is put in his stall. 

Horses, in all cases, should stand ath wart-ship ; in this 
position they better accommodate themselves to the 
motion of the vessel. When on the upper deck, they 
should face inward ; this for the reason that the spray 
will not strike them in their faces, and, besides, when 
facing each other in this manner they will suffer less 
from fright and nervous excitement. 

All stalls, hitching-bars, or whatever other arrange- 
ment for securing horses, must be strong beyond any 
possibility of giving way. The living force exerted by a 
row of horses, as they swing with the motion of a ship in 
a heavy sea, is very great, and it is better to have no se- 
curing arrangements whatever than to have those that, 
by giving away, will wound and injure the animals in the 
wreck. 



468 TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 

If the transport is to be used in very inclement weather, 
the spar-deck, over the horses, should be covered. Can- 
vas stretched over a secure frame is better than boards, 
as the latter, in a severe storm, mi^ht be carried away, 
and its wreck would cause disaster among the horses. 

During" heavy weather, horses sometimes become ex- 
hausted and fall. The best thing that can be done in 
such cases is to back out the horse on each side, so as to 
ffive the fallen horse plenty of room. The fallen horse 
should be protected from rain and spray by apaulm, and 
ffreat care and tenderness exercised toward him; other- 
wise he is very liable to perish. The horses may be ted 
from nose bags, but it is better to have for each one a 
small trough, suspended to the hitching-bar by means of 
two iron hooks passing over the bar. The troughs are 
moved out of the way when not in use. Hay can be ted 
to them by tying it up tightly in bundles with rope-yarn 
and fastening the bundles to the hitchmg-bar. It may 
also be fed m small quantities by hand, and the more at- 
tention the horses receive in this way from the men the 
less fretful and uneasy they become. 

When the embarkation takes place from a wharf , and the 
vessel is not too high, it is best to use gang-planks and 
lead the horses on board. The gang-plank leading up 
from the wharf to the gunwale should be about ^0 teet 
lonff bv 10 feet wide, and be made very strong, ihis! 
width admits of its being used for gun-carriages It 
should be provided with ropes at the corners, rollers,; 
side-rails, and boards upon the sides to prevent the horses 
from getting their feet over the edges. Another similar 
gang-plank, but not so long, leads from the gunwale to 
the deck, the two being securely fastened together by 
their ropes. These gang-planks should be carried by the 
vessel, ready for disembarking. Every provision for this 
latter operation should be thoroughly looked after before 
starting on the voyage. 



TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 469 

1 124« When it is not practicable to use gang-planks, 
the horses are hoisted on board by means of a sling and 
lifting-tackle. 

\ Horses should be kept without food and without water 
'or several hours before being put on board, as they are 
liable to be injured if slung with full bellies ; they will 
ilso become sooner reconciled to their new quarters, and 
bake quicker to their feed on board, when these measures 
have been adopted. 

S/ing. — This is made of stout web, or double No. 1 can- 
vas. It is 5 feet long and 2 feet wide, secured at each 
end by a stick of strong wood 2 inches in diameter. 
The sides are bound with strips of canvas doubled, thus 
: making the edges four thicknesses. Loops of 4-inch rope 
are attached to each stick. 

The loop attached to one stick is 9 inches long ; that 

attached to the other is 2 feet 11 inches, and has an iron 

eye — 3 inches, inside measurement — fixed in the end. 

Breast and breech-ropes (2-inch) 9 feet long, are fixed to 

each side, and are tied together when the sling has been 

put under the horse. The slings should be tested by an 

excess of weight. A donkey-engine is used for hoisting. 

Five men are required to sling a horse quickly and well . 

, One man holds the head-guy, which is attached to a 

neck-collar ; two men, one on each side of the horse, pass 

I the sling under his belly ; both then hold up the ends 

I over his back, passing the long loop through the shorter 

I one and hooking on the eye of the former to the lif ting- 

j tackle, continuing to hold up the sling until the horse's 

legs leave the ground ; another man stands at the breast 

^ and fastens the breast-rope, while the fifth stands at his 

•j rump and fastens the breech-rope. The officer superin- 

^ tending commands: Hoist away. The first man slacks 

J away at the guy-rope, holding it just sufficiently taut to 

J keep the horse's head steady. When hoisting, no delay 

! should be permitted ; it should be done in the shortest 

time compatible with safety. At the commencement, 



470 TRANSPORTATION OF ARTLLERY. 

after a certainty that all is right, it should be done rap- 
idly, to raise the horse and free him from surrounding ob- 
jects before he has time to do any injury by kicking. After 
attaining the necessary height, he is carefully and 
steadily lowered to the deck. Care should be taken to 
have two or three careful, active men stationed to seize 
the horse and prevent his plunging until the slings are 
removed. While one holds him by the head-stall 
another rapidly unhooks the tackle purchase, and two 
others let loose the breech and breast-bands or ropes. 
When the horses are to be lowered through a hatch to a 
deck below, the combings of the hatch as well as stan- 
chions about it should be well padded. As an addi- 
tional precaution, a head-collar should be provided, with 
a large pad on top, to prevent injury should the horse 
strike his head against the deck-beams when lighting 
on his feet. 

To ascertain the number of horse-stalls that can be con- 
structed on any deck, first mark off a space of three feet 
all around the ship's side for a passage to be kept clear 
behind the stalls, and a similar width alongside all hatch- 
ways or other obstructions; then divide the running 
length of the space left by 28 inches; this will give the 
number of stalls in each row. When the clear width of 
beam between the inner sides of any deck is 36 feet or 
more, three rows of stalls may be constructed, the passage 
between the rows where the horses are to stand head to 
head being not less than 6 feet, and between those that 
stand tail to tail not less than 54 inches. Horses should 
not be placed near boilers, etc., as the heat is liable to 
make them sick. 

There must be ten per cent of spare stalls, and there 
must also be at least one loose box, constructed near a 
hatchway, to admit of a sick horse lying down. Each 
stall is numbered, the side-boards, breast-boards, man- 
gers, etc., being marked with the number of the stall to 
which they belong. 



TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 471 

I 1125. Care of horses at sea.— For the first few days on 

' ship-board, food is to be given rather sparingly, and bran 
is to form a large portion of it; but after the horse be- 
comes accustomed to his new situation and his appetite in- 
creases, he should be more liberally fed. A bran mash, or 
oats and bran mixed, is to be given to him every other day. 

i The spare stalls admit of the horses being shifted, rub- 

! bed down, their feet washed, and the stalls cleaned out 
every day that the weather permits. Hand-rubbmg the 
Ws is of the greatest consequence to the comfort and 

j well-being of the horse, and is to be practiced, if possible, 
every day, or whenever the horses change stalls. 
Horses are to be slung in smooth weather, and allowed 

; to stand on their legs in rough and stormy weather, in 
smooth weather, they will rest their legs and feet by 
throwing their whole weight into the slmgs. To simg a 
horse in rough weather, whereby he is taken off his feet, 

I would only have the effect of knocking him about with 
the roll of the ship. Horses standing accommodate them- 
selves to the motion of the vessel. They are not to be 
placed in the horse-hammock until they have been at sea 
for a week, as some would only be made uneasy by the 
attempt to do so. ^ . , j? xi,^ 

The hammock is to be placed around the center of the 
horse's belly, and then the breast-band and breeching 

I fastened to the required length and degree of tightness. 
When everything is in readiness, and not petore, tne 

! horse is quickly raised until all, or nearly all, of his weight 
is off his legs. He will very soon learn the relief the 

I hammock affords him, and will not be slow m availing 
himself of it by throwing his weight into it. With some 
horses it is necessary to use great quickness m making 
the ropes fast before they throw their whole weight into 

the hammock. -. , ^ -u „+4.^v, 

1 When the horses are between decks, too much atten- 
tion can not be paid to the constant trimming of the wind- 
sails so as to insure plenty of fresh air. The wmd-sails 
if should be well forward, and extended down withm two 



472 TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 

or three feet of the deck. When a horse between decks 
becomes ill, and the weather is at all line, he should be 
removed to the upper deck, where the fresh air and 
change will probably soon bring- him right again. 
^ Besides the ordinary grooming utensils for stable serv- 
ice, there should be a plentiful supply of stable-brooms, 
hoes and shovels for cleaning out the stalls, and baskets 
or other light vessels for removing the manure The 
ship must be well lighted and the guards attentive : sea- 
sick men must not be intrusted with this important duty 

1126. Disinfectants, such as chloride of lime and 
T^'ii^^'^^?^^^.^^^^' copperas, powdered gypsum, etc., 
should be freely used, and upon embarking, the artillery 
commander will see that they are supplied. 

11 27. Should any contagious disease appear, the horse 
or horses attacked will be promptly thrown overboard, 
and the precautions taken as prescribed under the head 
of stck horses. 

The feed-troughs and nostrils of the horses are washed 
every morning and evening with diluted vinegar 

1128 Water is allowed at the rate of six gallons a 
day per horse and one gallon per man. 

During the voyage, the artillery commander will make 
It his especial duty to act in harmony with the master of 
the vessel. There mustof necessity be divided authority 
and responsibility. Order and neatness among the men 
and cleanliness with the horses are to be looked after by 
the commander of the troops. In attending to these 
duties care will be observed not to interfere needlessly 
with the duties of the crew, nor with the belongings of 

Officers are always to be furnished with cabin accom- 
modations and the men with proper messing arrang-e- 
ments This should be specified in the charter, and 
should be clearly understood by all parties previous to 
setting out on the voyage. 

The fitting up of the vessel is generally done by the 
Quartermaster's Department, but the commander of the 



TRANSPORTATION OF ARTILLERY. 473 

artillery to be embarked will, as the one most concerned, 
give his special attention to see that the work is thor- 
ough and complete. 

1 1 29. Disembarking— When this can be done at a wharf, 
the operation is simply the reverse of embarking. 

When wharf accommodations are not available, ar- 
rangements will have to be madef or transferring the men, 
horses, and material from the vessel to the shore. Bridges 
may be made of pontoons, or of tressels and pontoons com- 
bined, and the horses and material carried ashore on 
these ; canal barges may be used and towed close to shore 
by light-draught steamers, from which horses and ma- 
terial can be landed by a gang-plank; by lashing two of 
the canal-barges together, placing the boats some twelve 
feet apart, and throwing a false or additional deck over 
the whole, a platform is formed about 40 feet long, ca- 
pable of holding all the pieces and caissons of a six-gun 
battery, or from forty to fifty horses.^ A raft of this kind 
should have a strong railing around it. 

In disembarking horses, the same precautions are nec- 
essary as when embarking them. For some days after a 
long voyage they should be led about at a walk, and no 
weight put on their backs,unless it is absolutely necessary. 
The disembarkation of horses by swimming is more 
easily effected than their embarkation by the same 
method, as their instinct assists in bringing them ashore. 
The horse should be lowered in the sling over the side 
of the vessel without fastening the breast-strap or breech- 
ing. When the tackle is unhooked the sling opens and 
is at once slipped from under. In smooth water a horse 
can easily swim half a mile. 

When the deck of a vessel is low, say not over ten feet, 
and there is a gangway, the horses may be backed off 
into the water without slinging. This method should 
never be resorted to if it can possibly be avoided; it is 
liable to strain and injure the animal, and it is said to 
injure his pluck and make him shy about entering water. 



474 ARTILLERY HORSES. 



AETILLEEY HOESES. 



1 



1130. Artillery officers should make themselves thor- 
oughly acquainted with the natural history and structure 
of the horse, and what effects different modes of treat- 
ment, changes of diet, etc. , have on his system and powers 
of endurance. ^ An officer deficient in such knowledge will 
either have his battery constantly lacking in efficiency 
and reliability, or else make it necessary to expend a large 
amount to keep him supplied with remounts. Officers 
should also make themselves acquainted with the best 
methods of breaking and training horses. 

All artillery officers should be familiar with the diseases 
that are commonly met with in horses; they should know 
their symptoms, mode of treatment, what to do in emer- 
gencies, and have a good knowledge of the effects pro- 
duced by the medicines supplied to the battery. 

It is the duty of the battery commander to instruct his 
officers in these things, as they are a very important part 
of the knowledge that should be possessed by every artil- 
lery officer. To this end, he prescribes such recitations 
and practical instruction as may be necessary; he should 
require them to be frequently present when sick horses 
are being treated and when horses are being shod. 

TRAINING HORSES. 

1131. Horses are trained by the best horsemen, under 
the supervision of an officer or non-commissioned officer. 

It should be carefully impressed upon the men that the 
horse may be made gentle and obedient by patience, kind- 
ness, and fearlessness; that punishment is only to be 
resorted to when necessary, and then only administered 
immediately after the commission of the offense, and that 
nothing should ever be done to the horse in anger. 



ARTILLERY HORSES. 475 

The restlessness and impatience which frequently arises 
from exuberance of spirits and playfulness must be care- 
fully distinguished from that which arises from vicious- 
ness or timidity. 

When restless, the horse should be held until he be- 
comes calm; when submissive after punishment, he should 
be treated kindly. The men should endeavor to inspire 
him with confidence, and he should gradually be accus- 
tomed to warlike sounds — firing, beating of drums, etc. 
As one horse is apt to be governed by the actions of 
another, trained horses that are indifferent to such 
sounds should be interspersed among the new ones. 

The first object to be obtained in training a horse is to 
render him gentle and tractable by progressive lessons. 
For this purpose all proper means must be employed, 
such as feeding, handling, patting him, taking up his feet, 
etc., and the practice of the longe. 

The practice of the longe is also intended to supple him 
and teach him the free and proper use of his limbs. It 
likewise aids in forming his paces and fits him for service 
in the battery. 

The men employed in this most important part of the 
horse's education must be selected for their natural fond- 
ness for animals, as well as for their patience, coolness, 
and intelligence, and should not be changed until the 
horses are sufficiently instructed to take their places in 
the battery. 

Bridling. 

1132. A plain snaffle-bridle should at first be used 
and put in with great care and gentleness. If the horse 
resists, no violence should be used. He should be turned 
round in his stall and the instructor should take the end 
of the halter while the man quiets and encourages the 
horse. By careful treatment he will soon become accus- 
tomed to the sight of the bit and will allow it to be placed 
in his mouth. The reins will be tied so as to hang loosely 
on the neck. 



^"^^ ARTILLERY HORSES. 

Cayesson. 



„«L*?' j^^® cayesson is a bridle head-stall, to which a 
nose-band, encircling the horse's head, is added- The lat 
ter IS adjustable by means of a buckle; the chin strap has 

WheTt\^e'sn!ffle h'^^t '^ '-f ^^^^"^ ^*^^P i^^tSed 
wnen the snaffle-bridle has been properly fitted tbp 

a^T,f r '' carefully put on. The nWband should be 
about three inches above the nostrils; if hig-her it would 
d.^-""'' •*/ P^^'^'"' " l«^er, it would afffct the horse's 
uneasy'""^' '* """'^ '^^* ^ '"^ ''^^' ^' ^ make the horse 



' Longeing. 
1134. 



from ??/ ^}^ instruction should be begun on a circle 
from fifteen to twenty yards in diameter As horses are 
usually fed, watered, saddled, and led from the near side 

?dTTtwTlT>f'V'"'' better from that than The S 
siae. it will, therefore, generally be found necessarvtn 

^'rt^fi*' ^Tr""^ ""^ *!^^ '•^^ht t« «^e «n the left ^° 

forward 'Tlnttl'hi*'^'"' ^^?^} *¥ J'^^'^^ ^^o^^^ i« to go 

be required of h^^'^wl^'' ^^^^^v! "^^^^'^^ ^^^e should 
OB requirea of him. When he obeys freely he shonlri 

o«c*isionally be stopped and caressed?^ ^ ^^^ 

If the horse hesitates or stands still when he is ordered 
StTe^coL^s'frorl'' "^ •^"/9-^^-d, as such heStion 
oitener comes from fear and ignorance as to what is re- 
quired than from obstinacy or vice 

waTk*" 'T^ln^^'-I^ ^^ ^u""?* ^^'1 '^'•°"'»d the circle at a 
Thoufd ntt h. yth a whip (with which at first the horse 
should not be struck) should follow at a short distance 
and show the whip occasionally if the horse is incUned 

heSlKlke thi' ''"'' "."^ P'-^'^"*'*' ^'^'^ desired effect 
ne snouia strike the ground m rear of the horse i\n^ f^i 

I^vT^^^'^ "if ^'-^y ""^ *^« whip untflTe Xys. 
After the horse begins to move freely at a walk the 
man holding the longeing rein should gently urge 'h^ 



ARTILLERY HORSES. 477 

to the trot, gradually lengthening the rein so that it may 
be scarcely felt, and should go round the circle at an 
active pace nearly opposite the horse's shoulder so as to 
keep him out and press him forward. If the horse takes 
kindly to this lesson, the man holding the rein may 
lengthen it by degrees, until he has only to turn in the 
same spot, the man with the whip being careful to keep 
the horse out to the line of the circle. Should the horse 
break his pace, or plunge, the rein should be shaken 
without jerking it until he returns to the trot. 

The man holding the longeing rein should have a light 
and easy hand. For the first two or three days, the horse 
must not be urged too much; if he goes gently, without 
jumping or resisting, enough is accomplished. He should 
be longed to the right, left, and right again, changing 
from a walk to a trot and back again in each case. He 
should be frequently halted by gently feeling the rein 
and speaking to him. 

After a few days of the above practice, the horse may 
be urged a little more in the trot, but the greatest care 
and attention are requisite to teach him the use of his 
limbs without straining him. Much harm may be done 
in this instruction by a sudden jerk or too forcible pull of 
the longe. 

Care must be taken that the lessons are not made so 
long as to fatigue or fret the horse. At first they should 
be short, and be gradually increased in length as the in- 
struction progresses. At the conclusion of each lesson, 
the horse should be led to the center of the ring and made 
much of. The man holding the longeing rein should 
take it short in one hand, at the same time patting aijd 
rubbing the horse about the head and neck with the 
other ; he should then try to bend the horse's neck a 
little to the right and then to the left by means of the 
longeing rein. The bend should be in the very poll of 
the neck, and this exercise should be repeated at the end 



478 ARTILLERY HORSES. 

of every lesson, cautiously and by slow degrees, until the 
horse responds easily. This exercise will greatly facili- 
tate the future instruction of the animal. 

Preparatory Lesson to Make the Horse Tractable, 

1135. Before commencing the bending lessons it is 
well to give the horse a preparatory one in obedience, 
and to make him sensible of the power that man has over 
him. This first act of submission will prove of great serv- 
ice; it makes the horse quiet and gives him confidence, 
and gives the man such ascendency as to prevent the 
horse at the outset from resisting the means employed to 
bring him under control. 

Go up to the horse, pat him on the neck, and speak to 
him; then take the reins from the horse's neck and hold 
them at a few inches from the rings of the bit with the 
left hand; take such position as to offer as much resist- 
ance as possible to tne horse should he attempt to break 
away; hold the whip in the right hand, with the point 
down; raise the whip quietly and tap the horse on the 
breast; the horse naturally tries to move back to avoid 
the whip; follow the horse, pulling at the same time 
against him, and continuing the use of the whip; be care- 
ful to show no sign of anger nor any symptom of yield- 
ing. The horse, tired of trying ineffectually to avoid 
the whip, soon ceases to pull, and moves forward; then 
drop the point of the whip and make much of him. This 
repeated once or twice usually proves sufficient; the 
horse having found how to avoid the punishment, no 
longer waits for the application of the whip, but antici- 
pates it, by moving up at the slightest gesture. 

Bending Lessons. 

1 136. These lessons should be given to the horse each 
day, so long as the snaffle-bit is used alone; but the ex- 
ercise should be varied, so that the horse may not be- 
come fatigued or disgusted. 



ARTILLERY HORSES. 479 

1137. The balance of the horse's body and his lig-ht- 
ness in hand depend on the proper carriage of his head 
and neck. 

A young horse usually tries to resist the bit, either by 
bending his neck to one side, by setting his jaw against 
the bit, or by carrying his nose too high or too low. 

The bending lessons serve to make a horse manageable 
by teaching him to conform to the movements of the 
reins and to yield to the pressure of the bit. During the 
lessons the horse must never be hurried. 

113§. To bend the horse's neck to the right. — Take a posi- 
tion on the near side of the horse, in front of his shoulder 
and facing toward his neck; take the off rein close up to 
the bit with the right hand, the near rein in the same 
way with the left hand, the thumbs toward each other, 
the little fingers outward; bring the right hand toward 
the body, at the same time extend the left arm so as to 
turn the head to the horse's right. 

The force employed must be gradual, and proportioned 
to the resistance met with, and care must be taken not 
to bring the horse's nose too close to his chest. If the 
horse move backward, continue the pressure until, find- 
ing it impossible to avoid the restraint imposed by the 
bit, he stands still and yields to it. 

When the bend is complete, the horse holds his head 
there without any restraint and champs the bit; then 
make much of him, and let him resume his natural posi- 
tion by degrees, without throwing his head around hur- 
riedly. A horse, as a rule, champs the bit when he ceases 
to resist. 

The horse's neck is bent to the left in a similar manner, 
the man standing on the off side. 

1139. To rein in. — Cross the reins behind the horse's 
jaw, taking the near rein in the right hand and the off 
rein in the left, at about six inches from the rings; draw 
them across each other till the horse gives way to the 
pressure and brings his nose in. Prevent the horse from 



480 ARTILLERY HORSES. 

raising his head by lowering- the hands. When the horse 
gives way to the cross pressure of the reins, ease the 
hand and make much of him. 

Saddling, 

1140. This should be done at first on the longeing 
ground. One man, facing the horse and taking the snaffle 
reins in both hands near the bit, should hold him while 
another places the saddle on his back. If the horse shows 
no uneasiness or resistance, let down the cincha-strap 
and cincha; fasten the cincha-strap loosely at first, and 
tighten it afterwards by degrees. Care must be taken 
not to make the cincha so tight as to cause uneasiness to 
the horse. If the horse resists or is restless, remove the 
saddle and let him see and smell it; he will then gener- 
ally allow it to be placed; if necessary, strap up a leg un- 
til the horse is saddled. The longeing is then continued 
with the horse saddled. 

Mounting. 

1141, When the horse becomes accustomed to the sad- 
dle he should be mounted. Two men should assist the 
man who is to mount. The man with the longe, facing 
the horse and taking the snaffle-reins in both hands near 
the bit, holds his head rather high and engages his atten- 
tion; the second man bears down on the off stirrup at the 
proper moment to keep the saddle even when the third 
man mounts. The man who mounts proceeds with cau- 
tion, stopping and caressing the horse if he shows any 
uneasiness; after being seated the man jDats the horse a 
few moments, and, without attempting to make him 
move, dismounts with the care and gentleness exercised 
in mounting. This is repeated several times, until the 
horse submits without fear. The rider then mounts, takes 
a snaffle-rein in each hand, and feels lightly the horse's 
mouth; the man with the longe leads the horse forward 
and afterwards longes him to the left, and then to the 



ARTILLERY HORSES. 481 

rig'ht, at a walk; if the horse shows any disposition to 
kick or plung-e, the longe is shaken to engage his atten- 
tion and to keep up his head. After a few turns the rider 
dismounts, the horse is fed from the hand, patted, and 
dismissed. 

. These lessons are continued until the horse can be 
mounted and dismounted without any difiiculty; and 
when he can be made to go forward, to the right and left, 
to halt and rein back by gentle application of the aids, 
the longe is dispensed with. 

1142. The horse is now exercised in the riding hall or 
open manage, the lessons for young horses not exceeding 
three-quarters of an hour. The horse is ridden on the 
track first at a walk, then a slow trot, and afterwards the 
trot and walk are alternated, care being taken to turn the 
corners squarely; the horse is next marched to the right 
and left, halted, and reined back to accustom him to obey 
the bit and the pressure of the legs. When he is obedient 
to the snaffle, the horse is equipped with the curb bit. 
The bit must have rings at the ends of the mouth-piece 
for snaffle-reins, or a bit-bridoon must be used, in order 
that the horse may be accustomed by degrees to the action 
of the curb bit. The first instruction given to the horse 
with the curb bit is bending the neck and reining in, 
dismounted; he is then mounted and exercised in the 
riding hall or open manege as before described, and re- 
ceives the bending and reining lessons mounted. 

Bending Lessons, Mounted, 

1143. The horse is now equipped with the curb bridle. 
To bend the horse's neck to the right. — Adjust the reins in 

the left hand ; seize the right rein with the right hand 
well down ; draw it gently to the right and rear until 
the horse's head is brought completely around to the 
right, in the same position as in the bend dismounted. 
When the horse champs the bit, make much of him, and 
9236 31 



482 ARTILLERY HORSES. 

allow him to resume his natural position. The horse's 
neck is bent to the left in a similar manner. 

1144. To rein in. — Lower the bridle-hand as much as 
possible, turning- the back uppermost; with the rig-ht 
hand, nails down, take hold of the curb-reins above and j 
close to the left hand and shorten them by deg'rees, draAv- ' 
ing them through the left hand, which closes on the reins 
each time they are shortened. 

When the horse resists much and holds his nose up, 
keep the reins steady ; do not shorten or lengthen them ; 
close the leg's to prevent the horse from backing ; after 
remaining perhaps a minute or more with his nose up and 
his jaw set against the bit, he will yield, bring his nose 
in, and champ the bit; make much of him, loosen the 
reins, and, after a few seconds, rein in again. 

This exercise gives the horse confidence, and teaches 
him to arch his neck and bring his head in proper posi- 
tion whenever he feels the bit. 

Most young horses are afraid of the bit, and they must 
never be frightened by sudden jerks on the reins, lest 
they should afterward refuse to stand the requisite pres- 
sure of the bit. A certain amount of bearing is necessary 
to induce the horse to work boldly and well, as well as to 
apprise the rider of what the horse is going to do. 

In reining in, some horses rest the lower jaw against 
the breast ; to counteract this, press both legs equally 
and force the horse forward to the bit. 

Some horses will not work up to the hand, that is, will 
not bear the bit at all. Such horses are unfit for the 
service. 

Whenever, without an apparent cause, a horse resists 
or is restive, the bit, saddle, and equipment should be 
carefully examined to see if any part hurts or irritates 
him. 

Rearing, 

1145. Should the horse rear, the rider must yield the 
hand when the horse is up, and urge him vigorously for- 



ARTILLERY HORSES. 483 

ward when he is coming down : if the horse is punished 
while up, he may spring- and fall backward. 

Kicking. 

1 146. This can be prevented by holding- the horse's 
head well up and closing* the leg's ; if necessary, they are 
closed so much as to force the horse forward. 

Siiying. 

1 147. This sometimes results from defect of sight and 
sometimes from fear. If from fear, the horse must be 
taken up to the object with g*reat patience and g-entleness, 
and be allowed to touch the object with his nose. In no 
case should a horse be punished for timidity. The dread of 
chastisement will increase his restiveness. 

To Accustom the Horses to Firing. 

1 148. Station a few men at a little distance from and 
on both sides of the stable-door, and cause them to fire 
pistols as the horses are led into the stable to be fed ; for 
the same object, a gun may be fired during the hour of 
feeding. If a horse is nervous, he may be put on the 
longe, and fed from the hand and petted each time the 
pistol is discharged; or he may be thrown, care being taken 
not to discharge the pistol so as to burn him or injure him 
in any way. The horses should be trained to be steady 
under the fire of the pieces, and also under pistol firing 
by the cannoneers on the chests and by the drivers from 
their teams. 

Swimming Horses. 

1 149. The horses are at first equipped with the water- 
ing bridle, and are without saddles. The reins are on the 
horse's neck just in front of the withers, and knotted so 
that they will not hang low enough to entangle the horse's 
feet, care being taken to have them loose enough to permit 
the horse to push his nose well out, so as to have entire 



484 ARTILLERY HORSES. 

freedom of the head. The horse should be watered before 
putting him into the stream. 

When the rider g-ets into deep water, he drops the reins, 
seizes a lock of the mane with the up-stream hand^ allows 
his body to drift off quietly to the down-stream side of the 
horse, and floats or swims flat on the water, guiding the 
horse as much as possible by splashing water against his 
head, only using the reins when splashing fails. The 
horse is easily controlled when swimming; he is also easily 
confused, and it is therefore necessary that the rider 
should be gentle and deliberate. The rider must be 
cautioned that the horse is easily pulled over backward 
by the reins when swimming, and also that he may plunge 
when he touches bottom. When the horse touches the 
bottom at the landing, the rider pulls himself on the horse's 
back and takes the reins. 

The rider may also be required to swim, holding the 
horse's tail, allowing the horse to tow him. 

After the man and horse have gained confidence, the 
rider may be required to be seated on the horse while 
swimming. As the extra weight presses the horse down 
and impedes his movements, the rider should hold his 
knees well up to lessen the resistance, and steady his seat 
by holding on to the mane or pommel of the saddle. 

The men are instructed in crossing running water to 
keep their eyes fixed on the opposite bank. 

The practice of swimming gives horses confidence in 
deep water when in harness. Streams deep and wide 
enough to swim one and even two pairs of a team have 
been crossed by light artillery in our service. 

Breaking in the Young Horse to Harness. 

1150. The harness should be put on the horse in the 
stable with caution, and at first without the traces, so that 
in the event of the horse jumping about they will not hang 
around his legs and frighten him. The horse should then 



ARTILLERY HORSES. 485 

be fed in his harness, and after standing- for some hours 
be walked about in it. 

When the horse has thus been fed and walked about, 
and has become reconciled to the harness, the traces should 
be attached and a rope tied to the rear end of each; a man 
then takes the ends of the ropes and the horse is walked 
about, the man holding- the ropes taking care that the 
traces do not rub against the sides of the horse in the be- 
ginning, but accustom him to them gradually. 

When the horse has become accustomed to the pressure 
of the collar and traces, he may then be hitched in with 
a steady horse. At first the utmost caution should be ob- 
served, and a foreleg held up, if necessary, while the 
traces are being fastened, and no noise or shouting should 
be permitted. After being hitched in, the horse should 
be permitted to stand still for some minutes before the 
carriage is started, and it should be put in motion by the 
other horses. The horse should be left to himself and not 
be required to draw at first ; all that should be demanded 
of him is to move forward quietly. 

Management of Vicious Horses. 

1 15 i. A vicious or refractory horse may be thrown to 
convince him of his own helplessness and of man's power 
over him. He is thus made to submit to control without 
exciting his resentment or suft'ering any other physical 
pain than that resulting from his own resistance . During 
the operation the man acts with deliberation, speaks with 
a kind voice, and never uses harsh treatment. 

To Throw the Horse. 

1152. The method explained is a modification of the 
one generally known as "Rarey's Method." The horse 
is equipped with a watering-bridle and surcingle. The 
surcingle is buckled securely but not tightly around the 
horse's body just back of the withers. The man is pro- 



486 ARTILLERY HORSES. 

vided with two strong straps. "No. 1 " is about ten feet 
long and one inch wide, and has a loop or iron ring at 
one end. "No. 2 " is about three feet six inches long and 
from one and one-half to two inches wide ; one end has a 
strong buckle and two keepers (one on each side of the 
strap). In the absence of straps as specified the halter- 
strap may be substituted for "No. 1" and the stirrup- 
strap for " No. 2." 

The horse is taken to an open space, preferably covered 
with turf, free from stones, etc., to prevent injuring the 
horse's knees. Pass the free end of " No. 1 " through the 
ring and make a slip loop ; raise the horse's off fore foot 
and place the loop around the pastern ; see that the loop 
has no twist in it ; let down the foot, draw the strap taut, 
and pass the free end over the horse's back from the off 
side and under the surcingle from front to rear, the free 
end hanging down on the near side. Pass the free end of 
" No. 2 -' through the inside keeper and make a slip loop ; 
raise the near fore foot and place the loop around the 
pastern, with the buckle ovitside, and make it snug ; raise 
the heel against the forearm, pass the free end of the 
strap, from the inside, over the forearm, and buckle the 
strap sufficiently tight to hold the leg in this position. 
Let the bridle-reins either hang down or place them on 
the neck ; they may be caught hold of at any time after 
the first plunging is over. It is important that the off 
fore foot be kept from the ground after the horse first 
raises it, and this will be better accomplished if both 
hands are used at strap "No. 1 " during the first plunge. 

The man takes his place behind the surcingle on the 
near side of and close to the horse, the left foot in advance, 
and grasps securely with the left hand the free end of 
"No. 1," and, if the strap is long enough, makes a turn 
with it around the left, hand, the right hand grasping it 
loosely, forefingers close to the surcingle, back of the 
hand against the horse's back. Quietly and gently urge 
the horse forward; the instant he raisas his foot pull the 



ARTILLERY HORSES. 487 

strap with the left hand, bringing the off heel against 
the forearm, the strap slipping through the right hand, 
which should be kept in place, but which grasps the strap 
as soon as the foot is sufficiently raised, and holds it firmly; 
make a turn with the strap around the right hand, and 
take both reins in the left hand on the near side of the 
horse. The horse is now brought to his knees; bring the 
horse's nose well to the left and raised, placing the right 
shoulder and arm against the horse's side, thus indicating 
to him that he is to lie on his right side. A horse of a 
stubborn disposition may remain in this kneeling position 
for some time, and this he should be allowed to do until 
he is willing to lie down of his own volition. No force 
will be used to push the horse down. From this kneel- 
ing position the horse may rear and plunge, but as he 
moves so should the man, maintaining his relative posi- 
tion to the horse and a firm hold of the long strap, in 
order to deprive the horse of the use of his right foreleg. 
In most cases, after remaining in this kneeling position 
for a short time, the horse will lie down. The man main- 
tains his hold of the strap and reins until the horse is 
quiet and shows no immediate disposition to attempt to 
rise; or he has the strap and reins so placed that he can 
grasp them directly the horse attempts to get up. 

To dispel his fears and reconcile him to his unexpect- 
edly assumed position, he should now be petted, spoken 
to in a kindly tone of voice, and generally made much of. 
When he becomes quiet and ceases to struggle, the man 
should pass around him, handle his feet, and straighten 
out and rub his legs. If the horse shows no inclination 
to rise before being told to do so, the strap may be unfast- 
ened and removed, but so long as the eye shows a wild, 
startled expression, the straps should not be removed. 
The eye is the true index of the horse's feelings and dis- 
position, and if closely observed will always betray his 
intentions. 

When he has remained in the lying position for a short 



488 ARTILLERY HORSES. 

time after the straps have been removed, and he no longer 
struggles or attempts to rise, or, if he attempts to rise 
and can not be prevented from doing so, the man should 
raise the horse's head a little with the reins and command: 
Up. When the horse gets up, he should be made much of, 
and given to understand that he has done what was 
required of him. It will be advantageous to throw the 
horse three or four times at each lesson, but the throw- 
ings should not follow each other in rapid succession, in 
order to avoid the overfatigue and constraint which 
might incite the horse to insubordination and resistance. 

It will be found that horses of a peculiarly willful and 
stubborn disposition will not lie quiet after the straps 
have been removed . To overcome horses of this class the 
long strap should be made fast to the left forefoot so that 
both knees will be secured in a bent position. The horse 
need be no longer held, but will bo alloAved to struggle. 
He may rear, or plunge, or assume a kneeling position, but 
whatever he may do, no restraint should be put upon him. 
After finding that all his struggles are of no avail, and 
that the only result attained by them is suffering to 
himself, he will succumb and quietly lie down. When, 
from his ceasing to struggle when handled, and from the 
appearance of his eye, there is reason to believe that the 
horse has yielded, the straps may be gradually loosened 
and removed. Two or three lessons properly administered 
in this way will conquer the most stubborn horse. 

1153. After a stubborn horse has been thrown several 
times, it may happen that he will not permit his fore- 
foot to be strapped up, and will resist by rearing, plung- 
ing, striking, or kicking. In such cases another strap, 
"No. 3," may be necessary. This is a strong leather 
surcingle about three inches wide, in which two iron 
rings, about two feet six inches apart, are securely 
fastened. The leather girth is secured so that the rings 
will be about the middle of the horse's sides. Two long 
straps, "No. 1," are used. One is placed on each front 



ARTILLERY HORSES. 489 

pastern without raising* the foot. The free ends of the 
straps are run through the rings on the surcingle so that 
they can be used as a i^air of driving reins. These strai)s 
are held by one man in rear of the horse, while another, 
approaching the horse on the near side, attempts to raise 
his left foot. The instant the horse rears, strikes, or 
plunges he is brought to his knees by the man holding 
the long reins; after this is repeated severai times the. 
horse will allow his foot to be strapped up. Should the 
horse stand or refuse to move, the whip may be used. 

These means may be used to break horses of rearing, 
plunging, or bucking under the saddle. In this case, the 
surcingle is dispensed with ; the rider holds the straps and 
exerts sufficient force w^hen the horse is refractory to 
bring him to his knees. The same means may used 
to discipline horses which refuse to carry double, the 
man in rear holding the straps. 

To Break the Horse of Kicking. 

115 I. The horse is thrown and one end of each of the 
long straps is made fast to the bit-rings : the other ends 
are passed through the rings on the leather surcingle 
and secured to the hind pasterns. When thus secured, 
all means should be resorted to in order to make the 
horse kick, and this should be repeated until he no longer 
struggles or attempts to move his hind legs under any 
provocation whatever. 

Treatment and Care of Horses. 

115*1. Horses require gentle treatment. Docile, but 
bold, horses are apt to retaliate upon those who abuse 
them, while persistent kindness often reclaims vicious 
animals. 

A horse must never be kicked in the belly, or struck 
about the head with the hand, reins, or any instrument 
whatever. 

At least two hours' exercise daily is necessary to the 



490 ARTILLERY HORSES. 

health and good condition of horses ; they should be 
marched a few miles when cold weather, muddy ground, 
etc., prevent drill. 

Horses' legs will be often hand-rubbed, particularly 
after severe exercise, as this removes enlargement and 
relieves or prevents stiffness. 

In mild weather, the sheath will bo washed out once a 
month with warm water and castile soap and then greased ; 
during the cold season, longer intervals between washing 
are sufficient. 

Sore backs and galled shoulders are generally occa- 
sioned by neglect. The greatest pains will be taken in 
the fitting of the saddles and collars ; the men must never 
be allowed to lovmge or sit unevenly in their saddles ; 
every driver should keep a pair of soft leather pads, 
stuffed with hair, about six inches by four ; the moment 
any tenderness is noticed in a horse's shoulder, the pres- 
sure is removed by placing these pads under the collar 
above and below the tender part. 

Sick Horses. 

1156. The horses on sick report are in charge of the 
stable sergeant, who reports daily to the captain for in- 
structions as to their treatment. 

In garrison, the battery officer of the day inspects the 
sick horses daily, and records in his guard report-book 
the names of the horses on sick report, and the treatment 
they receive. 

In treating sick horses, it is to be observed that very little 
medicine is ordinarily required, and that unnecessary doses do a 
great deal of harm. 

If a horse sustain an injury, neglect his feed, refuse his 
water, or give any evidence of sickness, it will be at once 
reported. 

No horse on sick report will bo taken from the stable 
or picket-line for exercise or work without permission 
from proper authority. 



ARTILLERY HORSES. 491 

If there be at any time a suspicious discharge from one 
or both nostrils of an animal, it must be immediately re- 
ported . 

To prevent contagion to man or beast, an animal that 
shows any decided symptom of glanders is to be isolated 
at once, and confined or tied up in some locality where 
no other animal can approach him. 

1157. A glandered horse should be killed as soon as 
possible. The stall in which he stood is torn down and all 
the wood- work burned and the iron-work disinfected, or 
otherwise it is closed, and must remain empty until the 
rack, manger, and every part of the iron and wood- work, 
as also the vessels used in watering and feeding, and his 
saddle and bit, have been three or four times thoroughly 
washed with a 5 per cent solution of carbolic acid or a 1 
to 1,000 solution of corrosive sublimate ; all parts to which 
the latter has been applied should be thoroughly scrub- 
bed with hot water to remove all traces of the poisonous 
salt. The application of a lime wash to all the stalls, 
after complete disinfection, will be desirable. Small ar- 
ticles, such as bits, etc., can be disinfected by keeping 
them immersed for a half-hour in boiling water. All 
articles of little value that have been used with a glan- 
dered horse, such as halters, bridles, horse-cloths, saddle- 
cloths, blankets, nose-bags, currycombs, and brushes, 
etc., should be destroyed. 

Stables occupied by infected or suspected horses should 
be disinfected daily by washing exposed surfaces with a 
5 per cent solution of carbolic acid, and nose-bags, halters, 
buckets used for drinking water, etc.. should be carefully 
washed with the same solution or with boiling water. 

GENERAL DIRECTIONS FOR SHOEING HORSES. 

1158. In preparing the horse's foot for the shoe, do not 
touch with the knife the frog, sole, or bars. In removing 
surplus growth of that part of the foot which is the seat 



492 STABLES AND STABLE DUTIES. 

of the shoe, use the cutting pinchers and rasp, and not 
the knife. The shoeing-knife may be used, if necessary, 
in fitting the toe-clip. Opening the heels, or making a 
cut into the angle of the wall at the heel must not be 
allowed. The rasp may be used upon this part of the 
foot when necessary, and the same applies to the pegs. 
No cutting with a knife is permitted, the rasp alone be- 
ing used when necessary. Flat-footed horses should be 
treated as the necessity of each case may require. In 
forging the shoe to fit the foot, be careful that the shoe is 
fitted to and follows the circumference of the foot clear 
around to the heels; the heels of the shoe should not be ex- 
tended back straight and outside of the walls at the heels 
of the horse's foot, as is frequently done. The shoe must 
not be fitted too small and the outer surface of the walls 
then rasped down to make the foot short to suit the shoe, 
as often happens. Heat may be used in preparing and 
shaping the shoe, but the hot shoe must never be applied 
to the horse's foot. Make the upper or foot-suf ace of the 
shoe perfectly flat so as to give a level bearing. A shoe 
with a concave ground surface should be used. 

In garrison, at the discretion of the commanding of- 
ficer, the horses may be left unshod. Shoes will be fit- 
ted and kept ready to ba put on the horses. 

STABLES AND STABLE DUTIES. 
1159. Foul air and dampness are the cause of many 
diseases of the horse; hence the importance and economy J 
of spacious, clean, dry, and well ventilated stables. Ceil- j 
ings should be twelve or fifteen feet high, with large ven- 
tilators through the roof, and a window or side aperture 
in each stall, which should be placed well above the 
horse's eyes. If possible, the building should have no 
upper story or loft. In stables with a loft, ventilation from 
the top is always insufficient, and there must be side open- 
ings well above the horses, so that the draft will pass 
over their heads. These openings must never be closed 
except on the windward side, to keep out rain or snow. 



STABLES AND STABLE DUTIES. 493 

1160. A picket-line is established in the immediate 
vicinity of the battery stable, the horses being tied to a 
hemp or wire rope or chain passed through the picket- 
posts. There should be shallow trenches behind the 
horses to carry off rain, the ground on which they stand 
having just enough slope to let the water run into the 
trenches, or there may be a single drain in the center 
along the line of the picket-posts. Constant attention 
must be paid to maintaining the ground about the picket- 
line in good order. 

General Rules for Stable Management. 

1161. The following general rules are recommended: 
The stable sergeant takes immediate charge of the po- 
lice and sanitary condition of the stable, picket-line, etc., 
and is the custodian of the forage and stable property 
generally. 

The stable is to be kept thoroughly policed, free from 
smells, and well whitewashed. There must be no accu- 
mulation of manure or foul litter inside, or near the 
doors or windows without. The feed-boxes are washed 
out from time to time and kept clean. The ground about 
the picket-line is swept daily, and all dung, etc., carried 
to the manure heap. 

Except at night, when the horses are bedded down, no 
manure or urine is to remain in the stalls ; the stable po- 
lice remove it as fast as it accumulates. 

If practicable, all woodwork within reach of the horses 
and not protected with sheet-iron or other metal is 
painted with thin gas-tar, to prevent its being gnawed ; 
it should be thoroughly dried before putting horses near 
it. The same precaution must be followed with regard 
to troughs, picket-posts, and hemp picket-line. 

Smoking in stables, or in their immediate vicinity, is 
prohibited. 

One or more lamps will be hung in each stable, to burn 
during the night. 



4«4 STABLES AND STABLE DUTIES. 

,i7^^ horses are stalled according- to their positions in 
the battery, the teams nearest the door being- led out 
. hrst; their places at the picket-line will be in accord- 
ance with the same rule. 

The name of each horse, and that of his rider or driver 
are placed over his stall. ' 

Clay is the best for earthen floors, as it packs well 
Caravel, or sandy earth, is not suitable. Each man is held 
responsible for the renewal of the earth and the leveling- 
oi the floor of his stall. ^ 

The sloping of the floor of stalls from the manger to 
tne heel-post is injui-ious and uncomfortable for the 
animal, who stands in an unnatural position, with the 
forelegs higher than the hind ones. When earthen 
floors are not level, they give more trouble, as the horse 
will paw a hollow for his forefeet unless he can elevate 
his hmd legs by backing out of the stall. 

Whenever the horses go out of the stable, the windows 
01 their stalls are to be kept open, unless necessary to 
exclude ram or snow, or when cold drafts affect the 
animals m contiguous or opposite stalls. 

Stable doors are never closed in the daytime, except to 
keep out the wet or to exclude cold winds. If the doors 
be in a single piece, bars are put across the doorway: if 
divided in half, it will be usually sufficient to open the 
upper part. At night, except in very hot weather, they 
should be closed and locked, communication with the 
stable being kept up by a manhole. 

Except in very cold, windy weather, or in very hot 
weather, where there is no shade, horses should stand 
most of the day at the picket-line, as they have better 
air and are less confined, while the stables become drier 
and more healthful. 

In ordinary climates, military stables must be kept as 
cool as possible. If the horses do not stand directly in 
the draft the colde;^ the stable the less will they suf- 
fer If called suddenly to take the field. For the same 



STABLES AND STABLE DUTIES. 4yD 

reason, horses should never be blanketed in the stable, 
except in very cold weather in high latitudes. 

Stable Duty, 

J ] 62. The captain is responsible for the proper per- 
formance of stable duty in his battery. 

At morning- stable-call, the cannoneers, assisted by the 
prisoners, clean out the stalls and police the stable under 
the direction of the stable sergeant. The bedding is 
taken up, that which is much soiled being separated for 
the manure heap, and the remainder put on the racks or 
spread upon the ground to dry. If necessary, the drivers 
assist after they have done grooming. 

At evening stable-call, the stable is policed as in the 
morning ; the bedding is laid down and fresh straw 
spread on toj) of it ; the bed must be soft and even, with 
the thickest part toward the manger. 

Horses are groomed twice daily, at morning and at even- 
ing stable-calls, under the supervision of the first sergeant 
and battery officer of the day. In special circumstances 
it may be advisable to groom only once, about noon. 
\ The grooming is always at the picket-line, except in 
stormy weather ; the rolls having been called, the men 
are marched to the horses, and get to work as soon as the 
first sergeant commands Commence grooming. 

Each driver, whether on guard or not, grooms his own 
horses, under the superintendence of his chief of section. 
Supernumerary horses are groomed by a detail of can- 
noneers under the direction of a corporal, who is assigned 
to this duty. In each platoon, the horses of the chiefs of 
sections are groomed by a cannoneer, who is permanently 
detailed, both horses being attached for grooming pur- 
poses to the section to which the cannoneer belongs. 
The trumpeters groom their own horses under the direc- 
tion of the first sergeant. 

At evening stable-call, each man examines and cleans 
out his horse's feet and sees that the shoes are in good 



496 STABLES AND STABLE DUTIES. 

order. Horses requiring- shoeing are reported to the 
proper non-commissioned officer, who notifies the stable 
sergeant. 

Each horse should be groomed not less than twenty 
minutes, beginning with the near horse. When the bat- 
tery officer of the day considers that sufficient time has 
been given for grooming he will notify the first sergeant, 
who will command : Cease grooming ; stand to heel. Each 
chief of section will then report to the first sergeant, 
(Such) section horses in order; or, if any are not yet 
groomed, will report accordingly. The first sergeant 
will then report to the battery officer of the day, who will 
make a personal inspection of the horses, and if he finds 
them properly cleaned, he directs the first sergeant to 
march ofl:' the drivers and dismiss them. 

If the horses are to return to the stable, the first ser- 
geant leads in before marching off the drivers. If any 
horses are not properly groomed, they will be left at the 
picket-line and groomed by their drivers under the direc- 
tion of a non-commissioned officer of the guard. 

In garrison, when there are no available prisoners, 
two or more men, called the stable police, are usually kept 
at work, between morning and evening stable-calls, in 
removing manure, policing generally, feeding, etc. 

In horse batteries, stable duty is conducted on the same 
principles, with such modifications as the nature of the 
service demands. 

Grooming. 

1 163, Take the currycomb in the right hand, fingers 
over back of comb ; begin on the near side at the upper 
part of the neck, thence proceed to the chest, arms, 
shoulders, back, belly, flank, loins, and rump. Then go 
to the off side, taking comb in left hand, and proceed as 
before. 

The currycomb is applied gently and is used only to 
loosen the scurf and matted hair ; it is not used on the 



STABLES AND STABLE DUTIES. ^» / 

legs from the knees or hocks downward, except to care- 
fully loosen dried mud. 

Next take the brush in left hand, and change curry- 
comb to right; begin at the neck on the near side and 
proceed in the same order as in currying, brushing also 
the parts not touched by the comb; on the off side, take 
brush in right hand, currycomb in left. In places difn- 
cult to clean, apply the brush backward and forward, fin- 
ishing by leaving the coat smooth. After every few 
strokes clean the brush from dust with the currycomb. 

Having done with the brush, rub or dust off the horse 
with the grooming-cloth, wipe about the eyes and nos- 
trils and clean the dock. The skin under the flank and 
between the hind quarters must be soft, clean, and free 

from dust. , ^ , 

Currycombs, cards, or common combs must never be 

applied to the mane or tail ; but the brush, fingers, and 
, cloth are freely used on both. 

The wisp is used when the horse comes m warm trom 

exercise, and he is rubbed against the hair until dry, from 

his hind quarters up to his head. 

Feeding. 

J 164. In garrison, it is recommended that grain be 
fed at first call for reveille by the stable sergeant, assisted 
bv one or two members of the stable guard, or men de- 
tailed for the purpose. The grain, in a box on wheels 
is rolled in front of each stall, whence it is transferred 
to the feed-boxes by allowance measures. Gram is fed 
affain at evening stable duty as in the morning, but not 
until after the hay has been distributed and the stable 

swept up. . . ^ -, . • A 

In camp or on the march, gram is fed at morning and 

evening stables. The men are marched to the forage 

wao-ons or other grain depository, where the non-com- 

i missioned officer in charge, with an allowance measure, 

issues to each in turn. 

9236 32 



498 STABLES AND STABLE DUTIES. 

The first sergeant then marches them back to the 
horses and commands: Feed. The men are to remain 
near their horses until they have done eating. 

Hay, m garrison, is fed thrice daily— immediately after 
mornmg stables, in the middle of the day, and at even- 
ing stables; at the evening feed, each animal should 
have at least one-half of his daily allowance. The dust 
must be well shaken out of the hay before it is put in the 
mangers. During the short days of winter, the feediro- 
at noon may be omitted without injury to the animals. "^ 

Hay, m camp, is fed at the picket-line morning, noon 
and evening ; on the march, in the evening only. ' 

The occasional use of bran is important for stabled 
horses In spring, or early summer, they should have 
grass for at least a week or ten days, during which time 
they ought not to be much worked. Salt should be given 
at least once a week. 

When forage can not be obtained, grazing should be 
allowed at every spare moment, especially early in the 
morning when the dew is on the grass. 

The daily allowance of oats, barley, or corn is twelve 
pounds to each horse ; that of hay fourteen i^ounds ; the 
allowance of straw for bedding is one hundred pounds a 
month to each animal. 

Good oats weigh about forty pounds to the bushel ; bar- 
ley about forty-eight pounds ; corn about fifty-six pounds 
Pressed hay weighs about eleven pounds per cubic foot. 
1 he standard bushel in the United States contains 2,150 4 
cubic inches. A cubic yard contains 21.69 bushels. A ' 
box 16X16.8X8 inches holds one bushel : a box 12x11 2 
X 8 inches holds half a bushel ; a box 8x8.4x8 inches 
holds one peck. 

IVater/ng. 

1 165. Horses must be watered quietly and without 
confusion ; the manner in which this duty is performed 
IS a good test of the discipline of a mounted command '^ 



STABLES AND STABLE DUTIES. 499 

Horses are to be led or ridden at a walk to and from 
water, depending upon its distance from the stable. At 
the drinking place, no horse should be hurried or have 
his head jerked up from the water. 

In the field or on the march, the watering is from the 
most convenient running water ; in garrison it is usually 
from troughs. In warm weather, water drawn from a 
cold well or spring, before being used should stand long 
enough for the chill to pass off. 

The horses are watered under the immediate direction 
of the first sergeant, but if they are liable to meet those 
of other commands at the watering place a commissioned 
officer should replace him. 

During the hot months, horses are watered thrice daily; 
in the morning, at noon, and just before grooming in the 
afternoon. At other times, two waterings are enough, 
after morning and at evening stables. In very cold 
weather, once a day, at noon, is sufficient. It is to be 
always remembered that a horse will rarely drink enough 
very early in the morning. 

The daily allowance of water for a horse is six gallons. 

On the march, horses are watered with buckets carried 
on the carriages ; the oftener this is done the better, as 
it is not usually known when another watering place will 
be reached. 

When horses have to make a day's march without 
water, they will be watered after they are fed, just be- 
fore leaving camp in the morning. 

If a mounted command have to march a long distance 
without water, so that it will be necessary to encamp en 
route, the animals are well fed but denied water until 
just before starting, when they are permitted to drink 
freely. The command marches in the afternoon, and 
does not encamp until it has accomplished at least half 
of the distance, and moves early the next morning to 
reach water. 



500 TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



TETJMPET CALLS, ETC. 

1 166. Warning Cai^i.^.— First call, guard mounting, full 
dress, overcoats, drill, stable, water, and boots and saddles; they 
precede the assembly by such interval as may be pre- 
scribed bv the commanding officer. 

Mess, church, and fatigue, classed as service calls, may 
also be used as warning calls. 

First call is the first signal for formation for roll-call 
on foot. 

Guard mounting is the first signal for guard mounting. 

Drill call is the first signal for drill dismounted. 

Boots and saddles is the signal for mounted formations; 
for mounted guard mounting or mounted drill, it immedi- 
ately follows the signal guard mounting or drill. 

The trumpeters assemble at first call, guard mounting, 
and boots ana saddles. 

When full dress or overcoats are to be worn, the full 
dress or overcoat call immediately follows first call, guar a 
mounting, or boots and saddles. 

Formation Calls. — Assembly: The signal for the bat- 
teries or details to form on their battery parade grounds. 

When the drivers are near their horses, and the men 
are known to be present, the assembly may be omitted after 
boots and saddles, at the discretion of the commanding 
officer, in which case the drivers immediately proceed to 
their horses and harness without further command ; the 
cannoneers proceed to their guns. 

Adjutant's Call : The signal for the batteries or guard 
details to assemble on the camp or garrison parade 
ground ; it follows the assembly at such interval as may 
be prescribed by the commanding officer. 

Alarm Calls. — Fire Call : The signal for the men to 
fall in, without arms, to extingish fire. 

To arms or to horse ; The signal for preparing the bat- 
tery for action, or for the march, with the least practi- j 
cable delay. j 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 501 

Service Calls.— ra/?s, mess, sick, church, recall, issue, 
officer's, captain's, first sergeant's, fatigue, school, and the gen- 
eral. ^ , -,. 

The general is the signal for striking tents and loading 
wagons preparatory to marching. 

Reveille and tattoo precede the assembly for roll-call ; re- 
treat follows the assembly, the interval between being only 
that required for formation and roll-call, except when 
there is parade. 

Assembly, reveille, retreat, adjutant's call, to the color, the 
flourishes, and the marches are sounded by all the trum- 
peters united ; the other calls, as a rule, are sounded by 
the trumpeter of the guard or orderly trumpeter ; he may 
also sound the assembly when the trumpeters are not 
united. 

The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, 
if marches be played before reveille, it is fired at the 
commencement of the first march. 
The evening gun is fired at the last note of retreat. 
The drill signals include both the preparatory com- 
mands and the commands of execution ; the last note is 
the cdlnmand of execution. 

The drill signals are taught in succession, a few at a 
time, until all the officers and men are thoroughly famil- 
iar with them, some drills being specially devoted to this 
purpose. 

When a command is given by the trumpet, the chiefs 
of subdivision give the proper commands orally. In the 
evolutions of large bodies of troops, the subordinate com- 
manders cause their trumpeters to repeat the signals of 
the chief trumpeter, who accompanies the commanding 
officer. 

The memorizing of these signals will be facilitated by 
observing that all movements to the right are on the 
ascending chord, that the corresponding movements to 
the left are corresponding signals on the descending 
chord, and that the changes of gait are all upon the same 
note. 



502 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



TRUMPET CALLS, &C. 



To economize space, the music is written an octave higher than the 
trumpet scale, and is adjusted to the scale of the bugle. 



1. First Call. 



Quick. 



m^^^^m 



£3= 



i 







2. Guard Mounting. 



Quick. 



H«-s-^ 







TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



503 



3. Full Dress. 



Quick. ^-^ 



-g]? -8— ^-^-^^-^- 






.^__^-^-^_^_ 



f ^ f /TN 



thB 



#4-#- 



f— ^- 



4. Overcoats. 



i 



-f=ii: 



■4— .»■ 



^ 



^ 



Quick. 



5. Drill. 



_^_^_ 



=1^ ^-^-Fi*f 



.^_^i^=r5_ 



f-P-^- 



- ^ r I — h 



2-4-- 



"ti^ "--" 



-3—/ 



-r^sr 



_^^_c^ 



=P=^FP: 






fH^H»^^- 



:-4l 1— I— I— 1-!-^ ^4-1 ba^ibd I ^— I FbM^^^ L I — P-\ 

> --8--#-#-#-# -#|--#-H^b,gS= F-h--t-- P -^ H 



i2-Ett?-tf-f: 



1^ 



-h— '?=F^-#-#-#-^ 



_^_^_^H«-^-«- 



-!;;CTp-^-^-tf--f-|gI=^qiLi!?!!y^^1LjLH- 



#-#-#-#-# — #- 



_^_^_^_^t_#_,« — ^ 



Ah«-^-«-^^ 



•i — ^-F I i"*! ^^--^- ^-t 



504 



Quick. 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

7. Water. 



->^ — 



t=p=t= 



_p_^. 



if^ 



Quick. 



8. Boots and Saddles. 






^- 



-I — #H — I I I — H 



-I — #H — h 






9. Assembly. 



Moderate. 



sE^M 



m 






t=J^: 



:isiS:; 



-^— H- 



-•-•-*- 



-|«---^— ^- 



:L.i3: 



10. ADJUTANT'S Call. 



Quick. 






={— ^- 



-L-^*-i Lrt^* — I — r- 1 — ^ — ^ — V 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

11. Fire. 



505 



ii 



Quick. 



^ 






I 



t-*-M I ^. . M. ±-^- 



-^-^-i- 



^z^=-tzUS: 



'^-^w-^-^ 


T-r— fT-r- 


^ 


ip-t£=tpr^: 






Et- 


Repeat at will. 



Quick.^ 



12. To Arms. 






-^f ^ n f ^ 3 ^ 



+-^- 



! — ^#-1-— } — #H — I— #-i — I — #-«- 



H 1 1 1 \- 



H^L^-'-^-fS- 



-^-^-•-^_^_ 



Repeat at ivill. 



13. To Horse. 



Presto . - — » ^-^ 



506 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

14. Reveille. 



1 



Quick, 



■±z=h 



--^-^^-.-^ 



-t^- 






End. 



-^-f--^ \- 



#=&X 



ip-,^^r-[-Fr^ r^"^" Fh-i- 



#-_^_^_^qi: 



-I — M — ^-t — ■• — '—■I — *-< — K 



l^^rgis^^^i 



15. Retreat. 



P 



Moderate. 



-^ ^.^ft- 



a 



1:=t3 



t^ttt 



^^1 






m 



g^ 



3Eg^^!5 



-i — h#— #-•-#- 



•#• •#••-#• -t^ 






TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



507 



R ETR E AT— Concluded, 




i 



-#-^ 



=t=Ji=tt:: 



I 



:3=? 



tt== 



=P:x?T: 



:t^^ 



-■^ I H r I *~*^\ •r--\ Fl h* — *-^^ 



Im^j^fiiii^j^ 



2=t:= 






-^-T 



i 



li 



i— I — I — I — +1 



t^ 



^a^3: 



1 



i 




-^h- 



-#H #-h-|- 






qzrzqi 



==r^= 



li 



508 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

1 6. Tattoo. 



fe 



Quick, 



-i-+=H- 



-^-ji-T-ti^-.-i- 



-f2- 



:p=t= 



i^ii 



1^ 



-.-±-ib 



:p=ZTi-|=:q- 



iiil 



0^0-S—S 



is 



-N-^^ 



S^Si^q^ 



^^3 



s^^?^?^'^ 



|e£ 



-X- 



jr~H— "l-H "^7 



|sEe 



:=l=ic: 



--l-^-l-^- 



-^^?^ 



}: 



:q=7^ 



1^ 



t-f-M: 



->.-^T!^3^ 



1^3^^^ 



:^t: 



liii 



=^— T 



#_^±,*- 



Et ^igj 



-^ 



"^— l*^!«H«^ 



tTt 



t=a= 



:q!5==l= 



2!EPEF= 



:it: 



! 



^±p-_ziii^p: 



^-^ 



-#-- 



=-S 



s:q=q= 



-0—0-0-0 0- 



-J-J ItH 1- 






TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



509 



-^_^_i.#_^_ 



T ATTOO — Continued. 



-+- 



I 



I 



=t= 



H-^ 



,_^_ 



^^t^=tt:=Li: 



'W^ziLj^Qr. 






i 



I 






I 



I 



=hr^=1=H»-P- 



— * — h-i — I — -^ — y- 



-€---0-0— \: 



=t~ 



Jgg^^^E f^^^gi 



-0 — 0—0-0—'- ^- jp — #— ^-^- i 0-^^]/- \\ — [-- #-U-p — #- 



|;j;^ g^^ g^; ^^;^ ES-jgg 



^ , ~'J-^-i — I — ^ — I — I — ]/- 



~-^^^- 



L_, 1 1^ 1 , I/-J-H 1- 



■—m^ 1 1 h 



510 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

Tattoo— Concluded. 



-^-^-^ 



^-^-« 



tztji 



-^ — ^- 



i 



q==!=5 



1 



-^-fl-my 



M^-g 



i±L 



i g^gj; 



111 



3Ea=s:- 



3; 



=.F^ 



-^.i 



r 1 ^-1 — 4—1 1 — ^-k-l — I — ^- 



-4-^4-0- 



iiiifrt 






-0-^-4-0- 



I 




;ii 



gs 



I 



_ps ^•. 



_ji — I >,_i..^_-. — I ps — ^ — #-^-#— I h— t-h— t 

1 — ± 1 — ± 1 h— *■- 1 *- 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



511 



Slow. 



17. Taps. 



as 



=i=3= 



n^^—n^ 



if 



±Mz 



_^.JL.P 



-«2- 









18. Mess. 



Quick. 




19. Sick. 



Quick. 



=^r 



it: 



#_^-_^-ieIie_^_*=i: 



«=tiL- 



=?=P 



=t:=r:?= 



^t^: 



*— ^ 

t 



-F,i b^M 



pzpz^z^zdzi 



.^.•Ht-^-' ^ 



^ 



512 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

20. Church. 



Slow. 



EE 



i^ 






21. Recall. 



Moderato 




Allegro 



22. Issue. 




23. OFFICER'S Gall. 



Quick. 



Fg^-8-! — ^H-=F=F— ^-!-^-H=T=H-^-i— ^- 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

OFFICER'S Cfi^LL— Concluded. 



513 






24. CAPTAIN'S Call. 



#-i— ^-s-^-h- 



-#-^-f 



t=t:=:J: 



25 First Sergeant's Call. 



Quick, 




26. Fatigue. 



Quick. 



iii^-( 



#— ^- 



^^i^^^ 



— ^_ 




9236 33 



514 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



Quick, 



27. School. 



-P-^ 



:t?-^5 



■0-0- 



-r-^- 



f-^ 



H h 



litit 



=?i=]i=q^: 



-^zit 






3=i: 



-^-T-^- 



-^— =f 



:Ui:= 



-3 



28. The General. 



"4r— I b»bJ— l~hH— {--|-| faB^I-l 1 1 h- 



_,t_^_^_^_^_ft- 



i^ 



11 






i«-f- 



-# •— — +! 1— I—I — I— h- h— I r+- — ^b—! I— t— j— h 



iJ: 






^ 



:a:: 



F-f ^-^- 



i 



#^ir^- 



- -.^0S^ — b-Bk-iH— ' H—l — P 



:Li3- 






-(•^^ 



:r= 






TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



515 



DRILL SIGNALS. 



I 



29. ATTENTION. 
Slow. ^ 



:A=g= 



i: 



I 



30. Drivers prepare to mount, 

3 3 



Mount. 



SE^^e^^t^ 






i 


n 


3 1 . Drivers prepare to dismount, 

• • • 

m m m — ^ ... 


Dismount. 


1 


i O ! ' ^ 


m m m — ^ 


■J 1. 


-i 


^=t= 


^,..J P 


111 P ^ ^ 1 1 




1 m •^ V - 1- 




1 "^^^ " 




-« 


J 




d <^ 





i 



32. Cannoneers prepare to mount, 
Quick, 



Mount, 



mm 



it 



3:z:i^={!izrf=t:: 



-#— +- 



33. Cannoneers prepare to dismount, Dismount. 
QuicJc, ^ i^ 



_j — # — I — 



^m 



516 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

34. Forward, March; 

or, 

Limber, Front. 
Slow. 




i 



36. Walk, 
Slow, 



March. 



3i 



^-^— ^- 



*: 



37. Trot 



Slow. 



March. 



=3£zt=. 






38. Ga//op, March. 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 
39. Guide right. 

Slow. /TV 



i 



¥=3z 



* 



517 



40. Guide left. 
Slow. /-^ 




41. Guide center. 
Slow, 



i^i^ 



i 



3Toderate. 



^=-j^ 



42. Reverse, 



#=#= 



-^— ^ 



March. 



-!•—#- 



Moderate. 3 



e£ 



43. Countermarch, 

3 



-# — # — # — #- 



March. 



^ 



5^ 



St; 



518 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



44. Right about, MARCH. 



i 



Slow. ^ 



:e^: 



f7S 






45. Left about, 



March. 



Slow. - 



46. Column right, 



m 



Slow. 



1^- 



H 1 l--^-f 



=?=P 



March. 
-^ — . 



47. Co/(//w/; /eff, 




48. ^/ the right flank, MARCH. 
Moderate. 



li 



It 



■Jg 



49. By the /eft flank, March. 
^Toderate. 



Siii£ 



-^ 



tMi 



1 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 
50. Platoons right wheel, 



lloderate. 
3 

-4-- 



-0-0-0- 



-.^_^_^_4 



^-^t-^ 



3 
• • • 



519 



March. 



1^ 



51. Platoons left wheel. 

Moderate. 3 

_ — kk-f^- 



-(t-^-^- 



March. 






!•-#-#= 



-H 



'^ 



52. /?/^^f oblique. 



Slow. 



il^^l 



March. 



^±z=tz 



i 



Slow. 



53. Ae/^f oblique, 



1^1 



March. 



4^ 






54. /?/^^f front into line. 
Moderate. zr^ 



^fe 



333ES3 



-#^- 



#4- 



;f=^^ 



March. 

<2 r 



ir,^' 



^t=^F3=a=: 



^ 



520 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

55. Left front into line, 



Moderate. ^v 



March. 



:feS=t:^t=tS^ 



^^ 



iprpzfiTipi 



H I il I 



:5^!=t 



I 



56. Face to the rear, March. 



57. On right into fine, 



Moderate. 



Marc^ 



:z^^^,j ^^^ ^= ^ t^==^=^ 



Moderate. 



58. On left into line. 



Wlji-^- 



-j^ \-wd H^ WL-w^-^. 






March. 



1 



59. Battery right wheel, 
Quick. 3 3 




TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

60. Battery left wheel, 



521 



SI 



#-^— ^- 



-^— (•— ^— f 



#— *-^- 



-I 1 1 m — ^ — ff. 



1 



-/«— ^— #- 



March. 



- I I ii ! - — I j i — # — m — #-P \-^ — Y 



61. In battery, 



March. 



i 



Moderate^ 



-^-#-^- 



^^ 



-^-^-^- 



-?-^- 



62. Commence firing. 



Quick. 



3 



e 



:^=^ 



63. Cease firing-. 
Quick. ^ ^ ^ 



^-^r^- 



i^^^*^ 



#-i — I — I- 



z^-n^z 



522 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



MISCELLANEOUS TRUMPET CALLS. 



Quick time. 



64. PRESIDENT'S MARCH. 



^— ^^- 



tt: 



S^-0- 






1*-^^'^^ 



.S=t==i: 






i:=t:= 



-^^ZjiZp.^. 






^--ipirz^ 



-f^^R 



_^-^^_^_ 



-f— ^- 



SeIe:' 



#— ## 



9-00-0-0—0- H #-| 1— ^-J— ^-U-h#— #- ' 




Quick time. 



65. General's March. 



:^Ee=r— 



0~^0-<& — 



^^^^^P^ 



i 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

GENERAL'S March— Concluded, 



523 



^-±^-{Z- 



W-- 



*^ 



-0^0- 



mi 



i^-: 



5= — ^- 



^^ 



t 



-^-^e— (21 



5^ 



-P— F 



66. Flourishes for Review. 
Quick. ^ 






67. To THE Color 



QuicJc time. 



#_.H« 



re:53 



-i«^^- 



H*-.^_^_ 



-^.-.^ 



H— -h- 



-i — J- 



=f:il 



#-^-1: 



^- 



A-^^-^- 



s 



£■»!<?. 



-*--^=¥r 



-(e-^- 






pii ^ j^-i-r— L^ 



524 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

To THE Color— Concluded. 



==]^' 



-0^0- 



-OZZ^-^^-^-^- 



H — ^- 



~^=i^-^-^-^-jf- 



(2—^-^-^-^ 



gm= 



-PZjiZ 



-I — I — #- 



_^_^_^_ 



AC. 



-h- ^- 



-h— h- 



■llM^I 



Quick, 



A-^± 



ifcb 



1-^ 



68. Sound Off. 

3 



si 



-hr 



#-^- 



■1— ^ ^-h-^- 



-H- #-l — h- 




i 



=!=:^H«- 



:?=r=F=q= 



-# 0-0-0 0- 



-4^- 



69. ROGUE'S March. 



-0 — 0-0-0 — 0- 



Quick time. 



~L~~!~ '-.i I ^ 'i — ^' ' ^ ~ 



-0-\ — 0-\ — 
-I — I — I — I — I- 



— — « — ^ — [ 1 I I I— I ^ — I I I [ L — f ' 

.1 1 — I — I — I 1 — I — I ' h- 



-j— I— r-i — j- I I i [-M~!~t — {— H~t~l ^ — ZZZL — ^ ^r 



Repeat at will 



i 
i 



Very slow. 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

70. Funeral March. 



525 



i^^^l 



■(e^f*-i«^-#- 



I 



.1-^ L_«J 1 _ i I 1 Li — 



#-- E-. — =tEi5^_— _|:^A^_^A^_^ — ^_E 

h— H — ^ h F h"h-t-^h- hzz:h-E 



•^-^•^_^_ 



i 



a— ^ — L__i — i__i — I — 



-p g^-jf n — ^a^^z ij^ 






-^"^" 



-^- 



f»^-/«^^- 



■4--<*- 



I 



-*— I- 



=^- 



=??: 



i^Zii- 



:^ 



-^—-i- 



T='T^ 



■0 — I # — H-#^#-#-#- 



i 



:=!= 



■i (&- 



l"^- 



-:^—^^^^'^ J, ^ ' 



^ ^3zL^.j._/i_^.._,«_<2 — 1 : 



_<fi_ir: 



-#-#—#—#- 



H — ■! — H— .^ 



SEteEl 



i 



Repeat at will. 



-«5»- 



i 



526 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



QUICKSTEPS. 



71. Quickstep No. 1. 



I 



Quick* 



W^ 



*-+--i — bj-i — I — H — I — ^ 






S 



I^^^^^PSB^^ 



P 



^W(^. 



^ 



rrr^ - 






t_,«i^^__^_ 



•I I I I 







#-H*-#H«— ^ 



_^-.^ 



^M<;. 



^-5-#- -I — #-<— 



^ 



W=^^^--f 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

Quickstep No. \— Concluded. 



527 



-^^^-^ 



PH^FA 



+-f-#4 



-^-i-.^- 



^^- 



-P-I- 



•I I i f - 






72. Quickstep No. 2. 









^* 



:W 



_i — I — I — , — I- 



-0-4- 



#— P4- 



-t^ 



■f- 1^— Tff 1 -^ 1 • 1- 



# ^ 






£^= 



-m=t-- 



^ 



-f-^- 



I 



-0-0-0-0 0- 



-0-0-0-0-0- 



73. Quickstep No. 3. 



I 



m 



-^zzd^ff^zzizw--^- 



wm 



# — P-^^-—m-C..fi^ 



=gfct^t^t;t=^: 



l^^fea^^l^# 



528 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

Quickstep No. 3— Concluded. 



1 







74. Quickstep No. 4. 

' ■ " ^ ^ J li-i .« •- 



^4^^-f 



-p^^ 



ttti 



ii»_^. 



-t^ 



1.^ 



m 






T 



■?-y-7-; :-f-7-S^ 



i 



^, 



^l ^a^^^^ j g g g^ag 



-^-1— ^ 



I 



#-S-^ 



«-H-^- 



i 



■f— ^-*^-^ 



~^-R=^ 



-7-^-?- 



if-^-^- 



^t^- 



£^ 



75. Quickstep No. 5. 



f^^S^i^L^ 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



629 






Quickstep No. b^Conciuded, 



i 



^ P P -^ 



\-P^- 



=til 



^^!^— T^«/»^-*- 



-I 1-^^ rl 

^ ' |-ii|l 



ki—^-*- 



^=t^ 



c— *-f 



■l«-4— P 



? ! ! ! t- 



#-^-^-^-# 



l-i«- 



=W: 



< 



fe^l^Efes^ 



76. Quickstep No. 6. 



i 






t^ 









i 



I 



i 



Sifebif: 



p — h^^— ^f-i — I — I — ^-^ 



f-^ 



-f-^9- 



-u-^^t^-^h 



■^-h 






ittS: 



::p^ 



IS^= 



-f-7— ^- 



-=t^l;^t: 



77. Quickstep No. 7. 



<:#=^^ 



:ifc:*±t 



f-T¥ 






:^=^- 



[-+■ 



•^^3^^^^zggr^g±i^ggg 



tg?^ 



9230- 



-34 



530 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

Quickstep No. i—Conchuied. 



i¥^fe: 



] 






^-^^ 



Efei ig l iTi ^rs ^j^Egjfg aasj 



78 Quickstep No. 8, 



F Truaipet. 



fc± 



->«-= 



_^-^_qIP-l«_ 



:*=*it± 



'M^^=P±3±t 



tr-^-V- 



C Crook. 






#-s-f— ^- 



:M5i^Lt:ttz5=ifB 



i^ 



—i^j 



^iH:^^ 



^-i-zrrzyi _ j. __^- j^ gq-|t4 i-f - ?. 



=£?*^ 



^iy^iy 



_^_^-_^_^. 



^^ 



=t: -V4l-U-r ? 



-g— 7-Sf-^ 



i 



-(•-# 



1?:^ 



iil 



f-^- 



^^ 



#-^-r^^-f^-s=^ 



-F-i-F— F-s=^ sr~r 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



531 



Quickstep No. s— Concluded. 
Second time. End. 



I^^^fiyei 



t 



f-^f^-^-Wp 



m 



i 



^^^^m 



# r — 



f-^f^w+^ 



t?t^S¥± 



i 



Da Capo. 



■^--dSz^z 



■h-f-n- 



i- 



i 



-J?— ?- 



4:=^ 



-^^ 



79. Quickstep No. 9. 



F Trumpet. 



S33^ 



#— h-H— fr 



=h=P=p: 



C Crook. 



#1 ^ 



r - i ^ F I — r~s r- 



#— f 



i 



E'nrf. 



^^S^ 



H^53-f— CI=iI-^- 



it^^z^tt: 



i 



i 



_i^_pr 



:^ 



532 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 

Quickstep No. 9— Concluded. 



f-7L- 



=?=^— (•-==?: 



fT j 1 - =^ TT"i i^ - 



t^ 



_^^'_^ 



+=+-|i^ 



-^iUir 



i 



f ^-w^V-^- 



mm 



W-0—il- 






I 



^ 



:»--?- 



:fcq: 



^g ^ f^gi^ 



W i i/- 



-f-T 



-i»_._i«- 



itcf: 



t:^^» 



!f=^ 



-#— ^ 



^^ 



f 


-^-^-^- 


t:f"*"^'' 


Tf^=i^ 




Da Capo. 


*-- 


•^. / 




1 1 i 


T=?=^r 


^ 


1- 




. ._.. 






_it 



TRUMPET CALLS, ETC. 



533 



I 



80. Quickstep No. 10. 
Quick. F Trumpet. 



HI 



fc=±:^ 



•«=PM- 



=^PPE 



s 



■|e^^-#H«-# 



■7 ^ — 1 r^— r- — r — i i 1 — ; — i 1 i n 



4-#H 1— H 



I 



C Crook. 



-I«H«-^- 



*' 



=v^^ 



^TMf. 



Ti rT p ^ 



#-5-^ 



-1—^ 



■^—^-^—±- 



-f-?-^ 



-+-J — I — I — #-(- 



trr 



i 



#^^Mi- 



^^ 



-7-7- 



i 



^.^ P P p ^P- 



H — id — I — I — P- 



■P-+- 



=P=f 



^ 



i 



D.C. 



=J?-y-J^P 



Ef 



-?— 



^' 



P f f ^ p. 






rTTT 



H — f— f- 



INDEX 



LIGHT ARTILLERY DRILL REGULATIONS. 



Details under each subject are arranged alphabeti- 
cally. , . , 

A Table showing Distances, etc., when Teams have but 
Two Pairs, and an Index to General Rules and Rules of 
General Application are added. 



ORDER OP 
Pars. 
School of the soldier dis- 
mounted 11-67 

School of the cannoneer . 08-208 

The saber and pistol 209-264 

School of the battery dis- 
mounted 265-325 

School of the soldier 
mounted -- 326-439 



SUBJECTS. 



Horse artillery -.. 

School of the driver 

School of the battery... 
School of the battalion- 
Ceremonies 

Miscellaneous subjects. 
989, 



Pars. 
. 440-501 
. 502-618 
. 619-825 
. 826-975 
.990-1034 
1-10, 97&- 
1035-1166 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED. 



Alignments 35-40, 

Announcement of guide, 

after oblique march 

"As you were" .-. - 

At ease — 

Attention, position of 

Attention, to resume 14, 

Back step 

Backward, march — 28, 

By the right or left flank, 

march 44. 

Cadence of steps 22, 23, 

Change direction, column 

of files 49, 

Change step 



Column of files 47,64 

Correction of errors 12 

Covering and marching on 

points -- 57 

Depth of man in ranks 45 

Direct step .-- 22 

Dismiss the squad. - 16 

Distances between ranks . . 59, 63 

Double time 26,27,28,31,32, 

46, 53, 54 

Eyes right or left... 17 

Facing distance 34,45 

Facings 18,19 

Fall in 14,34,60 

Fallout 14 

535 



536 



INDEX-SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER DISMOUNTED-Continued. 



Pars. 
Forming the squad in dou- 
ble rank. 58-60 

Forming the squad in sin- 
gle rank 34 

Forward, march 23, 26, 41 

Front of man in ranks 45,59 

Grouping of recruits 58 

Guide in ohlique marching 51,52 
Guide of column of files in 

oblique march 67 

Guides in turnings 55.56 

Guides of squad.. 41.60 

Guides of squad marching 

to the rear 62 

Halt.. 24,28 

Halt, from oblique march 50 

Incomplete files. 58,62 

Instructors... 12 

Interval in column of liies 

between men.. 64 

Interval in ranks 35 

Length of drills.. H 

Lengthofsteps....22,26,27,28,3l 

March by the flank 44-48 

Marchings 41-56 



Pars. 

March to the rear 29 43 

Mark time 25 26 

Movable pivot ...: '55 

Objec t of school of the sol- 
dier dismounted ... 1 1 
Oblique marching. 50, 51, 52, 66, 67 
Order and method of in- 
struction. 12 

Parade rest. ._ 15 

Points, covering and 

marching on 57 

Position of the soldier... 13 

Quick time 22,23 

Recruits, grouj)ing of... '58 

Rests 14 

Salute with hand...'..''..'" 20 
Setting up exercises. 21 

Short step ....25,26,50 

Side step _ 27 

Squad drill " " " 33-67 

Steps... 22-32 

Step, when lost 41 

To the rear, march 43 

Turnings 55,56 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 



Brakes, use of.. 117,118,125 

Breech-sight, use of, at 
drills 126 

Caisson corporal, duties in 
load and fire 116 

Call off 73 

Cannoneers, duties of . 69, 104 
110-116 

Cannoneers, permanently 
assigned in war service 72 

Cannoneers, posts of, piece 
limbered 81-85 

Care of breech mechan- 
ism, etc 130,131 

Cease firing ...107,109 

111-113,115 

Change posts of cannon- 
eers 122,123,157 



Change post of gun detach- 

^"lent 79,80 

Coil pr olonge and limber up 1 38- 
140 
Detachments, to exercise 

several 176-196 

Details of drill 123 

Diminished numbers, ser- 
vice of piece 149 162 

Dismount I he cannoneers, 146^148 

Draw the load 120 

Dress and equipment of 

cannoneers 68 

Drill, method of execution 128 
Dummy projectile and car- 
tridge.... .124,127 

Duties of cannoneers 69, 104, 

110-116 



INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER. 



537 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER— Continued. 



Pars. 

Duties of gunner 110,131 

Equipments, distribution 

of, at3.6inch. 156 

Equipments, take and re- 
place .- 100 

Exercise of several detach- 
ments _ ....176-196 

Firings 180-193 

First drills 125 

Fix prolonge 137 

Formation of gun detach- 
ment 70-72 

Forming gun detachments 176 
Front of piece, etc., lim- 
bered and unlimbered... 74 
Fuses, preparation of, etc. 129 
General rules: 

cannoneers moving 

piece by hand 89 

gunner dressing d e - 
tachment, piece lim- 
bered 78 

Nos. 4 and 5 assist Nos. 

2 and 1, when 95 

unlimbered by hand on 

heavy ground 95 

Gun detachment 69-72 

Gun detachment, chang- 
ing post of 79,98 

Gun detachment, how 

marched to park 77 

Gun detachment, how 

posted 77, 78 

Gun detachment, post of, 

piece limbered 76 

Gunner dressing gun de- 
tachment, piece lim- 
bered, general rule 78 

Gunner, duties of 110. 131 

Horse-holder. 85,92-94 

Inspecting gun, in firings . 131 
Instruction at standing- 
gun drill 129 

Instruction in nomencla- 
ture, mechanism of piece, 
etc .103-106 



Pars. 

Leaving the park 194-196 

Limber 133-136 

Limber faced to the rear. . 99 
Limbering, piece loaded.. 193 

Loadandfire 103-121 

Load and fire, duties of 

cannoneers in detail ...110-120 
Loaded piece, limbering . . 193 
Machine guns, load and 

fire 167-175 

Machine guns, service of .163-166 

Manual of the breech 105. 106 

Marching detachments 

from park.... 77,194-196 

Marching detachments to 

park 177 

Mechanical maneuver 197-208 

Mount the cannoneers ...141-145, 
158-161 
Move piece limbered, by 

hand 89,90 

Move piece unlimbered. by 

hand ......101,102 

Posts, change of 3.6-inch 

gun 157 

Posting cannoneers, piece 

limbered 86,87 

Posting detachments with 

pieces 77, 78, 178 

Post of detachment, piece 

limbered 76 

Post of gunner, dressing 

detachment, general rule 78 
Posts change of ,by cannon- 
eers 122,123 

Posts of cannoneers, piece 

limbered 81-85 

Posts of cannoneers, piece 

unlimbered 91-94 

Posts of cannoneers, 3.6 

inch, limbered 151 , 152 

Posts of cannoneers, 3.6 

inch, unlimbered 153,154 

Preparation of fuzes 129 

Prolonge, fix and coil 137-140 

Kange and sighting drill . . 126 



538 INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY, DISMOUNTED. 



SCHOOL OF THE CANNONEER— Continued. 



Pars. 

Recruits, first drills, load- 
ing, etc 125 

Re-form detachments, 
pieces limbered 88 

Remarks on service of the 
piece 134-132 

Right or left of piece, etc. . 75 

Service of machine guns . 163-175 

Service of piece with di- 
minished numbers 149, 162 

Service of the piece, re- 
marks 124-133 



Inspection of arms, dis- 
mounted 264 

Inspector of pistol 263 

Intervals, to take and 
close ..213-215 



Pars. 
Service of the piece, sum- 
mary 121 

Service of 3.6 inch 150-162 

Service of 3.6 inch with di- 
minished numbers 1 62 

Serving pieces 179 

Sponge the piece 119,132 

Target 126 

Unlimber 95-99 

Unlimber by hand on 
heavy ground, general 
rule 95 

THE SABER AND PISTOL. 

Manual of the knife 224 

Manual of the pistol .256-263 

Manual of the saber 209-223 

Saber exercise 225-255 

Saber, manual of 209-223 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY, DISMOUNTED. 



Absent officers, etc., how 

replaced 281 

Alignments 286 

Announcement of guide, 
changing direction in col- 
umn of subdivisions, gen- 
eral rule. 306 

Announcement of guide, 

oblique in column 305 

At ease 316 

Battery, dismounted 268 

Change direction in col- 
umn of files _ 301 

Change direction in col- 
umn of subdivisions 306-308 

Change of direction, 

slight 298,307 

Changing file-closers from 

front to rear _ 300 

Close ranks 285 

Closeup... 299 

Column of files from col- 
umn of subdivisions 312 

Column of files, right or 
left in front 314 



Column of subdivisions, 
face and march to the 
rear... 309 

Column of subdivisions ' 

from column of files .... 313, 314 
Cohinin of subdivisions, 

march by the flank 310, 311 

Column of subdivisions put 

in m arch and h al ted 303 

Column of subdivisions, to 

the right or left, from 

line.. 302 

Commands repeated or 

given by chiefs 271 

Designations of platoons 

and sections 275 

Dismiss the battery 289 

Distance between ranks at 

route step 315 

Distance, column of files 

at double time 299 

Distance, column of files at 

route step 315 

Double time, saber and 

scabbard.. 294 



INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER, MOUNTED. 539 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY, DISMOUNTED— Continued. 



Pars. 
Draw and return saber, 

rearrank 283 

Dressing detachment 324 

Exercises of platoon, etc., 

dismounted 272, 273 

Exercises of two or more 
detachments, dismount- 
ed.. 320-325 

Face and march to the rear, 

column of subdivisions. 309 
Face and march to the rear, 

in line 295 

Fallback 299 

File-closers 280 

File-closers, changing to 

rear 295,300,309 

File-closers, manual of sa- 
ber, etc 287 

Formation of battery, dis- 
mounted 274,275 

Formations under arms.. 283 
Forming the battery, dis- 
mounted 282,283 

General rules, announce- 
ment of guide, changing 
direction in column of 

subdivisions 306 

Guide, oblique in column .304, 305 

Guides of battery 270 

Guides of detachment..., 270, 325 
Guides of platoon or sec- 
tion.. 269 

Gunners commanding de- 
tachments ._ 324 

Halt 291 

Interval between files.. ..286, 300 
Line to the front, from col- 
umn of subdivisions 319 



292 



287 
301 



Pars. 
Line to the right of left 
from column of subdi- 
visions 317,318 

Maneuvers of two or more 

gun detachments. 320-325 

Manual of saber and saber 

exercise 287 

March by the fiank 299,300, 

310,311 

March In line 290 

Movements of battery, dis- 
mounted, as in school of 

the soldier 

Non-commissioned offi- 
cers, etc., manual of sa- 
ber, etc 

Oblique in column of files. 
Oblique in column of sub- 
divisions 1304,305 

Oblique march in line 293 

Openranks 284 

Platoon dismounted 267, 272 

Posts and duties of officers, 
etc., two or more detach- 
ments dismounted 320-325 

Post of officers, etc .276-281 

Rests 288 

Right or left in front, col- 
umn of files 314 

Route step and at ease 315 

Saber and scabbard, 
marching at double time 
Saber, manual and exer- 
cise. 

Sabers, when drawn, if 
ranks are to be opened . 



294 
287 



283 



Section, dismounted 266.273 

Turnings 296,297 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER, MOUNTED. 



Alignments 341,368 

Atease 351 

Attention, to resume, 

mounted or dismounted. 352 
Blanket and surcingle, to 

put on 330 



Bridle, curb 336, 337, 398 

Bridle, watering 332, 333 

Care and treatment of 

horses 328 

Carry saber, mounted, po- 
sition of 421 



540 INDEX-SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER, MOUNTED. 



SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER, MOUNTED-Continued. 



Pars. 
Change direction in col- 
umn of files 366 

Change hands 376 

Circling, individual and 

by squad 386-389 

Column of files ...361,362 

Conductors 374 

Correction of faults 365 

Cross stirrups 395 

Curb bridle, use of 398 

Dismiss the squad 354 

Dismount in line 373 

Dismount in line with in- 
tervals 349 

Dismount on off side . . 350 

Dismount, when mounted 

double.. 356 

Dismount, with saddle. . .396, 397 
Distances, column of files, 

mounted 361 

Distances, instruction of 

recruits at gallop 403 

Drills begin and end at 

walk, general rule 327 

Entering riding school 375 

Equipment of horse 329-337 

Exercises at will 418 

Fileoff... 353 

Forward, march. 358 

Gaits, speed of.. 406 

Gallop and canter, princi- 
ples of 401,402 

Gallop from canter, and 

reverse 404,405 

Galloping step 356 

Gallop, instruction in 403-405 

General rules : 

mounted drills begin 

and end at walk 327 

oblique march from 

halt, to resume 365 

saber returned before 

dismoimting 425 

saber, when hooked 
and unhooked 419 



Pars. 
General rules— Continued, 
to resume attention, 
mounted and dis- 
mounted 352 

Halt 359 

Halt, from oblique march. 365 

Halt, from trot 383 

' ' Hands. " ' riding school ... 374 

Head and ring posts 435 

Horses, care and treatment 328 
Increase and diminish 

speed of troc 380,381 

Inspection of arms, 

mounted 432 

Instruction, method, etc 326 
Instruction of large squads 390 
Instruction with saddle, 

curb-bridle and spurs... 400 
Intervals between horses, 

first ins truction 340 

Intervals, take and close, 

saber exercise .mounted 427, 428 
Intervals used in instruc- 
tion 369 

Jumping ....411-414 

Leadout 339 

Leap, dismounted, witli 

horse 415 

Line to the right or left 

from column of files 372 

Manual of pistol, mounted . 431 
Manual of saber,mounted 419-425 

March.... 358 

March by the flank from 

line 371 

March by the flank from 

line with intervals 360 

March in circle and re- 
sume track ..::;f6-388 

March to the rear, in line 

with intervals 363 

Mount double and dis- 
mount 356 

Mounted drills begin and 
end at walk, general rule. 327 



INDEX— HORSE ARTILLERY. 



641 



SCHOOL. OF THE SOLDIER, MOUNTED— Continued. 



Pars. 

Mounted exercises 355, 356 

Mount in line 370 

Mount in line with inter- 
vals.... 342 

Mount on off side 350 

Mount, with saddle 391,392 

Movements at beginning 

and end of drill 369 

Movements at trot 378 

Oblique in line with inter- 
vals and in column of 

files 364 

O clique march, to resume 

fromhalt 365 

Passage 407,410 

Pass from the head to rear 

of column and reverse. .384, 385 
Position of carry saber, 

mounted.. _ 421 

Position of soldier, mount- 
ed, without saddle. 393 

Position of soldier, mount- 
ed, with saddle 393 

Pursuit.. 417 

Reaches 356 

Recruits, faults in riding . 383 

Rein back 367 

Reins and legs, use of 357 



Pars. 

Rein, to lengthen, etc 344-348 

Rests 351 

Riding school 374 

Running at heads 433-439 

Saber exercise, mounted. 426-430 
Sabers returned before dis- 
mounting, general rule . . 425 
Saber, when hooked and 
unhooked, general rule . . 419 

Saddle and unsaddle 334,335 

Saddle blanket, to fold .... 329 
Saddle-pad and surcingle. 

toputon 331 

Slow trot from trot out ... 381 

Spurs 399 

Squads, division of, for rid- 
ing school 390, 412, 437 

Standtoheel 354 

Stand to horse 338 

Stirrups 394 

Trot from gallop 406 

Trot from halt.... 382 

Trot from walk 377 

Trotout.. 380 

Turning on forehand and 

haunchee 407-409 

Walk from trot 379 

Wrestle. 416 



HORSE ARTILLERY. 



About by detachment 466 

Alignment of detachment 

on left tile 477 

Alignments 449-452, 454, 460 

Attention, to resume 456 

Backward, march. 462 

Change direction in col- 
umn of detachments . ..490, 491 
Change direction in col- 
umn of files 473, 487 

Change posts of mounted 
detachments, piece lim- 
bered .475-477,501 

Close ranks _ _.. 455 

Column of detachments 
from column of tiles 494 



Column of detachments, 

halt and march. 492 

Column of detachments to 

the right or left from line 488 
Column of tiles from col- 
umn of detachments 495 

Detachment, mounted. ..442-477 

Dismiss the detachment . . 458 

Dismount 445,446 

Distance between ranks. 

detachment mounted . . . 442 

Distance in column of tiles 468 

Equipment of cannoneer.. 441 
Face and march to the rear 

in line 48i 

File off 457 



542 



INDEX-SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 



HORSE ARTILLERY— Continued. 



Pars. 
Formation of detachment 
mounted 442 

Formation of two or more 

detachments 478 

Forward, march 459 

General rules : 

gathering horse 450 

halt and march 465 

simultaneous and suc- 
cessive movements.. 450 
Guides in simultaneous 

alignments... 483 

Guides of detachment 443 

Gunners commanding de- 
tachments, posts of 477 

Halt and align detachment 460 

Horse-holders 442 

Instruction of cannoneer . 440 
Intervals between detach- 
ments in line .478,482 

Lead out 444,482 

Leaving the park 500 

Line to the front from col- 
umn of detachments 497 

Line to the front from col- 
umn of files 471 

Line to the right or left 
from column of detach- 
ments 496 

Line to the right or left 

from column of files 469,486 

Maneuvers of two or more 
detachments 478-501 

SCHOOL OF 

About at trot or gallop, 

general rule 599 

About by team. 549 

About, in column of teams . 570 

About, section hitched 612 

About, team hitched 598, 599 

Alignment of drivers 545 

Announcement of guide 

after oblique 533 



Pars. 

Manual of saber 441 

March by the flank from 

line 467,468,485 

Marching mounted detach- 
ments to park 498 

March in line 459 

March to the rear, column 

of detachments 493 

Mount .445,446 

Movements of two or more 
detachments as in single 

detachment 483 

Oblique in column of de- 
tachments 489 

Oblique in column of files.472, 487 I 

Oblique in line. 461 1 

Openranks 453] 

Posting mounted detach- ] 

ments with pieces 499 ; 

Posts of chiefs and intruc- 

tor 479-481 

Posts of gunners com- 
manding detachment 477 

Posts of mounted detach- 
ment, piece limbered 474 

Rests 456 

Right or left in front 470 

Saber exercise 441 

Simultaneous and succes- 
sive movements, general 

rule 450 

Wheeling 463-465 



THE DRIVER. 
Arrangement of harness 
onpegs 504 

Back the carriage 605,606 

Backward, march 536 

Change direction in col- 
umn of pairs. 535 

Change direction in col- 
umn of teams. 567 

Change direction in col. 
umn, section hitched — 609 



INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER. 



543 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER— Continued. 



Pars. 

Changes of gait 593-596 

Chiefs of section and cais- 
son corporals, mount, 

etc., general rule 555 

Chiefs of teams 555 

Column of pairs from team 

inline ...546,547 

Column of teams, distance 

between teams 559 

Column of teams from line 

of pairs or teams 55^565 

Column of teams from lines 

of pairs 564 

Column of teams, halted 

and put in march 569 

Commands by chiefs of 

teams 555 

Countermarch... 614,615 

Couple 516,517 

Coupling-rein.- 517 

Coupling -rein, whip, etc., 

useof 525 

Designation of pairs In 

team 543 

Dismiss the drivers _ 524 

Dismiss the teams 575 

Dismount .520,521 

Dismount and mount 

while marching. .616, 617 

Distance between car- 
riages in obliquing - 610 

Distance between pairs in 

team 513,546 

Distance between teams in 

column of teams 559 

Distance, exercising teams 

unhitched 576 

Distance in column of pairs 529 
Distance, section in col- 
umn, teams hitched 607 

Equipment of recruit 502 

Exercise in marching, 

drivers dismounted 618 

Exercise of a section 607-618 

Flleofl 523 



Pars. 
Gait, changes of . .537-541, 593-596 
General rules : 

about at trot or gallop. 599 
chiefs of sections, etc.. 

mount, dismount, etc 555 
countermarch at trot 

or gallop - 615 

gather horses 527 

halt and march, com- 
mand, when given... 60.2 
halt from rapid gait. . . 596 
reversing at trot or gal- 
lop 603 

traces stretched after 

halting 590 

traces stretched before 

moving out... 587 

Guide, oblique marching .533, 534 

Guide of carriage 607 

Guide of column of teams. 565 

Guide of section 607 

Guides of teams 544,555 

Halt 528 

Halt and resume march, 

column of pairs 530 

Harness and pegs 503, 504 

Harness the lead and 

swingteams 509 

Harness the wheel team. .506, 507 

Harness, to fit 513 

Hitch and unhitch 581-584 

Hook and unhook traces .577, 578 

Instruction, method 502 

Instruction of single team, 

unhitched .543-553 

Instruction of two or more 

pairs 514-542 

Instruction of two or more 

teams, unhitched 554-585 

Interval between pairs, 

team inline 544 

Interval between pairs, 

instruction by pairs 515 

Interval between teams in 
line of pairs 554 



544 



INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



SCHOOL OF THE DRIVER— Continued. 



Pars. 
Interval between teams in 

line of teams 554 

Interval, exercising team 

unhitched 576 

Lead out ...514,515 

Lead out, by pair 544 

Lead out, by pair or by 

team .556-558 

Leaving the park 585 

Line from column of 

teams 571-574 

Line of pairs or teams 554 

Line of teams in two ranks. 554 
Line, team, from column of 

pairs .551-533 

Line with intervals be- 
tween pairs 515 

March.... 526 

March and halt, team 

hitched 586-590 

March by the flank from 

line with intervals 529 

Marching, drivers dis- 
mounted, practice in 618 

Marching, halting, chang- 
ing gait, section hitched . 608 

March to the rear 531,532 

March to the rear, column 

of teams 570 

Mount 518.519 

Oblique 533, 534, 600, 610 

Oblique by team 550 

Oblique in column of teams 568 
Off-horse, management of. 525 

Passage of carriages 611 

Position of stand to horse. 508 
Posting teams with car- 
riages 577, 579, 580 



522 



Pars. 

Post of instructor 502 

Remark on stretching 

traces 588 

Rests 

Rests and resuming atten- 
tion .591,592 

Reverse 601-604,613 

Reverse at trot or gallop.. 603 

Riding-school 542 

Right or left in front, col- 
umn of teams 566 

Saddlecloths 505 

Section, exercise of 607-618 

Single tree, to hook 512 

Space occupied by pair 530 

Stretching traces 588 

Team consists of 543 

Team drill, general remark 576 

Team hitched 586-606 

Team in line from column 

of pairs. 551-553 ! 

Teams, two or more un- 
hitched.. 554-585 ; 

Team, unhitched, instruc- 
tion. 543-553 1 

Traces stretched as soon 
as carriage halts, general 

rule 590 

Traces stretched before 

team moves, general rule 587 
Turning carriage in nar- ^ 

rowspace... 606 I 

Uncouple 523 

Unharness 510 

Unharness in the field 511 

Wheel, by team 548 

Wheel, team hitched 597 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



About in column 684-686 

About, reverse and coun- 
termarch in column of 

sections 696 

Absent officers, etc., how 
replaced 636 



Alignment of battery 651,652 

Alignment of i)ieces and 
limbers, in battery, gen- 
eral rules .751-752 

Application of text 627 



INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



545 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY— Continued. 



Pars. 

Armament of enlisted men, 
in the field. * 634 

Armament of non-commis- 
sioned officers, etc., in 
garrison 633 

Battery, drills with cais- 
sons _ 645 

Battery, drills without 
caissons 645 

Battery of maneuver .'623,629-636 

Battery, on footing for in- 
struction - 645 

Battery on war footing 645 

Battery with three cais- 
sons 817-819 

Caisson corporal, when not 
mounted 630 

Caisson, one to each pla- 
toon .....824,825 

Caissons detached, inter- 
vals and distances 639 

Caissons on flank, from 
column of sections 709-71 1 

Caissons with battery 645 

Cannoneers, dress and 
equipment 632 

Cannoneers of horse bat- 
teries, armament, etc — 635 

Cannoneers, when and 
where mounted 631 

Captain, in firings 798 

Change direction in col- 
umn of platoons 697-701 

Change direction in col- 
umn of sections 667-670 

Changes of front 803-819 

Changing gait at head of 
column for practice 678 

Chiefs of platoons, etc., 
mount and dismount in 
firings 799 

Close in mass, battery 
without caissons in col- 
umn of platoons... 823 

Coil prolonge and limber . . 801 

9236 35 



Pars. 
Column halted and put in 

march 675-677 

Column of platoons: 

from column of sec- 
tions 671,672 

from right or left to 
march to left or 

right .728,629 

habitual formation for 

maneuvering.. 673 

to the front, from line. 726 
to the right or left, from 

line 725 

Column of sections: 

from column of pla- 
toons. 674 

from fLank column ...712,713 
to the front, from line . 727 
Command "platoon" by 
chief of platoon, general 

rule.. 

Commands, repetition of . . 
Countermatch and reverse 
with diminished inter- 
vals _ 

Countermarch, in column. 

Depth.. 625 

Designations of platoons 

andsections _ 624 

Dismiss the battery _ 666 

Distance.. 625 

Distances and intervals in 

oblique in column 702, 704 

Distances and intervals in 

park _ 649 

Distances and intervals, 

oblique in line 738, 739 

Distances, battery without 

caissons 823 

Distances, etc, affected by 
number of pairs in teams. 610, 
637, 638, 644. 702, 704, 709, 711, 
716-720, 738, 739, 750, 753, 756, 
760-762, 774-779, 794, 822, 823, 
825. 



679 
628 



744 

690 



546 



INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY— Continued. 



Pars. 
Distances, formations of 

battery 637-639 

Distances in route 

marches 656 

Double column from line. 730, 731 
Drills with one caisson to 

each platoon 824. 825 

Drill without caissons 820-825 

Echelon, from line 795 

Estimating distances 645 

Field duties, instruction .. 645 
Fire retiring, prolonge 

fixed 800-802 

Firing in echelon 795 

Firings 798,799 

Flank column, from col- 
umn of sections 709-71 1 

Flank line, from column of 

platoons 706 

Formations in battery. . .746-797 
Formations of battery. . .637-639 
Forming the battery.. ... 650 
Forward, march, from 

oblique 703 

Front of battery 625 

Gait, formations in bat- 
tery, and limbering 747 

Gait of movements in in- 
struction 645 

General rules: 

alignment of pieces and 

limbers in battery.. 751, 752 
command "platoon," 

by chief of platoon . . 679 
commands of gunners 

in horse batteries 759 

distance caissons ad- 
vance, number of 

pairs in teams 762 

guide before forming 
front into line or bat- 
tery ... 716 

guide in about 691 , 694 

guide in countermarch. 693 



Pars. 
General rules— Continued, 
guide in oblique march- 
ing 702 

guide in passing of car- 
riages 681 

guide in reverse 692,694 

guidon, in about. 686 

guidon taking post 672 

holding horses in horse 

batteries 755 

officers, etc. , when posts 

change 654 

signal halt, and com- 
mand by chief of pla 

toon 679 

Guide in wheeling 698 

Guide of countermarch in 

column of platoons 695 

Guides of battery, platoon, 

section, or carriage 626 

Guidon, passage of car- 
riages 680,683 

Guidon, post 672 

Halt and align battery 736 

Horse batteries 627 

alignment of cannon- 
eers 652 

cannoneers dismount 754,758, 
789 
commands of gunners, 

general rule. 759 

holding horses in bat- 
tery, general rules. . . 755 
limbering up, horse- 
holders and cannon- 
eers . - 765 

who mounted, arma- 
ment of cannoneers . . 635 
Horses of chiefs of pla- 
toons, etc., when they dis- 
mount . 643 

In battery, from column of 

sections 783 

from double column.. 780-782 



INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY. 



547 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY— Continued. 



Pars. 
In battery— Continued. 

from echelon 797 

from line with dimin- 
ished in ter vals 794 

on right or left, from 

column of platoons .772, 773 
to the front, from col- 
umn of platoons 774-776 

to the front, from line. 749-759 
to the rear, from bat- 
tery 790-793 

to the rear, from col- 
umn of platoons 777-779 

to the rear, from line. 760-762 
to the right or left, from 

column of platoons .770, 771 
to the right or left, from 

flank column .784-789 

Instructions 645 

Interval 625 

Intervals and distances: 
by the flank from bat- 
tery 784,785 

column of platoons, 
marching by the 

flank 706.707 

flank column ...709,711 

flank line ..706,707 

oblique in line 738, 739 

when caissons are de- 
tached 639 

Intervals, etc., affected by 

number of pairs in teams 610, 

637, 638, 644, 702, 704, 709, 711 , 

716-720, 738, 739, 750, 753, 756, 

760-766, 774-779, 794, 822, 823, 

855 

Intervals, formations of 

battery 637-639 

Intervals in column of pla- 
toons, to close and ex- 
tend 705 

Intervals in line, to close 

and extend 743 

Limbering up, movements 
of limber 764 



Pars. 
Limbers and caisso n s 

faced to the rear 748 

Line, from echelon. 796 

on right or left from 

column of platoons.- 715 
on right or left from 

column of sections . . 722 
to and on right or left, 

from double column. 733,734 
to the front faced to the 
rear, from column of 

platoons 718-720 

to the front, faced to 
the rear, from col- 

umnof sections 724 

to the front from bat- 
tery .763-767 

to the front from col- 
umn of platoons 716,717 

to the front from col- 
umn of sections 723 

to the front from 

double column _ 732 

to the rear, from bat- 
tery 768,769 

to the right or left, from 

column of platoons . _ 714 
to the right or left, from 
column of sections . . 721 
March by the flank from 

battery 784-787 

March by the flank from 

column... ...706-708 

March in line 735 

Measurements of elements, 

etc , of battery 644 

Mounted men, dress and 

equipments 632 

Mounted officers and non- 
commissioned officers . . 630 
Movements of battery in 
line same as in column 

of platoons. 737 

Movements of double col- 
umn 731 

Moving from park 653, 654 



548 



INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTERY— Continued. 



Pars. 

Oblique in column 702-704 

Oblique in line 738, 739 

Obstacles 745 

Officers, etc., when posts 

change 654 

Order in battery 637-639 

battery, posts of offi- 
cers, etc 642 

column 637-639 

column, posts of offi- 
cers, etc 641 

line 637-639 

line, posts of officers, etc 640 

Park 649 

Park, forming .659-664 

Passage of carriages in 

column 680-683 

Peace footing, composition 

ofbattery 645 

Pieces in battery aligned 

on wheels, general rule . . 752 
Pieces placed in front be- 
fore forming in battery . 746 

Platoon.... 621 

Platoon alone, exercises . . 645 
Position of carriage when 

team is incomplete _ 639 

Posts of officers, etc., order 

in battery 642 

Posts of officers, etc., order 
incolumn 641 



Pars. 
Posts of officers, etc., order 

inline 640 

Preparation for active 

service 645 

Responsibility 646 

Range-finder, instruction 

with 645 

Rests 665 

Reverse, incolumn 687-689 

Right or left in front 655 

Right or left of battery ... 625 

Route marches 656-658 

Saber signals 647,648 

Saber, when drawn by 
non-commissioned o ffi - 

cers 633 

Saber, when drawn, etc 645 

Section 620,622 

Signal halt, general rule . . 679 
Successive formations in 

battery, firing 772 

Trumpet calls and saber 

signals, use of 628 

Unpark 653,654 

War footing, composition 

ofbattery 645 

Wheeling distance, battery 
without caissons in col- 
umn of platoons 823 

Wheel the battery 740-742 



SCHOOL. OF THE BATTALION. 



About, reverse and counter- 
march, in column of pla- 
toons 861 

About, reverse and coun- 
termarch, in line 853 

Adjutant and sergeant ma- 
jor 836,884,943 

Alignment 843,844 

Attention, to resume 866 

Captain, dressing battery 
in column, general rule . . 882 

Change direction by the 
flank in close column 916 



Change direction in column 

of batteries 886 

Change direction in column 

of platoons 862-864 

Change direction in line of 
platoon columns, or 

double columns 908, 909 

Change front, in battery ... 972 

Change front in line 925,926 

Changes of gait 850 

Close column, designated 
or leading battery in 
front 910 



INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



549 



SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— Continued. 



Pars. 
Close column, etc.— Con'd. 
distance between bat- 
teries 910 

f 1 om column at lull dis- 
tance 911 

from column of pla- 
toons or sections ...913,914 
from column of sec- 
tions 973 

from line 912 

orinmass 910 

Column of batteries at full 
distance from close col- 
umn _ 917 

from column of sec- 
tions 973 

from line of platoon 

columns _ 901 

to the right or left, 

from line 881,885 

Column of platoons from 

close column 918, 919 

from column of batter- 
ies 904,905 

from column of sec- 
tions 973 

from line of platoon col- 
umns _ 903 

to the right or left from 

line 856,857 

Column of sections, f orma- 

tionsfrom 973 

Commands 827,828 

Commands of captain, gen- 

eralrule 841 

Composition of battalion . . 831 
Countermarch, reverse and 
about, in column of pla- 
toons. 861 

inline _ 853 

Deployment of close col- 
umn 921-924 

Designation of batteries in 

echelon. - 934 

Designation of batteries, 
when change takes place, 
general rule 885 



Pars. 
Designations of batteries . . 834 

Dismiss the battalion 842 

Distance between batteries 

in column of platoons. . . 857 
Distance between batteries 

in column of sections 973 

Distances, etc., affected by 
number of pairs in teams 829, 
833, 847, 857, 869, 871, 872, 874, 
898, 899, 908, 936, 973, 974. 
Distances, field and horse 

batteries together. 829 

Distances in close column. 910 
Drill with one caisson to 

each platoon 975 

Drill without caissons 974, 975 

Echelon, from line ..927,928 

Field practice and actual 

service 830 

Fire advancing and retir- 
ing 967,968 

atwill 963 

by battery 962 

by battery from one 

flank of batallion 966 

by piece 960 

by piece from one flank 

of battalion 964 

byplatoon 961 

by platoon from one 

flank of battalion 965 

Firings. 959-968 

Formation of battalion.. 831-834 
Formations for ceremonies 838 
Formations in battery . . . 935-958 
Forming the battalion . . .837, 838 
General rules : 

adjutant and sergeant 
major, when guide in 

column changes 884 

alignments 844 

captain dressing bat- 
tery in column 882 

commands of captain. 841 
designation of bat- 
teries, changes when 885 
successive formations 869 



550 



INDEX— SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 



SCHOOLi OF THE BATTALION— Continued. 



Pars. 

Halt and align the battal- 
ion 849 

Halt and resume march in 
echelon 929 

Halt in column of platoons 859 
In battery from close col- 
umn. 954-957 

from column of bat- 
teries - 947-950 

from column of sec- 
tions 973 

from echelon 958 

from line of double col- 
umns... 953 

from line of platoon 

columns. 951,952 

on right or left, from 

column of platoons .942, 943 
to the front, from col- 
umn of platoons 944-946 

to the front, from 

line... .936,937 

to the rear, from bat- 
tery ... 971 

to the rear, from line. . 938 
to the right or left, from 

column of platoons. 940, 941 
to the right or left, from 

flank column 970 

Instructor 826 

Interval between bat- 
teries 833,847 

in line of platoon col- 
umns 898 

without caissons _ 974 

Intervals, etc., affected by 
number of pairs in 
teams. . .829, 833, 847, 857, 869, 871, 
872, 874, 898, 899, 908, 936, 973, 
974. 
field and horse bat- 
teries together 829 

to close and extend ..846-848, 
860, 899 
Line, by two movements, 
from column of pla- 
toons 876-880 



Pars. 



Line, by two movements, 

from battery 939 

from column of sec- 
tions 973 

from echelon 933 

from line of platoon 

columns 900 

of double columns .... 906, 907 
of platoon columns, 
from column of bat- 
teries _ 902 11 

of platopn columns I 

from line 892,893 f 

of platoon columns, 

movements of 894, 895 

of platoon columns, to 
the front, from col- i 

umn of pi a toons .... 896-898 } 
on right or left, from 

column of batteries.. 889 
on right or left, from 

column of platoons.. 870 
to the front, from col- 
umn of batteries . . . 890, 891 
to the front, from col- 
umn of platoons 871-875 

to the right or left, from 

close column 920 

to the right or left, from 

column of batteries.. 888 
to the right or left, from 
column of platoons. 867, 868 

March by the flank 855 

from battery and re- 
form 969 

from column of pla- 
toons 865 

in echelon 930 

March in column of pla- 
toons 858 

MarchinUne 845 

March to the rear, in ech- 
elon - 931 

Movements in column of 
batteries same as in col- 
umn of platoons 887 



INDEX— CEREMONIES. 



561 



SCHOOL. OF THE BATTALION— Continued. 



Pars. 
Movements of close column 
like column at full dis- 
tance 915 

Oblique change of front, in 

echelon 932 

Oblique march 854 

Ordersoffire 959 

Passage of carriages 851,852 

Platoon column defined . . . 892 
Post of captain, line of pla- 
toon columns 899 



Pars. 
Posts of major, adjutant, 

etc 835,883 

Rests 840 

Reverse, c o u n t e rmarch, 
and about in column of 

platoons _ 861 

inline 853 

Route marches 866 

Saber, when drawn 838,839 

Successive formations 869 

in battery, adjutant, 
and sergeant major. 943 



CEREMONIES. 



Artificers at review 1016 

Battalion parade 1025 

Equipment of battery for 

inspection 1026 

Forge and battery wagon 

at review 1016 

Funeral escort 1031-1034 

General rules for ceremo- 
nies 990-993 

arrangement of troops 990 
commands repeated by 

chiefs of platoons . . _ 992 
forming line after re- 
view 993 

mounted officers mak- 
ing about 992 

pieces, in front 992 

posting of batteries and 

battalions... 991 

sabers drawn 992 

General rules for re- 
views. .994-1012 

after passing review- 
ing officer _ 1011 

arrangement of troops 

of different arms 994 

battalions at ease, etc . . 1002 
commanders facing 
line to give com- 
mands 1005 



General rules for re- 
views—Continued. 

commanders, their 
staff, etc., turning out 
of column 1003 

commands repeated by 
commanders 1004 

distance between bat- 
talions in two or 
more lines 1021 

execution of commands 
repeated by majors 
and captains... 1004 

gaits, passing in re- 
view 1009 

intervals between bat- 
teries 1022 

light artillery of corps 
reviewed by itself ... 994 

march or flourishes, 
sounded 1008 

marking points where 
column changes di- 
rection s 995 

• modifications of forma- 
tions for reviews 1010 

officers and others ac- 
companying review- 
ing officer... 998 

post of reviewing offi- 
cer, ,^„....,,^^. .,.,,., 99^ 



552 



INDEX— MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. 



CEREMONIES— Continued. 



Pars. 

General rules for re- 
views—Continued. 

review before inspector 
junior to command- 
ing officer 1012 

reviewing officer, post 
how marked 996 

reviewing officer, who 
accompany 1000 

review of division, etc. 994 

review of mixed com- 
mand 994 

review with infantry 
and cavalry 994 

salutes by guidon 1007 

salutes, passing in re- 
view 1007,1009,1013 

salutes returned by re- 
viewing officer 996 

salutes to national and 
regimental colors, 
etc 996 

salute, when artillery 
Is reviewed with 
large bodies of infan- 
try and cavalry 999 

staff, etc.. of officers ac- 
companying review- 
ing officer 998 



Pars. 



General rules for re- 
views—Continued, 
staff, etc., when com- 
manders face line to 

give commands 1006 

staff officers riding 

around batteries 1001 

staff of reviewing offi- 
cer 997 

trumpeters of battal- 
ion, posts and du- 
ties 1008 

Guard mounting of a bat- 
tery 1023,1024 

Inspection after review 

with other arms 1 026 

Inspection of a battalion.- 1029 
Inspection of a battery. 1026, 1027 
Inspection of a battery, 

dismounted 1028 

Inspection of quarters 1028 

Muster of a battery 1030 

Review of a battalion. . .1017, 1020 
Review of a battalion with 

diminished intervals 1020 

Review of a battery ....1013-1017 

Review of a brigade 1022 

Review of two or more bat- 
talions 1021 



MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. 



Artillery Horses. 1130-1168 

Accustoming horse to 

firing 1148 

Bending lessons.... 1136-1139 
Bending lessons, 

mounted 1143,1144 

Breaking the horse of 

kicking 1154 

Breaking to harness. . . 1150 

Bridling 1132 

Cavesson 1133 

Exercise in riding hall 1142 
Instruction of officers 

with reference to 

horses 1130 

Kicking 1146 



Artillery Horses— Con - 

tinned. 

Longeing 1134 

Management of vicious 

horses 1151-1154 

Mounting 1141 

Preparatory lesson 1135 

Rearing 1145 

Rein in, mounted 1 144 

Saddling 1140 

Shoeing horses 1158 

Shving..-. ' 1147 

Sick horses 1156,1157 

Swimming horses 1149 

Throwing the horse. 1152, 1153 
Training horses 1131-1150 



INDEX— MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. 



553 



MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS— Continued. 



Pars. 
Artillery Horses — Con- 
tinued. 
Treatment and care of 

horses 1155 

Vicious horses, man- 

airement of 1151-1151 

Artillery in tiie Field ... 1050-1095 
Advancing to first posi- 
tion, etc 1077 

Ammunition column.. 1092 
Artillery always auxil- 
iary 1050 

Artillery coming into 

action 1053 

Artillery commander, 

authority of . 1064 

Artillery employed in 

battalions 1051 

Artillery, on defensive 1063 
Artillery, on offensive. 1062 
Artillery, open ground 

infront 1060 

Artillery under infan- 
try fire 1080 

Artillery with advance 

guard 1061 

Authority of artillery 

commander 1064 

Batteries not to retire 

without orders 1058 

Batteries supported, 

not relieved 1057 

Battery not to be 

broken up 1051 

Battery when ammuni- 
tion is exhausted 1055 

Chief of artillery,duties 1052 

Choice of position 1074 

Coming into action 1077 

Changes of position . . . 1079 

Disabled gun 1056 

Escorts 1083 

Finding the range 1084 

Fire control 1091 

Fire, order of ...- 1088 

Fire, rapidity of 1089 

Fire, regulation of 1090 



Pars. 



Artillery in the Field— Con- 
tinued. 

Front of battery and 
battalion 

Guns, limbers, and cais- 
sons in action 

Horse artillery with 
cavalry division 

Intervals for infantry 
between batteries 

Loss of guns - . - 

Machine guns 

Movable target .._ 

Observation of fire 

Orderof fire.. 

Phases of a fight 

Position of artillery on 
march 

Positions in defensive 
operations . 

Positions in offensive 
operations 

Projectiles. 

Prepare for action 

Rapidity of fire 

Rear guard. 

Regulation of fire 

Rendezvous position . . 

Reserve 

Retreat 

Single battery not to be 
broken up. 

Skill in shooting 

Smoke 

Subdividing the battery 
for action 

Subdivision of battal- 
ion for action 

Subdivision of battery 
for action 

Supply of ammunition 
in action 

Train 

Zones of fire action . . . 
Camping.. 1115- 

Battalion encampment 

Bivouacs. 



1059 

1078 

1094 

1059 
1058 
1095 
1054 
1085 
1088 
1073 

1065 

1076 

1075 

1087 
1067 
1089 
1081 
1090 
1071 
1068 
1082 

1051 
1054 

1086 

1067 

1070 

1066 

1093 
1069 
1072 
1120 
1119 
1120 



554 



INDEX— MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. 



MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS-Coiitinued. 



Pars. 
Camping— Continued. 

First method 1116 

Horse batteries, picket 

lines 1118 

Second method 1117 

Guidon, manual of 986,987 

Cover for Fir Id Artillery. 

10W;il02 

Gun pit, Austrian 1^9 

English 1100 

French 1097 

German 1098 

ordinary Russian . . 1 101 
Observations on gun 

pits 1102 

Evening Gun 1166 

Feeding 1164 

General Principles, Liglit Ar- 
tillery Drill Regulations. . . 1-10 
By the numbers... 7,8 



Commands 

Double time 

Elementary drills 

Gaits of movements... 

Grouping of recruits . . 

Guide (right or left) . . _ 

Halting from gallop or 
trot. 

Instruction, order and 
method 

Instructors 

Movements from halt 
or marching 

Movements, mounted, 
gaits. 

Movements on foot in 
double time 3 

Movements toward 
either flank. 1 

Practice in giving com- 
mands 9 

Trumpet calls and sig- 
nals.. 9 

Grooming 1163 

Manual of saber 976-982 

Manual of the guidon 986,987 



4,5 



Pars. 
Marches 1103-1114 

Accidents to carriages . 

1104, 1105 

Ascents 1106 

Declivities, moving 

along 1108 

Descents 1107 

Ditches 1109 

Fords and streams 1111 

Ice 1113 

Marshyground 1110 

Military bridges 1112 

Narrow road, facing 
battery to the rear... 1114 

Memorizing drill signals 1 166 

Morning gun 1166 

Organization of light a r- 

tillery 1036-1049 

Artillery brigade 1043 

Chiefs of artillery. ..1046, 1047 
Composition of light 

batteries 1048 

Corps artillery 1042 

Divisional artillery 1041 

Field batteries 103t>-1038 

Heavy artillery 1035, 1 039 

Horse batteries 1036, 1037 

Light artillery 1035 

Light artillery with 
cavalry or infan- 
try 1044,1045 

Machine batteries 1037 

Mountain batteries 1036 

Organization of light 

batteries 1049 

Report of roll calls 984 

Special instructions for offi- 
ce r s and n n-c m m i s- 

sioned staff officers 976-989 

About face for officers 
and non-commis- 
sioned staff 988, 989 

Guidon, manual of 986. 987 

Manual of saber. 976-982 

Manual of the guidon. 986, 987 



INDEX-MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS. 



555 



MISCELLANEOUS SUBJECTS— Continued. 



Pars. 
Special instructions for offi- 
cers, etc — Continued. 
Officers, etc., mount 

and dismount 983 

Report of roll calls 984 

Roll calls 984 

Salute of the guidon.. 986, 987 
Salute with the hand 

for officers 985 

Stables and stable du- 
ties ...1159-1166 

Allowances of forage 

and straw 1164 

Feeding 1164 

Grooming 1163 

Stable duty 1162 

Stable management, 

general rules 1 161 

Stables and picket line 
1159,1160 



Pars. 
Stables, etc.— Continued. 

Watering 1165 

Transportation of artillery 

1121-1129 

Care of horses at sea. 1125-1128 

Disembarking 1 129 

Embark and disembark 

artillery ..1121-1129 

General rules 1121 

Railroad transporta- 
tion 1122 

Sling for horses 1124 

Transportation of 

horses bysea 1123 

Trumpet calls, etc 1166 

Evening gun 1166 

Memorizing drill sig- 
nals... 1166 

- Morning gun 1166 

Watering horses 1166 



556 



INDEX— DISTANCES, ETC, 





•»-t 




02 




III 




^ 


*C 


d 




;-• ^ d 




<V 


a» 


e8 




<D a> e3 






+3 


> 




4J 4-> J^ 












ci 


"cl 


'5 






^ 


X5a5 


c« 




^;2 e« 


6 


0) 


§1 


bcbb 




Sg|ti) 


ft 


<v 


Oi C3 


rt d 




<» 0) 2 d 


^ 




"Ct^ 




^^g-S 


c^ 






;-!■— ' 




■u +j f-i^ 


^ 


O'd 


d c3 




0) d, c3 c8 




^ 


1^ 


o^ 




-Qp o^ 




rt 


li 


c« 


Siitc^ 




> 


<=''S 


^ 


d>.S?^ 




u 


■ =« 3^ 




^^ 


Dista 
Inter 
Lead: 




D 


+3 OJ 


41 




♦J 




M 


. 


.__ 




.^^__ 


T3C 





+ + 

«o o 



coco ^-1^ 



00 t-- CO l- t- CO 
CO Tt< CO Tfi iC C<J 

00 GO QO 00 00 00 



ir: i^ t- CO ic Oi 

(?-> CO CO 1-. I- o 

00 «D «0 OS Oi I- 



!-• i^ r^ t^ 
l^ l^ l^ l>. 



o 
d 

a 

d __ 

O tZ5 

o d 
o 



§ ^ ^ 2 



tn CO 

d d 

o c 

o o 



'5 



^13 t3 



POO 

<i> d d 

I BB 
jS dd 
f^ oo 



o 
d 

a 

d 
d o 

> -2 1^ • >» o ' t^.2 ?^ ^ 

7H;f^oc3^aj^-Sd 
! ft ^'^'^'X ^^ ^ f^ d 
'^ a2*^*^ft*^-»J'-'^od 

ld+3_^a)d_<x)d:?-o 

d^S^dS^d'^M 

!;it«.2 0r3.2ti0pi^d 



ft 
o 
d 

a 

d 
o 



1-1 Q T3 

2 fc 



INDEX— DISTANCES, ETC. 



557 



ii 




m 1 

1* 


11 

1^ 






St* 




bote 


1g 

bObo 




> 

2 


cert 




c«fl 


drt 




•iH -fH 




•iH •!-< 


••M .Jh 




t^-*^ 




;^*^ 


^-13 




rt 


U'^ 




*-tl3 


>-l-^ 




C^ ^ 




c8 ^ 


ce c^ 




'rl. 02 


O-^ 




O^ 


o^ 




bo^ 


boo 


a 
^ 


b[)<v 


boc? 




fl ^ 


rt ^ 


fl ^ 




>><p 


•fn O • 


•S o . 


•S o 




tt^ 


•d*^ be 




T3 «M be 


r^H-H 


bb 


CpP.r4 


s^.s 




g 


&^ 


^ 


J 


h^ 




n 








<x> 


o 




S a 


T-i ,-1 55 »C !-( 


CO 05 QO 


o 






M 


oo 



So§ 



(M ojoseo 

QO l*i>0> 



OOCO?DO(M i>OSQ0OS00O> 



"Si 

I" 

as 2 

O (1) •• o3 

is 22 

o 






fe W 



1 






o p 
^& 

22 I 

0) 

-t-3 -*-= -d 






O c3 

t^ ^ -d 



o 



558 



INDEX-DISTANCES, ETC, 



e8 









^ ^a 



^l 



I 






MhL( fin O 









-t-3 . 

^3 o 



^ ft 

c« w a? c^ 

M -fJ 'O 03 
1j O e^ CC 

S 02 a> " 
PL, c« 



-pee 



C«'3 CO 



g 



.ffi 




-o 












» 




£ 


fl 


->J 


o 











o 



o oo 



II 






•^ Oi •^ OS 

ooo oco 



o 
o 

ft 
o 
PI 



f3 



3 fe 



O 



ft 
o 



t I 



INDEX— DISTANCES, ETC. 



559 



g 



i-iOOOO (MC 



•wojoi ?oc<i«oi> Qa5»ftir 



'\n\noi c<iO(Mcc «oi>t-hcc 

4gi-HrHrH OOeClO lO(M-«*lkC 



?D ?D ?D ?D to «D «D ?D «D «0 ?0 



-^.2 



o o 



o 

(« 

O CO 

^5.1 



>I o f^ J ^ ^ <^ 



' o '^ 

.2 'S S .2 

Soi3E 



o) :=^ ii ♦^ "^ 

Art o.S^ rt 

o o t-> u t^ o 
OQOOoO 



o 
o 

4^ 
ee 

pH a rt 
S ^ j-i 

S (p aj 

O ^ fH 

iQOO 



560 



INDEX— DISTANCES. 



DISTANCES. 



Pars. 
Deflnition 625 

Affected X>y number of pairs 
in teams. _.. 610. 637, 638, 644, 702, 
704, 709, 711. 716-720, 738, 739, 
750, 753, 756, 760-762, 774-779, 
794, 822, 823, 825. 829, 833, 847, 
857, 869, 871, 872, 874, 898, 899, 
908,936,973,974 

Batterj^ without caissons . 823 

Between battalions, in two 
ormorelines 1021 

Between batteries in col- 
umn of platoons _ 857 

Between batteries in col- 
umn of sections 973 

Between carriages in ob- 
liquing 610 

Between pairs in team. ..51 3, 546 

Between platoons, column 
closed in mass 823 

Between ranks, at route 
step, dismounted 315 

Between ranks, detach- 
ment mounted. 442 

Between ranks, dis- 
mounted .59,63,299,315 

Between teams, in column 
of teams 559 

By the flank from battery .784, 785 

Caissons advance, number 
of pairs in team 762 

Close column 910 



Pars. 
Column of files at double 

time, dismounted _.. 299 

Column of files at route 

step, dismounted 315 

Column of files, mounted .361, 468 

Column of pairs 529 

Column of platoons march- 
ing by the flank 706, 707 

Exercising teams un- 
hitched 576 

Field and horse batteries 

together 829 

Plank column 709,711 

Flank line 706,707 

Formations of battery ...637-639 

In park 649 

Instruction of recruits at 

gallop 403 

Measurements of elements, 

etc., of battery 644 

Oblique in column .702, 704 

Oblique in line .738, 739 

Route marching 656 

Saluting 20,1007,1013 

Section in column, teams 

hitched 607 

Wheeling distance, batterv 
without caissons in col- 
umn of platoons 823 

When caissons are de- 
tached 639 



INTERVALS. 



Deflnition. 625 

Affected by number of pairs 
in teams .... 610, 637, 638, 644, 702, 
704,709, 711,716-720, 738, 739, 
750,753,756, 760-762,774^779, 
794,822,823, 825, 829, 833, 847, 
857, 869,871 ,872, 874, 898, 899, 
908, 936,973, 974, 

Between battalions. 1021 

Between batteries 833,847 

Between batteries in line 
of platoon columns 898 



974 



Between batteries without 
caissons 

Between detachments In 
line, mounted 478, 482 

Between files, dismount- 
ed 35,286,300 

Between files in instruc- 
tion, mounted 369 

Between horses, first in- 
struction _ 340 

Between men in column of 
files, dismounted 64 



INDEX— GENERAL RULES, ETC. 



661 



INTERVALS— Continued. 



Pars. 

Between men in ranks, dis- 
mounted 35,286,300 

Between pairs, instruction 
bypairs 515 

Between pairs, team in line 544 

Between teams in line of 
pairs 554 

Between teams, in line of 
teams 554 

By the fiank from bat- 
tery.. 784,785 

Column of platoons march- 
ing by the flank 706, 707 

Exercising team un- 
hitched 576 



Pars. 
Field and horse batteries 

together 829 

Flank column .709,711 

Flank line ....706,707 

For infantry between bat- 
teries 1059 

Formations of battery. ..637-639 

Inpark 649 

Line with intervals, be- 
tween pairs 515 

Measurement of elements, 

etc., of battery.. 644 

Oblique in column 702, 704 

Oblique in line... 738,739 

When caissons are de- 
tached 639 



GENERAL RULES AND RULES OF GENERAL APPLI- 
CATION. 



About at trot or gallop 599 

About face for officers and 

non-commissioned staff 988, 999 
Absent officers, etc., how 

replaced ...281,636 

Adjutant and sergeant- 
major 836,884,943 

After passing reviewing 

officer 1011 

Alignment of battery 651, 652 

Alignment of detachment 

on left file 477 

AliGcnment of drivers J* 545 

Alignment of pieces and 

limbers, in batteries . . .751, 752 

Alignments. .286. 341, 368. 449-452, 

454, 460, 843, 844 

Alignments, dismounted 35-40.61 

Allowance of forage and 

straw 1164 

Ammunition column 1 092 

Announcement of guide 

after oblique 51 , 533 

Announcement of guide, 
changing direction in col- 
umn of subdivisions 306 

9236 36 



Announcement of guide, 

oblique in column 305 

Application of text 627 

Armament of enlisted men, 
in the field and in garri- 
son ....633,634 

Arrangement of troops . .990, 994 

Artificers at review 1016 

Artillery always auxiliary 1050 

Artillery horses 1130-1158 

Artillery in the field.... 1050-1095 
Artillery with advance 

guard 1061 

"As you were " 12 

Attention, position of, dis- 
mounted . 13 

Attention, to resume, 
mounted and dismount- 
ed 352 

Authority of artillery com- 
mander . _ 1064 

Battery, dismounted 268 

Battery, drills with and 

without caissons 645 

Battery not to be broken 
up 1051 



662 



INDEX— GENERAL RULES, ETC. 



GENERAL RULES, ETC.— Continued. 



Pars. 

Battery of maneuver 623 

Battery, on footing for in- 
struction and war 645 

Battery with 3 caissons .817-819 

Brakes, use of ..117, 118, 125 

Breech-sight, use of, at 

drills.... 126 

By the numbers 7,8 

Cadence of steps... 22,23,31 

Caisson, corporal, when not 

mounted 630 

Caisson, one to each pla- 
toon .824,825 

Caissons with hattery 645 

Camping ...1115-1120 

Cannoneers 69 

Cannoneers, dress and 

equipments 68, 441 , 632 

Cannoneers of horse bat- 
teries, armament, etc 635 

Cannoneers moving piece 

byhand 89 

Cannoneers permanently 

assigned in war service . . 72 
Cannoneers, when and 

where mounted.. 631 

Captain dressing battery 

in column 882 

Captain, in firings 798 

Care and treatment of 

horses ..328,1155 

Care of breech of mechan- 
ism, etc .130,131 

Cease firing... 107, 109,111-113,115 

Changes of gait 593-596, 850 

Chiefs of artillery 1046, 1047 

Chiefs of sections, etc., 

mount, dismount, etc 555 

Chiefs of platoons, etc , 
mount and dismount in 

firings _ 799 

Chiefs of teams 555 

Close column, designated 
or leading battery in 

front 910 

Close column, distance be- 
tween batteries 910 



Pars. 
Close column, or in mass. . 910 
Close in mass, battery with- 
out caissons in column of 

platoons 823 

Close up ^ 299 

Correction of errors 12, 365 

Column of files 47, 64, 361 , 362 

Column of files, right or 

leftin front 314 

Column of platoons habit- 
ual formation for maneu- 
vering 673 

Commanders draw and re- 
turn saber when 1003 

Commanders facing line to 

give commands 1005 

Commanders, their staff, 
etc., turning out of col- 
umn 1002 

Command "platoon" by 

chief of platoon 679 

Commands... .9,827,828 

Commands of captain 841 

Commands by chiefs of 

teams 555 

Commands of gunners in 

horse batteries 759 

Commands, repetitionof .271, 628, 

992, 1004 

Composition of battalion.- 831 

Conductors. 374 

Countermarch at trot or 

gallop 615 

Cover for field artillery. 1096-1 102 

Depth. 625 

Depth of man in ranks, 

dismounted 45 

Designation of batteries 

changes, when. 885 

Designation of batteries in 

echelon... 934 

Designation of pairs in 

team. 543 

Designations of batteries. 834 
Designations of platoons 

and sections 275,624 

Detachment, mounted 442-477 



INDEX-GENERAL RULES, ETC. 



563 



GENERAL RULES, ETC.— Continued. 



Pars. 

Distance 625 

Distance between battal- • 

ions in two or more lines . 1 021 
Distances between ranks, 

dismounted 59,63 

Distances, etc., affected by 

number of pairs in teams 610, 
637, 638, 644, 702, 704,709,711, 
716-720, 738, 739, 750, 753, 756, 
760-762, 774-779, 794, 822, 823, 
825, 829, 833, 847, 857, 869,871, 
872, 874, 898, 899, 908, 936, 973, 
974. 

Double time 3 

Double time, saber and 

scabbard 294 

Draw and return saber, 

rear rank 283 

Dress and equipment of 

cannoneers 68, 441, 632 

Dressing detachment 324 

Drills begin and end at 

walk 327 

Drill, mounted, dummy 

cartridges, etc. , not used . 127 
Drill with one caisson to 

each platoon 824,825,975 

Drill without caissons... 820-825, 
974, 975 
Drivers dismounted, 

marching practice 618 

Dummy projectile and 

cartridge 124,127 

Elementary drills 10 

Equipment of horse 329-337 

Equipment of r e c ru its, 

school of the driver 502 

Escorts 1083 

Estimating distances 645 

Evening gun 1166 

Execution of commands 

repeated by majors and 

captains 1004 

Exercise in marching, driv- 
ers dismounted _ 618 

Facing distance 34,45 

Fallback 299 



Pars. 
Feeding horses 1164 

Field and horse batteries 

together 829 

Field batteries 1036-1038 

Field duties, instruction-. 645 
Field practice and actual 

service 830 

File-closers 280 

File-closers, manual of 

saber, etc 287 

Firings 180-193, 798, 799, 

959-968, 976 
Forge and battery wagon 

atreview 1016 

Formations for ceremo- 
nies 838 

Formations in battery, 
gait of limbers and cais- 
sons 747 

Formations under arms.- 283 

Front of battery 625 

Front of man in ranks, dis- 
mounted 45,59 

Front of piece, etc., lim- 
bered and unlimbered. . . 74 
Fuses, preparation of, etc, 129 
Gait, changes of.. 537-54 1,593-596 
Gait, formations in battery 

and limbering 747 

Gait of movements in in- 
struction 645 

Gaits of movements. 4,5 

Gaits, passing in review.. 1009 

Gaits, rate of speed 406 

Gather horses. 527 

Gathering horse 450 

General principles Light 
Artillery Drill Regula- 
tions _ 1-10 

General rules for cere- 
monies 990-993 

General rules for re- 
views 994-1012 

General rules for stable 

management. 1161 

Grooming 1163 

Grouping of recruits 10,58 



564 



INDEX— GENERAL RULES, ETC. 



GENERAL RULES, ETC.— Continued. 



Pars. 
Guide, announcement of, 
changing direction in 
column of subdivisions. 306 
Guide before forming front 

into line or battery 716 

Guide in about 691,694 

Guide in countermarch ... 693 
Guide in oblique march- 
ing . . 51 , 52, 67, 533, 534, 702 

Guide in passage of car- 
riages 681 

Guide in reverse .692, 694 

Guide in turnings, dis- 
mounted 55,56 

(lUide in wheeling 698 

Guide, oblique in column. 304, 305 

Guide of carriage 607 

Guide of column of teams. 565 
Guide of countermarch in 

column of platoons 695 

Guide of section 607 

Guide (right or left) 6 

Guides in simultaneous 

alignments 483 

Guides of battery, platoon. 

section or cai i-iage. .269, 270, 626 
Guides of detachment. 270, 325, 443 
Guides of squad, dis- 
mounted .- 41,60 

Guides of teams . _ .544, 555 

Guidon, in about 686 

Guidon, manual of 986,987 

Guidon, passage of car- 
riages ....680,683 

Guidon, post 672 

Gun detachment 69-72 

Gunner dressing detach- 
ment, piece limbered 78 

Gunner, loading and firing 110 
Gunners commanding de- 
tachments 324,477 

Gun pits ....1096-1102 

Guns, limbers, and cais- 
sons in action 1078 

Halt and march .._ 4^5,602 

Halt from rapid gait 5,596 

Harness, to fit 513 



Pars. 

Heavy artillery 1035, 1039 

Horse batteries .... 62?, 1036, 1037 
alignment of cannoneers 652 
cannoneers dismount.. 754, 
758, 789 
commands of gunners. 759 
holding borses in bat- 
tery 755 

limbering up, horse- 
holders and cannon- 
eers 765 

w^ho mounted, arma- 
ment of cannoneers . . 635 

Horse-holders 85, 92-94, 442 

Horses, care and treat- 
ment 328,1155 

Horses of chiefs of pla- 
toons, etc., when they dis- 
mount 643 

Incomplete files, dismount- 
ed 58,62 

Inspecting gun, in firings. 131 
Inspection of arms, dis- 
mounted 264 

Inspection of arms, mount- 
ed 432 

Inspection of pistol 263 

Inspection of quarters 1028 

Instruction in nomencla- 
ture and mechanism of 

piece, etc.. ...103-106 

Instruction, order and 

method 10, 12, 326, 502,645 

Instructors 10,12,826 

Interval.... .... 625 

Interval between files, dis- 
mounted 35, 64, 286,300 

Intervals between batter- 
ies at review 1021 

Intervals, etc., afifected by 
number of pairs in 

teams 610, 637,638, 

644, 702, 704, 709, 711, 716-720, 
738, 739, 750, 753, 756, 760-762, 
774- 779, 794, 822, 823, 825, 829, 
833, 847. 857, 869, 871, 872,874, 
898, 899, 908, 936, 973, 974. 



INDEX— GENERAL RULES, ETC. 



566 



GENERAL RULES, ETC.— Continued. 



Pars. 
Intervals for infantry be- 
tween batteries 1059 

Interval in ranks, dis- 
mounted 35, 286,300 

Length of drills, recruits.. 11 
Length of steps .... 22, 26 27, 28, 31 

Light artillery 1035 

Light artillery of corps re- 
viewed by itself 994 

Limber faced to the rear . . 99 
Limbering, piece loaded . . 193 
Limbering up, movements 

of limber _ 764 

Limbers and caissons faced 

to the rear 748 

Line of pairs or teams 554 

Machine batteries 1037,1095 

Management of vicious 

horses 1151 

Manual of the guidon.... 986, 987 

Manual of the knife 224 

Manual of the pistol 256-263 

Manual of the saber 209-223, 

419-425,441,976-982 
Manual of the saber and 

saber exercise 287 

Marches. ...1103-1119 

Marching, drivers dis- 
mounted, practice in 618 

March of flourishes, sound- 
ed 1008 

Marking points where col- 
umn changes direction 

at review 995 

Measurements of ele- 
ments, etc., of battery . 644 
Memorizing drill signals.. 1166 
Modifications of formation 

for reviews 1010 

Morning gun 1166 

Mountain batteries 1036 

Mounted drills begin and 

end at walk 327 

Mounted men, dress and 

equipment 632 

Mounted officers and non- 
commissioned officers - - - 630 



Pars. 
Mounted officers making 
about 994 

Movable pivot, dismounted 65 

Movable target 1054 

Movements at beginning 
and end of drill.. 369 

Movements at trot 378 

Movements from halt or 
marching 2 

Movements in column of 
batteries same as in col- 
umn of platoons 887 

Movements mounted, gaits 4,5 

Movements of battery dis- 
mounted, as in school of 
the soldier 292 

Movements of battery in 
line same as in column 
of platoons 737 

MoA^ements of close col- 
umn like column at full 
distance 915 

Movements of two or more 
detachments, as in single 
detachment 483 

Movements on foot in dou- 
ble time.. 3 

Movements toward either 
flank 1 

Move piece limbered, by 
hand 89,90 

Move piece unlimbered, by 
hand ....101,102 

Non-commissioned officers 
etc., manual of saber, 
etc...... 287 

Nos. 4 and 5 assist Nos.'2 
and 1, when 95 

Object of school of the sol- 
dier, dismounted. 11 

Oblique march from halt, ^ 
to resume 365 

Officers and others accom- 
panying reviewing offi- 
cer 998 

Officers, etc., mount and 
dismount 983 



566 



INDEX— GENERAL RULES, ETC. 



GENERAL RULES, ETC.— Continued. 



Pars. 
Officers, etc., when post 

change 654 

Order in battery 637-639 

Order in column 637-639 

Order in line .637-639 

Orders of fire 959 

Organization of light ar- 
tillery .1035-1049 

Park 649 

Peace footing, composition 

of battery.... 645 

Phases of a fight 1073 

Pieces in battery aligned 

on wheels 752 

Pieces in front at all cere- 
monies 992 

Pieces placed in front be- 
fore forming in battery. 746 

Platoon 621 

Platoon column defined. .892 

Platoon dismounted 267, 272 

Position of soldier, dis- 
mounted 13 

Position of soldier mount- 
ed, without saddle 343 

Position of soldier mount- 
ed, with saddle 393 

Position of stand to horse 508 
Posting of batteries and 

battalions 991 

Post of gunner, dressing 

detachment 78 

Post of instructor 502 

Post of reviewing officer. 996 
Posts of chiefs and in- 
structor 479-481 

I'osts of gunners comman- 
ding detachment 477 

Posts of mounted detach- 
ment, piece limbered 474 

Practice in giving com- 
mands 9 

Preparation for active 

service.. 645 

Preparation of fuzes 1 29 

Prepare .for action 1067 

Range and sighting drill . . 126 



Pars. 
Range finder, instruction 

with 645 

Rear guard 1081 

Recruits, faults in riding. . 383 
Recruits, first drills, load- 

ing,etc 125 

Remarks on service of the 

piece 124-132. 

Remarks on stretching 

traces 588 

Remarks on team drill 576 

Report of roll-calls 984 

Responsibility 646 

Resume attention,mounted 

and dismounted 352 

Reverse at trot or gallop. . 603 
Review before inspector .ju- 
nior to commanding offi- 
cer.... 1012 

Reviewing officer, post how 

marked. 996 

Reviewing officer, who ac- 
company 1000 

Review of division, etc 994 

Review of mixed command 994 

Right or left in front 314. 470, 

566, 655 
Right or left of battery .... 625 
Right or left of piece, etc. . 75 

Roll calls 984 

Route marches 656-658, 866 

Route step at ease 315,316 

Saber and scabbard, march- 
ing at double time 294 

Saber exercises . .225-255, 426-430, 
441 
Saber, manual and exer- 
cise 209-223,287 

Saber returned before dis- 
mounting 425 

Saber signals 9, 628, 647, 648 

Saber, when drawn, etc. 283. 633, 
645,838,839 
Saber, when hooked and 

unhooked 419 

Salute of the guidon. 986,987 

Salutes by guidon 1007 



INDEX— GENERAL RULES, ETC. 



50. 



GENERAL RULES, ETC.— Continued. 



Pars. 
Salutes, passing in re- 
view -. 1007,1009,1013 

Salutes returned by re- 
viewing officer 996 

Salutes to national and 

regimental colors, etc... 996 
Salute, when artillery is re- 
viewed with large bodies 
of infantry and cavalry . 999 
Salute with the hand for 

officers - 985 

Saluting distance....20, 1007. 1013 

Section --. 620,622 

Section, dismounted 266,273 

Service of the piece, re- 
marks .124-132 

Shoeing horses 1158 

Signal halt, and command 

by chief of platoon 679 

Signals and trumpet calls. 9,628 
Simultaneous and succes- 
sive moveme nts 450 

Single battery not to be 

broken up 1051 

Space occupied by pair 530 

Special instructions for of- 
ficers and non-commis- 
sioned staff officers 976-989 

Sponge the piece 119,132 

Spurs 399 

Squads, division of for rid- 
ing school 390,412,437 

Stables and stable du- 
ties 1159-1165 

Staff, etc., of officers accom- 
panying reviewing offi- 
cer. 998 

Staff, etc., when command- 
ers face line to give com- 
mands - 1006 

Staff officers draw and re- 
turn sabers, when 1003 

Staff officers riding around 

batteries 1000 

Staff of reviewing officer. . 997 
Stand to heel 354 



Pars. 

Stand to horse 338 

Stretching traces 588 

Subdivision of battalion 

foraction 1070 

Subdivision of battery for 

action 1066 

Successive formations 869 

Successive formations in 

battery, firing 772 

Successive formations in 
battery, adjutant and 

sergeant-major 943 

Supply of ammunition in 

action.. 1093 

Swimming horses 1149 

Target 126 

Team consists of 543 

Team drill, general re- 
mark 576 

Traces stretched after 

halting... 590 

Traces stretched before 

moving out 587 

Training horses 1131-1150 

Transportation of artil- 
lery 1121-1129 

Treatment and care of 

horses 328,1155 

Trumpet calls and saber 

signals, use of 9,628 

Trumpet calls, etc 1166 

Trumpeters of battalion, 

posts and duties 1008 

Unlimber by hand on 

heavy ground 95 

Use of trumpet calls and 

saber signals 9,628 

Vicious horses, manage- 
ment of 1151-1154 

War footing, composition 

of battery 645 

Watering horses 1165 

Wheeling distance, bat- 
tery without caissons in 

column of platoons 823 

Zones of fire action 1072 



I. ■■ -:> II 



I I u 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS^ 

021 653 752 A 












